diff options
Diffstat (limited to '22903.txt')
| -rw-r--r-- | 22903.txt | 17734 |
1 files changed, 17734 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/22903.txt b/22903.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..e519408 --- /dev/null +++ b/22903.txt @@ -0,0 +1,17734 @@ +The Project Gutenberg EBook of The Expedition to Borneo of H.M.S. Dido, by +Henry Keppel and James Brooke + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + + +Title: The Expedition to Borneo of H.M.S. Dido + For the Suppression of Piracy + +Author: Henry Keppel + James Brooke + +Release Date: October 6, 2007 [EBook #22903] + +Language: English + +Character set encoding: ASCII + +*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK EXPEDITION TO BORNEO *** + + + + +Produced by Jeroen Hellingman and the Online Distributed +Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net (This book was +produced from scanned images of public domain material +from the Google Print project.) + + + + + + + + + + THE EXPEDITION TO BORNEO + + OF + + H. M. S. DIDO + + FOR + + THE SUPPRESSION OF PIRACY: + + WITH EXTRACTS FROM + + THE JOURNAL OF JAMES BROOKE, ESQ., OF SARAWAK, + + (Now Agent for the British Government in Borneo). + + + + BY + + CAPTAIN THE HON. HENRY KEPPEL, R. N. + + + + + + NEW YORK: + + HARPER & BROTHERS, PUBLISHERS, + + 82 CLIFF STREET. + + 1846. + + + + + + + + + + + +TO + +THE EARL OF ALBEMARLE. + + +My dear Father, + +You could scarcely have anticipated, from my profession, the dedication +of a book in testimony of my gratitude and affection; but, having had +the good fortune to acquire the friendship of Mr. James Brooke, and +to be intrusted by him with a narrative of his extraordinary career +in that part of the world where the services of the ship I commanded +were required, I am not without a hope that the accompanying pages +may be found worthy of your approval, and not altogether uninteresting +to my country. + + +I am, my dear father, + +Your affectionate son, + +Henry Keppel. + +Droxford, January, 1846. + + + + + + + +PREFACE TO THE FIRST EDITION. + + +The visit of her majesty's ship Dido to Borneo, and her services +against the pirates, occupy comparatively so small a portion of this +volume, that some excuse may be necessary for its leading title. + +It was only by undertaking to make the account of them part of the +narrative, that I could prevail upon my friend Mr. Brooke to intrust +me with his Journal for any public object; and when I looked at his +novel and important position as a ruler in Borneo, and was aware how +much of European curiosity was attached to it, I felt it impossible +not to consent to an arrangement which should enable me to trace the +remarkable career through which he had reached that elevation. I hope, +therefore, to be considered as having conquered my own disinclination +to be the relater of events in which I was concerned, in order to +overcome the scruples which he entertained against being the author +of the autobiographical sketch, embracing so singular a portion of +his life, which I have extracted from the rough notes confided to me. + +That his diffidence in this respect was groundless will, I trust, +be apparent from these pages, however indifferently I may have +executed my unusual task, during a long homeward sea-voyage; and, +from the growing interest which has arisen throughout the country for +intelligence on the subject of Borneo and the adjacent archipelago, +I venture also to indulge the belief that the general information +will be deemed no unfit adjunct to the story of personal adventure. + + + + + +ADVERTISEMENT TO THE SECOND EDITION. + + +The text of this edition has been carefully revised, and has undergone +numerous verbal alterations; some portions of it have been transposed, +and a few additions have been made to the work. [In the American +edition, a few pages of matter, of no interest to American readers, +have been omitted from the Appendix.] + + + + + + +CONTENTS. + + + +CHAPTER I. + +The Chinese War having terminated, Captain Keppel in H.M.S. Dido +appointed to command of the Straits station.--Meeting with +Mr. Brooke.--Sketch of his life.--Mr. Brooke's outward voyage in the +Royalist.--Touch at Singapore.--Arrival off the coast of Borneo.--Land +at the island of Talang Talang.--Intercourse with the Bandar _Page_ 1 + +CHAPTER II. + +Progress: observations.--Description of the coast of Borneo.--Account, +&c. of a Pangeran.--Arrival at Sarawak.--Meetings with Rajah Muda +Hassim, and conversations.--The Town.--Interchange of visits and +presents.--Excursion to Dyak tribes.--Resources and commercial +products 14 + +CHAPTER III. + +Second Cruise: up the River Lunda.--The Sibnowan Dyaks.--Their +Town of Tungong.--Their Physical Proportions, and Words of their +Language.--Their Customs.--Skull-trophies.--Religious Ceremonies +and Opinions.--Their Ornaments.--Appearance of both Sexes.--Dress +and Morals.--Missionary Prospects of Conversion, and Elevation in +the Social Scale.--Government, Laws, and Punishments.--Dances.--Iron +Manufacturing.--Chinese Settlement.--Excursion continued 32 + +CHAPTER IV. + +Renewed intercourse with the Rajah.--Prospects of +trade.--Ourang-outang, and other animals.--The two sorts of +mias.--Description of the Rajah, his suite, and Panglimas, &c.--The +character of the natives.--Leave Sarawak.--Songi Dyaks.--Visit Seriff +Sahib.--Buyat tongue.--Attack by pirates.--Sail for Singapore 45 + +CHAPTER V. + +Summary of information obtained during this +visit to Borneo.--Geographical and topographical +observations.--Produce.--Various Dyak tribes.--Natural +history.--Language.--Origin of Races.--Sail from +Singapore.--Celebes.--Face of the country.--Waterfall 59 + +CHAPTER VI. + +Dain Matara, the Bugis.--Excursions in Celebes.--Dispute +with the Rajah's son-in-law.--Baboon shot.--Appearance of the +country.--Visit the Resident.--Barometrical observations.--The +Bugis.--Geography.--Coral reefs.--Visit the Rana of +Lamatte.--Population and products of the country 72 + +CHAPTER VII. + +Mr. Brooke's second visit to Sarawak.--The civil war.--Receives a +present of a Dyak boy.--Excursion to the seat of war.--Notices of +rivers, and settlements on their banks.--Deaths and burials.--Reasons +for and against remaining at Sarawak.--Dyak visitors.--Council of +war.--Why side with the Rajah.--Mode of constructing forts.--State +of enemy's and Rajah's forces.--Conduct of the war 87 + +CHAPTER VIII. + +Appearance of the country.--Progress of the rebel war.--Character of +the Sow and Singe Dyaks.--Their belief in augury.--Ruinous effects of +protracted warfare.--Cowardice and boasting of the Malays.--Council +of war.--Refuse to attack the enemy's forts.--Rebels propose to +treat.--The Malays oppose.--Set out to attack the rebels, but +frustrated by our allies.--Assailed by the rebels.--Put them to +flight.--Treat with them.--They surrender.--Intercede with the Rajah +for their lives.--Renewed treachery of the Malays 100 + +CHAPTER IX. + +Retrospect of Mr. Brooke's proceedings and prospects.--Visit of +a pirate fleet.--Intercourse with the chief leaders, and other +characteristic incidents.--War dances.--Use of opium.--Story of +Si Tundo.--Preparations for trading.--Conditions of the cession of +Sarawak 119 + +CHAPTER X. + +Obstacles in the way of coming to a satisfactory conclusion with Muda +Hassim.--The law of force and reprisal considered.--Capabilities of +Sarawak.--Account of Sarebus and Sakarran pirates.--Excursion up the +river.--Visit to the Singe Dyaks.--Description of Mr. Brooke's house at +Sarawak.--Circumstances relating to the wreck off Borneo Proper 135 + +CHAPTER XI. + +Return of the Royalist from Borneo Proper with intelligence of the +sufferers from the wreck of the Sultana.--Effect of the arrival +of the Diana on the negotiations for their release.--Outrage and +oppression of Macota.--Fate of the Sultana and her crew.--Mr. Brooke +made Rajah of Sarawak.--Liberation of rebel prisoners.--State of Dyak +tribes.--Court of justice opened.--Dyak burials, and respect for the +dead.--Malay cunning and treachery 151 + +CHAPTER XII. + +Reflections on the new year.--The plundered village, and other +wrongs.--Means for their suppression.--The new government proceeds +to act.--The constitution.--Preparations for an expedition +against the Sea Dyaks.--Form of a treaty.--Wreck of the Viscount +Melbourne.--Administration of justice.--Difficulties and dangers.--Dyak +troubles.--Views and arrangements of the Chinese.--Judicial +forms.--Wrongs and sufferings of the Lundus 164 + +CHAPTER XIII. + +Ascent of the left-hand river to the Stabad.--Remarkable cave in +the Tubbang.--Diamond works at Suntah.--Return.--Infested by Dyak +pirates.--A meeting of prahus, and fight.--Seriff Sahib's treatment of +the Suntah Dyaks.--Expedition against the Singe.--Their invasion of +the Sigos, and taking heads.--The triumph over these trophies.--Arms +and modes of war.--Hot and cold council-houses.--Ceremonies in the +installation of the Orang Kaya Steer Rajah.--Meeting of various Dyak +tribes.--Hostile plans of Seriff Sahib, and their issue.--Resolves +to proceed to Borneo Proper 183 + +CHAPTER XIV. + +Visit of Captain Elliott.--Mr. Brooke sails for Borneo +Proper.--Arrival.--Visited by leading men.--Condition of +the country.--Reception by the Sultan.--Objects in view.--The +different chiefs, and communications with them.--The Sultan and +his Pangerans.--Objects of the visit accomplished.--Return to +Sarawak.--Ceremonies of the cession.--Sail for Singapore 199 + +CHAPTER XV. + +Captain Keppel's voyage in the Dido with Mr. Brooke to Sarawak.--Chase +of three piratical prahus.--Boat expedition.--Action with the +pirates, and capture of a prahu.--Arrival at Sarawak.--Mr. Brooke's +reception.--Captain Keppel and his officers visit the Rajah.--The +palace and the audience.--Return royal visit to the Dido.--Mr. Brooke's +residence and household.--Dr. Treacher's adventure with one of the +ladies of Macota's harem.--Another boat affair with the pirates, +and death of their chief 213 + +CHAPTER XVI. + +The Rajah's letter to Captain Keppel, and his reply.--Prepares for +an expedition against the Sarebus pirates.--Pleasure excursion up the +river.--The Chinese settlement.--The Singe mountain.--Interior of the +residences.--Dyak festival of Maugut.--Relics.--Sporting.--Return to +Sarawak.--The expedition against Sarebus.--State and number of the +assailing force.--Ascent of the river.--Beauty of the scenery 228 + +CHAPTER XVII. + +Ascent of the river to Paddi.--Town taken and burnt.--Narrow +escape of a reinforcement of friendly Dyaks.--Night-attack by the +pirates.--Conference: they submit.--Proceed against Pakoo.--Dyak +treatment of dead enemies.--Destruction of Pakoo, and submission +of the pirates.--Advance upon Rembas.--The town destroyed: the +inhabitants yield.--Satisfactory effects of the expedition.--Death +of Dr. Simpson.--Triumphant return to Sarawak 242 + +CHAPTER XVIII. + +Captain Keppel sails for China.--Calcutta.--The Dido ordered to +Borneo again.--Arrival at Sarawak.--Effect of her presence at +Sarawak.--Great improvements visible.--Atrocities of the Sakarran +pirates.--Mr. Brooke's letter.--Captain Sir E. Belcher's previous +visit to Sarawak in the Samarang.--Coal found.--Second letter from the +Rajah Muda Hassim.--Expedition against the Sakarran pirates.--Patusen +destroyed.--Macota remembered, and his retreat burnt.--Further +fighting, and advance.--Ludicrous midnight alarm 257 + +CHAPTER XIX. + +Seriff Muller's town sacked.--Ascend the river in pursuit of +the enemy.--Gallant exploit of Lieutenant Wade.--His death and +funeral.--Interesting anecdote of him.--Ascend the Sakarran +branch.--Native boats hemmed in by pirates, and their crews +slaughtered to a man.--Karangan destroyed.--Captain Sir E. Belcher +arrives in the Samarang's boats.--Return to Sarawak.--New expedition +against Seriff Sahib and Jaffer.--Macota captured.--Flight of Seriff +Sahib.--Conferences.--Seriff Jaffer deposed.--Mr. Brooke's speech in +the native tongue.--End of the expedition, and return to Sarawak.--The +Dido sails for England 274 + +CHAPTER XX. + +Later portion of Mr. Brooke's Journal.--Departure of Captain Keppel, +and arrival of Sir E. Belcher.--Mr. Brooke proceeds, with Muda +Hassim, in the Samarang to Borneo.--Labuan examined.--Returns to +Sarawak.--Visit of Lingire, a Sarebus chief.--The Dyaks of Tumma +and Bandar Cassim.--Meets an assembly of Malays and Dyaks.--Arrival +of Lingi, as a deputation from the Sakarran chiefs.--The Malay +character.--Excursion up the country.--Miserable effects of excess +in opium-smoking.--Picturesque situation of the Sow village of +Ra-at.--Nawang.--Feast at Ra-at.--Returns home.--Conferences with +Dyak chiefs 290 + +CHAPTER XXI. + +Mr. Brooke's memorandum on the piracy of the Malayan Archipelago.--The +measures requisite for its suppression, and for the consequent +extension of British commerce in that important locality 302 + +CHAPTER XXII. + +Arrival of Captain Bethune and Mr. Wise.--Mr. Brooke appointed +her Majesty's Agent in Borneo.--Sails for Borneo Proper.--Muda +Hassim's measures for the suppression of piracy.--Defied by +Seriff Houseman.--Audience of the Sultan, Muda Hassim, and the +Pangerans.--Visit to Labuan.--Comparative eligibility of Labuan and +Balambangan for settlement.--Coal discovered in Labuan.--Mr. Brooke +goes to Singapore and visits Admiral Sir T. Cochrane.--The +upas-tree.--Proceeds with the Admiral to Borneo Proper.--Punishment +of Pangeran Usop.--The battle of Malludu.--Seriff Houseman obliged +to fly.--Visit to Balambangan.--Mr. Brooke parts with the Admiral, +and goes to Borneo Proper.--An attempt of Pangeran Usop defeated.--His +flight, and pursuit by Pangeran Budrudeen.--Triumphant reception of +Mr. Brooke in Borneo.--Returns to Sarawak 314 + +CHAPTER XXIII. + +Borneo, its geographical bounds and leading divisions.--British +settlements in 1775.--The province of Sarawak formally ceded by the +sultan in perpetuity to Mr. Brooke its present ruler.--General view +of the Dyaks, the aborigines of Borneo.--The Dyaks of Sarawak, and +adjoining tribes; their past oppression and present position 329 + +CHAPTER XXIV. + +Proposed British settlement on the northwest coast of Borneo, and +occupation of the island of Labuan.--Governor Crawfurd's opinions +thereon 345 + +Concluding Observations 355 + +Postscript to Second Edition 359 + +APPENDIX. + +I. Natural History. Mr. Brooke's report on the Mias 365 + +II. Philology 370 + +III. Proposed Exploring Expedition to the Asiatic Archipelago, by +James Brooke, Esq. 1838 373 + +IV. Sketch of Borneo, or Pulo Kalamantan, by J. Hunt, Esq. 381 + +V. Extracts from the late Mr. Williamson's Journal 409 + + + + + + + + + + +EXPEDITION TO BORNEO. + + +CHAPTER I. + + + The Chinese War having terminated, Captain Keppel in H.M.S. Dido + appointed to command of the Straits station.--Meeting with + Mr. Brooke.--Sketch of his life.--Mr. Brooke's outward voyage + in the Royalist.--Touch at Singapore.--Arrival off the coast of + Borneo.--Land at the island of Talang Talang.--Intercourse with + the Bandar. + + +At the conclusion of the Chinese war, the commander-in-chief, +Vice-Admiral Sir William Parker, ordered the Dido to the Malacca +Straits, a station in which was included the island of Borneo; +our principal duties being the protection of trade, and suppression +of piracy. + +In the month of March, 1843, while at Pinang, I received intimation +from the governor of various daring acts of piracy having been +committed near the Borneon coast on some vessels trading to +Singapore. I proceeded to that port; and, while undergoing a partial +refit, made the acquaintance of Mr. Brooke, who accepted my invitation +to return to Sarawak in the Dido; and I could not have visited Borneo +with a more agreeable or intelligent companion. + +The objects of Mr. Brooke in leaving England, the reasons which induced +him to settle at Sarawak, and the circumstances which have led him to +take so deep an interest in promoting the civilization and improving +the condition of the singular people whom he has adopted, form indeed +a story very unlike the common course of events in modern times. + +But before illustrating these circumstances from his own journals, +it may be acceptable to say a few words respecting the individual +himself, and his extraordinary career. I am indebted to a mutual +friend, acquainted with him from early years, for the following brief +but interesting outline of his life; and have only to premise, that +Mr. Brooke is the lineal representative of Sir Robert Vyner, baronet, +and lord mayor of London in the reign of Charles II.; Sir Robert had +but one child, a son, Sir George Vyner, who died childless, and his +estate passed to his heir-at-law, Edith, his father's eldest sister, +whose lineal descendant is our friend. Sir Robert was renowned for +his loyalty to his sovereign, to whom he devoted his wealth, and to +whose memory he raised a monument. + +"Mr. Brooke was the second, and is now the only surviving son of the +late Thomas Brooke, Esq., of the civil service of the East India +Company; was born on the 29th April, 1803; went out to India as +a cadet, where he held advantageous situations, and distinguished +himself by his gallantry in the Burmese war. He was shot through +the body in an action with the Burmese, received the thanks of the +government, and returned to England for the recovery of his prostrated +strength. He resumed his station, but shortly afterward relinquished +the service, and in search of health and amusement left Calcutta for +China in 1830. In this voyage, while going up the China seas, he saw +for the first time the islands of the Asiatic Archipelago--islands +of vast importance and unparalleled beauty--lying neglected, and +almost unknown. He inquired and read, and became convinced that +Borneo and the Eastern Isles afforded an open field for enterprise +and research. To carry to the Malay races, so long the terror of the +European merchant-vessels, the blessings of civilization, to suppress +piracy, and extirpate the slave-trade, became his humane and generous +objects; and from that hour the energies of his powerful mind were +devoted to this one pursuit. Often foiled, often disappointed, but +animated with a perseverance and enthusiasm which defied all obstacle, +he was not until 1838 enabled to set sail from England on his darling +project. The intervening years had been devoted to preparation and +inquiry; a year spent in the Mediterranean had tested his vessel, the +Royalist, and his crew; and so completely had he studied his subject +and calculated on contingencies, that the least sanguine of his friends +felt as he left the shore, hazardous and unusual as the enterprise +appeared to be, that he had omitted nothing to insure a successful +issue. 'I go,' said he, 'to awake the spirit of slumbering philanthropy +with regard to these islands; to carry Sir Stamford Raffles' views +in Java over the whole archipelago. Fortune and life I give freely; +and if I fail in the attempt, I shall not have lived wholly in vain.' + +"In the admiration I feel for him, I may farther be permitted to +add, that if any man ever possessed in himself the resources and +means by which such noble designs were to be achieved, that man was +James Brooke! Of the most enlarged views; truthful and generous; +quick to acquire and appreciate; excelling in every manly sport and +exercise; elegant and accomplished; ever accessible; and above all, +prompt and determined to redress injury and relieve misfortune, he +was of all others the best qualified to impress the native mind with +the highest opinion of the English character. How he has succeeded, +the influence he has acquired, and the benefits he has conferred, +his own uncolored narrative, contained in the following pages, best +declares, and impresses on the world a lasting lesson of the good +that attends individual enterprise, when well directed, of which +every Englishman may feel justly proud." + +Such is the sketch of Mr. Brooke by one well competent to judge of +that to which he bears witness. In pursuance of the mission thus +eloquently and truly described, that gentleman left his native shores +in the year 1838, in his yacht the Royalist schooner, of 142 tons, +belonging to the Royal Yacht Squadron, with a crew of upward of twenty +men. His general views were distinct and certain; but the details +into which they shaped themselves have been so entirely guided by +unforeseen occurrences, that it is necessary to look to his first +visit to Borneo for their explanation; and in order to do so, I must +refer to his private journal, which he kindly confided to me, after I +had in vain tried to persuade him to take upon himself the publication +of its contents, so rich in new and interesting intelligence. + + + + + +EXTRACTS FROM Mr. BROOKE'S JOURNAL. + +"I had for some years turned my mind to the geography of the +Indian Archipelago, and cherished an ardent desire to become better +acquainted with a country combining the richest natural productions +with an unrivaled degree of luxuriant beauty. Circumstances for a +time prevented my entering on this field for enterprise and research; +and when the barriers were removed, I had many preparations to make +and some difficulties to overcome. + +"In an expedition conducted by government, the line of discipline is +so distinctly understood, and its infringement so strictly punished, +that small hazard is incurred of any inconvenience arising from such +a source. With an individual, however, there is no such assurance, +for he cannot appeal to the articles of war; and the ordinary legal +enactments for the protection of the mariner will not enable him to +effect objects so far removed beyond the scope of the laws. I was +fully aware that many would go, but that few might stay; for while a +voyage of discovery _in prospectu_ possesses great attractions for the +imagination, the hardship, danger, and thousand other rude realities, +soon dissipate the illusion, and leave the aspirant longing for that +home he should never have quitted. In like manner, seamen can be +procured in abundance, but cannot be kept from desertion whenever any +matter goes wrong; and the total previous ignorance of their characters +and dispositions renders this more likely, as the admission of one +'black sheep' goes far to taint the entire crew. + +"These considerations fully convinced me that it was necessary to +form _men_ to my purpose, and, by a line of steady and kind conduct, +to raise up a personal regard for myself and attachment for the +vessel, which could not be expected in ordinary cases. In pursuance +of this object, I was nearly three years in preparing a crew to my +mind, and gradually moulding them to consider the hardest fate or +misfortune under my command as better than the ordinary service in a +merchant-vessel. How far I have succeeded remains yet to be proved; +but I cannot help hoping that I have raised the character of many, +and have rendered all happy and contented since they have been with +me; and certain am I that no men can do their duty more cheerfully +or willingly than the crew of the Royalist. + +"I may pass over in silence my motives for undertaking so long and +arduous a voyage; and it will be sufficient to say, that I have been +firmly convinced of its beneficial tendency in adding to knowledge, +increasing trade, and spreading Christianity. The prospectus +of the undertaking was published in the _Geographical Journal_, +vol. viii. part iii., of 1838, when my preparations for sea were +nearly complete. I had previously avoided making any public mention +of my intentions, for praise before performance is disgusting; and +I knew I should be exposed to prying curiosity, desirous of knowing +what I did not know myself. + +"On the 27th October, 1838, the Royalist left the river; and, after +a succession of heavy gales, finally quitted the land on the 16th +December. I may here state some farther particulars, to enable my +readers to become better acquainted with her and her equipment. The +Royalist, as already noticed, belonged to the Royal Yacht Squadron, +which in foreign ports admits her to the same privileges as a +man-of-war, and enables her to carry a white ensign. She sails fast, +is conveniently fitted up, is armed with six six-pounders, a number +of swivels, and small arms of all sorts, carries four boats, and +provisions for four months. Her principal defect is being too sharp +in the floor, which, in case of taking the ground, greatly increases +the risk; but I comfort myself with the reflection that a knowledge of +this will lead to redoubled precaution to prevent such a disaster. She +is withal a good sea-boat, and as well calculated for the service as +could be desired. + +"Most of her hands had been with me for three years or upward, +and the rest were highly recommended. They are, almost without +exception, young, able-bodied, and active--fit in all respects for +enduring hardship and privation, or the more dangerous reverse of +self-indulgence, and willing to follow the fortunes of the Royalist and +her commander through all the various shades of good or evil fortune +which may betide. A fine, though slow passage took us to Rio Janeiro, +which presents features of natural beauty rarely equaled. The weather +during our stay was hot in the extreme, and very wet, which marred, +in some degree, the satisfaction I should otherwise have enjoyed in +wandering about this picturesque country. I passed ten days, however, +very agreeably, and departed with some regret from this brief visit to +America and from my friends (if they will so allow me to call them) +on board H.M.S. Calliope. I must not omit to mention that, during my +stay, I visited a slaver, three of which (prizes to our men-of-war) +lay in the harbor. It is a most loathsome and disgusting sight. Men, +women, and children--the aged and the infant--crowded into a space as +confined as the pens in Smithfield, not, however, to be released by +death at the close of the day, but to linger, diseased and festering, +for weeks or months, and then to be discharged into perpetual and +hopeless slavery. I wish I could say that our measures tended toward +the abolition of this detestable traffic; but from all that I could +learn and observe, I am forced to confess that the exertions made to +abolish slavery are of no avail in this country, and never will be +till harsher means are resorted to. + +"There are points of view in which this traffic wears a more cheering +aspect; for any one comparing the puny Portuguese or the bastard +Brazilian with the athletic negro, cannot but allow that the ordinary +changes and chances of time will place this fine country in the hands +of the latter race. The negro will be fit to cultivate the soil, and +will thrive beneath the tropical sun of the Brazils. The enfeebled +white man grows more enfeebled and more degenerate with each succeeding +generation, and languishes in a clime which nature never designed him +to inhabit. The time will come when the debased and suffering negroes +shall possess this fertile land, and when some share of justice shall +be awarded to their cheerful tempers and ardent minds. + +"Quitting Rio on the 9th, we cruised for a day or two with +H.M.S. Calliope and Grecian; and on the 11th, parting company, +prosecuted our voyage for the Cape of Good Hope." + +The next notice runs thus:--"The aspect of Tristan d'Acunha is bold +even to grandeur. The peak, towering upward of eight thousand feet +above the sea, is inferior only to Teneriffe, and the precipitous +cliffs overhanging the beach are a fitting base for such a mountain. I +regretted not being able to examine this island for many reasons, but +principally, perhaps, on account of the birds of the South Atlantic +I had hoped to collect there, many of which are so often seen by +voyagers, yet so little known and so vaguely described. + +"On the 29th March, after being detained a fortnight [at the Cape of +Good Hope] by such weather as no one could regret, we sailed again +in a southeaster, and after a passage of six weeks reached Java Head. + +"I had been suffering for some time under a severe indisposition, +and consequently hailed the termination of our voyage with double +satisfaction, for I greatly required rest and quiet--two things +impossible to be had on ship-board. From Java Head we glided slowly +through Prince's Strait, and coasting along the island, dropped our +anchor in Anjer Roads. The scenery of this coast is extremely lovely, +and comprises every feature which can heighten the picturesque; noble +mountains, a lake-like sea, and deeply indented coast-line, rocks, +islets, and, above all, a vegetation so luxuriant that the eye never +wearies with gazing on its matchless tints. Anjer combines all these +beauties, and possesses the incalculable advantage of being within a +moderate ride of the refreshing coolness of the hills. We here procured +water and provisions in abundance, being daily visited by crowds of +canoes filled with necessaries or curiosities. Fowls, eggs, yams, +cocoa-nuts, and sweet potatoes, were mixed with monkeys of various +sorts, paroquets, squirrels, shells, and similar temptations on the +stranger's purse or wardrobe. Great was the bartering for old clothes, +handkerchiefs, and hats; and great the number of useless and noisy +animals we received in exchange. Great, too, was the merriment aboard, +and the excitement when the canoes first came. The transition from +the monotony of a sea-life to the loquacious bustle of barter with +a half-civilized people is so sudden, that the mind at once feels in +a strange land, and the commonest productions proclaim the luxuriant +climes of the tropics. Until this impression is made, we hardly know +why we have been sailing onward for four months past, so quiet and +unvarying is the daily tenor of a life aboard ship. + +"_1st June, Singapore._--On reaching Singapore I was most hospitably +received by the kind inhabitants, and took up my abode with +Mr. Scott. The quiet and repose of my present life, the gentle ride +in the cool of the morning and evening drive after an early dinner, +are already restoring my shattered strength, and I trust soon to be +enabled to prosecute my farther undertaking. In the mean time the +Royalist is undergoing a refit after her passage, and, like her owner, +is daily improving in good looks. + +"I could say much of Singapore, for it is the pivot of the liberal +system in the Archipelago, and owes its prosperity to the enlightened +measures of Sir Stamford Raffles. The situation is happily chosen, +the climate healthy, the commerce unshackled, and taxation light; and +these advantages have attracted the vessels of all the neighboring +nations to bring their produce to this market in order to exchange +it for the manufactures of England. + +"The extent of the island is about 27 miles by 11 broad. The town +of Singapore stands on the south side, facing the shores of Battam, +and is intersected by a salt-water stream, which separates the native +town from the pleasant residences of the European inhabitants; the +latter stretch along the beach, and cover a space which extends to the +foot of a slight eminence, on which stands the governor's house. Off +the town lie the shipping of various countries, presenting a most +picturesque and striking appearance. The man-of-war, the steamer, +and the merchant-vessels of the civilized world, contrast with the +huge, misshapen, and bedizened arks of China! The awkward prahus +of the Bugis are surrounded by the light boats of the island. The +semi-civilized Cochin-Chinese, with their vessels of antiquated +European construction, deserve attention from this important step +toward improvement; and the rude prahus of some parts of Borneo claim +it from their exhibiting the early dawn of maritime adventure. + +"_27th July._--After various causes of delay I sailed on this day from +Singapore. When I contrast my state of health at my arrival with what +it now is, I may well be thankful for the improvement. Every kindness +and hospitality has been shown me. + +"On Saturday at noon we got under weigh with a light breeze, and +stood down the Strait on our way to Borneo. + +"_28th._--In the morning we were well out in the China Sea, running +six knots per hour, N. 3/4 E. Lines of discolored water were seen +about us, and about 11 A.M. we entered a field some two miles long +and 400 yards wide. The consistence of this dirty mass was that of +pea-soup, which it likewise resembled in color; and I doubt not the +white water of the China Sea (vide _Nautical Magazine_) is referable +to this appearance seen in the night, as may the report of rocks, +&c. The Malays on board called it 'sara,' and declared it to come from +the rivers. On examination it appeared, when magnified, somewhat like +a grain of barley or corn. The particles were extremely minute, soft, +and, when rubbed between the fingers, emitted a strong smell like +paint-oil; a potent odor arose while passing through the thick patch. + +"It may not be superfluous to recount here the preparations I have +made for this trip to Borneo, or my intentions when I get there. Borneo +Proper, once the seat of piracy, which few vessels could approach with +safety, is now under the sway of the Rajah Muda Hassim. The character +given this rajah by many persons who know and have traded with him is +good, and he is spoken of as generous and humane, and greatly inclined +to the English. These reasons have induced me to abandon my intention +of proceeding direct to Malludu Bay, and during the season of the +southwest monsoon to confine myself principally to the northwest +coast. Muda Hassim being at present reported to be at Sarawak, I +propose, after taking a running sketch of the coast from Tanjong Api, +to enter the river of that name, and proceed as far as the town. + +"I believe I have availed myself of every means within my reach +to render my visit agreeable to the rajah. I carry with me many +presents which are reported to be to his liking; gaudy silks of +Surat, scarlet cloth, stamped velvet, gunpowder, &c., beside a large +quantity of confectionery and sweets, such as preserved ginger, jams, +dates, syrups, and to wind up all, a huge box of China toys for his +children! I have likewise taken coarse nankeen to the amount of 100_l._ +value, as the best circulating medium in the country. Beside the +above mentioned preparations, I carry letters from the government of +Singapore, to state, as far as can be done, the objects of my voyage, +and to caution the rajah to take every care of my safety and that +of my men. The Board of Commerce have at the same time entrusted me +with a letter and present to him, to thank him for his humanity to +the crew of an English vessel wrecked on this coast. The story, as +I had it from the parties shipwrecked, is highly creditable to his +humanity. The vessel, called the Napoleon, was wrecked on the bar of +Sarawak river in the northeast monsoon. The people were saved with +difficulty, and remained in the jungle, where they were after a time +discovered by some Malays. Muda Hassim, on receiving intelligence of +this, sent down and brought them to his town, collected all that he +could recover from the wreck, clothed them handsomely, and fed them +well for several months, and, on an opportunity arriving, sent them +back to Singapore free of expense. + +"At the same time, however, that I have prepared to meet the natives +as friends, I have not neglected to strengthen my crew, in case I +should find them hostile. Eight stout men of the Ourang Laut, or men of +the sea (Malays), have been added to the force. They are an athletic +race, cheerful and willing; and though not seaman in our sense of the +term, yet well calculated for this expedition. They pull a good oar, +and are invaluable in saving the Europeans the exposure consequent +to wooding and watering. They possess, likewise, the knowledge of +the jungle and its resources, and two of them have before been to +Sarawak and along the coast. Beside these, a young gentleman named +Williamson accompanies me as interpreter; and I have fortunately met +with a medical gentleman, Mr. Westermann, a Dane, who is surgeon for +this voyage, Mr. Williams having left me at Singapore. With these +arrangements I look without apprehension to the power of the Malays; +and without relaxing in measures of the strictest vigilance, I shall +never sleep less soundly when it comes to my turn so to do. + +"_August 1st._--I am, then, at length, anchored off the coast of +Borneo! not under very pleasant circumstances, for the night is pitchy +dark, with thunder, lightning, rain, and squalls of wind. + +"_2d._--Squally bad night. This morning, the clouds clearing away, was +delightful, and offered for our view the majestic scenery of Borneo. At +nine got under weigh, and ran in on an east-by-south course 4 1/2 or +5 miles toward Tanjong Api. Came to an anchor about five miles from +the land, and dispatched the boat to take sights ashore, in order to +form a base-line for triangulation. The scenery may really be called +majestic. The low and wooded coast about Tanjong Api is backed by +a mountain called Gunong [1] Palo, some 2000 feet in height, which +slopes down behind the point and terminates in a number of hummocks, +showing from a distance like islands. + +"The coast, unknown, and represented to abound in shoals and reefs, is +the harbor for pirates of every description. Here, every man's hand is +raised against his brother man; and here sometimes the climate wars +upon the excitable European, and lays many a white face and gallant +heart low on the distant strand. + +"_3d._--Beating between Points Api and Datu. The bay, as far as we +have seen, is free from danger; the beach is lined by a feathery row +of beautiful casuarinas, and behind is a tangled jungle, without fine +timber; game is plentiful, from the traces we saw on the sand; hogs in +great numbers, troops of monkeys, and the print of an animal with cleft +hoofs, either a large deer, tapir, or cow. We saw no game save a tribe +of monkeys, one of which, a female, I shot, and another quite young, +which we managed to capture alive. The captive, though the young of +the black monkey, is grayish, with the exception of his extremities, +and a stripe of black down his back and tail. Though very young, he +has already taken food, and we have some hope of preserving his life. + +"We witnessed, at the same time, an extraordinary and fatal leap +made by one of these monkeys. Alarmed by our approach, he sprang +from the summit of a high tree at the branch of one lower, and at +some distance. He leaped short, and came clattering down some sixty +or seventy feet amid the jungle. We were unable to penetrate to the +spot on account of a deep swamp to ascertain his fate. + +"A rivulet flows into the sea not far from where we landed; the water +is sweet, and of that clear brown color so common in Ireland. This +coast is evidently the haunt of native prahus, whether piratical or +other. Prints of men's feet were numerous and fresh, and traces of +huts, fires, and parts of boats, some of them ornamented after their +rude fashion. A long pull of five miles closed the day. + +"_Sunday, 4th._--Performed divine service myself! manfully overcoming +that horror which I have to the sound of my own voice before an +audience. In the evening landed again more to the westward. Shore +skirted by rocks; timber noble, and the forest clear of brushwood, +enabling us to penetrate with ease as far as caution permitted. Traces +of wild beasts numerous and recent, but none discovered. Fresh-water +streams, colored as yesterday, and the trail of an alligator from +one of them to the sea. This dark forest, where the trees shoot up +straight and tall, and are succeeded by generation after generation +varying in stature, but struggling upward, strikes the imagination +with pictures trite yet true. Here the hoary sage of a hundred years +lies moldering beneath your foot, and there the young sapling shoots +beneath the parent shade, and grows in form and fashion like the +parent stem. The towering few, with heads raised above the general +mass, can scarce be seen through the foliage of those beneath; but +here and there the touch of time has cast his withering hand upon +their leafy brow, and decay has begun his work upon the gigantic and +unbending trunk. How trite and yet how true! It was thus I meditated +in my walk. The foot of European, I said, has never touched where +my foot now presses--seldom the native wanders here. Here I indeed +behold nature fresh from the bosom of creation, unchanged by man, and +stamped with the same impress she originally bore! Here I behold God's +design when He formed this tropical land, and left its culture and +improvement to the agency of man. The Creator's gift as yet neglected +by the creature; and yet the time may be confidently looked for when +the axe shall level the forest, and the plow turn the ground. + +"_6th._--Made sail this morning, and stood in for an island called +Talang Talang, anchoring about eight miles distant, and sending a +boat to take correct observations for a base-line. + +"Our party found Malays of Sarawak on the island, who were civil +to them, and offered to conduct us up to-morrow, if we wanted their +assistance. The pirates, both Illanuns and Dyaks, have been gone from +the bay but a few days; the former seaward, the latter up the rivers. + +"_7th._--Morning calm. In the afternoon got under weigh, and anchored +again near the island of Talang Talang; the smaller one a conical +hill bearing south. The Bandar [2] of the place came off in his canoe +to make us welcome. He is a young man sent by Rajah Muda Hassim to +collect turtles' eggs, which abound in this vicinity, especially +on the larger island. The turtles are never molested, for fear of +their deserting the spot; and their eggs, to the amount of five or +six thousand, are collected every morning and forwarded at intervals +to Sarawak as articles of food. + +"Our visitor was extremely polite, and, in common with other Asiatics, +possessed the most pleasing and easy manners. He assured us of a +welcome from his rajah, and, in their usual phrase, expressed himself +that the rajah's heart would dilate in his bosom at the sight of +us. His dress consisted of trowsers of green cloth, a dark green +velvet jacket, and his sarong round his waist, thrown gracefully +over two krisses, which he wore at his girdle. His attendants were +poorly attired, and mostly unarmed--a proof of confidence in us, and +a desire to assure us of his own friendly intentions. I treated him +with sweetmeats and syrup, and of his own accord he took a glass of +sherry, as did his chief attendant. On his departure he was presented +with three yards of red cloth, and subsequently with a little tea +and gunpowder." + + + + +CHAPTER II. + + Progress: observations.--Description of the coast of + Borneo.--Account, &c. of a Pangeran.--Arrival at Sarawak.--Meetings + with Rajah Muda Hassim, and conversations.--The Town.--Interchange + of visits and presents--Excursion to Dyak tribes.--Resources and + commercial products. + + +I Resume Mr. Brooke's Journal, which requires no introductory remark. + +"_Aug. 8th._--A cloudy day, preventing us from taking our wished-for +observations. I made a boat-excursion round the two islands. The north +one is somewhat the larger; the southern one, running north and south, +consists of two hills joined by a low and narrow neck of land. The +water between these islands is deep, varying from seven to six fathoms; +but between the smaller one and the main there are rocks and reefs; +and though a passage may exist, it would not be advisable for a vessel +to try it. These two small islands possess all the characteristic +beauties of the clime. Formed of brown granite, with a speck of +white sandy beach, and rising into hills covered with the noblest +timber, wreathed with gigantic creepers. Cream-colored pigeons flit +from tree to tree, and an eagle or two soared aloft watching their +motions. Frigate-birds are numerous; and several sorts of smaller +birds in the bush, difficult to get at. A small species of crocodile, +or alligator, was likewise seen: but we were not fortunate enough +to shoot one. The natives, when asked whether they were alligators, +answered in the negative, calling them crocodiles. The tides appear +to be as irregular as tides usually are in a deep bay. The rise and +fall of the tide is about fifteen feet. + +"_9th._--After breakfast this morning took our sights, and at twelve +o'clock the latitude of the smaller Talang Talang and the ship for +a base-line. We yesterday took the same base-line by sound, firing +alternately three guns from the vessel and three from the shore. + +"_10th._--A squall from the northward brought in a chopping sea in +the morning. We were favored with a visit from another native party, +but the chief was in every respect inferior to our first acquaintance, +Bandar Dowat. + +"_11th Sunday._--Got under weigh early, after a night of torrents of +rain. The breeze being directly out of Lundu river, I stood as near +it as I could, and then bore away for Santobong, in order to reach +Sarawak. From Gunong Gading the coast gradually declines, and forms +two points. The first of these is Tanjong Bloungei, near which, on the +right hand, runs a small river, of the same name. The next point is +Tanjong Datu, which shows prominently from most parts of the bay. From +Tanjong Datu the coast recedes into a bay, and again forms a low point, +which I have christened Tanjong Lundu. The river Lundu disembogues +itself into the bay just beyond the point of the same name; and the +land on its far bank forms a bight of considerable depth. The Lundu is +a barred river with but little water; though, judging from the opening, +it is by no means small. Our pilots inform me at the same time, +however, that within the bar there is considerable depth of water. + +"From the Sungei Lundu the land rises behind a wooded beach. The first +hill, which may be said to form the larboard entrance of the river, +is peaked, and called Sumpudin, and near it is a barred river of the +same name. This range of high land runs some distance; and near its +termination is the river Tamburgan. The low coast runs into another +bight; and the first opening after the termination of the high land is +the mouth of the river Seboo. Then comes another river; after which +the land rises into hills, gradually larger, till they terminate in +a round-topped hill, which forms the starboard entrance (going in) +of the Sarawak river. + +"This river discharges itself at the east corner of the bay; and its +locality is easily recognized by the highest peak of Santobong, which +towers over its left bank, close to the entrance. A ship rounding Datu +will readily perceive the high land of Santobong, showing like a large +island, with another smaller island at its northern extremity. Both +these, however, are attached to the main: and the northernmost point, +called Tanjong Sipang, is distinguished by two peaks, like horns, one +small, the other larger. Steer from Datu a direct course toward this +high land, and when within a mile and a half or two miles of the shore, +haul in along the land, as there is a sand nearly dry at low water on +the starboard hand, stretching from the shore to the Saddle island, +or Pulo Satang. The leading mark to clear this sand is to bring the +hollow formed between the round hill at the right entrance of the +Sarawak river and the next hill a-head, and as you approach the river's +mouth, steer for a small island close to the shore, called Pulo Karra, +or Monkey Island. These marks will conduct you over a shoal with 1/4 +three, the least depth at high water; you will then deepen your water, +and keep away for the low green point on the far side of the river, +edging gradually in; and when you are some distance from the opposite +low point on the port hand, cross the bar in three fathom (high water) +nearly in the center of the river. You must not, however, encroach on +the larboard side. The bar is narrow, and just within is 7 and 7 1/2 +fathom, where we are at present anchored. The scenery is noble. On our +left hand is the peak of Santobong, clothed in verdure nearly to the +top; at his foot a luxuriant vegetation, fringed with the casuarina, +and terminating in a beach of white sand. The right bank of the river +is low, covered with pale green mangroves, with the round hill above +mentioned just behind it. Santobong peak is 2050 feet, or thereabouts, +by a rough trigonometrical measurement. + +"_12th._--Lay at anchor; took angles and observations, and shot in +the evening without any success. There is a fine species of large +pigeon of a gray color I was desirous of getting, but they were too +cunning. Plenty of wild hogs were seen, but as shy as though they +had been fired at all their lives. When the flood made, dispatched +my gig for Sarawak, in order to acquaint the rajah of my arrival. + +"_13th._--Got under weigh, and in the second reach met our gig +returning, followed by a large canoe, with a Pangeran of note to +welcome us. We gave him a salute of five guns; while he, on his part, +assured us of his rajah's pleasure at our arrival, and his own desire +to be of service. With the Pangeran Oula Deen (or Illudeen, anglice +Aladdin), came the rajah's chief writer, his shroff, a renegade Parsee, +a war-captain, and some others, beside a score of followers. They +made themselves much at home, ate and drank (the less scrupulous +took wine), and conversed with ease and liveliness. No difference +can be more marked than between the Hindoostani and the Malay. The +former, though more self-possessed and polished, shows a constraint +in manners and conversation, and you feel that his training has made +him an artificial character. The Malay, on the contrary, concealing as +well the feelings upper-most in his mind, is lively and intelligent, +and his conversation is not confined to a dull routine of unmeaning +compliments. + +"_August 13th._--The Pangeran spoke to me of some ship-captain who +was notoriously cruel to his Lascars, and insolent in his language +to the Malays. He was murdered by his crew, and the circumstance was +related to me as though I was to approve the act! 'No Malay of Borneo +(added the Pangeran) would injure a European, were he well treated, and +in a manner suitable to his rank.' And I am sure such a declaration, +in a limited sense, is consonant with all known principles of human +nature, and the action of the passions and feelings. + +"Our Pangeran was quite the gentleman, and a manly gentleman too. His +dress was a black velvet jacket, trimmed with gold lace, and trowsers +of green cloth, with a red sarong and kris. He was the only one of +the party armed while aboard. The rest were good, quiet men, and one +or two of them very intelligent. They took their leave of us to get +back to the town at sunset; but the ebb making, returned and stayed +until twelve at night, when the tide turned in their favor. We had +some difficulty in providing beds. The Pangeran slept in my cabin, +and the rest were distributed about on couches or carpets. + +"_August 14th._--Got under weigh with the flood, and, favored by a +light breeze, proceeded up the river nearly as far as the town. From +the ignorance of the pilots, however, we grounded on a rock in the +middle of the river in 1 1/2 fathom water, and it took us an hour +to heave the vessel off by the stern. Had the tide been falling, we +should have been in a critical situation, as the rock is dry at low +water; but as it was, we received no damage. Shortly after getting +off, several boats with assistance came from the place, dispatched +in haste by the rajah. The intention was kind, though we needed not +the aid. Being dark, we dropped anchor in 5 1/2 fathom, about 1 1/2 +mile from the town. + +"_15th._--Anchored abreast of Sarawak at seven, and saluted the rajah +with twenty-one guns, which were returned with eighteen from his +residence. The rajah's own brother, Pangeran Mahammed, then saluted +the vessel with seven guns, which were returned. Having breakfasted, +and previously intimated our intention, we pulled ashore to visit the +great man. He received us in state, seated in his hall of audience, +which outside is nothing but a large shed, erected on piles, but +within decorated with taste. Chairs were placed on each side of the +ruler, who occupied the head seat. Our party were placed on one hand; +on the other sat his brother Mahammed, and Macota and some others of +his principal chiefs, while immediately behind him his twelve younger +brothers were seated. + +"The dress of Muda Hassim was simple, but of rich material; and most +of the principal men were well, and even superbly, dressed. His +countenance is plain, but intelligent and highly pleasing, and +his manners perfectly elegant and easy. His reception was kind, +and, I am given to understand, highly flattering. We sat, however, +trammeled with the formality of state, and our conversation did not +extend beyond kind inquiries and professions of friendship. We were +presented with tobacco rolled up in a leaf, each about a foot long, +and tea was served by attendants on their knees. A band played wild and +not unmusical airs during the interview, and the crowd of attendants +who surrounded us were seated in respectful silence. After a visit +of half an hour, we rose and took our leave. + +"Sarawak is but an occasional residence of the Rajah Muda Hassim, +and he is now detained here by a rebellion in the interior. On my +inquiring whether _the war_ proceeded favorably, he replied that there +was _no war_, but merely _some child's play among his subjects_. From +what I hear, however, from other quarters, it is more serious than he +represents it; and hints have been thrown out that the rajah wishes +me to stay here _as a demonstration_ to intimidate the rebels. We +shall see. + +"The town consists of a collection of mud huts erected on piles, and +may contain about 1500 persons. The residences of the rajah and his +fourteen brothers occupy the greater part, and their followers are +the great majority of the population. When they depart for Borneo (or +Bruni), the remainder must be a very small population, and apparently +very poor. The river affords a few fish; but there is little sign +of cultivation either of rice or other grain. Fowls and goats seem +the only other means of subsistence of these people. The geological +features of the country are easily described. Vast masses of granite +rock are scattered along the coast; for instance, Gunong Poe, Gading, +Santobong, &c. &c., which have evidently at some former period been +detached islands. The spaces between these granite masses is now filled +in with alluvial soil, intersected in every direction with rivers and +streams, and on the low alluvial bank of the Sarawak river stands this +little town. The distance from the sea is about twenty-five miles, +through banks of mangrove and the Nepa palm, until approaching the +town, where some jungle-trees first appear. The breadth is about 100 +yards, and the depth six fathoms at low water spring-tides in mid +river opposite the rajah's residence. In some places below, the river +is narrower, and the depths considerable, varying from three to seven +fathoms. The prominent points, however, are shallow, and the rocks +below the town lie on the starboard hand coming up just as the first +houses appear in sight. The larboard hand should then be kept close +aboard. Some other rocks are likewise reported; and in ascending the +stream, though it be generally clear, a vessel _with_ or without a +pilot should have a boat a-head sounding. In the evening I went ashore +suddenly to pay a visit to the rajah, in order, if possible, to break +through the bonds of formality. The great man soon made his appearance, +and received us very well. We talked much of the state of his country +and of ours; but he was very guarded when I spoke of the Dutch. 'He +had no dealings whatever (he said) with them, and never allowed their +vessels to come here, and therefore could not say what they were +like.' We sat in easy and unreserved converse, out of hearing of the +rest of the circle. He expressed great kindness to the English nation; +and begged me to tell him _really_ which was the most powerful nation, +England or Holland, or, as he significantly expressed it, which is the +'cat, and which the rat?' I assured him that England was the mouser, +though in this country Holland had most territory. We took our leave +after he had intimated his intention of visiting us to-morrow morning. + +"_16th._--We were ready to receive the rajah after breakfast; but these +affairs of state are not so easily managed. There came two diplomatists +on board to know, in the first place, how many guns we intended to +salute with, and, in the second, whether I would go ashore in my gig, +in order to fetch the chief and his brother off. The latter request +I might have refused, and in a diplomatic light it was inadmissible; +but I readily conceded it, because, in the first place, it was less +troublesome than a refusal; and, in the next, I cared not to bandy +paltry etiquets with a semi-savage; and whatever pride might whisper, +I could not, as an individual traveler, refuse an acknowledgment +of the supremacy of a native prince. I went accordingly. The great +man came on board, and we treated him with every distinction and +respect. Much barbaric state was maintained as he quitted his own +residence. His sword of state with a gold scabbard, his war-shield, +jewel-hilted kris, and flowing _horse_-tails, were separately carried +by the grand officers of state. Bursts of wild music announced his +exit. His fourteen brothers and principal Pangerans surrounded him, +and a number (formidable on the deck of a vessel) covered the rear. He +stayed two hours and a half; ate and drank, and talked with great +familiarity; till the oppressive heat of the crowded cabin caused +me to wish them all to another place. However, he departed at last, +under a salute of twenty-one guns; and the fatigues of the day were +satisfactorily brought to a close. I afterward sent the rajah the +presents I had brought for him, consisting of a silk sarong, some +yards of red cloth and velvet, a pocket-pistol, scissors and knives, +with tea, biscuits, sweetmeats, China playthings, &c. &c. A person +coming here should be provided with a few articles of small importance +to satisfy the crowd of inferior chiefs. Soap, small parcels of tea, +lucifers, writing-paper, a large stock of cigars, biscuits, and knives, +are the best; for, without being great beggars, they seem greatly +to value these trifles, even in the smallest quantity. The higher +class inquired frequently for scents; and for the great men I know no +present which would be more acceptable than a small pier-glass. All +ranks seemed greatly pleased with those aboard; and some of the lower +orders, quite ignorant of the reflection, were continually laughing, +moving, sitting, and rising, to observe the corresponding effect. + +"_18th._--In the morning I intimated my intention of paying a visit to +the Pangeran Muda Mahammed; and being apprised of his readiness to see +us, I went ashore to his house. He was not, however, in the room to +receive us; nor, indeed, was I much surprised at this slight, for he +is a sulky-looking, ill-favored savage, with a debauched appearance, +and wanting in the intelligence of his brother the rajah. I seated +myself, however, and remained some time; but the delay exceeding +what I considered the utmost limit of due forbearance, I expressed +to the Pangeran Macota my regret that his compeer was not ready to +receive me, adding that, as I was not accustomed to be kept waiting, +I would return to my vessel. I spoke in the quietest tone imaginable, +rose from my seat, and moved away; but the assembled Pangerans, rising +likewise, assured me it was a mistake; that he was not yet dressed, +and would greatly regret it himself. I repeated that when I visited the +rajah, he received me in the hall. While this brief discussion passed, +the culprit Muda Mahammed appeared and apologized for his remissness, +assuring me that the error was his attendants', who told him I was not +coming for an hour. The excuse of course passed current, though false, +as excuses generally are. I vindicated my independence, not until it +was necessary; and I am well aware that any endeavor of a native to +commit an indirect rudeness, if met with firmness and gentleness, +always recoils on his own head. The routine of the visit resembled +our last--tea, cigars, complimentary conversation and departure. The +Pangeran afterward sent me a present of fowls and goats, and I was +right glad to have it over. Muda Mahammed is the 'own' brother to Muda +Hassim, and next in rank here. As yet I had not made any request to the +rajah to allow me to visit various parts of his country; but thinking +the time to do so was come (the ceremonial of arrival being past), +I sent Mr. Williamson, my interpreter, to express my wish to travel +to some of the Malay towns and into the country of the Dyaks. The +latter request I fully expected, would be evaded, and was therefore +the more pleased when an answer came giving a cheerful consent to my +going among the Dyaks of Lundu, and visiting the towns of Sadung, +Samarahan, &c. At the same time the rajah informed me, that if I +went up the river, he could not be answerable for my safety, as the +rebels were not far distant, and constantly on the watch. Sarebus, +another large Dyak town, he advised me not to visit, as they were +inimical to his government, and a skirmish had lately taken place +between them and some of his subjects. + +"_18th, Sunday._--Performed service. In the evening walked ashore, +but the jungle was wet after rain. Every day or night since arriving +it has rained, sometimes in torrents, at others in showers, and the +sky has been so obscured that no observations can be obtained. The +thermometer never ranges above 81 deg., and sometimes stands at 59 deg.. + +"At twelve at night we were surprised by a boat sent from the rajah, +to say he was taken ill, and wanted some physic. We dispatched our +surgeon, but it was found impossible to admit him into the sacred +precincts of the seraglio, and he returned with the information that +the rajah was asleep. + +"_21st._--Our fleet were in readiness before daylight, and by five +o'clock we left Kuching, [3] and dropped down the river. The Pangeran +Illudeen and the Panglima, both in prahus, accompanied us, and with +our long-boat (the Skimalong) formed quite a gay procession. The prahu +of the Pangeran pulled twelve paddles, mounted two brass swivels, and +in all had a crew of about twenty men. The Panglima's boat likewise +carried a gun, and had about ten men; while the Skimalong mounted +an iron swivel, and carried six Englishmen and one of our Singapore +Malays. With this equipment we might be pronounced far superior to +any force of the rajah's enemies we were likely to meet. + +"We passed from the Sarawak river into the Morotaba. At the junction +of the two streams the Morotaba is narrow; but at no great distance, +where it meets the Quop, it becomes wider, and in some places more +than half a mile across. + +"The river Quop is a fine stream, fully, as far as I could see, +as broad as the Morotaba or Sarawak. Beyond the junction of the +Quop and Morotaba the latter river divides into two branches--the +left-hand one, running to the sea, retains the name of Morotaba, +while the right is called Riam. + +"The Riam is a fine stream; at its junction with the Morotaba it +takes that name, as the Morotaba does that of Sarawak where they +join. Low mangrove or Nepa palm banks characterize these streams; +and occasionally slight eminences, with timber, are to be seen. The +highest hill is about 3000 feet high, called Matang, and is at the +point of junction between the Morotaba and Riam. + +"The next river on the starboard hand is the Tanjan, a small stream; +and some distance from it, the Kulluong, or Parwheet river, more +properly the continuation of the Riam. On the port hand is a smaller +river, running N. 35 deg. E. We pursued this stream, called Ugong Passer; +and after a hard pull against a strong tide, emerged into the larger +river of Samarahan. The tide was so strong against us that we brought +up for a couple of hours till it slacked, and between four and five +got under weigh again, with the expectation of shortly arriving at +our place of destination. Hour after hour passed, however; the sun +set; the glorious moon rose upon our progress as we toiled slowly but +cheerfully onward. Silence was around, save when broken by the wild +song of the Malay boatmen, responded to by the song of our tars to +the tune of 'Bonnie laddie, Highland laddie.' + +"It was such a situation as an excitable mind might envy. The +reflection that we were proceeding up a Borneon river hitherto +unknown, sailing where no European ever sailed before; the deep +solitude, the brilliant night, the dark fringe of retired jungle, +the lighter foliage of the river bank, with here and there a tree +flashing and shining with fireflies, nature's tiny lamps glancing and +flitting in countless numbers and incredible brilliancy! At eleven at +night we reached Samarahan, having been eighteen hours in the boat, +and fifteen at the oars, chiefly against tide. The men were tired, +but cheerful. Indeed, I can give them no praise beyond their merits +for conduct spirited, enduring, and yet so orderly as never to offend +the native inhabitants, or infringe upon their prejudices. A glass of +grog with our supper, and we all soon closed our eyes in comfortable +sleep, such as fatigue alone can bring. + +"_22d._--The village of Samarahan consists of a few houses, built, +as usual, upon posts, and standing close to the brink of the river. It +contains from sixty to eighty inhabitants in all, and there is nothing +in its site different from the rest of the country. While here, a boat, +with a Dyak family, came alongside, consisting of a father, his son, +and two daughters. They belonged to the Sibnowan tribe, and had a +'ladang,' or farm, on the Samarahan, toward the sea. The women were +good-looking; one, indeed, handsome, plump, and intelligent. They +were naked to the waist, and ornamented with several cinctures of +brass and colored rattans scraped very thin. + +"About ten we quitted Samarahan and proceeded up the river, +stopping only to take a set of sights, and about seven in the evening +reached Sibnow, having previously passed the villages of Rembas and +Siniawan. Siniawan and Sibnow are not above half a mile from each +other, and Rembas not far distant. They are all about the same size, +consisting each of eight or ten houses, and containing sixty or eighty +inhabitants. The river, during its course so far, is characterized by +the same clay-mud bank, evidently an alluvial deposit, without one +rock to be seen. The banks are low, and for the most part cleared a +quarter of a mile or more on either side, but the jungle is rarely +disturbed beyond that distance. Occasionally, however, the scene +is varied by the rich foliage of this jungle, which here and there +kisses the tide as it flows by, and in some spots on the cleared +ground arise clumps of trees that would be the pride of any park +in Europe. Monkeys in great numbers frisked among the branches; and +though unable to shoot them, they amused us often by their grotesque +attitudes and the tremendous leaps they made. On one occasion we +saw as many as twenty throw themselves, one after the other, from +the branch of a high tree into a thick bush full forty feet below, +and not one missed his distance or hold! On our way to Sibnow the +Pangeran had collected a number of men for a deer-hunt. The nets used +for this purpose are formed of rattans strongly wove together, which, +being stretched along the jungle, have nooses of the same material, +at three feet apart, attached to this ridge-rope. Beaters and dogs +then hunt from the opposite quarter, and the deer, in escaping them, is +caught in this trap. A length of several hundred fathoms is stretched +at once, each separate part of thirty or forty fathoms being joined +on as required; and I was told that in this way many deer were taken. + +"A heavy rain came on directly after we had brought up, and quickly +dispelled all our preparations for supper, by putting out our fire, +cooling our hot water, and soaking our half-broiled fowls. To a hungry +man such an event is very disastrous; but nothing could exceed the +kindness of our Malay friends. They took us to the best house in the +village, prepared our supper, and provided us with comfortable mats +and pillows to sleep on. Some of our party preferred a bad supper and +wet bed to these accommodations; and, to consummate their discomfort, +they were kept awake a great part of the night by sandflies. Our +lot in the house was more fortunate. We heard the rattling of the +pitiless rain, and commiserated those whose choice or distrust kept +them in the boat. I obtained by this means an excellent opportunity of +seeing a Malay _menage_ in its primitive simplicity. Women, children, +and all their domestic arrangements, were exposed to view. Nothing +appeared to be concealed, nor could anything exceed the simple, +kind-hearted hospitality of the inhabitants. The women gazed upon us +freely; and their children, with the shyness natural to their age, +yet took a glance at the strangers. Never having seen a white man, +their curiosity was naturally excited; but it was never offensive. Our +supper consisted of an excellent curry, and cold venison broiled on a +stick, flavored with a glass of sherry, and concluded by a cigar. We +retired to a dry bed, laying our head on the pillow with as entire +a feeling of security as though reposing in England. + +"A description of this Malay dwelling, situated so far up this hitherto +unknown river, may be interesting. Built, like other Malay houses, +on posts, floored with split bamboo, and covered with the leaf of the +Nepa palm, it presents the very _beau ideal_ of fragility, but affords, +at the same time, many advantages, and with a little improvement +might be rendered admirably calculated for a new settler in any warm +country. It is built at very small expense, is remarkably roomy, free +from damp, and weather-proof. The interior of the house consists of +four rooms, the center one large and commodious, the front narrower, +but thirty-six feet in length, a family sleeping-apartment on one side, +and a kitchen at the back. These apartments are divided one from the +other by partitions made of the Nepa; the floors were nicely spread +with strong mats of Dyak manufacture, and on our arrival finer white +mats were laid over these. The entrance of the house is approached +by a steep ladder, which in case of attack is easily removed. The +river Samarahan is admirably calculated for trade, and, indeed, +the same may be said of the whole country, from the great facility +it offers of inland communication. There is no impediment for small +vessels of 200 or 300 tons navigating as far as Sibnow, the stream +being deep and clear of danger. The tides in the river are strong, +but not dangerously so; and, sounding occasionally in every reach, +we never found less water than three fathoms. The distant mountains, +called Bukar (and some other name), are inhabited by Dyaks, and are +said to offer many valuable articles of trade; and we may presume +this true from the riches of the region whence the Sarawak river +takes its rise. It is highly probable, indeed, that both these rivers, +as well as the Quop and others, have their source in the same range, +and will be found to afford the same mineral productions. Tin, the +natives confidently assert, can be procured, and birds' nests in +very considerable quantities. The latter article, I have heretofore +understood, was found only in the vicinity of the sea, whence the +material of which they are composed is gathered; but both here and +at Sarawak the best informed and most intelligent Malays assure me +it is likewise found in the interior, and brought by the Dyaks from +the mountains. The alluvial soil is a rich clay loam. The principal +production at present is rice, of which considerable quantities are +grown on the banks of the river, which accounts for the clearing +of so many miles of the jungle. The mode of cultivation is similar +to what is pursued in Sumatra, and so well described by Marsden. A +small spot is cleared of jungle, and when the soil is exhausted of +its primeval richness, is deserted for another, which again in turn +is neglected, and returns to its wild state. The rice produced is of +excellent quality, and of a smaller grain than the Java rice we have +with us. It is very white and of excellent flavor, and I am inclined +to think is the 'Padi ladang,' or rice grown on dry ground. (For rice, +cultivation of, &c., &c., vide Marsden's _Sumatra_, p. 65.) + +"Beside rice, rattans are found in great quantities, and likewise +Malacca canes, but whether of good quality I am not able to say. On my +expressing a wish to see one, a man was dispatched into the jungle, +and returned with one in a few minutes. Bees-wax is another article +to be procured here _at present_ to the amount of thirty or forty +peculs per year from Sibnow, Malacca canes a small ship-load, rattans +in abundance, and any quantity of Garu wood. [4] When we consider the +antimony of Sarawak, beside the other things previously mentioned (to +say nothing of gold and diamonds), we cannot doubt of the richness +of the country: but allowance must be made for the exaggeration of +native statements. + +"It must likewise be borne in mind, that these articles are +collected in small quantities in a country thinly populated; and +for the purposes of trade it would be necessary to have a resident +European on the spot to gather the produce of the country ready for +exportation. I have no doubt that permission might be obtained for +an English merchant to reside in the country, and that during the +lifetime of the Rajah Muda Hassim he would be secure from outrage. The +produce of the country might likewise be obtained (at first) at a +low rate in exchange for European goods suited to native tastes. In +addition to the articles I have already mentioned, I must here add +pins, needles, and thread, both gold and white, showy cheap velvets, +yellow, green, and red cloth, Surat silks, cottons, colored beads +(for the Dyaks), nankeens in small quantities, gold-lace of various +qualities, gunpowder, muskets, pistols, flints, &c., &c. The head man +of Sibnow (Orang Kaya), when I asked him why he did not collect the +produce of the country, replied, that the inhabitants were few, and +unless an English merchant was settled at Kuching to buy the things, +it was no use collecting them. The uncertainty of sale, as well as +the very small prices to be obtained from trading Malays, prevents +these people using the advantages of their country, and as yet they +seemed to consider it impossible that vessels would come for them. That +they will one day or other be convinced to the contrary, I am sure; +that it will be soon, I sincerely hope; for I can see no reason, with +a population and rulers so pacific, why a trade highly advantageous +to Singapore should not be opened. I considered our reception as an +additional proof how much better the natives are disposed where they +have had no intercourse with Europeans; how perfectly willing they +are to extend a friendly hospitality when never previously injured or +aggravated; and as the first white men who ever visited their country, +we can bear the most cordial testimony to their unaffected kindness. + +"It is true that we were under the protection of the rajah and +accompanied by a Pangeran, and could have insisted on obtaining what +was readily granted. But in case the natives had shown any aversion +or antipathy toward us, it would easily have been observed. + +"_23d._--Heavy rain all the morning. Our salt provisions being +exhausted, we procured a goat, which was cooked to last during our +upward passage. + +"At 12, the flood making, we quitted Sibnow, and passing through the +same description of country, reached the village of Guntong, consisting +of eight houses, and about sixty or seventy inhabitants. The scattered +population on the banks of the river amounts, however, to an equal, +or probably greater number than in the villages. Beyond Guntong +the country becomes wild, but beautiful, and the river gradually +narrows until not above twenty-five yards wide. The depth, however, +was three fathoms at high water, where we brought up for the night, +about five hours' pull from Guntong. The course of the river is so +tortuous, that in one place two reaches are only divided by a neck +of land five yards across! + +"We were now fairly in the bush, and beyond the range of our Pangeran's +knowledge; and I was not therefore surprised (though disappointed) +when he intimated the necessity of returning. 'There was nothing to +see; the river was narrow, rapid, and obstructed by trees; the Dyaks +hostile; the rajah's enemies in ambush.' + +"I had nothing to answer, save my desire to proceed; but I felt, at +the same time, bound in honor to return; for to abuse the indulgence +of a native prince on our first excursion would have been a poor way +to obtain his future permission to visit other places. + +"I did everything man could do to shake the Pangeran's resolution; +and I believe I should have been successful, had his stock of tobacco +and sirih [5] not been expended. My last resource was resorting to +the means found efficient with most men to induce them to alter +their opinion. I was content to gain a consent to our proceeding +some miles farther up the stream in the morning, and then returning +with the ebb. Nothing during this contention could be more polite +than the Pangeran's manner; for he not only expressed but looked his +regret, and urged on me his responsibility to the rajah. The plea was +unanswerable, though I could not help suspecting the want of tobacco +and betel as the leading motive. + +"_24th._--We proceeded, as previously agreed, up the river some +ten or twelve miles farther, during which distance it narrows to +an inconsiderable but deep stream. In many places it was not above +eighteen feet wide, with trees overhanging the water. The depth was +2 1/2 fathoms high water; but being the rainy season, it would not +be deeper than necessary for boats all the year round. In the early +morning the jungle presented a charming scene. Long vistas of noble +trees with a diversity of richest foliage were before us--in some +places overarching the water, and forming a verdant canopy above +our heads. Birds were numerous, and woke the woods with their notes, +but rarely approached within shot. Pigeons in numbers and of several +varieties were seen, but very shy and wild. + +"We pushed on ahead of our attendant Pangeran, and pulled up long +after the ebb had made. He had a long chase, and exhausted his +lungs in shouting to us to return; and at last, from pity and +according to promise, I did so. Poor fellow, he was very glad, +fired his swivel-gun, and then brought up for breakfast. I believe +a few hours' progress would have brought us to the vicinity of the +hills and into the country of the Dyaks; and although disappointed +at not being allowed to proceed thither, I nevertheless comfort +myself that we have penetrated a hundred miles up a Borneon river +hitherto unknown--a river likewise (as far as we have yet examined +it) admirably calculated for the purposes of navigation and trade, +and which may at some future period become of importance not only to +the trade of our settlement of Singapore, but even to the commercial +interests of Great Britain. The general character of the Samarahan +is similar to that of other rivers flowing through alluvial soils; +the stream is deep, with muddy banks and bottom, and apparently free +from danger or obstruction. Of course these remarks are not meant +to prevent the necessity of caution in any vessel proceeding up, +as our survey was necessarily very brief; and, like other rivers, +one bank will usually be found deep, the other shallow; which must +be attended to. + +"It now remains for us to proceed up the river from its mouth to its +junction with the Ugong Passer; and should it prove to have sufficient +water for vessels on the bar, nothing more will be desired. + +"Returning, it took us five hours with a fair tide to Sibnow; the +next ebb we reached Samarahan in three hours, where we stopped for +the night. A heavy rain set in after we brought to, and continued +till morning. + +"_25th._--The morning was cold and raw; but cleared up as the sun +rose. At 7 we started, and at a quarter past 10 reached the mouth +of the Ugong Passer and thence into the Riam. Thus it took us 11 1/4 +hours, with a strong ebb tide, to pull the distance. We had ascended +the river from the junction of the Ugong Passer. Mr. Murray's plan +of the river will show the distance as taken of each reach, together +with its bearing. The ebb tide lasted us some distance up the Riam; +but the flood making, we entered a small creek, called Tarusongong, +scarce wide enough for the boat to get through, and entirely +overarched with the Nepa palm. The general direction of the creek +was N.W., and we emerged from it into the Boyur river; and pulling +through several reaches, got into the Quop, [6] and thence, after a +while, into the Morotaba; from the Morotaba into the Sarawak river, +reaching the schooner at sunset, all well and happy. Thus ended our +first cruise into the interior of Borneo." + + + + + +CHAPTER III. + + Second Cruise: up the River Lundu.--The Sibnowan Dyaks--Their + Town of Tungong.--Their Physical Proportions, and Words of + their Language.--Their Customs.--Skull-trophies.--Religious + Ceremonies and Opinions.--Their Ornaments.--Appearance of + both Sexes.--Dress and Morals.--Missionary Prospects of + Conversion, and Elevation in the Social Scale.--Government, + Laws, and Punishments.--Dances.--Iron Manufacturing.--Chinese + Settlement.--Excursion continued. + + +"_Aug. 30th._--Our flotilla, constituted as before, quitted Sarawak +with the ebb tide, and reached Santobong, at the mouth of the river, +soon after the flood had made. We waited for the turn of the tide; and +in wandering along the sand, I had a shot at a wild hog, but unluckily +missed. I likewise saw a deer, very like a red deer, and nearly as +large. The hog I fired at was a dirty white, with a black head, very +unlike in this particular to any wild hogs I have hitherto seen either +in India or Europe; but several young pigs, likewise seen, were black. + +"With the flood we weighed anchor, intending to bring up at the mouth +of the Seboo river; but the Skimalong outsailing the prahus, foolishly +parted company, causing me much uneasiness, and keeping the prahus +under weigh all night. I was at this time aboard the Pangeran's boat, +where I usually slept. About 10 on the 31st we reached Lobrek Bay, +and rejoined our boat. + +"With the flood tide we proceeded up Lundu river, which has Gunong +Gading on the right hand. The course of the river is very tortuous, +but it appears every where of more than sufficient depth. The Dyak +village of Tungong is situated about eighteen miles from the mouth, and +takes its name from a small stream which joins the Lundu just below, +on the left hand. It was dark when we arrived, and we ran against a +boom formed of large trees run across the river as a defense against +adverse Dyak tribes. We could see nothing of the town, save that it +appeared longer than any we had yet visited. + +"_September 1st._--The River Lundu is of considerable breadth, about +half a mile at the mouth, and 150 or 200 yards off Tungong. Tungong +stands on the left hand (going up) close to the margin of the stream, +and is inclosed by a slight stockade. Within this defense there is +_one_ enormous house for the whole population, and three or four +small huts. The exterior of the defense between it and the river is +occupied by sheds for prahus, and at each extremity are one or two +houses belonging to Malay residents. + +"The common habitation, as rude as it is enormous, measures 594 feet +in length, and the front room, or _street_, is the entire length of the +building, and 21 feet broad. The back part is divided by mat partitions +into the private apartments of the various families, and of these there +are forty-five separate doors leading from the public apartment. The +widowers and young unmarried men occupy the public room, as only those +with wives are entitled to the advantage of separate rooms. The floor +of this edifice is raised twelve feet from the ground, and the means +of ascent is by the trunk of a tree with notches cut in it--a most +difficult, steep, and awkward ladder. In front is a terrace fifty feet +broad, running partially along the front of the building, formed, like +the floors, of split bamboo. This platform, as well as the front room, +besides the regular inhabitants, is the resort of pigs, dogs, birds, +monkeys, and fowls, and presents a glorious scene of confusion and +bustle. Here the ordinary occupations of domestic labor are carried +on--padi ground, mats made, &c., &c. There were 200 men, women, and +children counted in the room and in front while we were there in the +middle of the day; and, allowing for those abroad and those in their +own rooms, the whole community can not be reckoned at less than 400 +souls. Overhead, about seven feet high, is a second crazy story, on +which they stow their stores of food and their implements of labor +and war. Along the large room are hung many cots, four feet long, +formed of the hollowed trunks of trees cut in half, which answer the +purpose of seats by day and beds by night. The Sibnowan Dyaks are a +wild-looking but apparently quiet and inoffensive race. The apartment +of their chief, by name Sejugah, is situated nearly in the center +of the building, and is larger than any other. In front of it nice +mats were spread on the occasion of our visit, while over our heads +dangled about thirty ghastly skulls, according to the custom of these +people. The chief was a man of middle age, with a mild and pleasing +countenance and gentle manners. He had around him several sons and +relations, and one or two of the leading men of his tribe, but the +rest seemed by no means to be restrained by his presence, or to show +him any particular marks of respect: certainly nothing of the servile +obsequiousness observed by the Malays before their prince. Their +dress consists of a single strip of cloth round the loins, with the +ends hanging down before and behind, and a light turban, composed of +the bark of trees, twined round the head, and so arranged that the +front is stuck up somewhat resembling a short plume of feathers. + +"Their figures are almost universally well made, showing great activity +without great muscular development; but their stature is diminutive, +as will be seen by the following measurements, taken at random among +them, and confirmed by general observation: + + + "Sejugah, the chief, height, 5 ft. 1 3/4 in. Head round, 1 ft. 9 + in. Anterior portion, from ear to ear, 1 foot; posterior, 9 in.; + across the top, 1 1/4 ft. + + "Kalong, the chief's eldest son, height, 5 ft. 2 1/4 in. Anterior + portion of head, 1 ft.; posterior, 8 3/4 in.; across the top, + 1 ft., wanting a few lines. + + Height + + Man from the crowd 5 ft. 1 3/4 in. + Another 5 1 1/2 + Another 5 4 + Another 4 10 + Another 5 3 + Another 5 4 + + + +"The following is a specimen of their names, and some few words +of their dialect, the only ones I could get not Malayan. The fact, +indeed, appears to be that, from constant intercourse, their Dyak +language is fast fading away; and, while retaining their separate +religion and customs, they have substituted the soft and fluent Malay +for their own harsher jargon. The names are, Jugah or Sejugah, Kalong, +Bunshie, Kontong, Lang, Rantie. + +The vocabulary: + + + hairs, _bok_ (similar to the Lundu Dyaks). + thigh, _pah_. + woman, _indo_. + father, _api_. + sea, _tasiek_. + slave, _ulon_. + spear, _sancho_. + black, _chelum_. + good, _badass_. + bad, _jaie_. + quick, _pantass_. + slow, _bagadie_. + that, _kneah_ (nasal, like _kgneah_). + this, _to_. + to go, _bajali_. + there, _kein_. + come, _jali_ + here, _keto_. + come here, _jali keto_. + to give, _bri_. + give all, _bri samonia_ (M). + to bring, _bii_. + bring that, _bii kneah_. + bring here, _bii keto_. + + +"The corruptions of the Malay are _langan_ for _tangon_, arm; _ai_ +for _ayer_, water; _menua_ for _benua_, country; _komah_ for _rumah_, +house; _besi_ for _besar_, great. + +"Like the rest of the Dyaks, the Sibnowans adorn their houses with +the heads of their enemies; but with them this custom exists in a +modified form; and I am led to hope that the statements already made +public of their reckless search after human beings, _merely_ for the +purpose of obtaining their heads, will be found to be exaggerated, if +not untrue; and that the custom elsewhere, as here and at Lundu, will +be found to be more accordant with our knowledge of other wild tribes, +and to be regarded merely as a triumphant token of valor in the fight +or ambush; similar, indeed, to the scalps of the North American Indian. + +"Some thirty skulls were hanging from the roof of the apartment; and I +was informed that they had many more in their possession; all, however, +the heads of enemies, chiefly of the tribe of Sarebus. On inquiring, +I was told that it is indispensably necessary a young man should +procure a skull before he gets married. When I urged on them that the +custom would be more honored in the breach than the observance, they +replied that it was established from time immemorial, and could not +be dispensed with. Subsequently, however, Sejugah allowed that heads +were very difficult to obtain now, and a young man might sometimes +get married by giving presents to his lady-love's parents. At all +times they warmly denied ever obtaining any heads but those of their +enemies; adding, they were bad people, and deserved to die. + +"I asked a young unmarried man whether he would be obliged to get a +head before he could obtain a wife. He replied, 'Yes.' 'When would +he get one?' 'Soon.' 'Where would he go to get one?' 'To the Sarebus +river.' I mention these particulars in detail, as I think, had their +practice extended to taking the head of any defenseless traveler, +or any Malay surprised in his dwelling or boat, I should have wormed +the secret out of them. + +"The men of this tribe marry but one wife, and that not until they have +attained the age of seventeen or eighteen. Their wedding ceremony is +curious; and, as related, is performed by the bride and bridegroom +being brought in procession along the large room, where a brace of +fowls is placed over the bridegroom's neck, which he whirls seven +times round his head. The fowls are then killed, and their blood +sprinkled on the foreheads of the pair, which done, they are cooked, +and eaten by the new-married couple _alone_, while the rest feast +and drink during the whole night. + +"Their dead are put in a coffin, and buried; but Sejugah informed +me that the different tribes vary in this particular; and it would +appear they differ from their near neighbors the Dyaks of Lundu. + +"Like these neighbors, too, the Sibnowans seem to have little or no +idea of a God. They offer prayers to Biedum, the great Dyak chief of +former days. Priests and ceremonies they have none; the thickest mist +of darkness is over them: but how much easier is it to dispel darkness +with light than to overcome the false blaze with the rays of truth! + +"The manners of the men of this tribe are somewhat reserved, but +frank; while the women appeared more cheerful, and more inclined to +laugh and joke at our peculiarities. Although the first Europeans +they had ever seen, we were by no means annoyed by their curiosity: +and their honesty is to be praised; for, though opportunities were +not wanting, they never on any occasion attempted to pilfer any +thing. Their color resembles the Malay, and is fully as dark; and +the cast of their countenance does not favor the notion that they are +sprung from a distinct origin. They never intermarry with the Malays, +so as to intermingle the two people, and the chastity of their women +gives no presumption of its otherwise occurring. Their stature, as I +have before remarked, is diminutive, their eyes are small and quick, +their noses usually flattened, and their figures clean and well +formed, but not athletic. Both sexes generally wear the hair long +and turned up, but the elder men often cut it short. As is natural, +they are fond of the water, and constantly bathe; and their canoes +are numerous. I counted fifty, besides ten or twelve small prahus, +which they often build for sale to the Malays, at a very moderate +price indeed. The men wear a number of fine cane rings, neatly worked +(which we at first mistook for hair), below the knee or on the arm, and +sometimes a brass ring or two; but they have no other ornaments. The +ears of a few were pierced, but I saw nothing worn in them except a +roll of thin palm-leaf, to prevent the hole closing. The women are +decidedly good-looking, and far fairer than the men; their figures +are well shaped, and remarkable for their _embonpoint_. The expression +of their countenance is very good-humored, and their condition seems +a happy one. Their dress consists of a coarse stuff, very scanty +(manufactured by the Sakarran Dyaks), reaching from the waist to the +knee; around the waist they have rings of ratan, either black or red, +and the loins are hung round with a number of brass ornaments made by +their husbands. Above the waist they are entirely naked, nor do they +wear any covering or ornament on the head. They have a few bracelets +of brass, but neither ear-rings nor nose-rings; and some, more lucky +than the rest, wear a necklace of beads. They prefer the smallest +Venetian beads to the larger and more gaudy ones of England. The labor +of the house, and all the drudgery, falls on the females. They grind +the rice, carry burdens, fetch water, fish, and work in the fields; +but though on a par with other savages in this respect, they have many +advantages. They are not immured; they eat in company with the males; +and, in most points, hold the same position toward their husbands and +children as European women. The children are entirely naked; and the +only peculiarity I observed is filing their teeth to a sharp point, +like those of a shark. The men marry but one wife, as I have before +observed. Concubinage is unknown; and cases of seduction or adultery +very seldom arise. Even the Malays speak highly of the chastity of the +Dyak women; yet they are by no means shy under the gaze of strangers, +and used to bathe before us in a state of nudity. + +"That these Dyaks are in a low condition there is no doubt; but, +comparatively, theirs is an innocent state, and I consider them +capable of being easily raised in the scale of society. The absence +of all prejudice regarding diet, the simplicity of their characters, +the purity of their morals, and their present ignorance of all forms +of worship and all idea of future responsibility, render them open to +conviction of truth and religious impression. Yet, when I say this, +I mean, of course, only when their minds shall have been raised by +education; for without previous culture I reckon the labors of the +missionary as useless as endeavoring to read off a blank paper. I +doubt not but the Sibnowan Dyaks would readily receive missionary +families among them, provided the consent of the Rajah Muda Hassim +was previously obtained. That the rajah would consent I much doubt; +but if any person chose to reside at Tungong, for the charitable +purpose of leading the tribe gradually, by means of education, to +the threshold of Christianity, it would be worth the asking, and I +would exert what influence I possess with him on the occasion. I feel +sure a missionary would be safe among them, as long as he strictly +confined himself to the gentle precepts and practice of his faith; +he would live abundantly and cheaply, and be exposed to no danger +except from the incursion of hostile tribes, which must always be +looked for by a sojourner amid a Dyak community. + +"I must add, that this day, when so many of my friends are destroying +partridges, I have had my gun in my hand, to procure a few specimens. + +"_2d._--To continue my account of the Sibnowan Dyaks. I made particular +inquiry about the superstition stated to exist regarding birds, +and the omens said to be drawn from their flight; but I could trace +no vestige of such a belief, nor did they seem at all acquainted +with its existence. The government of the Sibnowans may be called +patriarchal. The authority of the chief appears limited within very +narrow bounds; he is the leader in war, and the dispenser of the laws; +but possesses no power of arbitrary punishment, and no authority for +despotic rule. The distinction between Sejugah and the lowest of his +tribe is not great, and rather a difference of riches than of power. A +few ornamented spears, presented by the Malays, seem his only insignia +of office; and these were never displayed in our presence, save in the +dance. The chiefship would appear to be elective, and not hereditary; +but I could not distinctly understand whether the appointment rested +with the rajah or the tribe. The former claims it; but the latter +did not speak as though his right were a matter of necessity or +certainty. On asking Kalong, the eldest son of Sejugah (a young man +of twenty years of age, active, clever, and intelligent), whether he +would succeed his father, he replied, he feared he was not _rich _ +enough; but two or three of the tribe, who were present, asserted +that he would be made chief. The Rajah Muda Hassim told me that the +only hold he had on the Dyaks was through the chief and his family, +who were attached to him; but that the tribe at large cared nothing +for the Malays. I can easily believe this, as any ill treatment or +cruelty directed against a Dyak community would soon drive them beyond +the power and the territory of the prince. This is the best safeguard +of the Dyaks; and the Malays are well aware that a Dyak alliance must +be maintained by good treatment. They are called subjects and slaves; +but they are subjects at pleasure, more independent and better used +than any Malay under his native prince. + +"The laws of this Dyak tribe are administered by the chief and the two +principal men. They have no fixed code, nor any standard of punishment, +each case of crime being judged according to its enormity. In the +event of murder in their own tribe, the murderer suffers death by +decapitation, _provided he be in fault_. Theft is punished by fine, +and adultery (stated as a heinous offense) by severe beating and heavy +mulct [7]. Other crimes are, in like manner, punished by fine and +beating--one or both, according to their various shades of evil. The +latter varies greatly in degree, sometimes being inflicted on the +head or arm, with a severity which stops short only of death. The +arm is often broken under this infliction; so, according to their +representation, it is a risk to be dreaded and avoided. + +"Slavery holds among them; and, as among the Malays, a debtor is +reduced to this state until his debt be discharged. Children are +likewise bought, and must be considered as slaves. + +"In the evening I requested Sejugah to collect his tribe, and to show +me their dances and musical instruments. They readily consented, +and about nine at night we went to witness the exhibition. The +musical instruments were, the tomtom, or drum, and the Malayan gong; +which were beat either slow or fast, according to the measure of +the dance. The dances are highly interesting, more especially from +their close resemblance, if not identity, with those of the South Sea +Islanders. Two swords were placed on the mat, and two men commenced +slowly, from the opposite extremities, turning the body, extending +the arms, and lifting the legs, in grotesque but not ungraceful +attitudes. Approaching thus leisurely round and round about, they at +length seize the swords, the music plays a brisker measure, and the +dancers pass and repass each other, now cutting, now crossing swords, +retiring and advancing, one kneeling as though to defend himself from +the assaults of his adversary; at times stealthily waiting for an +advantage, and quickly availing himself of it. The measure throughout +was admirably kept, and the frequent turns were simultaneously made +by both dancers, accompanied by the same eccentric gestures. The +effect of all this far surpasses the impression to be made by a +meager description. The room partially lighted by damar torches; +the clang of the noisy instruments; the crowd of wild spectators; +their screams of encouragement to the performers; the flowing hair and +rapid evolutions of the dancers, formed a scene I wish could have been +reduced to painting by such a master as Rembrandt or Caravaggio. The +next dance was performed by a single person, with a spear, turning +like the last; now advancing, retiring, poising, brandishing, or +pretending to hurl his weapon. Subsequently we had an exhibition with +the sword and shield, very similar to the others, and only differing +in the use of the weapons; and the performance was closed by a long +and animated dance like the first, by two of the best performers. + +"The dance with the spear is called Talambong; that with the sword, +Mancha. The resemblance of these dances to those of the South Seas is, +as I have observed, a remarkable and interesting fact, and one of many +others which may, in course of time, elucidate the probable theory that +the two people are sprung from a common source. The Malays of Sarawak, +and other places in the neighborhood of the Dyak tribes, dance these +dances; but they are unknown to Borneo Proper, and the other Malay +islands; and although the names may be given by the Malays, I think +there is no doubt that the dances themselves belong to the Dyaks: +a correcter judgment can be formed by a better acquaintance with +other Dyak tribes. + +"The household utensils in use here are few and simple. The mode +of grinding padi clear of the husk is through the trunk of a tree +cut into two parts, the upper portion being hollow, the lower solid; +small notches are cut where the two pieces fit, and handles attached +to the upper part, which being filled with padi and kept turning round, +the husk is detached and escapes by the notches. + +"The Dyaks, as is well known, are famous for the manufacture of +iron. The forge here is of the simplest construction, and formed +by two hollow trees, each about seven feet high, placed upright, +side by side, in the ground; from the lower extremity of these, two +pipes of bamboo are led through a clay-bank, three inches thick, +into a charcoal fire; a man is perched at the top of the trees, +and pumps with two pistons (the suckers of which are made of cocks' +feathers), which being raised and depressed alternately, blow a +regular stream of air into the fire. Drawings were taken of these +and other utensils and instruments. The canoes are not peculiar, +but the largest prahus (some forty feet long, with a good beam) +are constructed, in the first place, exactly like a small canoe: +a single tree is hollowed out, which forms the keel and kelson, +and on this foundation the rest of the prahu is built with planks, +and her few timbers fastened with ratans. A prahu of fifty feet long, +fitted for service, with oars, mast, attops, &c., was ordered by the +Panglima Rajah while we were with him, which, completed, was to cost +thirty reals, or sixty Java rupees, or L6 English. During the course +of the day we ascended the river to visit the settlement of Chinese +lately established here. It is situated about two and a half miles +up the river, on the same side as Tungong, and consists of thirty men +(real Chinese), and five women of the mixed breed of Sambas. Nothing +can be more flourishing than this infant settlement, and I could hardly +credit their statement that it had only been formed between four and +five months. The soil they represented as most excellent, and none +are better judges; many acres were cleared and under cultivation; +rice, sirih, sweet potatoes (convolvulus), Indian corn, &c., &c., +were growing abundantly; and they were able to supply us with seven +pecul, or 933 pounds of sweet potatoes, without sensibly diminishing +their crop. They showed me samples of birds' nests, bees' wax, garu +wood (lignum aloes), and ebony, collected in the vicinity, chiefly +from Gunong Gading. Several peculs of birds' nests and bees' wax, and +the wood in large quantity, could _now_ be brought to market; and no +doubt, when demand stimulates industry, the quantities would greatly +increase. The Dyaks, they told me, collected ratans, and likewise +canes, which are plentiful. The mixed breed of the Chinese with the +Malay or Dyak are a good-looking and industrious race, partaking +much more of the Chinese character than that of the natives of this +country. This mainly arises from education and early-formed habits, +which are altogether Chinese; and in religion and customs they likewise +follow, in a great measure, the paternal stock. The race are worthy +of attention, as the future possessors of Borneo. The numbers of this +people can not be stated, but it must amount to many thousand persons: +3000 were said to be on their way to the Borneon territory. + +"The head man of this settlement, a Chinese of Quantung, or Canton, +but long resident in the vicinity of Sambas, gave me some valuable +information respecting the Sarawak mountains. He had, with a +considerable party of his countrymen, been employed there at the +gold-mines, and he spoke of them as abundant, and of the ore as +good. Tin they had not found, but thought it existed. Antimony ore was +to be had in any quantities, and diamonds were likewise discovered. I +mention these facts as coming from an intelligent Chinese, well able +from experience to judge of the precious metals, and the probability +of their being found. + +"_3d._--Night, as usual, set in with torrents of rain, which lasted +until the morning: the days, however, are fine, though cloudy. Got +sights in the afternoon; and, leaving our Dyak friends, we dropped +down to the mouth of the river, where we slept. + +"_4th._--At 2 A.M. got under weigh for the Samatan river, which we +reached at 8 A.M. I had been given to understand that the Lundu and +Sibnowan Dyaks were to be found on this river; but on arriving, I +was informed we must proceed to Seru, where we should see plenty of +Dyaks. I accordingly started immediately after breakfast, and reached +Seru after mid-day. Here we found a small Malay fishing village, with +two or three stray Dyaks of the Sibnowan tribe; and, on inquiring, we +were told by them that their country was far away. Being convinced that +the Pangeran had dragged me all this distance to answer some purpose +of his own, I re-embarked on the instant, and set off on my return +to Lundu, indignant enough. However, I had the poor satisfaction of +dragging them after me, and making them repent their trick, which I +believe was nothing else than to visit the island of Talang Talang for +turtles' eggs. We were pretty well knocked up by the time we reached +Samatan, having been pulling thirteen hours, the greater part of the +time under a burning sun. + +"The Samatan river, like the others, is inclosed in a bay choked with +sand: the boat-passage is on the right-hand side, going in near Point +Samatan. The sands are mostly dry at low water, and stretch out a +considerable distance. There is a fishing station here, though not so +large as at Seru, and the fish at both places are very plentiful, and +are salted for exportation to Sambas, and along their own coast. Seru +is a shallow creek; the village may consist of 50 or 60 inhabitants, +and the sands stretch a long way out. We thus lost two days, through +the cunning of our Malay attendant; and the only advantage gained is +being enabled to fill up the details of our survey of this bay. + +"_5th._--The day consumed returning along the coast to the Lundu, +and we did not reach Tungong till late. + +"_6th._--Remained at Tungong. Every impediment was thrown in my way to +prevent my reaching the Lundu Dyaks; the distance was great, the tribe +small and unsettled, there was little probability of finding them, +&c. I would, however, have gone; but another cause had arisen of a more +serious nature. My feet, from the heat of the sun, musqueto-bites, and +cuts (for I foolishly went without shoes that unlucky day to Seru), +had become so painful and inflamed that I felt great doubt whether, +if I walked in pain to Lundu, I could come back again. With the best +grace I could, I yielded the point; with a vow, however, never to +have the same Pangeran again. I did _manage_ to be civil to him, +from policy alone. He was superfluously kind and obliging. + +"_7th._--Left Tungong on our return to the vessel, and brought-to +for the night at Tanjong Siri. In the evening I walked along the fine +sandy beach as far as the entrance of the Sumpudin river. We saw many +wild hogs; and on one occasion I was able to get within twenty yards +of some ten of them together, among some large drift-wood. Just as I +was crawling over a tree and balancing, I found myself confronted by +these animals; but they were out of sight almost before I could cock +my gun and fire. They were of a large size, and most of them we saw +during the evening either dirty white, or white and black. At night, +after we had retired to our quarters in the Pangeran's boat, she filled +with water, and was near going down. The first intimation we had of +it was the water wetting our mats on which we were sleeping. She was +beached and baled out, and a hand kept baling all night, as they had +laden her so deep that she leaked considerably. + +"_8th._--In the morning we got our anchor at daylight, and +breakfasted on the island of Sumpudin. There are deer, hogs, and +pigeons on Sumpudin Island; but what was more interesting to me was, +the discovery of the wild nutmeg-tree in full flower, and growing to +the height of twenty or thirty feet. The nutmegs lay in plenty under +the trees, and are of considerable size, though elongated in shape, +and tasteless, as usual in the wild sorts. While the East India Company +were sending Captain Forest from their settlement of Balambangan as +far as New Guinea in search of this plant, how little they dreamed +of its flourishing so near them on the island of Borneo! The soil on +which they grow is a yellowish clay, mixed with vegetable mould. I +brought some of the fruit away with me. After breakfast, a breeze +springing up, we sailed to the mouth of the Sarawak river, waited +for the tide, and pushed on for the vessel, getting aboard about +half past three in the morning. Our Malay attendants were left far, +far behind, and there is little chance of their being here to-morrow, +for their boats sail wretchedly." + + + + +CHAPTER IV. + + Renewed intercourse with the Rajah.--Prospects of + trade.--Ourang-outang, and other animals.--The two sorts of + mias.--Description of the Rajah, his suite, and Panglimas, &c.--The + character of the natives.--Leave Sarawak.--Songi Dyaks.--Visit + Seriff Sahib.--Buyat tongue.--Attack by pirates.--Sail for + Singapore. + + +Having returned to Sarawak, Mr. Brooke renewed his intercourse with +the rajah; and his Journal proceeds: + +"_Sept. 9th._--Visited the rajah; civil and polite--I ought indeed to +say friendly and kind. Der Macota was on board, speaking on the trade, +and very anxious for me to arrange the subject with the rajah. I could +only say, that I would do so if the rajah wished, as I believed it +would be greatly for the benefit of their country and Singapore. + +"_10th._--Laid up with my bad legs, and hardly able to crawl. Muda +Hassim presented us with another bullock, which we salted. At Lundu we +bought eight pigs, which arrived to-day in charge of Kalong, the young +Dyak. He is a fine fellow. I gave him a gun, powder-flask, powder, +&c. He was truly delighted. Our Pangerans arrived at the same time. + +"_11th._--Very bad; got a novel, and read all day. Went ashore to +see Muda Hassim in the evening. He gave us a private audience: and we +finished our discussion respecting the trade, and I think successfully. + +"I began by saying, that I as a private gentleman, unconnected with +commerce, could have no personal interest in what I was about to speak; +that the rajah must clearly understand that I was in no way connected +with the government of Singapore, and no way authorized to act for +them: that he must, therefore, look upon it merely as my private +opinion, and act afterward as his wisdom thought fit. I represented +to him that the kingdom of Borneo was the last Malay state possessing +any power, and that this might be in a great measure attributed to +the little intercourse they had had with European powers. I thought +it highly advisable to call into play the resources of his country, +by opening a trade with individual European merchants. Sarawak, +I stated, was a rich place, and the territory around produced many +valuable articles for a commercial intercourse--bees-wax, birds-nests, +rattans, beside large quantities of antimony ore and sago, which might +be considered the staple produce of the country. In return for these, +the merchants of Singapore could send goods from Europe or China which +his people required, such as gunpowder, muskets, cloths, &c.; and both +parties would thus be benefited by their commercial interchange of +commodities. I conceived that Singapore was well fitted for trade with +this place. The rajah must not suppose I was desirous of excluding +other nations from trading here, or that I wished he should trade +with the English alone; on the contrary, I thought that the Americans, +the French, or any other nation, should be admitted on the same terms +as the English. + +"Of course, I was not allowed to proceed without much questioning and +discussion; many of the views were urged and re-urged, to remove their +false notions. That Mr. Bonham had the supreme command of the trade +of Singapore was the prominent one; and when he died, or was removed, +would not the next governor alter all kind intentions and acts? 'What +friend should they have at Singapore then?' + +"Again they thought that a few ships might come at first; but then +they would deceive them, and not come again. It was very difficult +to explain, that if they procured cargoes at an advantageous rate, +they would come here for their own benefit; if not, of course it +would not be worth their while to come at all. The entire discussion +proceeded with the utmost good-will and politeness. + +"That the political ascendency of the English is paramount here is +apparent. They might if they pleased, by means of an offensive and +defensive alliance between the two powers, gain the entire trade of +the northwest coast of Borneo, from Tanjong Datu to Malludu Bay. + +"I obtained subsequently from Macota the following list of imports +and exports; which I here commit to paper, for the information of +those whom it may concern. + +"_From Singapore._--Iron; salt, Siam; nankeen; Madras, Europe, +and China cotton cloth, coarse and fine; Bugis and Pulicat sarongs; +gold and other threads, of sorts and colors; brass wire, of sizes; +iron pans from Siam, called qualis; chintzes, of colors and sorts; +coarse red broadcloth, and other sorts of different colors; China +crockery; gunpowder; muskets; flints; handkerchiefs (Pulicat and +European); gambir; dates; Java tobacco; soft sugar; sugar-candy; +biscuits; baharri; common decanters; glasses, &c. &c.; China silk, +of colors; ginghams; white cottons; nails; beside other little things, +such as Venetian beads; ginger; curry-powder; onions; ghee; &c. &c. + +"The returns from Sarawak are now: antimony ore, sago, timber +(lackah, garu), rattans, Malacca canes, bees-wax, birds-nests, rice, +&c. Other articles, such as gold, tin, &c. &c., Macota said, would be +procured after the war, but at present he need say nothing of them; +the articles above mentioned might subsequently be greatly increased +by demand; and, in short, as every person of experience knows, in a +wild country a trade must be fostered at first. + +"To the foregoing list I must add, pipeclay, vegetable tallow, +which might be useful in commerce, being of fine quality; and the +ore, found in abundance round here, of which I can make nothing, +but which I believe to be copper. + +"_12th._--I received from the rajah a present of an ourang-outang, +young, and like others I have seen, but better clothed, with fine +long hair of a bright chestnut color. The same melancholy which +characterizes her race is apparent in Betsy's face; and though but +just caught, she is quite quiet unless teased. + +"From the man who brought Betsy I procured a _Lemur tardigradus_, +called by the Malays _Cucan_, not _Poucan_, as written in +Cuvier--Marsden has the name right in his dictionary--and at the same +time the mutilated hand of an ourang-outang of _enormous_ size. This +hand far exceeds in length, breadth, and power, the hand of any man +in the ship; and though smoked and shrunk, the circumference of the +fingers is half as big again as an ordinary human finger. The natives +of Borneo call the ourang-outang the _Mias_, of which they say there +are two distinct sorts; one called the _Mias rombi_ (similar to the +specimen aboard and the two in the Zoological Gardens), and the _Mias +pappan_, a creature far larger, and more difficult to procure. To the +latter kind the hand belongs. The mias pappan is represented to be as +tall or taller than a man, and possessing vast strength: the face is +fuller and larger than that of the mias rombi, and the hair reddish, +but sometimes approaching to black. The mias rombi never exceeds four +or four and a half feet; his face, unlike the pappan, is long, and his +hair redder. I must own myself inclined to this opinion from various +reasons:--1st. The natives appear so well agreed on the point, and so +well acquainted with the distinction and the different names, that it +is impossible to suppose it a fabrication for our peculiar use. Of the +many whom I asked respecting them, at different times and in different +places, the greater part of their own accord mentioned the difference +between the mias pappan and the mias rombi. The animal when brought +aboard was stated to be the mias rombi, or small sort. In short, +the natives, whether right or wrong, make the distinction. 2d. The +immense size of the hand in my possession, the height of the animal +killed on the coast of Sumatra, and the skull in the Paris Museum, +can scarcely be referred to an animal such as we know at home; though +by specious analogical reasoning, the great disparity of the skulls +has been pronounced the result merely of age. + +"However, facts are wanting, and these facts I doubt not I can soon +procure, if not actual proof; and whichever way it goes, in favor of +Buffon's Pongo or not, I shall be contented, so that I bring truth +to light. + +"_19th._--From the 12th to the 19th of September we lay, anxious to be +off, but delayed by some trifling occurrence or other, particularly for +the letters which I was to receive for the merchants of Singapore. Our +intercourse the whole time was most friendly and frequent; almost +daily I was ashore, and the rajah often visited the vessel. How +tedious and _ennuyant_ to me can only be known by those who know me +well, and how repugnant these trammels of society and ceremony are to +nature. Nevertheless, I suffered this martyrdom with exemplary outward +patience, though the spirit flagged, and the thoughts wandered, and the +head often grew confused, with sitting and talking trifling nonsense, +through a poor interpreter. + +"I here bid adieu to these kind friends, fully impressed with their +kindness, and the goodness of their dispositions. To me they are far +different from anything I was at all prepared to meet, and devoid +of the vices with which their countrymen are usually stigmatized by +modern writers. I expected to find an indolent and somewhat insolent +people, devoted to sensual enjoyments, addicted to smoking opium, and +eternally cock-fighting or gambling: let me speak it to the honor of +the Borneons, that they neither cock-fight nor smoke opium; and in the +military train of their rajah they find at Kuching few conveniences +and fewer luxuries. Like all the followers of Islam, they sanction +polygamy; and the number of their women, and, probably, the ease and +cheerfulness of the seraglio, contrasted with the ceremonial of the +exterior, induce them to pass a number of their hours amid their women, +and excite habits of effeminacy and indolence. I should pronounce +them indolent and unwarlike; but kind and unreserved to foreigners, +particularly to Englishmen. They are volatile, generally speaking very +ignorant, but by no means deficient in acuteness of understanding; +and, indeed, their chief defects may be traced entirely to their +total want of education, and the nature of their government. The +lower orders of people are poor and wretched, and the freemen are +certainly poorer and more wretched than the slaves. They are not +greatly addicted to theft, and yet, unlike the scrupulous honesty +of the Sibnowans, they pilfered some trifling articles occasionally +when left in their way. The retainers of the court showed much the +same mean intriguing spirit which is too often found in courts, +and always in Eastern ones; and the rajah himself seldom requested +any favor from me directly, but employed some intermediate person +to sound me--to get whatever was required for himself if possible, +if not for the rajah. I took the hint, and always expressed my +wishes through the interpreter when not present myself. In this way +we were enabled to grant or refuse without the chance of insult or +offence. The suite of the rajah consists principally of slaves, either +purchased or debtors: they are well treated, and rise to offices of +some note. The Panglima rajah was a slave-debtor, though we did not +know it for some time after our arrival. I never saw either cruelty +or undue harshness exercised by the great men during my stay, and in +general their manners were affable and kind to those about them. The +Rajah Muda Hassim is a remarkably short man, and slightly built; +about 45 years of age; active and intelligent, but apparently little +inclined to business. His disposition I formed the highest estimate +of, not only from his kindness to myself, but from the testimony of +many witnesses, all of whom spoke of him with affection, and gave him +the character of a mild and gentle master. Muda Hassim's own brother, +Muda Mahammed, is a reserved and sulky man, but they spoke well of him; +and the rajah said he was a good man, but given to fits of sulkiness. + +"Der Macota, unlike other Malays, neither smokes tobacco nor chews +sirih. He sought our society, and was the first person who spoke to +me on the subject of the trade. His education has been more attended +to than that of others of his rank. He both reads and writes his own +language, and is well acquainted with the government, laws, and customs +of Borneo. From him I derived much information on the subject of the +Dyaks, and the geography of the interior; and if I have failed to put +it down, it is because I have not departed from my general rule of +never giving any native statements unless they go far to verify my +own actual observations. I parted from the rajah with regret, some +six or seven miles down the river. Never was such a blazing as when +we left Sarawak; twenty-one guns I fired to the rajah, and he fired +forty-two to me--at least we counted twenty-four, and they went on +firing afterward, as long as ever we were in sight. The last words +the Rajah Muda Hassim said, as I took my leave, were--'Tuan Brooke, +do not forget me.' + +"Among the curiosities in my possession are spears, swords, and +shields, from various tribes; a coat of mail, made to the northward of +Borneo, and worn by the pirates; specimens of Sakarran Dyak manufacture +of cloth, and Sarebus ditto; ornaments and implements of the Sibnowans; +and, last not least, a gold-handled kris, presented me by the rajah, +which formerly belonged to his father, and which he constantly wore +himself. I likewise presented him with a small English dagger, with +a mother-of-pearl handle; and my favor was so high with him, that he +used always to wear my gift, and I, to return the compliment, wore his. + +"The climate of Sarawak is good, and is seldom hot: the last eight or +ten days were oppressive, but until then we could sleep with a blanket, +and seldom found it too warm in the day. Rain at this season falls +in great quantities; and from imprudence, our crew suffered on their +first arrival from colds and rheumatism; but getting more careful, +we had latterly no sick-list. + +"Farewell to Sarawak! I hope to see it again; and have obtained a +promise from the rajah that he will go with me to Borneo, and show +me every part of the country by the way. + +"I may here state the result of some inquiries I have made respecting +the government of Borneo. The form of government may be considered +aristocratic rather than oligarchical: it is ruled by the sultan, but +his power is kept in check by four great officers of government. These +are, the Rajah Muda Hassim, the Bandar, in whose hands is the +government of the country; Pangeran Mumin, the Degadon, the treasurer, +or, as Mr. Hunt says, controller of the household of the sultan; +Pangeran Tizudeen, Tumangong, or commander-in-chief; and Pangeran +Kurmaindar, the Pen-damei, or mediator and interceder. This officer +is the means of communication or mediation between the sultan and +his Pangerans; and in case of condemnation, he sues for the pardon or +mercy of his sovereign. Mr. Hunt, in his short but excellent paper on +Borneo, mentions some other officers of state: I will not follow him, +but in the names, as well as duties of these officers, his account +agrees with my information. Further than this, I have not yet learned, +therefore state not; for I am not _manufacturing_ a book, but gaining +information. I may add, however, that these offices are elective, +and not hereditary: as far as I yet know, I am inclined to believe +the election rests with the chief Pangerans of the state; not only +those in office, but others. When I reach Borneo I can procure more +ample details. + +"_23d._--Quitted the Royalist at the entrance of the Morotaba, +and accompanied by Pangerans Subtu and Illudeen, set sail for the +river Sadung. + +"The town called Songi is of considerable size, and the entire +population along the river may certainty be reckoned at from 2000 +to 3000 persons, independent of Dyaks. The country has a flourishing +aspect, but the soil is represented as bad, being soft and muddy. There +is a good deal of trade from this river, and it annually sends several +large prahus to Singapore: two were lying off the town when we arrived, +and two others had sailed for that place twenty days before. The +produce of the country is bees-wax, birds'-nests, rice, &c. &c., but +they seem to be procured in less abundance than in the other contiguous +rivers. There is nothing peculiar about the Malay population, except +that, generally speaking, it struck me, they appeared better off than +the people of Sarawak, or others I have visited hereabouts. We ascended +the river by night, anchored a short distance from the Songi, in a +tide-way like a sluice, and entered the smaller river shortly after +daylight. Having sent the Pangerans ahead to advise Seriff Sahib of our +arrival, we pulled slowly up to the campong of the Data Jembrong, where +we brought up to breakfast. Data Jembrong is a native of Mindanao, +an Illanun and a pirate; he is slightly advanced in years, but stout +and resolute-looking, and of a most polite demeanor--as oily-tongued +a cut-throat as a gentleman would wish to associate with. He spoke +of his former life without hesitation, and confessed himself rather +apprehensive of going to Singapore. He was remarkably civil, and sent +us a breakfast of some fruit, salt fish, stale turtles' eggs, and +coffee sweetened with syrup; but spite of all this, his blood-thirsty +education and habits prejudiced me against him. Breakfast finished, +we went forward to visit Seriff Sahib, who received us in an open +hall; promised to get us as many animals as he could now; regretted +our short stay, and assured me he would collect more by the time I +returned. Among these is to be a mias pappan, living or dead. I at +the same time offered ten dollars for the skeleton belonging to the +hand already in my possession, and a less sum for the parts. Being the +first Europeans Seriff Sahib had ever met, he was rather puzzled to +know what we were like; but we had every reason to be satisfied with +his kindness and the civility of his people: the inhabitants, though +crowding to see us, are by no means intrusive, and their curiosity +is too natural to be harshly repressed. I need hardly remark here +how very erroneously the position of the Sadung river is laid down in +the charts, it being placed in the bay, to the westward of Santobong, +and nearly in the position of the Samatan river. + +"_25th._--The last night was passed off Datu Jembrong's house, and I +left him with a firm impression that he is still a pirate, or at any +rate connected with them. He resides generally at Tawarron, to the +northward of Borneo Proper, where his wives and children now are, +and he has come here to superintend the building of a prahu. The +people about him speak of his pursuits without disguise, and many +informed us the prahu near his house is intended for a piratical +vessel. Nothing could exceed the polite kindness of our rascally host, +and I spent the rainy evening in his house with some satisfaction, +acquiring information of the coast to the northward, which he is well +able to give. + +"In the morning we dropped down with the last of the ebb to the mouth +of the Songi, and took the young flood to proceed up the Sadung. Beyond +the point of junction with the Songi the Sadung retains an average +breadth of from three-quarters of a mile to a mile. The banks continue +to be partially cleared, with here and there a few Dyaks residing in +single families or small communities on their ladangs or farms. The +Dyak campong, which terminated our progress up the stream, consists +of three moderately long houses inhabited by Sibnowans. The manners, +customs, and language of the Sibnowans of the Sadung are the same as +those of their Lundu brethren; they are, however, a wilder people, +and appear poor. Like other Dyaks, they had a collection of heads +hanging before the entrance of their chief's private apartments. Some +of these heads were fresh, and, with the utmost _sang-froid_, they +told us they were women's. They declared, however, they never took any +heads but those of their enemies, and these women (unhappy creatures) +had belonged to a distant tribe. The fresh heads were ornamented with +fowl's feathers, and suspended rather conspicuously in separate rattan +frames of open work. They professed themselves willing to go with +me up the river to the mountains; and on the way, they informed me, +were some large Malay towns, beside some more campongs of their own +countrymen. Farther up they enumerated some twenty tribes of Dyaks, +whose names I thought it useless to preserve. Late in the evening we +set off on our return, and anchored once again near Datu Jembrong's +house. + +"_26th._--Again visited Seriff Sahib. His name and descent are +Arabic; his father, an Arab, having married a daughter of the Borneo +Rajah. The Malays evidently honor this descent, and consider his birth +very high. His power, they say, equals his family; as he is, in some +measure, independent; and were he to instigate the Sadung country to +take arms against Borneo, it is very probable he would overthrow the +government, and make himself Sultan of Borneo. In person, this noble +partakes much of his father's race, both in height and features, being +tall and large, with a fine nose and contour of face. His manners are +reserved but kind; and he looks as if too indolent to care much about +acquiring power; too fat for an active traitor, though a dangerous +man to oppress. We were the first Europeans he had ever seen; but, +on our second visit, he lost much of his previous reserve, and +was curious in examining our arms and accoutrements. We, as usual, +_exchanged_ presents; mine consisting of some nankeen, red cloth, +knife, scissors, and handkerchief; while he gave me the shield of a +great Kayan warrior, a Bukar spear, a goat, fowls, and our dinner +and breakfast daily. He promised me specimens of the arms of all +the Dyak tribes, and plenty of animals, particularly my much-desired +mias pappan; and I, in return, agreed to bring him two small tables, +six chairs, and a gun. Subsequently to our interview he sent me a +tattooed Dyak, the first I had seen. The lines, correctly and even +elegantly laid in, of a blue color, extended from the throat to his +feet. I gained but little information; yet the history of the poor +man is curious, and similar to that of many other unfortunates. He +represented himself as a chief among his own people in the country +of Buyat, five days' journey up the Cotringen river (_vulgo_ Coti +river). Going in his canoe from the latter place to Banjamassim, he +was captured by Illanun pirates, with whom he was in bondage for some +time, but ultimately sold as a slave to a resident of Sadung. It was +now five years since he became first captive; but having lately got +money enough to buy his liberty, he is again a freeman; and having +married, and turned to the religion of Islam, desires no longer to +revisit his native country. The language of the tribe of Buyat he +represents as entirely Malay. I made him a small present for the +trouble I had given him, and he departed well content. + +"About three o'clock in the afternoon we had a heavy thunder-storm, +with lightning as vivid as the tropics produce. Torrents of rain +descended, and continued a great part of the night; but, sheltered by +our kajangs or mats, we managed to keep tolerably dry. Indeed, the +voyager on this coast must be prepared for exposure to heavy rains, +and considerable detention from thick and cloudy weather. The latter +obstruction, of little moment or even agreeable to those making a +passage, is a cause of much vexation in surveying the coast, as for +days together no observations are to be had. + +"_27th._--About 7 A. M. we quitted Songi, and dropped down as far as +Tanjong Balaban, a low point forming the larboard entrance into the +Sadung river, and bounding the bay, which lies between it and Tanjong +Sipang. Coming to this point gave us a good offing for our return, +and enabled me to take a round of angles to finish the survey as far +as this point and Pulo Burong, which lies off it. We crossed over +the sand flats with a light breeze, and reached the Royalist at 4 +P.M. In the evening the Datu Jembrong, who had preceded us from Sadung, +spent the evening aboard. He expressed his willingness to accompany +me next season: whether I shall take him is another question; but, +could he be trusted, his services might be highly useful. + +"Our Pangerans arrived early this morning from Sadung; and to-morrow +was fixed for our departure, when an unforeseen occurrence caused a +farther detention. The day passed quietly: in the evening I was ashore, +and took leave of the Pangerans Subtu and Illudeen, who returned to +Sarawak, leaving the Panglima Rajah to pilot us out. The first part of +the night was dark; and the Panglima in his prahu, with twelve men, +lay close to the shore, and under the dark shadow of the hill. About +nine, the attention of the watch on deck was attracted by some bustle +ashore, and it soon swelled to the wildest cries; the only word +we could distinguish, however, being 'Dyak! Dyak!' All hands were +instantly on deck. I gave the order to charge and fire a gun with a +blank cartridge, and in the mean time lit a blue light. The gig was +lowered, a few muskets and cutlasses thrown into her, and I started +in the hope of rescuing our poor Malay friends. The vessel meanwhile +was prepared for defence; guns loaded, boarding-nettings ready for +running up, and the people at quarters; for we were ignorant of the +number, the strength, or even the description of the assailants. I +met the Panglima's boat pulling toward the vessel, and returned with +her, considering it useless and rash to pursue the foe. The story is +soon told. A fire had been lit on the shore; and after the people had +eaten, they anchored their boat, and, according to their custom, went +to sleep. The fire had probably attracted the roving Sarebus Dyaks, +who stole upon them, took them by surprise, and would inevitably have +cut them off but for our presence. They attacked the prahu fiercely +with their spears; five out of twelve jumped into the water, and swam +ashore; and the Panglima Rajah was wounded severely. When our blue +light was seen they desisted; and directly the gun fired, paddled +away fast. We never saw them. The poor Panglima walked aboard with a +spear fixed in his breast, the barb being buried, and a second rusty +spear-wound close to the first; the head of the weapon was cut out, +his wounds dressed, and he was put to bed. Another man had a wound from +a wooden-headed spear; and most had been struck more or less by these +rude and, luckily, innocuous weapons. A dozen or two of Dyak spears +were left in the Malay boat, which I got. Some were well-shaped, with +iron heads; but the mass simply pieces of hard wood sharp-pointed, +which they hurl in great numbers. Fire-arms the Dyaks had none, +and during the attack made no noise whatever; while the Malays, on +the contrary, shouted lustily, some perhaps from bravery, most from +terror. The force that attacked them was differently stated; some +said the boat contained eighty or a hundred men, others rated the +number as low as fifty; and, allowing for an exaggeration, perhaps +there might have been thirty-five--not fewer, from the number of +spears thrown. Being fully prepared, we set our watch, and retired +as usual to our beds; the stealthy and daring attack, right under +the guns of the schooner, having given me a lesson to keep the guns +charged in future. The plan was well devised; for we could not fire +without the chance of hitting our friends as well as foes, and the +deep shadow of the hill entirely prevented our seeing the assailants. + +"_29th._--I considered it necessary to dispatch a boat to Sarawak to +acquaint the rajah with the circumstance of the attack made on his +boat. The wound of the Panglima was so severe, that in common humanity +I was obliged to wait until all danger for him was past. He was soon +well; and, as with natives in general, his wound promises favorably; to +a European constitution a similar wound would be imminently dangerous. + +"_30th._--Took the long boat, and sounded along the edge of the sand; +soundings very regular. In the evening Mr. Williamson returned in +the gig, and a host of Pangerans; the Pangeran Macota at the head. He +urged me much to go and see Muda Hassim. The rajah, he said, desired +it so much, and would think it so kind, that I consented to go up +to-morrow. I am very desirous to fix their good feelings toward us: and +I was prompted by curiosity to see the rajah's _menage_ as his guest. + +"_October 1st._--We had a heavy pull against tide, and arrived at +Sarawak about 4 P.M. We had eaten nothing since breakfast at 8; and we +had to sit and talk, and drink tea and smoke, till 8 in the evening; +then dinner was announced, and we retired to the private apartments--my +poor men came willingly too! The table was laid _a l'Anglaise_, a good +curry and rice, grilled fowls, and a bottle of wine. We did justice +to our cheer; and the rajah, throwing away all reserve, bustled about +with the proud and pleasing consciousness of having given us an English +dinner in proper style; now drawing the wine; now changing our plates; +pressing us to eat; saying, 'You are at home.' Dinner over, we sat, +and drank, and smoked, and talked cheerfully, till, tired and weary, +we expressed a wish to retire, and were shown to a private room. A +crimson silk mattress, embroidered with gold, was my couch: it was +covered with white gold-embroidered mats and pillows. Our men fared +equally well, and enjoyed their wine, a luxury to us; our stock of +wine and spirits having been expended some time. + +"_2d._--Once more bade adieu to our kind friends; reached the vessel +at 4 P.M., and got under weigh directly. At dusk anchored in the +passage between the sands. + +"_3d._--Five A.M. under weigh. Clear of the sands about mid-day, +and shaped our course for Singapore. + +"_4th._--Strong breeze from w.s.w. Beating from leeward of Datu to +Pulo Murrundum, in a nasty chop of a head sea." + + + + + +CHAPTER V. + + Summary of information obtained during this + visit to Borneo.--Geographical and topographical + observations.--Produce.--Various Dyak tribes.--Natural + history.--Language.--Origin of Races.--Sail from + Singapore.--Celebes.--Face of the country.--Waterfall. + + +Mr. Brooke's journal continues his observations on the people and +country he had just left; and, I need hardly say, communicates much +of novelty and interest in his own plain and simple manner. + +"_Oct. 5th._--Just laying our course. I may here briefly +recapitulate the information acquired during the last two months and +a half. Beginning from Tanjong Api, we have delineated the coast as +far as Tanjong Balaban, fixing the principal points by chronometer and +observation, and filling in the details by personal inspection. The +distance, on a line drawn along the headlands, may be from 120 to +130 miles, the entire coast being previously quite unknown. + +"Within this space are many fine rivers, and some navigable for +vessels of considerable burden, and well calculated for the extension +of commerce, such as Sarawak, Morotaba, and Sadung. The others, equally +fine streams, are barred, but offer admirable means for an easy inland +communication; these are the Quop, Boyur, Riam, Samarahan, Lundu, +Samatan, &c. In our excursions into the interior of the island, most +of these streams have been ascended to a distance of 25 or 30 miles, +and some further. We traced the Samarahan river for 70 or 80 miles from +its mouth, and passed through portions of the intermediate streams of +the Riam, Quop, and Boyur. The Morotaba, which is but another mouth +of the Sarawak, we passed through several times from the sea to its +junction with that river. The Lundu and Sadung rivers were likewise +ascended to the distance of near 30 miles; and plans of all these +rivers have been taken as accurately as circumstances would permit, +by observations of the latitude and longitude, and various points, +and an eye-sketch of the distance of each reach and the compass +bearing. The entrances into the Sarawak and Morotaba were carefully +examined, and the former accurately laid down. The productions of +the country attracted our attention, and the articles best fitted +for commerce have been already enumerated. Among these are, first, +minerals; say gold, tin, probably copper, antimony-ore, and fine +white clay for pipes. Secondly, woods of the finest descriptions, +for ship-building, and other purposes; besides aloes wood (_lignum +aloes_), and arang or ebony wood, canes, and ratans. To these may be +added, among vegetable productions, sago, compon, rice, &c., &c. + +"The wild nutmeg was found growing on the islands of Sadung and +Sumpudin in abundance and perfection, proving that by cultivation it +might be brought into the market as cheap, and probably as good, +as those produced in the Moluccas. We have various specimens +of ores and stones, which, on being tested, may prove valuable +commodities. Among these is decomposed granite rock (I believe), +containing minute particles of what we conceive to be gold, and an +ore believed to be copper. Besides the articles above enumerated, +are birds' nests and bees' wax in considerable quantities, and others +not worth detailing here. We have been able, during our residence +with the Borneons, to continue on the most friendly terms with them, +and to open a field of research for our subsequent inquiries in the +proper season. My attention has been anxiously directed to acquiring +a knowledge of the Dyak tribes; and for this purpose I passed ten days +among them at Lundu. I have made such vocabularies of the language of +the Sibnowans and Lundus as my means allowed; and a further addition +of their various dialects will furnish, I conceive, matters of high +importance to those interested in tracing the emigration of nations. I +may here briefly notice, that the nation of Kayans, included under the +common denomination of Dyak, are a tattooed race, who use the sumpitan, +or blow-pipe; while the other Dyak tribes (which are very numerous) +are not tattooed, and never use the blow-pipe. + +"The arms and instruments of many tribes are in my possession; and +among the Sibnowans I had the opportunity of becoming acquainted with +their habits, customs, and modes of living. + +"The appellation of the Dyak tribes near the coast is usually the +same as the rivers from which they originally came. The Dyaks of +Sibnow come from the river of that name, just beyond Balaban Point, +though large communities are dispersed on the Lundu and the Sadung. The +same may be said of the Sarebus tribe (the most predaceous and wild +on the coast), which has powerful branches of the original stock on +the Skarran river. Beyond Point Balaban is a bay--between that point +and Point Samaludum; the first river is the Sibnow; the next the +Balonlupon, which branches into the rivers of Sakarran and Linga; +passing Tanjong Samaludum you come to the two islands of Talison; +and between it and the next point, or Banting Marron, lies the Sarebus +river. Between Banting Marron and Tanjong Siri are the Kaleka river, +a high mountain called Maban, and then Rejong, the chief river of the +Kayans. I may here likewise correct some of the statements and names +usually current in England. The Idaan, represented as a Dyak tribe, +are a hill people, and probably not Dyaks; and the name Marat is +applied by the natives of Borneo to the various wild tribes, Dyaks +and others, without any specific meaning. + +"In natural history the expedition has done as much as was in its +power, by forming collections of birds, animals, and reptiles; but +these collections are as small as our means. Specimens of woods and +seeds have been preserved; but the season was not the proper one for +flowers, as very few indeed were seen. The specimen of the hand of +the mias pappan and the head of an adult mias rombi will, I believe, +go far to establish the existence of an animal similar to the Pongo +of the Count Buffon. I have little doubt that I shall be able in the +ensuing season to establish the fact, or set it at rest forever; +though I confess myself greatly inclined to think that the former +will be the case. I here leave the coast with an excellent prospect +for the coming year; and I would not now have quitted it so soon, +but for the want of provisions, added to which, the change of the +monsoon, bringing squally and dark weather, greatly interferes with +our further progress in surveying. + +"_Nov. 22d, 1839._--The Malayan language has been compared to the +_lingua franca_ of Europe. They are both, indeed, used by various +nations in their commercial transactions; but, beyond this, nothing +can be more unjust or absurd than the comparison. The _lingua franca_ +is a jargon compounded at random, devoid of grammar or elegance; the +Malayan, on the contrary, is musical, simple in its construction, +and well calculated for the expression of poetry. It boasts many +dialects, like the Italian, of superior softness, and, like the +Italian, it is derived from many sources, refining all to the most +liquid sounds by the addition of a final vowel. I fully concur with +Mr. Marsden in his opinion that the Malayan tongue, though derived +from the Sanscrit, the Arabic, the Hindoostani, &c., &c., is based +on the language which he calls the Polynesian; a language which may +be considered original (as far as we know), and which embraces so +vast an extent of geographical surface. The proof of this rests +mainly on the fact that the simple wants of man, as well as the +most striking features of nature, are expressed in the Polynesian; +while the secondary class of ideas is derived from the Sanscrit, or +some other language, and usually grafted in a felicitous manner on the +original stem. By an original language, I must be understood, however, +to mean only a language which can not be derived from any other +known tongue. I seek not to trace the language of Noah, or to raise +a theory which shall derive the finished and grammatical Sanscrit, +the pure and elegant Greek, from some barbarous stock, whether Celtic +or Teutonic. Such inquiries are fitted for those with leisure and +patience to undertake a hopeless task, and learning enough to achieve +better things. When we look for the origin of languages we are lost, +for those existing afford us no help. They present some affinities, +as might be expected; but their discrepancies are irreconcilable; and, +amid many equally good claims, who shall be able to demonstrate the +only one which is right? Supposing even that all languages agreed as +to primary ideas, it would be difficult to determine the original; but +when this primary class of ideas is expressed by sounds entirely and +totally different, the task becomes utterly hopeless, and the labor +as vain as that of Sisyphus. Indeed, it would be very difficult to +show how languages, derived from one stock, could possibly differ so +far in their expression of the simplest ideas and wants as not to be +mutually traceable: and truly, until this is done (which I conceive +impossible), I am content to rest in the belief that there are more +original languages _than one_--a conclusion agreeable to common sense, +and consonant with the early history of the Hebrews. + +"To trace the original identity of distant races, and their early +migrations, through the affinity of language, is indeed a limited +task compared with the other, but one both feasible and useful. To +further this labor, the smallest additional information is valuable; +and the dialects of the rude people inhabiting the interior of the +islands of Borneo and Celebes would be highly important. Previously, +however, to instituting such a comparison, as far as in my power, I +propose taking a brief glance at the different races whose languages +may be included under the common name of Polynesian. + +"In the first place, the Malayan. Issuing from the interior of Sumatra, +there is reason to conjecture, and even facts to prove, that originally +the dialect of Menangkabau resembled the other dialects of its +birthplace. The gradual extension of a warlike race gave a polish to +the language; additional wants, increasing luxury, extended knowledge, +and contact with the merchants of many Eastern nations, all combined +to produce the Malayan in its present form. But, during the progress +of this change, the radical Polynesian stock remained; and we find, +consequently, that the words necessary to mankind in their earliest +stage bear a striking and convincing resemblance to the dialects of +Rejong and Lampung, in Sumatra. Subsequent improvements were largely +adopted from the Sanscrit and the Arabic; but the fact of the primary +ideas being expressed in the Polynesian must preclude the conclusion +of either of these being the source whence the Malayan is derived, +its improvement and extension being alone referable to them. Marsden +positively states his inability to trace the Polynesian to any other +Eastern language; and, at the same time, he has demonstrated, in +what he considers a convincing manner, the identity of this language +from Madagascar and the islands of the Pacific to the Philippines +and Sumatra. + +"It may here be incidentally remarked, that while so many authors are +endeavoring to prove that the Asiatic archipelago was peopled from the +Western Continent, [8] they overlook the fact of the radical difference +of language. Unless the roots of the language can be traced either to +India, Cambodia, or other parts, it must follow, as a matter of course, +that the islands were peopled at a time previous to the introduction of +the language now spoken on the Continent; else how are we to account +for the simple dialects of a rude people being radically distinct +from the language of the mother country? If the Dyaks of Borneo +and the Arafuras of Celebes and New Guinea speak a dialect of the +Polynesian, it will go far to prove an original people as well as an +original language, that is, as original as the Celtic, the Teutonic, +the South American; original because not derived from any known source. + +"These brief remarks on the Malayan will, I believe, apply to the +language of the Island of Java, which, equally improved and enlarged by +the addition of Sanscrit and Arabic words, and differently modified, +retains, nevertheless, its radical Polynesian stock and its distinct +written character, as do likewise the dialects of the islands of Bally +and Lombock. The districts of Rejong, Lampung, &c., in Sumatra, retain +the original language in a much higher degree, possess distinctive +written characters, and have little intermixture of Sanscrit or +Arabic. Celebes, or Bugis-land, with a distinct language and character, +will probably be found to follow the same rule; and the Philippines, +including Mindanao, according to Marsden, possess the same language, +though altered and modified into the Tagala tongue. + +"Madagascar, so far removed, exhibits in its language a dialect of +Tagala, or, strictly speaking, of Polynesian; and the South Sea islands +present striking and almost convincing proofs of the same origin. + +"The inquiry ought to be pushed to the languages of the Mexicans and +Peruvians of South America; and, as far as our knowledge permits, +their identity established or disproved; for the language of this +by-gone people would go far toward tracing the course of emigration, +it being evident that a strong argument would be raised in favor of +the migration proceeding from east to west, if the language is common +to South America and Sumatra, and not traceable to any country of +the Continent of India. + +"It remains, however, to inquire into the language of the interior +tribes of Borneo, Celebes, and New Guinea; and, on such inquiry, +should they be found to possess the same primary roots as the rest, I +believe the conclusion must ultimately be arrived at of the existence +of a Polynesian language common to this vast geographical extent, +and distinct from the languages of Asia. In tracing this identity, +we can only, of course, find it in few instances in the cultivated +Javanese and Malayan languages. Discrepancies must naturally be great +from the intermixture, from early recorded times, of all languages +in the archipelago; but, nevertheless, if the radical affinities be +striking, they will be conclusive in establishing the original identity +of all the races before mentioned; for, without this original identity, +how can we account for these affinities of language? It may, indeed, +be urged that this language has gradually crept into the dialects of +Java and Menangkabau. But, in the first place, the affinities will +be found in the very roots of the language--in the expressions for +the primary and necessary ideas, which seldom alter in any people; +in the next, there is a high degree of improbability in supposing +a rude dialect to supplant a substantial portion of a more polished +one; and, thirdly, we must not overlook the collateral evidence of the +similarity of conformation pervading the entire race from Polynesia to +the archipelago--distinct alike from the Caucasian and the Mongolian. + +"In tracing the identity of this language, we may reckon the dialects +of the Dyaks of Borneo, &c., as the lowest step of the ladder; those +of the Pacific islands next; and so through the dialects of Sumatra and +Tagala, up to the Malayan and Javanese. For this purpose, a comparative +view of all must be attained; and Eastern scholars should point out, +when possible, the words taken from Sanscrit and other languages. For +my own part, these remarks are made as a sketch to be enlarged on, +and to assist in obtaining the vocabularies of the Dyaks and Arafuras. + +"_Dec. 6th._--In looking over Marsden's admirable Introduction to his +Malayan Grammar, I find I have taken many of his views in the foregoing +remarks; but I consider that his opinions may be pushed to conclusions +more extended than he has ventured upon. Having described the 'exterior +circumstance' of the Malayan language, he proceeds to point out those +more original languages from whence we may presume it to be derived. + +"'The words of which it consists may be divided into three classes, +and that two of these are Hindoo and Arabic has been generally +admitted. The doubts that have arisen respect only the third, or +that original and essential part which, to the Malayan, stands in the +same relation as the Saxon to the English, and which I have asserted +to be one of the numerous dialects of the widely-extended language +found to prevail, with strong features of similarity, throughout +the archipelago on the hither side of New Guinea, and, with a less +marked resemblance, among the islands of the Pacific Ocean.... To +show the general identity, or radical connection of its dialects, +and, at the same time, their individual differences, I beg leave to +refer the reader [9] to the tables annexed to a paper on the subject +which I presented, so long ago as the year 1780, to the Society of +Antiquaries, and is printed in vol. vi. of the _Archaeologia_; also, +a table of comparative numerals, in the appendix to vol. iii. of +Captain Cook's last voyage; and likewise to the chart of ten numerals, +in two hundred languages, by the Rev. R. Patrick, recently published +in Valpy's _Classical, Biblical and Oriental Journal_.' + +"Again, Marsden states: + +"'But whatever pretensions any particular spot may have to precedence +in this respect, the so wide dissemination of a language common to all +bespeaks a high degree of antiquity, and gives a claim to originality, +as far as we can venture to apply that term, which signifies no more +than the state beyond which we have not the means, either historically +or by fair inference, of tracing the origin. In this restricted sense +it is that we are justified in considering the main portion of the +Malayan as original, or indigenous, _its affinity to any Continental +tongue not having yet been shown_; and least of all can we suppose +it connected with the monosyllabic, or Indo-Chinese, with which it +has been classed.' + +"When we find an original language bearing no traces of being derived +from any Continental tongue, we must conclude the people likewise to +be original, in the restricted sense, or to have emigrated with their +language from some source hitherto unknown. The Sanscrit and Arabic +additions to the original stock are well marked, though the period +of the introduction of the former is hidden in darkness. It may be +inferred, however, that it came with the Hindoo religion, the remains +of which are yet in existence. It is evident that the question resolves +itself into two distinct branches: first, the original language, its +extent, the coincidence of its dialects, its source, &c.; secondly, +its discrepancies, whence arising, &c.; together with the inquiry into +the probable time and mode of the introduction of the Sanscrit. With +the latter of these inquiries I have nothing to do; on the former +subject I may collect some valuable information by adding the dialects +of the savage tribes in the interior of Borneo and Celebes. + +"The alphabets of the island of Java, of the Tagala, and the Bugis +of Celebes, are given by Corneille, Le Brun, Thevenot, and Forrest." + +Of Mr. Brooke's sojourn at Singapore it is unnecessary to speak; and +I accordingly resume my extracts with his ensuing voyage from that +port, and again for the Indian archipelago, but contenting myself, +for reasons which need not be entered into at length, with only +that portion of his excursion to Celebes and among the Bugis which +particularly bears upon his Borneon sequel. + +"_Dec. 7th, 1839._--Off Great Solombo. Never was there a more tedious +passage than ours has been from Singapore. Sailing from that place on +the 20th of November, we have encountered a succession of calms and +light winds--creeping some days a few miles, and often lying becalmed +for forty-eight hours without a breath to fill the sails. Passing +through the straits of Rhio and Banca, and watering at the islands of +Nanka, we stood thence for Pulo Babian, or Lubeck, lay a night becalmed +close to the Arrogants Shoal, of which, however, we saw nothing, +owing, probably, to the smoothness of the water. The depths are +greater than laid down on Horsburgh's chart, varying from thirty-six +to thirty-eight fathoms. A calm now keeps us off the greater Solombo, +which it is my intention to visit when in my power. + +"_8th._--Drifted past Solombo in the calm, and, reluctant to return, +I continued on my voyage with a light breeze from the eastward. This +island is well laid down: from the sea we made its longitude 113 deg. 31'; +Horsburgh gives it 113 deg. 28', which, considering that both observations +were made afloat, is a near enough approximation. The land is low, with +a single hill, showing round from the westward, flat or wedge-shaped +from the eastward. The smaller Solombo is low: both wooded. + +"_10th._--In sight of Laurots islands. + +"_11th._--In the evening stood within four miles of the southern island +of Laurots. These islands are high and steep, covered with wood, and +uninhabited. The easternmost island seems, by bearings, badly laid +down, being not far enough to the southward and eastward. The southern +island is called by the Bugis, Mata Siri; the eastern, Kadapangan; +the northern one, Kalambow. A few rocks and islets lay off them; +water deep, and apparently clear of all danger. + +"_15th._--Turatte Bay. After experiencing continued calms and light +winds, and falling short of water, we at length reached this bay, and +anchored in 7 1/2 fathoms. The first impression of Celebes is highly +favorable. The mountains present a bold outline, and rise in confused +masses, until crowned by what is commonly called _Bonthian Hill_. The +sides of the mountains slope gradually to the sea, and present an +inviting and diversified aspect of wood and cleared land. I dispatched +a boat for water to a small village; and the crew were well received +by the natives, after they became assured that they were not pirates. + +"The outline of this bay, in Norie's chart, is not badly laid down; but +on either side there is great room for improvement and survey. Turatte +Bay may be fairly so called, as the district (or _negri_) generally +bears that name. The larboard point of Turatte Bay (approaching) +is called Malasaro, which comes next to Tanjong Layken in the +charts. The starboard point is Tanjong Uju Loke, and from Uju Loke +the land runs low to the point of Galumpang, the entrance of a river +marked in the charts. From Uju Loke (named Bolo Bolo in Norie's chart) +the coast-line runs for 12 or 15 miles to Bolo Bolo, which space is +entirely omitted. Bolo Bolo forms the entrance of Bonthian Bay. + +"_16th._--Bonthian Bay. Called Banthi by the natives: is in lat. 5 deg. +37' S.; long. 119 deg. 33' E. + +"The bay is pretty well laid down by Dalrymple. The small Dutch fort, +or intrenchment, stands rather on the eastern bight of the bay, and +is composed of a few huts, surrounded by a ditch and green bank. Two +guns at each corner compose its strength, and the garrison consists of +about thirty Dutchmen and a few Javanese soldiers. We were cordially +and hospitably received by the officers, and, after a great deal +of trouble and many excuses, here procured horses to carry us to +the waterfall. Bonthian Hill is immediately over this place; a flat +space of rice-ground, some miles in extent, only intervening. The +hill (so called) may with more propriety be designated as a range +of mountains, which here attain their utmost height and sink down +gradually almost across the peninsula. The view is most attractive; +the green and refreshing rice-grounds in the front and behind, the +slopes of the mountain and its various peaks, verdant grass, wooded +chasms, and all the inequalities which mark a mountain region. I am +very anxious to mount to the summit; but so many difficulties are +thrown in the way, that I almost despair--horses and guides are not +to be procured. The Dutch say the natives are lazy: the natives say +they dare not go without authority--either way we are the losers; +but the officers certainly exert themselves in our favor. Coming +into this bay, there is some difficulty in distinguishing the fort; +but coming from the westward, its position may readily be known by +steering for two lumps on the S.E. declivity of the mountain. + +"_18th._--Got ashore by seven o'clock to start for the waterfall; +till nine we were detained by want of horses, but after much trouble +the animals were procured, and off we started. Our party consisted +of three doctors (him of the fortification, a German gentleman, +Treacher, and Theylingen) and myself, with native guides. The road +lay for a short way along the beach, then struck into the thicket, +and we commenced a gradual ascent. The scenery was most striking and +lovely; glades and glens, grassy knolls and slopes, with scattered +trees, and the voice of a hidden river which reached our ears from +a deep valley on the left hand. Proceeding thus for some distance, +we at length plunged into the wood, and descending a short space, +found ourselves by the sides of the stream below the waterfall. Here, +breakfast being finished, we all stripped to our trowsers, entered the +water, and advanced along the bed of the river to the fall. The banks +on either hand, steep and woody, prevented any other mode of approach, +and the stream, rushing down and falling over huge rocks, rendered the +only available one any thing but easy. At times we were up to the arms, +then crawling out and stealing with care over wet and slippery stones, +now taking advantage of a few yards of dry ground, and ever and anon +swimming a pool to shorten an unpleasant climb. In this manner we +advanced about half a mile, when the fall became visible; thick trees +and hanging creepers intervened; between and through the foliage we +first saw the water glancing and shining in its descent. The effect +was perfect. After some little further and more difficult progress, +we stood beneath the fall, of about 150 feet sheer descent. The wind +whirled in eddies, and carried the sleet over us, chilling our bodies, +but unable to damp our admiration. The basin of the fall is part of a +circle, with the outlet forming a funnel; bare cliffs, perpendicular on +all sides, form the upper portion of the vale, and above and below is +all the luxuriant vegetation of the East; trees, arched and interlaced, +and throwing down long fantastic roots and creepers, shade the scene, +and form one of the richest sylvan prospects I have ever beheld. The +water, foaming and flashing, and then escaping amid huge gray stones +on its troubled course--clear and transparent, expanding into tranquil +pools, with the flickering sunshine through the dense foliage--all +combine to form at scene such as Tasso has described. [10] + +"Inferior in body of water to many falls in Switzerland, it is superior +to any in sylvan beauty; its deep seclusion, its undisturbed solitude, +and the difficulty of access, combine to heighten its charms to +the imagination. Our descent was like our upward progress. Having +again dressed ourselves, we rested for a time, and then started +for Bonthian--wearing away the rest of the day shooting amid the +hills. Theylingen and myself procured many specimens, and returned +laden with our spoil, and charmed with our day's excursion. The +waterfall is called Sapo, from the neighboring green peak of that +name. The height of our resting-place (not the highest point of the +day's ascent) was 750.5 feet, by Newman's two barometers; yet this is +the bottom of the mountain on its western slope. The officers dined +with us; they are very polite and kind; and we retired early to rest, +all the better for our excursion. + +"_19th._--At 6 A.M. went with the Dutch officers shooting, and reached +the same stream which forms the waterfall. The scenery delightful; +water cool, and pleasant for bathing, a luxury I enjoyed in high +perfection. Aboard again to a late breakfast." + + + + + +CHAPTER VI. + + Dain Matara, the Bugis,--Excursions in Celebes.--Dispute + with the Rajah's son-in-law.--Baboon shot.--Appearance of the + country.--Visit the Resident.--Barometrical observations.--The + Bugis.--Geography.--Coral reefs.--Visit the Rana of + Lamatte.--Population and products of the country. + + +"I may here, indulge in a brief episode to introduce my Bugis +companion, Dain Matara,--which properly I should have done long +since,--a man well born, and, for his country, affluent and educated: +he offered at Singapore, to accompany me on this expedition, +refusing all pay or remuneration, and stating that the good name +to be acquired, and the pleasure of seeing different places, would +recompense, him. At first, I must own this disinterestedness rendered +me suspicious; but conceiving that the greatest utility might accrue +from his assistance, I agreed to take him with his servant. Our long +passage seemed to make us well acquainted, and, I believe, raised a +mutual confidence. Dain, cheerful, good-tempered, and intelligent, +gained daily on my esteem; and, by the time we reached Bonthian, +I was rejoiced that he accompanied me. + +"On this day we succeeded in procuring horses and guides for the +_hill_, as it is called. + +"_20th._--By 8 A.M. our preparations were complete, and we mounted our +horses; a motley group we formed, composed of Treacher, Theylingen, +and myself, two seamen (Spence and Balls), Dain Matara, a son-in-law +of the Bonthian Rajah, and six footmen. Provisions for four days +were on one of the horses, and a goodly stock of fowling-pieces, +beside my mountain barometer. The plain was soon cleared; and three +hours' ride by a good horse-path brought us to the village of Senua, +consisting of a dozen houses. We found the inhabitants hospitable, +and took refuge from a heavy squall of wind and rain in the best +house the place afforded. During the rain the thermometer sunk to +76 deg., but rose directly afterward. At half-past one the rain cleared +away, but we were detained until three by the Bugis getting their +dinner. During this time I strayed along the sparkling stream which +runs by the village, and after enjoying a bathe, called to horse, in +order to proceed. Great was my surprise, however, to be told by the +rajah's son-in-law that he supposed we were going back. A discussion +arose,--he declaring there was no road for the horses, and that we +could not go farther; while I insisted, if he would not advance, I +should continue my journey on foot. After much time had been lost, +our guide set off slowly and reluctantly, and we proceeded for two +or three miles, when, finding our head turned to the southward, +and the road descending, I again called a halt, and was once more +told it was not possible to mount farther. A scheme had been formed +to lead us round about, and take us gradually down, until too late +to mount again. A long parley ensued; both parties seemed resolute; +and it finished by our unloading the baggage-horse, and making a +small parcel of necessaries to carry on foot. Our guide, however, +never intended matters to go so far, and we finished at last by taking +half the horses, and allowing him (the rajah's son-in-law) to descend +with the rest. This being done, we had to retrace our road nearly to +Senua; and a little before sunset our party crossed an awkward stream, +and struck into the path up the mountains. + +"A short walk brought us to Lengan Lengang about dusk, where we put +up for the night. For the first time, this day I saw the cockatoo +in his wild state; I was within easy shot of two of them, but the +stream lay between us, and I felt some compunction at shooting these +favorite birds. + +"Lourikeets were in great plenty, and many varieties of pigeons +and doves, beside other birds. Near Lengan Lengang we encountered a +community of dusky baboons, many of them very large and powerful: +after a hard scramble I got within shot of them; on my firing the +first barrel, the young ones and females made off, but the leaders +of the band disdained to retreat, and, with threatening gestures and +grimaces, covered the retreat of their party. The consequence was, +I sacrificed one of these heroes, of a large size: he fell from +the branch on which he was seated into a deep valley, and his fall +completed the rout of the rest. Spence, in the mean time, having +arrived, I dispatched him to secure the prize; but at the bottom +of the valley the baboons again showed themselves, and manifested +every inclination to fall on him; another barrel put them to flight, +and between us we dragged the fallen hero to the horses. + +"The village of Lengan Lengang consists of about a dozen houses, is +situated in a nook of the hills, and surrounded by cocoanut-trees. We +were accommodated in the principal house, and treated with every +hospitality. The people of the hills are poor, though their land is +fertile, and produces abundance of rice and Indian corn. Theft is +said to be common, especially of horses, and the care of the horses +belonging to travelers devolves on the villagers; for, in case a +horse is stolen, a fine is imposed on the population in general. To +prevent this misfortune, our hosts kept playing, as long as we could +bear it, on an instrument like a clarinet; but at twelve o'clock, +after trying in vain to sleep, we were obliged to stop the noise and +risk the horses. + +"This instrument is about three feet long, with five or six holes, +and a flat mouthpiece on the cane-tube; the sound is musical when +gently breathed into, but in their usual mode of playing, it emits +frightful shrieks. During the night the thermometer sunk to 69 deg., +and we were glad of our blankets. + +"_21st._--Rose between five and six. Took some barometrical +observations, and at half-past six continued our upward way. As far as +Lengan Lengang the country presents beautiful woodland and mountain +scenery, with luxuriant vegetation, thickly wooded valleys, and +sparkling streams. The flats and valleys are occupied by rice-grounds, +and the pasturage is of the very finest description for all sorts +of cattle: the grass short and rich. Lengan Lengang is the last +point where the cocoanut or other palms is seen; but there it grows +remarkably well, and attains a great height. Above this point the wood, +generally speaking, becomes smaller, and the vegetation more coarse, +the hills being covered with a rank high grass, and ferns, similar to +those in England. Three hours' slow traveling brought us to the village +of Lokar, situated at the foot of the peak of that name. I mounted, +while breakfast was preparing, nearly to the top, and up to the belt +of thick wood which surrounds the last 100 or 150 feet. Observations +were repeated here, showing a great fall of the mercury, and afterward +taken at the village. Lokar consists of a few scattered huts, situated +amid gardens of fruit and vegetables: the mango, the guava, the jack, +and the plantain, with cabbages and Indian corn, compose the stock of +the inhabitants; the latter constitutes their principal food, and is +granaried for use in large quantities, not only in the house, but on +frameworks of bamboo without, on which it is thickly hung in rows, +with the head downward, to protect it from the weather. The highest +summit, called Lumpu Balong, was visible when we first arrived, some +miles in advance: at breakfast-time the clouds entirely covered it, +and rolled down upon Lokar in heavy rain, driving us into a miserable +hut for shelter. + +"During the rain the thermometer fell to 70 deg.. At 3 P.M. started for +some huts we saw at the foot of Lumpu Balong, having first sent our +horses back to Lengan Lengang, being assured their farther progress +was impracticable. When, however, our guide from Lokar understood +our intention of reaching Lumpu Balong, he objected to proceed, on +the plea that the village in advance was inhabited by people from +Turatte. We managed to coax him on, and, after two and a half hours' +walk, reached Parontalas. The country, ascending gradually, becomes +more and more wild; the wood stunted; and the streams, finding their +way through masses of rock, leave strong traces of their occasional +violence. Parontalas stands on the edge of the forest which skirts +Lumpu Balong, from which it has not long been retrieved. It consists +of a few scattered huts, far apart. Potatoes, tobacco, and coffee +are grown here, the former in great abundance. Like the rest of the +people, their food consists of Indian corn; and, as in the other +villages, they breed horses. Our host of Parontalas was very polite, +and gave us some fowls and the accommodation of his house; the latter, +indeed, was needful, for we were all badly provided with covering, +and the mountain air was raw and cold. To our request for guides to +ascend the mountain he replied, that it was necessary to consult the +head man of the district, who lived some little distance off. In the +interim we made ourselves very happy, determined to ascend with or +without a guide or guides. We lay down at nine, in order to be ready +for the morning's work, the thermometer standing at 59 deg. in the house. + +"_22d._--At five, when we rose, the thermometer stood at 56 deg. in the +air. The head man had arrived, and willingly gave us guides, warning +us only of the difficulty of the ascent. Nothing could exceed the +kindness and attention of this simple old man. He remembered the time +the English had the country, and spoke of his people's respect for our +nation, and their regret that we had left the country. At 6 A.M. we +started, and, after walking about a mile, plunged into the belt of +forest which environs Lumpu Balong. From six till half-past two, +we were alternately ascending and descending, scrambling over rocks +or fallen timber, or cutting a path through the most tangled thicket +that ever tore the wayfarer. To add to our difficulty, during the +latter half of the ascent, we could procure no water, which caused us +considerable suffering. At length, however, we stood at the summit of +Lumpu Balong, and looked, on either side, over a vast sea of fleecy +clouds which rolled beneath. The top is a narrow ridge, covered with +stunted trees and luxuriant moss; and a second peak to the westward, +of rather less elevation, is separated from it by a declivity. I +climbed to the top of a tree to look along the mountain, and make +certain that we were at the highest point; and having convinced myself +of this, I proceeded with the barometric observations, which were +concluded by 3 P.M.; for it was highly necessary to get down before +night overtook us in the dreary and inhospitable forest. Our thirst, +too, was tormenting, and increased by hearing the fall of a torrent +deep in the valley to the northward. + +"As far as I could observe, the northern face of the mountain was +perpendicular, and the ascent on that side would have been attended +with greater difficulty than from the point we chose. Our way down was +easier, and the descent was made as expeditiously as the nature of the +ground would allow. Having fairly worn our shoes off our feet, we were +pierced by brambles and thorns in a cruel manner. Our guide, in going +down, discovered a tree with a bee-hive in it containing great store of +honey. The Bugis instantly attacked the tree, on seeing which my first +impression was, that it would be prudent to retreat to a distance; +but their composure induced me to remain; and, to my surprise, when +the tree was laid open, the honey was taken out in large quantities, +and the bees brushed off the comb without offering to sting. Though +flying round about us, and on the hands of all the people, they were +quite innocent of harm; and I conclude, therefore, they were different +from the common honey-bee. The honey was excellent, and refreshed us +for a few minutes, but ultimately only added to our thirst. At length, +about five, we reached a stream of water, and quenched our thirst with +draughts of the coolest and most limpid mountain stream. The Bugis, +though, like ourselves, they had been, without any water from nine +o'clock in the morning till five in the evening, refused to drink, +alleging that it was highly injurious after eating honey! Glad were we, +just at dark, to get clear of the forest; and a short walk farther +brought us to our temporary dwelling. We were much knocked up, and +very much torn with the thorns. A brief dinner and a delicious cigar, +and we lay down to sleep--not even incommoded by the cold, which kept +us awake the last night. + +"_23d._--Having, through mistake, forgotten to bring up any money, +I had no means of repaying the obligations received from these +simple hill-people except _by promises_. My old friend ordered the +guide of yesterday to accompany us to the plains, to receive his own +payment, and to bring some things, for others, up there. At ten we +hobbled forth, very foot-sore, and lacking proper covering for our +feet. The prospect of four or five hours' walk to Lengan Lengang +was very unpleasant; and in proportion to our expected pain was +our gratification on meeting _all_ our horses within three miles +of Parontalas--_all_ the horses, which all the men swore could not, +by any possibility, ascend, were there; and though without saddles +and bridles, or the Bugis, we were too glad to mount. We went down +by another road. Four hours brought us to Lengan Lengang, where we +rested for two hours, and, remounting, reached Bonthian at about seven +o'clock in the evening. Thus concluded this interesting excursion +into a hill-region, where we attained the summit of Lumpu Balong, +never before reached by European. The Dutch officers informed me that +three successive residents of Bonthian had attempted it and failed. + +"Before I conclude, I may take a brief survey of the country. The +hills are generally rounded or flat at top, and not offering any +rugged or broken peaks. The scenery about Senua and Lengan Lengang +is the perfection of woodland, with the picturesque characteristics +of a mountain region; the climate admirably suited, thence to the +summit, for Europeans, and capable of producing most European and +tropical plants to perfection. Coffee plantations on these hills +might be undertaken with certainty of success, and there is much in +the character of the natives which would facilitate the operation. To +the westward of Lokar, and somewhat lower, is a fine extensive plain, +which we just skirted coming down; it was cultivated in every part, +apparently with rice. The vegetable productions of the hills I have +briefly mentioned; but I may add that the wild raspberry was found, +and that wild guavas grow in the greatest abundance, as well as +oranges and grapes. + +"The animal kingdom, of course, we had no time to examine; but +the babi rupa is said to be found in the higher regions; and in +the forest, toward the summit of Lumpu Balong, we saw the dung of +wild cattle, which, I am told, are a species of urus. The birds we +saw were, paroquets of two sorts, viz., the lourikeet and a small +green paroquet; a large green pigeon, specimens of which we got; +the cream-colored pigeon of Borneo, beside many others. + +"The geological formation of the region I must leave to others. I +brought down some specimens of the rocks and loose stones, which are, +I believe, pummice; if so, I presume the formation volcanic, similar +to Java. + +"_24th._--Called on the resident, and saw the rajah. + +"_25th._--Christmas, with his jolly nose and icy hands. Here it is +hot enough! Were I to live in this country, I should retire for the +season up in the mountains. Dined with the Resident of Bonthian; by no +means surprised that he and his congeners had failed in their attempt +to climb the mountain: the resident is a native! In the evening, +celebrated the day with all sorts of sports. + +"_26th._--Mid-day, quitted Bonthian, and ran to Boele Comba or Compa. + +"_27th._--I have little to say of Boele Comba. It is situated in the +bight of the bay, eastward of Bonthian. There appears to be much, +confusion an Horsburgh's Directory about the latitude and longitude, +and the hill called after the place. This hill is the last of the +mountain-range, somewhat detached, covered with wood, of moderate +elevation, and peaked. From our anchorage, two miles from the fort, +it bore N.N.W. The fort is similar to the one at Bonthian, the country +pretty, and nearly level. The Bonthian mountains (_i. e._ Lumpu Balong +and the range) show steep and well in the background. Game abounds, +by report. Europeans are subject to complaints of the eyes, and +occasionally to fever. Any vessel running in should be very careful, +for the charts are defective, and Boele Comba reef is said to project +farther to the westward of the fort than laid down. + +"I here subjoin a list of our barometric observations, the upper +barometer reduced to the rate of the lower and standard one:-- + + + + _Senua, 20th December, 1839._ + + Bar. A. D. + + 1. 30.054 86 87 3h 15m P.M. + 2. 28.385 79 80 + + + _Lengan Lengang, 21st December._ + + Bar. A. D. + + 1. 30.119 79 78.5 6h 30m A.M. + 2. 27.988 70 69.5 6h 0m " + + + _Lokar Peak, 21st December, 100 feet below summit._ + + Bar. A. D. + + 1. 30.095 90 90 10h 30m A.M. + 2. 25.975 79 79 + + + _Hill on the way to Lumpu Balong, 22d December._ + + Bar. A. D. + + 1. 30.144 90 90 Mean between 8h and noon. + 2. 23.612 ... 66 65.5 10h 40m A.M. + + + _Lumpu Balong Peak, 22d December._ + + Bar. A. D. + + 1. 30.146 89.5 90.5 2h 0m P.M. + 2. 23.718 64 63.5 2h 30m " + + + +_28th._--Leaving Boele Comba after breakfast, we shaped our course +for Point Berak. + +"With the richest country, the natives of these places are poor, and +they bear no good-will to their rulers. It is likewise certain that few +active measures are resorted to for forwarding the development of the +native character and local resources. The resident is a Macassar-born +native, and this fact alone speaks volumes for the mode and manner of +government. The people of the country I found a kind and simple race; +and though they are accused of pride and laziness by their masters, I +could not, circumstances taken into consideration, discover any trace, +of the latter vice, and the former I can readily forgive them. That the +Bugis are not an indolent race is well proved by their whole conduct, +wherever circumstances offer any inducement to exertion. Even here, +the cleared country and the neat cultivation prove them far otherwise; +and traces are visible everywhere on the mountains of their having +been more highly cultivated than at present. Coffee plantations +once flourished, and being destroyed during a war, years ago, have +never been renewed. Inclosures and partition walls in decay are very +frequent, marking the former boundary of cultivation. That they are +independent enough to be proud, I honor them for! The officers allowed +they were courageous, and one designated them as '_fier comme un +Espagnol_;' and, on the whole, no doubt exists in my mind that they +are people easily to be roused to exertion, either agricultural or +commercial; their sullen and repulsive manners toward their masters +rather indicating a dislike to their sway, and the idleness complained +of only proving that the profits of labor are lower than they ought +to be. + +"Nothing so strongly marks the degradation of a race or nation as +a cheerful acquiescence under a foreign rule. The more virtuous, +the more civilized, the more educated a people, the more turbulent, +indolent, and sullen, when reduced to a state of subjection; the +fewer qualities will they have to please their masters, when foreign +rule is oppressive, or looks solely to the advantage of the country +of the conquerors, and not of the conquered. There is no race will +willingly submit: the bayonet and the sword, the gallows and the whip, +imprisonment and confiscation, must be constantly at work to keep +them under. + +"Leaving Boele Comba, as I before said, we shaped our course for +Tanjong Berak, passing between that point and the north island. The +passage is excellent, clear of all danger, as far as we could see, +with deep water. The rocks reported to exist by Horsburgh, and put +down on Norie's chart, have no existence. The Bugis prahus always use +this channel, and know them not; and the captain of a Dutch cruiser +informed me that he had often run through the passage at night, +and that it was clear of all danger or obstruction. + +"My own observation went to verify the fact, for every part of the +passage appears deep and clear, and we passed over the spots where +these rocks are marked. Approaching Tanjong Berak, there is a sandy +beach, where a vessel may get anchorage in case the wind dies away. The +tides in the channel are strong; here, and along the south coast, the +ebb runs from the eastward, the flood from the west. Having cleared +the channel, we hauled into the Bay of Boni, which, although running +in a north and south direction, has some headlands extending to the +eastward. There are two places marked on the chart, viz. Berak and +Tiero; but these, instead of being towns or villages, are names of +districts; the first, reaching from Tanjong Berak, about 15 miles, +till it joins Tiero; Tiero, extending from the northern confine of +Berak to Tanjong Labu, 15 miles in all. To the northward and eastward +is a high island called Balunrueh. From Tanjong Berak the water along +the coast is very deep; no soundings with 50 fathoms. Toward evening we +went into Tiero Bay, a pretty secluded spot. The southern part of the +bay is foul, having a reef visible at low water, The northern headland +has a spit running from it, with 14 fathom half a mile (or little more) +off. Within the bay there is no bottom with 50 fathom till near its +northern extremity, where the water shoals suddenly. Running in, in +a squall, we got into 3 1/4 fathom, where we anchored. This country +belongs to the Dutch as far as Point Labu. + +"_29th._--Calm all day. Sounded the bay: the southern point has a +steep coral reef nearly a quarter of a mile off. The southern part of +the bay is inclosed by a reef, part of which seems to me artificial, +for the purpose of catching fish, and is shallow: outside the reef +the water is deep dose to. The western shore is lined by a reef +close to it, and the water is deep. The center part of the bay is +very deep; and within 100 yards of where we lay we got no bottom +at 17 fathoms. The next cast was 6, and the next 3 fathoms--hard +clay bottom. A small river discharges itself, in the northern part, +inside the anchorage: there is a considerable depth within, but the +bar is shallow. The scenery on the river is beautiful; wild at first, +and gradually becoming undulating and cultivated. Birds are plenty: +cockatoos abound, of which I shot two. This part of the country +possesses considerable geological interest: the hills round the bay +are of slight elevation; and 80 or 100 feet from the sea level are +large masses of coral rock, upheaved by some convulsion. + +"_30th._--Under weigh. Brought up in 23 fathoms, amid the coral shoals. + +"_31st._--Visited the island of Balunrueh for sights. + +"Tanjong Labu is bluff and bold, and of moderate elevation. The +land from thence trends away westward, forming a long bay, which, +for distinction, may be called Labu Bay, at the N.W. part of which is +the town of Songi, the principal place about here. Between Labu and +Songi are the following countries: Kupi Kajang, Pakah, Buah, Kalaku, +Baringan, and Magnarabunbang; each with a separate petty rajah. The +country is moderately well cleared; about an average height, near +the shore, of 300 feet; with few habitations about, but no towns or +villages. The mountain range throws a spur downward to the sea in the +vicinity of Songi and the fine peaks of Lumpu Balong; and Wawa Karang, +with the _confusion_ of mountains, form a magnificent background to the +prospect. From Magnarabunbang the land runs away to the eastward toward +Tanjong Salanketo, which must be described on a future occasion. In +the offing are several islands and numerous reefs. The principal +island is Balunrueh, 400 or 500 feet high; bold, steep, and covered +with trees, except at its northern extremity; where it is low, with a +sandy point. Off this north point runs a coral reef; direction 354 deg., +and extent about two miles. At the S.W. angle of the island there +is likewise a reef stretching half a mile; and the shores all round, +for a short distance, are lined with coral, outside of which the water +is apparently very deep. We could get no soundings with a hand lead, +half a mile to the westward. + +"Off Balunrueh, to the S.E., is the islet of Liang Liang; next to +Liang Liang, Tanbunoh, which is larger; then Cadingareh Batantampeh +(the largest), Cotingduan Lariahriah, and two islands to the northward +called Canallo. Balunrueh and Batantampeh have both indifferent +fresh water; the former near the low point at the north end. From +the S.W. end of Liang Liang a reef runs out. The bearing, from the +small hill, over the watering place of Balunrueh, was 77 deg.. The reef +extends to 104 deg., and stretches to the southward beside: near Liang +Liang it is narrow. Its limits I could not define. + +"Between Liang Liang and Tanbunoh a narrow reef, and spits from most +of the islands. Two patches lay off Balunrueh about two miles and a +half: the first, bearing 319 deg., is narrow, and about half a mile long; +the other smaller, and bearing 287 deg.. Part of the day we passed on +Balunrueh was very hot; but we got satisfactory sights, and sailed +round the island, returning to the vessel about six in the evening. + +"I must now return to Labu, to give some account of the channel +between the reefs; as, from the appearance of the charts, it would +seem impossible to navigate the western side of the bay. Having +passed Tanjong Labu at a distance of 3 1/2 or 4 miles, get the +flat-topped hill called Bulu Tanna ahead. Close to the Bulu Tanna, +in the foreground, is another smaller hill, with two remarkable tufts +on the top: this hill, just open to the eastward of Bulu Tanna, +is the leading mark for Songi, which stands to the westward. This +mark will lead clear, or very nearly so, of all the reefs; but as +there is uncertainty in the distance from Tanjong Labu, it may be +necessary to diverge from the straight course in order to avoid some +of the patches. In the daytime the coral is seen with the greatest +ease; and a vessel with a lookout aloft, and a breeze, may proceed +with safely. The first reef is on the starboard hand; part was dry, +and shoal-water about. This first patch is in the proximity of the +great reef called Melompereh, which runs to the eastward. Beside +these, the channel is occasionally lined by patches on either hand; +but is nowhere narrower than a mile and a half, and is anything but +difficult navigation, so far, in clear weather. + +"_Jan. 4th, 1840._--Arrived off Songi on the 1st, and dispatched a +boat to the old Rajah, or Rana, of Lamatte. Our answer was, that not, +having been to Boni, she feared receiving us, as she felt inclined; +but if we would come to her house, she should be glad to see us. On +the following day, accordingly, we paid our visit at her residence, +which is situated about four miles up the river Tanca. + +"The old lady is about sixty-five years of age, and (as she herself +informed us) very poor. Her house, indeed, bears every mark of great +poverty; having a leaky roof, and not sufficient matting to cover +the bamboo floors. She was kind, and seemed pleased to see us; said +I should henceforward be her son, and that nothing but her fear of +the Boni Rajah prevented her receiving me in the best way in her +power; but pointing to the roof and to the floor, she repeated, +'I have nothing.' I presented her with such articles as I thought +would be acceptable to her; and, in return, she gave me a sarong. + +"The population of the country is considerable. The last district +I mentioned was Magnarabunbang. The town of that name, on the +sea-side, consists of forty-five houses, beside a roving population of +Badjows. Along the coast to the eastward, and close to Magnarabunbang, +is the river of Songi. Proceeding up this shallow river, the first +village is Tacolompeh, situated on the right bank, and consisting of +twenty houses; nearly opposite the village of Pangassa, of thirteen +houses; and farther up, about four miles from the river's mouth, +stands Songi, consisting of 164 houses on the right bank, and 60 +on the left. These places are all on the low ground, and surrounded +with cocoanut-trees. + +"Joining the district of Magnarabunbang, on the coast, is Lamatte, the +rajanate of our old friend. The river, like the Songi, is shallow, and +running through very low ground. On the left bank is Luppa, consisting +of twenty-five houses; then, on the right, Ulo, twenty-two houses; +and above Ulo comes Ullue, of twelve houses. Nearly opposite Ullue is +Balammepa, with thirty houses, superior to the others, and inhabited by +merchants who have made money in trading voyages. This village sends +yearly two prahus to Singapore. Just above Ullue stand seven houses; +and above Balammepa is Tanca, the residence of the Rajah of Lamatte, +consisting of ten houses. The streams, as I have said, are shallow, +and the ground low, neatly cultivated with Indian corn, and abounding +in cocoanut-trees. Behind Magnarabunbang there is a narrow strip +of low ground, which becomes wider as it advances to the eastward, +with here and there moderate elevations. + +"The chief product of the country is coffee, which is grown in great +quantities on the hills, but brought down as it ripens, when it +is collected by the Bugis merchants for their yearly shipments. The +yearly produce is stated to be 2000 coyans or 80,000 peculs. The price +is from fifteen to sixteen Java rupees the pecul; to which must be +added the trouble and expense of storing and clearing from the inner +skin. Tortoise-shell is brought in by the Badjows; and mother-of-pearl +shells in any quantity there is demand for. Taking the number of houses +in this small space, above described, the total will be 308 houses, +which reckoned at the low estimate of eight persons for each house, +will give 2464 inhabitants; this, however, is far below the proper +estimate, as there are villages scattered between the rivers, and +numbers of detached houses; in all, therefore, safely computed at +5000 persons. The villages, with the exception of Balammepa, have +an aspect of poverty, and the country is ravaged by that frightful +scourge the small-pox, and likewise some cases apparently of cholera, +from the account given of the complaint. Near the hill of Bulu Tanna +there is a hot spring, and likewise, by the report of the natives, some +slight remains of an old building. I regretted much not seeing these; +but the natives, with much politeness, begged me not to go previous to +my visit to Boni, as they would be answerable for allowing strangers +to see the country without orders from the chief rajah. All I see +and hear convinces me that the Rajah of Boni has great power over +the entire country. On a friendly communication with him, therefore, +depends our chance of seeing something of the interior. + +"The inhabitants here are polite, but shy and reserved: and the death +of the Rana of Songi and the absence of the Rajah Mooda, her reported +successor, have been against us. + +"_5th._--Sailing from Songi about 4 P.M., we directed our course +for Tanjong Salanketo. The breeze was stiff, which caused us to use +considerable precaution in sailing among the shoals. Assisted by +a native Nacodah, by name Dain Pativi, we were enabled to keep the +tortuous channel, of which otherwise we should have been ignorant. A +little farther than the Tanca river is a shoal stretching from the +shore, to avoid which we kept Canallo on our lee bow: this being +cleared, we gradually luffed up, ran between two shoals, and passed +several others." + + + + + + +CHAPTER VII. + + Mr. Brooke's second visit to Sarawak.--The civil war.--Receives a + present of a Dyak boy.--Excursion to the seat of war.--Notices + of rivers, and settlements on their banks.--Deaths and + burials.--Reasons for and against remaining at Sarawak.--Dyak + visitors.--Council of war.--Why side with the Rajah.--Mode of + constructing forts.--State of enemy's and Rajah's forces.--Conduct + of the war. + + +Mr. Brooke continued his cruise for some time, and made very +interesting collections of natural history, beside acquiring much +insight into the native history, language, and customs, his detailed +remarks on which it is to be hoped he will at a future day give to +the public. He then returned to Singapore, where he was detained for +several months by ill health; but availed himself of the opportunity +to recopper and refit the Royalist, and set everything else in order +for his next visit to Sarawak, the remarkable results of which are +related in the following pages. Still sick and languid though he was, +the very air of Borneo, and the prospect of activity, seemed to restore +him to life, after the listless rest at Singapore, with "nothing to +observe;" and only cheered by the kindest attentions and hospitalities +of the inhabitants of that interesting and important settlement. + +On the second visit of Mr. Brooke to Sarawak, about the end of August, +1840, he found the inhabitants in nearly the same state as at first, +although there was much talk of reinforcements, and decisive measures +for bringing the war to a close. The two parties lay within thirty +miles of each other, the rebels holding the upper part of the river, +and communication with the interior. The sultan, however, had sent down +the Orang Kaya de Gadong to take more active measures, and his arrival +stimulated Muda Hassim to something like exertion. This occurred +on the fourth September, 1840, as appears by Mr. Brooke's journal, +from which I shall give various extracts indicative not only of the +character of my friend, whose ideas were written down at the time the +impressions were made, but also supplying a distinct picture of the +progress of this novel and amusing civil warfare, and demonstrating +the unwarlike character of the Sarawak Borneons. + +"An army of mixed Malays and Dyaks was raised to attack the Dyak +tribes in rebellion, and this service was successfully performed; +the rebel Dyaks were defeated, and most of them have since come +over to the rajah. Their forces being weakened by desertion, were +reported not to amount to more than 400 or 500 men, in four or five +forts situated on the river; and it now remained to drive them from +their last stronghold of resistance. It was confidently asserted by +the rajah and Macota, that, were it not for the underhand assistance +of the Sultan of Sambas, who had constantly supplied them with food +and ammunition, the insurgents would long since have been dispersed. + +"At the period in question they were said to be in great distress +for want of provisions; and as a force was collecting to attack them +from various quarters, it was greatly to be hoped that the war was +verging to a termination. During my week's stay I have frequently +visited Muda Hassim, and he has likewise been on board: our good +understanding knows no interruption; and these savage, treacherous, +bloodthirsty Borneons are our good friends, with whom we chat and +laugh every evening in familiar converse. I find no cause to alter my +last year's opinion, that they have few active vices; but indolence +is the root of their evils. + +"_Sept. 7th._--Last night I received a strange and embarrassing +present, in the shape of a young Dyak boy of five years old--a +miserable little prisoner, made during this war, from the tribe of +Brong. The gift caused me vexation, because I knew not what to do +with the poor innocent; and yet I shrink from the responsibility of +adopting him. My first wish is to return him to his parents and his +tribe; and if I find I cannot do this, I believe it will be bettor +to carry him with me than leave him to become the slave of a slave: +for should I send him back, such will probably be his fate. I wish +the present had been a calf instead of a child. + +"_9th._--Situ, my Dyak boy, seems content and happy; and judging by his +ways, and his fondness for tobacco, he must be older than I at first +supposed. In pursuance of my desire to restore him to his parents +I made every inquiry as to their probable fate; but have learned +nothing that leaves me any hope that I shall be able to do so. The +Brong tribe having taken part with the rebels, were attacked by the +rajah's people; and many were killed and the rest scattered. Pino, +the Brong, knows not whether Situ's parents are alive or dead; nor, +if the former, whither they have fled. Supposing my endeavors to +restore the child fail, I have resolved to keep him with me, for many +reasons. The first is that his future prospects will be better, and +his fate as a freeman at Singapore happier, than as a slave in Borneo; +the second, that he can be made a Christian. I can easily provide +for him in some respectable household, or take him to England, as may +hereafter be most advantageous for him; and at the former place he can +always be made a comfortable servant with good training. Yet with all +this, I cannot disguise from myself that there is responsibility--a +heavy moral responsibility--attached to this course, that might +be avoided: but then, _should_ it be avoided? Looking to the boy's +interests--temporal, perhaps, eternal--I think it ought not; and so, +provided always I cannot place him where humanity and nature dictate, +I will take the responsibility, and serve this wretched and destitute +child as far as lies in my power. He is cast on my compassion; +I solemnly accept the charge; and I trust his future life may bear +good fruit and cause me to rejoice at my present decision. + +"_Oct. 2d._--Lying at Sarawak, losing valuable time, but pending the +war difficult to get away; for whenever the subject is mentioned, Muda +Hassim begs me not to desert him just as it is coming to a close; and +daily holds out prospects of the arrival of various Dyak tribes. The +rajah urged upon me that he was deceived and betrayed by the intrigues +of Pangerans, who aimed at alienating his country; and that if I left +him, he should probably have to remain here for the rest of his life, +being resolved to die rather than yield to the unjust influence which +others were seeking to acquire over him; and he appealed to me that +after our friendly communication I could not, as an Engliah gentleman, +desert him under such circumstances. I felt that honorably I could not +do so; and though reluctantly enough, I resolved to give him the aid +he asked;--small indeed, but of consequence in such a petty warfare. + +"_3d._--I started to join Macota at Leda Tanah. At 4h. 30m. P.M. a +pouring rain delayed us some time: and darkness setting in, rendered +our pull a long and very disagreeable one. We did not reach Leda Tanah +until eleven, when we found _the army_ in their boats, and a small +fort they had built on the bank of the river. I moved into Macota's +large boat, and slept there; while he, as commander-in-chief, went +backward and forward from one post to another during the night. + +"_4th._--At Leda Tanah the river divided into two branches; one part +running past Siniawan, and the other to the left--likewise to another +point of the mountain-range. Above Siniawan is Sarambo, a high detached +mountain, perhaps 3000 feet in height, with a notch in the center. Off +Leda Tanah is a sand and pebble bank formed by the junction of the +two streams, and the country around is well cleared for this part; +while the graves on the right bank bear witness to the population +of former days. It is represented to have been a flourishing place, +and the neighborhood well inhabited, until the breaking out of this +unhappy war. The situation is delightful, and advantageously chosen +at the confluence of the two streams. + +"_5th._--Ascended that to the left for a short distance. On the +left hand, just above Leda Tanah, is the small creek of Sarawak, the +original settlement, and from which the larger river now takes its +name. I intended to have returned to-day; but as the weather threatened +another deluge, I stopped till the following morning. It was a curious +sight to see the whole army bathe, with the commander-in-chief at +their head, and his Pangerans. The fare of these people is anything +but luxurious, for they get nothing but rice and salt; and they +were thankful in proportion for the small supplies of tea, sugar, +and biscuit I was able to spare them. + +"_6th._--Quitted Leda Tanah, and reached the Royalist in five hours, +one of which we were delayed by the way. The river is remarkably +pretty; banks cleared of jungle, with fine trees, and a view of the +mountains. Many parts are exceedingly shallow; but the natives state +there is a channel for a moderate-sized vessel as far as Leda Tanah." + +On Mr. Brooke's return on board the Royalist, he found his steward +Rankin, who had been lingering some time, still alive; and a seaman +named Daniel, whom he had left with a slight fever, suddenly expired +at ten at night in a fainting fit. He writes in his journal: "It is +difficult to allege the immediate cause of his death, which probably +arose from some organic complaint of the heart or the brain, quite +independent of fever. Five minutes before his decease the man's +pulse was high and full. The steward will follow in a few days; and +death, which has never before entered on board, will thus strike +two blows. To me it is a satisfaction that neither is in any way +attributable to climate. + +"_7th._--Muda Hassim rendered me every assistance. A grave was +prepared, and wood for a coffin, so that by two o'clock we proceeded to +inter the dead. His last resting-place was situated on a gently rising +ground behind the Chinamen's houses. The ensign was placed over his +simple bier, and he was carried by his shipmates to the grave. All who +could be spared attended, and I performed the service--that impressive +and beautiful service of the Church of England. + +"_8th._--Having the melancholy duty of yesterday over was a relief, +only alloyed by the sad prospect of a near recurrence. I now turned +my mind seriously to departure, having well weighed the pros and cons +of the subject. + +"In the first place, the greatest advantage would result from my +accompanying the rajah along the coast of Borneo; and if I could hope +a reasonable time would leave him free to go there, I would wait spite +of the season: for it is evident that by myself I should have to form +fresh connections among the chiefs, and without that I reckon it next +to impossible to penetrate even a moderate distance from the coast in +a strange place. The next reason is, that it has been intimated to me +that a rival faction, headed by Pangeran Usop, exists in Borneo Proper, +and that that Pangeran, from my known friendship to Muda Hassim, +might endeavor to injure me, _i. e._ kill me. At any rate, during +Muda Hassim's absence, I should be obstructed in all my proceedings, +and could not do more than sketch the bare coast-line. These are +strong and cogent reasons for remaining _for a time_, if the ultimate +object be attainable; and to these may be added my own feelings--my +reluctance to quit the rajah in the midst of difficulty and distress, +and his _very very sad face_ whenever I mention the topic. + +"On the other hand must be weighed the approach of the adverse +monsoon, the loss of time, and the failure of provisions, which, +though but luxuries to gentlemen which they can readily dispense +with, are nevertheless necessaries to seamen, without which they get +discontented, perhaps mutinous. There are good reasons on both sides. + +"_9th._--I sent Williamson to intimate my approaching departure; +and when I went in the evening the little man had such a sorrowful +countenance that my heart smote me. When I told him I would remain +if there were the slightest chance of a close to the war, his +countenance cleared, and he gaily repeated that my fortune and his +would bring this struggle to an end, though others forsook him. I +then consented to await the issue a few days longer, and to revisit +Leda Tanah to ascertain if the news were true. It ran to the effect +that the rebels, under the Patingi and Tumangong, are fortified at +the foot of the mountain of Sarambo, on which hill are three Dyak +tribes below that of Sarambo; over them Bombak; and on the summit +the Paninjow. The Bombak and Paninjow have already, in part, joined +Macota, and the Sarambo are to come in as to-day. These three last +Dyak tribes deserting the rebels will leave them surrounded in their +forts, which are commanded by the rest of the hill; and everything +promises well, if the opportunity be vigorously used. The Sow and the +Singe are in part at Leda Tanah, and more Dyaks daily joining. I must +push the rajah on to action, for help from without is not likely to +come. Yet I wish still more to accommodate matters; and if he would +spare the leaders' lives, I believe they would lay down their arms +on my guaranty. But though he does not say that he will kill them, +he will listen to no terms of compromise; and when I reflect that a +European monarch, in the same circumstances, would act in the same +way--that the laws of my own country would condemn the men for the +same offence--I cannot urge the subject into a personal matter. + +"_16th._--Rankin's (my steward's) death having been some time +inevitable, it was a relief when the event occurred. He was cut off in +the flower of manhood, from the effects of hard drinking, which even +his fine constitution could not resist. I buried him near the other +man, and had a neat inscription, with the name of the individual, +his ship and age, placed over each. + +"Days passed on, but not quite unrelieved by events. And now I may +positively state, that the war will be over in a few days, or not +over at all. The first of these events was the desertion of the Dyaks, +and the arrival of their chiefs with Macota. Next arrived 200 Chinese +from Sambas, under a very intelligent capitan. Rajah Ali came next, +bringing some ourang-outangs' heads; then Datu Naraja; and lastly, +Pangeran Jedut from Sarebus, with the information that the Dyaks +of that name, in consequence of a war with Linga, would not come +here. Thus they not only refused to come themselves, but obliged the +Linga people to stay at home to defend their country. To quiet this +coast the Sarebus should receive a severe lesson. + +"_17th._--I had a large party of Dyaks on board in the evening, +viz. the Singe, Sow, Bombak, and Paninjow, in all about fifteen men +and two old chiefs. They ate and drank, and asked for everything, +but stole nothing. One man wore a necklace of beads set with human +teeth, taken of course in war, which I got from him for two yards of +red cloth. Another was ornamented with a necklace of bears' teeth; +and several had such a profusion of small white beads about their +necks as to resemble the voluminous foldings of the old fashioned +cravat. As far as I could observe, they all seemed in earnest about +attacking Siniawan; and their allegiance to the rajah was as warm now +(in words) as it had been heretofore defective in action. + +"_18th._--Proceeded in the long-boat to Leda Tanah, which we reached +in three and a half hours' pulling, and just in time to witness the +start of 150 Malays and 100 Dyaks of Lundu for the mountain of Sarambo, +at the foot of which Siniawan and the enemies' forts are situated. + +"_19th._--Did everything in my power to urge Macota to advance +and divert the attention of the rebels from the party going up the +mountain, but in vain: Malay-like, he would wait. + +"_20th._--I have before remarked that two rivers formed a junction +at Leda Tanah; and this day I ascended the left hand stream, or, as +they call it, the Songi besar (_i. e._ great Songi). The scenery is +picturesque; the banks adorned with a light and variegated foliage +of fruit-trees; and everywhere bearing traces of former clearing and +cultivation. In the background is the range of mountains, among which +Stat is conspicuous from his noble and irregular shape. On our return, +the white flag (a Hadji's turban) was descried on the mountain, +being the prearranged signal that all was well. No news, however, +came from the party; and in spite of the white banner Macota took +fright at the idea that the rebels had surrounded them. + +"_21st._--Detachments of Dyaks are coming in. Ten of the tribe of +Sutor were dispatched as scouts; and in a few hours returned with +the welcome intelligence that the detachment was safe on the top +of the mountain, and that the three tribes of Paninjow, Bombak, and +Sarambo, had finally decided on joining the rajah, and surrendering +their fortified houses. Soon after this news the chiefs of the tribes +arrived with about 100 men, and were of course well received; for if +chargeable with deserting their cause, it is done with the utmost +simplicity, and perfect confidence in their new associates. From +their looks it was apparent they had suffered greatly from want of +food; and they frankly confessed that starvation was their principal +motive for coming over. I did all in my power to fix their new faith by +presents of provisions, &c. &c.: and I think they are trustworthy; for +there is a straightforwardness about the Dyak character far different +from the double-faced dealings of the Malay. Their stipulations were, +forgiveness for the past, and an assurance that none of the Dyaks from +the sea (_i. e._ Sarebus and Sakarran) should be employed; for they +were, they said, hateful to their eyes. These terms being readily +conceded--the first from interest, the second from necessity--they +became open and communicative on the best means of attacking +the forts. A grand council of war was held, at which were present +Macota, Subtu, Abong Mia, and Datu Naraja, two Chinese leaders, and +myself--certainly a most incongruous mixture, and one rarely to be met +with. After much discussion, a move close to the enemy was determined +on for to-morrow, and on the following day to take up a position +near their defences. To judge by the sample of the council, I should +form very unfavorable expectations of the conduct in action. Macota is +lively and active; but whether from indisposition or want of authority, +undecided. The Capitan China is lazy and silent; Subtu indolent and +self-indulgent; Abong Mia and Datu Naraja stupid. However, the event +must settle the question; and, in the mean time, it was resolved that +the small stockade at this place was to be picked up, and removed to +our new position, and there erected for the protection of the fleet. I +may here state my motives for being a spectator of, or participator +(as may turn out), in this scene. In the first place I must confess +that curiosity strongly prompted me; since to witness the Malays, +Chinese, and Dyaks in warfare was so new, that the novelty alone might +plead an excuse for this desire. But it was not the only motive; +for my presence is a stimulus to our own party, and will probably +depress the other in proportion. I look upon the cause of the rajah +as most just and righteous: and the speedy close of the war would +be rendering a service to humanity, especially if brought about by +treaty. At any rate much might be done to ameliorate the condition +of the rebels in case of their defeat; for though I cannot, perhaps +ought not to, save the lives of the three leaders, yet all the others, +I believe, will be forgiven on a slight intercession. At our arrival, +too, I had stated that if they wished me to remain, no barbarities +must be committed; and especially that the women and children must +not be fired upon. To counterbalance these motives was the danger, +whatever it might amount to, and which did not weigh heavily on my +mind. So much for reasons, which, after all, are poor and weak when +we determine on doing anything, be it right or be it wrong. _If_ evil +befall, I trust the penalty may be on me rather than on my followers. + +"_22d._--At daylight the fleet was astir; and in an hour the defences +were cut down, the timber, bamboos, &c., formed into rafts ready for +transportation, and the stockade, by breakfast-time, had as completely +vanished as though it had been bodily lifted away by some genius of the +Wonderful Lamp. Everything was ready for a start, and we waited lazily +for the flood-tide; but when it did make, the usual procrastination +ensued, and there was no move till it was near done. Then, indeed, +we proceeded up about two-thirds of the way, and brought up with two +good hours' daylight, in spite of my remonstrances. No place could +be better calculated than where we rested for an attack upon boats: +high banks covered with grass and trees offered a safe shelter for +musketry, against which no return could be made. The night, however, +passed away quietly. + +"_24th._--Dawn found us on the advance to our proper position. A thick +fog concealed us, and in half an hour the people were on shore busy +reerecting our fort, less than a mile from two forts of the enemy, +but concealed from them by a point of the river. No opposition was +offered to us; and in a few hours a neat defence was completed from +the _debris_ of the former. The ground was cleared of jungle; piles +driven in a square, about fifteen yards to each face; and the earth +from the center, scooped out and intermixed with layers of reeds, was +heaped up about five feet high inside the piles. At the four corners +were small watch-towers, and along the parapet of earth a narrow +walk connecting them. In the center space was a house crowded by the +Chinese garrison, a few of whose harmless gingalls were stuck up at +the angles to intimidate rather than to wound. While they labored at +the body of the defence, the Dyaks surrounded it by an outer work, +made of slight sticks run into the ground with cross binding of +split bamboo, and bristling with a _chevaux de frise_ (if it may be +so styled) of sharpened bamboos about breast-high. The fastenings +of the entire work were of rattan, which is found in plenty. It was +commenced at 7 A.M. and finished about 3 P.M., showing how the fellows +can get through business when they choose. This stockade, varying +in strength according to circumstances, is the usual defence of the +Sambas Chinese. The Malays erect a simple and quicker-constructed +protection by a few double uprights, filled in between with timber +laid lengthwise and supported by the uprights. Directly they are under +cover, they begin to form the ranjows or sudas, which are formidable +to naked feet, and stick them about their position. Above our station +was a hill which entirely commanded both it and the river; to the top +of which I mounted, and obtained an excellent view of the country +around, including the enemies' forts and the town of Siniawan. A +company of military might finish the war in a few hours, as these +defences are most paltry, the strongest being the fort of Balidah, +against which our _formidable_ assault was to be leveled. It was +situated at the water's edge, on a slight eminence on the right bank +of the river; and a large house with a thatched roof and a lookout +house on the summit; a few swivels and a gun or two were in it, and +around it a breastwork of wood--judging from a distance, about six +or seven feet high. The other defences were more insignificant even +than this; and the enemies' artillery amounted, by account, to three +six-pounders and numerous swivels; from 350 to 500 men, about half +of whom were armed with muskets, while the rest carried swords and +spears. They were scattered in many forts, and had a town to defend, +all of which increased their weakness. Their principal arm, however, +consisted in the ranjows, which were stated to be stuck in every +direction. These ranjows are made of bamboo, pointed fine and stuck +in the ground; and there are beside, holes about three feet deep, +filled with these spikes, and afterward lightly covered, which are +called patobong. Another obstacle consists of a spring formed by +bending back a stiff cane with a sharp bamboo attached to it, which, +fastened by a slight twine, flies forcibly against any object passing +through the bush and brushing against it: they resemble the mole-traps +of England. The Borneons have a great dread of these various snares; +and the way they deal with them is by sending out parties of Dyaks +during the night to clear the paths from such dangers. + +"Though I have stated the insignificant nature of the enemies' lines, +it must not be supposed I imagined them at all inferior to our own +resources. Our grand army consisted of 200 Chinese, excellent workmen, +but of whose qualities as soldiers I can say nothing. They were, +however, a stout, muscular set of men, though wretchedly armed, having +no guns and scarcely any muskets; but swords, spears, and shields, +together with forty long thin iron tubes with the bore of a musket +and carrying a slug. These primitive weapons were each managed by +two men, one being the carrier of the ordnance, the other the gunnery +for while one holds the tube over his shoulder, the other takes aim, +turns away his head, applies his match, and is pleased with the +sound. Their mode of loading is as curious as the piece and its mode +of discharge. Powder is poured in, the end knocked on the ground, +and the slug with another knock sent on the powder, without either +ramming or cartridge. Indeed, it is difficult to imagine any weapon +more rude, awkward, or inefficient. + +"Of Malays we had 250, of whom 150 were on the Sarambo mountain, +occupied in defending the Dyak houses. Of the hundred remaining with +the grand army, about half were armed with muskets. A few brass guns +composed our artillery; and in the boats were a good many swivels. The +Dyaks amounted to about 200, of various tribes, viz., Sibnowans, +Paninjows, Bombak, Sarambo, Kampit, Tabah, Sanpro, Suntah; but these +were merely pioneers, and would not face the report of fire-arms. The +Borneons, in fighting, wear a quilted jacket or spencer, which reaches +over the hips, and from its size has a most unservicelike appearance: +the bare legs and arms sticking out from under this puffed-out coat, +like the sticks which support the garments of a scarecrow. Such was +our incongruous and most inefficient array; yet with 300 men who +would fight, nothing would have been easier than to take the detached +defences of the enemy, none of which could contain above thirty or +forty men. But our allies seemed to have little idea of fighting except +behind a wall; and my proposal to attack the adversary was immediately +treated as an extreme of rashness amounting to insanity. At a council +of war it was consequently decided that advances should be made from +the hill behind our fort to Balidah by a chain of posts, the distance +being a short mile, in which space they would probably erect four or +five forts; and then would come a bombardment, noisy but harmless. + +"During the day we were not left quiet. The beating of gongs, shouts, +and an occasional shot, gave life to the scene. With my glass I +could espy our forces at the top of the hill, pleased no doubt to +see us coming to their support. At night loud shouts and firing from +the rebels caused us to prepare for an attack; but it proved to be +nothing but lights moving about the hill-side, with what intent we +were ignorant. The jungle on the left bank having been cleared, we +did not much expect any skirmishers; but some spies were heard near +our boats. With this exception the night passed away unbroken on +our part, though the rebels kept up an incessant beating of gongs, +and from time to time fired a few stray shots, whether against an +enemy or not was doubtful. + +"_25th._--The grand army was lazy, and did not take the field when +they possessed themselves of two eminences, and commenced forts on +each. About 11 A.M. we got intelligence that the enemy was collecting +on the right bank, as they had been heard by our scouts shouting one +to another to gather together in order to attack the stockades in +the course of building. Even with a knowledge of their usual want of +caution, I could not believe this, but walked nevertheless to one of +the forts, and had scarcely reached it when a universal rebel shout, +and a simultaneous beating of the silver-tongued gongs, announced, +as I thought, a general action. But though the shouts continued loud +and furious from both sides, and a gun or two was discharged in the +air to refresh their courage, the enemy did not attack, and a heavy +shower damped the ardor of the approaching armies, and reduced all to +inaction. Like the heroes of old, however, the adverse parties spoke +to each other: 'We are coming, we are coming,' exclaimed the rebels; +'lay aside your muskets and fight us with swords.' 'Come on,' was the +reply; 'we are building a stockade, and want to fight you.' And so the +heroes ceased not to talk, but forgot to fight, except that the rebels +opened a fire from Balidah from swivels, all of which went over the +tops of the trees. Peace, or rather rest, being restored, our party +succeeded in entrenching themselves, and thus gained a field which had +been obstinately assaulted by big words and loud cries. The distance +of one fort from Balidah was about 800 yards, and manned with sixty +Malays; while a party of Chinese garrisoned the other. Evening fell +upon this innocent warfare. The Borneons, in this manner, contend with +vociferous shouts; and, preceding each shout, the leader of the party +offers up a prayer aloud to the Almighty, the chorus (or properly +response) being the acclamation of the soldiery. We, on our side, +kept up a firing and hallooing till midnight, to disguise the advance +of a party who were to seize and build a stockade within a shorter +distance of Balidah. When they reached the spot, however, the night +being dark, the troops sleepy, and the leaders of different opinions, +they returned without effecting anything." + + + + + +CHAPTER VIII. + + Appearance of the country.--Progress of the rebel war.--Character + of the Sow and Singe Dyaks.--Their belief in augury.--Ruinous + effects of protracted warfare.--Cowardice and boasting of + the Malays.--Council of war.--Refuse to attack the enemy's + forts.--Rebels propose to treat.--The Malays oppose.--Set out + to attack the rebels, but frustrated by our allies.--Assailed + by the rebels.--Put them to flight.--Treat with them.--They + surrender.--Intercede with the Rajah for their lives.--Renewed + treachery of the Malays. + + +"_26th._--I must here pause in my account of this extraordinary +and novel contest, briefly to describe the general appearance of +the country. + +"It is one delightful to look upon, combining all the requisites of +the picturesque, viz. wood, water, mountain, cliff, and a foreground +gently undulating, partially cultivated, and of the richest soil. The +mountain of Sarambo, about 3000 feet in height, is the principal +feature in the scene, situated at a short distance from the left bank +of the river. The remainder of the ground slopes gradually; and the +town of Siniawan, likewise on the left bank, is close to the water, +and at the foot of the eminence called Gunga Kumiel. + +"The advance of the party last night was, as I have said, disguised +by firing, drumming, and shouting from the fleet and forts; and, +in the deep stillness of the fine night, the booming of the guns, +the clamor of the gongs, and the outcries raised from time to time, +came on our ears like the spirit of discord breaking loose on a fair +and peaceful paradise. About one o'clock the noises died away, and I +enjoyed as quiet a slumber till daylight as though pillowed on a bed +of down in the heart of Old England. About six I visited the three +forts. The Chinese, Malays, and Dyaks were taking their morning meal, +consisting of half a cocoanut-shell full of boiled rice with salt. The +Dyaks were served in tribes; for as many of them are at war, it is +necessary to keep them separate; and though they will not fight the +enemy, they would have no objection to fall out with one another, +and the slightest cause might give rise to an instant renewal of +hostilities. + +"About 9 A.M. a party proceeded to the elevation previously marked, +within 300 yards of Balidah, and worked quietly till 2 P.M., by which +time they had made considerable progress; and being then reinforced, +they soon finished this new stockade, with a strong face toward +their adversaries, and an outer fence. This erection, however, being +below the brow of the hill, is useless as a post whence to assault +Balidah; and to-morrow another stockade is to be made close to it on +the summit, the present being intended to cover the working party at +the next. The enemy, about 4 P.M., having discovered the stockade, +opened a fire for half an hour; but finding it ineffectual, they sank +into their usual apathy. It is difficult to attribute this quietude +to any other cause than weakness; and they are doubtless harassed by +the want of Dyak light troops, as they are unable to oppose stockade +to stockade. Our party, by these successful advances, seem to gain +confidence; and it must soon come to an issue one way or other. To make +it favorable, I have sent for two six-pounder carronades, guns of vast +caliber here, together with a small addition to our force. I had the +curiosity to inquire of Macota the progress of his former campaign, +when he had 1000 Malays with only a few Dyaks. He represented the +enemy as active and daring then, and very different from their want +of spirit now. They had, he declared, combats by sea and by land; +stockade was opposed to stockade, and the fighting was constant and +severe; but he never lost a man killed during the two months, and +only boasted of killing five of the enemy! The principal danger in +Malay warfare is the 'Mengamuk' (_Anglice_, running a-muck), which +is the last resource of a desperate man. + +"_27th._--The night passed quietly as usual. About 6 A.M. I started for +the hills, and inspected each post in turn. They are about commencing +another fort. I visited the spot to reconnoiter it; and the enemy +opened a fire directly they perceived me, which we returned. They +shot wretchedly ill; and the position is good, but exposed. About 10 +A.M. they again began to fire from their fort, and detached thirty +or forty men, who crept out between our forts in order to interrupt +the work. The Malays, however, received them steadily; while the +Chinese placed them between two fires, and, by a discharge from a +tube, knocked down _one_ man. The rebels showed anxiety to possess +themselves of their fallen comrade, while the opposite party shouted, +'Cut off his head;' but he was carried off; and the enemy, when they +had saved his body, fled in all directions, dropping a number of +their small bamboo powder flasks on the way. Some fierce alarms were +given of an attack by water, and I went up the river to ascertain +really whether there was any mischief to be expected; but there was +no appearance of any adversary. A slack fire from the hill proclaimed +that our work was going on there; and toward evening all was in repose. + +"_28th._--The stockade was completed in the evening, with ranjows stuck +round the outer defence. It was excellently situated for battering +Balidah; but Balidah, I fear, is too loosely constructed to be battered +to the best advantage. During the day the Sow and Singe Dyaks joined, +to the amount of about 150 men, and other tribes have been gradually +dropping in; so that altogether there are not fewer than 500 of these +men joined to our equipment. Most of them show all the characteristics +of a wild people; never openly resisting their masters, but so +obstinate that they can always get their own way in every thing; +to all threats and entreaties opposing a determined and immovable +silence. Many of them depend upon us for their food and salt, and +their applications are endless. Three women of Singe are our regular +pensioners; for their sex excludes them from the rations granted to the +men. By these means we had many excellent opportunities of judging of +their habits and temper. Among all these tribes the language differs +but slightly--so slightly, indeed, that it is needless to note the +variations in detail. They have the same superstition about particular +birds, and I often heard this omen alluded to in conversation; but +their birds are not the same as those of the sea Dyaks.... The chief +of the Sarambo, explaining his reasons for leaving the rebels, urged +the constant unfavorable omen of the birds as one. Often, very often, +he said, when he went out, the bird cried, and flew in the direction +of Siniawan, which will be explained by what I have before stated; +for if they hear the bird to the right, they go to the left, and _vice +versa_; so that the bird may be considered as warning them from evil. + +"The Sow Dyaks brought in the head of an unfortunate Malay whom +they had decapitated in the jungle. This species of warfare is +extremely barbarous, and in its train probably brings more evil +than the regular campaigns of civilized nations. Not that it is +by any means so fatal to human life directly; but it is the slow +poison which wastes the strongest frame, the smoldering fire which +does its work of destruction slowly but surely. Year after year it +is protracted; few fall in open fight, but stragglers and prisoners +are murdered; and while both weak parties, gradually growing weaker, +hold their own ground, the country becomes a desert. First, trade +stagnates, agriculture withers, food becomes scarce, all are ruined +in finances, all half-starved and most miserable--and yet the war +drags on, and the worst passions are aroused, effectually preventing +the slightest concession, even if concession would avail. But each +combatant knows the implacable spirit--the deep desperation--of the +other too well to trust them; and if at length the fortunes of famine +decide against them, they die rather than yield; for a Dyak can die +bravely, I believe, though he will not fight as long as life has any +prospect. This is also the case here: for the rebel chiefs know there +is no pardon, and the Bandar is disgraced if he fails. It is indeed +a slow process, but one of extermination. + +"_29th._--Our guns arrived with a welcome reinforcement. In the evening +I dropped up the river to reconnoiter; but the adversary discovered +us, as we were dressed in white clothes. + +"_30th._--Fort not finished. All quiet. + +"_31st._--Got the guns and ammunition up, and while fixing them opened +a fire from one of our swivels to overbear the fire of the enemy. The +little piece was well served; and, in a quarter of an hour, we silenced +their fire entirely, and knocked about the timber considerably, making +a breach which several men could enter together. Seeing the effect, I +proposed to Macota to storm the place with 150 Chinese and Malays. The +way from one fort to the other was protected. The enemy dared not +show themselves for the fire of the grape and canister, and nothing +could have been easier; but my proposition caused a commotion which it +is difficult to forget, and more difficult to describe. The Chinese +consented, and Macota, the commander-in-chief, was willing; but his +inferiors were backward, and there arose a scene which showed me the +full violence of the Malay passions, and their infuriated madness when +once roused. Pangeran Houseman urged with energy the advantage of the +proposal, and in the course of a speech lashed himself to a state of +fury; he jumped to his feet, and with demoniac gestures stamped round +and round, dancing a war-dance after the most approved fashion; his +countenance grew livid, his eyes glared, his features inflamed; and, +for my part, not being able to interpret the torrent of his oratory, +I thought the man possessed of a devil, or about to 'run a-muck.' But +after a minute or two of this dance, he resumed his seat, furious and +panting, but silent. In reply, Subtu urged some objections to my plan, +which was warmly supported by Illudeen, who apparently hurt Subtu's +feelings; for the indolent, the placid Subtu leapt from his seat, +seized his spear, and rushed to the entrance of the stockade, with +his passions and his pride desperately aroused. I never saw finer +action than when, with spear in hand, pointing to the enemy's fort, +he challenged any one to rush on with him. Houseman and Surradeen +(the bravest of the brave) like madmen seized their swords to inflame +the courage of the rest--it was a scene of fiends--but in vain; +for though they appeared ready enough to quarrel and fight among +themselves, there was no move to attack the enemy. All was confusion; +the demon of discord and madness was among them, and I was glad to +see them cool down, when the dissentients to the assault proposed +making a round to-night and attacking to-morrow. In the mean time our +six-pounders were ready in battery, and it is certain the assailants +might walk nearly to the fort without any of the rebels daring to +show themselves in opposition to our fire. + +"_Nov. 1st._--The guns were ready to open their fiery mouths, and +their masters ready to attend on them; but both had to wait till +mid-day, when the chiefs of the grand army, having sufficiently +slept, breakfasted, and bathed, lounged up with their straggling +followers. Shortly after daylight the forts are nearly deserted of +their garrisons, who go down at the time to the water more like a flock +of geese than warriors. The instant the main division and head-quarters +of the army arrived at the battery, I renewed my proposal for an +assault, Which was variously received. If the Malays would go, the +Chinese agreed; but the Malays had grown colder and colder. In order +to encourage them, I opened a fire to show the effect of our guns; and +having got a good range, every ball, as well as grape and canister, +rattled against and through the wood. I then urged them again and +again, but in vain; that coward Panglima rajah displayed that dogged +resolution which is invincible--an invincible resolution to do nothing; +and the cold damp looks of the others at once told the amount of their +bravery! A council of war was called--grave faces covered timid hearts +and fainting spirits. The Chinese contended with justice, that in +fairness they could not be expected to assault without the Malays did +the same; Abong Mia was not brave enough. The Datu agreed, and Panglima +delivered himself of a wise harangue, to the effect that, 'the last +campaign, when they had a fort, how had the enemy fired then?--stabbed +them, speared them, &c. &c.; and without a fort, assaulting!--how could +it be expected they should succeed? how unreasonable they should go +at all!' But even his stolid head seemed to comprehend the sarcasm +when I asked him how many men had been killed during all this severe +fighting. However, it was clear that it was no battle. We were all +very savage, and I intimated how useless my being with them was, if +they intended to play instead of fight. 'What,' I asked, 'if you will +not attack, are you going to do?' Oh, the wise councils of these wise +heads! Abong Mia proposed erecting a fort in a tree, and thence going +'puff, puff,' down into Balidah, accompanying the words 'puff, puff,' +with expressive gestures of firing; but it was objected, that trees +were scarce, and the enemy might cut down the tree, fort and all. [11] + +"_2d._--Till two o'clock last night, or thereabouts, I sat on our +rampart and gazed upon the prospect around, shaded with gloom. The +doctor was with me, and we ran over every subject--the past, present, +and the future. Such a scene--a rude fort in the interior of Borneo; +such a night, dark but starlight--leaves an indelible impression +on the mind, which recurs to move it even after long years. The +morning, however, found us ready, and no one else. The fort was +left to ourselves; we waited and waited until 2 P.M., when I was +made aware that all thoughts of attack were at an end. Macota, for +very shame, staid below; and I must say there was not a countenance +that met mine but had that bashful and hang-dog look which expresses +cowardice and obstinacy predominant, yet shame battling within. They +were now resolved not to make the attempt; and I asked them casually +whether they would fly a white flag, and hold a conference with +the enemy. They caught at the alternatives; the flag was hoisted; +the rebels were ready to _meet me_, and it was agreed that we should +assemble on the morrow. But no sooner was the arrangement made than a +thousand objections were started, and any thing, even attack itself +(though that was out of the question), was held to be preferable. I +need not dwell on this mixture of deceit and fear; in short, as +they would do nothing themselves, they expected us to do nothing: +and without the courage to carry on the war, they had not either +wisdom or sorcery to bring it to a conclusion. + +"_3d._--Dispatched an express during last night to the rajah, and +received an answer that he was coming up in person; but my resolve was +taken, and I quitted the grand army, much to their evident surprise +and vexation. Nevertheless, they were still friendly and polite, +and very very lazy about bringing down our guns. This was, however, +done at last, and we were ready for a start. + +"_4th._--Reached the ship at two P.M., saw rajah, &c. &c. + +"From the 4th to the 10th of November I may condense into the shape of +a narrative. I explained to the rajah how useless it was my remaining, +and intimated to him my intention of departing; but his deep regret +was so visible, that even all the self-command of the native could +not disguise it. He begged, he entreated me to stay, and offered me +the country of Siniawan and Sarawak, and its government and trade, if +I would only stop, and not desert him. I could at once have obtained +this grant, but I preferred interposing a delay; because to accept +such a boon when imposed by necessity, or from a feeling of gratitude +for recent assistance, would have rendered it both suspicious and +useless; and I was by no means eager to enter on the task (the full +difficulties of which I clearly foresaw) without the undoubted and +spontaneous support of the rajah. + +"_Jan. 8th, 1841._--The following narrative, extracted from my journal, +includes a period from the 10th of December to the 4th of January, +and it is put into its present shape to avoid the tedium of detailing +each day's proceedings. On the 10th of December we reached the +fleet and disembarked our guns, taking up our residence in a house, +or rather shed, close to the water. The rajah's brother, Pangeran +Budrudeen, was with the army, and I found him ready and willing +to urge upon the other indolent Pangerans the proposals I made for +vigorous hostilities. We found the grand army in a state of torpor, +eating, drinking, and walking up to the forts and back again daily; +but having built these imposing structures, and their appearance not +driving the enemy away, they were at a loss what next to do, or how +to proceed. On my arrival, I once more insisted on mounting the guns +in our old forts, and assaulting Balidah under their fire. Macota's +timidity and vacillation were too apparent; but in consequence of +Budrudeen's overawing presence, he was obliged, from shame, to yield +his assent. The order for the attack was fixed as follows:--Our +party of ten (leaving six to serve the guns) were to be headed by +myself. Budrudeen, Macota, Subtu, and all the lesser chiefs, were to +lead their followers, from 60 to 80 in number, by the same route, +while 50 or more Chinese, under their captain, were to assault by +another path to the left. Macota was to make the paths as near as +possible to Balidah, with his Dyaks, who were to extract the sudas +and fill up the holes. The guns having been mounted and their range +well ascertained the previous evening, we ascended to the fort at about +eight A.M., and at ten opened our fire, and kept it up for an hour. The +effect was severe: every shot told upon their thin defences of wood, +which fell in many places so as to leave storming breaches. Part +of the roof was cut away and tumbled down, and the shower of grape +and canister rattled so as to prevent their returning our fire, +except from a stray rifle. At mid-day the forces reached the fort, +and it was then discovered that Macota had neglected to make any road +because it rained the night before! It was evident that the rebels +had gained information of our intention, as they had erected a frieze +of bamboo along their defences on the very spot which we had agreed +to mount. Macota fancied the want of a road would delay the attack; +but I well knew that delay was equivalent to failure, and so it was +at once agreed that we should advance without any path. The poor man's +cunning and resources were now nearly at an end. He could not refuse to +accompany us; but his courage could not be brought to the point, and, +pale and embarrassed, he retired. Everything was ready--Budrudeen, +the Capitan China, and myself, at the head of our men--when he once +more appeared, and raised a subtle point of etiquet which answered his +purpose. He represented to Budrudeen that the Malays were unanimously +of opinion that the rajah's brother could not expose himself in an +assault; that their dread of the rajah's indignation far exceeded the +dread of death; and in case any accident happened to him, his brother's +fury would fall on them. They stated their readiness to assault the +place; but in case Budrudeen insisted on leading in person, they must +decline accompanying him. Budrudeen was angry, I was angry too, and the +doctor most angry of all; but anger was unavailing: it was clear they +did not intend to do anything in earnest; and after much discussion, +in which Budrudeen insisted that if I went he should likewise go, +and the Malays insisted that if he went they would not go, it was +resolved we should serve the guns, while Abong Mia and the Chinese +(not under the captain) should proceed to the assault. But its fate +was sealed, and Macota had gained his object; for neither he nor +Subtu thought of exposing themselves to a single shot. Our artillery +opened and was beautifully served. The adverse troops advanced; but +our fire completely subdued them, as only three rifles answered us, +by one of which a seaman (Williams) was wounded in the hand, but not +seriously. Two-thirds of the way the storming-party proceeded without +the enemy being aware of their advance; and they might have reached +the very foot of the hill without being discovered, had not Abong +Mia, from excess of piety and rashness, begun most loudly to say his +prayers. The three rifles then began to play on them; one Chinaman was +killed, the whole halted, the prayers were more vehement than ever, +and, after squatting under cover of the jungle for some time, they +all returned. It was only what I expected; but I was greatly annoyed +at their cowardice and treachery--treachery to their own cause. One +lesson, however, I learned, and that was, that, had I assaulted with +our small party, we should assuredly have been victimized! The very +evening of the failure the rajah came up the river. I would not see +him, and only heard that the chiefs got severely reprimanded; but +the effects of reprimand are lost where cowardice is stronger than +shame. Inactivity followed; two or three useless forts were built, +and Budrudeen, much to my regret and the detriment of the cause, +was recalled. + +"Among the straggling arrivals I may mention Panglima Dallam, +with a number of men, consisting of the Orang Bentulu, Meri Muka, +and Kayan, Dyaks from the interior. Our house--or, as it originally +stood, shed--deserves a brief record. It was about twenty feet long, +with a loose floor of reeds, and an attop roof. It served us for some +time; but the attempts at theft obliged us to fence it in and divide +it into apartments: one at the end served Middleton, Williamson, +and myself; adjoining it was the store-room and hospital; and the +other extreme belonged to the seamen. Our improvements kept pace with +our necessities. Theft induced us to shut in our house at the sides, +and the unevenness of the reeds suggested the advantage of laying +a floor of the bark of trees over them, which, with mats over all, +rendered our domicile far from uncomfortable. Our forts gradually +extended at the back of the enemy's town, on a ridge of swelling +ground; while they kept pace with us on the same side of the river +on the low ground. The inactivity of our troops had long become a +by-word among us. It was indeed truly vexatious, but it was in vain +to urge them on, in vain to offer assistance, in vain to propose a +joint attack, or even to seek support at their hands; promises were +to be had in plenty, but performances never! + +"At length the leaders resolved on building a fort at Sekundis, +thus outflanking the enemy and gaining the command of the river. The +post was certainly an important one, and in consequence they set +about it with the happy indifference which characterizes their +proceedings. Pangeran Illudeen (the most active among them) had +the building of the fort, assisted by the Orang Kaya Tumangong of +Lundu. Macota, Subtu, &c. were at the next fort, and by chance I +was there likewise; for it seemed to be little apprehended that any +interruption would take place, as the Chinese and the greater number of +Malays had not left the boats. When the fort commenced, however, the +enemy crossed the river and divided into two bodies, the one keeping +in check the party at Pangeran Gapoor's fort, while the other made an +attack on the works. The ground was not unfavorable for their purpose; +for Pangeran Gapoor's fort was separated from Sekundis by a belt of +thick wood which reached down to the river's edge. Sekundis itself, +however, stood on clear ground, as did Gapoor's fort. I was with +Macota at the latter when the enemy approached through the jungle. The +two parties were within easy speaking distances, challenging and +threatening each other; but the thickness of the jungle prevented +our seeing or penetrating to them. When this body had advanced, +the real attack commenced on Sekundis with a fire of musketry, and +I was about proceeding to the scene, but was detained by Macota, +who assured me there were plenty of men, and that it was nothing at +all. As the musketry became thicker, I had my doubts, when a Dyak +came running through the jungle, and with gestures of impatience and +anxiety begged me to assist the party attacked. He had been sent by +my old friend the Tumangong of Lundu, to say they could not hold the +post unless supported. In spite of Macota's remonstrances, I struck +into the jungle, winded through the narrow path, and after crossing an +ugly stream, emerged on the clear ground. The sight was a pretty one: +to the right was the unfinished stockade, defended by the Tumangong; +to the left, at the edge of the forest, about twelve or fifteen of +our party, commanded by Illudeen, while the enemy were stretched along +between the points and kept up a sharp shooting from the hollow ground +on the bank of the river. They fired, and loaded, and fired, and had +gradually advanced on the stockade as the ammunition of our party +failed; and as we emerged from the jungle, they were within twenty or +five and twenty yards of the defence. A glance immediately showed me +the advantage of our position, and I charged with my Europeans across +the padi-field; and the instant we appeared on the ridge above the +river, in the hollows of which the rebels were seeking protection, +their rout was complete. They scampered off in every direction, +while the Dyaks and Malays pushed them into the river. Our victory +was decisive and bloodless: the scene was changed in an instant, +and the defeated foe lost arms, ammunition, &c. &c., whether on the +field of battle or in the river, and our exulting conquerors set no +bounds to their triumph. + +"I cannot omit to mention the name of Si Tundo, the only native who +charged with us. His appearance and dress were most striking, the +latter being entirely of red, bound round the waist, arms, forehead, +&c. with gold ornaments; and in his hand bearing his formidable Bajuck +sword, he danced or rather galloped across the field close to me, +and mixing with the enemy was about to dispatch a hadji or priest +who was prostrate before him, when one of our people interposed and +saved him by stating that he was a companion of our own. The Lundu +Dyaks were very thankful for our support, our praises were loudly +sung, and the stockade was concluded. After the rout, Macota, Subtu, +and Abong Mia arrived on the field; the latter with forty followers +had ventured half way before the firing ceased, but the detachment, +under a paltry subterfuge, halted, so as not to be in time. The enemy +might have had fifty men at the attack; the defending party consisted +of about the same number; but the Dyaks had very few muskets. I had a +dozen Englishmen, Seboo, one of our boatmen, and Si Tundo. Sekundis +was a great point gained, as it hindered the enemy from ascending +the river and seeking any supplies. + +"Macota, Subtu, and the whole tribe arrived as soon as their safety +from danger allowed, and none were louder in their own praise; +but nevertheless their countenances evinced some sense of shame, +which they endeavored to disguise by the use of their tongues. The +Chinese came really to afford assistance, but too late. We remained +until the stockade of Sekundis was finished, while the enemy kept up +a wasteful fire from the opposite side of the river, which did no harm. + +"The next great object was to follow up the advantage by crossing the +stream; but day after day some fresh excuse brought on fresh delay, +and Macota built a new fort and made a new road within a hundred yards +of our old position. I cannot detail further our proceedings for many +days, which consisted on my part of efforts to get something done, +and on the others a close adherence to the old system of promising +everything and doing nothing. The Chinese, like the Malays, refused +to act; but on their part, it was not fear, but disinclination. By +degrees, however, the preparations for the new fort were complete, and +I had gradually gained over a party of the natives to my views; and, +indeed, among the Malays, the bravest of them had joined themselves +to us, and what was better, we had Datu Pangeran, thirteen Illanuns, +and the Capitan China allowed me to take his men whenever I wanted +them. My weight and consequence were increased, and I rarely moved +now without a long train of followers. The next step (while crossing +the river was uncertain) was to take my guns up to Gapoor's fort, +which was about 600 or 700 yards from the town, and half the distance +from a rebel fort on the river's bank. + +"Panglima Rajah, the day after our guns were in battery, took it into +his head to build a fort on the river's side close to the town, in +front and between two of the enemy's forts. It was a bold undertaking +for the old man, after six weeks of uninterrupted repose. At night, +the wood being prepared, the party moved down, and worked so silently +that they were not discovered till their defence was nearly finished, +when the enemy commenced a general firing from all their forts, +returned by a similar firing from all ours, none of the parties being +quite clear what they were firing at or about, and the hottest from +either party being equally harmless. We were at the time about going +to bed in our habitation; but expecting some reverse, I set off +(to scale the hills) to the stockade where our guns were placed, +and opened a fire upon the town and the stockade near us, till the +enemy's fire gradually slackened and died away. We then returned, +and in the morning were greeted with the pleasing news that they had +burned and deserted five of their forts, and left us sole occupants +of the right bank of the river. The same day, going through the jungle +to see one of these deserted forts, we came upon a party of the enemy, +and had a brief skirmish with them before they took to flight. Nothing +can be more unpleasant to a European than this bush-fighting, where +he scarce sees a foe, while he is well aware that their eyesight is +far superior to his own. To proceed with this narrative, I may say +that four or five forts were built on the edge of the river opposite +the enemy's town, and distant not above 50 or 60 yards; here our guns +were removed, and a fresh battery formed ready for a bombardment, +and fire-balls essayed to ignite the houses. + +"At this time Seriff Jaffer, from Singe, arrived with about seventy +men, Malays and Dyaks of Balow. The river Singe being situated close +to Sarebus, and incessant hostilities being waged between the two +places, he, with his followers, was both more active and more warlike +than the Borneons, but their warfare consists of closing hand to +hand with spear and sword. They scarcely understood the proper use +of fire-arms, and were of little use in attacking stockades. As a +negotiator, however, the seriff bore a distinguished part; and on his +arrival a parley ensued, much against Macota's will, and some meetings +took place between Jaffer and a brother seriff at Siniawan, named +Moksain. After ten days' delay nothing came of it, though the enemy +betrayed great desire to yield. This negotiation being at an end, +we had a day's bombardment and a fresh treaty brought about thus; +Macota being absent at Sarawak, I received a message from Seriff +Jaffer and Pangeran Subtu to say that they wished to meet me; and on +my consenting, they stated that Seriff Jaffer felt confident the war +might be brought to an end, though alone he dared not treat with the +rebels; but in case I felt inclined to join him, we could bring it +to a favorable conclusion. I replied that our habits of treating were +very unlike their own, as we allowed no delays to interpose; but that +I would unite with him for one interview, and if that interview was +favorable, we might meet the chiefs at once and settle it, or put +an end to all farther treating. Pangeran Subtu was delighted with +the proposition, urged its great advantages, and the meeting by my +desire for that very night, the place Pangeran Illudeen's fort at +Sekundis. The evening arrived, and at dark we were at the appointed +place, and a message was dispatched for Seriff Moksain. In the mean +time, however, came a man from Pangeran Subtu to beg us to hold no +intercourse; that the rebels were false, meant to deceive us, and +if any did come, we had better make them prisoners. Seriff Jaffer, +after arguing the point some time, rose to depart, remarking that with +such proceedings he would not consent to treat. I urged him to stay; +but finding him bent on going, I ordered my gig (which had some time +before been brought overland) to be put into the water, my intention +being to proceed to the enemy's campong, and there hear what they had +to say. I added that it was folly to leave undone what we had agreed +to do in the morning because Pangeran Subtu changed his mind--that I +had come to treat, and treat I would. I would not go away now without +giving the enemy a fair hearing--for the good of all parties I would +do it; and if the seriff liked to join me, as we proposed before, +and wait for Seriff Moksain, good; if not, I would go in the boat +to the campong. My Europeans, on being ordered, jumped up, ran out +and brought the boat to the water's edge, and in a few minutes oars, +rudder, and rowlocks were in her. My companions, seeing this, came +to terms, and we waited for Seriff Moksain; during which, however, I +overheard a whispering conversation from Subtu's messenger, proposing +to seize him; and my temper was ruffled to such a degree that I drew +out a pistol, and told him I would shoot him dead if he dared to seize, +or talk of seizing, any man who trusted himself from the enemy to +meet me! The scoundrel slunk off, and we were no more troubled with +him. This past, Seriff Moksain arrived, and was introduced into our +fortress alone--alone and unarmed in an enemy's stockade, manned with +two hundred men! His bearing was firm; he advanced with ease and took +his seat; and, during the interview, the only sign of uneasiness was +the quick glance of his eye from side to side. The object he aimed at +was to gain my guaranty that the lives of all the rebels should be +spared; but this I had it not in my power to grant. He returned to +his campong, and came again toward morning, when it was agreed that +Seriff Jaffer and myself should meet the Patingis and the Tumangong, +and arrange terms with them. By the time our conference was over, +the day broke, and we descended to the boats to enjoy a little rest. + +"On the 20th of December we met with the chiefs on the river; and they +expressed themselves ready to yield, without conditions, to the rajah, +if I would promise that they should not be put to death. My reply was, +that I could give no such promise; that if they surrendered, it must +be for life or death, according to the rajah's pleasure; and all I +could do was to use my influence in order to save their lives. To this +they assented after a while; but then there arose the more difficult +question, how they were to be protected until the rajah's orders +arrived. They dreaded both Chinese and Malays, especially the former, +who had just cause for angry feelings, and who, it was feared, would +make an attack on them directly their surrender had taken from them +their means of defence. The Malays would not assail them in a body, +but would individually plunder them, and give occasion for disputes +and bloodshed. These apprehensions were almost sufficient to break off +the hitherto favorable negotiations, had I not proposed to them myself +to undertake their defence, and to become responsible for their safety +until the orders of their sovereign arrived. On my pledging myself to +this, they yielded up their strong fort of Balidah, the key of their +position. I immediately made it known to our own party that no boats +were to ascend or descend the river, and that any persons attacking +or pillaging the rebels were my enemies, and that I should fire upon +them without hesitation. + +"Both Chinese and Malaya agreed to the propriety of the measure, +and gave me the strongest assurances of restraining their respective +followers, the former with good faith, the latter with the intention of +involving matters, if possible, to the destruction of the rebels. By +the evening we were in possession of Balidah, and certainly found +it a formidable fortress, situated on a steep mound, with dense +defences of wood, triple deep, and surrounded by two inclosures, +thickly studded on the outside with ranjows. The effect of our fire had +shaken it completely, now much to our discomfort; for the walls were +tottering, and the roof as leaky as a sieve. On the 20th of December, +then, the war closed. The very next day, contrary to stipulation, +the Malay Pangerans tried to ascend the river, and when stopped began +to expostulate. After preventing many, the attempt was made by Subtu +and Pangeran Hassim, in three large boats, boldly pulling toward +us. Three hails did not check them, and they came on in spite of a +blank cartridge and a wide ball, to turn them back. But I was resolved; +and when a dozen musket-balls whistled over and fell close around them, +they took to an ignominious flight. I subsequently upbraided them +for this breach of promise, and Macota loudly declared they had _been +greatly to blame_; but I discovered that he himself had set them on. + +"I may now briefly conclude this detail. I ordered the rebels to +burn all their stockades, which they did at once, and delivered up +the greater part of their arms; and I proceeded to the rajah to +request from him their lives. Those who know the Malay character +will appreciate the difficulty of the attempt to stand between the +monarch and his victims; I only succeeded when, at the end of a long +debate--I soliciting, he denying--I rose to bid him farewell, as it +was my intention to sail directly, since, after all my exertions +in his cause, if he would not grant me the lives of the people, +I could only consider that his friendship for me was at an end. On +this he yielded. I must own that during the discussion he had much +the best of it; for he urged that they had forfeited their lives by +the law, as a necessary sacrifice to the future peace of the country; +and argued that in a similar case in my own native land no leniency +would be shown. On the contrary, my reasoning, though personal, +was, on the whole, the best for the rajah and the people. I stated +my extreme reluctance to have the blood of conquered foes shed; the +shame I should experience in being a party, however involuntarily, +to their execution; and the general advantage of a merciful line +of policy. At the same time I told him their lives were forfeited, +their crimes had been of a heinous and unpardonable nature, and it +was only from so humane a man as himself, one with so kind a heart, +that I could ask for their pardon; but I added, he well knew that +it was only my previous knowledge of his benevolent disposition, +and the great friendship I felt for him, which had induced me to +take any part in this struggle. Other stronger reasons might have +been brought forward, which I forbore to employ, as being repugnant +to his princely pride, viz. that severity in this case would arm many +against him, raise powerful enemies in Borneo Proper, as well as here, +and greatly impede the future right government of the country. However, +I gained my point, and was satisfied. + +"Having fulfilled this engagement, and being moreover, together with +many of my Europeans, attacked with an ague, I left the scene with all +the dignity of complete success. Subsequently, the rebels were ordered +to deliver up all their arms, ammunition, and property; and last, the +wives and children of the principal people were demanded as hostages, +and obtained. The women and children were treated with kindness, +and preserved from injury or wrong. Siniawan thus dwindled away; the +poorer men stole off in canoes and were scattered about, most of them +coming to Sarawak. The better class pulled down the houses, abandoned +the town, and lived in boats for a month; when, alarmed by the delay +and impelled by hunger, they also fled--Patingi Gapoor, it was said, +to Sambas; and Patingi Ali and the Tumangong among the Dyaks. After +a time it was supposed they would return and receive their wives and +children. The army gradually dispersed to seek food, and the Chinese +were left in possession of the once-renowned Siniawan, the ruin of +which they completed by burning all that remained, and erecting a +village for themselves in the immediate neighborhood. Seriff Jaffer +and many others departed to their respective homes, and the pinching +of famine succeeded to the horrors of war. Fruit being in season, +helped to support the wretched people, and the near approach of the +rice-harvest kept up their spirits." + + + + + +CHAPTER IX. + + Retrospect of Mr. Brooke's proceeding and prospects.--Visit of + a pirate fleet.--Intercourse with the chief leaders, and other + characteristic incidents.--War dances.--Use of opium.--Story of + Si Tundo.--Preparations for trading.--Conditions of the cession + of Sarawak. + + +I have gone into the details of this curious rebellion, and selected +from my friend's memoranda more, perhaps, than the actual and +present importance of the circumstances might seem to require; but I +have done so under the impression that in developing the traits and +lineaments of the native character, I am laying the foundation for a +more accurate estimate of them and their bearing upon futurity. The +difference between the Malay and the Chinese, between the sea and the +land Dyak, and even between one tribe and another, presents a variety +of elements out of which a consistent whole has to be compounded, and +a new state of things to be established in Borneo. It is, therefore, +of considerable interest to view these elements in their earliest +contact with European mind and civilization, and thence endeavor to +shape out the course which is best calculated to insure the welfare of +all in the closer ties and more extended connection which is springing +out of this new intercourse. To enlarge the beneficial effects +of trade and commerce, it is not enough to ascertain the products +of a strange country, nor even the chief wants of its population; +but to inform ourselves of their habits, feelings, and disposition, +and so devise the wisest measures for supplying what is immediate, +removing obstacles, and increasing demand by a continually growing +improvement in government and general condition. + +Following the war, and receiving the investiture of the government of +Sarawak, Mr. Brooke was enabled, from the insight he had obtained into +the diversified relations and habits, motives and ways of thinking of +these people, to address himself clearly and at once to reform the +evils which oppressed, and the abuses which destroyed them. Had he +not mixed with them and shared in this protracted contest, he must +have begun rather as an experimentalist with a theory which might be +right or might be wrong. But he had acquired the necessary experience, +and could proceed to put his finger where it was required to repress +or to foster, without danger of mistake. It was extraordinary what +his energy produced within a small compass of time. Security succeeded +the utmost uncertainty, equal justice superseded tyrannical caprice, +order arose out of confusion, and peace was gradually spread over +the fruitful soil so lately polluted by the murderous warfare of +heads-taking and imperishable feud. It is to be hoped that such an +example will not be lost in the further prosecution of international +and commercial policy in this interesting and important quarter of +the eastern world. Piracy must be put down, slavery must be effaced, +industry must be cherished and protected; and these objects, we shall +see, from the model afforded by our truly illustrious countryman, +may be accomplished; and we may further learn from his example, that +from the experience even of "a little war," an enlightened observer +may deduce the most sound data on which to commence a mighty change, +leading, probably, to the happiness of millions, and the foundation +of colonial empire. + +With these few retrospective remarks, I resume the sequel of my +friend's Bornean Journal. + +"Our subsequent adventures," he notes, "may be easily related. We +lay for some days, after winding up our affairs, in order to have +an agreement drawn out between the rajah and myself, and during this +time heard the bruit of a pirate fleet being on the coast. In a day +or two after, certain news arrived of their having taken two Sadung +boats, bound from Singapore, and Datu Pangeran was, in consequence, +dispatched to communicate with them. He returned from Tanjong Datu, +bringing the fleet with him to the mouth of the river, whence they +requested permission to visit Sarawak, and pay their respects to the +rajah. I was consulted on the subject whether I would meet them; and +as I preferred a pacific to a hostile rencounter, and had, moreover, +a considerable curiosity to see these roving gentry, I consented +without hesitation. Reports--a greater curse in Malay countries than +elsewhere--stated their object to be the capture of the Royalist, as +they had, it was averred, received positive accounts of her having +fifty lacks of dollars on board, and that her figure-head was of +solid gold. As, however, we had no such treasure, and the meeting +was unavoidable, and might be hostile, I put myself into a complete +posture of defense, with a determination neither to show backwardness +nor suspicion. The day arrived, and the pirates swept up the river; +eighteen prahus, one following the other, decorated with flags +and streamers, and firing both cannon and musketry; the sight was +interesting and curious, and heightened by the conviction that these +friends of the moment might be enemies the next. Having taken their +stations, the chief men proceeded to an interview with the rajah, +which I attended to witness. Some distrust and much ceremony marked +the meeting; and both parties had numerous followers, who filled +the hall of audience and the avenues leading to it; and as few of +the Illanuns spoke Malay, the communication was rendered difficult +and troublesome. The pirates consisted of Illanuns and Malukus from +Gillolo. The Illanuns are fine athletic men, with a strong resemblance +in appearance to the Bugis; their bearing was haughty and reserved, +and they seemed quite ready to be friends or foes, as best suited their +purpose. The Malukus are from a bay in Gillolo, and their country is +now in possession of the Dutch; they are a darker and an uglier race, +but their manners more supple and pliant. They were the principal +talkers, while the Illanuns maintained a dignified silence. + +"These Malukus, from their own account, since the capture of their +rajah, and the subjugation of their country, have led a wandering, +piratical life; they represent their force at about twenty-five boats, +of which three are now joined by the Illanuns, as a matter of mere +convenience. Beyond the usual formalities, this meeting had nothing +to distinguish it; one party retired to their boats, while the other +went to their respective houses, and every thing betokened quiet. In +the evening I pulled through the fleet, and inspected several of +the largest prahus. The entire force consisted of eighteen boats, +viz., three Malukus and fifteen Illanuns; the smallest of these boats +carried thirty men, the largest (they are mostly large) upward of a +hundred; so that, at a moderate computation, the number of fighting +men might be reckoned at from five to six hundred. The Illanum +expedition had been absent from Magindano upward of three years, +during which time they had cruised among the Moluccas and islands +to the eastward, had haunted Boni Bay and Celebes, and beat up the +Straits of Makassar. Many of their boats, however, being worn out, +they had fitted out Bugis prize prahus, and were now on their return +home. They had recently attacked one of the Tambelan islands, and had +been repulsed; and report said they intended a descent upon Sirhassan, +one of the Southern Natunas group. These large prahus are too heavy +to pull well, though they carry thirty, forty, and even fifty oars: +their armament is one or two six-pounders in the bow, one four-pounder +stern-chaser, and a number of swivels, besides musketry, spears, and +swords. The boat is divided into three sections, and fortified with +strong planks, one behind the bow, one amidships, and one astern, +to protect the steersman. The women and children are crammed down +below, where the unhappy prisoners are likewise stowed away during an +action. Their principal plan is boarding a vessel, if possible, and +carrying her by numbers; and certainly if a merchantman fired ill, she +would inevitably be taken; but with grape and canister fairly directed, +the slaughter would be so great that they would be glad to sheer off +before they neared a vessel. This is, of course, supposing a calm, +for in a breeze they would never have the hardihood to venture far +from land with a ship in sight, and would be sorry to be caught at a +distance. Their internal constitution is as follows: one chief, a man +usually of rank, commands the whole fleet; each boat has her captain, +and generally from five to ten of his relations, free men: the rest, +amounting to above four fifths, are slaves, more or less forced to +pursue this course of life. They have, however, the right of plunder, +which is indiscriminate with certain exceptions; viz., slaves, guns, +money, or any other heavy articles, together with the very finest +description of silks and cloths, belonging to the chiefs and free +men; and the rest obey the rule of 'First come, first served.' No +doubt the slaves become attached to this predatory course of life; +but it must always be remembered that they are slaves and have no +option; and it appears to me that, in the operation of our laws, +some distinction ought to be drawn on this account, to suit the +circumstances of the case. The Datus, or chiefs, are incorrigible; +for they are pirates by descent, robbers from pride as well as taste, +and they look upon the occupation as the most honorable hereditary +pursuit. They are indifferent to blood, fond of plunder, but fondest +of slaves: they despise trade, though its profits be greater; and, +as I have said, they look upon this as their 'calling,' and the +noblest occupation of chiefs and free men. Their swords they show +with boasts, as having belonged to their ancestors who were pirates, +renowned and terrible in their day; and they always speak of their +ancestral heir-loom as decayed from its pristine vigor, but still +deem the wielding of it as the highest of earthly existences. That +it is in reality the most accursed, there can be no doubt, for its +chief support is slaves they capture on the different coasts. If +they attack an island, the women and children, and as many of the +young men as they require, are carried off. Every boat they take +furnishes its quota of slaves; and when they have a _full cargo_, +they quit that coast or country and visit another, in order to +dispose of their human spoil to the best advantage. Thus a cargo of +slaves, captured on the east coast of Borneo, is sold on the west; +and the slaves of the south find ready purchasers to the northward, +and _vice versa_. As the woolly-haired Papuas are generally prized by +the natives, constant visits are made to New Guinea and the easternmost +islands, where they are procured, and afterward sold at high prices +among any Malay community. The great nests of piracy are Magindano, +Sooloo, and the northern part of Borneo; and the devastation and +misery they inflict on the rest of the Archipelago are well known; +yet are no measures adopted for their suppression, as every European +community, be it English, Dutch, or Spanish, seems quite satisfied to +clear the vicinity of its own ports, and never considers the damage +to the native trade which takes place at a distance. To be attacked +with success, they must be attacked on their own coasts with two or +three steamers. A little money would gain every intelligence as to +where they were preparing; and while the steamers were so worthily +engaged in suppressing piracy, they might at the same time be acquiring +information respecting countries little known, and adding to our stock +of geography and science. A few severe examples and constant harassing +would soon cure this hereditary and personal mania for a rover's life; +and while we conferred the greatest blessings on the rest of the +Archipelago, Magindano itself would be improved by the change. + +"The Illanun Datus and the Gillolo chiefs visited the schooner +constantly, and were always considerate enough to bring but few +followers. We conversed much upon piracy in general, their mode of +life, their successes, and their privations. They seemed to have but +few fears of the Dutch or English men-of-war being able to take them, +and during their three years' cruise had never been chased by any +of them. + +"After being three or four days in company with these worthies, +_i. e._, the fleet of Illanuns and Malukus, the Royalist dropped down +the river to Santobong, while Williamson and myself stayed yet a few +days with Muda Hassim in his house. We had a week's incessant torrent +of rain. Nothing could exceed the kindness of the rajah during our +stay, with his brothers, of all ages, as our constant companions. We +had one day a dance of the Illanuns and Gillolos: they might both +be called war-dances, but are very different. The performer with the +Illanuns is decked out with a _fine helmet_ (probably _borrowed_ from +our early voyagers), ornamented with bird-of-paradise feathers. Two +gold belts, crossed, like our soldiers', over the breast, are bound +at the waist with a fantastical garment reaching half way down the +thigh, and composed of various-colored silk and woolen threads one +above another. The sword, or 'kempilan,' is decorated at the handle +with a yard or two of red cloth, and the long upright shield is +covered with small rings, which clash as the performer goes through +his evolutions. The dance itself consists of a variety of violent +warlike gestures, stamping, striking, advancing, retreating, turning, +falling, yelling, with here and there bold stops, and excellent as to +_aplomb_, which might have elicited the applause of the opera-house; +but, generally speaking, the performance was outrageously fierce, +and so far natural as approaching to an actual combat; and in half +an hour the dancer, a fine young man, was so exhausted that he fell, +fainting, into the arms of his comrades. Several others succeeded, +but not equal to the first; and we had hardly a fair opportunity of +judging of the Maluku dance from its short continuance; but it is of +a more gentle nature, advancing with the spear stealthily, easting it, +then retreating with the sword and shield. The Maluku shield, it should +be observed, is remarkably narrow, and is brandished somewhat in the +same way as the single stick-player uses his stick, or the Irishman +his shillelah, that is to say, it is held nearly in the center, and +whirled every way round. I procured some of the instruments, and found +that the sword of the Malukus of Gillolo is similar to that of the +Moskokas of Boni Bay, in Celebes. All these pirates are addicted to +the _excessive_ use of opium; but the effects of it are by no means so +deleterious or so strongly marked as has been represented; and it must +likewise be remembered that they are in other respects dissolute and +debauched. Among the Chinese it would be difficult--nay, impossible--to +detect the smokers of the drug. Here and there you may see an emaciated +man; but, out of a body of five hundred, some are usually emaciated +and unhealthy. I do not mean to deny the bad effects of opium; but the +stories of its pernicious results are greatly exaggerated where the +habit exists in moderation. The Chinese themselves, when I spoke to +them of the bad consequences, always argued that, taken moderately, +it was a stimulus to industry and activity; but they allowed, at the +same time, that excess was highly injurious. + +"The time at length came for my departure, but I was pressed to stay +one day after another, for our society was a relief to the usual +monotonous tenor of their lives. The papers were signed which made me +Resident of Sarawak. I started to Santobong, and reached the vessel +on the 13th of February; and after waiting two days, in the vain hope +of a lull or change of wind, we beat out of the channel." + +Mr. Brooke did not remain long at Singapore. His principal object was +to procure a vessel to trade between that place and Sarawak. Trading, +however, was not his forte; but he already felt the deepest interest +in the welfare of those people. By accident--or, more properly, +by Providence--he appears to have been sent to put a stop to an +unnatural war, and to save the lives of the unfortunate rebels; +and the benefit he had conferred on so many of his fellow-creatures, +the good he had already done, and the infinity of good which he saw +he still might do, made him anxious to return. + +After some difficulty, he succeeded in purchasing a schooner of 90 +tons, called the Swift, which I recollected in the Malacca Straits as +the Zephyr, then a cruiser in the East India Company's service. Having +put a suitable cargo into her, he sailed with his squadron (Royalist +and Swift) for Sarawak early in April, 1841. + +The rajah, already described as an indolent, weak-minded man, had +promised Mr. Brooke the government of the country; but, among other +obstacles with which he would have to contend in accepting it, I do not +think my friend calculated on jealousy, low cunning, and treachery, +or the dangerous enemy he had made in Pangeran Macota. He had been +an eye-witness to his cowardice, and had more than once detected +and exposed his cunning and trickery; sins not to be forgiven, +especially by a Malay. Notwithstanding this, firmness, courage, and +straightforward honesty gained the victory, as the sequel will show. + +Among the characters with whom Mr. Brooke got acquainted during the +rebel war was a young chief named Si Tundo, who was constantly by his +side whenever there was danger. He was an Illanun, and had been sent +from Sadung, with some thirteen of his countrymen, by Seriff Sahib, to +offer his services to Macota, commander-in-chief of the rajah's forces; +and I resume Mr. Brooke's memoranda, with the following interesting +account of this poor fellow's fate: "On my arrival at Sarawak, we +were received with the usual honors; and the first thing I heard +of was the decease of my poor companion, Si Tundo of Magindano, who +had been put to death by the rajah's orders. The course of justice, +or, rather, injustice, or perhaps, more justly, a mixture of both, +is so characteristic of the people, that I am tempted to give the +particulars. Si Tundo fell in love with a woman belonging to an adopted +son of Macota, and the passion being mutual, the lady eloped from her +master and went to her lover's house. This being discovered in a short +time, he was ordered to surrender her to Macota, which he reluctantly +did, on an understanding that he was to be allowed to marry her on +giving a proper dowry. Either not being able to procure the money, +or the terms not being kept, Si Tundo and a relation (who had left +the pirate fleet and resided with him) mounted to Macota's hill, +and threatened to take the woman and to burn the house. The village, +however, being roused, they were unable to effect their purpose, +and retired to their own residence. Here they remained for some days +in a state of incessant watchfulness; and when they moved, they each +carried their kempilan, and wore the krisses ready to the hand. The +Rajah Muda Hassim, being well aware of the state of things, sent, at +this crisis, to order Si Tundo and his friend to his presence; which +order they obeyed forthwith, and entered the balei, or audience-hall, +which was full of their enemies. According to Muda Hassim's account, +he was anxious to save Si Tundo's life, and offered him another wife; +but, his affections being fixed on the girl of his own choice, he +rejected the offer, only praying he might have the woman he loved. On +entering the presence of the rajah, surrounded by foes, and dreading +treachery (which most probably was intended), these unfortunate men +added to their previous fault by one which, however slight in European +estimation, is here of an aggravated nature--they entered the presence +with their kempilans in their hands, and their sarongs clear of the +kris-handle; and instead of seating themselves cross-legged, they +only squatted on their hams, ready for self-defense. From that hour +their doom was resolved on: the crime of disrespect was deemed worthy +of death, though their previous crime of abduction and violence might +have obtained pardon. It was no easy matter, however, among an abject +and timid population, to find executioners of the sentence against two +brave and warlike men, well armed and watchful, and who, it was well +known, would sell their lives dearly; and the subsequent proceeding +is, as already observed, curiously characteristic of the people, +and the deep disguise they can assume to attain their purposes. It +was intimated to Si Tundo that, if he could raise a certain sum of +money, the woman should be made over to him; and to render this the +more probable, the affair was taken out of Macota's hands, and placed +at the decision of the Orang Kaya de Gadong, who _was friendly_ to +the offenders, but who received his private orders how to act. Four +men were appointed to watch their opportunity, in order to seize the +culprits. It is not to be imagined, however, that a native would trust +or believe the friendly assurances held out to him; nor was it so in +the case of Si Tundo and his companion; they attended at the Orang Kaya +de Gadong's house frequently for weeks, with the same precautions, +and it was found impossible to overpower them; but the deceit of +their enemies was equal to the occasion, and delay brought no change +of purpose. They were to die, and opportunity alone was wanting to +carry the sentence into effect. Time passed over, suspicion was lulled; +and as suspicion was lulled the professions to serve them became more +frequent. Poor Si Tundo brought _all_ his little property to make good +the price required for the woman, and his friend added his share; +but it was still far short of the required amount. Hopes, however, +were still held out; the Orang Kaya advanced a small sum to assist, +and other _pretended_ friends, slowly and reluctantly, at his request, +lent a little money. The negotiation was nearly complete; forty or +fifty reals only were wanting, and the opposite party were ready to +deliver the lady whenever the sum was made good. A final conference +was appointed for the conclusion of the bargain at the Orang Kaya's, +at which numbers were present; and the devoted victims, lulled into +fatal security, had ceased to bring their formidable kempilans. At +the last interview, the forty reals being still deficient, the Orang +Kaya proposed receiving their gold-mounted krisses in pledge for +the amount. The krisses were given up, and the bargain was complete, +when the four executioners threw themselves on the unarmed men, and, +assisted by others, overpowered and secured them. Si Tundo, wounded +in the scuffle, and bound, surrounded by enemies flourishing their +krisses, remarked, 'You have taken me by treachery; openly you could +not have seized me.' He spoke no more. They triumphed over and insulted +him, as though some great feat had been achieved, and every kris +was plunged into his body, which was afterward cast, without burial, +into the river. Si Tundo's relation was spared on pleading for mercy; +and after his whole property, even to his clothes, was confiscated, +he was allowed to retire to Sadung. Thus perished poor Si Tundo, +a Magindano pirate, with many, if not all, the vices of the native +character, but with boldness, courage, and constancy, which retrieved +his faults, and raised him in the estimation of brave men. In person +he was tall, elegantly made, with small and handsome features, and +quiet and graceful manners; but toward the Malays, even of rank, there +was in his bearing a suppressed contempt, which they often felt, but +could not well resent. Alas! my gallant comrade, I mourn your death, +and could have better spared a better man; for as long as you lived, +I had one faithful follower of tried courage among the natives. Peace +be with you in the world to come, and may the great God pardon your +sins and judge you mercifully! + +"The case of poor Si Tundo proves that the feeling of love is not +quite dead among Asiatics, though its power is obscured by their +education and habits of polygamy; and that friendship and relationship +may induce a man here, as elsewhere, to risk his life and sacrifice +his property without any prospect of personal advantage. An old +Magindano man, a sort of foster-father of Si Tundo's, when he saw +me for the first time, clasped my arm, and repeatedly exclaimed, +'Si Tundo is dead; they have killed him;' adding, 'had you been here, +he would not have been killed.' I was touched by the old man's sorrow, +and his expression of feeling." + +Datu Jembrong was likewise an Illanum, and retired to Sadung when the +rebel war had closed, and died after a few days' illness. Mr. Brooke +writes: "Thus I have lost the two bravest men--men whom I would rather +trust for fair dealing than any score of Borneons; for the Magindanos, +though pirates by descent and education, are a far superior people to +any in the Archipelago, with the exception of the Bugis. Whatever may +be their vices, they are retrieved by courage to a certain degree; +and where we find a manly character, we may presume that the meaner +arts of _finesse_ and treachery are less prevalent. Dampier and Forrest +both give them an excellent character; and it is a pity that of late +years little is known of them, and so little pains taken to hold a +friendly intercourse either with them or the Sooloos." + +The important changes which ensued on the return of Mr. Brooke +to Sarawak, in the spring of 1841, now demand attention; and, as +heretofore, I proceed to describe them from the data intrusted to +my charge. + +"In a former part of my journal," says Mr. Brooke, "I have mentioned +briefly the occasions which led to my invitation, and the reasons +which induced me to accept the offer of the Rajah Muda Hassim; +but I will repeat these, in order to bring the narrative at once +more distinctly before the memory. When I returned here for the +second time, in August of last year, it was with the determination +of remaining for a few days only on my way to the northward; and +nothing but my feeling for the miserable situation of Muda Hassim +induced me to alter my intention. The rebellion, which he had come +from Borneo to quell, had defied every effort for nearly four years; +and the attacks he had made on the rebels had failed entirely and +almost disgracefully. His immediate followers were few in number, +and aid from the neighboring countries was either denied, or withheld +on trivial excuses; while the opposition of Pangeran Usop in Borneo +paralyzed the efforts of his supporters in the capital, and, in case +of non-success, threatened his own power. The pride, the petty pride +of the Malay prince bent before these circumstances, and induced him +to state his difficulties to me, and to request my assistance. His +failure was strongly dwelt on, and his resolution to die here rather +than abandon his undertaking--to die disgraced and deserted! Under +these circumstances, could I, he urged upon me, forsake him? could I, +'a gentleman from England,' who had been his friend, and knew the +goodness of his heart, could I leave him surrounded and begirt with +enemies? It was possibly foolish, it was perhaps imprudent, but it +accorded with my best feelings; and I resolved not to abandon him +without at any rate seeing the probabilities of success; and it must +always be remembered that, in doing so, I had no ulterior object, no +prospect of any personal advantage. I joined his miserable army, which, +in numbers, barely exceeded that of the rebels, strongly stockaded. I +joined them at the outset of their campaign; and in a few days (ten +days) witnessed such scenes of cowardice, treachery, intrigue, and +lukewarmness among his followers, such a determination not to take +advice or to pursue any active measures, that I left them and returned +to my vessel. The Chinese I do not include in this representation; +they were true and willing, but wretchedly armed, and very justly +refused to be thrust forward into posts of danger, which the Malays +in their own country would not share. On my return to the vessel, I +frankly stated how useless my presence was among men who would not do +any thing I desired, yet would do nothing for themselves; and, under +the circumstances, I intimated my intention of sailing. Here, again, +I was pressed with the same entreaties; every topic was exhausted +to excite my compassion, every aid was at my disposal; and lastly, +if I would stay, and we were successful, the country was offered to +me. The only inquiry was, whether the rajah had the right and authority +to make over the country to me, and this I was assured he had. The +government, the revenue (with slight deductions for the sultan), and +one of his brothers to reside here in order to insure the obedience +of the Malays, were all comprehended in this cession, freely and +without condition. I might, at this point of the negotiation, have +insured _the title_ to the government as far as a written agreement +could give it; but for two sufficient reasons I declined all treaty +upon the subject until the war was over. The first of these reasons +was, that it would have been highly ungenerous to take advantage of +a man's distress to tie him down to any agreement which, in other +circumstances, he might not be willing to adopt; and by acting thus +ungenerously, it would be tempting the rajah to deceive me when the +treaty came to be ratified. The second reason was equally cogent; for +a mere barren bond, which I had no means to enforce, was worse than +useless, and no man would be nearer possession by merely holding a +written promise. I may add, likewise, that I saw so many difficulties +in the way of the undertaking, that I was by no means over-anxious to +close with it; and, previously to accepting and entering on so bold +a project, I was desirous thoroughly to be assured of the good faith +of the promiser. To the Rajah Muda Hassim's proposal I, therefore, +replied, that I could not accept it while the war was pending, as I +considered it wrong to take any advantage of his present situation; +and that, if he conferred authority on me in the camp, I would once +more go up the river and assist him to the utmost of my power. It +is needless to repeat any details of the war, except to say that I +found every support from him, and the highest consideration, both +in personal attentions and the bestowal of influence. He conquered, +I may say without self-praise, through my means; and on the close +of hostilities our negotiation about the country was revived. In its +progress I stated to him that Malay governments were so bad, that the +high were allowed so much license, and the poor so oppressed, that any +attempt to govern without a change of these abuses was impossible; +and as a foundation of my acceptance was the proposition, that all +his exertions must be employed to establish the principle that one man +was not to take any thing from another, and that all men were to enjoy +the produce of their labor, save and except at such times as they were +engaged in working for the revenue. That the amount of the revenue was +to be fixed and certain for three years, at a stated quantity of rice +per family; in lieu of which, should a man prefer it, he might pay in +money or in labor: the relative price of rice to money or labor being +previously fixed at as low a rate as possible. That the officers, viz., +Patingi, Bandar, and Tumangong, were to receive stated salaries out of +this revenue, in order to prevent any extortion, either by themselves +or in their name; and that they were to be answerable for the whole +revenue under my superintendence. That the Dyaks were to be treated +the same as the Malays, their property protected, their taxes fixed, +and their labor free. At the same time, I represented to him the +difficulty of doing this, and that nothing but his power could effect +it; as any foreigner, without his unlimited support and confidence, +would have no chance of finding obedience from the numerous inferior +Pangerans and their followers. This, with much more, was the theme +of my conversation; to which was replied, _imprimis_, That their +customs and religion must not be infringed. That with regard to the +violence and rapacity of the higher classes, and the uncertainty +of taxation, which led to so much oppression, they were by no means +any part of the Ondong Ondong, _i. e._, the written law of Borneo, +but gross abuses which had arisen out of lax government. That it was +the wish of his heart to see these things mended; and that nothing +should be wanting on his part to assist me in accomplishing objects +so desirable, particularly with respect to the Dyaks, who were so +grossly abused. On this, a written agreement was made out, merely to +the purport that I was to reside at Sarawak in order to 'seek for +profit;' and on my remarking that this paper expressed nothing, he +said I must not think that it was the one understood between us, but +merely for him to show to the sultan at Borneo in the first place. I +accepted this version of the story, though it looked suspicious; and +on my part, over and above our written agreement, which expressed +nothing, I consented to buy a vessel, and bring down trade to the +place, in return for which I was assured of antimony ore in plenty; +and though I knew that profit was not to be expected, I was desirous +to comply, as, without a vessel regularly trading here, it would be +impossible to develop the resources of the country. While I went to +Singapore, the rajah promised to build me a house, in which I was to +take up my residence. I sailed accordingly, and returned within three +months, having performed all my engagements; but on reaching Sarawak, +the first disappointment I experienced was, that the house was not +commenced. I urged them to begin it, and after the most provoking +delays at length got it finished. I mention this because it was the +only instance in which good faith was kept. + +"_August 3d._--The two schooners, Royalist and Swift, having arrived +at Sarawak, I found myself with a heavy monthly expense, and was +naturally anxious to dispatch them as speedily as possible. I was +assured that 6000 peculs of antimony ore would be down immediately, +and that whenever the people were set to work, any quantity might +be procured without difficulty; which, indeed, I knew to be true, +as Macotah had loaded a ship, a brig, and three native vessels in +six weeks. The procrastination, therefore, was the more provoking; +but as I had determined to arm myself with patience, and did not +anticipate foul play, I was content to wait for a time. The Swift +being leaky and requiring repairs, was another inducement to me to +lie by and land her cargo, which, ever since my arrival, the rajah +petitioned to have ashore, giving every pledge for a quick and good +return. At length I consented to let him have the cargo into his own +hands, on the assurance that the antimony ore" (_i. e._, the 6000 +peculs which were ready?) "should be brought down directly. Nothing +could be more correct than the way they received the cargo, taking an +account of each separate article, comparing it with the invoice, and +noting down the deficiency; and the rajah himself superintended this +interesting process from morning till dark. At this time, having agreed +with him for the whole, as the easiest and best mode of dealing under +the circumstances, I did not much trouble myself about the deposit; +and my attention was first roused by the extreme apathy of the whole +party directly the cargo was in their possession--overhauled, reckoned, +and disposed of among them." + + + + + +CHAPTER X. + + Obstacles in the way of coming to a satisfactory + conclusion with Muda Hassim.--The law of force and reprisal + considered.--Capabilities of Sarawak.--Account of Sarebus + and Sakarran pirates.--Excursion up the river.--Visit to + the Singe Dyaks.--Description of Mr. Brooke's house at + Sarawak.--Circumstances relating to the wreck off Borneo Proper. + + +During the succeeding pages of my friend's journal, one hardly knows +which to admire most; his firmness, his cool courage, his determined +perseverance, or his patience. On the other hand, it is difficult to +decide whether the rajah's indolence and ingratitude, or Macota's +low cunning and treachery are the more disgusting. But I continue +the narrative, and readers will judge for themselves. + +"Yet," says Mr. Brooke, "I had confidence, and was loth to allow +any base suspicion to enter my mind against a man who had hitherto +behaved well to me, and had not deceived me before. From the time the +cargo had been disposed of, I found myself positively laid on the +shelf. No return arrived; no steps were taken to work the antimony +ore; no account appeared of the positive amount to be received: a +promise was tendered; and all my propositions--nay, my very desire +to speak of the state of the country--were evaded. I found myself +clipped like Samson, while delay was heaped upon delay, excuse +piled on excuse, and all covered with the utmost show of kindness +and civility. It was provoking beyond sufferance; but with several +strokes which I considered important, I bore it with saint-like +patience. I remonstrated mildly but firmly on the waste of my money, +and on the impossibility of any good to the country while the rajah +conducted himself as he had done. I urged upon him to release the +poor women whom he had kept confined for nearly five months; and I +guarantied the peaceful disposition of the people if it were done. I +might as well have whistled to the winds, or have talked reason to +stones. I was overwhelmed with professions of affection and kindness, +but nothing ensued. I had trusted--my eyes gradually opened--I feared I +was betrayed and robbed, and had at length determined to be observant +and watchful, when an event occurred which finished the delusion, +and woke me fully to the treachery, or at any rate the weakness, +at work against me. My house was finished, and I had just taken +possession of it, when I understood that an overwhelming body of Dyaks, +accompanied by Malays, were proceeding up the river, with the avowed +purpose of attacking a hostile tribe, but with the real design of +slaughtering all the weak tribes in their way. Upward of 100 boats, +with certainly not fewer than 2500 men, had been at Sarawak a week, +asking permission for this expedition; and I was informed there was +not the slightest chance of its being granted, when to my surprise +I saw the expedition start. + +"On being convinced that they really were going up the country, +I instantly quitted the house and returned on board the Royalist, +sending to know whether the rajah had granted leave for their entrance +into the interior. By him the whole blame of the transaction was +thrown upon Macota and the Orang Kaya de Gadong; and he himself was +said to be so ill that he could not be seen; but it was added, as I +disliked the measure so greatly, the same parties who had sent the +Dyaks up could recall them down, which indeed I had insisted on being +done. They accordingly retrograded and left; after which I continued +sulky on board and the rajah, shamming sick, sulked in his harem. That +any man beside the rajah himself would have been bold enough to grant +the permission, I knew, from experience, was impossible. I accepted +his denial as the groundwork of a reconciliation. In the mean time, +as he continued indisposed, I intimated my intention of proceeding to +Borneo in three days, and dispatching the Swift at the same time to +proceed to Singapore; part of her cargo, 750 peculs of antimony ore, +having been at length put on board. On this being made known to the +rajah, he forgot his sickness, and came out and proffered me a meeting +to discuss affairs, which I postponed until the following day. In +the mean time I took a candid view of my position, and considered the +best means of extricating myself from my difficulties with as little +trouble and inconvenience as possible to either party. + +"I had lost much valuable time, spent much money, and risked my life +and the lives of my crew, in order to render assistance to Rajah +Muda Hassim in his distress; in return for which he had voluntarily +offered me the country. The conditions of my acceptance had been +discussed and mutually understood, and I had, in fulfillment of my +part, brought vessel and cargo. Profit I did not much care about; +the development of the country was my chief, I may say my only, aim; +and on my arrival I had been delayed and cheated by false promises, +which showed too plainly that he neither meant to adhere to his former +agreement, nor to pay for what he had on false pretences obtained. It +may appear to many that no measures ought to be kept with one who had +so behaved; but for the following reasons I resolved still to wait his +pleasure. In the first place, it was barely possible that indolence, +and not treachery, might have actuated him; and in the next place, if +it was possible to arrange so as to get back the amount of the Swift's +cargo, I was in duty and justice bound to use every endeavor before +resorting to measures of force. As for the cession of the country, +and all the good which must have resulted from it, I put these +considerations altogether out of the question. I had been deceived +and betrayed, and had met with the grossest ingratitude; but I had no +claim, nor would any written agreement have given me one; and I was +therefore constrained to submit without returning evil for evil. Every +point weighed, I felt, from every motive, inclined, nay desirous, to +avoid a rupture, or taking an equivalent for my property by force. The +Swift, with the part of her cargo received on board, after three +months' detention, and no more even talked of, I therefore resolved, +as already stated, to dispatch to Singapore. My first intention on +arriving here had been to send the Royalist back to that port and +dispose of her; but a native rumor being afloat that the crew of a +shipwrecked vessel were in Borneo Proper, I deemed it incumbent on me +to visit that place and effect their release. I had used every means +in my power since my arrival to induce the Rajah Muda Hassim to send +one or two of his Pangerans and a letter from himself to the sultan +by the Royalist, in order to insure that object; but although, day by +day, I had received promises, they were never performed. Seeing now +that this duty of humanity could no longer be delayed with propriety, +I resolved to dispatch the Royalist to Borneo, and myself to remain +here, to endeavor, if I could, to obtain _my own_. Each vessel was +to return as quickly as possible from her place of destination; +and I then resolved to give two additional months to the rajah, and +to urge him in every way in my power to do what he was bound to do +as an act of common honesty. Should these means fail, after making +the strongest representations and giving amplest time, I considered +myself free to extort by force what I could not gain by fair means. + +"Having determined on these steps, I met the rajah by appointment, +and repeated all my grievances, and set strongly before him the injury +done in consequence; and lastly, plainly told him that I only came and +now only stayed in his country at his request, but that the property +he had taken must be repaid, and subsequently to that, if he had any +proposition to make, I would endeavor to meet his wishes. To all this +I received _no one satisfactory answer_, and, from the shuffling on +every complaint, I formed the worst opinion of his intentions. + +"My determination, however, having been previously made, the result of +this conversation had no effect upon me; and at the end of three days, +the time I had limited, no letter for the sultan being forthcoming, +on the fourth morning the two schooners proceeded to sea, one for +Borneo, the other for Singapore, while, with three companions, +I remained in my new house. [12] + +"I wish now to discuss a question which has often occupied my mind, +and upon which I have been very desirous to arrive at a right +conclusion. It is certain that a British subject cannot wrongfully +attack or injure any prince or person in his own country without +rendering himself liable to be punished by the laws of England. It is +both right and just that it should be so, because in demi-civilized or +savage countries the natives are often unable to protect themselves, +and an attack upon them savors of piracy. On the other hand, if the +native prince be the party to blame; if he fraudulently possess himself +of property under false pretences, make promises which he breaks, +and enter into agreements before witnesses which he never intends +to fulfill; then, I ask, is a British subject to submit to the loss, +when the party defrauding him is able to pay and will not? I answer +decidedly, he is not bound to submit to be cheated, and, if he have +the means, he has the right to enforce repayment. It may be urged that +trust ought not to be reposed; but trust is the ordinary course of +trade, and cannot alter the question. Again, it may be said, Apply +to the government; but it is well known and acknowledged that the +government will not interfere in any case of the sort. Seek redress by +law! there is no law to meet the contingency. Bear the loss, _i. e._ +be betrayed, deceived, and cheated, and submit! It cannot be; for +although the law may properly inquire into the circumstances, yet +as it will not protect me here, or give me any redress for _fraud_ +or _murder_, it cannot punish, if right be on my side. Am I quite +sure that the right is on my side? It is, as far as I can judge; and +having candidly stated every fact and circumstance, I am convinced +there can be but one opinion on the subject. I am sure that if I +seize property to the amount of that taken from me, I act justly, +though perhaps not legally; yet I firmly believe legally likewise, +although law and justice do not necessarily go always hand in hand. On +the whole, there was the old sore rankling--the false promises, the +gross deceit, the base ingratitude to a man who had done everything +to relieve this equivocating rajah from disgrace, defeat, and perhaps +death. But here I close this account for the present, to be resumed +on the return of the Royalist from Borneo. + +"_August 4th._--Both retrospectively and prospectively the grounds for +all these transactions were ever pressing on my mind and guiding my +actions. The capabilities of the Sarawak country were very great. It +could abundantly supply the richest produce of the vegetable kingdom; +it abounded in mineral wealth, and especially in a vast staple +commodity of antimony ore; with a considerable population of Dyaks, +whose condition was decidedly improvable; a Malay population, by no +means large, which was advantageous; and a Chinese population ready to +immigrate with even a moderate prospect of protection. Beside these +inducements, must be added its propinquity to the Pontiana river, +and the trade which by that route might flow even from the center +of this little-known island. To crown all, there were the credit to +myself in case of success, the amelioration of the native condition, +however partial, and the benefit to commerce in general. These were +the reasons that induced me to enter on this arduous task; and to +these I may add a supplementary one, viz., that when I had struggled +for a time, I might rouse the zeal of others, and find efficient +support either from government or the mercantile body. + +"I have in a former part of my journal mentioned the Illanun pirates, +and my meeting with them here. On our return we heard of their being +still on the coast, and from that time to this they have been ravaging +and plundering between Tanjong Datu, Sirhassan, and Pontiana. Malays +and Chinese have been carried off in great numbers; Borneo and Sambas +prahus captured without end; and so much havoc committed, that the +whole coast, as far as the natives are concerned, may be pronounced +in a state of blockade. + +"Beside the Illanuns, there are two other descriptions of pirates +infesting these seas: one, the Dyaks of Sakarran and Sarebus, two +predatory tribes already mentioned; the other called Balagnini, a wild +people represented to come from the northward of Sooloo. I have not +seen them; but their boats are said to be very long and swift, with +sometimes outriggers; and one particular in their mode of attack is +too curious to omit. In closing on their victims they use long poles, +having a hook made fast at the extremity, with which, being expert, +they hook their opponents at a distance and drag them overboard, +while others are fighting with saligis and spears. + +"I have before mentioned the arrival of one hundred Dyak boats at +Sarawak, to request permission from the rajah to ascend the river +and attack a tribe toward Sambas. What a tale of misgovernment, +tyranny, and weakness, does this request tell! These Dyaks were +chiefly from Sakarran, mixed with the Sarebus, and with them three +boats of the Malo tribe, whose residence is toward the Pontiana +river. The Sakarrans are the most powerful, the most predatory, +and the most independent tribe on the N.W. coast, their dependence +on Borneo being merely nominal. The latter are likewise predatory +and numerous, but they are on good terms with all the coast tribes +and with the Malays, while the Sarebus are against all, and all are +against them. Speaking generally, they are a remarkably fine body of +people, handsome, intelligent, powerful, well-made, beautifully-limbed, +and clear-skinned. They are somewhat fairer than the Malays and the +mountain Dyaks; but in manners, customs, and language, exactly resemble +the Sibnowans, except that the last, from misfortune, have become a +peaceful tribe. The Sarebus and Sakarrans are only distinguishable +by the numerous rings they wear in their ears. On one man I counted +fourteen of brass, various sizes, in one ear only. They are rather +fond of ornament, and wear grotesque caps of various-colored cloths +(particularly red), some of them square, others peaked, and others like +a cocked hat worn athwart-ships, and terminating in sharp points on +the top of the head. These head-dresses are ornamented with tufts of +red hair or black human hair, shreds of cloth, and sometimes feathers; +but what renders them laughable to look at is, that the hair is cut +close to match the shape of the cap; so that when a man displaces it, +you find him bare of hair about the forehead and posterior part of +the skull, that over the ears cut into points, and the rest of the +skull showing a good crop of black bristles. + +"The commanders of this party were yclept poetically by their own +people, as _noms de guerre_, the Sun and the Moon, _i. e._, _Bulan_, +for moon, and _Matari_ for sun. The Sun was as fine a young man as the +eye would wish to rest upon; straight, elegantly yet strongly made, +with a chest and neck, and head set on them, which might serve Apollo; +legs far better than his of Belvidere; and a countenance mild and +intelligent. I became very good friends with both Sun and Moon, and +gave them a great deal of good advice about piracy, which, of course, +was thrown away. + +"Their boats are built very long, raised at the stern, and the largest +pulling as many as sixty paddles; but I should not think them fast, +and any boat with a swivel might cut them up. The least average I +could give the hundred boats is twenty-five men per boat, making, +as already observed, 2500 in all. We counted ninety, and there were +others down the reach we could not see; and they themselves stated +their force to be 140 boats and 4000 men. The manners of these Dyaks +toward us were reserved, quiet, and independent. They stole nothing, +and in trading for small quantities of rice, bees-wax, cotton, and +their cloths, showed a full knowledge of the relative value of the +articles, or rather they priced their own at far above their proper +worth. I may indeed say of all the Dyaks I have seen, that they are +anxious to receive, but very loth to give; and when they have obtained +cloth, salt, copper, beads, &c. to the amount of two or three dollars +as a present, will bring in a bunch of plantains or a little rice, +and ask you _to buy_. The Sibnowans are the chief exceptions to this, +and they are my pet tribe. The language of Sakarran and Sarebus is the +same as the Sibnowan; and with all the word God, the _Allah Talla_ +of the Malays, is expressed by _Battara_, from which we may infer +that their notion of the Deity, as probably was all the religion of +these regions, was derived from the Hindoos. + +"When this force of Dyaks was, contrary to the assurance given to +me, sweeping up the river, I had just finished a late dinner. I was +_angry enough_, and resolved instanter to leave the house, when who +should come in, _as if by pure accident_, but Pangeran Budrudeen, +the rajah's brother. I controlled myself, spoke strongly withal but +civilly, and sent him away wishing he had not come near me; and the +boat being ready, I retired from the house to the Royalist. Their +immediate recall was the consequence; for the rajah having denied his +permission, those who fathered the act dared not persist in it when I +told them it was an act of disobedience. They tried to frighten me with +the idea that the Dyaks would attack us; but as I felt sure we could +blow them away in ten minutes, it had not the desired effect. They +had in the mean time reached Leda Tanah, whence they were brought down +again sulky enough, and did show a slight inclination to see whether +the people on board the Swift were keeping watch; for several of their +boats dropped close to her, and one directly under the bowsprit, as +silently as death; but on being challenged, and a musket leveled near +them, they sheered off, and the next day finally departed. The poor +Dyaks in the interior, as well as the Chinese, were in the greatest +state of alarm, and thence I gained some credit among them for my +interference on their behalf. The very idea of letting 2500 wild +devils loose in the interior of the country is horrible; for though +they have one professed object, they combine many others with it, +and being enemies of all the mountain tribes, they cut them up as much +as they can. What object, it may be inquired, can the Malays have in +destroying their own country and people so wantonly? I must endeavor +to explain, to the best of my belief and knowledge. The Malays take +part in these excursions, and thirty men joined the Sakarrans on +the present occasion, and consequently they share in the plunder, +and share largely. Probably Muda Hassim would have got twenty shares +(women and children); and these twenty being reckoned at the low rate +of twenty reals each, makes four hundred reals, beside other plunder, +amounting to one or two hundred reals more. Inferior Pangerans would +of course partake likewise. Muda Hassim _must_ have given his consent, +must have been a participator in this atrocity, nobody being desperate +enough to do such a thing without his orders. In fact, they dare not +move up the river themselves without leave, much less send up the +Dyaks. It is a hateful feature in this government, newly developed +since the close of the war. + +"_August 5th._--One excursion I made up the river over our old +ground, staying a week, visiting various places. Where the village +of Siniawan once stood is now a small Chinese settlement, and their +garden bespeaks the fertility of the soil. From Siniawan I walked +over to Tundong, now the principal Chinese station. The scenery was +beautiful all the way from Siniawan to Tundong--gently undulating +ground rising into respectable hills, and backed by noble mountains, +and valleys so quiet and still, and looking so fertile, that I sighed +to think man's cultivating hand was not here. We paused, and rested +at a farm of the Paninjow. Their mode of cultivation is the same as +described by Marsden--cutting, clearing, planting, and abandoning +after one or two crops. They seem likewise to prefer the upland to +the wet ground. Tundong is quite a new settlement, situated close on +the banks of the river, which is here quite narrow and shallow. The +distance may be ten miles by water, as it took our boat four hours +and a half to pull against stream. We spent the same time walking, +but diverged from the road. Wherever the Chinese are, the sound of +the axe and the saw is to be heard in the woods as you approach, and +all are industriously employed. They have their carpenters, sawyers, +blacksmiths, and housebuilders, while the mass work the antimony +ore, or are busy constructing the trench where they find and wash +the gold. With such inhabitants a country must get on well, if they +are allowed fair play. I was quite tired, and stayed all night at +Tundong. On the following morning I started for the Singe mountain, +which is the residence of the Dyak tribe of the same name. The walk, +including a rest, occupied nearly three hours, the latter part uphill, +and we reached the village a good deal knocked up from the heat of the +sun and the badness of the way. Our entertainment was not of the best; +yet the Singe were not inhospitable, but suspicious that we came to +rob them. The rice and the fowls we required, although we paid for +them at double their value, were reluctantly produced; while at the +same time they showed themselves anxious enough to obtain the salt +we had brought to exchange, without giving the equivalent. + +"The village is built on the shoulder of a mountain, not half way up, +and only accessible by a ladder-like path on either side. It consists +of about 200 miserable huts, and is as dirty and filthy as any place +I ever was in, with numerous half-starved pigs and dogs running about +it. The houses are small and mean, and detached from each other, +contrary to the usage of the other Dyaks, who inhabit one large house +containing numerous partitions for families; here, however, they have +one or two public halls or council-houses, which are built and thatched +in a circular form, and in which their young men and bachelors sleep; +here likewise are deposited the heads, of which they have more than +enow, as above one hundred ghastly remnants of mortality ornamented +the abode in which we slept. I could not on this occasion find +out that they professed to take the heads of friends or strangers, +though the latter may fall victims if on enemies' ground. They seem +to have no idea of cannibalism or human sacrifice, nor did they accuse +their enemies of these practices. They have a custom, that in case of +sickness in a house, or child-bearing, the house is forbidden to the +males and strangers, which is something similar to the tabboo of the +South-Sea Islands. This plea was urged as a reason why the head man or +Orang Kaya Parembam could not receive us in his dwelling. The Dyaks +are always decorous in their behavior, rarely give way to mirth, and +never annoy by their curiosity. Toward the Malays they are extremely +sulky and mulish; but they have good reasons, as the Malays are ever +extorting from them, and threatening them with the anger of the rajah +or the incursion of the Sakarrans. The women wear black bamboo stays, +which are sewn on when they arrive at the age of puberty, and never +removed save when _enceinte_. These Singe Dyaks, like the others, +attend to the warning of birds of various sorts, some birds being +in more repute than others. On starting for a hunting excursion we +met one of them on the hill-side, who said, 'You will be fortunate: +I heard the bird behind you.' Here, if a bird is before you, it is +a sign that enemies are there too, and they turn back: if behind, +they proceed in good spirits. They have a prejudice against the flesh +of deer, which the men may not eat, but which is allowed to women and +children. The reason given for this is, that if the warriors eat the +flesh of deer, they become as faint-hearted as that animal. These may +be called their superstitions, but religion they have none; and though +they know a name for God, and entertain some faint notion of a future +state, yet it is only in the abstract, for practically the belief +seems to be a dead letter. At their marriage they kill fowls, as I +have narrated; but this is a ceremony, not a sacrifice. They have no +priests or idols, say no prayers, make no offerings to propitiate the +Deity, and it is little likely therefore that human sacrifice should +exist among them. In this respect they are different from any known +people who have arrived at the same state of civilization. The New +Zealanders, the inhabitants of the South Seas, &c. &c., for instance, +all bow to their idols, toward which the same feelings of reverence +and devotion, of awe and fear, obtain as with more civilized beings +in regard to the invisible Deity; but here are the mere words, barren +and without practice. + +"The day following our arrival at Singe we descended into the plains, +amid their former rice-fields, to shoot deer. The place is called +Pasar (bazaar or market), though it could scarcely ever have been +one. The rice-cultivation was formerly very extensive, and the low +ground all about the mountain is well cleared of wood by the industry +of these Dyaks. But the country becoming unsettled and troubled, and +roving parties of strange Dyaks landing on the coast near Onetong, +cut off the people employed in the fields, and they consequently were +abandoned. We took up our quarters in a ruinous little deserted hovel, +and in the evening walked over the neighboring district, where the +cocoanut and betel-trees mark its former state of prosperity. The sago +is likewise planted in considerable quantity, and serves for food, +when rice falls short. Deer, the large deer of Borneo, abound, and in +a walk of a few miles we saw from fifteen to twenty, and from their +tracks they must be very numerous indeed. The walking was difficult, +for owing to the softness of the ground, we often sank in up to our +thighs, and generally to our knees: and a short distance in this sort +of wading in stiff mud serves to knock a man up. I was fortunate enough +to kill one of the deer, and have no doubt that with more favorable +light a man might get many. The night's repose in the hut was broken +and uncomfortable, and our people were busy for several hours curing +the flesh of the animal, which is done as follows: first it is slightly +salted, and then burnt over a quick wood-fire in slices or lumps, +and thus keeps for many days, and is very palatable. Seriff Hussein +(formerly of Siniawan) was my companion on this excursion. He had +three followers, while I had three Javanese with me, beside my Bugis +boy Situ, who walks with the best of us. The morning after killing +the deer we ascended the Singe again by a desperately steep path; +and after resting an hour or two, walked to our boats, and descended +the stream to Siniawan. The night was marked by torrents of rain, +thunder, and lightning, which left the roads so bad that I resigned +my intention of walking up to Sarambo, and in the evening dropped +down to Leda Tanah, and tried unsuccessfully for another deer. We +saw some, but could not get near them. Here likewise are plenty of +rice-fields deserted, but which a little labor would bring again +into cultivation. The day following we rejoined the schooner, and, +as usual, found everything at a stand-still on shore. + +"I may here mention our house, or, as I fondly styled it, our +palace. It is an edifice fifty-four feet square, mounted upon +numerous posts of the Nibong palm, with nine windows in each +front. The roof (_atap_) is of Nipah leaves, and the floor and +partitions are all of plank: furnished with couches, tables, chairs, +books, &c. the whole is as comfortable as man would wish for in +this out-of-the-way country; and we have, beside, a bathing-house, +cook-house, and servants' apartments detached. The view from the +house to the eastward comprises a reach of the river, and to the +westward looks toward the blue mountains of Matang; the north fronts +the river, and the south the jungle; and but for the uncertainty of +our affairs, I would have had a garden ere this, and found amusement +in clearing and improving. Farewell, I fear, to these aspirations; +our abode, however, though spacious, cool, and comfortable, can only +be considered a temporary residence, for the best of all reasons--that +in the course of a year it will tumble down, from the weight of the +superstructure being placed on weak posts. The original plan was +to have had a lower story, but about this I am now indifferent. The +time here passes monotonously, but not unpleasantly. Had we but the +animation of hope, and the stimulus of improvement, time would pass +rapidly, though without a companion to converse with. + +"_August 6th._--The Royalist, as I mentioned before I reverted +to the subject of the pirate fleet, started for Borneo Proper, +to inquire respecting the crew of an English vessel, reported to +have been shipwrecked. Pangeran Sulieman brought the intelligence +from Borneo, but he knew very few particulars; and having been here +four months before my arrival, the chances were that with the change +of the monsoon they had sailed for Manilla. As, however, he assured +me he had seen European men and women, and a numerous Lascar crew, I +thought it right, at all events, to ascertain the fact; and in case of +their being there still, to endeavor to obtain their release. For this +purpose I was very desirous of procuring a letter from Muda Hassim to +the sultan, conveyed by a Pangeran of rank; which, in addition to my +own application, would most likely insure the object in view. This, +however, though promised, I could not accomplish; delay coming upon +delay, and the plague of my own affairs also intervening, postponed +my intention till I could see the Swift fairly off for Singapore. The +Royalist then went out with her on the Sunday, July 25th, proceeding +to Borneo to demand the crew, if there: and the other to Singapore. On +the 2d of August I was surprised by the receipt of a letter brought +from Sadong, and bearing date the 10th of July. The gentleman who +writes it can best tell his own story. + + + + + 'Island Sirhassan, off Tan Datu, + 'July 10th, 1841. + + + 'A boat leaves this to-morrow for Sarawak; perhaps this may fall + into the hands of Mr. Brooke, or some of my countrymen, which, + should I not succeed in getting to Singapore, I trust will lose + no time in letting the authorities know, so that steps may be + taken for the release of the remaining thirty-six British subjects + now at Borneo; which I fear nothing but one of H. M. ships will + effect. The pirates are cruising in great force between Sambas + and this, and have taken thirteen Borneo prahus, or more; they + know that there are Europeans in the prahu, and have expressed a + wish to take them. Our situation is not very enviable. The bearer + of this has just escaped from them. I have been living ashore + with Abduramon, a native of Pulo Pinang, who knows Mr. Brooke, + and has been very kind to me. Trusting penmanship and paper will + be excused, + + + 'I remain, &c. &c. + 'G. H. W. Gill.' + + + + +"On the reverse was the following attestation, which threw more light +on the circumstances:-- + + + 'I, G. H. Willoughby Gill, late chief officer of the ship + Sultana, of Bombay, do hereby certify that the said ship was + totally destroyed by lightning, thirty miles N. E. of the Bombay + shoal, coast of Palawan, on the 4th of January, 1841. Part of + the crew, forty-one in number, succeeded in reaching Borneo on + the 16th of January, in a state of starvation and misery not to + be described; the remainder are reported to have landed on the + coast of Borneo per long-boat:--Captain John Page; G. H. W. Gill, + chief officer; Alexander Young, second officer; one gunner; five + sea-cunnies; two carpenters; twenty-three natives and Lascars; two + Nakodas. Passengers:--Mrs. Page (of a daughter, 31st of March); + Mr. and Miss de Souza; Mrs. Anderson, servant; one Ayah; in all + forty-two souls. The sultan has permitted myself, Mr. and Miss de + Souza, with three servants, to proceed to Singapore in one of his + prahus, where I hope to succeed in procuring the release of the + remainder of my companions from their present very uncomfortable + situation. I dare not say more. Mr. de Souza and myself left on + the 24th of May, and put in here dismasted on the 20th of June; + since then have been detained by a fleet of piratical prahus, + which arrived on the 24th, and left 9th of July. Should nothing + prevent, we expect to be ready by the 15th; but am very doubtful + of ever getting to Singapore, as I fear they are on the look-out + for us outside.' + + +"This is the contents of the paper, which arriving after I had +retired to rest, effectually banished sleep from my pillow. The +'uncomfortable situation,' coupled with 'I dare say no more,' gives +the worst suspicions of their treatment in Borneo; while the chance +of the party at Sirhassan falling into the hands of the pirates is +extremely shocking. I instantly, on the receipt of the letter, sent +to the rajah to request that he would dispatch a boat for Sirhassan, +with a person competent to treat with the pirates; and on the morning +of the 3d I succeeded in dispatching a boat to Songi, in the Sadong, +to get some of the Datu Pangeran's people, who are Illanuns; but up to +this time they have not returned. I can only hope these poor people +at Sirhassan will be wise enough to stay there, instead of risking a +capture by the pirates. Should the Royalist return shortly, and have +obtained the crew, we may fight our way to that place and release +the party, who, I have little doubt, are still detained there. If the +Royalist is long away, and the captain goes in search of the missing +boat's crew, we may yet have the Illanuns from Sadong here in time +to dispatch. As for myself, I am tied, and have not the means at +present of locomotion; my situation is an anxious one. The Swift +must have been liable to fall in with this great force of pirates +on her way to Singapore, and will be again liable on her return. The +doubt and uncertainty about the poor fellows in Borneo and Sirhassan, +and the wretched condition of my own affairs, all cause unpleasant +reflections to my mind; yet I yield not, but will fight it out. + +"I have just brought up my history to the present time; and, like a +log on the water, must wait for events to develop themselves. + +"_7th._--A report arrived this morning that the Sirhassan party sailed +for Singapore on the 3d of the moon; and as Mr. Gill says they would +be ready for sea about the 15th of last month, I consider it likely +to be true. I trust they may escape the pirates, and safely reach +their destination." + + + + + +CHAPTER XI. + + Return of the Royalist from Borneo Proper with intelligence of the + sufferers from the wreck of the Sultana.--Effect of the arrival + of the Diana on the negotiations for their release.--Outrage + and oppression of Macota.--Fate of the Sultana and her + crew.--Mr. Brooke made Rajah of Sarawak.--Liberation of rebel + prisoners.--State of Dyak tribes.--Court of justice opened.--Dyak + burials, and respect for the dead.--Malay cunning and treachery. + + +While waiting events, Mr. Brooke amused himself by writing down +such accounts of the interior as he was enabled to collect, from +time to time, from the natives visiting Sarawak, as well as a brief +description of the constitution and government, as enacted in Borneo +Proper. But as my object now is to trace the progress of my friend +up to the time when he embarked on board the Dido, I shall refer to +these matters hereafter. + +"_Tuesday, August 17th, 1841._--Three weeks the Royalist has now been +absent, and I begin, in spite of my determination to the contrary, +to be somewhat uneasy about her. Suspense is certainly more difficult +to bear than misfortune, for the certainty of an event arouses within +us some of our best feelings to resist it; but suspense lets loose +our imagination, and gives rise to that sickening feeling of 'hope +deferred,' so truly characterized in the Scriptures. + +"_18th._--The Royalist arrived near Sarawak, having come into the +river on the 16th, and in one tide from the Morotaba entrance as far as +the Paduman [13] rocks. They reported that they had not effected the +release of the prisoners, were very rudely treated, the boat detained +at a fort near the entrance of the Borneo river, all communication +denied with the Europeans, a letter for them seized from the native +crew, and provisions and water refused. In addition to this, a letter +from the sultan, addressed to me, stated to the effect, that the crew +of the Sultana having entered into a treaty with him, the merchant +and mate (Messrs. de Souza and Gill) had gone to Singapore to fulfill +that agreement. The captain having a wife in the family way, preferred +staying in Borneo, as the vessel was a small one, and therefore the +sultan did not grant my request on this occasion; and further, having +an agreement, he did not wish to be deceived regarding it. This was +a falsehood from beginning to end, as will be clear by comparing it +with Mr. Gill's statement, though I fear the poor men have been rash +enough to enter into some arrangement to ransom themselves." + +On the 19th of August the Swift arrived; but the journal was laid by +until the 24th of October, when it thus recommences: + +"I may now continue my narrative of events which have happened since I +last used my pen, together with fresh details of my present intentions, +and such additional knowledge as has been acquired. After the arrival +of the Swift, I still adhered to my former resolution of waiting +patiently for a settlement. I made several strong remonstrances, +and urged for an answer to a letter I had addressed to Muda Hassim, +in which was recapitulated our entire negotiation. This letter +was acknowledged to be perfectly true and correct, and the rajah, +in the conference which followed, again pledged himself to give me +the country, saying he always intended to do so, but was involved +in difficulties of the nature of which I could not be aware. Thus +far things went well, and there appeared, indeed, a frankness in his +manner which had formerly pleased me, but had long been in abeyance. + +"On the return of the Royalist from Borneo, I had assured them that +a government vessel would be sent to demand the captives; but, taking +this assurance for a mere boast, they paid little attention to it, and +were therefore excessively frightened when, a week after the Swift, +the Diana steamer entered the river. I had the pleasure of calming +their fears, and was too generous to push matters to a settlement +during the two days the steamer remained. + +"Muda Hassim now expressed himself desirous of sending some Pangerans +to Borneo, and I wished him likewise to do so on account of the +reflective power of the steamer, which, in that case, would have +shone upon him. With his usual delay, however, he failed to be ready, +and these Pangerans did not quit the river for two days afterward, +when they proceeded in a native prahu. I accompanied the steamer to +the mouth of the river, and wishing them success, pulled back to the +capital of Sarawak. + +"_Oct 30th._--The Swift was slowly laden with antimony ore, worked +by the Chinese; and I gradually robbed the Royalist of furniture for +my house on shore. But I had no intention of allowing either vessel +to sail until the time arrived which I had fixed on for the final +adjustment of my affairs. By degrees, however, I learned many of the +difficulties of poor Muda Hassim's situation, and much of the weakness +of his character. The dissensions in Borneo; the intrigues of Macota; +the rapacity of his own people, and their total want of fidelity; +the bribes from the Sultan of Sambas; the false representations of +numerous Borneo Pangerans who asserted the immense profit to be derived +from the country; the dilatory movements of the Chinese; some doubts +of my good faith; and, above all, the natural tenacity of power, all +conspired to involve the rajah in the utmost perplexity, and would, +but for counterbalancing circumstances, have turned the scale against +me. Muda Hassim knew Macota to be false and in league with the Sultan +of Sambas; and he felt that he had no power, and that if he broke with +me, it would be extremely difficult to support himself against the +former rebels. He was fond of me, and trusted me more than he trusted +any one else; and pecuniary considerations had no doubt some weight, +for with all Macota's promises he could not get sufficient ore to +repay one quarter of his debt to me. However, all these conflicting +considerations, instead of inducing Muda Hassim to take one course, +only served to encourage his dilatory temper, and although puzzled, +ashamed, and fearful, he could not decide. + +"At this period a robbery was committed up the river by some of +Macota's followers on a Chinese hadji, a converted Mohammedan. They +beat the old man, threw him into the water, and robbed him of a +tael of gold. The beating and attempt at drowning were certain, +for the Chinese hadji was so ill for several days under my care, +that he was in considerable danger. He complained to me loudly of +Macota; and from other sources I gained a pretty accurate account of +that gentleman's proceedings. By threats, by intrigue, by falsehood, +and even by violence, he had prevented or driven all persons from +daring to visit or come near me, whether abroad or ashore. He was +taxing the poor Dyaks, harassing the Siniawans, and leagued with the +Borneo Pangerans to plunder and get all he possibly could. Every Dyak +community was watched by his followers, and a spear raised opposite +the chief's house, to intimate that no person was to trade or barter +except the Pangeran. The mode of plunder is thus perpetrated. Rice, +clothes, gongs, and other articles are sent to a tribe at a fixed +price, which the Dyaks dare not refuse, for it is at the risk of losing +their children! The prices thus demanded by Macota were as follows: +one gantong of rice for thirty birds' nests. Twenty-four gantongs here +is equal to a pecul of rice--a pecul of rice costs one dollar and a +half; whereas thirty birds' nests weigh one catty, and are valued at +two rupees, so that the twenty-fourth part of one and a half dollars +is sold for two rupees. Was it surprising that these people were poor +and wretched? My astonishment was, that they continued to labor, and, +indeed, nothing but their being a surprisingly industrious race can +account for it, and they are only enabled to live at all by secreting +a portion of their food. Yet war and bad government, or, rather, no +government, have had the effect of driving more than half the Dyak +tribes beyond the limits of Sarawak. + +"The rapacity of these Malays is as unbounded as it is short-sighted; +for one would think that the slightest degree of common sense +would induce some of the chiefs to allow no one to plunder except +themselves. But this is so far from being the case, that, when their +demand has been enforced, dozens of inferior wretches extort and +plunder in turn, each according to his ability; and though the Dyak +is not wanting in obstinacy, he can seldom withstand these robberies, +for each levy is made in the name of the rajah, or some principal +Pangeran; and the threat of bringing the powerful tribe of Sakarrans +or Sarebus to deprive them of their heads and wives and families, +generally reduces them to obedience. While on this subject, I may as +well mention a fact that came later to my knowledge, when several +of the Dyak chiefs, and one of particular intelligence, Si Meta by +name, assured me that each family paid direct revenue from thirty +to fifty pasus (tubs) of padi, besides all the other produces, which +are extorted at merely nominal prices. + +"To return to my relation: the Chinese hadji recovered, and I +determined to punish the aggressors, for which purpose I seized an +Illanun said to be concerned, but who was innocent. In the mean time +the steamer returned from Borneo, and once more put in here for wood +and water. She brought Captain and Mrs. Page, Mr. Young, the second +officer, and all the rest of the crew, save only a few who had landed +at the north part of Borneo, and there been seized and sold as slaves, +and brought afterward as slaves to Borneo Proper. As the history +of the shipwreck and detention is curious, I may here relate it as +nearly as I can. + +"The Sultana, a fine ship of 700 tons, the day previous to her being +struck by lightning, found the French frigate Magicienne aground and +deserted on the Bombay shoal; Captain Page boarded her, and discovered +every thing as it had been left by the crew--provisions, water, +&c., in abundance. The day after, the Sultana met with a worse fate, +being struck, and the cotton in the hold, fore and aft, fired by the +electric fluid. They had scarcely time to hoist out the boat when the +flames burst forth, and they quitted her very short of provisions, and +saving only some money and jewels. Captain Page bore up for the wreck +of the French frigate, intending to refit his long-boat aboard her, +and take provisions and arms to last them to Singapore; but, on making +her, there was so great a wash of the sea on the lee part of the reef, +that it was totally impossible to reach the Magicienne. Under these +unfortunate circumstances they bore up once more, still intending to +prosecute the voyage to Singapore, and made the land to the southward +of Palawan; and, being then short of water and provisions, landed +on a small islet off Balabac, or Balambangan. Here they procured a +few shell-fish and some very bad water; but seeing some natives in +prahus on a neighboring islet, and being-unarmed and apprehensive, +they lighted large fires in the evening to mislead these people, and, +as night advanced, silently put to sea, and made the best of their way +along the coast. With a heavy sea, and often high wind, they reached as +far as Labuan, off the entrance of the Borneo river; and here, being +in the utmost want, and reduced to an allowance of half a biscuit and +a cup of water per day, they were forced to put into Borneo Proper, +not without hopes of being well used, and enabled to buy provisions +and stores sufficient to carry them to Singapore or Sambas. I have +omitted to mention that, on making the land the first time, they parted +from the cutter, in consequence of the tow-rope breaking in the night; +but as they were then within sight of Borneo, and the wind fair, there +was no doubt of its making the land somewhere. This, indeed, it did +at Malludu Bay, where the native crew were seized and sold as slaves. + +"The arrival of Captain Page in his long-boat caused, as may well be +imagined, considerable sensation in the campong; and they reached +the sultan's house, thinking it the best place to seek shelter and +protection. In this, however, they were soon undeceived; for neither +the one nor the other was granted, but a message sent that they must +deliver up all their property into the sultan's hands, as otherwise +he was afraid they would be plundered by his people. Accordingly, +having possessed himself of their money, some jewels, their boat, +&c., he gave them a miserable shed to live in. Here they passed the +time, and were gradually robbed of every thing they had in the world, +even to the baby-linen which Mrs. Page had prepared for an expected +infant. Sometimes, indeed, when Captain Page refused to yield to the +sultan's demands, their provisions were stopped till they could no +longer hold out; and in this way they were compelled to sign bonds +for considerable sums, with the understanding that, till these were +procured and paid, they should be detained. + +"In this sad situation Mrs. Page was confined of a daughter, on +the 31st of March; and this miserable life continued from the 4th +of January, 1841, to August of the same year. Their first ray of +hope was the Royalist coming to fetch them: the steamer followed, +and they were released. + +"After a stay of two or three days, the steamer once more sailed; +though I would fain have persuaded Captain Congleton to search for +the piratical fleet, of which I had excellent information; but he +considered himself not authorized, or, in other words, he declined +the responsibility. + +"As there was a chance that Mr. Gill and the De Souzas were either +at Sirhassan or Tambelan, the steamer decided to touch at the latter +place, and a native chuliah brig was directed to call at the former. I +afterward learned that the pirates were then at Sirhassan; but as +the brig knew nothing about Sirhassan, it is probable she never went +there. In the evening the Diana sailed, and I reached Sarawak about +two o'clock in the morning. + +"I now return to my concerns. The Chinese hadji, whom I had +protected, continued to reside with my servants, till one evening +we were alarmed at an attempt to poison my interpreter, a native +of the name of Mia. Arsenic had certainly been put into his rice; +but as the servants endeavored to point suspicion on this hadji, +and as I learned, at the same time, that they did not agree with +the old man, I cleared him in my own mind, and rather leaned to the +opinion of Mia having placed the arsenic in the plate himself, for the +express purpose of accusing the hadji. Connecting this event with all +Macota's former intrigues, I determined to bring matters to a crisis, +and test at once the strength of the respective parties. Accordingly, +after complaining of the matter previously mentioned to the rajah, +I landed a party of men, fully armed, and loaded the ship's guns +with grape and canister; after which I once more proceeded to Muda +Hassim, and, while I protested my kindness toward him, exposed Macota's +machinations and crimes, his oppression and his deceit, and threatened +him with an attack, as neither Muda Hassim nor myself were safe while +he continued practicing these arts. Muda Hassim was frightened; but +how Macota felt I can not say, as he never moved out of his house, +and it was long afterward before he was seen. From my knowledge, +however, of his temperament, I can well conceive that he was reduced +to a pitiable state of terror. The Siniawans took my part directly; +and their chiefs came to me to say that 200 men were all ready +whenever I pleased to call for them. The Chinese and the rest of the +inhabitants took no side; and Macota did not get a single follower +besides his immediate slaves, perhaps about twenty in number. After +this demonstration affairs proceeded cheerily to a conclusion. The +rajah was active in settling; the agreement was drawn out, sealed, +and signed; guns fired, flags waved; and on the 24th of September, +1841, I became the Governor of Sarawak, with the fullest powers." + +Being now regularly established in his government, Mr. Brooke, with his +usual activity and circumspection, applied himself to the discharge +of the onerous duties it imposed upon him; and his first acts were +such as equally displayed his wisdom, firmness, and humanity. His +journal runs thus: + +"_Nov. 3d._--I have a country; but, oh! how beset with difficulties, +how ravaged by war, torn by dissensions, and ruined by duplicity, +weakness, and intrigue! Macota's underhand dealings, after the +conclusion of my agreement with Muda Hassim had been ratified, +soon brought letters from his Sambas friends, _i. e._, one from the +sultan, one from the Tumangong, and one from another Pangeran--an +immense effort of conspiracy and correspondence! Of these letters the +sultan's alone was curious; for the rest only dealt in professions of +devoted attachment to the person and interests of Muda Hassim. But +the sultan, for want of some better plea, made use of the following +singular specimen of reasoning, viz., that the Chinese Kunsi were +indebted to him a sum of money, which they had agreed to pay him in +antimony ore; the agreement was not to pay him in gold, or money, or +other commodity--only in antimony ore; therefore he wanted antimony +ore. To this it was properly replied, that an arrangement had been +made with me, and that the Chinese could not agree to give antimony +ore without his (Muda Hassim's) consent. + +"My first object, on holding the reins of government, was to release +the unfortunate women confined for a whole year by the rajah. This, +indeed, was not only necessary to inspire confidence in my just +intentions, but was dictated by humanity. I found Muda Hassim not +averse to take the measure, _now_ that he had really resolved to +adhere to my advice, and consequently I had the sincere satisfaction, +within a few days, of liberating upward of a hundred females and young +children, and of restoring them to their husbands and fathers; this +act being somewhat alloyed by Muda Hassim detaining twelve females, +and among them _two wives_. I urged as strongly as I could, but without +success, the advisability of releasing the whole; and I was obliged, +at last, to content myself with the mass, and yield the few whom I +could only have got _by force_ or the utter abrogation of our infant +treaty. When I pressed the affair, it was answered that, except for +me, _none_ would have regained their liberty; and that the release +was an act of great kindness and unexampled confidence toward me; +that what had been done was perfectly accordant with their customs; +and that the women detained were for the rajah's brothers--so far, +indeed, from being intended as an injury to the women, it was a great +honor and advantage. I explained the circumstances to the Patingi +and Tumangong, and they acquiesced in the decision--allowing the +custom--and said they had gained so much more than they had ever +hoped for, that they could submit to the rest. + +"The next step was to assemble the Siniawans, who, since the close +of the war, would run away, and whom it was found impossible to keep +here. Some had retired to Sambas; some (among them Patingi Ali) had +gone to Sariki; and others had built a village on the borders of the +Sambas territory. The whole aim and object of Macota's government +was to get these people back; and those who were already here were +constantly plying backward and forward to recall their companions; +but as soon as they succeeded in getting one family, another +absconded. Confidence alone could restore them; and I therefore +intimated to the Patingi and Tumangong that there was no occasion for +their seeking them; that I by no means desired their return; and that +any of their people who wished to leave the country were at liberty +to do so whenever they felt inclined. This had the desired effect, +in a short time, of bringing back the fugitives from Pankalon Nibong; +and they continued daily to arrive from Sambas. + +"My next measure was to inquire into the state of the Dyaks, to gain +their confidence, and, as much as it was within my power, prevent +the oppressions of the Malays. It was necessary, likewise, to fix a +rate of tax to be levied yearly; and the prospect seemed fair, as the +chief people of the following tribes had come in, and agreed that such +a tax on rice, amounting to sixteen gantongs, would be required from +each man, and that for the rest they would be obliged to labor; that +they could trade at pleasure; that no man could demand any thing from +them; that their wives and children were safe; and that, in case any +trouble arose, they were to let me know, and I would myself come to +their assistance. The tribes were, Lundu, Sarambo, Bombak, Paninjow, +and Sow. The only other tribe on the right-hand river were the Singe, +a powerful and stiff-necked people, with good reason to be shy; but +when once they are treated justly, their strength will be advantageous, +and give them confidence to resist oppression. + +"The story told me by the three heads of the Sow Dyaks brought tears +into my eyes, as they each in turn related their grievances. One +of them, a remarkably intelligent person, addressed me nearly in +the following terms: 'From former times we have been the subjects +of the Patek of Borneo. The Borneons are the elder brothers, we +the younger; and the custom of old was, that we should pay revenue +and find protection. But they forgot what was right, and departed +from the custom, and robbed the Dyaks, and oppressed them. We have +done no wrong: we listened to the commands of the Patingi who was +put over us by the Patek. If he did wrong, he should be punished; +but we have suffered because we obeyed the commands of the officer +legally appointed. You might, sir, a few years ago, have sought in this +river, and not have found a happier tribe than ours. Our children were +collected around us; we had rice in plenty, and fruit-trees; our hogs +and fowls were in abundance; we could afford to give what was demanded +of us, and yet live happily. Now we have nothing left. The Sadong +people and the Sakarran Dyaks attacked us: they burned our houses, +destroyed our property, cut down our fruit-trees, killed many of our +people, and led away our wives and young children into slavery. We +could build another house; we could plant fruit-trees and cultivate +rice; but where can we find wives? Can we forget our young children? We +have asked the Patek to restore them; we have asked Pangeran Macota +to restore them: they have told us they would, but have not; we can +not trust them; their words are fair, but in their hearts they do not +mean to help us. We have now no one to trust but you--will you help +us? Will you restore our wives and children? If we get our families, +you will never repent it: you will find us true.' + +"What could I answer? I could not deceive them, as I knew not how to +obtain their object; I therefore told them I feared it was impossible; +but I would try, and they themselves should go and try at the same +time. Poor, unhappy people, who suffer for the crimes of others! God +knows, I will aid you to the utmost of my power. + +"_Nov. 5th._--To-day the greatest, and I hope the final, struggle +of the opposing faction was developed by the arrival of a brig from +Sambas, with two of the sultan's sons on board; Macota in high spirits, +and my party looking rather desponding; and, in fact, I can not trust +them against Sambas. For good or for bad, for success or for failure, +for life or for death, I will act justly, and preserve the high hand +over Macota. + +"After the steps I have mentioned, I determined to open a court for +the administration of justice, wherein I should preside, together with +such of the rajah's brothers as liked to assist me. As for a jury, +or any machinery of form or law, it was rejected, because it must +be inefficient, if not corrupt; and the only object I aimed at was, +keeping witnesses out of ear-shot of each other, hearing the evidence, +deciding as appeared best, and in future punishing. This simple plan +insured substantial redress; and it gave all the people confidence +in me, and a notion of what was right. + +"The first case was a follower of the rajah's, of the name of Sunudeen; +and a greater villain could not exist either in this or any other +land. It was as follows: A man from Samarahan, named Bujong, had +undertaken to marry his daughter to a Sarawak man called Abdullah; but +Abdullah proving a dissolute character, and greatly in debt, Bujong +broke off the engagement before the proper authorities, and returned +the presents which Abdullah, according to custom, had made. Abdullah, +it appeared, was indebted a small sum to Matassim (Mohammed Orsin), +and, between Sunudeen and Matassim, they resolved to lay the debt +on Bujong's shoulders; in other words, to plunder Bujong under false +pretenses. Accordingly, Sunudeen, with his comrade, went to Samarahan; +and, in his capacity of follower of the rajah, demanded the debt due +by Abdullah to Matassim. Bujong having no money, Sunudeen proceeded +and seized his nephew, a boy, and a slave-man belonging to him, +as _his slaves_. Poor Bujong resisted, and recovered his nephew, but +yielded his slave; he appealed, however, to the Orang Kaya de Gadong's +sons, and they failing, a Nakodah stated the case secretly to me. I +investigated it, and ordered the return of the slave in my presence, +which was obeyed. This may give an idea of the state of the country, +and the power of every petty scoundrel hanging about the rajah to +rob and plunder at pleasure. + +"_7th._--I have before mentioned that the Dyaks of Sibnow bury their +dead; but I always found a reluctance on their part to show me their +place of sepulture. Once, indeed, chance led me to the burial-ground +of part of that tribe settled at Simunjang; but, as they seemed +restless to get away, I only took a hasty survey. The reason, I +have lately learned, for this is, that in their graves they deposit +the golden ornaments and other property of the person deceased, +amounting frequently to a considerable value in the precious metals, +brass swivels, gongs, &c. + +"The tribe now at Lundu were formerly settled on the Samarahan river +for many years; and their burial-place there contained the ashes of the +parents and grandparents of the present chief, who, with his followers, +were not long ago driven to Lundu; and their former settlement being +deserted, it has been the employment of some of the rascals here to +rob these graves of their contents, and to desecrate the repose of the +dead. The Orang Kaya of Lundu complained to me sadly, but mournfully, +on this account, and said that if he could not find redress from the +rajah, he must obtain it himself by taking the heads of those who had +disinterred the bones of his ancestors. His whole manner convinced me +that they hold the burying-places in great respect; and my advice, +to remove the wealth and bones to a place of security at Lundu, +was rejected on the ground that they could not disturb the remains +of those whom they had once deposited in the earth. + +"While there is so much of right feeling and manly principle in the +actions of these Dyaks, the miserable race who pretend to be their +superiors have no single virtue or good intention. I do not, however, +mean to confound the inhabitants of Sarawak, or the other rivers, +with those of Borneo Proper. The latter are thoroughly corrupt and +profligate. The former are Malays, but have their good qualities, and +certainly are not possessed with the spirit of intrigue which seems +the life, the only moving principle of the Borneons. It may truly be +said of the latter, that they would tell a lie when the truth would +serve them better. They will employ duplicity and treachery on every +slight occasion; defeat their own purpose by their meanness, and yet +continue in the same crooked paths. They will conspire without any +object, or one too mysterious to arrive at; and, while they raise a +cloud of doubts in the mind of the poor, their own equals look on and +detect the game. Yet, after all, they gain but little individually; +because so many are practicing the same arts at the same time with +equal skill; and the country is so exhausted by their oppressions +and rapacity, that in the end there is nothing to be got by their +tricks and manoeuvers. It is a strange state of society, and it is +only wonderful how it can exist; but they have their reward in being +poor and ill-provided, though living in the midst of a marvelously +fertile and luxurious country. + +"_December 31st._--The last day of the year, in which I must bring +up the arrears of my account. + +"The Sambas brig left only yesterday, after exhausting every effort +of intrigue, and every artifice which Malays can invent, to compass +their ends. + +"With the Sambas brig came Seriff Hussein, a relation of the Sultan +of Pontiana, and half Arab half Bugis by descent. He came with the +avowed purpose of entering into the most friendly communication with +me, and residing here, provided I gave him any encouragement. His +real motive (if he has one) not being obvious, I, in the mean time, +treated him with all kindness; and he is an intelligent and pleasing +person, and, moreover, connected with the Siniawans, who have a good +opinion of him." + + + + + +CHAPTER XII. + + Reflections on the new year.--The plundered village, and other + wrongs.--Means for their suppression.--The new government + proceeds to act.--The constitution.--Preparations for an + expedition against the Sea Dyaks.--Form of a treaty.--Wreck of + the Viscount Melbourne.--Administration of justice.--Difficulties + and dangers.--Dyak troubles.--Views and arrangements of the + Chinese.--Judicial forms.--Wrongs and sufferings of the Lundus. + + +"_Jan. 1st, 1842._--The past year is in the bosom of eternity, +into which bourne we are all hurrying. Here we have no merry-making, +no reunion of families, no bright fires or merry games, to mark the +advent of 1842; but we have genial weather, and are not pinched by +cold or frost. This is a year which to me must be eventful; for at its +close I shall be able to judge whether I can maintain myself against +all the circumstances and difficulties which beset me, or whether +I must retreat, broken in fortune, to some retirement in my native +land. I look with calmness on the alternative, and God knows no selfish +motives weigh on me; and if I fail, my chief regret will be for the +natives of this unhappy country. Let the year roll on, let the months +pass; and whatever they bring--whether it be life or death, fortune +or poverty--I am prepared; and in the deep solitude of my present +existence I can safely say that I believe I could bear misfortune +better than prosperity. In this, probably, I am not singular; for +there is something in prosperity which, if it does not make us worse, +makes us more foolish and more worldly--which decks passing time with +wreaths of gay flowers, and gilds the things of this life with tinsel +hopes and wishes, to the exclusion of the pure gold of reflection for +the life to come. What are all these gewgaws, these artificial flowers, +these momentary joys, these pleasures of the sense, before the war +of time? Nothing! And yet, if exertion can benefit our race, or even +our own country--if the sum of human misery can be alleviated--if +these suffering people can be raised in the scale of civilization and +happiness--it is a cause in which I could suffer, it is a cause in +which I _have_ suffered and _do suffer_; hemmed in, beset, anxious, +perplexed, and the good intent marred by false agents--surrounded +by weakness, treachery, falsehood, and folly, is suffering enough; +and to feel myself on the threshold of success, and only withheld by +the want of adequate means, increases this suffering. Hail, however, +1842! Come good, come ill, still hail! and many as are the light +hearts which have already greeted thee, mine will be more ready to +bow to the decrees of Providence which thy twelve months will develop. + +"_Jan. 3d._--I have mentioned that the Sanpro had been attacked from +Sadong; and I now learn that, at the time, the men were out of the +village, and thus the women and children alone suffered; twenty-two +have been carried away into slavery. The village was burned after +being plundered, and the unfortunate people have since been living +in the jungle, with only such food as they could get there. The head +of the tribe and about six of his followers came down the river on a +raft to ask assistance from me, and I had the story from them. They +were relieved as far as my means admitted, and returned far happier +than they came. The very same day arrived news that six men of the +Sows were cut off by a wandering party of the Sakarrans. + +"This leads me naturally to consider the means by which these +atrocities may be prevented. I propose first to send letters to +Seriff Sahib of Sadong, Seriff Muller of Sakarran, and Seriff Jaffer +of Singe, stating that I wish to be on good terms with my neighbors, +but am determined to attack any place which sends Dyaks to rob in my +country; and that I call on them to restrain their subjects from making +incursions here. In case this warning is neglected, I must strike one +blow suddenly, as a farther warning, and keep a good lookout at sea to +destroy any Dyak fleet that may be prowling outside. A good-sized boat, +with a six-pounder and a swivel or two, will effect the latter object, +backed by two or four light, fast-pulling boats, with musketry, which, +when the Dyak prahus fly, may keep pace with them and thin their +pullers, till the heavier boat can come up. To carry one of their +campongs, I must have twenty-five Europeans, and from some thirty to +fifty Bugis, who, coming from Singapore, may proceed at once to Sadong, +or, rather, the campong Tangi. Seriff Sahib is a great freebooter, +and dispatches his retainers to attack the weak tribes here for the +sake of the slaves, calculating, on the rajah's presumed weakness, +that he can do so with impunity. He may find himself mistaken. + +"Seriff Muller is a brother of Seriff Sahib, and lives at Sakarran, +which powerful Dyak tribe are always willing to be sent by either +brother on a forage for heads and slaves. It is certain, however, +that they could never come from the Sadong side without Seriff Sahib's +permission; and on the late attack on Sanpro they were accompanied +by a party of Malays. + +"Seriff Jaffer is by no means mixed up with these brothers, and there +is no love lost between them; nor would he, I think, do anything to +annoy me. This is the foreign policy. + +"The domestic policy is as disturbed as the foreign. The rajah weak, +Macota intriguing, and my ministers--viz., the Patingi (Abong Mia), +the Bandar, and Tumangong--all false and foolish, and Macota's men; +with me, however, are the Siniawans. + +"_Jan. 6th._--The Sambas brig returned, having been baffled and beat +about, and nearly lost at sea, unable to weather Tanjong Datu. The +crew say she was one hour under water. She now remains here to wait +the change of the monsoon, and her intriguing Pangerans return by land. + +"_8th._--Seriff Hussein returned from Sambas, having been nearly +stabbed while there. The assassins, it was understood, were here, +and I endeavored to apprehend them; but, having heard of the seriff's +arrival, they made off. + +"_10th._--This day the first laws and regulations are to be promulgated +in Sarawak; and as the event is a rare one, I here inscribe a copy +for the benefit of future legislators, observing that there is an +absolute necessity for mildness and patience, and that an opposite +course would raise such a host of enemies as to crush every good seed; +for, as it is, the gentlest course of justice brings down much odium, +and arouses intense dislike among a people who have had no law but +their own vile intrigues to guide or control them. + +"Two cases have lately come to notice, which will serve as examples +of their singular crimes. + +"One poor man owed another sixteen reals, and the debtor was away +trading for a few days, when the creditor sold the daughter (a free +woman) for thirty reals, to a person of influence. + +"The second case, a respectable man, or a respectably born man, owed +a Pangeran fifty peculs of ore, and proposed to make over to him in +payment, a slave woman and her four children. The woman _had been_ +a slave of his grandfather's, but was adopted as his daughter, and +enfranchised publicly; yet by intimidation, they were near getting +her and her offspring. Here the Pangerans and Nakodas bully a man +into silence and acquiescence; and the people dare not, as yet, bring +their complaints to me. But I hear these things, call the parties +together, and often prevent the commission of a premeditated crime; +by which means I save myself from the odium of punishing. + +"There is great difficulty in acting at once with temper and firmness, +so as to appear the benefactor rather than the tyrant. It is, indeed, +an arduous and troublesome task; but _I think I see_ a ray of light +to encourage me. + +"Here are the regulations, which I had printed at Singapore in the +Malayan language:-- + +"James Brooke, esquire, governor (rajah), of the country of Sarawak, +makes known to all men the following regulations:-- + +"'1st. That murder, robbery, and other heinous crimes will be punished +according to the ondong-ondong (_i.e._ the written law of Borneo); +and no person committing such offences will escape, if, after fair +inquiry, he be proved guilty. + +"'2d. In order to insure the good of the country, all men, whether +Malays, Chinese, or Dyaks, are permitted to trade or labor according +to their pleasure, and to enjoy their gains. + +"'3d. All roads will be open, that the inhabitants at large may seek +profit both by sea or by land; and all boats coming from others are +free to enter the river and depart, without let or hinderance. + +"'4th. Trade, in all its branches, will be free, with the exception +of antimony ore, which the governor holds in his own hands, but which +no person is forced to work, and which will be paid for at a proper +price when obtained. The people are encouraged to trade and labor, and +to enjoy the profits which are to be made by fair and honest dealing. + +"'5th. It is ordered that no person going among the Dyaks shall +disturb them, or gain their goods under false pretences. It must be +clearly explained to the different Dyak tribes, that the revenue will +be collected by the three Datus, bearing the seal of the governor; +and (except this yearly demand from the government) they are to give +nothing to any person; nor are they obliged to sell their goods except +they please and at their own prices. + +"'6th. The governor will shortly inquire into the revenue, and fix +it at a proper rate; so that every one may know certainly how much +he has to contribute yearly to support the government. + +"'7th. It will be necessary, likewise, to settle the weights, measures, +and money current in the country, and to introduce doits, that the +poor may purchase food cheaply. + +"'8th. The governor issues these commands, and will enforce obedience +to them; and while he gives all protection and assistance to the +persons who act rightly, he will not fail to punish those who seek +to disturb the public peace or commit crimes; and he warns all such +persons to seek their safety, and find some other country where they +may be permitted to break the laws of God and man.' + +"_Jan. 11th._--I have frequently said that all law and custom have +been long banished from this country; but I may here retrace the +customs which once obtained, the best of which I wish to restore. + +"The inhabitants were all considered the property of the sultan--serfs +rather than slaves--and were divided into four classes. Imprimis, the +Dyaks (the aborigines); the Bruni, or people of the soil, probably +the descendants of the first Malay emigrants; the Awang-Awang, the +meaning of which I am ignorant of; and the Hamba Rajah, or rajah's +slaves. There is every reason to believe the Dyaks are an aboriginal +people; but between the Bruni and Awang-Awang it is difficult to +decide the priority. The Hamba Rajah speaks for itself. + +"These three distinctions have been long confounded by intermarriage; +and the names rather than the reality are retained. The governors +of the country are the Patingi, a Bandar, and a Tumangong, who are +appointed from Borneo. Each of the classes was formerly ruled by its +particular officer, and the Dyaks were appropriated likewise among +them; the Patingi holding the tribes on the right-hand river, the +Bandar to the left, and the Tumangong on the sea-coast. The annual +revenue paid to Borneo was 300 reals; but they were subject to extra +demands, and to the extortions of the powerful chiefs. + +"The government of the Dyaks I have already detailed; and though we +might hope that in a more settled state of things they would have been +more secure from foreign pillage, yet they were annually deprived +of the proceeds of their labor, debarred from trade, and deprived +of every motive to encourage industry. The character of their rulers +for humanity alone fixed the measure of their suffering, and bad was +the best; but it seems to be a maxim among all classes of Malays, +that force alone can keep the Dyaks in proper subjection; which is +so far true, that force alone, and the hopelessness of resistance, +could induce a wild people to part with the food on which they +depend for subsistence. At a distance I have heard of and pitied +the sufferings of the negroes and the races of New Holland--yet +it was the cold feeling dictated by reason and humanity; but now, +having witnessed the miseries of a race superior to either, the +feeling glows with the fervor of personal commiseration: so true is +it that visible misery will raise us to exertion, which the picture, +however powerfully delineated, can never produce. The thousands +daily knelled out of the world, who lie in gorgeous sepulchres, or +rot unburied on the surface of the earth, excite no emotion compared +to that conjured up by the meanest dead at our feet. We read of tens +of thousands killed and wounded in battle, and the glory of their +deeds, or the sense of their defeat attracts our sympathy; but if a +single mangled warrior, ghastly with wounds and writhing with pain, +solicited our aid, we should deplore his fate with tenfold emotion, +and curse the strife which led to such a result. Among the thousands +starving for want of food we trouble not ourselves to seek one; but +if the object is presented before our eyes, how certain a compassion +is aroused! To assist is a duty; but in the performance of this duty, +to be gentle and feeling is god-like; and probably between individuals, +there is no greater distinction than in this tender sympathy toward +distress. Poor, poor Dyaks! exposed to starvation, slavery, death! you +may well raise the warmest feelings of compassion--enthusiasm awakes +at witnessing your sufferings! To save men from death has its merit; +but to alleviate suffering, to ameliorate all the ills of slavery, to +protect these tribes from pillage and yearly scarcity, is far nobler; +and if, in the endeavor to do so, one poor life is sacrificed, how +little is it in the vast amount of human existence! + +"_18th._--A Chinese boat with four men was chased into the river by +four Dyak prahus, and escaped with difficulty. On the intelligence +reaching me, I, with some trouble, mustered three canoes, and we +proceeded down, about one o'clock in the morning, in search of the +enemy. After rowing in the dark for some hours, we discovered a +light gliding up the river, and gave chase, but did not succeed; and +at daybreak returned, wet and tired, without seeing anything more, +when we learnt that the chase was a Sarawak boat, which, mistaking +us for Dyaks, as we did them, pulled with all speed home, and gave +the alarm of being nearly captured. + +"In the evening I ordered a fine boat to be prepared for the war +with Sarebus and Sakarran, which appears to me inevitable; as it +is impossible, laying all motives of humanity aside, to allow these +piratical tribes to continue their depredations, which are inconsistent +with safety, and a bar to all trade along the coast. Eighty prahus +of Sarebus and Sakarran are reported to be ready, and waiting for +further reinforcements before putting to sea. + +"_19th._--Information of three more of my Dyaks being cut off in the +interior by the predatory tribes. + +"_20th._--Opened the subject of restoring the old Patingi, Bandar, and +Tumangong, and found Muda Hassim quite willing, but wishing to wait +till he hears from Borneo; at the same time telling me that I might +employ them in their respective situations. This matter I consider, +therefore, settled; and as these men are natives, and have the command +of all the common people, and are, moreover, willing to serve under +me, I conceive it a great advance in my government. Since my return +here they have proved themselves faithful and ready; but though true +in adversity, will they continue equally so in prosperity? I hope the +best from them, especially as their circumstances will be easy; and I +will endeavor to pay them as much as I can. Pay well, and men may be +trusted. Either way, it is a great advance; for every change will not +occur immediately; and, in the mean time, I shall be strengthened by +in-comers, especially Chinese, so that the parties may be balanced, and +each look to me as the link which holds them together. The government +must be a patchwork between good and evil, abolishing only so much of +the latter as is consistent with safety. But never must I appear in the +light of a reformer, political or religious; for to the introduction +of new customs, apparently trivial, and the institution of new forms, +however beneficial, the disgust of the semi-barbarous races may be +traced. People settled like myself too often try to create a Utopia, +and end with a general confusion. The feeling of the native which binds +him to his chief is destroyed, and no other principle is substituted +in its stead; and as the human mind more easily learns ill than good, +they pick up the vices of their governors without their virtues, and +their own good qualities disappear, the bad of both races remaining +without the good of either. + +"We are in active preparation to fit out a fleet to meet the +piratical Dyaks. The rajah has a fine prahu, which I have taken in +hand to repair, and I have purchased a second; and the two, with +three or four small canoes, will be able to cope with a hundred or +a hundred and fifty Dyak boats. The largest of these boats is worth +a description. Fifty-six feet in length and eight in breadth; built +with a great sheer, so as to raise the bow and stern out of the water, +and pulling thirty paddles, she is a dangerous customer when mounting +four swivels and carrying a crew of twenty men with small arms. She is +called the 'Snake,' or 'Ular.' The second boat, somewhat shorter and +less fast, is named the 'Dragon;' her complement of paddles twenty, and +her fighting-men twenty, make one hundred and forty in, two boats. The +long canoes carry fifteen men each, which will bring the force up to +one hundred and eighty-five; and one boat of the rajah's will complete +two hundred men, of whom nearly one hundred are armed with muskets. + +"To show the system of these people, I may mention that one of the +principal men proposed to me to send to Sakarran and Sarebus, and +intimate that I was about to attack Siquong (a large interior tribe), +and invite them to assist. 'They will all come,' he said: 'nothing +they will like so well; and when they are up the Samarahan river, we +will sally forth, attack; and destroy them at one blow.' My answer was, +that I could not deceive; but if they did come, I would attack them. + +"_Feb. 1st._--Matari, or 'the Sun,' the Sakarran chief I have already +mentioned, arrived with two boats, and paid me several visits. He +assured me he wanted to enter into an agreement, to the effect that +neither should injure the other. To this treaty I was obliged to +add the stipulation, that he was neither to pirate by sea nor by +land, and not to go, under any pretence, into the interior of the +country. His shrewdness and cunning were remarkably displayed. He +began by inquiring, if a tribe, either Sakarran or Sarebus, pirated on +my territory, what I intended to do. My answer was, 'To enter their +country and lay it waste.' But he asked me again, 'You will give me, +your friend, leave to steal a few heads occasionally?' 'No,' I replied, +'you cannot take a single head; you cannot enter the country: and +if you or your countrymen do, I will have a hundred Sakarran heads +for every one you take here.' He recurred to this request several +times: 'just to steal one or two!' as a schoolboy would ask for +apples. There is no doubt that the two tribes of Sakarran and Sarebus +are greatly addicted to head-hunting, and consider the possession as +indispensable. The more a man has, the greater his honor and rank; nor +is there anything without to check or ameliorate this barbarous habit; +for the Malays of all classes, on this coast, take the same pride in +heads as the Dyaks themselves, with the exception that they do not +place them in their houses, or attach any superstitious ideas to them. + +"I asked Matari what was the solemn form of agreement among his tribes; +and he assured me the most solemn was drinking each other's blood, +in which case it was considered they were brothers; but pledging the +blood of fowls was another and less solemn form. + +"On the 26th of January the Royalist's boat, with Captain Hart and +Mr. Penfold, second mate, of the Viscount Melbourne, arrived here. The +reason, it appears, of the Royalist coming was, to seek the missing +crew of the Viscount Melbourne, a large ship wrecked on the Luconia +shoal. The captain in the launch, with some Coolies; the first and +third mates, with Colonel Campbell of the 37th, M.N.I., in a cutter; +the second mate, Mr. Penfold, and the surgeon, in the second cutter; +a fourth boat with twenty-five Lascars, and the jolly-boat, making +in all five boats, left the vessel well provisioned, and steered in +company for the coast, which they made somewhere between Borneo and +Tanjong Barram. The fourth boat was missed the night they made the +land; and being all at anchor, and the weather fine, it was strongly +suspected that the twenty-five Lascars deserted with her. + +"The other four boats proceeded a day or two, when the first cutter, +with Colonel Campbell on board, went in the evening in search of water; +and though the rest showed lights all night, returned no more. They +were, on the following day, attacked by a prahu, which fired into +them and severely wounded one man, and succeeded in capturing the +jolly-boat; but finding nothing in her, set her on fire--Lascars and +all. The crew, however, was rescued, and she was abandoned; and the +two remaining boats, in course of time, arrived at Singapore. The +Royalist was taken up by government to seek the missing boats, and +just touched here for an hour or two, the boat coming up while the +vessel kept the sea. + +"_Feb. 9th._--Mr. Williamson returned from Sanpro, where I sent +him to watch a party of natives who had gone among the Dyaks; the +Panglima Sadome, of the tribe of Sanpro, came with him, and brought +the lamentable account of the death of eight more Dyaks, cut off by +the Sakarrans. It frets me dreadfully; however, on the whole I see +a vast improvement, and a degree of confidence in me arising among +the Dyaks, greater than I expected. + +"_14th._--I have now entered on the most difficult task, and the one +most likely to cause an ultimate failure in my undertaking, but which +is indispensably necessary. I mean, the administration of justice. As +long as my laws are applied to the people of the country, there is +no trouble; but directly _equal_ justice is administered, it causes +heartburn and evasion; the rajahs and Pangerans are surrounded by +a gang of followers who heretofore have robbed, plundered, and even +murdered, without inquiry being made. It was enough that a follower +of the rajah was concerned, to hush up all wrongs; and any of the +oppressed, who were bold enough to lodge a complaint, were sure to +rue it. All the rascals and ruffians who follow the great men find +this species of protection the best and the only reward; and as the +slaves are looked upon as personal property, any punishment inflicted +upon them is likewise inflicted upon their masters. I have all along +foreseen these obstacles, and the necessity of at once combating +them--whether successfully or not signifies little; but they must be +encountered, and the result left to the Almighty. + +"Equal justice is the groundwork of society; and unless it can be +administered, there can be no hope of ultimate improvement. The +country may have bad laws; but such laws as it has must be enforced, +gently and mildly as may be toward the superiors, but strictly toward +the guilty; and all crimes coming under my cognizance must meet +with their punishment. These remarks are preliminary to two cases, +in which the rajah's followers have been concerned. + +"The first of these was a man stealing sago, which is stored without +the houses at the water's edge; he was convicted. The other occurred +some time since, but has only just been traced. A party at night +gutted a house, getting a booty of upward of 200 reals; the goods +have been discovered; but the three followers of the rajah have +absconded since the affair has been blown; whether to return or not +is uncertain. There can be no doubt, however, that they have been sent +away to keep clear of the consequences, by one of the rajah's brothers +named Abdul Khadir, who, when they were off, accused two accomplices, +people of the country! + +"Another most shameful mode of exaction and tyranny is practiced +by these Borneo people, particularly their Nakodas. It consists in +lending small sums of money to the natives (that is, Sarawak people), +and demanding interest at the rate of fifty per cent per month; by this +means a small sum is quickly converted into one which is quite out +of the power of the poor man to pay; and he, his wife, and children, +are taken to the house of the creditor to work for him, while the debt +still accumulates, and the labor is endless. I intend to strike at +this slavery in disguise, but not just yet; the suppression of robbery, +the criminal department of justice, being more immediately important. + +"_15th._--I may, in continuation of yesterday, mention another instance +in illustration of this oppressive system. Si Pata (a Siniawan), son +of the Tumangong, lost in gambling to Nakoda Ursat eighteen reals, +which in eighteen months has now arisen to a debt of 170 reals; but +all prospect of payment of such an accumulated sum being impossible +from a poor man, Nakoda Ursat consigns the debt to Pangeran Abdul +Khadir, who can demand it by fair means or by foul; and if Si Pata +cannot pay, make his father pay. Thus a gambling transaction is run +up to ten times its original amount, and a whole family involved in +distress by these iniquitous proceedings. Such things must not be; +and odious as they seem to a European, and indignant as they make +him, yet he must not proceed with the strong hand. Reflection, too, +teaches us that vice is comparative; and in forming a judgment, we +must not forget a man's education, the society in which he lives, +the absence of restraint, and the force of example from childhood; +so that what would be heinous in a Christian long under a settled +government, is light by comparison in a Malay, who is a nominal +professor of Islam, and brought up with the idea that might makes +right, and has no one external cause to deter him from crime. + +"_March 12th._--On the whole getting on very well, but with many +reasons for vexation, and more for anxiety. The chief of these is, +whether Mr. Bonham will come here, as I have suggested, or rather +pressed. Another feature of inquietude is from the Chinese of Sipang, +who certainly aim at greater power than I shall allow them, and +perhaps, some day or other, it will come to a struggle. + +"Petty troubles I do not reckon, though there are enow on all sides, +and for the last few days I have felt as if sinking under them; +but that is not my usual temperament. I now look impatiently for +intelligence. Blow, fair breezes, and waft Royalist here! + +"_25th._--A period of wearing uncertainty since my last, having news +neither of the Royalist nor of Mr. Bonham, and kept on the _qui vive_ +by a schooner or two at the entrance of the river. The plot thickens +in and around; and for the sake of keeping up a register of events in +something like order, I will here mention the leading features. Seriff +Sahib, of Sadong, pretends to be friendly, but is treacherous in his +heart, as is his brother, Seriff Muller of Sakarran. We have been +quite clear of Dyaks, and our own tribes enjoying rest and peace; +and one tribe from without, namely Serang, has come in and claimed my +protection. The only tribe at all troublesome is the Singe, the chief +of which (the Orang Kaya Parembam) is decidedly opposed to me, and +swears by Macota. I am given to believe, however, that the majority +of his people do not agree with him; and I shall dispossess him of +his dignity, and substitute a friendly chief. The Singe Dyaks are +the most powerful and numerous in my territory, and the only ones +who have not been attacked and plundered by the Sakarrans. + +"At Lundu are the Sibnowan Dyaks, under the Orang Kaya Tumangong; and +the Lundu Dyaks, once a flourishing tribe, now, by ill-treatment of +all sorts, reduced to twenty persons. I may mention among my other +difficulties, that many, nay most, of the Dyak tribes are held +as _private property_: any rascally Borneon making a present to +the sultan, gets a grant of a Dyak tribe, originally to rule, now +to plunder or sell; and in this way the portion of the Sibnowans +settled at Lundu are under Bandar Sumsu; but, being a resolute +people, he cannot do them much wrong. This Bandar Sumsu has lately +been disturbing the Lundu Dyaks in the following manner: a Sibnowan +Dyak lived with the Lundu Dyaks, which gave him an opening to demand +of the Lundus the sum of fifty reals (100 rupees), which was paid; +but unluckily the Sibnowan died in the course of a few months, still +with the Lundus, and a farther sum of eighty reals, or 160 rupees, +was demanded, which not being raised, the daughter of one of the head +people was seized, and sold for that sum to a Chinaman! + +"Pangeran Macota has likewise been injuring these poor people, +though I shall find it difficult to bring it home to him. His agent, +Bandar Dowud (a man involved in debt), took fifteen Dyak cloths and +sold them, or rather forced them to take them, at an exorbitant rate; +in a month or two after, he returns and demands 200 reals over and +above the large price already paid for articles worth seven or eight +reals; the poor Dyaks not being able to pay, he seizes the chief's +daughter (a married woman), and demands four other women in lieu +of the sum. Happily for the poor Dyaks, this news came to my ears, +and I sent to Lundu in haste. They had all fled, having _stolen_ +their two women, one from each Bandar, and carried them away. On the +Patingi and Tumangong reaching Lundu, they found two of the tribe, one +the Pangeran, the other the father of the girl sold to the Chinaman, +after a long search in the jungle. These two men I have now with me, +and wait for the Orang Kaya Tumangong before going into the case. The +Pangeran is the same Dyak whose conversation I have detailed at large +on my first visit to the place. He is a man of intelligence; and this +tribe (if it may yet be so called) has always borne the character of +being the most hospitable and generous among the Dyaks. I may at some +future time revert to them. + +"There is a rumor of war between the Sarebus and Sakarran Dyaks, in +consequence of the former tribe seizing a Balow woman on the territory +of the latter, and refusing to restore her. Let these two predatory +tribes employ and weaken one another, and it will be well for us and +all the other people of this country, and they will afterward be the +more easily brought into subjection. + +"From Borneo we have news, but as uncertain as everything else +regarding the capital. A hundred vessels, it is reported, are coming +to attack them; and they, in consequence, are building _a fort_. The +Royalist had been there and departed. + +"Pangeran Usop, it is said, was about to come here, when the arrival +of the Royalist induced him to postpone his design. + +"There is every reason to believe that the Chinese of Sambas, +particularly those of Montrado, are extremely dissatisfied; and a +report yesterday states that a man sent by the sultan to demand gold +had been killed by them, and that the sultan's letter to the Kunsi, +after being defiled, was publicly burned. Our own Chinese of Sipang are +certainly intriguing with Sambas; and, as the rajah well expresses it, +'their clothes-box is here, but their treasure-chest is at Sambas.' + +"It is impossible to say what quantity of gold the Kunsi may get; +but their pretence that they _get none_ must be false, when every +common Malay obtains from half to one bunkal per month. + +"To counteract the chance of evil, I have intimated that the Simbock +Kunsi are to come here; and on the whole, they (of Sipang) have taken +it more quietly than I expected. They are not in a state for war; +but they have vague notions and intentions provided they can keep out +opposition, to make this place subservient to them, as it would indeed +be, provided they were allowed to strengthen themselves while the other +parties remained stationary. But 'divide and rule' is a good motto in +my case; and the Chinese have overlooked the difference between this +country and Sambas. There they have numerous rivers in the vicinity +of their settlements--here but one; and, the Dyak population being +against them, starvation would soon reduce them to terms. The Royalist +arrived about the end of March, and sailed again on the 9th April. + +"I have before mentioned the difficulty of administering justice; +and experience teaches me that the risk to myself, on this score, +is more to be apprehended than on any other. The forms I have not +much alluded to; and the following is as nearly as possible the Malay +custom:--The rajah's brothers and myself sit at one end of the long +room in my house; at the sides are the Patingis and Tumangong, and +other respectable people; in the center the parties concerned; and, +behind them, anybody who wishes to be present. We hear both parties; +question, if necessary; and decide--and from this decision there is +no appeal. One only condition I insist upon; and that is, that in +any intricate case, or whenever I dread confederacy, I do not allow +the witnesses to hear each other. The laws of evidence, in a _free +country_, prohibit any leading questions being put to witnesses: here, +for the purposes of justice, it is indispensable; for the people, being +ruled by fear, and apprehensive of consequences, often falter before +the face of the accused, and their testimony has to be wrung from +them. To decide also according to the technicalities of construction +would be here ridiculous, and defeat the ends of justice. The people +are rude and uncivilized; their oppressors crafty and bold, who have +no hesitation about lying, and bringing others to lie for them. Oaths +are a farce to them. The aggrieved are timid, vacillating, and simple, +and cannot readily procure even necessary evidence; for their witnesses +are afraid to speak. Under these circumstances, I look at the leading +features of the case, the probability, the characters, the position of +parties, and determine according to my judgment. It is not, indeed, +a very difficult task; for the disputes are generally glaring, and, +when bolstered up, usually fail in their most important links; and +at a touch of cross-questioning, the witnesses, resolved to tell +the same story, fall into opposite ones. In one case, about a slave, +three witnesses had resolved on the sex; but, questioned separately +as to size and age, all disagreed. They were not prepared. One +represented her a woman grown and marriageable; another, as high as +my walking-stick; the third, a little child. + +"I have now on hand a serious matter, of robbery to a large extent, +and three of the rajah's followers are implicated. Would it were over +and well!--but done it must be. How little can those at a distance +know my difficulties--alone, unaided, the unceasing attention by day, +the anxiety and sleeplessness by night, the mountain of doubt upon +mountain piled, and the uncertainty of necessary support or assistance! + +"The Pangeran of the Lundu Dyaks lived with me three weeks, and +I was able to do him substantial justice; and hope for the future +that his life, and that of the remnant of his tribe, may be rendered +more endurable. + +"His residence with me was doubly advantageous, as it enabled me to +ascertain his character, and him to see something of our habits and +manners. The impression on my part was highly favorable; for I found +him a quiet, intelligent man, and a keen observer; and I believe +the impression he received was equally favorable. The _poetry_ of +the Dyak expressions is remarkable; and, like most wild people, they +seem to delight in oratory, and to be a good deal swayed by it. For +hours I have talked with the Pangeran, listened to his history, +heard his complaints, sympathized in the misfortunes of his tribe, +and shuddered at the wrongs and sufferings they have endured. 'We are +few,' he exclaimed, 'and therefore our oppressions are aggravated; +the same demands are made upon us as though we were many, and we have +not the means of resisting or complying. We fly to the jungle; we are +like deer--we have no home, no perch. Our wives and children are taken +from us; our sufferings are very great.' On another occasion he said, +'I have felt my sufferings to be so great, that I wished to die, if +Jovata would permit it. I wished to die; for I remembered how happy +we were once, and how miserable now.' I could dwell largely on these +and suchlike language and descriptions, which appear to me highly +pathetic and touching--at least I found them so in reality; and I +cannot forbear adding one or two more such, highly characteristic. + +"'Our home,' said the Pangeran, 'was a happy one; none who came to +us wanted. The fruit on the trees was saved; the fish in the river +near us was never destroyed. Rice was plenty; if it was scarce, we +kept it, and fed ourselves upon vegetables, that we might give it to +those who visited our habitation. The fish, the fruit, and the rice +were preserved, [14] that the men of the seas (Malays) might eat of +them; yet they had no pity on us. We were free men, yet they treated +us worse than slaves. We are now but few; and unless you protect us, +we shall soon cease to be.' Again: 'The Tumangong was severe to us; +and when Macota came, he said the Tumangong was a bad man, and he +would shield us; but he was much worse than the Tumangong. Now, you +say you will cherish us; we believe you; but you are at a distance, +and perhaps may not be able.' Further: 'Pangeran Macota kept me nine +months in his house, and wanted to make me a slave; but I escaped, +and traveled through the woods, and swam the rivers, till I came to my +own country. He thought the Dyak had no eyes except in the jungle; +he thought he had no ears except to listen to the bird of omen; +he thought he had no wit except to grow rice; but the Dyak saw, and +heard, and understood, that while his words were sweet, his heart +was crooked, and that, whether they were men of the sea or Dyaks, +he deceived them with fair sayings; he said one thing to one man, +and another to a second; he deceived with a honied mouth. I saw and +understood it all while I lived in his house. How could I trust him +afterward?' These expressions were concluded by significantly twisting +his two fore-fingers round each other, to show the intrigues that were +carried on. I grew very fond of this poor naked savage; for if honesty +and a kind heart entitle a man to our esteem, he is worthy of it. + +"I had a long conference with Si Nimook, the Sow Dyak, and hope to +recover his wife. Amid all the wealth and all the charity of England, +how well bestowed would a small portion be for the purpose of restoring +one hundred and fifty women and children to their husbands and parents, +and releasing them from slavery! A small rill from the plenteous river +would cheer this distant misery, and bestow the blessing of fertility +on the now barren soil of these poor Dyaks. Oh, that I had the brass +to beg--to draw out a piteous tale so as to touch the heart!" + + + + + + +CHAPTER XIII. + + Ascent of the left-hand river to the Stabad.--Remarkable cave + in the Tubbang.--Diamond works at Suntah.--Return.--Infested + by Dyak pirates.--A meeting of prahus, and fight.--Seriff + Sahib's treatment of the Suntah Dyaks.--Expedition against the + Singe.--Their invasion of the Sigos, and taking heads.--The + triumph over these trophies.--Arms and modes of war.--Hot and + cold council-houses.--Ceremonies in the installation of the + Orang Kaya Steer Rajah.--Meeting of various Dyak tribes.--Hostile + plans of Seriff Sahib, and their issue.--Resolves to proceed to + Borneo Proper. + + +The next portion of Mr. Brooke's Journal details another excursion +up the country, and then proceeds to describe the early incidents of +his infant government. As he advanced on his way, affairs began to +assume more important aspects; and yet they could hardly be painted +with greater force or interest than in his simple notes. + +"_April 25th._--Ascended the left-hand river, in order to introduce the +Kunsi Simbock to their new territory; passed the night on a pebbly +bank; moon at full, bright and unclouded, tinging the luxuriant +foliage, and glancing on the clear rapid stream. Four distinct and +distant races met on this lonely and lovely spot--English, Chinese, +Malays, and Dyaks! What a scope for poetry and reflection--the time, +the clime, the spot, and the company! + +"_26th._--After our morning meal and bath, entered the small river +Stabad, which, according to report, runs from a source two or +three days' journey further into the interior. At present it is so +obstructed by fallen trees, that we were forced to return, after +ascending about four miles. We left our boats near its entrance, +and walked to the small but steep mountain, Tubbang. Its length may +be about 400 feet. After mounting, by a winding path, about half-way +up toward the top, we arrived at the entrance of a cave, into which +we descended through a hole. It is fifty or sixty feet long, and the +far end is supported on a colonnade of stalactites, and opens on a +sheer precipice of 100 or 150 feet. Hence the spectator can overlook +the distant scene; the forest lies at his feet, and only a few trees +growing from the rock reach nearly to the level of the grotto. The +effect is striking and panoramic; the grotto cheerful; floored with +fine sand; the roof groined like Gothic, whence the few clear drops +which filter through form here and there the fantastic stalactites +common to such localities. The natives report the cave to be the +residence of a fairy queen; and they show her bed, pillow, and other +of her household furniture. Within the cave we found a few remnants +of human bones; probably some poor Dyak who had crawled there to die. + +"Having finished our survey of the place, and wandered sufficiently +about the mount, we reembarked, and dropped a short way down the +river, and started again into the jungle to look for antimony ore, +but without success, our guide having forgotten the road. After a +couple of hours' wandering, the latter part in a heavy storm of rain, +we reached the boats; and I thence ascended to Suntah, where we were +all glad to house ourselves, as the deluge continued. + +"_27th._--I will say nothing of my works at Suntah, except that they +run away with my money, are badly conducted by my Chinese hadji, +and, above all, that I have great reason to suspect the integrity +and steadiness of this said hadji. I must therefore make up my mind +either to change him when the business is finished, or to watch him +very narrowly; for the honesty of a diamond-worker, like the virtue of +Caesar's wife, must be above suspicion, or he must be watched closely; +but how? + +"_28th._--Descended the river, and, arriving at Sarawak, found +both work and cause for inquietude. The rajah had heard of Dyak +pirates, and dispatched four boats, two large and two small: the +Snake, weakly manned by the Tumangong's people, and the rest led by +Pangerans (who neither work nor fight) and a wretched crew, chiefly +Borneons. Mr. Crimble, taking my servant Peter and four Javanese, +went most imprudently in the second of the large boats. The whole, +being dispatched in haste (foolish haste), insufficiently provided +in every respect, may fall into trouble, and involve me in very +unpleasant circumstances. + +"The other cause for uneasiness is the attack of a Chinese boat at the +mouth of the river. The boat that attacked her is a small one, with +eight or ten men, which came out of Sadong, and had been lying here +for a week or more. She is commanded by a Pangeran named Badrudeen, +has some Illanuns on board, and is bound on a piratical cruise. As she +descended the river, she met with the small China boat, likewise from +Sambas, with eight men, which she treacherously assailed, desperately +wounding one man and severely another; but the China boat's consort +heaving in sight, the pirate pulled away. I must redress this, if it +be in my power; and have ordered the Datus to gather men to follow +the rascals, as it is probable they will be lurking not far from +hence. In the mean time it gave me great pain dressing the hurts of +these poor Chinese, one of whom I think must die, being cut along the +back and side--across the body from the side nearly to the backbone, +a ghastly gaping wound, beside having his arm slashed through. The +other man is very severely, and perhaps, without medical attendance, +mortally, hurt, having his arm half cut through at the muscular +development between the shoulder and elbow--poor fellow! I must say +for the Chinese, they seem very grateful for any attention shown them. + +"_29th._--My birthday. Men collected, and to-morrow we start for +Telang Telang. This morning, much to my relief, our fleet returned, +after an encounter with thirteen Dyak boats. About one o'clock +on the 28th, pulling into a bay between Morotaba and Tanjong Poe, +they came unexpectedly on them. One Borneon boat had lagged behind; +the Pangeran who commanded deserted the second, and sought refuge with +the Tumangong, trying to induce him to fly; and the crew of the third, +a large boat with my two Europeans on board, was, by their account, +in a state of fear, which totally incapacitated them from acting. All +rose, none would pull; all shouted, none would serve the guns; all +commanded, none obeyed; most were screaming out to run; all bellowing +out, in hopes of frightening the enemy; none to direct the helm. The +Tumangong, with only seventeen men in all, insisted on advance; +and the Borneons, encouraged by threats from the Europeans, and the +good example of the Javanese, did not fly. The two boats opened their +fire; the Dyaks retreated in confusion and alarm: but from the tumult, +the noise, and the rocking of the boat, Mr. Crimble could only fire +three times with the bow six-pounder carronade, and from other guns +loaded with grape and canister, while the rascally Borneons never +fired at all. The Dyaks suffered loss, and left behind them clothes, +rice, fish, cooking-pots, swords, &c.; and, considering the state +of the Borneons, it was lucky the dread of our prowess put them to +flight so easily. Crimble assured me that, with a Siniawan crew, he +could have destroyed half their force. The Dyaks behaved very well, +pulling off with great steadiness and without noise. + +"_June 20th._--The events of the month may be compressed into a +narrative comprising the internal and external. + +"The internal state of the country is decidedly improving +and flourishing, and bears the aspect of gradually increasing +prosperity. Justice has been strictly administered. Robberies, which +a few months ago were of nightly occurrence, are now rarely heard of; +and that vile intriguing to make poor people slaves, from debt or +false claims, is entirely stopped. + +"The people who had scattered at the close of the war have been +collected, and are building their houses a short way up the river +at the Campong Jekiso, which, when finished, will be a neat-looking +village. + +"The Pangeran Macota is intriguing; but as he is sure to do that, +it need not be insisted upon. + +"Muda Hassim is true and agreeable, and entirely reconciled to the +Patingi and Tumangongs; so far, indeed, nothing can be better than +our internal state: there is peace, there is plenty; the poor are +not harassed, and justice is done to all. + +"The Dyaks of the interior are improving and content, and gaining +courage daily to complain of any wrong that may be offered them. To +the sena, or forced trade, I have almost put a stop, by confiscating +the goods wherever met with; and this plan once acted on, the Dyaks +have not been slow to bring me bundles of bidongs (Dyak cloths), +iron, and the like. + +"The tribes that continue unsettled are the Suntah and Singe: the +affairs of the latter I will mention hereafter. + +"Suntah has been for a long time under the government of Seriff Sahib +of Sadong, and through his _paternal_ charge has dwindled away from +four hundred to fifty or sixty families. Shortly after my assuming the +reins of government, he dispatched (according to custom) a mixed party +of Malays and Dyaks, and falling on my helpless tribe of Sanpro, killed +some, and carried away twenty women and children into captivity. I was +not strong enough to resent the injury; but wrote him a strong letter, +demanding the women, and telling him he was not to send, under any +pretext, into my country. The women I did not get; but I heard that +the communication frightened him: for, of course, they deem I am +backed by all the power of my country. While the Royalist still lay +here, I heard that his people were raising the revenue from the Suntah +Dyaks; but it must be remarked, that the Suntah are on the edge of my +territory, having left the former location. As this was done in the +face of my caution not to intermeddle without my consent, I resolved +at once to put the matter to the issue; and having armed four boats, +went up and seized all the rice and padi collected for my neighbors' +use. The Suntah Dyaks were and are alarmed to a pitiable degree; +for they fear Seriff Sahib with good reason; and yet my being on the +spot gave them no option of evading my demand. Thus the matter was +brought to a crisis; and having taken the revenue (as it was called) +for the poor Dyaks themselves, I shall be able to keep them from +starvation, to the verge of which, so early in the season, they are +already reduced. The Dyaks remain unsettled; but I am now in hopes of +bringing them to the interior of the Quop, which is further within our +own territory. Muda Hassim wrote to Seriff Sahib to tell him the Dyaks +were no longer his, but mine; and Seriff Sahib, sore-hearted, conspired +against us, and held for some time a higher tone than his wont. + +"I shall now narrate my proceedings at the mountain of Singe, +from which I have just returned. The mountain, with its groves of +fruit-trees, has been already described; and as a preface to my present +description, I must particularize the circumstances of the Dyak tribe +of Singe. The tribe consists of at least 800 males, the most ignorant, +and therefore the most wild, of the Dyaks of my country; and, from +their position, they have never been overcome or ruined, and are +therefore a rich community, and proportionately independent. Their +old chief is by name Parembam, and the Panglima, or head-warrior, his +younger brother, by name Si Tummo. These men have for a very long time +ruled this tribe; and the elder has certainly acquired from the Malays +a portion of cunning and intrigue, and lost the general simplicity of +the native Dyak character. He is unquestionably a man of ability. His +sway, however, on the mountain has for a long time been unpopular; +and a large proportion of the people, dissatisfied with his extortions, +have been attached to a younger chief, by name Bibit. Some time past, +finding it impossible to manage this old chief, Parembam, and being +convinced that the change might readily be made, I called Bibit, and +made him chief, or Orang Kaya of the tribe. Parembam neither was nor is +inclined to give up his authority without a struggle; and though the +mass adhere to the new chief, by title 'Steer Rajah,' yet Parembam's +long-established customs, his great wealth, and his talents, render +him a dangerous old man to the younger leader. One quality, however, +Parembam is deficient in, as well as his brother the Panglima, and +that is _bravery_; and on this much depends in a Dyak tribe. Steer +Rajah, on the contrary, has always been renowned in war, and is the +envied possessor of many heads. The Dyaks have among them a fashion +which they call bunkit, or vaunting; for instance, in the present +case Steer Rajah and Parembam dared each other to go on excursions +to procure heads, _i. e._ against their enemies--this is bunkit. One +of Steer Rajah's followers went accordingly, and quickly procured the +head of a hostile warrior far out of my territory; and on the return +of the party, Parembam in turn sent forty men to Simpoke, which is +a tribe attached to Samarahan, and on our immediate border. Close to +the Dyaks of Simpoke live a party of the Sigo Dyaks, who belong to me; +and this party of Parembam's, confounding friends and enemies, killed +some of the Sigo Dyaks--how many is not certain. The Sigos, taking +the alarm, cut off their retreat, and killed two of the Singe Dyaks; +and many beside were wounded by sudas and ranjows, and, all broken, +fled back to their own country. Thus, though they obtained five heads, +they lost two, and those belonging to their principal warriors. This +news reaching me, I hurried up to the hill, and arrived just after +part of the war-party had brought the heads. + +"I may here remark, that I have positively forbidden the Dyak tribes +within my territory to war one upon the other; and this, therefore, +was a serious offence against me on the part of Parembam. At once to +aim at more than this restriction would be fruitless, and even risk +my ability to effect this first step on the road to improvement. I +likewise came up here to go through the ceremony of installing the +Orang Kaya Steer Rajah in his office; and thus I have had an excellent +opportunity of seeing their customs and manners. What follows will +be a personal narration, or nearly so, of what I have seen; and it +applies, with slight difference, to almost all the interior tribes. + +"On our ascending the mountain, we found the five heads carefully +watched, about half a mile from the town, in consequence of the +non-arrival of some of the war-party. They had erected a temporary +shed close to the place where these miserable remnants of noisome +mortality were deposited; and they were guarded by about thirty young +men in their finest dresses, composed principally of scarlet jackets +ornamented with shells, turbans of the native bark-cloth dyed bright +yellow, and spread on the head, and decked with an occasional feather, +flower, or twig of leaves. Nothing can exceed their partiality for +these trophies; and in retiring from the 'war-path,' the man who has +been so fortunate as to obtain a head hangs it about his neck, and +instantly commences his return to his tribe. If he sleep on the way, +the precious burden, though decaying and offensive, is not loosened, +but rests on his lap, while his head (and nose!) reclines on his +knees. The retreat is always silently made until close to home, +when they set up a wild yell, which announces their victory and the +possession of its proofs. It must, therefore, be considered, that +these bloody trophies are the evidences of victory--the banner of the +European, the flesh-pot of the Turk, the scalp of the North American +Indian--and that they are torn from enemies, for taking heads is the +effect and not the cause of war. On our reaching the Balei, or public +hall, of the Orang Kaya Steer Rajah, I immediately called a number of +their chiefs together, and opened a conference with them on the subject +of Parembam having attacked and killed the Dyaks of Sigo. They _all_ +disapproved of it most highly, asserting that the Sigos were their +younger brothers; that no sufficient cause had ever existed; that +Parembam had acted badly, and must pay to purchase _peace_. Were they, +I asked, willing to force Parembam into payment? They were. Would +they insist on the heads being restored to the Sigos, and receive +those of their own people? They would! + +"It may be observed, that their causes for war, as well as its +progress and termination, are exactly the same as those of other +people. They dispute about the limits of their respective lands; about +theft committed by one tribe upon another; about occasional murders; +the crossing each other on the war-path; and about a thousand other +subjects. + +"When a tribe is on a warlike excursion, it often happens that their +track (or 'trail') is crossed by another tribe. Those who strike the +trail guard it at some convenient spot, apprehending the party to be +enemies; they plant ranjows in the path, and wait till the returning +party are involved among them to make an attack. If enemies, and they +succeed, all is well; but if friends, though no attack be made, it +is a serious offence, and mostly gives occasion to war if not paid +for. The progress of the contest consists in attacking each other +by these surprises, particularly about the time of sowing, weeding, +and cutting the rice-crops. When one party is weaker, or less active, +or less warlike than the other, they solicit a peace through some +tribe friendly to both, and pay for the lives they have taken: the +price is about two gongs, value 33 1/2 reals, for each life: thus +peace is concluded. This is the custom with these Dyaks universally; +but it is otherwise with the Sarebus and Sakarran. But Sarebus and +Sakarran are not fair examples of Dyak life, as they are pirates as +well as head-hunters, and do not hesitate to destroy all persons they +meet with. + +"Parembam, having been called before me, declared that these heads +belonged to the Simpoke Dyaks, and that they had not attacked the +Sigos. As I was not quite certain of the fact, I thought it unjust +to proceed against him till I had stronger proof. + +"On the following morning the heads were brought up to the village, +attended by a number of young men all dressed in their best, and were +carried to Parembam's house amid the beating of gongs and the firing +of one or two guns. They were then disposed of in a conspicuous place +in the public hall of Parembam. The music sounded and the men danced +the greater part of the day; and toward evening carried them away +in procession through all the campongs except three or four just +about me. The women, in these processions, crowd round the heads as +they proceed from house to house, and put sirih and betel-nut in +the mouths of the ghastly dead, and welcome them! After this they +are carried back in the same triumph, deposited in an airy place, +and left to dry. During this process, for seven, eight, or ten days, +they are watched by the boys of the age of six to ten years; and +during this time they never stir from the public hall--they are not +permitted to put their foot out of it while engaged in this sacred +trust. Thus are the youths initiated. + +"For a long time after the heads are hung up, the men nightly meet +and beat their gongs, and chant addresses to them, which were rendered +thus to me: 'Your head is in our dwelling, but your spirit wanders to +your own country.' 'Your head and your spirit are now ours: persuade, +therefore, your countrymen to be slain by us.' 'Speak to the spirits of +your tribe: let them wander in the fields, that when we come again to +their country we may get more heads, and that we may bring the heads +of your brethren, and hang them by your head,' &c. The tone of this +chant is loud and monotonous, and I am not able to say how long it is +sung; but certainly for a month after the arrival of the heads, as one +party here had had a head for that time, and were still exhorting it. + +"These are their customs and modes of warfare; and I may conclude by +saying that, though their trophies are more disgusting, yet their +wars are neither so bloody, nor their cruelties so great, as those +of the North American Indian. They slay all they meet with of their +enemies--men, women, and children; but this is common to all wild +tribes. They have an implacable spirit of revenge as long as the war +lasts, retort evil for evil, and retaliate life for life; and, as I +have before said, the heads are the trophies, as the scalps are to the +red men. But, on the contrary, they never torture their enemies, nor do +they devour them; and peace can always be restored among them by a very +moderate payment. In short, there is nothing new in their feelings, +or in their mode of showing them; no trait remarkable for cruelty; no +head-hunting for the sake of head-hunting. They act precisely on the +same impulses as other wild men: war arises from passion or interest; +peace from defeat or fear. As friends, they are faithful, just, and +honest; as enemies, blood-thirsty and cunning, patient on the war-path, +and enduring fatigue, hunger, and want of sleep, with cheerfulness and +resolution. As woodmen they are remarkably acute; and on all their +excursions carry with them a number of ranjows, which, when they +retreat, they stick in behind them, at intervals, at a distance of +twenty, fifty, or a hundred yards, so that a hotly-pursuing enemy gets +checked, and many severely wounded. Their arms consist of a sword, an +iron-headed spear, a few wooden spears, a knife worn at the right side, +with a sirih-pouch, or small basket. Their provision is a particular +kind of sticky rice, boiled in bamboos. When once they have struck +their enemies, or failed, they return, without pausing, to their homes. + +"To proceed with my journal. My principal object in coming up the hill +was, to appoint the Orang Kaya Steer Rajah as the chief, beside Pagise +as Panglima, or head warrior, and Pa Bobot as Pangeran, or revenue +officer. It was deemed by these worthy personages quite unfit that +this ceremony should take place in the public hall or circular house, +as that was the place wherein the heads are deposited, and where they +hold councils of war. + +"With the Dyaks, all council is divided into hot and cold; peace, +friendship, good intentions, are all included under the latter +head--war, &c., are under the former. Hot is represented by red, and +cold by white. So in everything they make this distinction; and as the +public hall is the place for war-councils and war-trophies, it is hot +in the extreme, unfit for friendly conference. A shed was therefore +erected close to the Orang Kaya's house, wherein the ceremony was to +take place. About nine in the evening we repaired to the scene; loud +music, barbarous but not unpleasing, resounded, and we took our seats +on mats in the midst of our Dyak friends. A feast was in preparation; +and each guest (if I may call them such) brought his share of rice +in bamboos, and laid it on the general stock. As one party came up +after another, carrying their burning logs, the effect was very good; +and they kept arriving until the place and its vicinity was literally +crammed with human beings. A large antique sirih-box was placed in +the midst; and I contributed that greatest of luxuries, tobacco. + +"The feast, in the mean time, was in preparation, some of the +principal people being employed in counting the number who were to +eat, and dividing the bamboos into exactly equal portions for each +person. About six inches were allotted to every man; and it took a +very long time to divide it, for they are remarkably particular as +to the proper size and quantity to each share. The bamboos of rice +being, however, at length satisfactorily disposed, the Orang Kaya +produced as his share a large basin full of sauce, composed of salt +and chilis, and a small stock of sweetmeats; and then the ceremony +of his installation commenced as follows: + +"A jacket, a turban, a cloth for the loins, and a kris (all of +white) were presented to the chief as a token of sejiek dingin, +or cold, _i.e._ good. The chief then rose, and, taking a white +fowl and waving it over the eatables, repeated nearly the following +words:--(The commencement, however, is curious enough to dwell upon: +the opening is a sort of invocation, beginning with the phrase, +'Samungut, Simungi.' Samungut is a Malay word, Simungi signifying +the same in Dyak; the exact meaning it is difficult to comprehend; +but it is here understood as some principle, spirit, or fortune, +which is in men and things. Thus the Dyaks, in stowing their rice at +harvest, do it with great care, from a superstitious feeling that the +Simungi of the padi will escape. They now call this principle to be +present--that of men, of pigs (their favorite animal), of padi, and +of fruits. They particularly named my Simungi, that of my ancestors, +of the Pangeran from Borneo, of the Datus and of their ancestors, +and of the ancestors of their own tribe. They call them--that is, +their Simungi--to be present. They then call upon Jovata to grant +their prayer, that the great man from Europe, and the Datus, might +hold the government for a length of time)--'May the government be +cold' (good); 'May there be rice in our houses;' 'May many pigs +be killed;' 'May male children be born to us;' 'May fruit ripen;' +'May we be happy, and our goods abundant;' 'We declare ourselves to +be true to the great man and the Datus; what they wish we will do, +what they command is our law.' Having said this and much more, the +fowl was taken by a leading Malay, who repeated the latter words, +while others bound strips of white cloth round the heads of the +multitude. The fowl was then killed, the blood shed in a bamboo, +and each man dipping his finger in the blood, touched his forehead +and breast, in attestation of his fidelity. The fowl was now carried +away to be cooked: and when brought back, placed with the rest of the +feast, and the dancing commenced. The chief, coming forward, uttered +a loud yell ending in 'ish,' which was oftentimes repeated during +the dance. He raised his hands to his forehead, and taking a dish, +commenced dancing to lively music. Three other old chief men followed +his example; each uttering the yell and making the salute, but without +taking the dish. They danced with arms extended, turning the body +frequently, taking very small steps, and little more than lifting +their feet from the ground. Thus they turned backward and forward, +passed in and out of the inner rooms, and frequently repeating the +yell, and making the salutation to me. The dish, in the mean time, +was changed from one to the other: there was little variety, no +gesticulation, no violence; and, though not deficient in native +grace, yet the movements were by no means interesting. The dance +over, the feast commenced; and everything was carried on with great +gravity and propriety. I left them shortly after they began to eat, +and retired, very fagged, to my bed, or rather, to my board; for +sitting cross-legged for several hours is surely a great infliction. + +"I may add to this account that, while writing it, the Dyak land-tribes +of Siquong, Sibaduh, and Goon, sent their deputies to me. These people +are not under any Malay government, and it is now for the first +time they have trusted themselves as far as Sarawak. They have an +objection to drinking the river-water, and expressed great surprise +at the flood-tide. Their confidence is cheering to me, and will, +I trust, be advantageous to themselves. Their trade in rice is very +considerable: and toward Sambas they exchange eight or ten pasus of +rice for one of salt. + +"Our conference was pleasing. They desired protection, they desired +trade. 'They had all heard, _the whole world had heard_, that _a +son of Europe_ was a friend to the Dyaks.' My visitors drank Batavia +arrack with great gusto, declaring all the time it was not half so +good as their own; however, at a pinch anything will do. Some other +Dyaks met these strangers; they were not adversaries, and so they +chewed sirih, and drank grog in company; but among enemies this may +not be: they can neither eat nor drink in company without desiring +a reconciliation. I may add, that the Siquong tribe consists of at +least four hundred families, with forty public halls, or baleis, +for heads. A Dyak family cannot be estimated at fewer than twelve +people, which will give four thousand eight hundred or five thousand +people. Sibaduh and Goon may be about seventy-five families: beside +these, Si Panjong and Sam Penex want to come in to me, which will +give one hundred and one more families. What might be done with these +people, if I had a little more power and a little assistance! + +"I was going to close my account of the Dyaks; but I had scarcely +penned the last sentence when a large party of Singe Dyaks and +five Dyaks of Sigo arrived--thus all these enemies meeting. In +the conference which followed, the Singe allowed they were wrong in +attacking Sigo, and laid all the blame on the old chief, Parembam. They +likewise allowed it to be just that Parembam should be forced to pay, +and conclude a peace. With the Goon and Sibaduh Dyaks they had long +been at enmity; but they agreed to make peace if Sibaduh would pay +two gongs, formerly demanded, as the price of peace. The Sibaduh, +however, did not allow the justice of the demand; but the parties were +reconciled so far as that each promised to maintain a truce and to eat +together: and the Singes declared they would not attack the Sibaduhs on +account of the two gongs, but obtain them in a friendly conference. I +have (being hurried) briefly mentioned these circumstances, which took +a long time to settle, as the Dyaks are very fond of speechifying, +which they do sitting, without action or vivacity, but with great +fluency, and using often highly metaphysical and elegant language. It +was a great nuisance having fifty naked savages in the house all night, +extended in the hall and the anterooms. They finished a bottle of gin, +and then slept; and I could not avoid remarking that their sleep was +light, such as temperance, health, and exercise bestow. During many +hours I heard but one man snore, while half the number of Europeans +would have favored me with a concert sufficient to banish rest. + +"I shall now briefly mention our _foreign policy_ for the last +few months. + +"For a time we were annoyed with incessant reports of their coming to +attack us in force; but, though scarcely believing they would be bold +enough, I took precautions, pushed on the completion of our boats, +built a fort, and made a fence round the village. These precautions +taken, and fifteen boats in the water ready for action, I cared very +little, though the news reached me that Byong, the Sarebus chief, +had hung a basket on a high tree which was to contain my head. + +"_Sadong._--Our relations with Seriff Sahib were very unsettled; +and by the bullying tone of the people of Singe I thought it probable +he might be induced to measure his strength, backed by the Sakarran +Dyaks, against us. I have already mentioned his attack upon my Dyaks of +Sanpro, and the second dispute about the Suntah Dyaks; in the first of +these he came off with impunity; in the second I met him with success, +and out-manoeuvered him, and wrested the Dyaks from him. Shortly after +the transactions at Suntah, a boat of Sakarran Dyaks came to Sarawak +nominally _to trade_, but in reality to tamper with the fidelity of the +Datus and others. They proposed to the Tumangong to join Seriff Sahib, +stating that they were sent by him to try all the people here. 'They +had been ruined here; Seriff Sahib would restore them their property; +and if they left Muda Hassim, James Brooke, and the Chinese, they +could afterward easily make a prey of the Dyaks and Chinese, with +Seriff Sahib's assistance, and get plenty of slaves.' + +"The plan proposed for the removal was as follows:--Seriff Sahib, +with forty Malay boats, and the Sakarrans with one hundred boats, +were to request permission from Muda Hassim to attack the Dyak tribe +of Siquong, and under this pretence were to come up the river, when +the Datus were to join, with their wives and children, and all were to +take flight together. The Tumangong told me this as soon as he heard it +himself; and, to make sure, I sent Patingi Gapoor to fish their story +out of them, which he did most successfully. Being assured of the fact, +I called the Dyaks, and, before some dozens of our people and one or +two persons from Singe, taxed them with their guilt. They were obliged +to confess, and insisted upon it that Seriff Sahib had sent them, +&c. Many urged me to put these Dyaks to death; but the reluctance we +all have to shedding blood withheld me, and I had no desire to strike +at a wren when a foul vulture was at hand. I dismissed the emissaries +scot-free, and then both Muda Hassim and myself indited letters to +Seriff Sahib, that of Muda Hassim being severe but dignified. Before +they were dispatched, an ambassador arrived from Singe with letters +both to the rajah and myself, disclaiming warmly all knowledge of the +treachery, swearing _the most solemn_ oaths in proof of his truth, and +declaring that, so far from having committed so shameful an action, +he had never even dreamed of such a thing in his worst dreams, as +he hoped that God would save him. Our letters were sent before his +ambassador was received, and a second disclaimer, like the first, +quickly reached us. Of course it was my policy, whatever my opinion +might be, to receive his offers of friendship and to believe all he +said; and, therefore, the matter ended, and ended so far well, that +Seriff Sahib lowered his former tone; and, certainly, whatever he may +desire in his heart, or _dream_ of, he wants to be well with us here, +and, I can see, fears us. I am content, because I really wish for +peace, and not war; Muda Hassim is content, because he has humbled +Seriff Sahib, and acted decisively; and the seriff is content as the +fiend in the infernal regions. I leave it to all gentle readers to +form their own opinion of his truth or treachery; but I must hint to +them my private opinion that he did send agents to tempt, and would +have gained the Datus if he could; and as for his oaths, my belief +is, he would swear a basketful of the most sacred before breakfast to +support a lie, and yet not lose his appetite! The Datus were too old, +and knew him too well, to be caught in his trap. + +"Seriff Sahib has now sent a fleet of boats up the Sarebus river; +but the result I do not yet know. + +"To conclude our foreign policy, I must mention Borneo Proper. + +"My great object is to reconcile Muda Hassim and the sultan, and +to restore the former to Borneo, before the coming of Mr. Bonham on +his diplomatic mission. To effect this, I have resolved to proceed +myself; and Muda Hassim, equally anxious, has letters and two of +his brothers ready to accompany me. If we can gain this object, I +shall be firmly established, and relieved from the intriguing, mean, +base Borneons. And it will be an advantage to the government measure, +in as far as they will be enabled to form their arrangements with all +instead of a single faction of the Borneo Pangerans. From all I hear, +Muda Hassim is more powerful than either the sultan or Pangeran Usop; +and if he appeals to arms, I am assured he will carry his point, +and become the sovereign of Borneo virtually, if not nominally. + +"The Royalist now waits for us at the mouth of the river, which +I hope to reach on the 14th, this being the 12th July. Heigh for +the sea once more! But yet, though I go, I take my cares with me, +and but for the necessity, the absolute necessity, of bringing the +Borneo question to a crisis, good or bad, I would fain stop where I +am. For even during one short month's absence I fear my poor people +will suffer from the intrigues of the rascally Borneo Pangerans. In +this I do not include Muda Hassim, who, with a most amiable private +character, and with integrity and good faith, desires to do right, +as far as his education and prejudices will permit. It is sad to +reflect that this very prince, who really wishes to do good, and to +conduce to the comfort of his people, should, from want of energy, +have been so fearful an oppressor, through the agency of others; and +it is not here alone that vile agents for vile purposes are plentiful." + + + + + +CHAPTER XIV. + + Visit of Captain Elliott.--Mr. Brooke sails for Borneo + Proper.--Arrival.--Visited by leading men.--Condition of + the country.--Reception by the Sultan.--Objects in view.--The + different chiefs, and communications with them.--The Sultan and + his Pangerans.--Objects of the visit accomplished.--Return to + Sarawak.--Ceremonies of the cession.--Sail for Singapore. + + +After Mr. Brooke's return from his expedition against the Singe +Dyak chief Parembam, he was visited by his friend Captain Elliott, +of the Madras engineers, whose acquaintance I had the pleasure of +subsequently making at Singapore. He is, as Mr. Brooke describes him, +"a man of science and education, and the best of good fellows." During +his stay at Sarawak, he established his observatory, and all its +apparatus; and a shed (now converted into a goat-house) will always +retain the appellation of "the Observatory." Mr. Brooke and Captain +Elliott appear to have made some very amusing and agreeable excursions +up the different rivers, an account of which is given in the journal; +but I shall pass it over, as I am anxious to follow my friend through +with his government up to the time of my meeting him at Singapore. + +"_Thursday, July 14th._--We were to have started on this most lucky +day at ten o'clock, but what with innumerable preparations and delays, +it was near six before the rajah was ready to dismiss the procession; +and my alarm became considerable that, Friday (an unlucky day) having +commenced by the native reckoning, we should again be postponed till +Sunday. However, by making six o'clock five, and keeping back the +watches to suit our purpose, our departure was achieved. The state +spears and swords were brought forth. The letters for the sultan, in +their brass tray covered with embroidered cloth, were duly mounted, +with the greatest reverence, on the head of Bandar Sumsu; and nothing +remained but to take leave. The rajah addressed a few words to his +brothers, requesting them to tell the sultan that his heart was always +with him; that he could never separate from him, whether far or near; +and that he was, and always had been, true to his son. Budrudeen then +rose, and approaching the rajah, seated himself close to him, bending +his head to the ground over his hand, which he had grasped. The rajah +hastily withdrew his hand, and clasping him round, embraced, kissing +his neck. Both were greatly agitated and both wept, and I could have +wept for company, for it was no display of state ceremony, but genuine +feeling. It is seldom, very seldom, they show their feelings; and the +effect was the more touching from being unexpected; beside, it is a +part of our nature (one's better nature) to feel when we see others +feel. Pangeran Marsale followed; both brothers likewise parted with +Muda Mahammed in the same way, and they certainly rose in my opinion +from this token of affection toward each other. My adieus followed; we +all rose; the rajah accompanied us to the wharf; and as we embarked, +I could see the tears slowly steal from his eyes. I could not help +taking his hand, and bidding him be of good cheer; he smiled in a +friendly manner, pressed my hand, and I stepped into my boat. Our gongs +struck up; the barge, decorated with flags and streamers, was towed +slowly along against the flood-tide; the guns fired from the wharf, +from the Chinese houses, and from our fort, and we passed along in +all the pomp and pride of _Sarawak state_. It was dusk when we got +down to the first reach, and there we brought up to wait for the ebb." + +I shall omit that part of my friend's journal containing his remarks +and observations along the coast between Sarawak and the entrance of +the Borneo river. On the 21st July his narration continues thus: + +"I must now leave geography, and turn to politics. On casting anchor +we acted on a plan previously formed, and sent off the gig, with Seriff +Hussein and Nakoda Ahmed, to the city, to intimate my arrival, and that +of the rajah's brothers, with letters from Muda Hassim. I trusted to +their dread of and curiosity about the English expedition to insure +my reception; but I gave particular directions, in case the sultan +asked about me, that my ambassadors were to say I was here; that I had +been corresponding about the English coming; that I was not a man in +authority, or belonging to the East India Company; and that they were +sure I should not land unless he invited me to come and see him. To +show eagerness would have raised suspicion; backwardness excites the +contrary feeling, and a desire to entertain some intercourse. + +"_July 22d._--At the unconscionable hour of 2 A.M., a mob of Pangerans +came on board, in number not fewer than fifty, and with a multitude +of followers. They awoke us out of our first sleep, and crowded the +vessel above and below, so that we could scarce find room to make +our toilet in public, while the heat was suffocating us. However, +we did manage it, and sat talking till daylight. Our visitors were +chiefly relations or adherents of Muda Hassim, and some of the first +men in the country. Pangeran Budrudeen and Pangeran Marsale were in +their glory, and happy; and it was evident at once that our affairs +were likely to succeed to our heart's content. All were anxious and +eager in inquiries about Muda Hassim, and wishing his return. The +sultan, Pangeran Usop, Pangeran Mumin, and others declared, 'Borneo +could never be well till he came back.' In short, it was clear that +the country was in distress and difficulty from within: trade ruined, +piracy abounding, the mouth of the river unsafe, their forts insulted +by the pirates, the communication with their dependencies cut off, +food dear, and the tobacco, which comes from the northward, not to +be had. Everything conspires to forward Muda Hassim's views and mine; +and during this conversation, it was evident they were looking to me +as a friend. + +"At daylight a boat from the sultan arrived to carry up the letters; +but Budrudeen and his brother resolved to proceed first, in order to +make sure of an honorable reception for the chop. At 7 o'clock there +was a stir. I saw them over the side with delight, and gave them a +salute with pleasure. Breakfast done, I was too happy to lie down, +and slept till past midday, having then only to wait for Budrudeen's +return. + +"_23d._--Budrudeen came at 3 P.M., bringing with him good news +of the most favorable reception from all parties, all wishing for +reconciliation and the return of Muda Hassim. To-morrow, boats are +to come for the letters, which are to be conveyed in state. The +day following I am to go up, and am likewise to be received in all +honorable form. + +"_24th._--At 7 A.M. the state-boat, a shabby concern, decorated with +yellow flags, arrived, and at eight the letters were borne away under +a salute. Thus we had a second time the satisfaction of getting rid +of the mob at an early hour. + +"_25th._--At 9 1/2 A.M. I started with Williamson in the gig, with +the long-boat in company, carrying the presents. On approaching the +town, before the ebb had run long, it appeared to be a very Venice of +hovels, a river Cybele rising from the water. For those who like it, +the locality is not ill chosen. The hills recede from the river, and +form an amphitheatre; and several other rivers or streams flowing in, +cause a muddy deposit, on which the houses are built. At high water +they are surrounded; at low water stand on a sheet of mud. On nearing +it, we were encompassed by boats which preceded and followed us, +and we passed the floating market, where women, wearing immense hats +of palm-leaves, sell all sorts of edibles, balanced in their little +canoes, now giving a paddle, now making a bargain, and dropping down +with the tide, and again regaining their place when the bargain is +finished. The first impression of the town is miserable. The houses +are crowded and numerous, and even the palace does not present a +more captivating aspect, for, though large, it is as incommodious +as the worst. Our presentation was exactly similar to that of +our first meeting with Muda Hassim at Sarawak, only the crowd was +much greater. We had been seated but a few minutes when Pangeran +Usop arrived, and directly afterward the sultan. He gave us tea, +leaf-cigars, and sirih, and, in short, showed us every attention; +and what was best of all did not keep us very long. Our apartment +was partitioned off from the public hall, a dark-looking place, +but furnished with a table brought by us, and three rickety chairs, +beside matresses and plenty of mats. We were kept up nearly all night, +which, after the fatigues of the day, was hard upon us. + +"Further observation confirmed us in the opinion that the town +itself is miserable, and its locality on the mud fitted only for +frogs or natives; but there is a level dry plain above the entrance +of the Kiangi river, admirably suited for a European settlement; and +across the Kiangi is swelling ground, where the residents might find +delightful spots for their country-houses. The greatest annoyance to +a stranger is the noisome smell of the mud when uncovered; and all +plated or silver articles, even in the course of one night, get black +and discolored. The inhabitants I shall estimate moderately at 10,000, +and the Kadien population are numerous amid the hills. + +"_27th._--Our objects in coming to Borneo were threefold. Firstly, +to effect a reconciliation between the sultan and Muda Hassim; +secondly, to gain the sultan's approval and signature to my holding +Sarawak; and thirdly, to release the Kleeses [Hindoostanees] of the +shipwrecked vessels, the Sultana and Lord Melbourne. The first object +was gained at once, as the sultan seemed really overjoyed at being good +friends with his uncle; and Pangeran Usop, from whom we anticipated +difficulty, stepped forward directly to aid us while Pangeran Mumin +was not averse. I will not now stop to sketch the characters of these +worthies, as I shall hereafter have a better knowledge of them; but I +may remark, _en passant_, that it was evident, even to my inexperience, +that no two of them were on good terms, and all probably united in +a feeling that Muda Hassim's return would be a personal as well as +public advantage. The other principal Pangerans, namely, Tizudeen (the +sultan's natural brother), Kurmaindar (the father of the country), +Bahar (the rajah's brother-in-law), Tizudeen second (the rajah's +natural brother), were all for Muda Hassim; and the population, as +far as I could learn, decidedly desirous of his being restored to them. + +"Each day I had several interviews with the sultan, in his surow +or private room; and he assured me of his fondness for Muda Hassim, +his wish to have him near him again, and the great benefit it would +be. Moreover, he was pleased to express great personal regard for me; +and every five minutes I had to swear 'eternal friendship,' while he, +clasping my hand, kept repeating, 'amigo _suya_,' 'amigo _suya_,' +meaning, _my_ friend, _my_ friend. At the same time he professed great +readiness to give me Sarawak--inquired the amount of revenue--seemed +satisfied, and said, 'I wish you to be there; I do not wish any +body else; you are my amigo, and it is nobody's business but mine; +the country is mine, and if I please to give you all, I can.' His +majesty is very proud of displaying his very small smattering of +Spanish or Portuguese; and almost all the higher people having +acquired a few words, shows there must have been a communication at +no very distant date. I was also warned not to care for any of the +other Pangerans,--not, indeed, to have anything to say to them. + +"With this advice I took the liberty to dispense; and sent to Pangerans +Mumin and Usop to intimate my wish to visit them. The former pleaded +that his house was unfit to receive me; but the latter immediately +sent a most polite message, that any time, either by day or night, +he should be happy to see me; and accordingly I went. The house _and +style_ are the best in Borneo. I was politely and kindly greeted; +and I soon found that I was with a man of sense and quickness. There +was a little diplomacy at first on his part; but as I proceeded direct +to my object, he at once laid it aside. In fact, candor is the basis +of our right influence with the natives; and as I desired to make +Pangeran Usop my friend, I went candidly to work, and immediately +told him all that I had already told the sultan. The amount of my +conversation was as follows: The first topic being the anticipated +visit of the English, 'Were the English coming?' 'Was Mr. Bonham +coming?' were the first questions; and 'With what intent?' I replied, +that the English were certainly coming, but with no evil intentions; +that it was true they were offended by the ill usage the captain and +people of the Sultana had met with; yet that I had endeavored to put +it in the best light, and had urged that a friendly communication +for the future was better than a retrospect which might give rise to +unpleasant feelings: I was sure that the English desired a friendly +intercourse; and I hoped, though I could not say, that they would +look to the future, and not to the past. I had, I added, no authority; +but my friendship for the sultan induced me to inform him what I had +heard abroad. When Mr. Bonham came, he would be able to tell them +all; but I could say now that I thought he would demand a treaty +between Singapore and Borneo for the mutual protection of trade, +and the care of individuals of each nation who were shipwrecked or +otherwise sought protection at either place. + +"On the whole, it is certain that the feelings of Borneo are decidedly +friendly, and equally certain that the persons of influence will +receive us in their warmest manner, and grant us every thing, if we +resort only to measures of conciliation. It never can be too often +repeated, that conciliation is the only policy with Malays, and +particularly the Borneons, who have very vague and confused ideas +of our power. A harsh truth, a peremptory demand, they have never +heard in their lives, and they will not hear it for the first time +and remain friendly; for all who have the least acquaintance with the +native character know their acute sense of false shame. To demand, +therefore, of the chief here to acknowledge our superiority would, +I am sure, be met with a haughty refusal. In a few years, if we +proceed mildly to establish a beneficial influence, they will fall +into our views without reserve; for, as I have often before stated, +their government is in the last stage of destruction and decay. + +"The reconciliation of Muda Hassim was soon complete; and as to +the Kleeses of the Lord Melbourne, twenty in number, they were at +once surrendered to me, with a request that I would forward them to +Singapore as quickly as I could. The boat of the Lord Melbourne was +likewise given to me. I had some scruples about three Kleeses of the +Sultana, who had been sold at Malludu Bay, bought there by an Arab +seriff, and brought here. By all their laws and customs they were his +slaves, purchased at a distance, and, as I had no right to claim them +(supposing even that to be just), and was resolved not to leave them +in captivity, I paid a fair price for them at the rate of twenty-five +dollars per man. I regret to add, there is one other man not in the +place; and one is gone to Tutorga--about a day's journey hence. + +"_28th._--I may here draw a brief sketch of the principal personages of +this most primitive court, beginning with its worthy head, the sultan. + +"The sultan is a man past fifty years of age, short and puffy +in person, with a countenance which expresses very obviously the +imbecility of his mind. His right hand is garnished with an extra +diminutive thumb, the natural member being crooked and distorted. His +mind, indexed by his face, seems to be a chaos of confusion; without +acuteness, without dignity, and without good sense. He can neither +read nor write; is guided by the last speaker; and his advisers, as +might be expected, are of the lower order, and mischievous from their +ignorance and their greediness. He is always talking, and generally +joking; and the most serious subjects never meet with five minutes' +consecutive attention. The favorable side of his character is, that he +is good-tempered and good-natured; by no means cruel; and, in a certain +way, generous, though rapacious to a high degree. His rapacity, indeed, +is carried to such an excess as to astonish a European, and is evinced +in a thousand mean ways. The presents I made him were unquestionably +handsome; but he was not content without begging from me the share +I had reserved for the other Pangerans; and afterward, through +Mr. Williamson, solicited more trifles, such as sugar, penknives, +and the like. To crown all, he was incessantly asking what was left +in the vessel; and when told the truth,--that I was stripped as bare +as a tree in winter,--he frequently returned to the charge. In the +middle of the night, when our boat came up with some gifts for him, +he slipped out his royal person, that he might see what packages there +were. I must say, however, that this was not intended for me to know; +and, personally, he did not behave very ill toward me, only dunning +me occasionally. In regard to the Sarawak revenue, he was eager in his +inquiries; and was very ready, on the strength of his thousand dollars, +and my generosity, to give me a list of things which amounted to 10,000 +dollars in value. I may note one other feature which marks the man. He +requested, as the greatest favor,--he urged, with the earnestness of +a child,--that I would send back the schooner before the month Ramban +(Ramadan of the Turks); remarking, 'What shall I do during the fast +without soft sugar and dates?' What effect the exaggerated promises of +Mr. de Souza must have had on such a temper, may readily be imagined; +and what the evil influence of such a prince on the country, needs +not be stated; for, like other fools, he is difficult to guide where +the object is right, and facile whenever it promises any immediate +advantage. I will only add, that during my intercourse of six days, +he has given me the impression that he is not in his right mind; and, +at any rate, that flattery and bad counsel have deprived him of the +little wit he might probably originally have possessed. + +"Of Pangeran Mumin, the De Gadong and the sultan's son-in-law, I +know little; and he is, in secret, a most determined opposer of mine; +but I believe he, as well as most, is desirous of being good friends +with the English, and will readily listen to any overtures which +promise increase of trade. He seemed to me a shrewd, cunning man, +fit for a Nakoda. + +"Pangeran Usop is a man of middle age, short, active, and intelligent, +and, I may add, ambitious. Pangeran Muda Hassim will throw himself into +the arms of the English, from his partiality, and from the hope of a +better order of things, and the eventual succession to the throne, +to which he stands next,--the present sultan having no legitimate +children. + +"Two of my objects were thus achieved at once; and the Kleeses +(twenty-three) were, much to their satisfaction, dispatched to the +vessel in the Melbourne's gig. My own affair of Sarawak meets with some +opposition from Mumin, who is decidedly friendly to Macota. The sultan, +however, is steady to me, gabbles daily and hourly of his intentions; +and Pangeran Usop likewise pushes on my suit with his influence, +at the same time giving me this one piece of good advice, viz. that +Muda Hassim must be induced to return to Borneo, for that two persons +(Muda Hassim and myself) cannot govern together; and he added, 'If +Muda Hassim returns, you will have a fine trade at Sarawak; but while +he is there, no native prahus will visit the place.' This is true: I +have no fear of ultimate success in my suit; but delay is formidable, +and I have already intimated that I propose making my _conge_ on the +2d of August. + +"_30th._--I have little more to add about Borneo, save my plaint +against our dungeon, though the said dungeon be honorably situated +behind the throne, and within the royal apartments. Just below +the town are several rills of the finest water; and the natives +report that they issue from a small but deep lake at a very short +distance. Beneath one of these spouts we each evening took a most +delicious bath in water as cold as it is limpid. I am no great bustler +at any time; but since being here, I have purposely abstained from +all manifestation of curiosity, and never desired or requested to see +much; it rouses suspicion, and suspicion rouses distrust, and distrust +draws the kris. On the contrary, by being backward at first, you become +subsequently a sort of domesticated animal, and privileged to use your +eyes and limbs. Most Europeans do themselves great injury by searching +the mountains and the waters, breaking the rocks, shooting the birds, +and gathering the plants. The natives can never believe they would take +so much trouble without being well paid by the value of the treasures +found, or employed by the East India Company to espy their land, +in order that the said company might seize it at their convenience. + +"_31st._--A conclave of Pangerans, when it was finally resolved to +grant the country of Sarawak to me as rajah or governor. + +"_August 1st, 1842._--An important day in my history, and I hope one +which will be marked with a white stone in the annals of Sarawak. The +letters to Muda Hassim being finished and signed, the contract giving +me the government of Sarawak came under discussion, and was likewise +completed by ten at night, signed, sealed, and witnessed. Thus I +have gained every object for which I came to Borneo; and to-morrow, +God willing, I take my leave. + +"The miserable state of Borneo I have already mentioned; and it is now +a saying of the Balagnini pirates, that 'it is difficult to catch fish, +but easy to catch Borneons.' Externally and internally they are equally +wretched, and torn by factions; yet, on the whole, I am not inclined to +judge harshly of the poorer order of them. They are a good-tempered, +very hospitable, and unwarlike people, the victims of their rajahs; +the oppressed, but not the oppressors. In this character, however, +I do not reckon the Pangerans and their followers. It is from these +latter that Europeans take their estimate of the people generally, +and consequently truly account them, from that standard, to be a +wretched sample of humanity--mean, thievish, arrogant, insolent, and +ready for any wickedness. The Pangerans themselves are only a step +better: but even here I must make a little allowance; for I believe +their crimes arise more from their poverty and impunity than from +any inherent viciousness. + +"_3d._--The Pangerans Budrudeen and Marsale, and a host more, came +on board this night, and kept us up as usual. + +"_4th._--Another mob arrived the middle of last night. I retreated +from them, being far from well, and got some sleep. At 2 P.M. the +letters came on board; were received with honors; and as soon as we +could rid ourselves of our troublesome visitors, we dropped outside +Tanjong Sapo, and sailed the following day. + +"The Kleeses sold at Malludu were brought from Ambun, and reported +to the authorities that a European woman was detained there. I made +particular inquires of the Borneon Pangerans, and they said they had +always understood that such was the case. Unhappy lady, if she be +a lady! Is it a compassionate part to release her after many years +of captivity? + +"_14th._--Anchored off the Morotaba, having had nothing but calms, +light winds, and squalls. + +"_15th._--Got part of the way up the river, and at 8 P.M. dropped our +anchor; and in about an hour later two boats started for Sarawak. The +night was moonlight, with a cold breeze; and, after a pleasant pull, +we arrived, and created as much sensation as we could desire. But it +was better, and I was gratified with the intelligence that everything +had gone on well during our absence. At break of day I went, fagged, +to bed. So ended our mission to Borneo. + +"On the evening of the 18th the sultan's letters were produced in all +the state which could possibly be attained. On their arrival they were +received and brought up amid large wax torches, and the person who +was to read them was stationed on a raised platform; standing below +him was the rajah, with a saber in his hand; in front of the rajah +was his brother, Pangeran Jaffer, with a tremendous kempilan drawn; +and around were the other brothers and myself, all standing--the rest +of the company being seated. The letters were then read, the last one +appointing me to hold the government of Sarawak. After this the rajah +descended, and said aloud, 'If any one present disowns or contests +the sultan's appointment, let him now declare.' All were silent. He +next turned to the Patingis, and asked them; they were obedient to +the will of the sultan. Then came the other Pangerans--'Is there any +Pangeran or any young rajah that contests the question? Pangeran +Der Macota, what do you say?' Macota expressed his willingness to +obey. One or two other obnoxious Pangerans who had always opposed +themselves to me were each in turn challenged, and forced to promise +obedience. The rajah then waved his sword, and with a loud voice +exclaimed, 'Whoever he is that disobeys the sultan's mandate now +received, I will separate his skull;' at the moment some ten of his +brothers jumped from the verandah, and, drawing their long krisses, +began to flourish and dance about, thrusting close to Macota, striking +the pillar above his head, pointing their weapons at his breast. This +_amusement_, the violence of motion, the freedom from restraint, this +explosion of a long pent-up animosity, roused all their passions; +and had Macota, through an excess of fear or an excess of bravery, +started up, he would have been slain, and other blood would have +been spilt. But he was quiet, with his face pale and subdued, and, +as shortly as decency would permit after the riot had subsided, took +his leave. This scene is a custom with them; the only exception to +which was, that it was pointed so directly at Macota. I was glad, +at any rate, that all had gone off without bloodshed. + +"_22d._--I found that though matters had been quiet during my absence, +repeated efforts had been made to disturb the country. First, it was +positively stated and industriously circulated that I was certain +to be killed in Borneo; and next a report was propagated that 6000 +Chinese were on their march from Sambas, with evil intentions. These +rumors did not serve any object, and my return has set them at rest; +but I regretted to hear that the Singe Dyaks had, contrary to my +positive prohibition, killed a Dyak of Sanpro. + +"Other affairs are prosperous. Macota is to be sent out of the country, +and the rajah himself talks of returning to Borneo; and both these +events will please me greatly. + +"_January 1st, 1843._--Another year passed and gone; a year, with all +its anxieties, its troubles, its dangers, upon which I can look back +with satisfaction--a year in which I have been usefully employed in +doing good to others. + +"Since I last wrote, the Dyaks have been quiet, settled, and improving; +the Chinese advancing toward prosperity; and the Sarawak people, +wonderfully contented and industrious, relieved from oppression, +and fields of labor allowed them. + +"Justice I have executed with an unflinching hand; and the amount of +crime is certainly small--the petty swindling very great. + +"The month of January was a dreary month. A sick man in the house, and +very little medicine; and what was worse, the Royalist did not make her +appearance. Yet both these troubles disappeared nearly together; for +M'Kenzie got well, and the schooner, bringing with her Dr. Treacher, +arrived. She had been detained undergoing some necessary repairs. The +accession of a medical man is particularly valuable. + +"I have nothing to say about the country, except that I have given +Pangeran Macota orders to leave, which he is obeying in as far as +preparing his boat; and I hope that in six weeks we shall be rid of +his cunning and diabolically intriguing presence. + +"The Rajah Muda Hassim, his brothers, and the tag-rag following, +I also hope soon to be rid of; for although they behave far better +than they did at first, it is an evil to have wheel within wheel; +and these young rajahs of course expect, and are accustomed to, +a license which I will not allow. + +"Budrudeen is an exception--a striking and wonderful instance of the +force of good sense over evil education. + +"The rest of the people go on well; the time revolves quietly; and +the Dyaks, as well as the Malays and Chinese, enjoy the inestimable +blessing of peace and security. At intervals a cloud threatens +the serenity of our political atmosphere; but it speedily blows +over. However, all is well and safe; and so safe that I have resolved +to proceed in person to Singapore. + +"My motives for going are various; but I hope to do good, to excite +interest, and make friends; and I can find no season like the present +for my absence. It is now two years since I left Singapore, 'the +boundary of civilization.' I have been out of the civilized world, +living in a demi-civilized state, peaceably, innocently, and usefully. + +"_Feb. 8th._--After ten days' delay at the mouth of the river, +got out." + + + + + + +CHAPTER XV. + + Captain Keppel's voyage in the Dido with Mr. Brooke + to Sarawak.--Chase of three piratical prahus.--Boat + expedition.--Action with the pirates, and capture of a + prahu.--Arrival at Sarawak.--Mr. Brooke's reception.--Captain + Keppel and his officers visit the Rajah.--The palace and the + audience.--Return royal visit to the Dido.--Mr. Brooke's residence + and household.--Dr. Treacher's adventure with one of the ladies + of Macota's harem.--Another boat affair with the pirates, and + death of their chief. + + +I have now followed Mr. Brooke's journal up to the time of our first +meeting at Singapore, and his accompanying me to Sarawak, and have +no remarks of my own to offer that could add in the slightest degree +to its interest; happily, none such are needed. I had not yet seen my +friend's journal when I arrived at Sarawak, nor was it until some time +after that I by degrees learned the progress of his infant government +from its commencement. It was with unfeigned pleasure I then found +that, while performing my duty in the suppression of piracy, I was, +at the same time, rendering the greatest assistance and support to +an individual in his praiseworthy, novel, and important position. + +I had long felt a desire to explore the Island of Borneo, which the +few travelers who have called there describe as not only one of the +largest and most fertile in the world, but one of the most productive +in gold and diamonds, and other rich minerals and ores; one from which +the finest camphor known is brought into merchandise, and which is +undoubtedly capable of supplying every kind of valuable spice, and +articles of universal traffic and consumption. Yet, with all these +capabilities and inducements to tempt the energetic spirit of trade, +the internal condition of the country, and the dangers which beset +its coasts, have hitherto prevented the interior from being explored +by Europeans; and to prove how little we are acquainted even with its +shores, I actually sailed by the best Admiralty chart eighty miles +inland, and over the tops of mountains! + +_May 4th, 1843._--Passed through the Tambelans, a beautiful group +of between 100 and 150 small islands. They are very extensive, and +but thinly inhabited. There is good anchorage near some of them; but +we had nothing less than twenty fathoms. They are placed so close +together that, after passing the first, we were to all appearance +completely land-locked in a magnificent and capacious harbor. The +following morning we anchored off the mouth of the Sambas river, +and sent the boats away to examine the creeks, islands, and rivers +along the coast for traces of pirates--which were discovered by the +remains of their fires on different parts, although no clew could be +obtained as to the direction in which they had gone. On the morning +of the 8th I again sent the pinnace and two cutters, Mr. Partridge, +Messrs. D'Aeth and Jenkins, with a week's provisions, the whole under +the command of Lieutenant Wilmot Horton, Mr. Brooke kindly offering +his assistance, which, from his knowledge of the Malay language, as +well as of the kind of vessels used by the pirates, was thankfully +accepted. I directed them to proceed to the Island of Marundum, and, +after visiting the South Natunas, to rejoin the Dido at Sarawak. In +the mean time I proceeded leisurely along the coast, anchoring where +convenient, and finding regular soundings all the way in from four +to ten fathoms: weather remarkably fine, and water smooth. On the +morning of the 9th, on rounding Tanjong Datu, we opened suddenly on a +suspicious-looking boat, which, on making us out, ran for a small, deep +bay formed by Cape Datu and the next point to the eastward. Standing +a little further on, we discovered a second large boat in the offing, +which likewise stood in shore, and afterward a third at the bottom +of the bay. From the description I had received, I easily made these +out to be Illanuns, an enterprising tribe of pirates, of whose daring +adventures I had heard much. They inhabit a small cluster of islands +off the N.E. coast of Borneo, and go out in large fleets every year to +look for prahus bound to Singapore or the Straits; and, after capturing +the vessels, reduce their crews to slavery. It is of a cruel nature; +for Mr. Brooke observes: "Nor is the slavery of that mild description +which is often attributed to the Asiatics; for these victims are bound +for months, and crowded in the bottom of the pirate vessels, where +they suffer all the miseries which could be inflicted on board an +African slaver."--Having fairly pinned these worthies into a corner, +and knowing that the only two small boats I had left on board would +stand no chance with them in pulling, to make sure of my prizes I +loaded the two foremost guns on each side, and, having no proper chart +of the coast, proceeded under easy sail, feeling my way into the bay +with the lead. When just within musket-range, I let go the anchor, +which was no sooner done than the three boats commenced making a +move. I thought at first they were coming alongside to sue for pardon +and peace; and my astonishment was great when I discovered that nothing +was further from their intention. One pulled away, close in shore, +to the eastward, and the other two to the westward. They were rowed +by about forty oars each, and appeared, from their swiftness, to be +flying, and that, too, from under my very nose; and what rendered it +still more ridiculous and disagreeable, owing to a strong ebb tide, +the ship remained exactly in a position that no gun could be brought +to bear on either side. The dingy and jolly-boat gave chase; but the +pirates had the start, and it was useless; for although a few men were +seen to drop from their oars in consequence of our fire of musketry +from the forecastle, still their pace never slackened; and when they +did come within the bearing of our guns, which they were obliged to +do for a minute or two while rounding the points that formed the bay, +though our thirty-two pound shot fell thickly about their heads, +frequently dashing the spray all over them, not a man flinched from +his oar. We could not help admiring their plan of escape, and the +gallant manner in which it was effected. I saw that it would be quite +unavailing to attempt to catch the boats that had pulled to windward; +but we lost no time in slipping our cable and making all sail in +chase of the one that had gone to leeward. But the "artful dodger" +was still too fast for us: we lost sight of him at dusk, close off +the mouth of a river, up which, however, I do not think he went; for +our two boats were there very shortly after him; and although they +searched all night and next morning, they could discover no traces +of the fugitive. Besides, these pirates have no friends among the +inhabitants of the province of Sarawak who would have screened them +from us; on the contrary, they would have put them to death if once +in their power. I certainly never made so sure of any thing in my +life as of capturing the three prahus after I had seen them safe at +the bottom of the little bay at Tanjong Datu: but "there is many a +slip between the cup and the lip." We returned the following day to +pick up the anchor and cable, and observed that it was a place well +adapted as a rendezvous for pirates. The bay is studded with rocks; +and, to my horror, I found that I had run her majesty's ship Dido +inside two that were a-wash at low water! A mountain stream of most +delicious water runs into the bay between two rocks, and the coast +abounds with oysters. + +On the 13th the Dido anchored off Tanjong Poe, outside the bar at +the entrance of the river leading to Mr. Brooke's residence and seat +of government, at the town of Sarawak, situated about twenty-four +miles up. At half-tide on the following morning we crossed the bar, +carrying no less than three and a half fathoms, and entered the +beautiful river of Morotaba, which we ran up for the first fifteen +miles under all sail, with a fresh, leading breeze. The Dido was the +first square-rigged vessel that had ever entered those waters. We came +to at the junction river which unites the two principal entrances to +the Sarawak. + +In the evening our boats returned on board from their expedition, +having reached Sarawak the day previous by the western entrance. On +leaving the Dido, on the morning of the 8th, they proceeded to the +Island of Marundum, a favorite rendezvous for pirates, where they +came on a fleet of the Illanum tribe, who, however, did not give them +an opportunity of closing; but, cutting their sampans adrift, made a +precipitate flight, opening fire as they ran out on the opposite side +of a small bay, in which they had been watering and refitting. This, +of course, led to a very exciting chase, with a running fire kept up +on both sides; but the distance was too great for the range of the +guns on either side; and the pirates, who, in addition to sailing +well, were propelled by from forty to sixty oars each, made their +escape. It was not until nearly hull-down that they (probably out +of bravado) ceased to fire their stern guns. As they went in the +direction of the Natunas, our boats steered for those islands, and +anchored under the south end of one of them. At daylight next morning, +although in three fathoms water, the pinnace, owing to the great rise +and fall of tide, grounded on a coral reef, and Lieutenant Horton +and Mr. Brooke proceeded in one of the cutters to reconnoiter. As +they neared the s.w. point, they were met by six prahus, beating +their tom-toms as they advanced, and making every demonstration of +fighting. Lieutenant Horton judiciously turned to rejoin the other +boats; and the pinnace having, fortunately, just then floated, he +formed his little squadron into line abreast, cleared for action, +and prepared to meet his formidable-looking antagonists. Mr. Brooke, +however, whose eye had been accustomed to the cut and rig of all +the boats in these seas, discovered that those advancing were not +Illanuns, and fancied there must be some mistake. The Natunas people +had been trading with Sarawak, and he was intimately acquainted with +a rich and powerful chief who resided on the island; he therefore +raised a white flag of truce on his spy-glass, and from the bow of +the pinnace hailed, waved, and made all the signs he could to warn +them of the danger into which they were running; but a discharge of +small arms was the only reply he got. They then detached their three +smallest vessels inshore, so as to command a cross-fire, and cut off +the retreat of our boats; and the rest advanced, yelling, beating +their tom-toms, and blazing away with all the confidence of victory, +their shot cutting through the rigging, and splashing in the water +all around. It was an anxious moment for the Dido's little party. Not +a word was spoken. The only gun of the pinnace was loaded with grape +and canister, and kept pointed on the largest prahu. The men waited, +with their muskets in hand, for permission to fire; but it was not +until within pistol-range that Lieutenant Horton poured into the +enemy his well-prepared dose. It instantly brought them to a halt; +yet they had the temerity to exchange shots for a few minutes longer, +when the largest cried for quarter, and the other five made for the +shore, chased by the two cutters, and keeping up a fire to the last. + +The prize taken possession of by the pinnace proved to be a prahu +mounting three brass guns, with a crew of thirty-six men, belonging +to the Rajah of Rhio, and which had been dispatched by that chief to +collect tribute at and about the Natunas islands. They had on board ten +men killed, and eleven (four of them mortally) wounded. They affected +the greatest astonishment on discovering that our boats belonged +to a British man-of-war, and protested that it was all a mistake; +that the island had lately been plundered by the Illanun pirates, +for whom they had taken us; that the rising sun was in their eyes, +and that they could not make out the colors, &c. Lieutenant Horton, +thinking that their story might possibly have some foundation in truth, +and taking into consideration the severe lesson they had received, +directed Dr. Simpson, the assistant-surgeon, to dress their wounds; +and after admonishing them to be more circumspect in future, restored +them their boat, as well as the others which belonged to the island, +two of them being a trifle smaller, but of the same armament as +the one from Rhio, and the remaining three still smaller, carrying +twelve men each, armed with spears and muskets. These had been taken +possession of by the cutters after they had reached the shore and +landed their killed and wounded, who were borne away from the beach +so smartly by the natives that our people had not time to ascertain +the number hurt. The surgeon went ashore, and dressed the wounds of +several of them, an act of kindness and civilization far beyond their +comprehension. The natives, however, appeared to bear us no malice +for the injury we had inflicted on their countrymen, but loaded our +boats with fruit, goats, and every thing we required. It afforded some +amusement to find that among the slightly wounded was Mr. Brooke's +old, wealthy, and respectable friend already alluded to, who was not +a little ashamed at being recognized; but piracy is so inherent in a +Malay, that few can resist the temptation when a good opportunity for +plunder presents itself. The fact, which I afterward ascertained, was, +that they took our boats for some coming from a wreck with whatever +valuables they could collect; and their not having seen any thing of +the ship rather strengthened this conjecture; the excuse they made +for continuing the fight after they had discovered their mistake +being that they expected no quarter. [15] + +_May 16th._--We proceeded up the river twelve miles further into the +interior of this interesting country, and with my friend Mr. Brooke +on board, approached Sarawak, his seat of government; in the reach +before you near which, and off the right bank of the river, is a long +and dangerous shelf of rocks. The deep channel which lies between the +bank and the rocks is not more than sixty or seventy feet wide, and +required some little care in passing; but, with the exception of the +flying jibboom, which got nipped off in the branch of a magnificent +overhanging tree, we anchored without accident in six fathoms water, +and greatly astonished the natives with a royal salute in honor of Muda +Hassim, the Rajah of Borneo. During the whole morning large boats, some +carrying as many as two hundred people, had been coming down the river +to hail Mr. Brooke's return; and one of the greatest gratifications I +had was in witnessing the undisguised delight, mingled with gratitude +and respect, with which each head man welcomed their newly-elected +ruler back to his adopted country. Although many of the Malay chiefs +had every reason to expect that in the Dido they saw the means by +which their misdeeds were to be punished, they showed their confidence +in Mr. Brooke by bringing their children with them--a sign peculiar +to the Malay. The scene was both novel and exciting; presenting to +us, just anchored in a large fresh-water river, and surrounded by a +densely-wooded jungle, the whole surface of the water covered with +canoes and boats dressed out with their various-colored silken flags, +filled with natives beating their tom-toms, and playing on their wild +and not unpleasant-sounding wind-instruments, with the occasional +discharge of firearms. To them it must have been equally striking +and extraordinary (as few of them had ever seen any larger vessel +than their own war-boats, or a European, until Mr. Brooke's arrival) +to witness the Dido anchored almost in the center of their town, her +mast-heads towering above the highest trees of their jungle; the loud +report of her heavy two-and-thirty pounder guns, and the running aloft, +to furl sails, of 150 seamen, in their clean white dresses, and with +the band playing, all which helped to make an impression that will +not easily be forgotten at Sarawak. I was anxious that Mr. Brooke +should land with all the honors due to so important a personage, +which he accordingly did, under a salute. The next business was my +visit of ceremony to the rajah, which was great fun, though conducted +in the most imposing manner. The band, and the marines, as a guard, +having landed, we (the officers) all assembled at Mr. Brooke's house, +where, having made ourselves as formidable as we could with swords +and cocked hats, we marched in procession to the royal residence, +his majesty having sent one of his brothers, who led me by the hand +into his presence. The palace was a long, low shed, built on piles, +to which we ascended by a ladder. The audience-chamber was hung with +red and yellow silk curtains, and round the back and one side of the +platform occupied by the rajah were ranged his ministers, warriors, +and men-at-arms, bearing spears, swords, shields, and other warlike +weapons. Opposite to them were drawn up our royal marines, the +contrast between the two body-guards being very amusing. Muda Hassim +is a wretched-looking, little man; still there was a courteous and +gentle manner about him that prepossessed us in his favor, and made +us feel that we were before an individual who had been accustomed to +command. We took our seats in a semicircle, on chairs provided for +the occasion, and smoked cigars and drank tea. His majesty chewed +his sirih-leaf and betel-nut, seated with one leg crossed under him, +and playing with his toes. Very little is ever said during these +audiences, so we sat staring at one another for half an hour with +mutual astonishment; and, after the usual compliments of wishing our +friendship might last as long as the moon, and my having offered him +the Dido and every thing else that did not belong to me in exchange +for his house, we took our leave. + +_May 19th._--This was the day fixed for the rajah's visit to the Dido, +about which he appeared very anxious, although he had seldom been +known to go beyond his own threshold. For this ceremony all the boats, +guns, tom-toms, flags, and population were put in requisition; and the +procession to the ship was a very gorgeous and amusing spectacle. We +received him on board with a royal salute. He brought in his train a +whole tribe of natural brothers. His guards and followers were strange +enough, and far too numerous to be admitted on the Dido's deck, +so that as soon as a sufficient number had scrambled on board, the +sentry had orders to prevent any more from crowding in; but whether, +in so doing, the most important personages of the realm were kept out, +we did not ascertain. One fellow succeeded in obtaining a footing +with a large yellow silk canopy, a corner of which having run into +the eye of one of the midshipmen, the bearer missed his footing, and +down came the whole concern--as I was informed, by _accident_! The +party assembled in my cabin, and the remarks were few, nor did they +manifest great astonishment at any thing. In fact, a Malay never +allows himself to be taken by surprise. I believe, however, the rajah +did not think much of my veracity, when I informed him that this was +not the largest ship belonging to her Britannic majesty, and that she +had several mounting upward of 100 guns, though he admitted that he +had seen a grander sight than any of his ancestors. There was much +distress depicted in the royal countenance during his visit which I +afterward ascertained was owing to his having been informed that he +must not spit in my cabin. On leaving the ship, whether the cherry +brandy he had taken made him forget the directions he had received, +I do not know, but he squirted a mouthful of red betel-nut juice over +the white deck, and then had the temerity to hold out his hand to the +first lieutenant, who hastily applied to him the style (not royal) +of "a dirty beast," which not understanding, he smiled graciously, +taking it as some compliment peculiar to the English. + +This farce over, I had now some time to look about me, and to refit my +ship in one of the prettiest spots on earth, and as unlike a dock-yard +as any thing could be. + +Mr. Brooke's then residence, although equally rude in structure with +the abodes of the natives, was not without its English comforts of +sofas, chairs, and bedsteads. It was larger than any of the others, +but being, like them, built on piles, we had to mount a ladder to +get into it. It was situated on the same side of the river (the +right bank), next to, but rather in the rear of, the rajah's palace, +with a clear space of about 150 yards between the back and the edge +of the jungle. It was surrounded by palisades and a ditch, forming a +protection to sheep, goats, pigeons, cats, poultry, geese, monkeys, +dogs, ducks, and, occasionally, bullocks. The house consisted of but +one floor. A large room in the center, neatly ornamented with every +description of firearms, in admirable order and ready for use, served +as an audience and mess-room; and the various apartments round it +as bed-rooms, most of them comfortably furnished with matted floors, +easy chairs, pictures, and books, with much more taste and attention +to comfort than bachelors usually display. In one corner of the square +formed by the palisades were the kitchen and offices. The Europeans +with Mr. Brooke consisted of Mr. Douglas, formerly in the navy, +a clever young surgeon, and a gentleman of the name of Williamson, +who, being master of the native language, as well as active and +intelligent, made an excellent prime minister. Besides these were two +others, who came out in the yacht, one an old man-of-war's man, who +kept the arms in first-rate condition, and another worthy character, +who answered to the name of Charley, and took care of the accounts and +charge of every thing. These were attended by servants of different +nations. The cooking establishment was perfect, and the utmost harmony +prevailed. The great feeding-time was at sunset, when Mr. Brooke +took his seat at the head of the table, and all the establishment, +as in days of yore, seated themselves according to their respective +grades. This hospitable board was open to all the officers of the Dido; +and many a jovial evening we spent there. All Mr. Brooke's party were +characters--all had traveled; and never did a minute flag for want of +some entertaining anecdote, good story, or song, to pass away the time; +and it was while smoking our cigars in the evening that the natives, +as well as the Chinese who had become settlers, used to drop in, +and, after creeping up according to their custom, and touching the +hand of their European rajah, retire to the further end of the room, +and squat down upon their haunches, remain a couple of hours without +uttering a word, and then creep out again. I have seen sixty or +seventy of an evening come in and make this sort of salaam. All the +Malays were armed; and it is reckoned an insult for one of them to +appear before a rajah without his kris. I could not help remarking +the manly, independent bearing of the half-savage and nearly naked +mountain Dyak compared with the sneaking deportment of the Malay. + +The following little adventure was told me during my stay at Sarawak, +by Dr. Treacher, who had lately joined Mr. Brooke, his former medical +attendant having returned to England. It appears that Dr. Treacher +received a message by a confidential slave that one of the ladies of +Macota's harem desired an interview, appointing a secluded spot in +the jungle as the rendezvous. The doctor, being aware of his own good +looks, fancied he had made a conquest, and, having got himself up as +showily as he could, was there at the appointed time. He described +the poor girl as both young and pretty, but with a dignified and +determined look, which at once convinced him that she was moved to +take so dangerous a step by some deeper feeling than that of a mere +fancy for his person. She complained of the ill treatment she had +received from Macota, and the miserable life she led, and avowed that +her firm resolve was to destroy (not herself, gentle creature! but) +him; for which purpose she wanted a small portion of arsenic. It was +a disappointment that he could not comply with her request; so they +parted--he full of pity and love for her, and she, in all probability, +full of contempt for a man who felt for her wrongs, but would not +aid in the very simple means she had proposed for redressing them. + +While at Singapore, Mr. Whitehead had kindly offered to allow his +yacht, the Emily, a schooner of about fifty tons, with a native crew, +to bring our letters to Borneo, on the arrival at Singapore of the +mail from England. About the time she was expected, I thought it +advisable to send a boat to cruise in the vicinity of Cape Datu, in +case of her falling in with any of these piratical gentry. The Dido's +largest boat, the pinnace, being under repair, Mr. Brooke lent a large +boat which he had had built by the natives at Sarawak, and called the +Jolly Bachelor. Having fitted her with a brass six-pounder long gun, +with a volunteer crew of a mate, two midshipmen, six marines, and +twelve seamen, and a fortnight's provisions, I dispatched her under +the command of the second lieutenant, Mr. Hunt; Mr. Douglas, speaking +the Malayan language, likewise volunteered his services. One evening, +after they had been about six days absent, while we were at dinner, +young Douglas made his appearance, bearing in his arms the captured +colors of an Illanun pirate. It appears that the day after they had +got outside they observed three boats a long way in the offing, to +which they gave chase, but soon lost sight of them, owing to their +superior sailing. They, however, appeared a second and a third time, +after dark, but without the Jolly Bachelor being able to get near +them; and it now being late, and the crew both fatigued and hungry, +they pulled inshore, lighted a fire, cooked their provisions, +and then hauled the boat out to her grapnel, near some rocks, for +the night; lying down to rest with their arms by their sides, and +muskets round the mast, ready loaded. Having also placed sentries and +look-out men, and appointed an officer of the watch, they one and all +(sentries included, I suppose), owing to the fatigues of the day, +fell asleep! At about three o'clock the following morning, the moon +being just about to rise, Lieut. Hunt happening to be awake, observed +a savage brandishing a kris, and performing his war-dance on the bit +of deck, in an ecstasy of delight, thinking, in all probability, of +the ease with which he had got possession of a fine trading-boat, and +calculating the cargo of slaves he had to sell, but little dreaming of +the hornets' nest into which he had fallen. Lieut. Hunt's round face +meeting the light of the rising moon, without a turban surmounting it, +was the first notice the pirate had of his mistake. He immediately +plunged overboard; and before Lieut. Hunt had sufficiently recovered +his astonishment to know whether he was dreaming or not, or to rouse +his crew up, a discharge from three or four cannon within a few yards, +and the cutting through the rigging by the various missiles with which +the guns were loaded, soon convinced him there was no mistake. It +was as well the men were still lying down when this discharge took +place, as not one of them was hurt; but on jumping to their legs, +they found themselves closely pressed by two large war-prahus, +one on each bow. To return the fire, cut the cable, man the oars, +and back astern to gain room, was the work of a minute; but now came +the tug of war; it was a case of life and death. Our men fought as +British sailors ought to do; quarter was not expected on either side; +and the quick and deadly aim of the marines prevented the pirates from +reloading their guns. The Illanun prahus are built with strong bulwarks +or barricades, grape-shot proof, across the fore part of the boat, +through which ports are formed for working the guns; these bulwarks +had to be cut away by round shot from the Jolly Bachelor before the +musketry could bear effectually. This done, the grape and canister +told with fearful execution. In the mean time, the prahus had been +pressing forward to board, while the Jolly Bachelor backed astern; but, +as soon as this service was achieved, our men dropped their oars, and, +seizing their muskets, dashed on: the work was sharp, but short, and +the slaughter great. While one pirate boat was sinking, and an effort +made to secure her, the other effected her escape by rounding the point +of rocks, where a third and larger prahu, hitherto unseen, came to her +assistance, and putting fresh hands on board, and taking her in tow, +succeeded in getting off, although chased by the Jolly Bachelor, after +setting fire to the crippled prize, which blew up and sunk before the +conquerors got back to the scene of action. While there, a man swam off +to them from the shore, who proved to be one of the captured slaves, +and had made his escape by leaping overboard during the fight. The +three prahus were the same Illanun pirates we had so suddenly come +upon off Cape Datu in the Dido, and they belonged to the same fleet +that Lieut. Horton had chased off the Island of Marundum. The slave +prisoner had been seized, with a companion, in a small fishing canoe, +off Borneo Proper; his companion suffered in the general slaughter. The +sight that presented itself on our people boarding the captured boat +must indeed have been a frightful one. None of the pirates waited on +board for even the chance of receiving either quarter or mercy, but +all those capable of moving had thrown themselves into the water. In +addition to the killed, some lying across the thwarts, with their +oars in their hands, at the bottom of the prahu, in which there was +about three feet of blood and water, were seen protruding the mangled +remains of eighteen or twenty bodies. During my last expedition I +fell in with a slave belonging to a Malay chief, one of our allies, +who informed us that he likewise had been a prisoner, and pulled an +oar in one of the two prahus that attacked the Jolly Bachelor; that +none of the crew of the captured prahu reached the shore alive, with +the exception of the lad that swam off to our people; and that there +were so few who survived in the second prahu, that, having separated +from their consort during the night, the slaves, fifteen in number, +rose and put to death the remaining pirates, and then ran the vessel +into the first river they reached, which proved to be the Kaleka, where +they were seized, and became the property of the governing Datu; and +my informant was again sold to my companion, while on a visit to his +friend the Datu. Each of the attacking prahus had between fifty and +sixty men, including slaves, and the larger one between ninety and +a hundred. The result might have been very different to our gallant +but dosy Jolly Bachelors. + +I have already mentioned the slaughter committed by the fire of the +pinnace, under Lieutenant Horton, into the largest Malay prahu; and +the account given of the scene which presented itself on the deck of +the defeated pirate, when taken possession of, affords a striking +proof of the character of these fierce rovers; resembling greatly +what we read of the Norsemen and Scandinavians of early ages. Among +the mortally wounded lay the young commander of the prahu, one of +the most noble forms of the human race; his countenance handsome +as the hero of Oriental romance, and his whole bearing wonderfully +impressive and touching. He was shot in front and through the lungs, +and his last moments were rapidly approaching. He endeavored to speak, +but the blood gushed from his mouth with the voice he vainly essayed +to utter in words. Again and again he tried, but again and again +the vital fluid drowned the dying effort. He looked as if he had +something of importance which he desired to communicate, and a shade +of disappointment and regret passed over his brow when he felt that +every essay was unavailing, and that his manly strength and daring +spirit were dissolving into the dark night of death. The pitying +conquerors raised him gently up, and he was seated in comparative +ease, for the welling out of the blood was less distressing; but the +end speedily came: he folded his arms heroically across his wounded +breast, fixed bis eyes upon the British seamen around, and, casting +one last glance at the ocean--the theater of his daring exploits, +on which he had so often fought and triumphed--expired without a sigh. + +The spectators, though not unused to tragical and sanguinary sights, +were unanimous in speaking of the death of the pirate chief as the +most affecting spectacle they had ever witnessed. A sculptor might have +carved him as an Antinous in the mortal agonies of a Dying Gladiator. + +The leaders of the piratical prahus are sometimes poetically addressed +by their followers as _Matari_, i. e., the sun; or _Bulan_, the moon; +and from his superiority in every respect, physical and intellectual, +the chief whose course was here so fatally closed seemed to be worthy +of either celestial name. + + + + + + + +CHAPTER XVI. + + The Rajah's letter to Captain Keppel, and his reply.--Prepares + for an expedition against the Sarebus pirates.--Pleasure + excursion up the river.--The Chinese settlement.--The Singe + mountain.--Interior of the residences.--Dyak festival of + Maugut.--Relics.--Sporting.--Return to Sarawak.--The expedition + against Sarebus.--State and number of the assailing force.--Ascent + of the river.--Beauty of the scenery. + + +_May 21st._--I received intimation that the rajah had written a letter, +and wished me to appoint a time and place, that it might be presented +in due form. Accordingly I attended in Mr. Brooke's hall of audience on +the following day, where I found collected all the chiefs, and a crowd +of natives, many of them having already been informed that the said +letter was a requisition for me to assist in putting down the hordes +of pirates who had so long infested the coast. I believe many of those +present, especially the Borneons, to have been casually concerned, +if not deeply implicated, in some of their transactions. After I had +taken my seat with Mr. Brooke at the head of the table, the rajah's +sword-bearers entered, clearing the way for the huge yellow canopy, +under the shade of which, on a large brass tray, and carefully sewn +up in a yellow silk bag, was the letter, from which it was removed, +and placed in my hands by the Pangeran Budrudeen. I opened the bag +with my knife, and giving it to an interpreter, he read it aloud +in the Malayan tongue. It was variously received by the audience, +many of whose countenances were far from prepossessing. + +The following is a copy of the letter, to which was affixed the +rajah's seal: + + + "This friendly epistle, having its source in a pure mind, + comes from Rajah Muda Hassim, next in succession to the royal + throne of the kingdom of Borneo, and who now holds his court at + the trading city of Sarawak, to our friend Henry Keppel, head + captain of the war-frigate belonging to her Britannic Majesty, + renowned throughout all countries--who is valiant and discreet, + and endowed with a mild and gentle nature: + + "This is to inform our friend that there are certain great pirates, + of the people of Sarebus and Sakarran, in our neighborhood, + seizing goods and murdering people on the high seas. They have + more than three hundred war-prahus, and extend their ravages even + to Banjarmassim; they are not subject to the government of Bruni + (Borneo); they take much plunder from vessels trading between + Singapore and the good people of our country. + + "It would be a great service if our friend would adopt measures + to put an end to these piratical outrages. + + "We can present nothing better to our friend than a kris, such + as it is. + + "20th day of Rahial Akhir, 1257." + + +To which I sent the following reply:-- + + + "Captain Keppel begs to acknowledge the receipt of the Rajah + Muda Hassim's letter, representing that the Dyaks of Sarebus and + Sakarran are the pirates who infest the coast of Borneo, and do + material damage to the trade of Singapore. + + "Captain Keppel will take speedy measures to suppress these and + all other pirates, and feels confident that her Britannic Majesty + will be glad to learn that the Rajah Muda Hassim is ready to + cooeperate in so laudable an undertaking." + + +Not being prepared for the oriental fashion of exchanging presents, +I had nothing to offer to his rajahship; but I found out afterward +that Mr. Brooke had (unknown to me) sent him a clock in my name. The +royal kris was handsome, the handle of carved ivory, with a good deal +of gold about it. + +This information about the pirates gave me good ground to make a +beginning; and having arranged with Mr. Brooke to obtain all necessary +intelligence relative to their position, strength, and numbers, [16] +I determined on attacking them in their strongholds, commencing with +the Sarebus, who, from all accounts, were by far the most strongly +fortified. Mr. Brooke accepted my invitation to accompany us, as well +as to supply a native force of about three hundred men, who, should +we succeed in the destruction of the pirate forts, would be useful in +the jungle. Mr. Brooke's going to join personally in a war against (in +the opinion of the Datus) such formidable opponents as the Sakarran and +Sarebus pirates--who had never yet been conquered, although repeatedly +attacked by the united forces of the surrounding rajahs--was strongly +opposed by the chiefs. On his informing them that he should go, but +leaving it optional whether they would accompany him or not, their +simple reply was, "What is the use of our remaining? If you die, +we die; and if you live, we live; we will go with you." Preparations +for the expedition were accordingly commenced. + +No place could have suited us better for a refit. Within a few yards +of the ship was a Chinese workshop. Our boats were hauled up to repair +under sheds, and we drew our fresh water alongside; and while the +Dido was at Sarawak, Mr. Jago, the carpenter, built a very beautiful +thirty-foot gig, having cut the plank up in the Chinaman's sawpit. + +While these works were in progress, I accompanied Mr. Brooke up the +river. The Royalist having been dispatched to Singapore with our +letters, we started on our pleasure-excursion. With the officers +from the Dido and the chiefs, who always accompany the "Tuan Besar," +we mustered about sixty persons; and with our guns, walking-sticks, +cigars, and a well supplied commissariat, determined to enjoy +ourselves. + +We were not long in making the acquaintances of the chiefs. Men +who had formerly rebelled, who were conquered by Mr. Brooke, and +had their (forfeited) lives saved, their families restored to them, +and themselves finally reinstated in the offices they had previously +held--these men were very naturally and faithfully attached. Our young +gentlemen found their Malayan names difficult to remember, so that the +gallant old Patingi Ali was seldom called any other name than that of +"Three-Fingered Jack," from his having lost part of his right hand; +the Tumangong was spoken of as the "Father of Hopeful," from one of +his children, a fine little fellow, whom he was foolishly attached to, +and seldom seen without. + +Der Macota, who had sometime before received the appellation of +"the Serpent," had, ever since he got his orders to quit, some six +months before, been preparing his boats, but which were ready in an +incredibly short time after the Dido's arrival; and thus Mr. Brooke got +rid of that most intriguing and troublesome rascal; a person who had, +from the commencement, been trying to supplant and ruin him. He it was +that gave the Sakarran pirates permission to ascend the river for the +purpose of attacking the comparatively defenceless mountain Dyaks; +and he it was that persecuted the unfortunate young Illanun chief, +Si Tundo, even to his assassination. He was at last got rid of from +Sarawak, but only to join and plan mischief with that noted piratical +chief, Seriff Sahib; he, however, met his deserts. + +We ascended the river in eight or ten boats. The scene to us was +most novel, and particularly fresh and beautiful. We stopped at an +empty house on a cleared spot on the left bank during the ebb-tide, +to cook our dinner; in the cool of the afternoon we proceeded with +the flood; and late in the evening brought up for the night in a +snug little creek close to the Chinese settlement. We slept in native +boats, which were nicely and comfortably fitted for the purpose. At +an early hour Mr. Brooke was waited on by the chief of the Kunsi; +and on visiting their settlement he was received with a salute of +three guns. We found it kept in their usual neat and clean order, +particularly their extensive vegetable gardens; but being rather +pressed for time, we did not visit the mines, but proceeded to the +villages of different tribes of Dyaks living on the Sarambo mountain, +numbers of whom had been down to welcome us, very gorgeously dressed +in feathers and scarlet. + +The foot of the mountain was about four miles from the landing-place; +and a number of these kind savages voluntarily shouldered our +provisions, beds, bags, and baggage, and we proceeded on our march. We +did not expect to find quite a turnpike-road; but, at the same time, +I, for one, was not prepared for the dance led us by our wild cat-like +guides through thick jungle, and alternately over rocky hills, or up +to our middles in the soft marshes we had to cross. Our only means of +doing so was by feeling on the surface of the mud (it being covered +in most places about a foot deep with grass or discolored water) +for light spars thrown along lengthwise and quite unconnected, while +our only support was an occasional stake at irregular distances, +at which we used to rest, as the spars invariably sunk into the mud +if we attempted to stop; and there being a long string of us, many +a fall and flounder in the mud (gun and all) was the consequence. + +The ascent of the hill, although as steep as the side of a house, +was strikingly beautiful. Our resting-places, unluckily, were but few; +but when we did reach one, the cool, fresh breeze, and the increasing +extent and variety of scene--our view embracing, as it did, all the +varieties of river, mountain, wood, and sea--amply repaid us for the +exertion of the lower walk; and, on either hand, we were sure to have a +pure cool rivulet tumbling over the rocks. While going up, however, our +whole care and attention were requisite to secure our own safety; for +it is not only one continued climb up ladders, but such ladders! They +are made of the single trunk of a tree in its rough and rounded state, +with notches, not cut at the reasonable distance apart of the ratlins +of our rigging, but requiring the knee to be brought up to the level +of the chin before the feet are sufficiently parted to reach from +one step to another; and that, when the muscles of the thigh begin +to ache, and the wind is pumped out of the body, is distressing work. + +We mounted, in this manner, some 500 feet; and it was up this steep +that Mr. Brooke had ascended only a few months before, with two hundred +followers, to attack the Singe Dyaks. He has already described the +circular halls of these Dyaks, in one of which we were received, +hung round, as the interior of it is, with hundreds of human heads, +most of them dried with the skin and hair on; and to give them, if +possible, a more ghastly appearance, small shells (the cowry) are +inserted where the eyes once were, and tufts of dried grass protrude +from the ears. But my eyes soon grew accustomed to the sight; and by +the time dinner was ready (I think I may say _we_) thought no more +about them than if they had been as many cocoa-nuts. + +Of course the natives crowded round us; and I noticed that with these +simple people it was much the same as with the more civilized, and +that curiosity was strongest in the gentler sex; and again, that the +young men came in more gorgeously dressed, wearing feathers, necklaces, +armlets, ear-rings, bracelets, beside jackets of various-colored silks, +and other vanities--than the older and wiser chiefs, who encumbered +themselves with no more dress than what decency actually required, +and were, moreover, treated with the greatest respect. + +We strolled about from house to house without causing the slightest +alarm: in all we were welcomed, and invited to squat ourselves on +their mats with the family. The women, who were some of them very +good-looking, did not run from us as the plain-headed Malays would have +done; but laughed and chatted to us by signs in all the consciousness +of innocence and virtue. + +We were fortunate in visiting these Dyaks during one of their grand +festivals (called Maugut); and in the evening, dancing, singing, +and drinking were going on in various parts of the village. In one +house there was a grand _fete_, in which the women danced with the +men. The dress of the women was simple and curious--a light jacket +open in front, and a short petticoat not coming below the knees, +fitting close, was hung round with jingling bits of brass, which kept +"making music" wherever they went. The movement was like all other +native dances--graceful, but monotonous. There were four men, two of +them bearing human sculls, and two the fresh heads of pigs; the women +bore wax-lights, or yellow rice on brass dishes. They danced in line, +moving backward and forward, and carrying the heads and dishes in both +hands; the graceful part was the manner in which they half turned the +body to the right and left, looking over their shoulders and holding +the heads in the opposite direction, as if they were in momentary +expectation of some one coming up behind to snatch the nasty relic +from them. At times the women knelt down in a group, with the men +leaning over them. After all, the music was not the only thing wanting +to make one imagine oneself at the opera. The necklaces of the women +were chiefly of teeth--bears' the most common--human the most prized. + +In an interior house at one end were collected the relics of the +tribe. These consisted of several round-looking stones, two deer's +heads, and other inferior trumpery. The stones turn black if the +tribe is to be beaten in war, and red if to be victorious; any one +touching them would be sure to die; if lost, the tribe would be ruined. + +The account of the deer's heads is still more curious: A young Dyak +having dreamed the previous night that he should become a great +warrior, observed two deer swimming across the river, and killed +them; a storm came on with thunder and lightning, and darkness +came over the face of the earth; he died immediately, but came to +life again, and became a rumah guna (literally a _useful house_) +and chief of his tribe; the two deer still live, and remain to watch +over the affairs of the tribe. These heads have descended from their +ancestors from the time when they first became a tribe and inhabited +the mountain. Food is always kept placed before them, and renewed from +time to time. While in the circular building, which our party named +"the scullery," a young chief (Meta) seemed to take great pride in +answering our interrogatories respecting different skulls which we +took down from their hooks: two belonged to chiefs of a tribe who had +made a desperate defence; and judging from the incisions on the heads, +each of which must have been mortal, it must have been a desperate +affair. Among other trophies was half a head, the skull separated +from across between the eyes, in the same manner that you would +divide that of a hare or rabbit to get at the brain--this was their +division of the head of an old woman, which was taken when another +(a friendly) tribe was present, who likewise claimed their half. I +afterward saw these tribes share a head. But the skulls, the account +of which our informant appeared to dwell on with the greatest delight, +were those which were taken while the owners were asleep--cunning with +them being the perfection of warfare. We slept in their "scullery;" +and my servant Ashford, who happened to be a sleep-walker, that +night jumped out of the window, and unluckily on the steep side; +and had not the ground been well turned up by the numerous pigs, +and softened by rain, he must have been hurt. + +_May 25th._--Having returned to our boats, we moved up another branch +of the river, for the purpose of deer-shooting, and landed under some +large shady trees. The sportsmen divided into two small parties, and, +under the guidance of the natives, went in search of game, leaving +the remainder of the party to prepare dinner against our return. + +The distance we had to walk to get to our ground was what our guides +considered nothing--some five miles through jungle; and one of the +most distressing parts in jungle-walking is the having to climb over +the fallen trunks of immense trees. + +A short time before sunset we came to a part of the jungle that +opened on to a large swamp, with long rank grass about six feet high, +across which was a sort of Dyak bridge. The guide having made signs +for me to advance, I cautiously crept to the edge of the jungle; and +after some little trouble, and watching the direction of his finger, I +observed the heads of two deer, male and female, protruding just above +the grass at about sixty yards' distance. From the manner the doe was +moving about her long ears, it had, to my view, all the appearance of a +rabbit. Shooting for the pot, I selected her. As soon as I fired, some +of my boat's crew made a dash into the grass; and in an instant three +of them were nearly up to their chins in mud and water, and we had +some difficulty in dragging them out: Our Malay guide more knowingly +crossed the bridge; and being acquainted with the locality, reached the +deer from the opposite side, taking care to utter a prayer and cut the +throat with the head in the direction of the Prophet's tomb at Mecca, +without which ceremony no true follower of Islam could partake of the +meat. The doe was struck just below the ear; and my native companion +appeared much astonished at the distance and deadly effect with which +my smooth-bored _Westley Richards_ had conveyed the ball. + +The buck had got off before the smoke had cleared sufficiently for me +to see him. From what I had heard, I was disappointed at not seeing +more game. The other party had not killed anything, although they +caught a little fawn, having frightened away the mother. + +My time was so occupied during my stay in Borneo, that I am unable +to give any account of the sport to be found in the island. Neither +had Mr. Brooke seen much of it; unless an excursion or two he had +made in search of new specimens of the ourang-outang, or mias, may +be brought under that head. This excursion he performed not only +with the permission and under the protection, but as the guest, +of the piratical chief Seriff Sahib; little thinking that, in four +years afterward, he would himself, as a powerful rajah, be the cause +of destroying his town, and driving him from the country. + +So much for sporting. The pleasure, I believe, increases in +proportion to the risk. But, while on the subject, I may mention +that of pig-shooting, which I found an amusement not to be despised, +especially if you approach your game before life is extinct. The jaws +are long, tusks also, and sharp as a razor; and when once wounded, +the animals evince a strong inclination to return the compliment: +they are active, cunning, and very fast. I shot several at different +times. The natives also describe a very formidable beast, the size of +a large bullock, found farther to the northward, which they appear to +hold in great dread. This I conceive to be a sort of bison; and if so, +the sporting in Borneo altogether is not so bad. + +The following day we went to other ground for deer; but the Dyaks had +now enjoyed peace so long that the whole country was in a state of +cultivation; and after scrambling over tracts of wild-looking country, +in which Mr. Brooke, two years before, had seen the deer in hundreds, +we returned to our boats, and down the river to Sarawak. + +We now began to prepare in earnest for work of another sort. The +news of our intended attack on the Sarebus pirates had soon reached +them, and spread all over the country; and we had daily accounts of +the formidable resistance they intended to make. By the 4th July +our preparations were complete, and the ship had dropped down to +the mouth of the river. I forgot to mention that all the adjoining +seriffs had, in the greatest consternation, sent me assurances +of their future good intentions. Seriff Jaffer, who lived with an +industrious but warlike race of Dyaks up the Linga river, a branch +of the Batang Lupar, had never been known to commit piracy, and had +been frequently at war with both the Sarebus and Sakarrans, offered +to join our expedition. From Seriff Sahib, who lived up a river at +Sadong, adjoining the Sarebus territory, and to whom the "Serpent" +Macota had gone, Mr. Brooke and myself had invitations to partake of +a feast on our way to the Sarebus river. This was accompanied with a +present of a couple of handsome spears and a porcupine, and also an +offer to give up the women and children he had, with the assistance of +the Sakarran pirates, captured from the poor Sow Dyaks up the Sarawak. + +Farther to the eastward, and up the Batang Lupar, into which the +Sakarran runs, lived another powerful seriff by the name of Muller, +elder brother and coadjutor of Seriff Sahib. These all, however, +through fear at the moment, sent in submissive messages; but their +turn had not yet come, and we proceeded toward the Sarebus. + +The island of Burong, off which the Dido was to remain at anchor, we +made the first place of rendezvous. The force from the Dido consisted +of her pinnace, two cutters, and a gig; beside which Mr. Brooke lent us +his native-built boat, the Jolly Bachelor, carrying a long six-pounder +brass gun and thirty of our men; also a large tope of thirty-five tons, +which carried a well-supplied commissariat, as well as ammunition. + +The native force was extensive; but I need only mention the names of +those from Sarawak. The three chiefs (the Tumangong and two Patingis, +Gapoor and Ali) had two large boats, each carrying about 180 men. Then +there was the rajah's large, heavy boat, with the rascally Borneons +and about 40 men, and sundry other Sarawak boats; and, beside, +a Dyak force of about 400 men from the different tribes of Lundu, +Sow, Singe, &c. Of course, it caused some trouble to collect this +wild, undisciplined armament, and two or three successive points of +rendezvous were necessary; and it was the morning of the 8th before +we entered the river. Lieutenant Wilmot Horton was to command the +expedition; with him, in the pinnace, were Mr. W. L. Partridge, mate; +Dr. Simpson, assistant-surgeon; Mr. Hallowes, midshipman; 14 seamen, +and 5 marines. In the first cutter was Mr. D'Aeth, Mr. Douglas, +from Sarawak, and Mr. Collins, the boatswain; in the second cutter, +Mr. Elliott, the master, and Mr. Jenkins, midshipman. The Jolly +Bachelor was commanded by Lieutenant Tottenham, and Mr. Comber, +midshipman, with Mr. Brooke's medical friend, Dr. Treacher, and an +amateur gentleman, Mr. Ruppel, from Sarawak. The force from the +Dido was about 80, officers and men. The command of the boats, +when sent away from a man-of-war, is the perquisite of the first +lieutenant. My curiosity, however, would not allow me to resist the +temptation of attending the party in my gig; and I had my friend +Mr. Brooke as a companion, who was likewise attended by a sampan and +crew he had taken with him to Sarawak from Singapore. His coxswain, +Seboo, we shall all long remember: he was civil only to his master, +and, I believe, brave while in his company. He was a stupid-looking +and powerfully-built sort of savage, always praying, eating, smiling, +or sleeping. When going into action, he always went down on his knees +to pray, holding his loaded musket before him. He was, however, a +curious character, and afforded us great amusement--took good care +of himself and his master, but cared for no one else. + +In the second gig was Lieutenant E. Gunnell, whose troublesome duty it +was to preserve order throughout this extensive musketoe fleet, and to +keep the natives from pressing too closely on the rear of our boats--an +office which became less troublesome as we approached the scene of +danger. The whole formed a novel, picturesque, and exciting scene; and +it was curious to contemplate the different feelings that actuated the +separate and distinct parties--the odd mixture of Europeans, Malays, +and Dyaks, the different religions, and the eager and anxious manner +in which all pressed forward. The novelty of the thing was quite +sufficient to excite our Jacks, after having been cooped up so long +on board ship, to say nothing of the chance of a broken head. + +Of the Malays and Dyaks who accompanied us, some came from curiosity, +some from attachment to Mr. Brooke, and many for plunder, but I +think the majority to gratify revenge, as there were but few of the +inhabitants on the north coast of Borneo who had not suffered more or +less from the atrocities of the Sarebus and Sakarran pirates--either +their houses burned, their relations murdered, or their wives and +children captured and sold into slavery. + +We did not get far up the river the first day, as the tope was +very slow, and carried that most essential part of all expeditions, +the commissariat. Patingi Ali, who had been sent the day before to +await the force in the mouth of the Sarebus, fell in with five or six +native boats, probably on the look-out for us, to which he gave chase, +and captured one, the rest retreating up the river. + +On the 9th June, 1843, we had got some thirty miles in the same +direction; every thing was in order; and, as we advanced, I pulled +from one end of my little fleet to the other, and felt much the same +sort of pride as Sir William Parker must have experienced when leading +seventy-five sail of British ships up the Yeang-tse Keang river into +the very heart of the Celestial Empire. It rained hard; but we were +well supplied with kajans, a mat admirably adapted to keep out the wet; +and securely covered in, my gig had all the appearance of a native +boat, especially as I had substituted paddles for oars. In this manner +I frequently went a little in advance of the force; and on the 9th I +came on a couple of boats, hauled close in under the jungle, apparently +perfectly unconscious of my approach. I concluded them to be part +of the small fleet of boats that had been chased, the previous day, +in the mouth of the river; and when abreast of them, and within range, +I fired from my rifle. The crews of each boat immediately precipitated +themselves into the water, and escaped into the jungle. They were +so closely covered in, that I did not see any one at first; but I +found that my ball had passed through both sides of an iron kettle, +in which they were boiling some rice. How astonished the cook must +have been! On coming up, our Dyak followers dashed into the jungle +in pursuit of the fugitives, but without success. + +We moved on leisurely with the flood-tide, anchoring always on the +ebb, by which means we managed to collect our stragglers and keep the +force together. Toward the evening, by the incessant sound of distant +gongs, we were aware that our approach was known, and that preparations +were making to repel us. These noises were kept up all night; and we +occasionally heard the distant report of ordnance, which was fired, +of course, to intimidate us. During the day, several deserted boats +were taken from the banks of the river and destroyed, some of them +containing spears, shields, and ammunition, with a few fire-arms. + +The place we brought up at for the night was called Boling; but here +the river presented a troublesome and dangerous obstacle in what is +called the bore, caused by the tide coming in with a tremendous rush, +as if an immense wave of the sea had suddenly rolled up the stream, +and, finding itself confined on either side, extended across, +like a high bank of water, curling and breaking as it went, and, +from the frightful velocity with which it passes up, carrying all +before it. There are, however, certain bends of the river where the +bore does not break across: it was now our business to look out for +and gain these spots between the times of its activity. The natives +hold them in great dread. + +From Boling the river becomes less deep, and not safe for large +boats; so that here we were obliged to leave our tope with the +commissariat, and a sufficient force for her protection, as we had +received information that thirteen piratical boats had been some time +cruising outside, and were daily expected up the river on their return, +when our unguarded tope would have made them an acceptable prize. In +addition to this, we were now fairly in the enemy's country: and for +all we knew, hundreds of canoes might have been hid in the jungle, +ready to lanch. Just below Boling, the river branches off to the +right and left; that to the left leading to another nest of pirates +at Pakoo, who are (by land) in communication with those of Paddi, +the place it was our intention to attack first. + +Having provisioned our boats for six days, and provided a strong guard +to remain with the tope, the native force not feeling themselves +safe separated from the main body,--we started, a smaller and more +select party than before, but, in my opinion, equally formidable, +leaving about 150 men. This arrangement gave but little satisfaction +to those left behind, our men not liking to exchange an expedition +where a fight was certain, for a service in which it was doubtful, +although their position was one of danger, being open to attack +from three different parts of the river. Our party now consisted of +the Dido's boats, the three Datus from Sarawak, and some Sow Dyaks, +eager for heads and plunder. We arrived at our first resting-place +early in the afternoon, and took up a position in as good order as +the small space would admit. + +I secured my gig close to the bank, under the shade of a large tree, +at some little distance from the fleet of boats; and, by myself, +contemplated my novel position--in command of a mixed force of +500 men, some seventy miles up a river in the interior of Borneo; +on the morrow about to carry all the horrors of war among a race of +savage pirates, whose country no force had ever yet dared to invade, +and who had been inflicting with impunity every sort of cruelty on +all whom they encountered, for more than a century. + +As the sun went down, the scene was beautiful, animated by the variety +and picturesque appearance of the native prahus, and the praying of +the Mussulman, with his face in the direction of the Prophet's tomb, +bowing his head to the deck of his boat, and absorbed in devotions from +which nothing could withdraw his attention. For a time--it being that +for preparing the evening meal--no noise was made: it was a perfect +calm; and the rich foliage was reflected in the water as in a mirror, +while a small cloud of smoke ascended from each boat, to say nothing of +that from my cigar, which added much to the charm I then experienced. + +Late in the evening, when the song and joke passed from boat to boat, +and the lights from the different fires were reflected in the water, +the scenery was equally pleasing; but later still, when the lights +were out, there being no moon, and the banks overhung with trees, +it was so dark that no one could see beyond his own boat. + +A little after midnight, a small boat was heard passing up the river, +and was regularly hailed by us in succession; to which they replied, +"We belong to your party." And it was not until the yell of triumph, +given by six or eight voices, after they had (with a strong flood-tide +in their favor) shot past the last of our boats, that we found how +we had been imposed on. + + + + + + +CHAPTER XVII. + + Ascent of the river to Paddi.--Town taken and burnt.--Narrow + escape of a reinforcement of friendly Dyaks.--Night-attack by the + pirates.--Conference: they submit.--Proceed against Pakoo.--Dyak + treatment of dead enemies.--Destruction of Pakoo, and submission + of the pirates.--Advance upon Rembas.--The town destroyed: the + inhabitants yield.--Satisfactory effects of the expedition.--Death + of Dr. Simpson.--Triumphant return to Sarawak. + + +_June 11th._--We moved on immediately after the passing up of the bore, +the dangers of which appeared to have been greatly exaggerated. The +beating of gongs and discharge of cannon had been going on the whole +of the previous night. + +The scenery improved in beauty every yard that we advanced; but our +attention was drawn from it by the increase of yelling as we approached +the scene of action. Although as yet we had only heard our enemies, +our rapid advance with a strong tide must have been seen by them from +the jungle on the various hills which now rose to our view. + +Being in my gig, somewhat ahead of the boats, I had the advantage of +observing all that occurred. The scene was the most exciting I ever +experienced. We had no time for delay or consideration: the tide was +sweeping us rapidly up; and had we been inclined to retreat then, we +should have found it difficult. A sudden turn in the river brought us +(Mr. Brooke was by my side) in front of a steep hill which rose from +the bank. It had been cleared of jungle, and long grass grew in its +place. As we hove in sight, several hundred savages rose up, and gave +one of their war-yells: it was the first I had heard. No report from +musketry or ordnance could ever make a man's heart feel so _small_ +as mine did at that horrid yell: but I had no leisure to think. I had +only time for a shot at them with my double barrel, as they rushed +down the steep, while I was carried past. I soon after heard the +report of our large boat's heavy gun, which must have convinced them +that we likewise were prepared. + +On the roof of a long building, on the summit of the hill, were several +warriors performing a war-dance, which it would be difficult to imitate +on such a stage. As these were not the forts we were in search of, +we did not delay longer than to exchange a few shots in sweeping along. + +Our next obstacle was more troublesome, being a strong barrier right +across the river, formed of two rows of trees placed firmly in the +mud, with their tops crossed and secured together by ratans; and +along the fork, formed by the crossing of the tops of these stakes, +were other trees firmly secured. Rapidly approaching this barrier, +I observed a small opening that might probably admit a canoe; +and gathering good way, and putting my gig's head straight at it, +I squeezed through. On passing it the scene again changed, and I had +before me three formidable-looking forts, which lost not a moment in +opening a discharge of cannon on my unfortunate gig. Luckily their +guns were properly elevated for the range of the barrier; and, with +the exception of a few straggling grape-shot that splashed the water +round us, the whole went over our heads. For a moment I found myself +cut off from my companions, and drifting fast upon the enemy. The banks +of the river were covered with warriors, yelling and rushing down to +possess themselves of my boat and its crew. I had some difficulty in +getting my long gig round, and paddling up against the stream; but, +while my friend Brooke steered the boat, my cockswain and myself +kept up a fire with tolerable aim on the embrasures, to prevent, if +possible, their reloading before the pinnace, our leading boat, could +bring her twelve-pound carronade to bear. I was too late to prevent +the pinnace falling athwart the barrier, in which position she had +three men wounded. With the assistance of some of our native followers, +the ratan-lashings which secured the heads of the stakes were soon cut +through; and I was not sorry when I found the Dido's first cutter on +the same side with myself. The other boats soon followed; and while +the pinnace kept up a destructive fire on the fort, Mr. D'Aeth, who +was the first to land, jumped on shore, with his crew, at the foot +of the hill on the top of which the nearest fort stood, and at once +rushed for the summit. This mode of warfare--this dashing at once +in the very face of their fort--was so novel and incomprehensible +to our enemies, that they fled, panic-struck, into the jungle; and +it was with the greatest difficulty that our leading men could get +even a snap-shot at the rascals as they went. + +That evening the country was illuminated for miles by the burning +of the capital, Paddi, and adjacent villages; at which work, and +plundering, our native followers were most expert. + +At Paddi the river branches off to the right and left; and it was on +the tongue of land formed by them that the forts were very cleverly +placed. We took all their guns, and burned the stockades level with +the ground. + +The banks of the river were here so confined, that a man might with +ease throw a spear across; and, as the jungle was close, it was +necessary to keep pretty well on the alert. For the greater part of +the night, the burning of the houses made it as bright as day. In +the evening, Drs. Simpson and Treacher amputated a poor fellow's +arm close to the shoulder, which, in the cramped space of the boat, +was no easy operation. He was one of our best men, and captain of +the forecastle on board the Dido. + +Early on the following morning (12th) our boats, with the exception +of the Jolly Bachelor, now become the hospital, proceeded up the +two branches of the river; almost all the native force remaining to +complete the work of destruction. + +An accident had nearly occurred at this period. A report had reached +us that several large boats--supposed to be a fleet of Sarebus pirates +returning from a cruise--were in the river; and knowing that they could +not well attack and pass our force at Boling without our hearing of +it, I took no further notice of the rumor, intending to go down in +my gig afterward and have a look at them. While we were at breakfast +in the Jolly Bachelor, a loud chattering of many voices was heard, +attended by a great beating of tom-toms; and suddenly a large prahu, +crowded with savages, came sweeping round the bend of the river, +rapidly nearing us with a strong flood-tide. As she advanced, others +hove in sight. In a moment pots and spoons were thrown down, arms +seized, and the brass six-pounder, loaded with grape and canister, +was on the point of being fired, when Williamson, the only person who +understood their character, made us aware that they were a friendly +tribe of Dyaks, from the River Linga, coming to our assistance, +or, more likely, coming to seek for plunder and the heads of their +enemies, with whom they had for many years been at war. Those in +the leading boat had, however, a narrow escape. I had already given +the order to fire; but luckily the priming had been blown off from +the six-pounder. Had it not been so, fifty at least out of the first +hundred would have been sent to their long homes. They were between +eight and nine hundred strong. The scene to me was indeed curious +and exciting: for the wild appearance of these fellows exceeded any +thing I had yet witnessed. Their war-dresses--each decorating himself +according to his own peculiar fancy, in a costume the most likely +at once to adorn the wearer and strike terror into the enemy--made +a remarkable show. Each had a shield and a handful of spears; about +one in ten was furnished with some sort of firearm, which was of more +danger to himself or his neighbor than to any one else. They wore +short padded jackets, capable of resisting the point of a wooden spear. + +The first thing necessary was to supply each with a strip of white +calico, to be worn in the head-dress as a distinguishing mark, to +prevent our people knocking them over if met by accident while prowling +about the jungle. We also established a watchword, "Datu," which many +of them, who had great dread of the white men, never ceased to call +out. Sheriff Jaffer, in command of their force, had promised to join +us from the beginning; but as they did not make their appearance off +the mouth of the river, we thought no more of them. It was necessary +to dispatch messengers up the rivers to inform our boats of this +re-enforcement, as in all probability an attack would have been made +immediately on the appearing in sight of so formidable a force. + +At 10 A.M. our boats returned, having gone up the right-hand branch +as far as it was practicable. That to the left having been obstructed +by trees felled across the stream, was considered, from the trouble +taken to prevent our progress, to be the branch up which the enemy +had retreated, and not being provisioned for more than the day, +they came back, and started again in the afternoon with the first +of the flood-tide. Of this party Lieutenant Horton took charge, +accompanied by Mr. Brooke. It was a small, but an effective, and +determined, and well-appointed little body, not likely to be deterred +by difficulties. A small native force of about forty men accompanied +them, making, with our own, between eighty and ninety people. The +forts having been destroyed, no further obstacles were expected +to our advance beyond the felling of trees and the vast odds as to +numbers in case of attack, the pirates being reckoned to be about +six thousand Dyaks and five hundred Malays. + +The evening set in with rain and hazy weather. Our native skirmishing +parties were returning to their boats and evening meals; our +advancing party had been absent about an hour and a half, and I had +just commenced a supper in the Jolly Bachelor on ham and poached eggs, +when the sound of the pinnace's twelve-pounder carronade broke through +the stillness of the night. This was responded to by one of those +simultaneous war-yells apparently from every part of the country. My +immediate idea was that our friends had been surrounded. It was +impossible to move so large a boat as the Jolly Bachelor up to their +assistance; nor would it be right to leave our wounded without a +sufficient force for their protection. I immediately jumped into my +gig, taking with me a bugler, whom I placed in the bow, and seeing +our arms in as perfect readiness as the rain would allow us to keep +them in, I proceeded to join the combatants. + +Daylight had disappeared, as it does in tropical climates, immediately +after the setting of the sun. The tide had just turned against me; +and as I advanced up the river, the trees hung over many parts, +nearly meeting across; at the same time the occasional firing that +was kept up assured me that the enemy were on the alert, and with all +the advantages of local knowledge and darkness on their side. From +the winding of the stream, too, the yells appeared to come from every +direction, sometimes ahead and sometimes astern. I had pulled, feeling +my way, for nearly two hours, when a sudden and quick discharge of +musketry, well on my left hand, intimated to me that I was approaching +the scene of action; and, at the same time, passing several large +canoes hauled up on the bank, I felt convinced that my anticipation +was right, that our party were surrounded, and that we should have to +fight our way to each other. My plan was to make it appear as if I was +bringing up a strong re-enforcement; and the moment the firing ceased, +I made the bugler strike up "Rory O'More," which was immediately +responded to by three British cheers, and then followed a death-like +stillness--if any thing, more unpleasant than the war-yell--and I +could not help feeling certain that the enemy lay between us. + +The stream now ran rapidly over loose stones. Against the sky, where +the jungle had been cleared, I could distinctly see the outlines of +human beings. I laid my double-barrel across my knees, and we pulled +on. When within shot-range, I hailed, to make certain, and receiving +no answer, after a second time, I fired, keeping the muskets of the +gig's crew ready to repel the first attack in case the enemy did not +decamp. My fire was answered by Lieutenant Horton, "We are here, +sir." At first I was much distressed from the fear that I might +have hurt any one. They had not heard me hail, owing, I suppose, +to the noise of the water rushing over the stones; and they had not +hailed me, thinking that I must of course know that it was them, and +the enemy being in the jungle all round, they did not like to attract +attention to where they were. I found they had taken up a very clever +position. The running stream had washed the ground away on the right +bank, leaving a sort of little, deep bay, just big enough to hold +the boats, from which the bank rose quite perpendicularly. On the +top of this bank the jungle had been cleared for about thirty yards, +and on this Lieutenant Gunnel, with seven royal marines, was posted +as a rear-guard. This was an important position, and one of danger, +as the jungle itself was alive with the enemy; and although the spears +were hurled from it continually during the night, no shot was thrown +away unless the figure of the pirate could be distinctly seen. + +It continued to rain: the men wore their great-costs for the purpose of +keeping their pieces dry; and several times, during that long night, +I observed the muskets of these steady and good men brought to the +shoulder and again lowered without firing, as that part of the jungle +whence a spear had been hurled to within a few feet of where they stood +did not show a distinct form of any thing living. The hours were little +less interesting for those who, in the boats below, stood facing the +opposite bank of the river with their arms in their hands. It appears +that the enemy had come down in great force to attack the boats from +that side; and as the river was there very shallow, and the bottom +hard, they could, by wading not more than knee-deep, have approached +to within five or six yards of them; but in the first attack they had +lost a great many men, and it is supposed that their repeated advances +throughout the night were, more to recover their dead and wounded than +to make any fresh attack on our compact little force, whose deadly aim +and rapid firing must have astonished them, and who certainly were, +one and all, prepared to sell their lives as dearly as possible. + +To the left of our position, and about 200 yards up the river, large +trees were being felled during the night; and by the torch-lights +showing the spot, the officer of the boat, Mr. Partridge, kept up +a very fair ball-practice with the pinnace's gun. Toward morning a +shot fell apparently just where they were at work; and that being +accompanied by what we afterward ascertained caused more horror and +consternation among the enemy than any thing else, a common signal +sky-rocket, made them resign the ground entirely to us. The last shot, +too, that was fired from the pinnace had killed three men. + +As daylight broke I found that most of our party had squatted down +with their guns between their knees, and, being completely exhausted, +had fallen asleep in spite of the rain. Few will ever forget that +night. There were two natives and one marine only of our party badly +wounded; the latter was struck by a rifle shot, which entered his +chest and lodged in his shoulder; and this poor fellow, a gallant +young officer named Jenkins, already distinguished in the Chinese +war, volunteered to convey in the second gig, with four boys only, +down to the Jolly Bachelor. He performed this duty, and was again up +with the party before daylight. + +At daylight we found the pirates collecting in some force above us; and +several shots were fired, as if to try the range of their rifles; but +they took good care not to come within reach of our muskets. Shortly +after, the tide beginning to rise, we made preparations for ascending +further up the river. This was more than they bargained for, as we +were close to where they had removed their families, with such little +valuables as they could collect, when we so unexpectedly carried their +forts and took possession of their town; and we were not sorry on +observing, at that moment, a flag of truce advance from their party +down the stream, and halt half way to our position. We immediately +sent an unarmed Malay to meet them; and after a little talk, they +came to our boats. The message was, that they were ready to abide by +any terms we might dictate. I promised that hostilities should cease +for two hours; but told them we could treat only with the chiefs, +whose persons should be protected, and I invited them to a conference +at 1 P.M. + +In the mean while, having first sent notice by the messengers, I +took advantage of the time, and ascended in my gig, without any great +difficulty, above the obstruction they had been so busy throwing across +the river during the night. The news that hostilities were to cease +was not long in being communicated; and, by the time I had got up, +the greatest confidence appeared to be established. Having pulled up +into shoal water, and where the river widened, the banks were soon +covered with natives; and some seventy or eighty immediately laid +aside their spears and walked off to my boat, the whole of which, +together with its crew, they examined with the greatest curiosity. + +In the heat of the day we indulged in a most refreshing bath under +the shade of overhanging trees, the bottom of the river being fine +sand and pebbles worn smooth by the running stream. + +At the appointed hour the chiefs made their appearance, dressed in +their best, but looking haggard and dejected. Mr. Brooke, the "Tuan +Besar," or great man, officiated as spokesman. + +He fully explained that our invasion of their country, and destruction +of their forts and town, was not for the purposes of pillage or gain +to ourselves, but as a punishment for their repeated and aggravated +acts of piracy; that they had been fully warned, for two years before, +that the British nation would no longer allow the native trade between +the adjacent islands and Singapore to be cut off and plundered, +and the crews of the vessels cruelly put to death, as they had been. + +They were very humble and submissive; admitted that their lives were +forfeited, and if we said they were to die, they were prepared; +although, they explained, they were equally willing to live. They +promised to refrain forever from piracy, and offered hostages for +their good behavior. + +Mr. Brooke then explained how much more advantageous trade would be +than piracy, and invited them to a further conference at Sarawak, +where they might witness all the blessings resulting from the line +of conduct he had advised them to follow. If, on the other hand, +we heard of a single act of piracy being committed by them, their +country should be again invaded and occupied; and their enemies, +the whole tribe of Linga Dyaks, let loose upon them, until they were +rooted out and utterly destroyed. + +To other questions they replied, that although the chief held +communication, and was in the habit of cruising with the people +of the other settlements of Pakoo and Rembas, still they could not +hold themselves responsible for their good conduct; and as both held +strongly fortified positions (of course supposed by themselves to be +impregnable), they did not think that they would abstain altogether +from piracy unless we visited and inflicted a similar chastisement +to that they themselves had suffered. They also stated that, although +they never would again submit to the orders of the great and powerful +chiefs, Seriffs Sahib and Muller, still they could not join in any +expedition against them or their old allies, their blood-thirsty and +formidable neighbors in the Sakarran river. + +On our return to the still smoking ruins of the once picturesque town +of Paddi, we found that Seriff Jaffer, with his 800 warriors, had +not been idle. The country round had been laid waste. All had been +desolated, together with their extensive winter-stores of rice. It +was a melancholy sight; and, for a moment, I forgot the horrid acts +of piracy and cruel murders of these people, and my heart relented +at what I had done--it was but for a few minutes. + +Collecting our forces, we dropped leisurely down the river, but not +without a parting yell of triumph from our Dyak force--a yell that +must have made the hearts of those quail whose wives and children +lay concealed in the jungle near to where we had held our conference. + +We arrived at Boling soon after midnight, where we found the tope, +with our provision, quite safe. Several shots had been fired at her +the night before; and large parties had repeatedly come down to the +banks, and endeavored to throw spears on board. + +At daylight (Wednesday, 14th) we lost no time in completing to four +days' provisions, and starting, with the flood-tide, for Pakoo. It +took us until late in the evening before we appeared in sight of two +newly-built stockades, from which the pirates fled, panic-struck, +without firing a shot, on our first discharge. We had evidently come +on them before they were prepared, as we found some of the guns in +the forts with the slings still on by which they had been carried. + +The positions of the forts here, as at Paddi, were selected with great +judgment; and had their guns been properly served, it would have been +sharp work for boats. The same work of destruction was carried on; +but the town was larger than at Paddi, and night setting in, the +conflagration had a grand effect. + +Although the greater part of their valuables had been removed, the +place was alive with goats and poultry, the catching of which afforded +great sport for our men. Some of the Singe Dyaks succeeded in taking +the heads of a few pirates, who probably were killed or wounded in +the forts on our first discharge. I saw one body afterward without its +head, in which each passing Dyak had thought proper to stick a spear, +so that it had all the appearance of a huge porcupine. + +The operation of extracting the brains from the lower part of the +skull, with a bit of bamboo shaped like a spoon, preparatory to +preserving, is not a pleasing one. The head is then dried, with the +flesh and hair on it, suspended over a slow fire, during which process +the chiefs and elders of the tribe perform a sort of war-dance. + +Soon after daylight the following morning (Thursday, 15th) the chiefs +of the tribe came down with a flag of truce, when much the same sort +of conference took place as at Paddi. They were equally submissive, +offering their own lives, but begging those of their wives and children +might be spared. After promising to accede to all we desired, they +agreed to attend the conference about to assemble at Sarawak, where +the only terms on which they could expect lasting peace and mutual +good understanding would be fully explained and discussed. + +Like their friends at Paddi, they were of opinion that their +neighbors at Rembas would not abstain from piracy until they had +received convincing proof that the power existed which was capable +and determined to put down piracy. All these misguided people appeared +not only to listen to reason, but to be open to conviction; and I am +far from imputing to them that treachery so commonly attributed to +all classes of Malays. The higher grades, I admit, are cunning and +deceitful; but subsequent events during the last two years have proved +the truth and honesty of the intentions of these people. They have +strictly adhered to their promises; and have since, although surrounded +by piratical tribes, been carrying on a friendly trade with Sarawak. + +Our next point of attack was Rembas. Although there was a nearer +overland communication between those places, the distance by water was +upward of sixty miles; but the strong tides were of great assistance, +as we could always rest when they were against us. High water was the +only time, however, that suited us for landing, as the fall of tide +left a considerable space of soft mud to wade through before reaching +_terra firma_: this was sufficiently unpleasant to our men, without the +additional trouble of having to load and fire when in that position; +besides, when stuck fast in the mud, you become a much easier object to +be fired at. At Rembas the tide was not up until just before daylight; +and, having no moon to light us, a night attack was not considered +advisable; so that we brought up about a quarter tide below the town, +on the evening of the 16th. As Rembas contained a larger proportion +of Malays (who are always well supplied with firearms) than the other +settlements, though we had not experienced any opposition at Pakoo, +we fully expected they would here make a better stand. + +We advanced early in the morning, and soon came up with a succession +of formidable barriers, more troublesome to cut through than any +we had before encountered. About a mile below the town we landed +700 of the Linga Dyaks on the left bank of the river, who were to +separate into two divisions--commanded by Seriff Jaffer and his son, +a remarkably fine and spirited youth--and creep stealthily through +the jungle, for which the country was well adapted, so as to get +to the rear of the town and forts, and make a simultaneous attack +on the first shot being fired from our boats. The last barrier (and +there were four of them) was placed just within point-blank range; +the gig being a light boat, I managed to haul her over, close to the +bank, and advanced so as to be both out of sight and out of range; +and just as our first boat came up with the barrier, I pushed out +from under the bank, and opened a fire of musketry on the stockade, +which was full of men. This, with the war-yell that followed from +their rear (both unexpected), together with their fears having been +already worked upon by the destruction of Paddi and defeat of Pakoo, +threw them into the greatest confusion. They fled in all directions, +without provoking us by firing a shot, although we found the guns +loaded. Seriff Jaffer and his Dyaks were gratified by having all +the fighting to themselves, and by some very pretty hand-to-hand +encounters. We were much amused, afterward, by their own account of +the heroic deeds they had performed. Lives were lost on both sides, +and heads taken. This Rembas was by far the largest and strongest place +we had assaulted. We found some very large war-boats, both fitted and +building; one measured ninety-two feet in length, with fourteen beam; +and in addition to the usual good supply of fruit, goats, and poultry, +our men were gratified by finding several bullocks. The plunder was +great; and although, with the exception of the guns, of no value to +us, it was very much so to our native followers. + +After we had destroyed every thing, we received a flag of truce, +when similar explanations and promises were made as at Paddi and +Pakoo; and here ended for the present, the warlike part of our +expedition. The punishment we had inflicted was severe, but not +more than the crime of their horrid piracies deserved. A few heads +were brought away by our Dyak followers, as trophies; but there was +no unnecessary sacrifice of life, and I do not believe there was +a woman or child hurt. The destruction of these places astonished +the whole country beyond description. In addition to the distance +and difficulty of access to their strongly-fortified positions, they +looked for protection from the bore that usually ran up the Sarebus, +and which they imagined none but their own boats could manage. As the +different Malay chiefs heard that, in ten days, a handful of white men +had totally destroyed their strongholds, they shook their heads, and +exclaimed, "God is great!" and the Dyaks declared that the Tuan Besar +(Mr. Brooke) had charmed the river to quiet the bore, [17] and that +the whites were invulnerable. Although this expedition would have a +great moral effect on all the more respectable and thinking natives, +inasmuch as the inhabitants of the places destroyed were looked upon, +from the large proportion of Malays, as more civilized than their +formidable and savage neighbors, the Dyaks inhabiting the Sakarran +river; still, it was not to be supposed, when the settlements of Paddi, +Pakoo, and Rembas could not be responsible for the good behavior of +one another, that it was probable the severe lesson taught them would +have any great effect on the Sakarrans. + +On regaining the tope at Boling, we found our assistant surgeon, +Dr. Simpson, who had been left in charge of the sick, laid up with +fever and ague. For conveniency's sake, the wounded men had been +removed to a large native boat; and while the doctor was passing +along the edge of the boat, his foot slipped, he fell overboard, +and not being much of a swimmer, and a strong tide running, he was +a good while in the water, though a native went after him. He had, +for some time past, been in bad health; but the cold he then caught +brought on inflammation in the lungs, under the effects of which he +sank soon after our return to Singapore. Poor Simpson! he was not +only clever in his profession, but endeared to us all by his kind +and gentle manner, so grateful to the sick. There were few of us, +while in China, who had not come under his hands, and experienced +his tender, soothing, and unremitting attention. + +We now gave our native followers permission to depart to their +respective homes, which they did loaded with _plunder_, usually, in +India, called _loot_; ourselves getting under weigh to rejoin the Dido +off the Island of Burong, and from thence we proceeded to the mouth +of the Morotaba, where, leaving the ship, Mr. Brooke and I went in +my boat, with two others in attendance, to take leave of the rajah, +prior to my return to Singapore and China. Although the greater part +of the native boats attached to the expedition had already arrived at +Sarawak, the rajah had sent them back, some miles down the river, with +as many others as he could collect, gorgeously dressed out with flags, +to meet Mr. Brooke and myself, the heroes of the grandest expedition +that had ever been known in the annals of Malayan history. Our +approach to the grand city was, to them, most triumphant, although +to us a nuisance. From the moment we entered the last reach, the +saluting from every gun in the capital that could be fired without +bursting was incessant; and as we neared the royal residence, the +yells, meant for cheers, and the beating of gongs, intended to be a +sort of "See, the conquering hero comes!" were quite deafening. The +most minute particulars of our deeds, of course greatly exaggerated, +had been detailed, long before our arrival, by the native chiefs, who +were eye-witnesses; and when we were seated in the rajah's presence, +the royal countenance relaxed into a smile of real pleasure as he +turned his wondering eyes from Mr. Brooke to myself and back again. I +suppose he thought a great deal of us, as he said little or nothing; +and, as we were rather hungry after our pull, we were very glad to +get away once more to Mr. Brooke's hospitable board, to which we did +ample justice. + +My stay at Sarawak was but of short duration, as, before I had time to +carry out the arrangements I had made to put down this horrid traffic, +the Dido was, owing to some changes in the distribution of the fleet, +recalled to China. + +As the tide would not suit for my return to the Dido until two +o'clock the following morning, we sat up until that hour, when, +with mutual regret, we parted. I had just seen enough of Borneo and +my enterprising friend, Mr. Brooke, to feel the deepest interest in +both. No description of mine can in any way give my readers a proper +idea of the character of the man I had just then left; and however +interesting his journal may appear in the reading, it is only by being +in his company, and by hearing him advocate the cause of the persecuted +inland natives, and listening to his vivid and fair description of +the beautiful country he has adopted, that one can be made to enter +fully into and feel what I would fain describe, but can not. + +We parted; and I did not then expect to be able so soon to return +and finish what I had intended, viz., the complete destruction of +the strongholds belonging to the worst among the pirate hordes, so +long the terror of the coast, either by capturing or driving from +the country the piratical Seriffs Sahib and Muller, by whose evil +influence they had been chiefly kept up. From all that I had seen, +the whole country appeared to be a large garden, with a rich and +varied soil, capable of producing anything. The natives, especially +the mountain Dyaks, are industrious, willing, inoffensive, although +a persecuted race; and the only things wanted to make the country +the most productive and happiest in the world were, the suppression +of piracy, good government, and opening a trade with the interior, +which could not fail of success. All these I saw partially begun; +and I felt assured that with the assistance of a vessel of war, and +the countenance only of the government, Mr. Brooke would, although +slowly, yet surely, bring about their happy consummation. + + + + + +CHAPTER XVIII. + + Captain Keppel sails for China.--Calcutta.--The Dido ordered to + Borneo again.--Arrival at Sarawak.--Effect of her presence at + Sarawak.--Great improvements visible.--Atrocities of the Sakarran + pirates.--Mr. Brooke's letter.--Captain Sir E. Belcher's previous + visit to Sarawak in the Samarang.--Coal found.--Second letter + from the Rajah Muda Hassim.--Expedition against the Sakarran + pirates.--Patusen destroyed.--Macota remembered, and his retreat + burnt.--Further fighting, and advance.--Ludicrous midnight alarm. + + +_June 24th._--I reached the Dido at 8 o'clock, and immediately got +under weigh. After remaining twenty-four hours to water at Singapore, +I sailed for Hong Kong. My time, during the year that I was absent +from Borneo, if not quite so usefully, was not unpleasantly passed. We +lay a few months in the Canton river. In addition to having good +opportunities of seeing the natives of China in their domestic state, +I witnessed one of those most curious and extraordinary sights that +occasionally occur during the winter months in the city of Canton, +namely, a fire. The one I saw was about the most extensive that had +ever been experienced; and the Dido's crew had the gratification of +being of some assistance in the protection of British property. From +China the Dido accompanied the commander-in-chief, in the Cornwallis, +to the Spanish colony at Manilla, which is a place that few forget; +and a short description of our visit there has been given in an +interesting little work, written by Captain Cunynghame. On my return +to Hong Kong, I had the gratification of receiving on board the Dido, +Major-General Lord Saltoun and his staff, consisting of two old and +esteemed friends of mine, Captain, now Major Arthur Cunynghame, +his lordship's aid-de-camp, and Major Grant, of the 9th Lancers, +who had been adjutant-general to the forces. A more agreeable cruise +at sea I never experienced. We called at the island of Pinang, in the +Malacca straits, on our way, where we again fell in with the admiral; +and I was most agreeably surprised at meeting my friend Mr. Brooke, +who had come on to Singapore to meet Sir William Parker, and had +followed him up in the Wanderer, commanded by my friend Captain +Henry Seymour,--that vessel, in company with the Harlequin, Captain +the Hon. George Hastings, and the H. C. steamer Diana, having just +returned from an expedition to Acheen, whither they had been dispatched +by the commander-in-chief, to inquire into and demand redress for an +act of piracy, committed on an English merchant-vessel. An account +of the expedition has already been published. The pirates had made a +desperate resistance, and several lives were lost, and many severely +wounded on our side; among the latter was my friend Mr. Brooke (in the +head and arm), for which I took the liberty of giving him a lecture +on his rashness, he having quite sufficient ground for fighting over +in his newly-adopted country. He was much pleased at the admiral's +having promised that the Dido should return again to the Straits +station as soon as she had completed her voyage to Calcutta. + +On the 11th March, 1844, we anchored off the grand City of Palaces, +and well does it merit the name. We could not have, timed our +visit better. The governor-general, the Earl of Ellenborough, +was being _feted_ on his return from the frontiers, which _fetes_ +were continued on the arrival, a few days after ourselves, of the +Cornwallis at Kedgeree, when the flag of Sir William Parker was shifted +to the Dido. The admiral experienced the same style of hospitable +entertainment that had previously been given to General Sir Hugh Gough +on his return from the Chinese expedition. At Calcutta I was kindly +invited by the "Tent Club," and introduced to that noble and most +exciting of all field-sports, "Hog-hunting in India;" but with which +the pleasures of the day did not cease. The subsequent convivial +meeting was a thing not easily to be forgotten. Although under a +tent pitched by the edge of the jungle, thirty miles from the city, +none of the comforts of the house were wanting; there were the punkah +and the hookah, those luxuries of the East, to say nothing of heaps +of ice from the far West, which aided considerably the consumption of +champagne and claret; and to better all these good things, every man +brought with him the will and the power to please and to be pleased. + +A few days before my departure from Calcutta, the governor-general +finding it necessary to send treasure to China, the admiral desired +me to receive it on board. Although a welcome cargo, it delayed for a +couple of months my return to Borneo. I found Mr. Brooke awaiting my +arrival at Singapore; but as I could not then receive him on board, +Captain Hastings took him over to Sarawak in the Harlequin. + +On arriving at Hong Kong, Rear-Admiral Sir T. Cochrane appointed +Mr. Frederick Wade as first lieutenant, Lieutenant Wilmot Horton having +been promoted to the rank of commander for his gallant defence when +the Dido's boats were attacked by the very superior force of pirates +off the island of Sirhassan. + +Having landed the treasure at Hong Kong, and completed stores and +provisions, I sailed from Macao on the 21st June, and working down +against the monsoon, arrived at Singapore on the 18th July. I here +found letters from Mr. Brooke, stating that the Sakarrans had been +out in great force; and although he was not aware of any danger to +himself or his settlement, still, by coming over quickly, I might +have a fair chance of catching and crushing them in the very act +of piracy. I lost no time in preparing for another expedition. The +government at Calcutta had become fully sensible of the necessity +of protecting the native trade to Singapore, and had sent down the +Phlegethon steamer, of light draught of water, and better adapted to +service in the straits or rivers than any of her majesty's larger +vessels. She was, moreover, fitted in every way for the peculiar +service on which she was to be employed, with a zealous, experienced, +and active commander, F. Scott, [18] as well as a fine enterprising +set of young officers. I lost no time in making application for her +to the resident counselor, Mr. Church (in the absence of Colonel +Butterworth, the Governor of the Straits), who immediately placed +her at my disposal; and with such means, I was anxious to commence +operations as speedily as possible, leaving the Vixen and Wolverine +to perform the other duties of the station. + +_Thursday, 25th July._--Sailed from Singapore, having dispatched +the Phlegethon the previous night, with orders to rendezvous at the +entrance to the Morotaba, which we entered in the evening of the 29th; +and anchoring the ship inside the river, I went on in the steamer to +within four miles of Sarawak, when I pulled up in my gig, accompanied +by the Dido's pinnace, that I might, by firing her carronade as a +signal, be enabled to give notice of our approach, not feeling myself +quite secure from a shot from the forts, which were very judiciously +placed so as to command the last reach approaching the town, as I +knew that before Mr. Brooke's return they had been put in a state +of defence, and a regular watch kept, by self-appointed officers, +sleeping on their arms. I, however, got up without accident, in time +to receive a hearty welcome, about daylight. + +Not expecting to revisit Borneo during the period that the ship had to +run before completing her usual time of commission, it was gratifying +for me to read in my friend's journal, alluding to my former visit; +"I came myself in the Dido; and I may say that her appearance was +the consummation of my enterprise." "The natives saw directly that +there was a force to protect and to punish; and most of the chiefs, +conscious of their evil ways, trembled; Muda Hassim was gratified, +and felt that this power would exalt his authority both in Borneo and +along the coast, and he was not slow in magnifying the force of the +Dido. The state in which Captain Keppel and his officers visited the +rajah all heightened the effect; and the marines and the band excited +the admiration and the fears of the natives. I felt the rajah's hand +tremble at the first interview; and not all the well-known command +of countenance, of which the natives are masters, could conceal +his emotion." + +Gentle reader, excuse my vanity if I continue a little further with +my friend's journal, although it gets rather personal: + +"I believe the first emotion was anything but pleasurable; but Captain +Keppel's conciliatory and kind manner soon removed any feeling of +fear; and was all along of the greatest use to me in our subsequent +doings. The first qualification, in dealing with a Malay, is a kind +and gentle manner; for their habitual politeness is such that they +are hurt by the ordinary _brusquerie_ of the European. + +"I shall not go over the chase of the three boats of the Balagnini +pirates, or the attack made on the Dido's boats by the Sirhassan, +people, except to remark, that in the latter case, I am sure Lieutenant +Horton acted rightly in sparing their lives and property; for, with +these occasional pirates, a severe lesson, followed by that degree of +conciliation and pardon which shall best insure a correction of their +vices, is far wiser and preferable to a course of undistinguishing +severity." + +I found Sarawak much altered for the better, and the population +considerably increased. Mr. Brooke had established himself in a +new house built on a beautiful and elevated mound, from which the +intriguing Macota had just been ejected on my first visit. Neat and +pretty-looking little Swiss cottages had sprung up on all the most +picturesque spots, which gave it quite a European look. He had also +made an agreeable addition to his English society; and a magazine +of English merchandise had been opened to trade with the natives, +together with many other improvements. + +On the other hand, Seriff Sahib, not deterred, as I had anticipated +he would be, by the example I made of his neighbors in the Sarebus, +had taken measures for withdrawing from the adjoining river of Sadong, +where he had been living in a comparatively unguarded state, and +had, during the last nine months, been making busy preparations for +fortifying himself at a place called Patusen, up the Batang Lupar. He +had lately got things in a forward state, had called out a large +fleet of Sakarrans as an escort; and being puffed up with his own +power and importance, had thought proper to prolong the performance +of his voyage, of about 100 miles, from his residence in Sadong +to his fortified position at Patusen, for three weeks or a month, +during which time he had dispatched small parties of his fleet, which +consisted of upward of 150 war-prahus, on piratical excursions. These +robbers had, in addition to their piracies on the high seas, scoured +the coast in all directions, and committed the greatest atrocities, +attended with some of the most cruel murders. One sample will be +sufficient to show their brutal character:--A detachment of three of +their boats, having obtained information that a poor Dyak family, +belonging to a tribe in Mr. Brooke's territory, had come down from +their mountain to cultivate a small portion of land nearer the coast, +and, for their better security, had made their dwelling in the upper +branches of a large tree on the outskirts of the forest, determined to +destroy them. Their little children were playing in the jungle when +the pirates were seen approaching the tree with their diabolical +war-yells. As the poor man did not descend immediately on being +summoned, he was shot; when other ruffians, to save their ammunition, +mounted the tree, murdered the woman, and returned in triumph to their +boats with the heads of both victims. The children, who had witnessed +this from their hiding-places, succeeded in getting to Sarawak. + +Taking advantage of Mr. Brooke's unusually long absence, Sarawak itself +was threatened, and open defiance hurled at any European force that +should dare approach Patusen. Reports, too, had been industriously +spread that Mr. Brooke never intended to return; and when he did +get back to his home, he found the town guarded and watched like a +besieged city. With his usual nerve and decision he withdrew his men +from the forts, and sent to Seriff Sahib to inform him that he should +suffer for his temerity. + +A letter I received from him is so characteristic, and gives so lively +a description of these events, that I am tempted to print it. + + + + + "Sarawak, 26th May, 1844. + + "My Dear Keppel, + + + "It is useless applying a spur to a willing horse; so I will only + tell you that there is plenty to do here, and the sooner you can + come the better for all of us, especially your poor friends the + Dyaks. Bring with you as much force as you can to attack Sakarran. + + "The case stands thus:--Seriff Sahib, quite frightened at Sadong + since last year, enraged likewise at his loss of power and his + incapability of doing mischief, collected all the Sakarran Dyaks, + and was joined by many of the Dyaks of Sarebus and some Balows. He + likewise had a good many Malays, and bullied every one in his + vicinity. This force met at the entrance of the Sadong Delta, and + committed depredations. They were not less than 200 Dyak boats, + and some 15 or 20 armed Malay prahus, beside others. Just as + they were collected, the Harlequin appeared off the coast, and + had the Dido been with us, we might have _had them all_; but the + opportunity will never again occur. Seriff Sahib, with this force, + has started to-day for Sakarran, and I was not strong enough with + my eight native boats to attack him. It is really greatly to be + lamented, because we should most completely have crushed the head + of the snake. We must, however, make the best of it. It is his + intention, on his arrival at Sakarran, to fortify and wait for + our attack, and in the mean time to send out his Dyaks along the + coast and inland to such places as they dare venture to attack. + + "Come then, my dear Keppel, for there is plenty to do for all + hands. I have ordered a gun-boat from Mr. Goldie, to make our + force stronger; and had I possessed such a one the day before + yesterday, I would have pulled away for the Sadong to-day. + + "My regards to all. I still propose Pepper-Pot Hall for your + residence. I only wish I felt _quite sure_ that Fortune had it in + store that you would be here on your return from China. That dame, + however, seems to delight in playing me slippery tricks just at + present; and never was the time and tide so missed before, which + would have led to fortune, as the other day. All the queen's + ships and all the queen's men could not bring such a chance + together again. + + + + "Ever, my dear Keppel, your sincere friend, + + + "J. Brooke. + "Captain the Hon. Henry Keppel." + + + + +No one could have been more disappointed or have regretted more than +my gallant friend Captain Hastings, that his orders did not admit of +any delay, or of his attacking that redoubtable pirate Seriff Sahib, +especially as he had a small score to settle with that kind of gentry, +having had his first lieutenant, H. Chads, severely wounded in two +places, and several men killed, in the affair at Acheen Head. It was, +however, all for the best, as the few boats that the Harlequin could +have sent would have stood but a poor chance against upward of 200 +war-prahus, all fitted and prepared for fight. + +On the 1st of August, with the Dido and Phlegethon at anchor off +Sarawak, the warlike preparations were going on rapidly. I had saluted +and paid my visit to Muda Hassim; he was delighted to see me again, +and we went through the form of holding several conferences of war +in his divan. He appears to be a good well-meaning man, well inclined +toward the English, moderately honest, and, if roused, I daresay not +without animal courage; and altogether, with the assistance of his +clever younger brother, Budrudeen, a very fit person to govern that +part of Borneo of which he is rajah. + +During my absence, Sarawak had been visited by H.M.S. Samarang, +Captain Sir Edward Belcher, who had received directions to call on and +communicate with Mr. Brooke. In dropping down the river the Samarang +grounded on a long shelf of rocks, at the top of high water, and with +the ebb-tide rolled over, filling with the succeeding flood. She was +nearly a fortnight in this position, but was ultimately saved by the +skill and almost unparalleled perseverance (aided by such assistance of +men and spars as Mr. Brooke could afford) of her captain, officers, +and crew--a feat that must have given the natives a good idea of +what British seamen are capable of. This accident delayed for a +short time a visit that was afterward made by Sir Edward Belcher, +accompanied by Mr. Brooke, to Borneo Proper. A hurried inspection of +the capabilities of that part of the coast took place; and the fact +of there being coal on the island was ascertained. + +I received a second letter from Muda Hassim, of which the following +is a translation: + + + "This comes from Pangeran Muda Hassim, Rajah of Borneo, to our + friend Captain Keppel, in command of her Britannic Majesty's ship. + + +(After the usual compliments): + + + "We beg to let our friend Captain Keppel know, that the pirates + of Sakarran, whom we mentioned last year, still continue their + piracies by sea and land; and that many Malays, under Seriff Sahib, + who have been accustomed to send or to accompany the pirates + and to share in their spoils, have gone to the Sakarran river, + with a resolve of defending themselves rather than accede to our + wishes that they should abandon piracy. + + "Last year Captain Belcher told the sultan and myself, that it + would be pleasing to the Queen of England that we should repress + piracy; and we signed an agreement, at his request, in which we + promised to do so; and we tell our friend of the piracies and evil + actions of the Sakarran people, who have, for many years past, + done much mischief to trade, and make it dangerous for boats to + sail along the coast; and this year many prahus, which wanted + to sail to Singapore, have been afraid. We inform our friend + Captain Keppel of this, as we desire to end all the piracy, + and to perform our agreement with the Queen of England." + + +_Monday, 5th August, 1844_, being the morning fixed for the departure +of our expedition against the Sakarran pirates, the Phlegethon steamer +weighed at 8 o'clock, and proceeded down the river to await at the +mouth the collection of our force. Among those who accompanied us from +Sarawak was the Pangeran Budrudeen, the intelligent brother of the +rajah already noticed. This was a great and unusual event in the royal +family; and the departure from the rajah's wharf, which I viewed from +Mr. Brooke's house, on the opposite bank of the river, was intended +to be very imposing. The barge of state was decked out with banners +and canopies; all the chiefs attended, with the Arab priest Mudlana +at their head, and the barge pushed off amid the firing of cannon, +and a general screech, invoking the blessing of Mahomet. + +Having seen the last boat off, Mr. Brooke and myself took our departure +in the gig, when another and last farewell salute was fired from the +rajah's wharf. + +Three hours brought us to the steamer, anchored off the fishing huts +at the mouth of the river. Here we heard that a small boat from +the enemy's country had, under the pretence of trading, just been +in to spy into our force, but decamped again on the appearance of +the steamer. We now all got fairly away together, the smaller boats +keeping near the shoals in shore, while the steamer was obliged to make +an offing some miles from the coast. From the masthead we distinctly +made out the small boat that had left the mouth of the river before, +both pulling and sailing in the direction of the Batang Lupar, up which +the Sakarran country lies; and as it was desirable that the pirates +should not get information of our approach, at dusk, being well in +advance, and our auxiliary force following, I dispatched Mr. Brooke's +Singapore sampan and one of the Dido's cutters in chase. At half-past +nine we anchored in the stream within the entrance. + +We were fortunate at Sarawak in picking up two excellent and +intelligent pilots, who had long known the whole river, and had +themselves been several times forced to serve in the boats while on +their piratical excursions. + +_Tuesday 6th._--With the flood-tide arrived all the well appointed +and imposing little fleet, and with them the cutter and sampan with +two out of the three men belonging to the boat of which they had +been in chase; the third having been speared by Seboo, on showing a +strong inclination to run a-muck in his own boat, _i. e._ to sell his +life as dearly as he could. From these men we obtained information +that Seriff Sahib was fully prepared for defence--that his harem had +been removed--and that he would fight to the last. We also learned +that Macota, better known among us by the name of the "Serpent," and +often mentioned in Mr. Brooke's journal, was the principal adviser, +in whose house the councils of war were generally held. + +We anchored, in the afternoon, off the mouth of the river Linga; +and while there we dispatched a messenger to Seriff Jaffer to +caution him against giving any countenance or support to either of +the Seriffs Sahib and Muller, on whose punishment and destruction we +were determined. + +The Batang Lupar, as far as this, is a magnificent river, from three to +four miles wide, and, in most parts, from five to seven fathoms water. + +_Wednesday, 7th._--We weighed at daylight, but were obliged to anchor +again before appearing in sight of Patusen, until the tide should +rise sufficiently to enable us to pass a long flat shoal, over which, +during the spring-tides, a bore rushes with frightful velocity. + +We now collected our boats, and made our arrangements as well as +we could, for attacking a place we had not yet seen. We had now a +little more difficulty in keeping our native force back, as many of +those who had accompanied the expedition last year had gained so much +confidence that the desire of plunder exceeded the feeling of fear. + +After weighing at 11, with a strong tide sweeping us up, we were not +many minutes in coming in sight of the fortifications of Patusen; and +indeed they were not to be despised. There were five of them, two not +quite finished. Getting suddenly into six feet water, we anchored the +steamer; not so formidable a berth, although well within musket-range, +as we might have taken up had I been aware of the increasing depth +of water nearer the town; but we approached so rapidly there was no +time to wait the interpretation of the pilot's information. + +The Dido and Phlegethon's boats were not long in forming +alongside. They were directed to pull in shore, and then attack the +forts in succession; but my gallant first-lieutenant, Wade, who had +the command, was the first to break the line, and pull directly in +the face of the largest fort. His example was followed by the others; +and dividing, each boat pulled for that which appeared to the officer +in command to be the one most likely to make a good fight. The forts +were the first to open fire on both steamer and boats, which was +quickly and smartly returned. It is impossible to imagine a prettier +sight than it was from the top of the Phlegethon's paddle-box. It was +my intention to have fired on the enemy from the steamer, so as to +draw their attention off the boats; but owing to the defective state +of the detonating priming-tubes, the guns from the vessel did not go +off, and the boats had all the glory to themselves. + +They never once checked in their advance; but the moment they touched +the shore the crews rushed up, entering the forts at the embrasures, +while the pirates fled by the rear. + +In this sharp and short affair we had but one man killed, poor John +Ellis, a fine young man, and captain of the main-top in the Dido. He +was cut in two by a cannon-shot while in the act of ramming home a +cartridge in the bow-gun of the Jolly Bachelor. Standing close to +poor Ellis at the fatal moment was a fine promising young middy, +Charles Johnson, a nephew of Mr. Brooke's, who fortunately escaped +unhurt. This, and two others badly wounded, were the only accidents +on our side. + +Our native allies were not long in following our men on shore. The +killed and wounded on the part of the pirates must have been +considerable. Our followers got several heads. There were no fewer +than sixty-four brass guns of different sizes, beside many iron, +found in and about the forts: the latter we spiked and threw into +the river. The town was very extensive; and after being well looted, +made a glorious blaze. + +Our Sarawak followers, both Malays and Dyaks, behaved with the +greatest gallantry, and dashed in under the fire of the forts. In +fact, like their country, anything might be made of them under a good +government; and such is their confidence in Mr. Brooke's judgment, +and their attachment to his person, that he might safely defy in his +own stronghold the attacks of any foreign power. + +After our men had dined, and had a short rest during the heat of the +day, we landed our whole force in two divisions--and a strange but +formidable-looking force they made--to attack a town situated about +two miles up, on the left bank of a small river called the Grahan, +the entrance to which had been guarded by the forts; and immediately +after their capture the tide had fallen too low for our boats to get +up. Facing the stream, too, was a long stockade; so that we determined +on attacking the place in the rear, which, had the pirates only waited +to receive us, would have caused a very interesting skirmish. They, +however, decamped, leaving everything behind them. In this town we +found Seriff Sahib's residence, and, among other things, all his +curious and extensive wardrobe. It was ridiculous to see our Dyaks +dressed out in all the finery and plunder of this noted pirate, whose +very name, a few days previous, would have made them tremble. Goats +and poultry there were in abundance. We likewise found a magazine +in the rear of the seriff's house, containing about two tons of +gunpowder; also a number of small barrels of fine powder, branded +"Dartford," in exactly the same state as it had left the manufactory +in England. It being too troublesome and heavy to convey on board +the steamer, and each of our native followers staggering up to his +knees in mud, under a heavy load of plunder, I had it thrown into the +river. It was evident how determined the chief had been to defend +himself, as, beside the defences already completed, eight others, +in different states of forwardness, were in the course of erection; +and had the attack been delayed a few weeks, Patusen would not have +been carried by boats without considerable loss of life. It was the +key to this extensive river; the resort of the worst of pirates; and +each chief had contributed his share of guns and ammunition toward +its fortification and defence. + +We returned to our boats and evening meal rather fatigued, but much +pleased with our day's work, after ascending nearly seventy miles +from the mouth of the river. The habitations of 5000 pirates had +been burnt to the ground; four strong forts destroyed, together with +several hundred boats; upward of sixty brass cannons captured, and +about a fourth that number of iron spiked and thrown into the river, +beside vast quantities of other arms and ammunition; and the powerful +Seriff Sahib, the great pirate-patron for the last twenty years, ruined +past recovery, and driven to hide his diminished head in the jungle. + +The 8th and 9th were passed in burning and destroying the rest of +the straggling town, and a variety of smaller boats, which were very +numerous. I had also an account to settle with that cunning rascal +Macota, for his aiding and abetting Seriff Sahib in his piracies. He +had located himself very pleasantly near a bend in the river, +about a mile above Seriff Sahib's settlement, and was in the act +of building extensive fortifications, when I had the satisfaction +of anticipating the visit and some of the compliments he would have +conferred on my friend Mr. Brooke at Sarawak. Budrudeen, the rajah's +brother, had likewise been duped by this fellow, and was exceedingly +anxious to insert the blade of a very sharp and beautiful kris into +the body of his late friend. Mr. Brooke, however, was anxious to +save his life, which he afterward had the satisfaction of doing. I +shall never forget the tiger-like look of the young Pangeran when we +landed together in the hopes of surprising the "Serpent" in his den; +but he was too quick for us, having decamped with his followers, +and in so great a hurry as to leave all his valuables behind--among +them a Turkish pipe, some chairs once belonging to the Royalist, and +other presents from Mr. Brooke. Everything belonging to him was burnt +or destroyed save some handsome brass guns. There was one of about +12 cwt. that had been lent by the sultan when Macota was in favor, +and which I returned to Budrudeen for his brother. + +We were here joined by a large number of the Linga Dyaks, the same +force that had joined us the year previous, while up the Sarebus, +but unaccompanied by Seriff Jaffer, of whom it was not quite clear +that he had not been secretly aiding the pirates. I sent them back with +assurances to their chiefs that they should not be molested unless they +gave shelter or protection to either Seriff Sahib or Muller. Seriff +Sahib, with a considerable body of followers, escaped inland in the +direction of the mountains, from the other side of which he would be +able to communicate with the river Linga. Macota was obliged to fly +up the river toward the Undop, on which the village and residence of +Seriff Sahib's brother, Seriff Muller, was situated. + +Having destroyed every boat and sampan, as well as house or hut, on +the 10th, as soon as the tide had risen sufficiently to take us over +the shoals, we weighed, in the steamer, for the country of the Sakarran +Dyaks, having sent the boats on before with the first of the flood. + +About fifteen miles above Patusen is the branch of the river called +the Undop: up this river I dispatched Lieutenant Turnour, with +Mr. Comber, in the Jolly Bachelor, and a division of our native +boats, while we proceeded to where the river again branches off to +the right and left, as on the tongue of land so formed we understood +we should find a strong fort; beside, it was the highest point to +which we could attempt to take the steamer. The branch to the left +is called the Sakarran; that to the right retains the name of Lupar, +inhabited chiefly by Sakarrans. We found the place deserted and the +houses empty. Knowing that these people depended almost entirely +for protection on the strongly fortified position at Patusen, I did +not expect any similar opposition from either Seriff Muller or the +desperate bloodthirsty Sakarrans, and consequently divided my force +into three division--the one, already mentioned, under Lieutenant +Turnour, up the Undop; another, under Mr. D'Aeth, up the Lupar; while +Lieutenant Wade, accompanied by Mr. Brooke, ascended the Sakarran. I +had not calculated on the disturbed and excited state in which I +found the country; and two wounded men having been sent back from +the Undop branch with accounts of the pirates, chiefly Malays, who +were collected in great numbers, both before and in the rear of our +small force; and an attempt having been made to cut off the bearer +of this information, Nakoda Bahar, who had had a very narrow escape, +and had no idea of taking back an answer unless attended by a European +force,--I determined on sending assistance. But I had some difficulty +in mustering another crew from the steamer, and was obliged to leave my +friend Capt. Scott, with only the idlers, rather critically situated. + +I deemed it advisable to re-collect my whole force; and before +proceeding to the punishment of the Sakarrans, to destroy the power +and influence of Seriff Muller, whose town was situated about twenty +miles up, and was said to contain a population of 1500 Malays, +independently of the surrounding Dyak tribes. Having dispatched +boats with directions to Lieutenant Wade and Mr. D'Aeth to join +us in the Undop, I proceeded in my gig to the scene of action, +leaving the steamer to maintain as strict a blockade of the Sakarran +and Lupar branches as, with their reduced force, they were capable +of. On my joining Lieutenant Turnour, I found him just returned from +a very spirited attack which he had made, assisted by Mr. Comber, +on a stockade situated on the summit of a steep hill; Mr. Allen, the +master, being still absent on a similar service, on the opposite side +of the river. The gallant old chief Patingi Ali was likewise absent, +in pursuit of the enemy that had been driven from the stockades, +with whom he had had a hand-to-hand fight, the whole of which--being +on the rising ground--was witnessed by our boats' crews, who could +not resist hailing his return from his gallant achievement with three +hearty British cheers. This had the effect of giving such an impulse +to his courage, that, in a subsequent affair, it unhappily caused a +serious loss among this active and useful branch of our force. + +We had now to unite in cutting our way through a barrier across +the river similar to that described in the attack on the Sarebus, +which having passed, we brought up for the night close to a still more +serious obstacle, being a number of huge trees felled, the branches of +which meeting midway in the river, formed apparently an insurmountable +obstacle to our progress. But "patience and perseverance overcome +all difficulties;" and by night only three of the trees remained to +be cleared away. We were now within a short distance of their town, +so that we could distinctly hear the noise and confusion which our +advance had occasioned. On the right bank, and about fifty yards in +advance of the barrier, stood a farm-house, which we considered it +prudent to occupy for the night, for which advanced post we collected +about fifty volunteers. These consisted of Messrs. Steward, Williamson, +and Comber; a corporal and four marines; my gig's crew; and a medley +of picked men from our Dyak and Malay followers; not forgetting my +usual and trusty attendant John Eager with his bugle, the sounding of +which was to be the signal for the whole force to come to the rescue, +in the event of surprise--not at all improbable from the nature of +our warfare and our proximity to the enemy's town. + +And here a most ludicrous scene occurred during the night. Having +placed our sentries and look-out men, and given "Tiga" as the +watchword, we were, shortly after midnight, suddenly aroused from +sound sleep by a Dyak war-yell, which was immediately responded to by +the whole force. It was pitch dark: the interior of our farmhouse, the +partitions of which had been removed for the convenience of stowage, +was crowded to excess. In a moment every man was on his legs: swords, +spears, and krisses dimly glittered over our heads. It is impossible +to describe the excitement and confusion of the succeeding ten minutes: +one and all believed that we had been surrounded by the enemy, and cut +off from our main party. I had already thrust the muzzle of my pistol +close to the heads of several natives, whom, in the confusion, I had +mistaken for Sakarrans; and as each in his turn called out "Tiga," +I withdrew my weapon to apply it to somebody else; until, at last, +we found that we were all "Tigas." I had prevented Eager, more than +once, from sounding the alarm, which, from the first, he had not +ceased to press me for permission to do. The Dyak yell had, however, +succeeded in throwing the whole force afloat into a similar confusion, +and not hearing the signal, they concluded that they, and not we, +were the party attacked. The real cause we afterward ascertained to +have arisen from the alarm of a Dyak, who dreamt, or imagined, that he +felt a spear thrust upward through the bamboo-flooring of our building, +and immediately gave his diabolical yell. The confusion was ten times +as much as it would have been had the enemy really been there. So +ended the adventures of the night in the wild jungle of Borneo. + + + + + +CHAPTER XIX. + + Seriff Muller's town sacked.--Ascend the river in pursuit + of the enemy.--Gallant exploit of Lieutenant Wade.--His + death and funeral.--Interesting anecdote of him.--Ascend the + Sakarran branch.--Native boats hemmed in by pirates, and their + crews slaughtered to a man.--Karangan destroyed.--Captain + Sir E. Belcher arrives in the Samarang's boats.--Return to + Sarawak.--New expedition against Seriff Sahib and Jaffer.--Macota + captured.--Flight of Seriff Sahib.--Conferences.--Seriff Jaffer + deposed.--Mr. Brooke's speech in the native tongue.--End of the + expedition, and return to Sarawak.--The Dido sails for England. + + +At daylight we were joined by Lieutenant Wade and Mr. Brooke--their +division making a very acceptable increase to our force--and by +8 o'clock the last barrier was cut through between us and Seriff +Muller's devoted town. With the exception of his own house, from which +some eight or nine Malays were endeavoring to move his effects, the +whole place was deserted. They made no fight; and an hour afterward +the town had been plundered and burnt. The only lives lost were a few +unfortunates, who happened to come within range of our musketry in +their exertions to save some of their master's property. A handsome +large boat, belonging to that chief, was the only thing saved; and +this I presented to Budrudeen. After a short delay in catching our +usual supply of goats and poultry, with which the place abounded, we +proceeded up the river in chase of the chief and his people; and here +again we had to encounter the same obstacle presented by the felled +trees thrown across the river--if possible of increased difficulty, +owing to their greater size and the narrow breadth of the stream; +but although delayed we were not to be beaten. We ascertained that +the pirates had retreated to a Dyak village, situated on the summit +of a hill, some twenty-five miles higher up the Undop, five or six +miles only of which we had succeeded in ascending, as a most dreary +and rainy night closed in, during which we were joined by Mr. D'Aeth +and his division from the Lupar river. + +The following morning, the 13th of August, at daybreak, we again +commenced our toilsome work. With the gig and the lighter boats we +succeeded better; and I should have despaired of the heavier boats +ever getting up, had they not been assisted by an opportune and sudden +rise of the tide, to the extent of twelve or fourteen feet, though +with this we had to contend against a considerably increased strength +of current. It was on this day that my ever active and zealous first +lieutenant, Charles Wade, jealous of the advanced position of our +light boats, obtained a place in my gig. That evening the Phlegethon's +first and second cutters, the Dido's two cutters, and their gigs, +were fortunate enough to pass a barrier composed of trees evidently +but recently felled; from which we concluded ourselves to be so near +the enemy, that, by pushing forward as long as we could possibly see, +we might prevent further impediments from being thrown in our way. This +we did; but at 9 P.M. arriving at a broad expanse of the river, and +being utterly unable to trace our course, we anchored our advanced +force for the night. + +On Wednesday, 14th, we again pushed on at daylight. We had gained +information of two landing-places leading to the Dyak village on the +hill, round three-fourths of the foot of which the Undop flowed. The +first landing-place we had no trouble in discovering, from the number +of deserted boats collected near it. Leaving these to be looted by our +followers, we proceeded in search of the second, which we understood +was situated more immediately under the village, and which, having +advanced without our guides, we had much difficulty in finding. The +circuit of the base of the hill was above five miles. In traversing +this distance, we had repeated skirmishing with straggling boats +of the enemy, upon whom we came unexpectedly. During this warfare, +Patingi Ali, who, with his usual zeal, had here come up, bringing a +considerable native force of both Malays and Dyaks, was particularly +on the alert; and while we in the gig attacked the large war-prahu +of Seriff Muller himself--the resistance of whose followers was only +the discharge of their muskets, after which they threw themselves +into the river, part only effecting their escape--the Patingi nearly +succeeded in capturing that chief in person. He had escaped from his +prahu into a remarkably beautiful and fast-pulling sampan, in which he +was chased by old Ali, and afterward only saved his life by throwing +himself into the water, and swimming to the jungle; and it was with +no small pride that the gallant old chief appropriated the boat to his +own use. In the prahu were captured two large brass guns, two smaller +ones, a variety of small arms, ammunition, provisions, colors and +personal property, among which were also two pair of handsome jars of +English manufacture. After this, having proceeded some considerable +distance without finding the second landing-place, we put in close +to a clear green spot, with the intention of getting our breakfasts, +and of waiting the arrival of the other boat with the guides. + +While our crew were busily employed cooking, Lieutenant Wade and +myself fancied we heard the suppressed voices of many people not +far distant, and taking up our guns we crept into the jungle. We had +not penetrated many yards before I came in sight of a mass of boats +concealed in a snug little inlet, the entrance to which had escaped +our notice. These were filled with the piratical Dyaks and Malays, +and on shore at various points were placed armed sentinels. My first +impulse was to conceal ourselves until the arrival of our force; but +my rash, though gallant friend deemed otherwise; and without noticing +the caution of my upheld hand, dashed in advance, discharging his gun, +and calling upon our men to follow. It is impossible to conceive the +consternation and confusion this our sudden sally occasioned among +the pirates. The confused noise and scrambling from their boats I +can only liken to that of a suddenly-roused flock of wild ducks. Our +attack from the point whence it came was evidently unexpected; and it +is my opinion that they calculated on our attacking the hill, if we +did so at all, from the nearest landing-place, without pulling round +the other five miles, as the whole attention of their scouts appeared +to be directed toward that quarter. A short distance above them was +a small encampment, probably erected for the convenience of their +chiefs, as in it we found writing materials, two or three desks of +English manufacture, on the brass plate of one of which, I afterward +noticed, was engraved the name of "_Mr. Wilson_." To return to the +pirates: with our force, such as it was--nine in number--and headed +by Lieutenant Wade, we pursued our terrified enemy, who had not the +sense or courage to rally in their judiciously selected and naturally +protected encampment, but continued their retreat (firing on us from +the jungle) toward the Dyak village on the summit of the hill. + +We here collected our force, reloaded our fire-arms; and Lieutenant +Wade, seeing from this spot the arrival at the landing-place of the +other boats, again rushed on in pursuit. Before arriving at the foot +of the steep ascent on the summit of which the before-mentioned +Dyak village stood, we had to cross a small open space of about +sixty yards, exposed to the fire from the village as well as the +surrounding jungle. It was before crossing this plain that I again +cautioned my gallant friend to await the arrival of his men, of +whom he was far in advance; and almost immediately afterward he fell +mortally wounded at my feet, having been struck by two rifle-shots, +and died instantaneously. I remained with the body until our men +came up, and giving it in charge, we carried the place on the height +without a check or further accident. The Dyak village we now occupied +I would have spared, as on no occasion had we noticed any of the tribe +fighting against us; but it was by shot fired from it that poor Wade +was killed, and the work of destruction commenced simultaneously with +the arrival of our men. It was most gratifying to me throughout the +expedition to observe the friendly rivalry and emulation between the +crews of the Phlegethon and the Dido's boats. On this occasion the +former had the glory of first gaining the height; and one of the +officers of the former, Mr. Simpson, wounded, with a pistol-shot, +a man armed with a rifle, supposed to have been the person who had +slain our first-lieutenant. + +I may here narrate a circumstance, from which one may judge of the +natural kind-heartedness of my lamented friend. During the heat of +the pursuit, although too anxious to advance to await the arrival of +his men, he nevertheless found time to conceal in a place of security +a poor terrified Malay girl whom he overtook, and who, by an imploring +look, touched his heart. The village and the piratical boats destroyed, +and the excitement over, we had time to reflect on the loss we had +sustained of one so generally beloved as the leader of the expedition +had been among us all. Having laid the body in a canoe, with the +British union-jack for a pall, we commenced our descent of the river +with very different spirits from those with which we had ascended only +a few hours before. In the evening, with our whole force assembled, +we performed the last sad ceremony of committing the body to the deep, +with all the honors that time and circumstance would allow. I read +that beautiful, impressive service from a prayer-book, the only one, +by the by, in the expedition, which he himself had brought, as he said, +"in case of accident." + +Before we again got under weigh, several Malay families, no longer +in dread of their piratical chief, Seriff Muller, who had fled nobody +knew whither, gave themselves up to us as prisoners, trusting to the +mercy of a white man; the first instance of any of them having done +so. We heard, also, that Macota had retreated with the seriff; and on +examination we found the papers captured in the encampment belonged to +them, exposing several deep intrigues and false statements addressed +to the sultan, the purport of which was to impress his mind with the +belief of a hostile intention on the part of the British government +toward his country. We brought-up for the night off the still-burning +ruins of Seriff Muller's town. + +On Thursday the 15th we again reached the steamer. We found her +prepared for action, having been much annoyed during the night by the +continued Dyak war-yells--sounds, to uninitiated ears, as unpleasant +as those of musketry. Having driven away the two principal instigators +and abettors of all the piracies committed along the coast of Borneo +and elsewhere, and destroyed their strongholds, it now remained for +us to punish the pirates themselves as far as lay in our power. The +Sakarran Dyaks being the only ones now remaining who had not received +convincing proofs that their brutal and inhuman trade would be no +longer allowed, the 15th and 16th were passed on board the steamer, +to rest the men after the severe fatigue encountered up the Undop, +and in making preparations for an advance up the Sakarran. During the +night of the 16th, several of our native followers were wounded. Their +boats not being furnished with anchors, and the river being deep, they +were obliged to make fast to the bank, which in the dark afforded great +facility for the enemy to creep down through the jungle unperceived, +so close as to fire a shot and even thrust their spears through the +thin mat covering of the boats. One poor fellow received a shot in +his lungs, from which he died the following day; a Dyak likewise +died from a spear-wound; and in the morning we witnessed the pile +forming for burning the Dyak, and the coffin making for conveying the +body of the Malay to Sarawak, his native place; both parties having +an equal horror of their dead falling into the hands of the enemy, +although differing in their mode of disposing of them. + +On Saturday, the 17th, the expedition, consisting of the Dido's +pinnace, her two cutters and gig, the Jolly Bachelor, and the +Phlegethon's first and second cutters and gig, started up the +Sakarran. A small division of light native boats, under the command of +the brave old Patingi Ali, were selected to keep as a reconnoitering +party with our leading boats, while the remaining native force, of +above thirty boats, followed as a reserve. We advanced the first day +some twenty miles without so much as seeing a native, although our +progress was considerably delayed by stopping to burn farm-houses, +and a number of war-prahus found concealed in the jungle or long grass +on either side of the river. We brought up early in the afternoon, for +the purpose of strongly fortifying ourselves, both ashore and afloat, +against surprise before the night set in, by which time it would have +taken a well-disciplined and powerful force to have dislodged us. + +This evening we had unusually fine weather; and we squatted down to +our meal of curry and rice with better appetites and higher spirits +than we had done for some days. We advanced the following day: and +although we reached several villages, the grain had been removed +from them all; which, in all probability, was done immediately upon +their hearing of the fall of their supposed impregnable Patusen. In +the evening we took the same precautions as on the preceding night, +considering that our enemies were not to be despised. Owing to heavy +rains which fell during the night, and caused a strong current, our +progress was considerably retarded. The scenery was beautiful--more +so than in any of the rivers we had yet visited. We likewise now +repeatedly fell in with small detachments of the enemy, and spears +were thrown from the banks, which added considerably to our excitement +and amusement. On every point we found the remains of the preceding +night's watch-fires, so that news of our approach would have been +conveyed rapidly along. While leading in the gig with a select +few of our followers, we came suddenly on a boat full of warriors, +all gorgeously dressed, and apparently perfectly unconscious of our +approach. The discharge of our muskets and the capsizing of their +war-boat was the work of an instant; but most of their crew saved +their lives by escaping into the jungle. + +This evening, Sunday, the 18th, we experienced some difficulty +in finding a suitable place for our bivouac. While examining the +most eligible-looking spot on the bank of the river, the crew of +one of the Phlegethon's boats, having crept up the opposite bank, +came suddenly on a party of Dyaks, who saluted them with a war-yell +and a shower of spears; and it was absurd to see the way in which +they precipitated themselves into the water again to escape from +this unexpected danger. The Dyaks, too, appear to have been equally +surprised. The place we selected for the night was a large house about +forty yards from the edge of the river; and for a musket-range around +which we had not much difficulty in clearing the ground. Here we all +united our different messes, and passed a jovial evening. The night, +however, set in with a most fearful thunder-storm, accompanied by the +most vivid flashes of lightning I ever witnessed. The rain continued +to fall in torrents; it cleared up at daylight, when we proceeded. As +yet the banks of the river had been a continued garden, with sugarcane +plantations and banana-trees in abundance. As we advanced, the scenery +assumed a wilder and still more beautiful appearance, presenting high +steep points, with large overhanging trees, and occasionally forming +into pretty picturesque bays, with sloping banks. At other times we +approached narrow gorges, looking so dark that, until past, you almost +doubted there being a passage through. We were in hopes that this +morning we should have reached their capital, a place called Karangan, +supposed to be about ten miles farther on. At 9 o'clock Mr. Brooke, +who was with me in the gig, stopped to breakfast with young Jenkins +in the second cutter. Not expecting to meet with any opposition for +some miles, I gave permission to Patingi Ali to advance cautiously +with his light division, and with positive instructions to fall back +upon the first appearance of any natives. As the stream was running +down very strong, we held on to the bank, waiting for the arrival of +the second cutter. Our pinnace and second gig having both passed up, +we had remained about a quarter of an hour, when the report of a few +musket-shots told us that the pirates had been fallen in with. We +immediately pushed on; and as we advanced, the increased firing from +our boats, and the war-yells of some thousand Dyaks, let us know that +an engagement had really commenced. It would be difficult to describe +the scene as I found it. About twenty boats were jammed together, +forming one confused mass; some bottom up; the bows or sterns of +others only visible; mixed up, pell-mell, with huge rafts; and among +which were nearly all our advanced little division. Headless trunks, +as well as heads without bodies, were lying about in all directions; +parties were engaged hand to hand, spearing and krissing each other; +others were striving to swim for their lives; entangled in the common +_melee_ were our advanced boats; while on both banks thousands of +Dyaks were rushing down to join in the slaughter, hurling their +spears and stones on the boats below. For a moment I was at a loss +what steps to take for rescuing our people from the embarrassed +position in which they were, as the whole mass (through which there +was no passage) were floating down the stream, and the addition of +fresh boats arriving only increased the confusion. Fortunately, at +this critical moment one of the rafts, catching the stump of a tree, +broke this floating bridge, making a passage, through which (my gig +being propelled by paddles instead of oars) I was enabled to pass. + +It occurred to Mr. Brooke and myself simultaneously, that, by advancing +in the gig, we should draw the attention of the pirates toward us, +so as to give time for the other boats to clear themselves. This had +the desired effect. The whole force on shore turned, as if to secure +what they rashly conceived to be their prize. + +We now advanced mid-channel: spears and stones assailed us from +both banks. My friend Brooke's gun would not go off; so giving +him the yoke-lines, he steered the boat while I kept up a rapid +fire. Mr. Allen, in the second gig, quickly coming up, opened upon +them, from a congreve-rocket tube, such a destructive fire as caused +them to retire panic-struck behind the temporary barriers where they +had concealed themselves previous to the attack upon Patingi Ali, +and from whence they continued, for some twenty minutes, to hurl +their spears and other missiles. Among the latter may be mentioned +short lengths of bamboo, one end heavily loaded with stone, and +thrown with great force and precision; the few fire-arms of which +they were possessed were of but little use to them after the first +discharge, the operation of reloading, in their inexperienced hands, +requiring a longer time than the hurling of some twenty spears. The +sumpitan was likewise freely employed by these pirates; but although +several of our men belonging to the pinnace were struck, no fatal +results ensued, from the dextrous and expeditious manner in which +the wounded parts were excised by Mr. Beith, the assistant-surgeon; +any poison that might remain being afterward sucked out by one of +the comrades of the wounded men. + +As our force increased, the pirates retreated from their position, +and could not again muster courage to rally. Their loss must have +been considerable; ours might have been light, had poor old Patingi +Ali attended to orders. + +It appears that the Patingi (over-confident, and probably urged +on by Mr. Steward, who, unknown to me, was concealed in Ali's beat +when application was made by that chief for permission to proceed +in advance for the purpose of reconnoitering), instead of falling +back, as particularly directed, on the first appearance of any of +the enemy, made a dash, followed by his little division of boats, +through the narrow pass above described. As soon as he had done so, +huge rafts of bamboo were lanched across the river, so as to cut off +his retreat. Six large war-prahus, probably carrying 100 men each, +then bore down--three on either side--on his devoted followers; +and one only of a crew of seventeen that manned his boat escaped to +tell the tale. When last seen by our advanced boats, Mr. Steward and +Patingi Ali were in the act (their own boats sinking) of boarding the +enemy. They were doubtless overpowered and killed, with twenty-nine +others, who lost their lives on this occasion. Our wounded in all +amounted to fifty-six. + +A few miles higher up was the town and capital of Karangan, which +place it was their business to defend, and ours to destroy, and this +we succeeded in effecting without further opposition. We ascended a +short distance above this, but found the river impracticable for the +further progress of the boats; but our object having been achieved, +the expedition may be said to have closed, as no more resistance was +offered; so we dropped leisurely down the river, and that evening +reached our resting-place of the previous night: but having burnt +the house in the morning, we were obliged to sleep in our boats, +with a strong guard on shore. + +Attempts were made to molest the native boats by hurling spears +into them from the jungle under cover of the night; but after a few +discharges of musketry the enemy retired, leaving us to enjoy another +stormy and rainy night as we best could. + +On the 20th we reached the steamer, where we remained quiet all the +next day, attending to the wounded, and ascertaining the exact extent +of our loss. On the 22d we again reached Patusen. We found everything +in the same wretched state as when we left; and a pile of firewood, +previously cut for the use of the steamer, had not been removed. After +dark a storm of thunder, lightning, and heavy rain, came on as usual, +and with it a few mishaps. A boat belonging to the old Tumangong was +capsized by the bore, by which his plunder, including a large brass +gun, was lost, and the crew with difficulty saved their lives. At +eight we heard the report of a gun, which was again repeated much +nearer at nine; and before a signal-rocket could be fired, or a +light shown, we were astonished by being hailed by the boats of +a British man-of-war; and the next moment Captain Sir E. Belcher, +having been assisted by a rapid tide, came alongside the steamer with +the welcome news of having brought our May letters from England. On +the arrival of the Samarang off the Morotaba, Sir Edward heard of +the loss we had sustained; and, with his usual zeal and activity, +came at once to our assistance, having brought his boats no less +than 120 miles in about thirty hours. At the moment of his joining +us, our second mishap occurred. The night, as previously mentioned, +was pitch dark, and a rapid current running, when the cry of "a man +overboard" caused a sensation difficult to describe. All available +boats were immediately dispatched in search; and soon afterward we +were cheered by the sound of "all right." It appears that the news +of the arrival of the mail was not long in spreading throughout our +little fleet, when Mr. D'Aeth, leaving the first cutter in a small +sampan, capsized in coming alongside the steamer; the man in the bow +(who composed the crew) saved himself by catching hold of the nearest +boat; Mr. D'Aeth would have been drowned had he not been an excellent +swimmer. This was not the last of our mishaps; for we had no sooner +arranged ourselves and newly-arrived visitors from the Samarang +comfortably on board the steamer from the pelting rain, than the +accustomed and quick ear of Mr. Brooke heard the cry of natives in +distress. Jumping into his Singapore sampan, he pushed off to their +assistance, and returned shortly afterward, having picked up three, +half drowned, of our Dyak followers, whom he had found clinging +to the floating trunk of a tree. They too had been capsized by the +bore; when, out of eleven composing the crew, only these three were +saved--although the Dyaks are invariably expert swimmers. + +On the 23d, after waiting to obtain meridian observations, we moved +down as far as the mouth of the river Linga, and then dispatched one +of our Malay chiefs to the town of Bunting to summon Seriff Jaffer +to a conference. This, however, he declined on a plea of ill health, +sending assurance, at the same time, of his goodwill and inclination +to assist us in our endeavors to suppress piracy. + +On the night of the 24th, we once again reached Sarawak, where the +rejoicings of the previous year, when we returned from a successful +expedition, were repeated. On the third evening after our return, +we were just settling down to enjoy a little rest, having got our +sick and wounded into comfortable quarters, and were beginning +heartily to indulge in the comforts of a bed after our fatigue and +harassing duties in open boats during the previous three weeks, when +information arrived that Seriff Sahib had taken refuge in the Linga +river, where, assisted by Seriff Jaffer, he was again collecting his +followers. No time was to be lost; and on the 28th, with the addition +of the Samarang's boats, we once more started, to crush, if possible, +this persevering and desperate pirate; and, in the middle of the night, +came to an anchor inside the Linga river. + +When our expedition had been watched safely outside the Batang +Lupar, on its return to Sarawak, all those unfortunate families that +had concealed themselves in the jungle, after the destruction of +the different towns of Patusen and Undop, had emerged from their +hiding-places, and, embarking on rafts, half-ruined boats, or, +in short, anything that would float, were in the act of tiding and +working their passage toward the extensive and flourishing town of +Bunting. Their dismay can well be imagined, when, at daylight on the +morning of the 29th, they found themselves carried by the tide close +alongside the long, black, terror-spreading steamer, and in the midst +of our augmented fleet. Escape to them was next to hopeless; nor did +the softer sex seem much to mind the change--probably thinking that to +be swallowed up by the white man was not much worse than dying in the +jungle of starvation. I need not say that, instead of being molested, +they were supplied with such provisions and assistance as our means +would permit us to afford, and then allowed to pass quietly on; +in addition to which we dispatched several of our native followers +into the Batang Lupar, to inform the poor fugitives that our business +was with the chiefs and instigators of piracy, and not to molest the +misguided natives. + +With the ebb tide a large number of boats came down from the town--the +news of our arrival having reached them during the night--containing +the principal chiefs, with assurances of their pacific intentions, +and welcoming us with presents of poultry, goats, fruit, &c., which +we received, paying the fair market-price for them, either by way of +barter or in hard dollars. They assured us that Seriff Sahib should not +be received among them; but that they had heard of his having arrived +at Pontranini, on a small tributary stream some fifty miles above +their town. We immediately decided on proceeding in pursuit before he +could have time to establish himself in any force. It was also evident +that the Balow Dyaks, who inhabit this part of the country, were +decidedly in favor of our operations against Seriff Sahib, although +afraid--on account of Seriff Jaffer and his Malays--to express their +opinions openly. We also ascertained that Macota, with a remnant of +his followers, was hourly expected in the mouth of the river, from the +jungle, into which he had been driven during the fight on the Undop +heights. Knowing that it would fare badly with this treacherous and +cunning, although now harmless chief, should he fall into the hands of +any of our native followers, I dispatched two boats to look out for and +bring him to us alive. This they succeeded in doing, securing him in a +deep muddy jungle, into which he had thrown himself upon perceiving the +approach of our men. Leaving him a prisoner on board the Phlegethon, +we, with the floodtide pushed forward in pursuit of Seriff Sahib. + +For two days we persevered in dragging our boats, for the distance +of twenty miles, up a small jungly creek, which, to all appearance, +was impassable for anything but canoes. But it had the desired +effect, proving to the natives what determination could achieve in +accomplishing our object, even beyond the hopes of our sanguine Balow +Dyak guides. The consequence was, that Seriff Sahib made a final and +precipitate retreat, across the mountains, in the direction of the +Pontiana river. So close were we on his rear--harassed as he was by the +Balow Dyaks, who had refused him common means of subsistence--that he +threw away his sword, and left behind him a child whom he had hitherto +carried in the jungle; and this once dreaded chief was now driven, +single and unattended, out of the reach of doing any further mischief. + +The boats returned, and took up a formidable position off the town of +Bunting, where we summoned Seriff Jaffer to a conference. To this he +was obliged to attend, as the natives had learnt that we were not to +be trifled with, and would have forced him on board rather than have +permitted their village to be destroyed. With Pangeran Budrudeen, +acting as the representative of the sultan, Seriff Jaffer was obliged +to resign all pretensions to the government of the province over +which he had hitherto held sway, since it was considered, from his +being a Malay and from his relationship to Seriff Sahib, that he was +an unsafe person to be intrusted With so important a post. + +A second conference on shore took place, at which the chiefs of +all the surrounding country attended, when the above sentence was +confirmed. On this occasion I had the satisfaction of witnessing what +must have been--from the effect I observed it to have produced on +the hearers--a fine piece of oratory, delivered by Mr. Brooke in the +native tongue, with a degree of fluency I had never witnessed before, +even in a Malay. The purport of it, as I understood, was, to point +out emphatically the horrors of piracy on the one hand, which it was +the determination of the British government to suppress, and on the +other hand, the blessings arising from peace and trade, which it was +equally our wish to cultivate; and it concluded by fully explaining, +that the measures lately adopted by us against piracy were for the +protection of all the peaceful communities along the coast. So great +was the attention bestowed during the delivery of this speech that +the dropping of a pin might have been heard. + +From these people many assurances were received of their anxiety +and willingness to cooperate with us in our laudable undertaking; +and one and all were alike urgent that the government of their river +should be transferred to the English. + +On the 4th September the force again reached Sarawak, and thus +terminated a most successful expedition against the worst pirates on +the coast of Borneo. + +We found the Samarang off the Morotaba entrance, when Mr. Brooke +and myself became the guests of Sir Edward Belcher for several days, +during which time we made excursions to all the small islands in that +neighborhood, discovered large quantities of excellent oysters, and +had some very good hog-shooting. Afterward, accompanied by the boats +of the Samarang, we paid a visit to the Lundu Dyaks, which gave them +great delight. They entertained us at a large feast, when the whole +of the late expedition was fought over again, and a war-dance with +the newly-acquired heads of the Sakarran pirates was performed for +our edification. Later in the evening, two of the elder chiefs got +up, and, walking up and down the long gallery, commenced a dialogue, +for the information, as they said, of the women, children, and poorer +people who were obliged to remain at home. It consisted in putting +such questions to one another as should elicit all the particulars of +the late expedition, such as, what had become of different celebrated +Sakarran chiefs (whom they named)? how had they been destroyed? how +did they die? by whom had they been slain? &c. All these inquiries +received the most satisfactory replies, in which the heroic conduct +of themselves and the white men was largely dwelt upon. While this +was performing, the two old warriors, with the heads of their enemies +suspended from their shoulders like a soldier's cartouch-box, stumped +up and down, striking the floor with their clubs, and getting very +excited. How long it lasted none of our party could tell, as one and +all dropped off to sleep during the recital. Mr. Brooke has given so +good a description of these kind and simple people that I need not +here farther notice them. + +Shortly after our return to the Samarang, she, getting short of +provisions, sailed for Singapore, and Mr. Brooke and myself went up +to Sarawak, where the Dido was still lying. Great rejoicings and +firing of cannon, as on a former occasion, announced our return; +and, after paying our respects to the rajah, we visited the Tumangong +and Patingis. + +A curious ceremony is generally performed on the return of the chiefs +from a fortunate war expedition, which is not only done by way of +a welcome back, but is supposed to insure equal success on the next +excursion. This ceremony was better performed at the old Tumangong's +than at the other houses. After entering the principal room we seated +ourselves in a semicircle on the mat floor, when the old chief's +three wives advanced to welcome us, with their female relatives, +all richly and prettily dressed in sarongs suspended from the waist, +and silken scarfs worn gracefully over one shoulder, just hiding or +exposing as much of their well-shaped persons as they thought most +becoming. Each of these ladies in succession taking a handful of +yellow rice, threw it over us, repeating some mystical words, and +dilating on our heroic deeds, and then they sprinkled our heads with +gold-dust. This is generally done by grating a lump of gold against +a dried piece of shark's skin. Two of these ladies bore the pretty +names of Inda and Amina. Inda was young, pretty, and graceful; and +although she had borne her husband no children, she was supposed to +have much greater influence over him than the other two. Report said +that she had a temper, and that the Tumangong was much afraid of her; +but this may have been only Sarawak scandal. She brought her portion +of gold-dust already grated, and wrapped up in a piece of paper, +from which she took a pinch; and in reaching to sprinkle some over +my head, she, by accident, put the prettiest little foot on to my +hand, which, as she wore neither shoes nor stockings, she did not +hurt sufficiently to cause me to withdraw it. After this ceremony we +(the warriors) feasted and smoked together, attended on by the ladies. + +Another conference with Muda Hassim took place, and I subsequently +quitted Sarawak for Singapore, intending to re-provision the Dido +at that port, and then return to Sarawak, in order to convey the +rajah and his suite to Borneo Proper. At Singapore, however, I found +orders for England, and sailed accordingly; but the service alluded +to was readily performed by Sir Edward Belcher, in H.M.S. Samarang, +accompanied by the H. C.'s steamer Phlegethon. + +On my return to England I had the gratification to learn that +Mr. Brooke had been appointed agent for the British government in +Borneo, and that Captain Bethune, R.N., C.B., had been dispatched on +special service to that island: events I cannot but consider of great +importance to the best interests of humanity, and to the extension +of British commerce throughout the Malayan Archipelago. + + + + + +CHAPTER XX. + + + Later portion of Mr. Brooke's Journal.--Departure of Captain + Keppel, and arrival of Sir E. Belcher.--Mr. Brooke proceeds, with + Muda Hassim, in the Samarang to Borneo.--Labuan examined.--Returns + to Sarawak.--Visit of Lingire, a Sarebus chief.--The Dyaks of Tumma + and Bandar Cassim.--Meets an assembly of Malays and Dyaks.--Arrival + of Lingi, as a deputation from the Sakarran chiefs.--The Malay + character.--Excursion up the country.--Miserable effects of excess + in opium-smoking.--Picturesque situation of the Sow village of + Ra-at.--Nawang.--Feast at Ra-at.--Returns home.--Conferences with + Dyak chiefs. + + +The return to England of Captain Bethune, C.B., bringing with him a +further portion of Mr. Brooke's Journal to my charge, enables me to +afford my readers some interesting details relative to the important +events that have occurred in Borneo subsequent to my departure from +Sarawak. + +"_January_, 1845.--The departure of the Dido left me sad and lonely, +for Captain Keppel had been really my companion and friend; and he +so thoroughly entered into my views for the suppression of piracy, +and made them his own, that I may not expect any successor to act +with the same vigour and the same decision. Gallant Didos! I would +ask no further aid or protection than I received from you. Sir +Edward Belcher, with the Phlegethon in company, arrived not long +after the Dido's departure, and conveyed the Rajah Muda Hassim and +his train to Borneo Proper. H.M.S. Samarang and Phlegethon visited +and examined Labuan, and proceeded thence to Ambun. Ambun is a +miserable village; and it at once gave the lie to the report of a +European female being there in captivity, for no _poor Orang Kaya_ +could retain such a prize. The inhabitants of Ambun are Badjows, +and the country people or Dyaks of the interior are called Dusuns, or +villagers. I saw many of them, and they appeared a gentle mild race, +and far less warlike by account than our Dyaks. They are not tattooed, +and the sumpitan is unknown amongst them. Leaving Ambun, which is +situated in a pretty bay, we proceeded to Tampasuk, a considerable +town, inhabited by Illanuns and Badjows. This is a piractical town; +and I was informed by an Arab in captivity there that scarcely a +week passes without strife and contention amongst themselves. There +likewise I received information respecting the Balagnini, the great +pirates of these seas. They are represented as in habiting numerous +small islands in the vicinity of Sooloo: their origin is Badjow. I +apprehend there would be little difficulty in breaking their power, +and curing the propensity to piracy. + +"This cruise being over, I established myself quietly at Sarawak. The +country is peaceable; trade flourishes; the Dyaks are content; +the Malays greatly increased in number--in short, all goes well. I +received a visit from Lingire, a Dyak chief of Sarebus. At first he +was shy and somewhat suspicions; but a little attention soon put him +at his ease. He is an intelligent man; and I hail with pleasure his +advent to Sarawak, as the dawn of a friendship with the two pirate +tribes. It is not alone for the benefit of these tribes that I +desire to cultivate their friendship, but for the greater object of +penetrating the interior through their means. There are no Malays +there to impede our progress by their lies and their intrigues; +and, God willing, these rivers shall be the great arteries by which +civilization shall be circulated to the heart of Borneo. + +"_14th._--The Dyaks of Tumma, a runaway tribe from Sadong, came +down last night, as Bandar Cassim of Sadong wishes still to extract +property from them. Bandar Cassim I believe to be a weak man, swayed +by stronger-headed and worse rascals; but, now that Seriff Sahib and +Muda Hassim are no longer in the country, he retains no excuse for +oppressing the poor Dyaks. Si Nankan and Tumma have already flown, +and most of the other tribes are ready to follow their example, and +take refuge in Sarawak. I have fully explained to the Bandar that he +will lose all his Dyaks if he continues his system of oppression, +and more especially if he continues to resort to that most hateful +system of seizing the women and children. + +"I had a large assembly of natives, Malay and Dyaks, and held forth +many good maxims to them. At present, in Sarawak, we have Balows +and Sarebus, mortal enemies; Lenaar, our extreme tribe, and our new +Sadong tribe of Tumma. Lately we had Kantoss, from near Sarambow, +in the interior of Pontiana; Undops, from that river; and Badjows, +from near Lantang--tribes which had never thought of Sarawak before, +and perhaps never heard the name. Oh, for power to pursue the course +pointed out! + +"_16th._--The Julia arrived, much to my relief; and Mr. Low, a botanist +and naturalist, arrived in her. He will be a great acquisition to +our society, if devoted to these pursuits. The same day that the +Julia entered, the Ariel left the river. I dismissed the Tumma Dyaks; +re-warned Bandar Cassim of the consequences of his oppression; and +had a parting interview with Lingire. I had another long talk with +Lingire, and did him honor by presenting him with a spear and flag, +for I believe he is true, and will be useful; and this Orang Kaya +Pa-muncha, the most powerful of these Dyaks, must be mine. Lingire +described to me a great fight he once had with the Kayans, on which +occasion he got ninety-one heads, and forced a large body of them +to retire with inferior numbers. I asked him whether the Kayans used +the sumpitan? he answered, 'Yes.' 'Did many of your men die from the +wounds?' 'No; we can cure them.' This is one more proof in favor of +Mr. Crawfurd's opinion that this poison is not sufficiently virulent +to destroy life when the arrow is (as it mostly is) plucked instantly +from the wound. + +"_26th._--Linn, a Sakarran chief, arrived, deputed (as he asserted, +and I believe truly) by the other chiefs of Sakarran to assure me of +their submission and desire for peace. He likewise stated, that false +rumors spread by the Malays agitated the Dyaks; and the principal rumor +was, that they would be shortly attacked again by the white men. These +rumors are spread by the Sariki people, to induce the Sakarrans to quit +their river and take refuge in the interior of the Rejong; and once +there, the Sakarrans would be in a very great measure at the mercy of +the Sariki people. This is a perfect instance of Malay dealing with +the Dyaks; but in this case it has failed, as the Sakarrans are too +much attached to their country to quit it. I am inclined to believe +their professions; and at any rate it is convenient to do so and to +give them a fair trial. + +"_28th._--How is it to be accounted for, that the Malays have so +bad a character with the public, and yet that the few who have had +opportunities of knowing them well speak of them as a simple and +not unamiable people? With the vulgar, the idea of a Malay--and by +the Malay they mean the entire Polynesian race, with the exception +of the Javanese--is that of a treacherous, blood-thirsty villain; +and I believe the reason to be, that from our first intercourse to +the present time, it is the Pangerans or rajahs of the country, with +their followers, who are made the standard of Malay character. These +rajahs, born in the purple; bred amid slaves and fighting-cocks, +inheriting an undisputed power over their subjects, and under +all circumstances, whether of riches or poverty, receiving the +abject submission of those around their persons, are naturally the +slaves of their passions--haughty, rapacious, vindictive, weak, +and tenacious unto death of the paltry punctilio of their court +The followers of such rajahs it is needless to describe; they are +the tools of the rajah's will, and more readily disposed for evil +than for good; unscrupulous, cunning, intriguing, they are prepared +for any act of violence. We must next contrast these with a burly, +independent trader, eager after gain; probably not over-scrupulous +about the means of obtaining it, ignorant of native character, and +heedless of native customs and native etiquet. The result of such +a combination of ingredients causes an explosion on the slightest +occasion. The European is loud, contemptuous, and abusive; the Malay +cool and vindictive. The regal dignity has been insulted; the rajah +has received 'shame' before his court; evil counselors are at hand +to whisper the facility of revenge, and the advantages to be derived +from it. The consequence too frequently follows--the captain and crew +are krissed, and their vessel seized and appropriated. The repeated +tragedy shocks the European mind; and the Malay has received, and +continues to this day to receive, a character for treachery and +bloodthirstiness. Even in these common cases an allowance must be +made for the insults received, which doubtless on numerous occasions +were very gross, and such flagrant violations of native customs as to +merit death in native eyes; and we must bear in mind, that we never +hear but one side of the tale, or only judge upon a bloody fact. It +is from such samples of Malays that the general character is given +by those who have only the limited means of trade for forming a +judgment; but those who have known the people of the interior and +lived among them, far removed from the influence of their rajahs, +have given them a very different character. Simple in their habits, +they are neither treacherous nor bloodthirsty; cheerful, polite, +hospitable, gentle in their manners, they live in communities with +fewer crimes and fewer punishments than most other people of the +globe. They are passionately fond of their children, and indulgent +even to a fault; and the ties of family relationship and good feeling +continue in force for several generations. The feeling of the Malay, +fostered by education, is acute, and his passions are roused if shame +be put upon him; indeed, this dread of shame amounts to a disease; +and the evil is, that it has taken a wrong direction, being more the +dread of exposure or abuse, than shame or contrition for any offence. + +"I have always found them good-tempered and obliging, wonderfully +amenable to authority, and quite as sensible of benefits conferred, +and as grateful, as other people of more favored countries. Of +course there is a reverse to this picture. The worst feature of +the Malay character is the want of all candor or openness, and the +restless spirit of cunning intrigue which animates them, from the +highest to the lowest. Like other Asiatics, truth is a rare quality +among them. They are superstitious, somewhat inclined to deceit in +the ordinary concerns of life, and they have neither principle nor +conscience when they have the means of oppressing an infidel, and a +Dyak who is their inferior in civilization and intellect. + +"If this character of the Malay be summed up, it will be anything but +a bad one on the whole; it will present a striking contrast to the +conduct and character of the rajahs and their followers, and I think +will convince any impartial inquirer, that it is easily susceptible +of improvement. One of the most fertile sources of confusion is, +classing at one time all the various nations of the Archipelago under +the general name of Malay, and at another restricting the same term +to one people, not more ancient, not the fountain-head of the others, +who issued from the center of Sumatra, and spread themselves in a +few parts of the Archipelago. + +"The French, the German, the English, Scotch, and Irish are not +more different in national character than the Malay, the Javanese, +the Bugis, the Illanun, and the Dyak; and yet all these are +indiscriminately called Malay, and a common character bestowed upon +them. It would be as wise and as sensible to speak of a European +character. + +"_31st._--Started on a short excursion up the country, and slept +at Siniawan. Here I found a young Pangeran (who came from Sambas +with Mr. Hupe, a German missionary) enchained in the delights of +opium. He left Sarawak for Sambas two months since, proceeded five +hours' journey, and has since been smoking the drug and sleeping +alternately. His life passes thus: between four and five he wakes, +yawns, and smokes a pipe or two, which fits him for the labors of +taking his guitar and playing for an hour. Then follows a slightly +tasted meal, a pipe or two succeeds, and content and merriment for +another hour or two. About eight o'clock the gentleman reclines, and +pipe succeeds pipe till, toward daylight, he sinks intoxicated and +stupid on his pillow, to wake up again in due course to play again the +same part. Poor wretch! two months of this life of dissipation have +reduced him to a shadow--two more months will consign him to his grave. + +"_Feb. 1st._--Started after breakfast, and paddled against a strong +current past Tundong, and, some distance above, left the main stream +and entered the branch to the right, which is narrower, and rendered +difficult of navigation by the number of fallen trees which block up +the bed, and which sometimes obliged us to quit our boat, and remove +all the kajang covers, so as to enable us to haul the boat under the +huge trunks. The main stream was rapid and turbid, swollen by a fresh, +and its increase of volume blocked up the waters of the tributary, so +as to render the current inconsiderable. The Dyaks have thrown several +bridges across the rivers, which they effect with great ingenuity; but +I was surprised on one of these bridges to observe the traces of the +severe flood which we had about a fortnight since. The water on that +occasion must have risen twenty feet perpendicularly, and many of the +trees evidently but recently fallen, are the effects of its might. The +walk to Rat, or Ra-at, is about two miles along a decent path. Nothing +can be more picturesque than the hill and the village. The former is +a huge lump (I think of granite), almost inaccessible, with bold bare +sides, rising out of a rich vegetation at the base, and crowned with +trees. The height is about 500 feet; and about a hundred feet lower is +a shoulder of the hill on which stands the eagle-nest-like village of +Ra-at, the ascent to which is like climbing by a ladder up the side +of a house. This is one of the dwelling-places of the Sow Dyaks, +a numerous but dispersed tribe. Their chief, or Orang Kaya, is an +imbecile old man, and the virtual headship is in the hands of Nimok, +of whom more hereafter. Our friends seemed pleased to see us, and Nimok +apologized for so few of his people being present, as the harvest was +approaching; but being anxious to give a feast on the occasion of my +first visit to their tribe, it was arranged that to-morrow I should +shoot deer, and the day following return to the mountain. The views +on either side from the village are beautiful--one view enchanting +from its variety and depth, more especially when lighted up by the +gleam of a showery sunshine, as I first saw it. Soon, however, after +our arrival, the prospect was shut out by clouds, and a soaking rain +descended, which lasted for the greater part of the night. + +"_2d._--Started after breakfast, and after a quiet walk of about +three hours through a pleasant country of alternate hill and valley, +we saw the valley of Nawang below us. Nawang is the property of +the Singe Dyaks, and is cultivated by poor families, at the head +of which is Niarak. The house contained three families, and our +party was distributed among them, ourselves, i. e. Low, Crookshank, +and myself, occupying one small apartment with a man, his wife, and +daughter. The valley presented one of the most charming scenes to +be imagined--a clearing amid hills of moderate elevation, with the +distant mountains in the background; a small stream ran through it, +which, being damned in several places, enables the cultivator to flood +his padi-fields. The padi looked beautifully green. A few palms and +plantains fringed the farm at intervals, while the surrounding hills +were clothed in their native jungle. Here and there a few workmen in +the fields heightened the effect; and the scene, as evening closed, +was one of calm repose, and, I may say, of peace. The cocoa-nut, the +betel, the sago, and the gno or gomati, are the four favorite palms of +the Dyaks. In their simple mode of life, these four trees supply them +many necessaries and luxuries. The sago furnishes food; and after the +pith has been extracted, the outer part forms a rough covering for +the rougher floor, on which the farmer sleeps. The leaf of the sago +is preferable for the roofing of houses to the nibong. The gomati, or +gno, gives the black fibre which enables the owner to manufacture rope +or cord for his own use; and over and above, the toddy of this palm +is a luxury daily enjoyed. When we entered, this toddy was produced +in large bamboos, both for our use and that of our attendant Dyaks; +I thought it, however, very bad. In the evening we were out looking +for deer, and passed many a pleasant spot which once was a farm, and +which will become a farm again. These the Dyaks called rapack, and they +are the favorite feeding-grounds of the deer. To our disappointment +we did not get a deer, which we had reckoned on as an improvement to +our ordinary dinner-fare. A sound sleep soon descended on our party, +and the night passed in quiet; but it is remarkable how vigilant their +mode of life renders the Dyaks. Their sleep is short and interrupted; +they constantly rise, blow up the fire, and look out on the night: +it is rarely that some or other of them are not on the move. + +"Yearly the Dyaks take new ground for their farm; yearly they fence +it in, and undergo the labor of reclaiming new land; for seven years +the land lies fallow, and then may be used again. What a waste of +labor! more especially in these rich and watered valleys, which, +in the hands of the Chinese, might produce two crops yearly. + +"_3d._--Took leave of this pleasant valley, and by another and shorter +road than we came reached Ra-at. We arrived in good time on the hill, +and found everything prepared for a feast. There was nothing new in +this feast. A fowl was killed with the usual ceremony; afterward a +hog. The hog is paid for by the company at a price commensurate with +its size: a split bamboo is passed round the largest part of the body, +and knots tied on it at given distances; and according to the number +of these knots are the number of pasus or padi for the price. + +"Our host of Nawang, Niarak, arrived to this feast with a plentiful +supply of toddy; and before the dance commenced, we were requested +to take our seats. The circumstances of the tribe, and the ability of +Nimok, rendered this ceremony interesting to me. The Sow tribe has long +been split into four parties, residing at different places. Gunong +Sow, the original locality, was attacked by the Sakarran Dyaks, +and thence Nimok and his party retired to Ra-at. A second smaller +party subsequently located at or near Bow, as being preferable; +while the older divisions of Jaguen and Ahuss lived at the places so +named. Nimok's great desire was to gather together his scattered tribe, +and to become _de facto_ its head. My presence and the Datus' was a +good opportunity for gathering the tribe; and Nimok hoped to give them +the impression that we countenanced his proposition. The dances over, +Nimok pronounced an oration: he dwelt on the advantages of union; +how desirous he was to benefit his tribe; how constantly it was his +custom to visit Sarawak in order to watch over the interests of the +tribe--the trouble was his, the advantage theirs; but how, without +union, could they hope to gain any advantage--whether the return of +their remaining captive women, or any other? He proposed this union; +and that, after the padi was ripe, they should all live at Ra-at, +where, as a body, they were always ready to obey the commands of the +Tuan Besar or the Datu. + +"This was the substance of Nimok's speech. But the effect of his +oratory was not great; for the Bow, and other portions of the tribe, +heard coldly his proposition, though they only opposed it in a few +words. It was evident they had no orator at all a match for Nimok: a +few words from Niana drew forth a second oration. He glanced at their +former state; he spoke with animation of their enemies, and dwelt +on their great misfortune at Sow; he attacked the Singe as the cause +of these misfortunes: and spoke long and eloquently of things past, +of things present, and things to come. He was seated the whole time; +his voice varied with his subject, and was sweet and expressive; +his action was always moderate, principally laying down the law with +his finger on the mats. Niarak, our Singe friend, attempted a defence +of his tribe; but he had drunk too freely of his own arrack; and his +speech was received with much laughter, in which he joined. At this +juncture I retired, after saying a few words; but the talk was kept +up for several hours after, amid feasting and drinking. + +"_4th._--After breakfast, walked to our boats, and at six P.M. reached +home, just in time; weather very rainy. + +"_10th._--Nothing to remark in these days, except the ordinary course +of business and of life. + +"_13th._--The Tumangong returned from Sadong, and brought me a far +better account of that place than I had hoped for. It appears that +they really are desirous to govern well, and to protect the Dyaks; +and fully impressed with the caution I gave them, that unless they +protect and foster their tribes, they will soon lose them from their +removal to Sarawak. + +"One large tribe, the Maluku, a branch of the Sibnowans, are, it +appears, very desirous of being under my protection. It is a tempting +offer, and I should like to have them; but I must not deprive the +rulers of Sadong of the means of living comfortably, and the power +of paying revenue. Protect them I both can and will. There are great +numbers of Sarawak people at Sadong, all looking out for birds'-nests; +new caves have been explored; mountains ascended for the first time +in the search. It shows the progress of good government and security, +and, at the same time, is characteristic of the Malay character. They +will endure fatigue, and run risks, on the chance of finding this +valuable commodity; but they will not labor steadily, or engage in +pursuits which would lead to fortune by a slow progress. + +"_15th._--Panglima Laksa, the chief of the Undop tribe, arrived, to +request, as the Badjows and Sakarrans had recently killed his people, +that I would permit him to retort. At the same time came Abong Kapi, +the Sakarran Malay, with eight Sakarran chiefs, named Si Miow, one of +the heads, and the rest Tadong, Lengang, Barunda, Badendang, Si Bunie, +Si Ludum, and Kuno, the representatives of other heads. Nothing could +be more satisfactory than the interview, just over. They denied any +knowledge or connection with the Badjows, who had killed some Dyaks +at Undop, and said all that I could desire. They promised to obey me, +and look upon me as their chief: they desired to trade, and would +guaranty any Sarawak people who came to their river; but they could +not answer for all the Dyaks in the Batang Lupar. It is well known, +however, that the Batang Lupar Dyaks are more peaceable than those of +Sakarran, and will be easily managed; and as for the breaking out of +these old feuds, it is comparatively of slight importance, compared +to the grand settlement; for as our influence increases we can easily +put down the separate sticks of the bundle. There is a noble chance, +if properly used! It may be remarked that many of their names are +from some peculiarity of person, or from some quality. Tadong is a +poisonous snake; but, on inquiry, I found the young chief so named had +got the name from being black. They are certainly a fine-looking race. + +"_17th._--Plenty of conferences with the Sakarran chiefs; and, +as far as I can judge, they are sincere in the main, though some +reserves there may be. Treachery I do not apprehend from them; but, +of course, it will be impossible, over a very numerous, powerful, +and warlike tribe, to gain such an ascendency of a sudden as at once +to correct their evil habits." + +Here again Mr. Brooke appears to have been placed on the horns of a +dilemma by his ignorance of the views of the British Government. Had +his position in Borneo been certain--had he either been supported +or deserted--his path of policy would have been clear; whereas he +evidently did not know what the morrow would bring forth; whether +it would find him with an English force at his back, or abandoned to +his own resources. + + + + + +CHAPTER XXI. + + Mr. Brooke's memorandum on the piracy of the Malayan + Archipelago.--The measures requisite for its suppression, and for + the consequent extension of British commerce in that important + locality. + + +I cannot afford my readers a more accurate idea of the present state +of piracy in the Malayan Archipelago, of the best mode of suppressing +it, and of the vast field which the island of Borneo offers for the +extension of British commerce, than by quoting a few of Mr. Brooke's +observations on these important subjects, written before the operations +of the squadron under command of Rear-Admiral Sir Thomas Cochrane +took place, of which an account will be given in Chapter XXII. With +reference to the first topic, piracy, Mr. Brooke remarks:-- + +"The piracy of the Eastern Archipelago is entirely distinct from +piracy in the Western world; for, from the condition of the various +governments, the facilities offered by natural situation, and the total +absence of all restraint from European nations, the pirate communities +have attained an importance on the coasts and islands most removed from +foreign settlements. Thence they issue forth and commit depredations on +the native trade, enslave the inhabitants at the entrance of rivers, +and attack ill-armed or stranded European vessels; and roving from +place to place, they find markets for their slaves and plunder. + +"The old-established Malay governments (such as Borneo and Sooloo), +weak and distracted, are, probably without exception, participators +in or victims to piracy; and in many cases both--purchasing from +one set of pirates, and enslaved and plundered by another; and while +their dependencies are abandoned, the unprotected trade languishes +from the natural dread of the better-disposed natives to undertake +a coasting voyage. + +"It is needless to dwell upon the evil effects of piracy; but before +venturing an opinion on the most effectual means of suppression, +I propose briefly to give an account of such pirate communities as +I am acquainted with. + +"The pirates on the coast of Borneo may be classed into those who +make long voyages in large heavy-armed prahus, such as the Illanuns, +Balignini, &c., and the lighter Dyak fleets, which make short but +destructive excursions in swift prahus, and seek to surprise rather +than openly to attack their prey. A third, and probably the worst +class, are usually half-bred Arab seriffs, who, possessing themselves +of the territory of some Malay state, form a nucleus for piracy, +a rendezvous and market for all the roving fleets; and although +occasionally sending out their own followers, they more frequently +seek profit by making advances, in food, arms, and gunpowder, to all +who will agree to repay them at an exorbitant rate in slaves. + +"The Dyaks of Sarebus and Sakarran were under the influence of two +Arab seriffs, who employed them on piratical excursions, and shared +in equal parts the plunder obtained. I had once the opportunity of +counting ninety-eight boats about to start on a cruise; and reckoning +the crew of each boat at the moderate average of twenty-five men, +it gives a body of 2450 men on a piratical excursion. The piracies +of these Arab seriffs and their Dyaks were so notorious, that it is +needless to detail them here; but one curious feature, which throws +a light on the state of society, I cannot forbear mentioning. On all +occasions of a Dyak fleet being about to make a piratical excursion, +a gong was beat round the town ordering a particular number of Malays +to embark; and in case any one failed to obey, he was fined the sum +of thirty rupees by the seriff of the place. + +"The blow struck by Captain Keppel of her majesty's ship Dido on these +two communities was so decisive as to have put an entire end to their +piracies; the leaders Seriff Sahib and Seriff Muller have fled, the +Malay population has been dispersed, and the Dyaks so far humbled, +as to sue for protection; and in future, by substituting local Malay +rulers of good character in lieu of the piratical seriffs, a check +will be placed on the Dyaks, and they may be broken of their piratical +habits, in as far as interferes with the trade of the coast. + +"The next pirate horde we meet with is a mixed community of +Illanuns and Badjows (or sea-gipsys) located at Tampasuk, a few +miles up a small river; they are not formidable in number, and their +depredations are chiefly committed on the Spanish territory; their +market, until recently, being Bruni, or Borneo Proper. They might +readily be dispersed and driven back to their own country; and the +Dusuns, or villagers (as the name signifies), might be protected and +encouraged. Seriff Houseman, a half-bred Arab, is located in Malludu +Bay, and has, by account, from fifteen hundred to two thousand men with +him. He is beyond doubt a pirate direct and indirect, and occasionally +commands excursions in person, or employs the Illanuns of Tampasuk, +and others to the eastward, who for their own convenience make common +cause with him. He has no pretension to the territory he occupies; +and the authority he exerts (by means of his piratical force) over +the interior tribes in his vicinity, and on the island of Palawan, +is of the worst and most oppressive description. This seriff has +probably never come in contact with any Europeans, and consequently +openly professes to hold their power in scorn. + +"To my own knowledge Seriff Houseman seized and sold into slavery +a boat's crew (about twenty men) of the Sultana, a merchant ship, +which was burned in the Palawan passage. Within the last few months he +has plundered and burned a European vessel stranded near the Mangsi +Isles; and to show his entire independence of control, his contempt +for European power, and his determination to continue in his present +course, he has threatened to attack the city of Bruni, in consequence +of the Bruni government having entered into a treaty with her majesty's +government for the discouragement and suppression of piracy. This fact +speaks volumes; an old-established and recognized Malay government is +to be attacked by a lawless adventurer, who has seized on a portion +of its territory, and lives by piracy, for venturing to treat with a +foreign power for the best purposes. If any further proof of piracy +were requisite, it would readily be established by numerous witnesses +(themselves the victims), and by the most solemn declaration of +the Bruni authorities, that peaceful traders on the high seas have +been stopped by the prahus of this seriff and his allies, their +vessel seized, their property plundered, and their persons enslaved; +numerous witnesses could attest their having been reduced to slavery +and detained in the very household of Seriff Houseman! When, however, +the facts of his having sold into slavery the crew of a British vessel +(which has been established before the Singapore authorities) come +to be known, I conceive every other proof of the character of this +person is completely superfluous. + +"The indirect piracy of Seriff Houseman is even more mischievous +than what is directly committed; for he supplies the Balagnini +(a restless piratical tribe, hereafter to be mentioned) with food, +powder, arms, salt, &c. under the agreement that they pay him on +their return from the cruise, at the rate of five slaves for every +100 rupees' worth of goods. The Balagnini are in consequence enabled, +through his assistance, to pirate effectively, which otherwise they +would not be able to do; as, from their locality, they would find it +difficult to obtain fire-arms and gunpowder. The most detestable part +of this traffic, however, is Seriff Houseman selling, in cold blood, +such of these slaves as are Borneons, to Pangeran Usop, of Bruni, +for 100 rupees for each slave, and Pangeran Usop re-selling each +for 200 rupees to their relations in Bruni. Thus, this vile seriff +(without taking into account the enormous prices charged for his +goods in the first instance) gains 500 per cent for every slave, and +Pangeran Usop clears 100 per cent on the flesh of his own countrymen, +thereby _de facto_ becoming a party to piracy, though doubtless veiled +under the guise of compassion. + +"More might be added on the subject of the piracies committed by this +seriff; and it could easily be shown that the evils accruing from +them affect, not only the peaceful trader, but extend to the peaceful +agriculturist; but, for the sake of brevity, I deem it sufficient to +add, that he exercises the same malign influence on the north coast as +Seriff Sahib exercised on the northwest; and that, having surrounded +himself by a body of pirates, he arrogates the rights of sovereignty, +defies European power, contemns every right principle, and threatens +the recognized and legitimate governments of the Archipelago. + +"The Balagnini inhabit a cluster of small islands somewhere in the +vicinity of Sooloo; they are of the Badjow or sea-gipsy tribe, a +wandering race, whose original country has never been ascertained. At +present, as far as I can learn, they are not dependent on Sooloo, +though it is probable they may be encouraged by some of the rajahs +of that place, and that they find a slave market there. + +"The Balagnini cruise in large prahus, and to each prahu a fleet +sampan is attached, which, on occasion, can carry from ten to fifteen +men. They seldom carry large guns, like the Illanuns, but in addition +to their other arms, big lelas (brass pieces, carrying from a one +to a three pound ball), spears, swords, &c. They use long poles with +barbed iron points, with which, during an engagement or flight, they +hook their prey. By means of the fleet sampans already mentioned, +they are able to capture all small boats; and it is a favorite device +with them to disguise one or two men, while the rest lie concealed +in the bottom of the boat, and thus to surprise prahus at sea, and +fishermen or others at the mouths of rivers. By being disguised as +Chinese they have carried off numbers of that nation from the Sambas +and Pontiana rivers. The cruising-grounds of these pirates are very +extensive; they frequently make the circuit of Borneo, proceed as far +as the south of Celebes, and in the other direction have been met off +Tringanu, Calantan, and Patani. Gillolo and the Moluccas lie within +easy range, and it is probable that Papua is occasionally visited by +them. It will readily be conceived how harassing to trade must be the +continued depredations of the Balagnini pirates, and more especially +to the trade of Bruni, which seems, from the unwarlike habits of the +natives, the chosen field of their operations. The number of Borneons +yearly taken into slavery is very considerable, as a fleet of six +or eight boats usually hangs about the island of Labuan, to cut off +the trade, and to catch the inhabitants of the city. The Borneons, +from being so harassed by these pirates, call the easterly wind 'the +pirate wind.' The Balagnini commence cruising on the northwest coast +about the middle of March, and return, or remove to the eastern side +of the island, about the end of November. + +"Of Magindano, or Mindanao, we are at the present time very ignorant; +but we know that the inhabitants are warlike and numerous, and that +that part of the island called Illanun Bay sends forth the most daring +pirates of the Archipelago. The first step requisite is to gain more +information concerning them, to form an acquaintance with some of +their better-disposed chiefs, and subsequently we might act against +them with a suitable force; but it would be rash and premature, in +the present state of our knowledge, to come in contact with them in +their own country. On one occasion I met eighteen Illanun boats on +neutral ground, and learned from their two chiefs that they had been +two years absent from home; and from the Papuan negro-slaves on board +it was evident that their cruise had extended from the most eastern +islands of the Archipelago to the north-western coast of Borneo. + +"Having now enumerated the pirates I have become acquainted with +since my residence in Sarawak, I shall proceed to offer an opinion +of the best mode for the suppression of piracy in these seas. + +"In the first place, a blow should be struck at the piratical +communities with which we are already acquainted, and struck with +a force which should convince all other pirates of the hopelessness +of resistance; subsequently the recognized Malay governments may be +detached from all communication with pirates; and, joining conciliation +with punishment, laying down the broad distinction of piracy and no +piracy, we may foster those who abandon their evil habits, and punish +those who adhere to them. + +"A system of supervision will, however, be necessary to carry out these +measures: our knowledge of the native states must be improved; and as +we become able to discriminate between the good and the bad, our sphere +of action may be enlarged, and we may act with decision against all +descriptions of pirates; against the indirect as well as the direct +pirate; against the receiver of stolen goods as well as the thief; +and against the promoter as well as the actual perpetrator of piracy. + +"I would especially urge that, to eradicate the evil, the pirate-haunts +must be burned and destroyed, and the communities dispersed; for merely +to cruise against pirate-prahus, and to forbear attacking them until we +see them commit a piracy, is a hopeless and an endless task, harassing +to our men, and can be attended with but very partial and occasional +success; whereas, on the contrary principle, what pirate would venture +to pursue his vocation if his home be endangered--if he be made to +feel in his own person the very ills he inflicts upon others? + +"A question may arise as to what constitutes piracy; and whether, +in our efforts to suppress it, we may not be interfering with the +right of native states to war one upon another. On the first point, +it appears clear to me, that the plunder or seizure of a peaceful +and lawful trader on the high seas constitutes an act of piracy, +without any reference to the nation or color of the injured party; +for if we limit our construction of piracy, we shall, in most cases, +be in want of sufficient evidence to convict, and the whole native +trade of the Archipelago will be left at the mercy of pirates, much +to the injury of our own commerce and of our settlement of Singapore. + +"On the second point, we can only concede the right of war to +recognized states; and even then we must carefully avoid introducing +the refinements of European international law among a rude and +semi-civilized people, who will make our delicacy a cloak for +crime, and declare war merely for the sake of committing piracy with +impunity. On the contrary, all chiefs who have seized on territory and +arrogate independence (making this independence a plea for piracy) +can never be allowed the right of declaring war, or entering on +hostilities with their neighbors; for, as I have before remarked, +all native trade must in that case be at an end, as the piratical +chiefs, no longer in dread of punishment from European powers, would +doubtless declare war against every unwarlike native state which they +did not need as a market for the sale of their slaves and plunder. + +"Practically acting, however, on the broad principle, that the seizure +of any lawful trader constitutes piracy, I consider no injustice could +be done to the native states, and no interference occur with their +acknowledged rights; for in practice it would be easy to discriminate +a war between native nations from the piracies of lawless hordes of +men; and without some such general principle, no executive officer +could act with the requisite decision and promptitude to insure the +eradication of this great evil. + +"With a post such as is proposed to be established, our measures for +the suppression of piracy (after the punishment of Seriff Houseman +and the Balagnini) would advance step by step, as our knowledge +increased, and with alternate conciliation and severity, as the +case might require. By detaching the recognised governments from the +practice, and gradually forming among the chief men a friendly and +English party opposed to piracy, we should, I doubt not, speedily +obtain our principal object of clearing the sea of marauders, and +ultimately correct the natural propensity of the natives for piracy. + +"In order to extend our commerce in these seas generally, and more +particularly on the N.W. coast of Borneo, it is requisite, 1st, that +piracy be suppressed; 2dly, that the native governments be settled, +so as to afford protection to the poorer and producing classes; and, +3dly, that our knowledge of the interior should be extended, and our +intercourse with the various tribes more frequent. + +"That our commerce may be largely extended is so clear that I shall +not stop to detail the productions of the island of Borneo, as it +will suffice here to state generally that all authorities agree in +representing it as one of the richest portions of the globe, and in +climate, soil, and mineral and vegetable productions, inferior to no +portion of the same extent. + +"If these opinions be true--and from my experience I believe them to be +so--it follows that the materials for an extensive and extended trade +exist, and only require development, while a numerous and industrious, +though wild population, which inhabits the interior, is debarred from +all intercourse with Europeans from the badness of Malay government. + +"On the first requisite for the development of commerce I need add +nothing further, as it is a duty incumbent on all governments to +eradicate piracy at any cost; and in the present case it would not +be found a difficult or tedious task. + +"A post like Labuan or Balambangan would, beyond doubt, give an +impetus to trade, merely from the freedom from all restrictions, +and the absence of all exactions, which the natives would enjoy; +and (piracy being checked) countries which now lie fallow would, +from their proximity, be induced to bring their produce into market. + +"This limited extension is, however, of little moment when compared +with the results which must attend our exerting a beneficial influence +over the native governments for the purposes of affording protection +to the poorer classes, insuring safety to the trader, and opening a +field for the planter or the miner. + +"The slightest acquaintance with the northwest coast of Borneo would +convince any observer of the ease with which these objects might be +effected; for the native government, being in a state of decadence, +requires protection, and would willingly act justly toward traders and +capitalists, and encourage their enterprises, in order to continue on +friendly terms with any European power located in their vicinity. The +numerous rivers on the coast, with their local rulers, are harassed +by the demands of every petty Pangeran; and while the sovereign is +defrauded of his revenue, which the people would cheerfully pay, and +his territory ruined, this host of useless retainers (acting always +in his name) gain but very slight personal profits to counterbalance +all the mischief they do. + +"The principal feature is the weakness of the governments, both of the +capital and its dependencies; and in consequence of this weakness there +is a strong desire for European protection, for European enterprise, +and for any change effected by Europeans. Supposing Labuan to be +taken as a naval post, I consider that European capital might with +safety be employed in Bruni. + +"In the rivers contiguous to Sarawak the presence of Europeans would +be hailed with joy, not only by the Dyaks, but by the Malays; and +subsequently it would depend on their own conduct to what degree they +retained the good-will of the natives; but with ordinary conciliation, +and a decent moral restraint on their actions, I feel assured that +their persons and property would be safe, and no obstruction offered +to fair trade or to mining operations. + +"Supposing, as I have before said, the occupation of Labuan by the +English, our influence over the government of Bruni would be complete; +and one of our principal objects would be to maintain this ascendency, +as a means of extending our trade. + +"Our position at Labuan would, it must be borne in mind, differ +from the position we occupied in relation to the native princes +in Singapore. In the latter case, the native princes were without +means, without followers, and with a paltry and useless territory, +and became our pensioners. In the case of Labuan, we shall have an +acknowledged independent state in our vicinity; and for the prosperity +of our settlement we must retain our ascendency by the support of +the government of Muda Hassim. Let our influence be of the mildest +kind; let us, by supporting the legitimate government, ameliorate the +condition of the people by this influence; let us pay every honor to +the native princes; let us convince them of our entire freedom from all +selfish views of territorial aggrandizement on the mainland of Borneo, +and we shall enjoy so entire a confidence that virtually the coast +will become our own without the trouble or expense of possession. I +have impressed it on the Rajah Muda Hassim and Pangeran Budrudeen, +that the readiest and most direct way of obtaining revenues from their +various possessions will be by commuting all their demands for a stated +yearly sum of money from each; and by this direct taxation, to which +Muda Hassim and his brother seem ready to accede, the system of fraud +and exaction would be abolished, the native mind tranquillized, and +the legitimate government would become the protector rather than the +oppressor of its dependencies. By this measure, likewise, a tone might +be imparted to the native chiefs and rulers of rivers, and the people +at large taught to feel that, after the payment of a specified sum, +a right existed to resist all extra demands. Beside this, these rajahs +are convinced that a certain yearly revenue is what they require, +and is the only means by which they can retain their independence; +and I have impressed it on their minds that, to gain a revenue, +they must foster trade and protect Europeans in their dealings. + +"If Labuan were English, and if the sea were clear of pirates, I +see no obstacle to bringing these and other measures into immediate +operation; and I am assured we should have the sincere and hearty +cooperation of the Borneon government. + +"Since the advent of Europeans in the Archipelago, the tendency of +the Polynesian governments generally has been to decay; here the +experiment may be fairly tried on the smallest scale of expense, +whether a beneficial European influence may not reanimate a falling +state, and at the same time extend our own commerce. We are here devoid +of the stimulus which has urged us on to conquest in India. We incur +no risk of the collision of the two races: we occupy a small station +in the vicinity of a friendly and unwarlike people; and we aim at +the development of native countries through native agency. + +"If this tendency to decay and extinction be inevitable; if this +adaptation of European policy to a native state be found unable to +arrest the fall of the Borneon government, yet we shall retain a people +already habituated to European manners, industrious interior races, +and at a future period, if deemed necessary, settlements gradually +developed in a rich and fertile country. We shall have a post in time +of war highly advantageous as commanding a favorable position relative +to China, we shall extend our commerce, suppress piracy, and prevent +the present and prospective advantages from falling into other hands; +and we shall do this at small expense. + +"I own the native development through their own exertions is but a +favorite theory; but whatever may be the fate of the government of +Borneo, the people will still remain; and if they be protected and +enabled to live in quiet security, I cannot entertain a doubt of the +country's becoming a highly productive one, eminently calculated as +a field for British enterprise and capital. + +"If the development of the resources of the country can be effected by +its native rulers it will be a noble task performed; but if it fail, +the people of the coast will still advance and form governments for +themselves under British influence. + +"In concluding this hasty and general view of the subject, I may remark +that commerce might be extended and capital laid out on the northwest +coast of Borneo, to an amount to which it is difficult to fix limits, +as the country is capable of producing most articles of commerce +in demand from this quarter of the world, and the natives (who, as +far as we know them, are an unwarlike, mild, and industrious race) +would receive our manufactures, from which they are now in a great +measure debarred. I have not alluded to any other countries of the +Archipelago: for we must first become acquainted with them; we must +become intimate, cultivate an English party, and accustom them to our +manners; and probably the same conciliatory policy, the same freedom +from design, which has succeeded in Borneo, will succeed elsewhere, +if pushed with temper and patience. + +"The general principle ought to be--to encourage established +governments, such as those of Borneo and Sooloo, provided they will +with all sincerity abandon piracy, and assist in its suppression; +but at the same time, by supervision to convince ourselves of the +fact, and keep them in the right path; for all treaties with these +native states (and we have had several) are but so much waste paper, +unless we see them carried into execution. + +"I have now only to mention the third means for the extension of +commerce. Our intercourse with the natives of the interior should be +frequent and intimate: these people (beyond where I am acquainted with +them) are represented as very numerous, hospitable, and industrious; +and a friendly intercourse would develop the resources of their +country, draw its produce to our markets, and give the natives a taste +for British manufactures. This intercourse, however, must be prudently +introduced and carefully advanced; for to bring these wild people into +contact with ignorant and arrogant Europeans would produce bloodshed +and confusion in a month. In Borneo, it is an advantage that the two +races can not come in collision; for from its climate it precludes +all idea of colonization; and that which is next to an impossibility, +the maintaining a good understanding between ignorant civilized +men and ignorant savages. It is a field for commerce and capital, +but no violent change of native customs should be attempted; and in +this way alone, by gradual means, can we really benefit the natives +and ourselves. When we consider the amount of produce obtained from +the countries of the Archipelago, and their consumption of British +manufactures, under the worst forms of government, living in a state +of distraction and insecurity, and exposed to the depredations of +pirates at sea, we may form some idea how vast may be the increase, +should peace and security be introduced among them; and judging of +the future by the past--by the limited experiment made at Sarawak--we +may hope that the task is neither so difficult nor so uncertain as +was formerly supposed." + + + + + +CHAPTER XXII. + + Arrival of Captain Bethune and Mr. Wise.--Mr. Brooke appointed + her Majesty's Agent in Borneo.--Sails for Borneo Proper.--Muda + Hassim's measures for the suppression of piracy.--Defied by + Seriff Houseman.--Audience of the Sultan, Muda Hassim, and + the Pangerans.--Visit to Labuan.--Comparative eligibility + of Labuan and Balambangan for settlement.--Coal discovered + in Labuan.--Mr. Brooke goes to Singapore and visits Admiral + Sir T. Cochrane.--The upas-tree.--Proceeds with the Admiral + to Borneo Proper.--Punishment of Pangeran Usop.--The + battle of Malludu.--Seriff Houseman obliged to fly.--Visit + to Balambangan.--Mr. Brooke parts with the Admiral, and goes + to Borneo Proper.--An attempt of Pangeran Usop defeated.--His + flight, and pursuit by Pangeran Budrudeen.--Triumphant reception + of Mr. Brooke in Borneo.--Returns to Sarawak. + + +"_February 25th._--Borneo River, H.M.S. Driver. Scarcely, on the 17th, +had I finished writing, when a boat from her majesty's steamer Driver, +bringing Captain Bethune and my friend Wise, arrived. How strange, +the same day, and almost the same hour, I was penning my doubts and +difficulties, when a letter arrives from Lord Aberdeen appointing +me confidential agent in Borneo to her majesty, and directing me to +proceed to the capital, with a letter addressed to the sultan and the +Rajah Muda Hassim, in reply to the documents requesting the assistance +of the British government to effect the suppression of piracy. + +"My friend Wise I was glad to see, and a few hours' conversation +convinced me how greatly I have been indebted to his exertions +for success and my present position. His knowledge of trade, +his cheerfulness regarding our pecuniary future, all impart +confidence. Thus I may say, without much self-flattery, that the +first wedge has been driven which may rive Borneo open to commerce and +civilization, which may bestow happiness on its inhabitants. Captain +Bethune is commissioned to report on the best locality for a settlement +or station on the N.W. coast. I will only say here that no other +person's appointment would have pleased me so well: he is intelligent, +educated, and liberal, and in concert with him I am too happy to work. + +"On the 18th of February the Driver arrived; on the 21st left Sarawak, +and at noon of the 24th arrived at the anchorage in Borneo river, +having towed the gun-boat against the N.E. monsoon. Mr. Williamson was +dispatched to Borneo, and found all right. They were delighted with +our coming and our mission, and the sultan himself has laid aside his +fears. A few presents have been sent, which will delight the natives, +and all will prosper. + +"_26th._--Budrudeen arrived, and from him I learned the politics +of Borneo since my last visit, when Muda Hassim was reinstated in +authority. + +"As my mission refers more especially to piracy, I may here notice Muda +Hassim's measures relative to that subject. Shortly after his arrival +he addressed a letter to the Illanuns of Tampasuk, informing them of +the engagement with the English to discourage and suppress piracy, +advising them to desist, and ordering them not to visit Borneo until +he (Muda Hassim) was convinced they were pirates no longer. This is +good and candid. Muda Hassim at the same time requested Seriff Schaik +to address a communication to Seriff Houseman of Malludu, acquainting +him with his engagements, and the resolve of the Europeans to suppress +piracy, adding that he was friends with the English, and no man could +be friends with the English who encouraged piracy. The answer to this +letter of Seriff Schaik, as far as I have yet learned, is a positive +defiance. Three months since, I am informed, a brig or schooner was +wrecked at a place called Mangsi, and she has been completely plundered +and burned by Seriff Houseman: her cargo consisted of red woolens, +fine white cloths, Turkey red cotton handkerchiefs, tin, pepper, +Malacca canes, ratans, &c., &c. This evidently is a vessel bound to +China, whether English or not is doubtful: the crew have not been +heard of or seen here; and it is to be hoped may have reached Manilla. + +"_28th._--Borneo, or Bruni city. Left the Driver at 9 A.M. in the +gun-boat, with the pinnace and cutter in company: a fine breeze carried +us to Pulo Chermin, and nearly the whole way to Pulo Combong, where +we met with the state-boat bearing the letter. We entered the town +straggling, and _the letter_ having been received with firing of guns, +banners displayed, and all the respect due to a royal communication, +we were dragged in haste to the audience; the sultan on his throne, +Muda Hassim and every principal Pangeran waiting for us--Pangeran Usop +to boot. The letter was read; twenty-one guns fired. I told them in +all civility that I was deputed by her majesty the queen to express +her feelings of good will, and to offer every assistance in repressing +piracy in these seas. The sultan stared. Muda Hassim said, 'We are +greatly indebted; it is good, very good.' Then, heated, and sunburned, +and tired, we took leave, and retired to the house prepared for us. + +"_March, 1st._--A long conference with Budrudeen, when, I believe, +we exhausted all the important topics of Borneo politics: subsequently +we visited Muda Hassim and the sultan. The latter was profuse in his +kind expressions, and inquired of the interpreter when the English +would come to Labuan, adding, 'I want to have the Europeans near +me.' On this head, however, he gained no information. The presents +were given to the sultan and rajah. + +"_5th._--In the evening visited Muda Hassim, and heard news from +Malludu, which, divested of exaggerations, amounted to this: that +Seriff Houseman was ready to receive us; was fortified, and had +collected a fleet of boats; and that if the English did not come and +attack him, he would come and attack Borneo, because they were in +treaty with Europeans. After leaving Muda Hassim, paid the sultan +a visit. + +"_10th._--I have nothing to say of our departure. Budrudeen accompanied +us to the Mooarra, and thence, on Friday evening, we crossed to the +anchorage of Labuan. + +"_12th._--Labuan. An island of about fifty feet high; twenty-five +miles in circumference; woody; timber good; water from wells and +a few small streams, which, after a drought, are dry; natives say +water never fails. Anchorage good for the climate; well protected +from the N.E.; not extensive; situation of contemplated town low; +climate healthy, _i.e._, the same as Borneo; soil, as far as seen, +sandy or light sandy loam. Coal found near the extreme N.E. point: +by native reports it is likewise to be found in many other places; +traces of coal are frequent in the sandstone strata. Anchorage not +difficult of defense against a European enemy; entrance sufficiently +broad and deep between two islands, with a shoal: vide chart. The +island of Labuan, for the purposes of refuge for shipwrecked vessels, +of a windward post relative to China, for the suppression of piracy, +and the extension of our trade, is well suited; it is no paradise, +and any other island, with good climate, wood, and water, would suit +as well. Its powerful recommendation is its being in the neighborhood +of an unwarlike and friendly people. There is no other island on +the N.W. coast, and the abandoned Balambangan, to the northward of +Borneo, is the only other place which could by possibility answer. The +comparison between Balambangan and Labuan may be stated as follows: +Balambangan, as a windward post relative to China, is superior, and it +commands in time of war the inner passage to Manilla, and the eastern +passages to China by the Straits of Makassar. Of its capabilities +of defense we know nothing. It was surprised by the Sooloos. Its +climate was not well spoken of. The island is larger than that of +Labuan, and, as far as we know, has no coal. The great, and to me +conclusive consideration against Balambangan is, that it is in the +very nest of pirates, and surrounded by warlike and hostile people; +and that to render it secure and effective, at least double the force +would be necessary there that would suffice at Labuan. If Labuan +succeeds and pays its own expenses, we might then take Balambangan; +for the next best thing to a location on the main is to influence the +people thereon by a succession of insular establishments. Yesterday +we made an agreeable excursion to the n.e. point of Labuan; near +the point it is picturesque, the cliffs are bold and cave-worn; the +trees hang over the cliffs, or encroach on the intermediate sands, +till they kiss the wave. Near a small cavern we discovered a seam of +coal, which afforded us employment while Captain Bethune and Mr. Wise +walked to obtain a view of the southern coast of the island. + +"_Bruni, 21st May, 1845._--After a longer time passed in Singapore than +I wished, we at length started, in the Phlegethon steamer, for this +city. At Singapore I had several interviews with Sir Thomas Cochrane. + +"_22d._--On the authority of Sulerman, an intelligent Meri man, I am +told that the tree below the town is the real upas, called by the +Meri men _tajim_--the Borneons call it _upas_. _Bina_ (the name we +formerly got from a Borneon for upas) is, by Sulerman's statement, +a thin creeper, the root or stem of which, being steeped in water, +is added to the upas, to increase the poisonous quality; it is not, +however, poisonous in itself. There is another creeper, likewise called +bina, the leaves of which are steeped and mixed with the upas, instead +of the stem of the first sort. This information may be relied on (in +the absence of personal knowledge), as the man is of a tribe which uses +the sumpitan, and is constantly in the habit of preparing the poison. + +"_August 8th._--Off Ujong Sapo, at the entrance of Borneo river. The +time since I last added to my most desultory journal is easily +accounted for. I have been at Singapore and Malacca, and am now +anchored off Borneo Proper, with seven vessels, and an eighth is +hourly expected. It is difficult, with such a force, to be moderate; +and, with Sir Thomas Cochrane's other duties and engagements, it is +probably impossible to devote any length of time on this coast; yet +moderation and time are the key-stones of our policy. I have settled +all the ceremonial for a meeting between the sultan and the admiral. + +"The Pangeran Budrudeen came on board H.M.S. Agincourt, with every +circumstance of state and ceremony, and met the admiral, I acting +as interpreter. It was pleasing to witness his demeanor and bearing, +which proved that, in minds of a certain quality, the power of command, +though over savages, gives ease and freedom. The ship, the band, +the marines, the guns, all excited Budrudeen's attention. On the 9th, +it is arranged that the admiral shall meet the sultan and the rajah. + +"_9th._--In the course of the day, after the audience had terminated, +the admiral made his demand of reparation on the sultan and Muda +Hassim for the detention and confinement of two British subjects +subsequent to their agreement with the British government. Of course, +the sultan and the rajah replied that they were not in fault; that +the act was Pangeran Usop's, and that he was too powerful for them +to control by force. If Sir Thomas Cochrane would punish him, they +should be much obliged, as they desired to keep the treaty inviolate. + +"_10th._--Pangeran Usop had to be summoned; come he would not, and yet +I was in hopes that, when he saw the overwhelming force opposed to him, +his pride would yield to necessity. About 2 P.M. the steamers took up +their positions; the marines were landed, every thing was prepared, +yet no symptom of obedience. At length a single shot was fired from +the Vixen, by the admiral's order, through the roof of Usop's house, +which was instantly returned, thus proving the folly and the temper +of the man. In a few minutes his house was tenantless, having been +overwhelmed with shot. Usop was a fugitive; the amount of mischief +done inconsiderable, and no damage except to the guilty party. Twenty +captured guns the admiral presented to the sultan and the rajah; +two he kept, from which to remunerate the two detained men. So far +nothing could be more satisfactory. Usop has been punished severely, +the treaty strictly enforced, and our supremacy maintained. No evil has +been done except to the guilty; his house and his property alone have +suffered, and the immediate flight has prevented the shedding of blood. + +"_11th._--At mid-day the admiral, with the Vixen and Nemesis, went +down the river, leaving the Pluto to me, to follow in next day. + +"_12th._--This morning I visited the sultan in company with Muda +Hassim. By twelve at night the Pluto was anchored in the creek at +Labuan, and on the 13th I once more took up my quarters aboard the +flag-ship. + +"_14th._--Wooding. + +"_16th._--Last evening anchored within the point called in the chart +Sampormangio, or, properly, Sampang Mengayu, which, being translated, +signifies piratical or cruising waiting-place. The weather was thick +and squally, and it was late before the Daedalus and Vestal arrived +with their tows, the Nemesis and Pluto, the former frigate having +carried away her mizzen top-mast. + +"_17th._--Squadron under weigh pretty early, getting into Malludu +Bay. After breakfast, had a very heavy squall. Agincourt heeled +to it, and sails of various sorts and sizes were blowing about in +ribbons aboard some of the ships: afterward brought up nearly off +the Melow river. + +"_18th._--Vixen, Nemesis, Pluto, and boats, proceeded up the bay, and +anchored as near as possible to the entrance of the Marudu, or Malludu +river. The character of Malludu bay generally may be described as clear +of danger, with high, wooded banks on either side, till in the bight, +when the land gets flat and mangrovy, and the water shallow, and where +the mouths of several small rivers are seen, one of which is Malludu. + +"_19th._--On the 19th of August was fought the celebrated battle +of Malludu; the boats, 24 in number, and containing 550 marines +and blue-jackets, having left the previous afternoon. As I was not +present, I can say only what I heard from others, and from what I +know from subsequently viewing the position. A narrow river with two +forts mounting eleven or twelve heavy guns (and defended by from 500 +to 1000 fighting men), protected by a strong and well-contrived boom, +was the position of the enemy. Our boats took the bull by the horns, +and indeed had little other choice; cut away part of the boom under a +heavy fire; advanced, and carried the place in a fight protracted for +fifty minutes. The enemy fought well and stood manfully to their guns; +and a loss of six killed, two mortally and fifteen severely wounded, +on our side, was repaid by a very heavy loss of killed and wounded on +theirs. Gallant Gibbard, [19] of the Wolverine, fell mortally wounded +while working at the boom, ax in hand. In short, the engagement was +severe and trying to our men from the fire they were exposed to. At +two minutes to nine, aboard the Vixen, we heard the report of the +first heavy gun, and it was a time of anxiety and uneasiness till +the first column of black smoke proclaimed that the village was fired. + +"I may here mention that before the fight commenced a flag of truce +came from the enemy, and asked for me. Captain Talbot (in command) +offered to meet Seriff Houseman either within or without the boom, +provided his whole force was with him. Seriff Houseman declined; but +offered (kind man!) to admit two gigs to be hauled over the boom. No +sooner was this offer declined, and the flag returned the second time +with a young Seriff, son of Seriff Layak of Bruni, than the enemy +opened fire, which was promptly returned. Had Captain Talbot entered +as proposed, I deem it certain he would never have quitted the place +alive; for the Seriff and his followers had made themselves up to +fight, and nothing but fight. Many chiefs were killed; two or three +Seriffs in their large turbans and flowing robes; many Illanuns in +their gay dresses and golden charms; many Badjows; many slaves--among +them a captive Chinaman; many were wounded; many carried away; and +many left on the ground dead or dying. + +"_20th._--On the evening of the 19th a detachment of ten boats, with +fresh men and officers, quitted the Vixen, and arrived at the forts +shortly after daylight. I accompanied this party; and the work of +destruction, well begun yesterday, was this day completed. Numerous +proofs of the piracies of this Seriff came to light. The boom was +ingeniously fastened with the chain cable of a vessel of 300 or 400 +tons; other chains were found in the town; a ship's long-boat; two +ship's bells, one ornamented with grapes and vine leaves, and marked +'Wilhelm Ludwig, Bremen;' and every other description of ship's +furniture. Some half-piratical boats, Illanun and Balagnini, were +burned; twenty-four or twenty-five brass guns captured; the iron +guns, likewise stated to have been got out of a ship, were spiked +and otherwise destroyed. Thus has Malluda ceased to exist; and Seriff +Houseman's power received a fall from which it will never recover. + +"Amid this scene of war and devastation was one episode which moved +even harder hearts than mine. Twenty-four hours after the action, +a poor woman, with her child of two years of age, was discovered in +a small canoe; her arm was shattered at the elbow by a grape shot; +and the poor creature lay dying for want of water in an agony of +pain, with her child playing round her and endeavoring to derive +the sustenance which the mother could no longer give. This poor +woman was taken on board the Vixen, and in the evening her arm was +amputated. To have left her would have been certain death; so I +was strongly for the measure of taking her to Sarawak, where she +can be protected. To all my inquiries she answered, 'If you please +to take me, I shall go. I am a woman, and not a man; I am a slave, +and not a free woman: do as you like.' She stated too, positively, +that she herself had seen Seriff Houseman wounded in the neck, and +carried off; and her testimony is corroborated by two Manilla men, who, +among others, ran away on the occasion, and sought protection from us, +who likewise say that they saw the Seriff stretched out in the jungle, +but they cannot say whether dead or wounded. The proof how great a +number must have been killed and wounded on their part is, that on +the following day ten dead men were counted lying where they fell; +among them was Seriff Mahomed, the bearer of the flag of truce, who, +though offered our protection, fought to the last, and in the agonies +of death threw a spear at his advancing foes. + +"The remnant of the enemy retired to Bungun; and it will be some time +before we learn their real loss and position. It is needless here +to say any thing on the political effects to be expected from the +establishment of a government in Bruni, and the destruction of this +worst of piratical communities. When I return to Bruni, and see how +measures advance, I may mention the subject again; but I will venture +here to reurge, that mere military force, however necessary, can not +do what it is desirable should be done. Supervision and conciliation +must go hand in hand with punishment; and we must watch that the snake +does not again rear his head through our neglect. The key-stone is +wanting as yet, and must be supplied if possible; we must, to back +the gallant deeds of the admiral and fleet, continue to pursue a +steady course of measures. In the evening returned to the Vixen. + +"_21st._--The morning quiet. After breakfast, under weigh; proceeded +off the river Bankoka, where we found the Cruiser at anchor. As there +was nothing to detain us, crossed over to the squadron--remained +an hour aboard Agincourt; then rejoined Sir Thomas Cochrane aboard +Vixen, and before dinner-time were at anchor in the northeast side +of Balambangan. Our woman prisoner doing well, and pleased with the +attention paid her. + +"_23d._--Southwestern harbor of Balambangan. Yesterday examined the +N.E. harbor; a dreary-looking place, sandy and mangrovy, and the harbor +itself filled with coral patches; here the remains of our former +settlement were found: it is a melancholy and ineligible spot. The +S.W. harbor is very narrow and cramped, with no fitting site for a +town, on account of the rugged and unequal nature of the ground; and if +the town were crammed in between two eminences, it would be deprived +of all free circulation of air. Water is, I hear, in sufficient +quantity, and good. On the whole, I am wretchedly disappointed with +this island; it has one, and only one recommendation, viz., that it +is well situated in the Straits for trading and political purposes; +in every other requisite it is inferior to Labuan. Balambangan is +commercially and politically well placed. Labuan, though inferior, +is not greatly inferior in these points; the harbor, the aspect, +the soil, are superior: it may probably be added, that the climate +is superior likewise; and we must remember that those who had an +opportunity of trying both places give the preference to Labuan. + +"Then, on other points, Labuan has a clear advantage. It commands the +coal; it is in the vicinity of a friendly people, and settlement may +be formed with certainty and at a moderate expense, and with small +establishments. Can this be done at Balambangan? I own I doubt it; +the people in the vicinity we know nothing of, but we shall find +them, in all probability, hostile. The Sooloos we are already too +well acquainted with. The Illanuns are in the vicinity. In the case +of Labuan, the details of the first establishment (no small step) +can be clearly seen and arranged; but I do not see my way regarding +Balambangan. The matter is of secondary importance, but a languishing +settlement at first is to be dreaded; food will be scarce, and houses +difficult to build; while at Labuan the population of Bruni are at +our disposal, and the government our own. I leave others to judge +whether a superior (but somewhat similar) position, commercially +and politically, will outweigh the other disadvantages mentioned, +and repay us for the extra expenses of the establishment; but, for +myself, I can give a clear verdict in favor of Labuan. + +"_24th._--Buried poor Mr. East, of the Agincourt, on +Balambangan. Gibbard, poor, gallant fellow, was consigned to the deep +a day or two before. + +"_25th._--A day of disaster and parting: the morning blowy, with an +unpleasant sea. Vestal ran ashore on a coral-patch, but soon swung +off. I was very sorry to part with the Agincourt. Farewell, gallant +Agincourts! farewell, kind admiral! farewell, the pride, pomp, and +panoply of a flag-ship liner! My occupation's over for the present, +and I retire with content to solitude and the jungle of Sarawak. I +step down the huge side, wave a parting adieu, jump on the Cruiser's +deck--the anchor is weighed, and away we fly. + +"_30th._--Coming down in her majesty's ship Cruiser, and now off +Ujong Sapo. On our passage we had some good views of Kina Balow, +and from various points; judging the distance by the chart, the angle +of elevation gives the mountain not less than 12,000 feet and up to +14,000; the latter result agreeing with the computation of the master +of the Daedalus. + +"_31st._--Started for Bruni, and half way met a boat with Pangeran +Illudeen, bringing the news of the place. Two days after the admiral +and his steamers left, Pangeran Usop seized the hill behind his late +house with 300 Kadiens, and commenced an attack on the town. Pangeran +Budrudeen on this mustered about the like number and mounted the +hill, and by a fire of musketry dislodged the enemy, who retired, +stood again, were again defeated, and finally dispersed. This victory +raised the courage of the Brunions, and a counter-attack was planned, +when the arrival of her majesty's ship Espiegle delayed them. As +the officers of the Espiegle and the rajah could not speak a word +of each other's language, the boat only stayed a few hours, and went +away in ignorance of the condition of the town. After her departure, +Budrudeen gathered about a thousand men of all arms, with some hundred +muskets; and leaving Bruni at three o'clock in the morning, reached the +landing-place at 6 A.M., and at eight marched for Barukas, where they +arrived at one o'clock. On the way the Kadiens humbled themselves, and +begged their houses might be spared, which were spared accordingly. On +reaching Barukas, they found Pangeran Usop had been deserted by the +Kadiens, and was in no way expecting their coming. The few persons who +remained fled ignominiously, Pangeran Usop showing them the example; +and his women, children, gold, and other property, fell into the hands +of his victors. The same evening Budrudeen returned to the city in +triumph; and there can be no doubt these vigorous measures have not +only settled them in power, but have likewise raised the spirits +of their adherents, and awed the few who remain adverse. 'Never,' +the Brunions exclaim, 'was such a war in Bruni. Pangeran Budrudeen +fights like a European; the very spirit of the Englishman is in him; +he has learned this at Sarawak.' Fortune favored Usop's escape. He +fled to the sea-shore near Pulo Badukan, and there met a boat of +his entering from Kimanis: he took possession and put out to sea, +and returned with her to that place. + +"Budrudeen we found in active preparation for pursuit. A dozen +war-prahus were nearly ready for sea, and this force starts directly +we depart. + +"Budrudeen's vigor has given a stimulus to this unwarlike people, +and he has gained so great a character--victory sits so lightly on +his plume--that his authority will now be obeyed; while Usop, in +consequence of his cowardly flight (for so they deem it), from the +want of energy he has displayed, has lost character as well as wealth, +and would scarce find ten men in Bruni to follow him. Unluckily for +himself, he was a great boaster in the days of his prosperity; and +now the contrast of his past boasting with his present cowardice is +drawn with a sneer. 'His mouth was brave,' they exclaim, 'but his heart +timid.' 'He should have died as other great men have died, and not have +received such shame; he should have amoked, [20] or else given himself +up for execution.' This seems to be the general impression in the city. + +"My mind is now at rest about the fate of my friends; but I still +consider a man-of-war brig coming here every month or two as of +great importance; for it will be necessary for the next six months +to consolidate the power of Muda Hassim and Budrudeen; and if, with +the new order of things, they constantly see white faces, and find +that they are quiet and inoffensive, the ignorant terror which now +prevails will abate. Besides this, we might find the opportunity +a favorable one for becoming acquainted with the Kadiens and the +Marats, and giving them just impressions of ourselves; for I have +no doubt that on the late occasion the Kadiens were worked upon by +all kinds of false reports of the pale faces taking their lands, +burning their houses, &c., &c., &c. We only see the effects; we do +not see (until we become very well acquainted with them) the strings +which move the passions of these people. The Kadiens are, however, an +unwarlike and gentle race, and have now given in their submission to +Muda Hassim. I do not mention the sultan, because, as I before said, +he is so imbecile that, as regards public affairs, he is a cipher: +he will some day cease to be sultan, and give place to a better man. + +"Our interview with the rajah, with Budrudeen, and all the other host +of our acquaintance, was quite a triumph--they hot with their success, +and we bringing the account of Malludu's sanguinary fight. Happy +faces and wreathed smiles supplied the place of the anxious and +doubtful expression which I had left them wearing. All vied in their +attentions; fruit enough to fill a room: the luscious durian, the +delicate mangosteen and lousch, the grateful rombusteen, the baluna, +pitabu, mowha, plantain, &c., &c., were showered upon us from all +quarters. The rajah daily sent a dinner; all was rejoicing, and few +or no clouds lowered in the distance. I was proud and happy; for I +felt and feel that much of this has been owing to my exertions. I +will not stop to say how or why; but I first taught them to respect +and to confide in Englishmen, and no one else has yet untaught them +this lesson. + +"_September 3d._--After parting interviews we quitted the city at two, +and arrived aboard her majesty's ship cruiser at eight P.M. To-morrow +morning we sail for Sarawak, where, at any rate, I hope for rest for +a month or two. + +"_19th._--Sarawak. Thus concludes a large volume. Captain Bethune and +myself, with Commander Fanshawe and a party of Cruisers, returned from +a five days' excursion among the Dyaks, having visited the Suntah, +Stang, Sigo, and Sanpro tribes. It was a progress; at each tribe there +was dancing, and a number of ceremonies. White fowls were waved as I +have before described, slaughtered, and the blood mixed with kunyit, +a yellow root, &c., &c., which delightful mixture was freely scattered +over them and their goods by me, holding in my hand a dozen or two +women's necklaces. Captain Bethune has seen and can appreciate the +Dyaks: to-morrow he leaves me, and most sorry shall I be to lose +him. A better man or a better public servant is not to be found. + +"Among my Dyak inquiries, I found out that the name of their god is +Tuppa, and not Jovata, which they before gave me, and which they use, +but do not acknowledge. Tuppa is the great god; eight other gods were +in heaven; one fell or descended into Java--seven remained above; +one of these is named Sakarra, who, with his companions and followers, +is (or is in) the constellation of a cluster of stars, doubtless the +Pleiades; and by the position of this constellation the Dyaks can +judge good and bad fortune. If this cluster of stars be high in the +heavens, success will attend the Dyak; when it sinks below the horizon, +ill luck follows; fruit and crops will not ripen; war and famine +are dreaded. Probably originally this was but a simple and natural +division of the seasons, which has now become a gross superstition. + +"The progress is ended; to-morrow I shall be left in the solitude +and the quiet of the jungle: but, after witnessing the happiness, +the plenty, the growing prosperity of the Dyak tribes, I can scarcely +believe that I could devote my life to better purpose, and I dread +that a removal might destroy what I have already done. + +"We must now wait the decision of government with patience. Captain +Bethune, in making his report, will have the advantage of real +substantial personal knowledge. I esteem him highly, and regard him +as a man of the most upright principles, who is not, and will not be +swayed in his duty by any considerations whatever. I am glad we are +to stand the ordeal of such a man's inquiry." + + + + + +CHAPTER XXIII. + + Borneo, its geographical bounds and leading divisions.--British + settlements in 1775.--The province of Sarawak formally ceded by + the sultan in perpetuity to Mr. Brooke its present ruler.--General + view of the Dyaks, the aborigines of Borneo.--The Dyaks of Sarawak, + and adjoining tribes; their past oppression and present position. + + +I will now endeavor to make the reader better acquainted with the +nature of a country and people so imperfectly known, by offering that +general view of its past events and present condition which will +make the information respecting them more intelligible, as well as +applicable to new circumstances and future measures. + +By looking at the map, it will be seen that the island of Borneo +extends over 11 degrees of latitude and as many of longitude, from +4 deg. N. to 7 deg. S., and 108 deg. to 119 deg. E. The N.W. coast is but thinly +populated; and the natives who inhabit the banks of some of the +beautiful rivers differ, as has been already stated, from each +other in manners and customs, and have but little communication +among themselves. The S., E., and N.E. coasts of Borneo are also +but thinly inhabited, and very little known. There are various +divisions of Malays, as well as different tribes of Dyaks, who live +in an unsettled state, and occasionally make war on one another: +their principal occupation, however, is piracy. The north part of +the island was once in the possession of the East India Company, who +had a settlement and factory on the island of Balambangan, which was +attacked in 1775, when in a weak and unguarded state, by a powerful +piratical tribe of Sooloos, who surprised the fort, put the sentries +to death, and turned the guns on the troops, who were chiefly Buguese +(or Bugis) Malays. Those who escaped got on board the vessels in +the harbor, and reached the island of Labuan, near the mouth of the +Borneo river; while the booty obtained by the pirates was estimated +at 375,000_l._ From that time to this these atrocious pirates have +never been punished, and still continue their depredations. + +The remainder of the coast on the N.W. is now called Borneo Proper, +to distinguish it from the name that custom has given to the whole +island, the original name of which was Kalamantan, and Bruni that of +the town now called Borneo. The latter was probably the first part +of the coast ever visited by Europeans, who consequently extended +the appellation to the island itself. The town of Borneo, situated +on the river of that name, was, until the last few years, a port +of some wealth, and carrying on an extensive trade, which has been +ruined entirely by the rapacity of the Malay chiefs, who have now +but little control over that part of Borneo Proper which lies to the +northward of the river. The province of Sarawak is situated at the +S.W. end of Borneo Proper, and was formally ceded in perpetuity by the +sultan in 1843 to Mr. Brooke, who, indeed, had possessed the almost +entire management of the district for the two previous years. "It +extends from Tanjong Datu (I quote from Mr. Brooke's description of +his territory) to the entrance of the Samarahan river, a distance +along the coast of about sixty miles in an E.S.E. direction, with +an average breadth of fifty miles. It is bounded to the westward +by the Sambas territory, to the southward by a range of mountains +which separate it from the Pontiana river, and to the eastward by +the Borneon territory of Sadong. Within this space then are several +rivers and islands, which it is needless here to describe at length, +as the account of the river of Sarawak will answer alike for the +rest. There are two navigable entrances to this river, and numerous +smaller branches for boats, both to the westward and eastward; the +two principal entrances combine at about twelve miles from the sea, +and the river flows for twenty miles into the interior in a southerly +and westerly direction, when it again forms two branches--one running +to the right, the other to the left hand, as far as the mountain +range. Beside these facilities for water-communication, there exist +three other branches from the easternmost entrance, called Morotaba, +one of which joins the Samarahan river, and the two others flow from +different points of the mountain range already mentioned. The country +is diversified by detached mountains, and the mountain range has an +elevation of about three thousand feet. The aspect of the country may +be generally described as low and woody at the entrance of the rivers, +except a few high mountains; but in the interior undulating in parts, +and part presenting fine level plains. The climate may be pronounced +healthy and cool, though for the six months from September to March a +great quantity of rain falls. During my three visits to this place, +which have been prolonged to eight months, and since residing here, +we have been clear of sickness, and during the entire period not one +of three deaths could be attributed to the effects of climate. The +more serious maladies of tropical climates are very infrequent; from +fever and dysentery we have been quite free, and the only complaints +have been rheumatism, colds, and ague; the latter, however, attacked +us in the interior, and no one has yet had it at Sarawak, which is +situated about twenty-five miles from the mouth of the river. + +"The soil and productions of this country are of the richest +description, and it is not too much to say, that, within the same +given space, there are not to be found the same mineral and vegetable +riches in any land in the world. I propose to give a brief detail +of them, beginning with the soil of the plains, which is moist and +rich, and calculated for the growth of rice, for which purpose +it was formerly cleared and used, until the distractions of the +country commenced. From the known industry of the Dyaks, and their +partiality to rice-cultivation, there can be little doubt that it +would become an article of extensive export, provided security +were given to the cultivator and a proper remuneration for his +produce. The lower grounds, beside rice, are well adapted for the +growth of sago, and produce canes, rattans, and forest-timber of the +finest description for ship-building and other useful purposes. The +Chinese export considerable quantities of timber from Sambas and +Pontiana, particularly of the kind called Balean by the natives, +or the lion-wood of the Europeans; and at this place it is to be had +in far greater quantity and nearer the place of sale. The undulating +ground differs in soil, some portions of it being a yellowish clay, +while the rest is a rich mold; these grounds, generally speaking, as +well as the slopes of the higher mountains, are admirably calculated +for the growth of nutmegs, coffee, pepper, or any of the more valuable +vegetable productions of the tropics. Beside the above mentioned +articles, there are birds'-nests, bees-wax, and several kinds of +scented wood, in demand at Singapore, which are all collected by the +Dyaks, and would be gathered in far greater quantity provided the +Dyak was allowed to sell them. + +"Turning from the vegetable to the mineral riches of the country, +we have diamonds, gold, tin, iron, and antimony ore certain; I have +lately sent what I believe to be a specimen of lead ore to Calcutta; +and copper is reported. It must be remembered, in reading this list, +that the country is as yet unexplored by a scientific person, and that +the inquiries of a geologist and a mineralogist would throw further +light on the minerals of the mountains, and the spots where they are +to be found in the greatest plenty. The diamonds are stated to be +found in considerable numbers, and of a good water; and I judge the +statement to be correct from the fact that the diamond-workers from +Sandak come here and work secretly, and the people from Banjamassim, +who are likewise clever at this trade, are most desirous to be allowed +to work for the precious stone. Gold of a good quality certainly is to +be found in large quantities. The eagerness and perseverance of the +Chinese to establish themselves is a convincing proof of the fact; +and ten years since a body of about 3000 of them had great success +in procuring gold by their ordinary mode of trenching the ground. + +"The quantity of gold yearly procured at Sambas is moderately stated +at 130,000 bunkals, which, reckoned at the low rate of 20 Spanish +dollars a bunkal, gives 2,600,000 Spanish dollars, or upward of half +a million sterling. The most intelligent Chinese are of opinion, +that the quantity here exceeds that at Sambas; and there is no good +reason to suppose it would fall short of it were once a sufficient +Chinese population settled in the country. + +"Antimony ore is a staple commodity, which is to be procured in any +quantity. Tin is said to be plentiful, and the Chinese propose working +it; but I have had no opportunity of visiting the spot where it is +found. Copper, though reported, has not been brought; and the iron ore +I have examined is of inferior quality. The specimen of what I supposed +to be lead ore has been forwarded to Calcutta, and it remains to be +seen what its value may be. And beside the above-mentioned minerals, +there can be little doubt of many others being discovered, if the +mountain range was properly explored by any man of science. Many +other articles of minor importance might be mentioned; but it is +needless to add to a list which contains articles of such value, +and which would prove the country equal in vegetable and mineral +productions to any in the world. + +"From the productions (continues Mr. Brooke) I turn to the inhabitants, +and I feel sure that in describing their sufferings and miseries I +shall command the interest and sympathy of every person of humanity, +and that the claims of the virtuous and most unhappy Dyaks will meet +with the same attention as those of the African. And these claims have +the advantage, that much good may be done without the vast expenditure +of lives and money which the exertions on the African coast yearly +demand, and that the people would readily appreciate the good that was +conferred upon them, and rapidly rise in the scale of civilization." + +The inhabitants may be divided into three different classes, viz. the +Malays, the Chinese, and the Dyaks; of the two former little need be +said, as they are so well known. + +The Dyaks (or more properly Dyak) of Borneo offer to our view +a primitive state of society; and their near resemblance to +the Tarajahs of Celebes, [21] to the inland people of Sumatra, +and probably to the Arafuras of Papua, [22] in customs, manners, +and language, affords reason for the conclusion that these are the +aboriginal race of the Eastern Archipelago, nearly stationary in their +original condition. While successive waves of civilization have swept +onward the rest of the inhabitants, while tribes as wild have arisen +to power, flourished, and decayed, the Dyak in his native jungles +still retains the feelings of earlier times, and shows the features +of society as it existed before the influx of foreign races either +improved or corrupted the native character. + +The name "Dyak" has been indiscriminately applied to all the wild +people on the island of Borneo; but as the term is never so used +by themselves, and as they differ greatly, not only in name, but in +their customs and manners, we will briefly, in the first instance, +mention the various distinct nations, the general locality of each, +and some of their distinguishing peculiarities. + +1st. The Dusun, or villagers of the northern extremity of the island, +are a race of which Mr. Brooke knows nothing personally; but the name +implies that they are an agricultural people: they are represented as +not being tattooed, as using the sumpitan, and as having a peculiar +dialect. [23] + +2d. The Murut. They inhabit the interior of Borneo Proper. They are +not tattooed, always use the sumpitan, and have a peculiar dialect. In +the same locality, and resembling the Murut, are some tribes called +the Basaya. + +3d. The Kadians (or Idaans of voyagers) use the sumpitan, and have +likewise a peculiar dialect; but in other respects they nowise differ +from the Borneons, either in religion, dress, or mode of life. They +are, however, an industrious, peaceful people, who cultivate the +ground in the vicinity of Borneo Proper, and nearly as far as Tanjong +Barram. The wretched capital is greatly dependent upon them, and, +from their numbers and industry, they form a valuable population. In +the interior, and on the Balyet river, which discharges itself near +Tanjong Barram, is a race likewise called Kadian, not converted to +Islam, and which still retains the practice of "taking heads." + +4th. The Kayan. The Kayans are the most numerous, the most powerful, +and the most warlike people in Borneo. They are an inland race, +and their locality extends from about sixty miles up the country +from Tanjong Barram to the same extent farther into the interior, in +latitude 3 deg. 30' N., and thence across the island to probably a similar +distance from the eastern shore. Their customs, manners, and dress are +peculiar, and present most of the characteristic features of a wild +and independent people. The Malays of the N.W. coast fear the Kayans, +and rarely enter their country; but the Millanows are familiar with +them, and there have thence been obtained many particulars respecting +them. They are represented as extremely hospitable, generous, and kind +to strangers, strictly faithful to their word, and honest in their +dealings; but on the other hand, they are fierce and bloodthirsty, +and when on an expedition, slaughter without sparing. The Kayans are +partially tattooed, use the sumpitan, have many dialects, and are +remarkable for the strange and apparently mutilating custom adopted +by the males, and mentioned by Sir Stamford Raffles. + +5th. To the southward and westward of Barram are the Millanows, +[24] who inhabit the rivers not far from the sea. They are, generally +speaking, an intelligent, industrious, and active race, the principal +cultivators of sago, and gatherers of the famous camphor barus. Their +locality extends from Tanjong Barram to Tanjong Sirak. In person +they are stout and well-made, of middling height, round good-tempered +countenances, and fairer than the Malays. They have several dialects +among them, use the sumpitan, and are not tattooed. They retain the +practice of taking heads, but they seldom seek them, and have little +of the ferocity of the Kayan. + +6th. In the vicinity of the Kayans and Millanows are some wild tribes, +called the Tatows, Balanian, Kanowit, &c. They are probably only a +branch of Kayans, though differing from them in being elaborately +tattooed over the entire body. They have peculiar dialects, use the +sumpitan, and are a wild and fierce people. + +7th. The Dyak. They are divided into Dyak Darrat and Dyak Laut, or +land and sea Dyaks. The Dyak Lauts, as their name implies, frequent +the sea; and it is needless to say much of them, as their difference +from the Dyak Darrat is a difference of circumstances only. The tribes +of Sarebus and Sakarran, whose rivers are situated in the deep bay +between Tanjong Sipang and Tanjong Sirak, are powerful communities, +and dreadful pirates, who ravage the coast in large fleets, and murder +and rob indiscriminately; but this is by no means to be esteemed a +standard of Dyak character. In these expeditions the Malays often join +them, and they are likewise made the instruments for oppressing the +Laut tribes. The Sarebus and Sakarran are fine men, fairer than the +Malays, with sharp keen eyes, thin lips, and handsome countenances, +though frequently marked by an expression of cunning. The Balows and +Sibnowans are amiable tribes, decidedly warlike, but not predatory; +and the latter combines the virtues of the Dyak character with much +of the civilization of the Malays. The Dyak Laut do not tattoo, nor +do they use the sumpitan; their language assimilates closely to the +Malay, and was doubtless originally identical with that of the inland +tribes. The name of God among them is Battara (the Avatara of the +Hindoos). They bury their dead, and in the graves deposit a large +portion of the property of the deceased, often to a considerable +value in gold ornaments, brass guns, jars, and arms. Their marriage +ceremony consists in two fowls being killed, and the forehead and +breast of the young couple being touched with the blood; after which +the chief, or an old man, knocks their heads together several times, +and the ceremony is completed with mirth and feasting. In these two +instances they differ from the Dyak Darrat. + +It must be observed that the Dyak also differs from the Kayan in not +being tattooed; and from the Kayan Millanows, &c., in not using the +_national_ weapon--the sumpitan. The Kayan and the Dyak, as general +distinctions, though they differ in dialect, in dress, in weapons, +and probably in religion, agree in their belief of similar omens, +and, above all, in their practice of taking the heads of their +enemies; but with the Kayan this practice assumes the aspect of an +indiscriminate desire of slaughter, while with the Dyak it is but +the trophy acquired in legitimate warfare. The Kadians form the only +exception to this rule, in consequence of their conversion to Islam; +and it is but reasonable to suppose, that with a slight exertion +in favor of Christianity, others might be induced to lay aside this +barbarous custom. + +With respect to the dialects, though the difference is considerable, +they are evidently derived from a common source; but it is remarkable +that some words in the Millanow and Kayan are similar to the Bugis and +Badjow language. This intermixture of dialects, which can be linked +together, appears to be more conclusive of the common origin of the +wild tribes and civilized nations of the Archipelago than most other +arguments; and if Marsden's position be correct (which there can be +little or no reason to doubt), that the Polynesian is an original race +with an original language, [25] it must likewise be conceded that the +wild tribes represent the primitive state of society in these islands. + +We know little of the wild tribes of Celebes beyond their general +resemblance to the Kayans of the east coast of Borneo; and it is +probable that the Kayans are the people of Celebes, who crossing the +Strait of Makassar, have in time by their superior prowess possessed +themselves of the country of the Dyaks. Mr. Brooke (from whom I am +copying this sketch) is led to entertain this opinion from a slight +resemblance in their dialects with those used in Celebes, from the +difference in so many of their customs from those of the Dyaks, and +from the Kayans of the _northwest coast of Borneo_ having one custom +in common with the wild tribe of Minkoka in the Bay of Boni. Both +the Kayans and Minkokas on the death of a relative seek for a head; +and on the death of their chief many human heads must be procured: +which practice is unknown to the Dyak. It may further be remarked, +that their probable immigration from Celebes is supported by the +statement of the Millanows, that the Murut and Dyak give place to the +Kayan whenever they come in contact, and that the latter people have +depopulated large tracts in the interior, which were once occupied +by the former. + +Having thus briefly noticed the different wild people of the island, +I proceed with the more particular task of describing the Dyak Darrats. + +The locality of these Dyaks may be marked as follows:--The Pontiana +river, from its mouth, is traced into the interior toward the northward +and westward, until it approaches at the farthest within 100 miles of +the northwest coast; a line drawn in latitude 3 deg. N. till it intersects +the course of the Pontiana river will point out the limit of the +country inhabited by the Dyak. Within this inconsiderable portion of +the island, which includes Sambas, Landak, Pontiana, Sangow, Sarawak, +&c., are numerous tribes, all of which agree in their leading customs, +and make use of nearly the same dialect. Personally (writes our sole +authority for any intelligence respecting them), I am acquainted only +with the tribes of Sarawak and some tribes further in the interior +beyond the government of the Malays, who inhabit the country between +Sarawak and Landak; and the description of one tribe will serve as +a description of all, so little do they vary. + +Before, however, I say anything of the character of the Dyaks, or their +temper, it will be necessary to describe briefly the government under +which they live, and the influence it has upon them; and if afterward +in the recital there appear some unamiable points in their character, +an allowance will be made for their failings, which those who rule +them would not deserve. + +The Dyaks have from time immemorial been looked upon as the bondsmen +of the Malays, and the rajahs consider them much in the same light +as they would a drove of oxen--_i. e._ as personal and disposable +property. They were governed in Sarawak by three local officers, called +the Patingi, the Bandar, and the Tumangong. To the Patingi they paid a +small yearly revenue of rice, but this deficiency of revenue was made +up by sending them a quantity of goods--chiefly salt, Dyak cloths, +and iron--and demanding a price for them six or eight times more than +their value. The produce collected by the Dyaks was also monopolized, +and the edible birds'-nests, bees-wax, &c. &c. were taken at a price +fixed by the Patingi, who moreover claimed mats, fowls, fruits, and +every other necessary at his pleasure, and could likewise make the +Dyaks work for him for merely a nominal remuneration. This system, +not badly devised, had it been limited within the bounds of moderation, +would have left the Dyaks plenty for all their wants; or had the local +officers known their own interest, they would have protected those upon +whom they depended for revenue, and under the worst oppression of one +man the Dyaks would have deemed themselves happy. Such unfortunately +was not the case; for the love of immediate gain overcame every other +consideration, and by degrees old-established customs were thrown +aside, and new ones substituted in their place. When the Patingi +had received all he thought proper to extort, his relatives first +claimed the right of arbitrary trade, and gradually it was extended +as the privilege of every respectable person in the country to serra +[26] the Dyaks. The poor Dyak, thus at the mercy of half the Malay +population, was never allowed to refuse compliance with these demands; +he could plead neither poverty, inability, nor even hunger, as an +excuse, for the answer was ever ready: "Give me your wife or one of +your children;" and in case he could not supply what was required, +the wife or the child was taken, and became a slave. Many modes of +extortion were resorted to; a favorite one was convicting the Dyak of +a fault and imposing a fine upon him. Some ingenuity and much trickery +were shown in this game, and new offences were invented as soon as +the old pleas would serve no longer; for instance, if a Malay met a +Dyak in a boat which pleased him, he notched it, as a token that it +was his property; in one day, if the boat was a new one, perhaps three +or more would place their marks on it; and as only one could get it, +the Dyak to whom the boat really belonged had to pay the others _for +his fault_. This, however, was only "a fault;" whereas, for a Dyak +to injure a Malay, directly or indirectly, purposely or otherwise, +was a _high offence_, and punished by a proportionate fine. If a +Dyak's house was in bad repair, and a Malay fell in consequence and +was hurt, or pretended to be hurt, a fine was imposed; if a Malay in +the jungle was wounded by the springs set for a wild boar, or by the +wooden spikes which the Dyaks for protection put about their village, +or scratched himself and said he was injured, the penalty was heavy; +if the Malay was _really hurt_, ever so accidentally, it was the +ruin of the Dyak. And these numerous and uninvited guests came and +went at pleasure, lived in free quarters, made their requisitions, +and then forced the Dyak to carry away for them the very property of +which he had been robbed. + +This is a fair picture of the governments under which the Dyaks live; +and although they were often roused to resistance, it was always +fruitless, and only involved them in deeper troubles; for the Malays +could quickly gather a large force of sea Dyaks from Sakarran, who +were readily attracted by hope of plunder, and who, supported by +the fire-arms of their allies, were certain to overcome any single +tribe that held out. The misfortunes of the Dyaks of Sarawak did not +stop here. Antimony ore was discovered; the cupidity of the Borneons +was roused; then Pangerans struggled for the prize; intrigues and +dissensions ensued; and the inhabitants of Sarawak in turn felt +the very evil they had inflicted on the Dyaks; while the Dyaks were +compelled, amid their other wrongs, to labor at the ore without any +recompense, and to the neglect of their rice-cultivation. Many died in +consequence of this compulsory labor, so contrary to their habits and +inclinations; and more would doubtless have fallen victims, had not +civil war rescued them from this evil, to inflict upon them others +a thousand times worse. + +Extortion had before been carried on by individuals, but now it +was systematized; and Pangerans of rank, for the sake of plunder, +sent bodies of Malays and Sakarran Dyaks to attack the different +tribes. The men were slaughtered, the women and children carried +off into slavery, the villages burned, the fruit-trees cut down, +[27] and all their property destroyed or seized. + +The Dyaks could no longer live in tribes, but sought refuge in +the mountains or the jungle, a few together; and as one of them +pathetically described it--"We do not live," he said, "like men; we are +like monkeys; we are hunted from place to place; we have no houses; and +when we light a fire, we fear the smoke will draw our enemies upon us." + +In the course of ten years, under the circumstances detailed--from +enforced labor, from famine, from slavery, from sickness, from +the sword--one half of the Dyak population [28] disappeared; and +the work of extirpation would have gone on at an accelerated pace, +had the remnant been left to the tender mercies of the Pangerans; +but chance (we may much more truly say Providence) led our countryman +Mr. Brooke to this scene of misery, and enabled him, by circumstances +far removed beyond the grounds of calculation, to put a stop to the +sufferings of an amiable people. + +There are twenty tribes in Sarawak, on about fifty square miles +of land. The appearance of the Dyaks is prepossessing: they have +good-natured faces, with a mild and subdued expression; eyes set +far apart, and features sometimes well formed. In person they are +active, of middling height, and not distinguishable from the Malays +in complexion. The women are neither so good-looking nor well-formed +as the men, but they have the same expression, and are cheerful and +kind-tempered. The dress of the men consists of a piece of cloth +about fifteen feet long, passed between the legs and fastened round +the loins, with the ends hanging before and behind; the head-dress +is composed of bark-cloth, dyed bright yellow, and stuck up in front +so as to resemble a tuft of feathers. The arms and legs are often +ornamented with rings of silver, brass, or shell; and necklaces +are worn, made of human teeth, or those of bears or dogs, or of +white beads, in such numerous strings as to conceal the throat. A +sword on one side, a knife and small betel-basket on the other, +complete the ordinary equipment of the males; but when they travel +they carry a basket slung from the forehead, on which is a palm-mat, +to protect the owner and his property from the weather. The women wear +a short and scanty petticoat, reaching from the loins to the knees, +and a pair of black bamboo stays, which are never removed except the +wearer be _enceinte_. They have rings of brass or red bamboo about the +loins, and sometimes ornaments on the arms; the hair is worn long; +the ears of both sexes are pierced, and earrings of brass inserted +occasionally; the teeth of the young people are sometimes filed to a +point and discolored, as they say that "Dogs have white teeth." They +frequently dye their feet and hands of a bright red or yellow color; +and the young people, like those of other countries, affect a degree +of finery and foppishness, while the elders invariably lay aside all +ornaments, as unfit for a wise person or one advanced in years. + +In character the Dyak is mild and tractable, hospitable when he is +well used, grateful for kindness, industrious, honest, and simple; +neither treacherous nor cunning, and so truthful that the word of +one of them might safely be taken before the oath of half-a-dozen +Borneons. In their dealings they are very straightforward and correct, +and so trustworthy that they rarely attempt, even after a lapse +of years, to evade payment of a just debt. On the reverse of this +picture there is little unfavorable to be said; and the wonder is, +they have learned so little deceit or falsehood where the examples +before them have been so rife. The temper of the Dyak inclines to be +sullen; and they oppose a dogged and stupid obstinacy when set to a +task which displeases them, and support with immovable apathy torrents +of abuse or entreaty. They are likewise distrustful, fickle, apt to +be led away, and evasive in concealing the amount of their property; +but these are the vices rather of situation than of character, for +they have been taught by bitter experience that their rulers set no +limits to their exactions, and that hiding is their only chance of +retaining a portion of the grain they have raised. They are, at the +same time, fully aware of the customs by which their ancestors were +governed, and are constantly appealing to them as a rule of right, +and frequently arguing with the Malay on the subject. Upon these +occasions they are silenced, but not convinced; and the Malay, while +he evades or bullies when it is needful, is sure to appeal to these +very much-abused customs whenever it serves his purpose. The manners +of the Dyaks with strangers are reserved to an extent rarely seen +among rude or half-civilized people; but on a better acquaintance +(which is not readily acquired), they are open and talkative, and, +when heated with their favorite beverage, lively, and evincing +more shrewdness and observation than they have gained credit for +possessing. Their ideas, as may well be supposed, are very limited; +they reckon with their fingers and toes, and few are clever enough to +count beyond twenty; but when they repeat the operation, they record +each twenty by making a knot on a string. + +Like other wild people, the slightest restraint is irksome, and +no temptation will induce them to stay long from their favorite +jungle. It is there they seek the excitement of war, the pleasures of +the chase, the labors of the field, and the abundance of fruit in the +rich produce which assists in supporting their families. The pathless +jungle is endeared to them by every association which influences the +human mind, and they languish when prevented from roaming there as +inclination dictates. + +With reference to the gradual advance of the Dyaks, Mr. Brooke +observes in an early part of his journal:--"The peaceful and +gentle aborigines--how can I speak too favorably of their improved +condition? These people, who, a few years since, suffered every extreme +of misery from war, slavery, and starvation, are now comfortably +lodged, and comparatively rich. A stranger might now pass from village +to village, and he would receive their hospitality, and see their padi +stored in their houses. He would hear them proclaim their happiness, +and praise the white man as their friend and protector. Since the +death of Parembam, no Dyak of Sarawak lost his life by violence, until +a month since, when two were cut off by the Sakarran Dyaks. None of +the tribes have warred among themselves; and I believe their war +excursions to a distance in the interior have been very few, and +those undertaken by the Sarambos. What punishment is sufficient for +the wretch who finds this state of things so baleful as to attempt +to destroy it? Yet such a wretch is Seriff Sahib. In describing the +condition of the Dyaks, I do not say that it is perfect, or that it +may not be still further improved; but with people in their state +of society innovations ought not rashly or hastily to be made; as +the civilized being ought constantly to bear in mind, that what is +clear to him is not clear to a savage; that intended benefits _may_ +be regarded as positive injuries; and that his motives are not, and +scarcely can be, appreciated! The greatest evil, perhaps, from which +the Dyaks suffer, is the influence of the Datus or chiefs; but this +influence is never carried to oppression, and is only used to obtain +the expensive luxury of 'birds'-nests' at a cheap rate. In short, +the Dyaks are happy and content; and their gradual development must +now be left to the work of time, aided by the gentlest persuasion, +and advanced (if attainable) by the education of their children." + +The latest accounts from Sarawak describe the increasing prosperity +of that interesting settlement. Among other recent intelligence I +have heard from Mr. Brooke that Seriff Sahib died of a broken heart, +shortly after his arrival at the Pontiana river. + + + + + +CHAPTER XXIV. + + Proposed British settlement on the northwest coast of Borneo, + and occupation of the island of Labuan.--Governor Crawfurd's + opinions thereon. + + +The establishment of a British settlement on the northwest coast of +Borneo, and the occupation of the island of Labuan, are measures that +have for some time past been under consideration by her majesty's +government; and I am courteously enabled to lay before my readers +the valuable opinions of Mr. Crawfurd (late Governor of Singapore) +on this subject: + +"I am of opinion (Mr. Crawfurd writes) that a settlement on the +northwest coast of Borneo--that is, at a convenient point on the +southern shore of the China Sea--would be highly advantageous to +this country, as a coal depot for steam navigation; as a means of +suppressing Malayan piracy; as a harbor of refuge for ships disabled +in the China Sea; and finally, as a commanding position during a +naval war. + +"The island of Labuan has been pointed out for this purpose; and as +far as our present limited knowledge of it will allow me to judge, it +appears to possess all the necessary qualities for such a settlement. + +"The requisite properties are, salubrity of climate, a good harbor, a +position in the track of steam-navigation, conveniency of position for +ships disabled in typhoons, conveniency of position for our cruisers +during war, and a locality strong and circumscribed by nature, so as +to be readily capable of cheap defence. + +"Labuan lies in about 6 deg. of north latitude, and consequently the +average heat will be about 83 deg. of Fahrenheit; the utmost range of +the thermometer will not exceed ten degrees. In short, the year is a +perpetual hot summer. It is, at the same time, well ventilated by both +monsoons; and being near twenty miles from the marshy shores of the +Borneo river, there is little ground to apprehend that it will be found +unhealthy, even if those shores themselves had been ascertained to be +so, which, however, is not the case; for, in proof of their salubrity, +it may be stated, that the town of Borneo is healthy, although it +stands, and has stood for centuries, on the flooded banks of the river; +the houses being built on posts, and chiefly accessible by boat. + +"With respect to harbor, a most essential point, I do not perceive +that the island is indented by any bay or inlet that would answer the +purpose of one. [29] The channel, however, which lies between it and +the mainland of Borneo is but seven miles broad, and will probably +constitute a spacious and convenient harbor. The name of the island +itself, which means anchorage, I have no doubt is derived from the +place affording shelter to native shipping, and those probably, in +most cases, fleets of pirate prahus. This channel is again further +restricted by four islets, and these, with four more lying to the +southwest, will afford shelter in the southwest or mild monsoon; +protection is given in the northeast, the severest monsoon, by Labuan +itself: and I may add, that the island is, by four degrees of latitude, +beyond the extreme southern limit of the typhoons of the Chinese Sea. + +"In the channel between Labuan and the main, or rather between Labuan +and the islets already mentioned, the soundings on the Admiralty +chart show that vessels drawing as much as eighteen feet water may +anchor within a mile of the shore, and the largest vessels within +a mile and a half; a convenience for shipping which greatly exceeds +that of Singapore. One of the advantages of Labuan will be that it +will prove a port of refuge for shipping disabled in the storms of +the Chinese Seas. Many examples, indeed some of recent occurrence, +might be adduced to show the need there is of such a port. + +"Labuan lies nearly in the direct track both of steam and sailing +navigation from India to China, during the northeast, the worst +and severest of the two monsoons; and is as intermediate a position +between Singapore and Hong Kong as can be found, being 700 miles from +the former and 1000 from the latter. + +"The insular character and narrow limits of Labuan will make it +easily and cheaply defensible. The extreme length of the island +appears to be about six miles, its greatest breadth about four and a +half, and probably its whole area will not be found to exceed thirty +square miles. + +"From the rude tribes of the immediate vicinity no hostile attack is +to be apprehended that would make the present erection of forts or +batteries necessary. No Asiatic enemy is at any time to be feared that +would make such defences requisite. In five-and-twenty years it has +not been found imperative to have recourse to them at Singapore. It +is only in case of war with a naval power that fortifications would be +required; but I am not informed what local advantages Labuan possesses +for their erection. A principal object of such fortifications would +be the defence of the shipping in the harbor from the inroads of an +enemy's cruisers. At one point the soundings, as given in the Admiralty +chart, are stated nine fathoms, within three quarters of a mile of +the shore; and I presume that batteries within this distance would +afford protection to the largest class of merchantmen. In Singapore +Roads no class of shipping above mere native craft can lie nearer than +two miles of the shore; so that in a war with a European naval power, +the merchant shipping there can only be defended by her majesty's navy. + +"One of the most striking national advantages to be expected from +the possession of Labuan would consist in its use in defending our +own commerce, and attacking that of opponents, in the event of a +naval war. Between the eastern extremity of the Straits of Malacca +and Hong Kong, a distance of 1700 miles, there is no British harbor, +and no safe and accessible port of refuge; Hong Kong is, indeed, +the only spot within the wide limits of the Chinese Sea for such a +purpose, although our legitimate commercial intercourse within it +extends over a length of 2000 miles. Everywhere else, Manilla and +the newly opened ports of China excepted, our crippled vessels or our +merchantmen pursued by the enemy's cruisers, are met by the exclusion +or extortion of semi-barbarous nations, or in danger of falling into +the power of robbers and savages. + +"Labuan fortified, and supposing the Borneon coal to be as productive +and valuable in quality as it is represented, would give Great Britain +in a naval war the entire command of the China Sea. This would be the +result of our possessing or commanding the only available supply of +coal, that of Bengal and Australia excepted, to be found in the wide +limits which extend east of the continents of Europe and America. + +"The position of Labuan will render it the most convenient possible +for the suppressing of piracy. The most desperate and active pirates +of the whole Indian Archipelago are the tribes of the Sooloo group +of islands lying close to the north shore of Borneo, and the people +of the north and northeastern coast of Borneo itself; these have +of late years proved extremely troublesome both to the English and +Dutch traders; both nations are bound by the Convention of 1824 to +use their best endeavors for the suppression of piracy, and many +efforts have certainly been made for this purpose, although as yet +without material effect in diminishing the evil. + +"From Labuan, these pirates might certainly be intercepted by armed +steamers far more conveniently and cheaply than from any other position +that could be easily pointed out: indeed, the very existence of a +British settlement would tend to the suppression of piracy. + +"As a commercial depot, Labuan would have considerable advantages +by position; the native trade of the vicinity would of course resort +to it, and so would that of the north coast of Borneo, of the Sooloo +Islands, and of a considerable portion of the Spice Islands. Even for +the trade of the Philippines and China, it would have the advantage +over Singapore of a voyage by 700 miles shorter; a matter of most +material consequence to native commerce. + +"With all the countries of the neighborhood lying west of Labuan I +presume that a communication across both monsoons might be maintained +throughout the year. This would include a portion of the east coast +of the Malay peninsula, Siam, and part of Cochin China. + +"Labuan belongs to that portion of the coast of Borneo which is the +rudest. The Borneons themselves are of the Malay nation, originally +emigrants from Sumatra, and settled here for about six centuries. They +are the most distant from their original seat of all the colonies which +have sprung from this nation. The people from the interior differ from +them in language, manners, and religion, and are divided into tribes +as numerous and as rude as the Americans when first seen by Europeans. + +"From such a people we are not to expect any valuable products of art +or manufacture, for a British mercantile depot. Pepper is, however, +produced in considerable quantity, and the products of the forests +are very various, as bees-wax, gum-benjamin, fine camphor, camphor +oil, esculent swallows' nests, canes and rattans, which used to form +the staple articles of Borneon import into Singapore. The Borneon +territory opposite to Labuan abounds also, I believe, in the palm +which yields sago, and indeed the chief part of the manufactured +article was thirty years ago brought from this country. The Chinese +settlers would, no doubt, as in Singapore and Malacca, establish +factories for its preparation according to the improved processes +which they now practice at those places. + +"There may be reason to expect, however, that the timber of the +portion of Borneo referred to may be found of value for ship-building; +for Mr. Dalrymple states that in his time, above seventy years ago, +Chinese junks of 500 tons burden used to be built in the river +of Borneo. As to timber well-suited for boats and house-building, +it is hardly necessary to add that the northwest coast of Borneo, +in common with almost every other part of the Archipelago, contains +a supply amounting to superfluity. + +"I may take this opportunity of stating, as evidence of the conveniency +of this portion of Borneo for a commercial intercourse with China, +that down to within the last half century a considerable number of +Chinese junks were engaged in trading regularly with Borneo, and that +trade ceased only when the native government became too bad and weak +to afford it protection. Without the least doubt this trade would +again spring up on the erection of the British flag at Labuan. Not +a single Chinese junk had resorted to the Straits of Malacca before +the establishment of Singapore, and their number is now, of one size +or another, and exclusive of the junks of Siam and Cochin China, +not less than 100. + +"From the cultivation of the land I should not be disposed to expect +anything beyond the production of fresh fruits and esculent vegetables, +and when the land is cleared, of grass for pasture. The seas in this +part of the world are prolific in fish of great variety and great +excellence; and the Chinese settlers are found everywhere skillful +and industrious in taking them. + +"Some difficulty will, in the beginning, be experienced with respect to +milk, butter, and fresh meat: this was the case at first in Singapore, +but the difficulty has in a good measure been overcome. The countries +of the Archipelago are generally not suited to pasture, and it is +only in a few of them that the ox and buffalo are abundant. The sheep +is so nowhere, and for the most part is wanting altogether; cattle, +therefore, must be imported. + +"As to corn, it will unquestionably be found far cheaper to import +than to raise it. Rice will be the chief bread-corn, and will come in +great abundance and cheapness from Siam and Cochin China. No country +within 700 miles of Singapore is abundant in corn, and none is grown +in the island: yet from the first establishment of the settlement +to the present time, corn has been both cheap and abundant, there +has been wonderfully little fluctuation, there are always stocks, +and for many years a considerable exportation. A variety of pulses, +vegetable oil, and culinary salt, will be derived from the same +countries, as is now done in abundance by Singapore. + +"The mines of antimony are 300 miles to the southwest of Labuan, +and those of gold on the west and the south coasts; and I am not +aware that any mineral wealth has been discovered in the portion of +Borneo immediately connected with Labuan, except that of coal--far +more important and valuable, indeed, than gold or antimony. The +existence of a coal-field has been traced from Labuan to the islands +of Kayn-arang--which words, in fact, mean coal island--to the island +of Chermin, and from thence to the mainland over a distance of thirty +miles. With respect to the coal of Labuan itself, I find no distinct +statement beyond the simple fact of the existence of the mineral; +but the coal of the two islands in the river, and of the main, is +proved to be--from analysis and trial in steam-navigation--superior +to nearly all the coal which India has hitherto yielded, and equal +to some of our best English coals. This is the more remarkable, as +it is known that most surface-minerals, and especially coals, are +inferior to the portions of the same veins or beds more deep-seated. + +"Nearly as early as the British flag is erected, and, at all events, +as soon as it is permanently known to be so, there may be reckoned +upon with certainty a large influx of settlers. The best and most +numerous of these will be the Chinese. They were settled on the Borneo +river when the Borneo government, never very good, or otherwise than +comparatively violent and disorderly, was most endurable. + +"Borneo is, of all the great islands of the western portion of the +Archipelago, the nearest to China, and Labuan and its neighborhood the +nearest point of this island. The distance of Hong Kong is about 1000 +miles, and that of the island of Hainan, a great place for emigration, +not above 800; distances which to the Chinese junks--fast sailers +before the strong and favorable winds of the monsoons--do not make +voyages exceeding four or five days. The coasts of the provinces +of Canton and Fokien have hitherto been the great hives from which +Chinese emigration has proceeded; and even Fokien is not above 1400 +miles from Labuan, a voyage of seven or eight days. Chinese trade +and immigration will come together. The northwest coast of Borneo +produces an unusual supply of those raw articles for which there +is always a demand in the markets of China; and Labuan, it may be +reckoned upon with certainty, will soon become the seat of a larger +trade with China than the river of Borneo ever possessed. + +"I by no means anticipate the same amount of rapid advance in +population, commerce, or financial resources for Labuan, that has +distinguished the history of Singapore, a far more centrical position +for general commerce; still I think its prospect of success undoubted; +while it will have some advantages which Singapore cannot, from its +nature, possess. Its coal-mines, and the command of the coal-fields +on the river of Borneo, are the most remarkable of these; and its +superiority as a post-office [30] station necessarily follows. Then +it is far more convenient as a port of refuge; and, as far as our +present knowledge will enable us to judge, infinitely more valuable +for military purposes, more especially for affording protection to the +commerce which passes through the Chinese Sea, amounting at present +to probably not less than 300,000 tons of shipping, carrying cargoes +certainly not under the value of 15,000,000_l_. sterling. + +"Labuan ought, like Singapore, to be a free port; and assuredly +will not prosper if it is not. Its revenue should not be derived +from customs, but, as in that settlement, from excise duties: +upon the nature of these, as it is well known, it is unnecessary +to enlarge. They covered during my time, near twenty years ago, +and within five years of the establishment of the settlement, the +whole charges of a small but sufficient garrison (100 Sepoys), and +a moderate but competent civil establishment. + +"The military and civil establishments have been greatly increased +of late years; but the revenue, still in its nature the same, has +kept pace with them. During my administration of Singapore, the +municipal charges fell on the general fund; but they are at present +amply provided for from a distinct source, chiefly an assessment +on house-property. + +"If the military and civil charges of Labuan are kept within moderate +bounds, I make no doubt but that a similar excise revenue will be +adequate to cover the charges of both, and that in peace at least the +state need not be called on to make any disbursement on its account; +while during a naval war, if the state make any expenditure, it will +be fully compensated by the additional security which the settlement +will afford to British commerce, and the annoyance it will cause to +the enemy. + +"As to the disposal of the land, always a difficult question in a new +and unoccupied colony, the result of my own inquiries and personal +experience lead me to offer it as my decided conviction that the most +expedient plan--that which is least troublesome to the government, +most satisfactory to the settler, and ultimately most conducive to the +public prosperity--is to dispose of it for a term of years, that is, +on long leases of 1000 years, or virtually in perpetuity; the object in +this case of adopting the leasehold tenure being, by making the land +a chattel interest, to get rid of the difficulties in the matter of +inheritance and transfer, which, under the administration of English +law, and in reference more particularly to the Asiatic people who +will be the principal landowners, are incident to real property. Town +allotments might be sold subject to a considerable quit-rent, but +allotments in the country for one entirely nominal. Those of the +latter description should be small, proportionate with the extent of +the island, and the time and difficulty required in such a climate +to clear the land, now overgrown for the most part with a stupendous +forest of evergreen trees, and the wood of which is too abundant to be +of any value, certainly for the most part not worth the land-carriage +of a couple of furlongs. + +"A charter for the administration of justice should be as nearly as +possible contemporaneous with the cession. Great inconvenience has +resulted in all our Eastern settlements of the same nature with that +speculated on at Labuan, from the want of all legal provision for +the administration of justice; and remembering this, it ought to be +guarded against in the case of Labuan. + +"Whether in preparing for the establishment of a British settlement +on the coast of Borneo, or in actually making one, her majesty's +ministers, I am satisfied, will advert to the merits and peculiar +qualifications of Mr. Brooke. That gentleman is unknown to me, +except by his acts and writings; but, judging by these, I consider +him as possessing all the qualities which have distinguished the +successful founders of new colonies; intrepidity, firmness, and +enthusiasm, with the art of governing and leading the masses. He +possesses some, moreover, which have not always belonged to such men, +however otherwise distinguished; a knowledge of the language, manners, +customs, and institutions of the natives by whom the colony is to be +surrounded; with benevolence and an independent fortune, things still +more unusual with the projectors of colonies. Toward the formation of +a new colony, indeed, the available services of such a man, presuming +they are available, may be considered a piece of good fortune." + + + + + + + +CONCLUDING OBSERVATIONS. + + +[First Edition.] + + +The recent proceedings of Government in following up the impression +made upon Malay piracy, as related in these pages; the appointment +of Mr. Brooke as British Agent in Borneo, armed with the moral and +physical power of his country; the cession of the island of Labuan to +the British crown; and the great advance already made by the English +ruler of Sarawak, in laying broad foundations for native prosperity, +while extending general security and commerce; all combine to add an +interest to the early individual steps which have led to measures of +so much national consequence. + +Deeply as I felt the influence of that individual on the condition of +Borneo, and the Malayan Archipelago generally, while employed there, +and much as I anticipated from his energetic character, extraordinary +exertions, and enlarged views for the future, I confess that my +expectations have been greatly increased by the progress of events +since that period. It needed nothing to confirm my faith in the +results that were sure to follow from his enlightened acts--from +his prudence and humanity in the treatment of his Dyak subjects, +and the neighboring and interior independent tribes--from his firm +resistance to the Malay tyranny exercised upon the aborigines, +and his punishment of Malay aggression, wherever perpetrated. But +when I see these elements of good wisely seconded by the highest +authorities of England, I cannot but look for the consummation of +every benefit desired, much more rapidly and effectively than if left +to the efforts of a private person, even though that person were a +Brooke! If the appearance of H.M.S. Dido on the coast and at Sarawak +produced a salutary effect upon all our relations with the inhabitants, +it may well be presumed that the mission of Captain Bethune, and the +expedition under Rear-Admiral Sir Thomas Cochrane, must have greatly +improved and extended that wholesome state of affairs. Indeed, it is +evident, by the complete success which attended Mr. Brooke's official +visit to Borneo Proper in H.M.S. Driver, after receiving dispatches +from Lord Aberdeen appointing him British agent in the island, +carried out by Captain Bethune in November, 1844, that the presence +of a British force in those seas was alone necessary to enable him +to suppress piracy, and perfect his plans for the establishment of +a native government which should not oppress the country, and which +should cultivate the most friendly intercourse with us. Thus we find +the piratical Pangeran Usop put down, and Muda Hassim exercising the +sovereign power in the name of his imbecile nephew, who still retains +the title of sultan. The principal chiefs, and men distinguished by +talent and some acquaintance with foreign affairs, are now on our side; +and it only requires to support them in order that civilization may +rapidly spread over the land, and Borneo become again, as it was one +or two centuries ago, the abode of an industrious, rich, pacific, +and mercantile people, interchanging products with all the trading +nations of the world, and conferring and reaping those blessings +which follow in the train of just and honorable trade wheresoever its +enterprising spirit leads in the pursuit of honest gain. As the vain +search for the philosopher's stone conducted to many a useful and +valuable discovery, so may we be assured that the real seeking for +gold through the profitable medium of commerce has been, is, and will +be the grand source of filling the earth with comfort and happiness. + +Among the numerous visions of this kind which open to our sense while +reflecting on the new prospects of this vast island--so little known, +yet known to possess almost unbounded means to invite and return +commercial activity--is the contemplation of the field it presents +to missionary labors. When we read Mr. Brooke's description of the +aboriginal Dyak, and observe what he has himself done in one locality +within the space of four or five short years, what may we not expect +to be accomplished by the zeal of Christian missions judiciously +directed to reclaim such a people from utter barbarism, and induce +them to become true members of a faith which teaches forbearance and +charity between man and man, and inculcates, with the love and hope +of heaven, an abhorrence of despotism and blood, and a disposition to +live in good-will and peace with all our fellow-creatures? There are +here no prejudices of caste, as in India, to impede the missionaries' +progress. Mr. Brooke has pointed out what may be effected in this way, +and we have only to say amen to his prayer, with an earnest aspiration +that it may be speedily fulfilled. + +Having enjoyed the pleasure of communicating to the public this +satisfactory description of the _status quo_ in Borneo to the latest +period (September, 1845), I venture to congratulate them upon it. Thus +far all is well and as it should be, and promising the happiest issue; +but I hope I may not be charged with presumption in offering an opinion +from my experience in this quarter, and respectfully suggesting that, +in addition to a permanent British settlement at Labuan, it will be +absolutely necessary to proceed with the suppression of Malay piracy, +by steadily acting against every pirate-hold. Without a continued and +determined series of operations of this sort, it is my conviction that +even the most sanguinary and fatal onslaughts will achieve nothing +beyond a present and temporary good. The impression on the native mind +is not sufficiently lasting: their old impulses and habits return +with fresh force; they forget their heavy retribution; and in two +or three years the memory of them is almost entirely effaced. Till +piracy be completely suppressed there must be no relaxation; and +well worth the perseverance is the end in view, the welfare of one +of the richest and most improvable portions of the globe, and the +incalculable extension of the blessings of Britain's prosperous +commerce and humanizing dominion. + +In looking forward to the certain realization of these prospects, +I may mention the important circumstance of the discovery of coal in +abundance for the purposes of steam navigation. The surveys already +made afford assurances of this fact, and the requisite arrangements +are in progress for opening and working the mines. It is generally +known that the Dutch assert very wide pretensions to colonies +and monopolies in those seas. A treaty has been concluded between +the Netherlands government and England; and although that important +document contains no reference whatever to Borneo, it is most desirable +for the general extension of commerce that no national jealousies, no +ideas of conflicting interests, no encroaching and ambitious projects, +may be allowed to interfere with or prevent the beneficial progress +of this important region. With such a man as Mr. Brooke to advise the +course most becoming, disinterested, and humane for the British empire +to pursue, it is not too much to say that, if the well-being of these +races of our fellow-creatures is defeated or postponed, the crime will +not lie at our door. The sacrifices we have made to extinguish slavery +throughout the world are a sure and unquestionable pledge that we will +do our utmost to extirpate the horrid traffic in those parts, and to +uproot the system of piracy that feeds it. It is the bounden duty of +both Holland and Great Britain to unite cordially in this righteous +cause. The cry of nature is addressed to them; and if rejected, as +surely as there is justice and mercy in the Providence which overrules +the fate of nations, no blessing will prosper them, but wealth, and +dominion, and happiness will pass away from them forever. Mr. Brooke +invokes their cooeperation, and his noble appeal cannot be withstood. + +The central position of Labuan is truly remarkable. That island is +distant from + + + Hong Kong 1009 miles. + Singapore 707 " + Siam 984 " + Manilla 650 " + + +On the other hand, Mr. Brooke's territory of Sarawak is distant from + + + Singapore 427 miles. + Labuan 304 " + Hong Kong 1199 " + + +How direct and central are these valuable possessions for the universal +trade of the East! + + + + + + + +POSTSCRIPT TO THE SECOND EDITION. + + +June 6th, 1846. + +In the foregoing remarks with which I closed the first edition of this +book, I ventured to congratulate the public on the cheerful aspect +of affairs in Borneo at the latest period of which accounts had then +reached me. I could then say, with a joyful heart, "Thus far all +is well and as it should be, and promising the happiest issue." But +now I must write in a different strain. The mischiefs I pointed out +above as likely to ensue from a desultory and intermittent mode of +dealing with Malay piracy have revealed themselves even sooner and in +a more formidable manner than I had anticipated. The weak and covetous +sultan of Borneo has, with more than the usual fickleness of Asiatics, +already forgotten the lessons we gave him and the engagements he +solemnly and voluntarily contracted with us. Mr. Brooke's faithful +friends, Muda Hassim and the Pangeran Budrudeen, with numbers of +their families and retainers, have been basely murdered by their +treacherous kinsman, because of their attachment to the English +and their unswerving determination to put down piracy; and what is +worst of all, Mr. Brooke's arch-enemy, the subtle and indefatigable +villain Macota, the man whose accursed head was thrice saved by my +too-generous friend, has now returned triumphantly to the scene +of his former crimes, and is commissioned by the sultan to take +Mr. Brooke's life by poison, or by any other of those treacherous arts +in which there is no more consummate adept than Macota. I could trust +securely to Mr. Brooke's gallantry and skill for the protection of +his life against the attacks of open foes; and my only fears arise +when I reflect on his utter insensibility to danger, and think how +the admirable qualities of his own guileless, confiding nature may +facilitate the designs of his enemies. + +H.M.S. Hazard, from Hong Kong, having touched at Bruni about the +end of March last, was boarded by a native, who gave the captain +such information as induced him to sail with all speed for Sarawak; +and there this man made the following deposition:-- + + + + + Japper, a native of Bruni, deposes that he was sent aboard + H.M.S. Hazard by the Pangeran Muda Mahomed, to warn the captain + against treachery, and to communicate the following details to + Mr. Brooke at Sarawak. + + The Rajah Muda Hassim was raised by the sultan to the title of + Sultan Muda (or young sultan), and, together with his brothers and + followers, was living in security, when he was attacked by orders + of the sultan at night, and together with thirteen of his family, + killed in different places. Four brothers, viz. Pangeran Muda + Mahomed, Pangeran Abdul Kader, Pangeran Abdulraman, and Pangeran + Mesahat, together with several young children of the Rajah Muda + Hassim, alone survive. The deponent Japper was in attendance on + his lord, the Pangeran Budrudeen, at the time of the attack. The + Pangeran, though surprised by his enemies, fought for some time, + and when desperately wounded, retired outside his house with his + sister and another woman named Koor Salem. The deponent was there + and was wounded, as were both the women. The Pangeran Budrudeen + ordered deponent to open a keg or cask of gunpowder, which he did; + and the last thing his lord did was to take his ring from his + finger and desire the deponent to carry it to Mr. Brooke; to bid + Mr. Brooke not to forget him, and not to forget to lay his case + before the Queen of England. The deponent then quitted his lord, + who was with the two women, and immediately after his lord fired + the powder, and the three were blown up. The deponent escaped + with difficulty; and a few days afterward, the ring intrusted + to his charge, was taken from him by the sultan. The sultan, + and those with him, killed the Rajah Muda Hassim and his family, + because he was the friend of the English and wanted to suppress + piracy. The sultan has now built forts and defied the English. He + talked openly of cutting out any vessel that arrived; and two + Pangerans went down, bearing the flag of the Rajah Muda Hassim, + to look at the vessel, and to kill the captain if they could get + him ashore. The deponent had great difficulty in getting to the + ship; and should his flight be discovered, he considers the lives + of the surviving portion of the Rajah Muda Hassim's family will be + in danger. The deponent did what he was ordered, and what his late + lord, the Pangeran Budrudeen, desired him to do. The sultan had + a man ready to send, named Nakoda Kolala, to Kaluka, to request + that Pangeran Macota would kill Mr. Brooke by treachery or poison. + + + (_Signed_) + J. Brooke. + + + + +Having put Mr. Brooke on his guard, the Hazard proceeded to Singapore, +whence the H.E.I.C. war-steamer Phlegethon would be immediately +dispatched to Sarawak. + + +H h + + + + + +Suggestions for Accelerating the Communication Between Great Britain +and China. + +------------------------+-----------------+---------+-------+---------+---------+---------+------------------- + | | |Average|Interval |Interval | | + | | | Rate | under | at | Total | + Proposed Route from | | | per | Weigh. | Anchor. |Interval.| + Hong Kong to London, | |Distance,| Hour, |----+----+----+----+----+----| + and vice versa. | Course. | Miles. | Miles.| D | h | D | h | D | h | Duties at Anchor. +------------------------+-----------------+---------+-------+----+----+----+----+----+--- +---------------- +Hong Kong to Pulo Labuan| S. 2 deg.18'E. | 1009 | 7 | 6 | -- | 1 | 12 | 7 | 12 |To receive Coal.[A] +Pulo Labuan to Singapore| S. 69 23 W. | 707 | -- | 4 | 6 | -- | 12 | 4 | 18 |{To receive Coal, land and + | | | | | | | | | |{receive Mails. +Singapore to Malacca |{S. 64 48 W. 19} | 122 | -- | -- | 18 | -- | 6 | 1 | -- |To land and receive Mails. + |{N. 51 41 W. 103}| | | | | | | | | +Malacca to Pinang | N. 30 37 W. | 222 | -- | 1 | 8 | -- | 16 | 2 | -- |(To receive Coal, land and + | | | | | | | | | | receive Mails. +Pinang to Ceylon [B] |{N. 82 24 W. 303}| 1219 | -- | 7 | 6 | 2 | 12 | 8 | 18 | Ditto Ditto + |{S. 80 45 W. 916)| | -- | | | | | | | + |-----------------+---------+-------+----+----+----+----+----+----+------------------- +Ceylon to Aden {|As now performed by the Peninsular and Oriental Steam }| 11 | -- | + {| Navigation Co., detention of 2 days included }| | | +Aden to Suez | Ditto Ditto | 8 | -- | +Suez to Alexandria | Ditto all stoppages included| 3 | -- | +Alexandria to Malta | Ditto Ditto | 4 | -- | +Malta to Marseilles |As now performed by H.M. Post-Office Packets, ditto | 4 | -- | +Marseilles to London | Ditto by regular course of Post ditto | 5 | -- | + |----+----| +Total Interval from Hong Kong to London, and vice versa, by the proposed | | | + Route. Days | 59 | -- | +Average interval of transmission of China Correspondance, via Calcutta and }| | | + Bombay, during the last Twenty Overland Mails, viz. from 10th October, 1841, }| | | + to 6th May, 1843 }| 89 | -- | + |----+----| + Difference of time in favor of proposed Route Days | 30 | | +--------------------------------------------------------------------------------+----+----+------------------- + +KEY: D - Days. + h - Hours. + + + +Mem.--I have adopted an average rate of seven miles per hour as a fair +estimate of the speed well-appointed Steam Vessels, of moderate size +and power, will be enabled to accomplish and maintain, throughout +the proposed Route, at all seasons of the year; for, during the +whole distance from Pinang to Aden, and _vice versa_, neither +monsoon, from the course steered, becomes at any period a directly +adverse wind, an advantage which the route hitherto observed does +not possess. Assuming that the Hon. East India Company continue the +management of the Bombay line, and that the Peninsular and Oriental +Steam Navigation Company are encouraged to render their operations +more comprehensive, by the establishment of branch steamers between +Ceylon and Singapore, to which latter port her majesty's steam +vessels on the China station could convey the mails from Hong Kong, +this all-important object might, without difficulty, be attained. The +advantages to the Straits settlements, consequent on the adoption of +improved arrangements, require no comment; and the _practicability_ +of effecting a very considerable acceleration of the communication +with China is evident from the simple fact that the average interval +which has occurred in the transmission of letters from China, by the +last twenty Overland Mails (irrespective of the unfortunate July mail +from Bombay), exceeds the period occasionally occupied by fast-sailing +ships, in accomplishing the voyage via the Cape of Good Hope. + + +London, _14th Sept. 1843._ [33] +HENRY WISE, + +13, Austin Friars. + +P.S.--_Oct. 9th._ The arrival at Suez on the 16th ult. of the +H.C.S. Akbar, in _forty-six_ days from Hong Kong, after accomplishing +the passage down the China seas, against the S.W. monsoon--unassisted +also by any previously arranged facilities for coaling, exchange of +steamers at Aden, and other manifest advantages requisite for the +proper execution of this important service, confirms the correctness +of my estimate for performing the voyage from Hong Kong to Suez, +or _vice versa_, viz. _forty-three_ days, including stoppages. + + + + + + +APPENDIX. + + + +No. I. + +NATURAL HISTORY. + + +_Mr. Brooke's Report on the Mias._ (From the Transactions of the +Zoological Society.) + +JAMES BROOKE, Esq., to Mr. WATERHOUSE. + + +My dear Sir:--Singapore, 25th March, 1841. + +I am happy to announce the departure of five live ourang-outangs by +the ship Martin Luther, Captain Swan; and I trust they will reach you +alive. In case they die, I have directed Captain Swan to put them into +spirits, that you may still have an opportunity of seeing them. The +whole of the five are from Borneo: one large female adult from Sambas; +two, with slight cheek-callosities, from Pontiana; a small male, +without any sign of callosities, from Pontiana likewise; and the +smallest of all, a very young male with callosities, from Sadung. I +will shortly forward a fine collection of skulls and skeletons from +the northwest coast of Borneo, either shot by myself or brought by +the natives; and I beg you will do me the favor to present the live +ourangs and this collection to the Zoological Society. I have made +many inquiries and gained some information regarding these animals, +and I can, beyond a doubt, prove the existence of two, if not three, +distinct species in Borneo. + +First, I will re-state the native account: secondly, give you my own +observations; and thirdly, enter into a brief detail of the specimens +hereafter to be forwarded. + +1st. The natives of the northwest coast of Borneo are all positive as +to the existence of two distinct species, which I formerly gave you +by the names of the _Mias pappan_ and _Mias rombi_; but I have since +received information from a few natives of intelligence that there are +three sorts, and what is vulgarly called the Mias rombi is in reality +the _Mias kassar_, the rombi being a distinct and third species. The +Mias pappan is the _Simia Wurmbii_ of Mr. Owen, having callosities +on the sides of the face: the natives treat with derision the idea +of the Mias kassar, or _Simia morio_, being the female of the Mias +pappan or Simia Wurmbii; and I consider the fact can be established +so clearly that I will not trouble you with their statements: both +Malays and Dyaks are positive that the female of the Mias pappan has +cheek-callosities the same as the male; and if on inquiry it prove +to be so, the existence of three distinct species in Borneo will +be established. The existence of the Mias rombi is vouched by a few +natives only, but they were men of intelligence, and well acquainted +with the animals in the wild state. They represent the Mias rombi to +be as tall as the pappan, or even taller, but not so stout, with longer +hair, a smaller face, and no callosities either on the male or female; +and they always insisted that it was not the female of the pappan. + +The Mias kassar or Simia morio is of the same color as the Mias pappan, +but altogether smaller, and devoid of callosities either on the male +or female adults. + +By the native statements, therefore, we find three distinct species, +viz. the Mias pappan or Simia Wurmbii, the Mias kassar or Simia morio, +and the Mias rombi, which is either the _Simia Abelii_, or a fourth +species. The existence of the Sumatran ourang in Borneo is by no +means impossible; and I have already compared so many of the native +statements, that I place more confidence in them than I did formerly, +more especially as their account is in a great measure borne out by +the skulls in my possession. I had an opportunity of seeing the Mias +pappan and the Mias kassar in their native woods, and killing one of +the former and several of the latter species. The distribution of these +animals is worthy of notice, as they are found both at Pontiana and +Sambas in considerable numbers, and at Sadung on the northwest coast, +but are unknown in the intermediate country which includes the rivers +of Sarawak and Samarahan. I confess myself at a loss to account for +their absence on the Sarawak and Samarahan rivers, which abound with +fruit, and have forests similar and contiguous to the Sadung, Linga, +and other rivers. The distance from Samarahan to Sadung does not +exceed twenty-five miles; and though pretty abundant on the latter, +they are unknown on the former river. From Sadung, proceeding to the +northward and eastward, they are found for about 100 miles, but beyond +that distance do not inhabit the forests. The Mias pappan and Mias +kassar inhabit the same woods, but I never met them on the same day; +both species, according to the natives, are equally common, but from +my own experience the Mias kassar is the most plentiful. The Mias +rombi is represented as unfrequent and rarely to be met with. The +pappan is justly named _Satyrus_, from the ugly face and disgusting +callosities. The adult male I killed was seated lazily on a tree, and +when approached only took the trouble to interpose the trunk between +us, peeping at me, and dodging as I dodged. I hit him on the wrist, +and he was afterward dispatched. I send you his proportions, enormous +relative to his height; and until I came to actual measurement my +impression was that he was nearly six feet in stature. The following +is an extract from my journal relating to him, noted down directly +after he was killed:-- + +"Great was our triumph as we gazed on the huge animal dead at our feet, +and proud were we of having shot the first ourang we had seen, and +shot him in his native woods, in a Borneo forest, hitherto untrodden by +European feet. The animal was adult, having four incisors, two canines, +and ten molars in each jaw; but by his general appearance he was not +old. We were struck by the length of his arms, the enormous neck, +and the expanse of face, which altogether gave the impression of great +height, whereas it was only great power. The hair was long, reddish, +and thin; the face remarkably broad and fleshy, and on each side, in +the place of a man's whiskers, were the callosities or rather fleshy +protuberances, which I was so desirous to see, and which were nearly +two inches in thickness. The ears were small and well shaped, the nose +quite flat, mouth prominent, lips thick, teeth large and discolored, +eyes small and roundish, face and hands black, the latter being very +powerful. The following are the dimensions: + + + ft. in. +Height from head to heel 4 1 +Length of foot 1 0 +Ditto hand 0 10 1/2 +Length of arm from shoulder-blade to finger-end 3 5 3/4 +Shoulder-blade to elbow 1 6 +Elbow to wrist 1 1 1/2 +Hip to heel 1 9 +Head to os coccygia 2 5 1/2 +Across the shoulders 1 5 1/2 +Circumference of neck 2 4 +Ditto below the ribs 3 3 1/4 +Ditto under the arms 3 0 +From forehead to chin 0 9 3/4 +Across the face, below the eyes, including callosities 1 1 +From ear to ear across the top of the head 0 9 1/2 +From ear to ear behind the head 0 9 3/4 + + +The natives asserted the animal to be a small one; but I am skeptical +of their ever attaining the growth of a tall man, though I bear in mind +that full-grown animals will probably differ as much in height as man." + +Some days after this, and about thirty miles distant, I was fortunate +enough to kill two adult females (one with her young), and a male +nearly adult, all the Mias kassar. The young male was not measured, +owing to my having waded up to my neck in pursuit of him, and thereby +destroyed my paper and lost my measure; but he certainly did not exceed +3 feet, while the two females were about 3 ft. 1 in. and 3 ft. 2 in. in +height. The male was just cutting his two posterior molars: the color +of all resembled that of the Mias pappan, but the difference between +the two animals was apparent even to our seamen. The kassar has no +callosities either on the male or female, whereas the young pappans +dispatched by the Martin Luther (one of them not a year old, with two +first molars) show them prominently. The great difference between the +kassar and the pappan in size would prove at once the distinction of +the two species; the kassar being a small, slight animal, by no means +formidable in his appearance, with hands and feet proportioned to the +body, and they do not approach the gigantic extremities of the pappan +either in size or power; and, in short, a moderately strong man would +readily overpower one, when he would not stand the shadow of a chance +with the pappan. Beside these decisive differences may be mentioned +the appearance of the face, which in the Mias kassar is more prominent +in the lower part, and the eyes exteriorly larger, in proportion to +the size of the animal, than in the pappan. The color of the skin in +the adult pappan is black, while the kassar, in his face and hands, +has the dirty color common to the young of both species. If further +evidence was wanted, the skulls will fully prove the distinction of +species; for the skulls of two adult animals compared will show a +difference in size alone which must preclude all supposition of their +being one species. Mr. Owen's remarks are, however, so conclusive, +that I need not dwell on this point; and with a suite of skulls, +male and female, from the adult to the infant, of the Mias kassar, +which I shall have the pleasure to forward, there can remain, I should +think, little further room for discussion. I may mention, however, +that two young animals I had in my possession alive, one a kassar, +the other a pappan, fully bore out these remarks by their proportionate +size. The pappan, with two molars, showed the callosities distinctly, +and was as tall and far stouter than the kassar with three molars, +while the kassar had no vestige of the callosities. Their mode of +progression likewise was different, as the kassar doubled his fists +and dragged his hind quarters after him, while the pappan supported +himself on the open hands sideways placed on the ground, and moved one +leg before the other in the erect sitting attitude; but this was only +observed in the two young ones, and cannot be considered as certainly +applicable to all. + +On the habits of the ourangs, as far as I have been able to observe +them, I may remark, that they are as dull and as slothful as can +well be conceived, and on no occasion when pursuing them did they +move so fast as to preclude my keeping pace with them easily through +a moderately clear forest; and even when obstructions below (such +as wading up to the neck) allowed them to get way some distance, +they were sure to stop and allow us to come up. I never observed the +slightest attempt at defence; and the wood, which sometimes rattled +about our ears, was broken by their weight, and not thrown, as some +persons represent. If pushed to extremity, however, the pappan could +not be otherwise than formidable; and one unfortunate man, who with a +party was trying to catch a large one alive, lost two of his fingers, +beside being severely bitten on the face, while the animal finally +beat off his pursuers and escaped. When they wish to catch an adult, +they cut down a circle of trees round the one on which he is seated, +and then fell that also, and close before he can recover himself, +and endeavor to bind him. + +In a small work entitled "The Menageries," published in 1838, there +is a good account of the Borneon ourang, with a brief extract from +Mr. Owen's valuable paper on the Simia morio; but, after dwelling on +the lazy and apathetic disposition of the animal, it states in the same +page that they can make their way amid the branches of the trees with +surprising agility; whereas they are the slowest and least active of +all the monkey tribe, and their motions are surprisingly awkward and +uncouth. The natives on the northwest coast entertain no dread, and +always represent the ourangs as harmless and inoffensive animals; and +from what I saw, they would never attack a man unless brought to the +ground. The rude hut which they are stated to build in the trees would +be more properly called a seat or nest, for it has no roof or cover +of any sort. The facility with which they form this seat is curious, +and I had an opportunity of seeing a wounded female weave the branches +together, and seat herself within a minute; she afterward received +our fire without moving, and expired in her lofty abode, whence it +cost us much trouble to dislodge her. I have seen some individuals +with nails on the posterior thumbs, but generally speaking, they are +devoid of them: of the five animals sent home, two have the nails, +and three are without them; one has the nail well formed, and in the +other it is merely rudimentary. The length of my letter precludes my +dwelling on many particulars which, as I have not seen the recent +publications on the subject, might be mere repetitions; and I will +only mention, as briefly as I can, the skulls of these animals in my +possession. From my late sad experience I am induced to this, that +some brief record may be preserved from shipwreck. These skulls may +be divided into three distinct sorts. The first presents two ridges, +one rising from each frontal bone, which, joining on the top of the +head, form an elevated crest, which runs backward to the cerebral +portion of the skull. + +The second variety is the Simia morio; and nothing need be added to +Mr. Owen's account, save that it presents no ridge whatever beyond the +frontal part of the head. No. 9 in the collection is the skull of an +adult male: No. 2 the male, nearly adult, killed by myself: Nos. 11 +and 3 adult females, killed by myself: No. 12 a young male, with three +molars, killed by myself: No. 21 a young male, died aboard, with three +molars: No. 19, young male, died aboard, with two molars. There are +many other skulls of the Simia morio which exactly coincide with this +suite, and this suite so remarkably coincides through the different +stages of age, one with another, that no doubt can exist of the +Simia morio being a distinct species. The different character of the +skull, its small size and small teeth, put the matter beyond doubt, +and completely establish Mr. Owen's acute and triumphant argument, +drawn from a single specimen. + +The third distinction of the skulls is, that the ridges rising from the +frontal bones do not meet, but converge toward the top of the head, +and again diverge toward the posterior portion of the skull. These +ridges are less elevated than in the first-mentioned skulls, but the +size of the adult skulls is equal, and both present specimens of aged +animals. For a long time I was inclined to think the skulls with the +double ridge were the females of the animals with the single and more +prominent ridge; but No. 1 (already described as killed by myself) +will show that the double ridge belongs to an adult and not young +male animal, and that it belongs to the Simia Wurmbii with the huge +callosities. The distinction therefore cannot be a distinction of +sex, unless we suppose the skulls with the greater development of +the single ridge to belong to the female, which is improbable in the +highest degree. The skulls with the double and less elevated ridges +belong, as proved by No. 1, to the Simia Wurmbii; and I am of opinion +the single and higher ridge must be referred to another and distinct +species, unless we can account for this difference on the score of +age. This, I conceive, will be found impossible, as Nos. 7 and 20 +are specimens similar to No. 1, with the double and less elevated +ridges decidedly old, and Nos. 4 and 5 are specimens of the single +high ridge, likewise decidedly old. + +These three characters in the skulls coincide with the native +statements of there being three distinct species in Borneo, and this +third Borneon species may probably be found to be the Simia Abelii, or +Sumatran ourang. This probability is strengthened by the adult female +on her way home: her color is dark brown, with black face and hands; +and in color of hair, contour, and expression, she differs from the +male ourangs with the callosities to a degree that makes me doubt her +being the female of the same species. I offer you these remarks for +fear of accident; but should the specimens, living and dead, arrive +in safety, they will give a fresh impetus to the inquiry, and on my +next return to Borneo I shall, in all probability, be able to set +the question at rest, whether there be two or three species in that +country. Believe me, my dear sir, with best wishes, to remain, + + +Yours very truly, J. Brooke. + + +Borneo, like Celebes, teems with Natural History unknown to European +science; and Mr. Brooke has sent some remarkable specimens to England, +though his own large collection was, unfortunately, wrecked on its +voyage homeward. Every arrival, however, is now adding to the stores +we already possess. The British Museum has been much enriched, even +within the last year, with rare specimens of zoology and botany; and +at the Entomological Society there have been exhibited and described +many curious insects hitherto strange and unclassified. + + + + + +No. II. + +PHILOLOGY. + + +It was intended in this work to convey to the studious in +philology,--upon which science, rationally investigated, so +much depends on our ability to ascertain the origin and trace the +earliest relations of mankind,--as copious a vocabulary of the Dyak +language, with definitions of meaning and cognate references, as +might be considered a useful contribution to that important branch +of learning. But various considerations have induced us to forego +the design; and not the least of them has been, not the difficulty, +but the impossibility of reducing the whole collection to a system, +or of laying down any certain rule of orthography in this Oriental +confusion. Nearly all the vowels, for example, have been found of +equal value; and as they have but one general Malay name, so it +happens that (for instance) the consonants _b d_might be pronounced +with the intervening sound, _bad_, _bed_, _bid_, _bod_, _bud_, and +sundry variations beside, unknown to the English tongue. This will in a +great degree account for the universally vexatious, because puzzling, +spelling, inflections, and pronunciation of Eastern names, which +is so injurious to the literature and knowledge of those countries +among Europeans. + +The vowel-sounds adopted are: + + _a_ like _a_ in _father_. + _e_ " _a_ in _fan_. + _i_ " Italian _i_, or _ee_ in _thee_. + _i_ " _i_ in _pin_. + _o_ " _o_ in _spoke_. + _u_ " _oo_ in _cool_. + _u_ " u in run. + _y_ occasionally like _i_. + _ow_ (_ou_) like _ow_ in _cow_. + + +The final _k_ in Malayan is frequently mute: thus Dyak is pronounced +Dyaa, with the slightest possible aspiration. + +_gn_ is a liquid sound. + +We add an alphabetical list of some of the words which have occurred +in the preceding pages. + + +_Arafuras_, or _Haraforas_, natives of Papua. + +_Balanian_, wild tribes in Borneo. + +_Bandar_, or _Bandhara_, treasurer, high steward, high officer +of state. + +_Basaya_, tribes in the interior of Borneo Proper, locating near and +resembling the Murut. + +_Battara,_ one of the Dyak names of God (the Hindu _Avatara_). + +_Borneo_, the island of, written "Bruni" by the inhabitants. + +_Borneo Proper,_ the northern and northwestern part of the island; +an independent Malay state. + +_Borneons_, the Malay inhabitants of Borneo Proper. + +_Bruni_, the native name for Borneo. + +_Bugis_, natives of Celebes. + +_Bulan_, the Moon, a poetical title of honor to a pirate-chief. + +_Campong_, a native village, or town. + +_Datu_, a cape or point of land to the northwest of the river +Banjamassim. + +_Datus_, strictly, native chiefs, heads of tribes. + +_Dusun,_ agricultural villagers on the northern extremity of Borneo. + +_Dyaks_; or Dyak, aborigines of Borneo, and generally pronounced Dyah. + +_Dyak Darrat,_ Land Dyaks. + +_Dyak Laut,_ Sea Dyaks. + +_Gantong_, a Malay measure for rice. + +_Gunong_, a mountain. + +_Hadji_, a Mahomedan who has made a pilgrimage to Mecca. + +_Haraforas_, or _Arafuras_, natives of Papua. + +_Idaans_ [Kadiens], Borneon tribes, and the name generally given to +most of the varieties of the Indian Archipelago. + +_Illanuns_ or _Lanuns_, pirates inhabiting the small cluster of +islands between Borneo and Magindano. + +_Jovata_, a Dyak name of God, of Hindu origin. + +_Kadiens_, Borneon tribes, Mahomedans, the Idaan of preceding voyagers +and writers. See _Idaans_. + +_Kalamantan_, an original name of Borneo. + +_Kanowit_, wild tribes in Borneo. + +_Kaya_, a title of authority, Orang Kaya de Gadong, chief man of +Gadong. + +_Kayans_, the most powerful and warlike people of Borneo, living +inland. + +_Kuching_, the former name of the town of Sarawak. + +_Lubuan_, the island off Borneo river, ceded by the sultan to the +British crown. + +_Lelas_, guns. + +_Magindano_, an island off the northeast of Borneo, the natives of +which are pirates. + +_Makassar_, the straits of, usually written Macassar, but more +accurately Mangkassar. + +_Malays_, settled on the Malayan peninsula, coasts of Borneo, &c. &c., +a race of seafaring character, often piratical, and conquerors of +various native tribes in the Indian Archipelago. + +_Malukus_, pirates from a bay in Gillolo, whose country is in the +possession of the Dutch. + +_Marundum_, an island off Borneo. + +_Matari_, or _Mata-hari_(the eye of day), the Sun, a poetical title +of honor to a pirate-chief. + +_Mias Rombi_ and _M. Pappan_, two species of ourang-outang, determined +by Mr. Brooke. + +_Millanows_, a tribe resembling the Kayans, living near the river Meri, +river Bentulu, tolerably civilized, and fairer than the Malays. + +_Minkokas_, a wild tribe near the Bay of Boni. + +_Morotaba_ river, one of the mouths of the Sarawak. + +_Montrado_, a very large and populous Chinese settlement near Point +Data. + +_Murut_, inhabitants of the interior of Borneo Proper. + +_Natunas_, islands off Borneo. + +_Ondong-ondong_, the written law of Borneo. + +_Orang_, a man. + +_Orang outang_, a wild man. + +_Pangeran_, or _Pangiran_, the title of a high Malay authority. + +_Panglima_, the head warrior of a Dyak tribe. + +_Patingi_, or _Patingus_, a high local officer. + +_Patobong_, the name of the ranjows and sudas, defences in war. + +_Patakan Dyaks_, said by the Malays to be cannibals. + +_Pontiana_, one of the finest rivers in Borneo; also the name of +natives on its banks. The Dutch have a settlement on this river. + +_Ranjows_, bamboo-spikes stuck in the ground to wound the feet of +attacking enemies, or concealed in pits to wound or destroy them. + +_Rhio_, a Malay settlement, under Dutch control. + +_Sadung_, a river adjoining the Sarawak. + +_Sakarra_, a Dyak god, residing in the Pleiades. + +_Sakarran_, a river like the Sarebus (which see), with a similar +native population on its banks. + +_Satigi_, a wooden spear, or dart. + +_Sampan_, a small prahu. + +_Sarebus_, a river flowing into the deep bay between Tanjong Sipang +and Tanjong Sirak. + +_Sarebus_, powerful Dyak tribes and pirates, located on the above, +and other rivers flowing into the bay. They have thrown off the Malay +yoke, and plunder as far as Celebes. + +_Seriff_, or _Sheriff_, a high Malay title, peculiar to persons of +Arab descent. + +_Sibnowans_, or _Sibnyons_, Mr. Brooke's favorite tribe of Dyaks, +of superior character. + +_Singe_, Dyak tribes. + +_Songi Besar_, large river. + +_Sooloo_, on the northeast of Borneo, a powerful piratical nest, +the natives of which massacred the garrison of Balambangan in 1775. + +_Sudahs_, defences to wound the feet of attacking enemies. + +_Sumpitan_, or _Simpote_, a tube seven or eight feet in length, +through which the Borneons blow small sharp-pointed arrows. + +_Tanjong_, a point of land. + +_Turaj_, or _Tarajahs_, natives of Celebes. + +_Tatows_, wild tribes in the interior of Borneo. + +_Tiran_, natives on the north of Borneo, reported (on doubtful +authority) to be pirates and cannibals. + +_Tuan_, sir, an exclamation of assent to an approved speaker, instead +of "hear, hear," or "yes." + +_Tuan Besar_, sir, great, great chief, higher applause and deference. + +_Tumangong_, a local Malay officer. + +_Tumbilans_, a beautiful group of about 150 small islands between +Borneo and Singapore. + +_Tuppa_, a Dyak god. + +_Wakil_, a deputy. + +_Zedong_, like the Tiran, which see. + + + + +No. III. + +_Proposed Exploring Expedition to the Asiatic Archipelago, by_ James +Brooke, Esq. 1838. + + +The voyage I made to China opened an entirely new scene, and showed +me what I had never seen before, savage life and savage nature. I +inquired, and I read, and I became more and more assured that there +was a large field of discovery and adventure open to any man daring +enough to enter upon it. Just take a map and trace a line over the +Indian Archipelago, with its thousand unknown islands and tribes. Cast +your eye over the vast island of New Guinea, where the foot of European +has scarcely, if ever, trod. Look at the northern coast of Australia, +with its mysterious Gulf of Carpentaria; a survey of which, it is +supposed, would solve the great geographical question respecting the +rivers of the mimic continent. Place your finger on Japan, with its +exclusive and civilized people; it lies an unknown lump on our earth, +and an undefined line on our charts! Think of the northern coast of +China, willing, as is reported, to open an intercourse and trade +with Europeans, spite of their arbitrary government. Stretch your +pencil over the Pacific Ocean, which Cook himself declares a field +of discovery for ages to come! Proceed to the coast of South America, +from the region of gold-dust to the region of furs--the land ravaged +by the cruel Spaniard and the no less cruel Bucaneer--the scene of +the adventures of Drake and the descriptions of Dampier. The places +I have enumerated are mere names, with no specific ideas attached to +them: lands and seas where the boldest navigators gained a reputation, +and where hundreds may yet do so, if they have the same courage and +the same perseverance. Imagination whispers to ambition that there +are yet lands unknown which might be discovered. Tell me, would not +a man's life be well spent--tell me, would it not be well sacrificed, +in an endeavor to explore these regions? When I think on dangers and +death, I think of them only because they would remove me from such +a field for ambition, for energy, and for knowledge. + +Borneo, Celebes, Sooloo, the Moluccas, and the islands of the Straits +of Sunda and Banka, compose what is called the Malayan group; and +the Malays located on the sea-shores of these and other islands may +with certainty be classed as belonging to one people. It is well +known, however, that the interior of these countries is inhabited +by various tribes, differing from the Malays and each other, and +presenting numerous gradations of early civilization: the Dyaks of +Borneo, the Papuans of New Guinea, and others, beside the black race +scattered over the islands. Objects of traffic here as elsewhere +present interesting subjects of inquiry; and while our acquaintance +with every other portion of the globe, from the passage of the Pole +to the navigation of the Euphrates, has greatly extended, it is matter +of surprise that we know scarcely anything of these people beyond the +bare fact of their existence, and remain altogether ignorant of the +geographical features of the countries they inhabit. Countries which +present an extended field for Christianity and commerce, which none +surpass in fertility, rich beyond the Americas in mineral productions, +and unrivaled in natural beauty, continue unexplored to the present +day; and, spite of the advantages which would probably result, have +failed to attract the attention they so well deserve. The difficulty +of the undertaking will scarcely account for its non-performance, +if we consider the voluntary sacrifices made on the shrine of African +research, or the energy displayed and the sufferings encountered by +the explorers of the Polar regions: yet the necessity of prosecuting +the voyage in an armed vessel, the wildness of the interior tribes, +the lawless ferocity of the Malays, and other dangers, would prevent +most individuals from fixing on this field for exertion, and points +it out as one which could best and most fully be accomplished by +Government or some influential body. + +It is not my object to enter into any detail of the past history of +the Malayan nations, but I may refer to the undoubted facts that they +have been in a state of deterioration since we first became acquainted +with them; and the records of our early voyagers, together with the +remains of antiquity still visible in Java and Sumatra, prove that once +flourishing nations have now ceased to exist, and that countries once +teeming with human life are now tenantless and deserted. The causes +of such lamentable change need only be alluded to; but it is fit to +remark, that while the standard of education is unfurled, and dreams +are propagated of the progressive advancement of the human race, a +large part of the globe has been gradually relapsing and allowed to +relapse into barbarism. Whether the early decay of the Malay states, +and their consequent demoralization, arose from the introduction of +Mahommedism, or resulted from the intrigues of European ambition, it +were useless to discuss; but we are very certain that this "Eden of the +Eastern wave" has been reduced to a state of anarchy and confusion, +as repugnant to every dictate of humanity as it is to the prospect +of commercial advantage. + +Borneo and Celebes, and indeed the greater portion of the islands +of the Malayan Archipelago, are still unknown, and the apathy of two +centuries still reigns supreme with the enlightened people of England; +while they willingly make the most expensive efforts favorable to +science, commerce, or Christianity in other quarters, the locality +which eminently combines these three objects is alone neglected +and alone uncared for. It has unfortunately been the fate of our +Indian possessions to have labored under the prejudice and contempt +of a large portion of the well-bred community. While the folly of +fashion requires an acquaintance with the deserts of Africa, and a +most ardent thirst for a knowledge of the usages of Timbuctoo, it at +the same time justifies the most profound ignorance of all matters +connected with the government and geography of our vast acquisitions +in Hindoostan. The Indian Archipelago has fully shared this neglect; +and even the tender philanthropy of the present day, which originates +such multifarious schemes for the amelioration of doubtful evils, +which shudders at the prolongation of apprenticeship for a single year +in the West, is blind to the existence of slavery in its worst and most +aggravated form in the East. Not a single prospectus is spread abroad; +not a single voice is upraised to relieve the darkness of Paganism, +and the horrors of the Eastern slave-trade. While the trumpet-tongue +of many an orator excites thousands to the rational and charitable +objects of converting the Jews and reclaiming the Gipsys; while the +admirable exertions of missionary enterprise in the Ausonian climes +of the South Sea have invested them with worldly power as well as +religious influence; while we admire the torrent of devotional and +philosophical exertion, we cannot help deploring that the zeal and +attention of the leaders of these charitable crusades have never +been directed to the countries under consideration. These unhappy +countries have failed to rouse attention or excite commiseration; +and as they sink lower and lower, they afford a striking proof how +civilization may be dashed, and how the purest and richest lands +under the sun may be degraded and brutalized by a continued course of +oppression and misrule. It is under these circumstances that I have +considered individual exertion may be usefully applied to rouse the +zeal of slumbering philanthropy, and to lead the way to an increased +knowledge of the Indian Archipelago. Such an exertion will be made at +some cost and some sacrifice; and I shall here quit the general topic, +and confine myself to the specific objects of my intended voyage. + +It must be premised, however, that any plan previously decided on +must always be subject during its execution to great modifications in +countries where the population is always rude and often hostile, and +where the influence of climate is sometimes so fatally opposed to the +progress of inquiry. Local information, likewise, frequently renders +such a change both advisable and advantageous; and circumstances, as +they spring up, too often influence us beyond the power of foresight, +more especially in my own case, where the utmost care would still +leave the means very inadequate to the full accomplishment of the +proposed undertaking. With a small vessel properly equipped, and +provided with the necessary instruments for observation, and the means +for collecting specimens in natural history, it is proposed in the +first instance to proceed to Singapore, which may be considered as +head-quarters for the necessary intervals of refreshment and repose, +and for keeping open a certain communication with Europe. Here the +best local information can be obtained, interpreters procured, the +crew augmented for any particular service; and here, if needful, a +small vessel of native construction may be added to the expedition, +to facilitate the objects in view. An acquaintance may likewise be +formed with the more respectable Bugis merchants, and their good-will +conciliated in the usual mode, viz., by civility and presents, so as +to remove any misconceived jealousy on the score of trading rivalry, +and to induce a favorable report of our friendly intentions in their +own country, and at the places where they may touch. The Royalist +will probably reach Singapore in the month of March, 1839, at the +latter end of the northwest, or rainy monsoon. The delay consequent +on effecting the objects above mentioned, beside gaining a general +acquaintance with the natural history and trade of the settlement, +and some knowledge of the Malay language, will usefully occupy the +time until the setting in of the southeast, or dry monsoon. It may be +incidentally mentioned, however, that in the vicinity of Singapore +there are many islands imperfectly known, and which, during the +intervals of the rainy season, will afford interesting occupation. I +allude, more especially, to the space between the Straits of Rhio and +those of Duryan, and likewise to the island called Bintang, which, +although laid down as one large island, is probably composed of small +ones, divided by navigable straits; a better acquaintance with which +might facilitate the voyage from Singapore to the more eastern islands, +by bringing to light other passages beside those of Rhio and Duryan; +and, at any rate, would add something to our geographical knowledge +in the immediate vicinity of our settlement. On the commencement of +the healthy season I propose sailing from Singapore, and proceeding +without loss of time to Malludu Bay, at the north end of Borneo. This +spot has been chosen for the first essay; and in a country every part +of which is highly interesting, and almost unknown, the mere fact of +its being a British possession gives it a prior claim to attention. + +The objects in view may be briefly mentioned. 1. A general knowledge of +the bay, and the correct position of various points--more especially +the two principal headlands at its entrance, so as to determine its +outline. The westernmost of these headlands, called Sampanmange, will +likewise determine the extreme north point of Borneo. 2. Inquiries for +the settlement of Cochin Chinese, reported, on Earl's authority, to be +fixed in the vicinity of Bankoka: an intercourse will, if possible, +be opened with this settlement, if in existence. 3. The rivers which +flow into the bay will be carefully and minutely explored, and an +attempt will be made to penetrate into the interior as far as the lake +of Kini Ballu. 4. For the same purpose, every endeavor will be used to +open a communication with the aboriginal inhabitants of the country, +and every means employed to conciliate their good opinion; and (if +the ceremony exists in this part of the island) to enter into the +bonds of fraternity (described by Mr. Dalton) with some of the chiefs. + +I speak with great diffidence about penetrating into the interior of +this country, for I am well aware of the insurmountable difficulties +which the hard reality often presents, which are previously +overlooked and easily overcome in the smoothness of paper, or the +luxury of a drawing-room. The two points to be chiefly relied upon +for this purpose are, a friendly intercourse with the natives, and +the existence of navigable rivers. It is mentioned by Sir Stamford +Raffles, on native authority, that a land communication, of not more +than forty miles, exists between Malludu Bay and Lake Kini Ballu; +but neither this computation, nor any other derived from the natives, +however intelligent otherwise, can be relied on; for the inhabitants of +these countries are generally ignorant of any measure for distance; and +their reckoning by time is so vague, as to defy a moderately-certain +conclusion. The fact, however, of the vicinity of the lake to the bay +may be concluded; and it follows, as a reasonable inference, that the +river or rivers flowing into the bay communicate with the lake. The +existence of such rivers, which were from the locality to have been +expected, is vouched for by Captain Forrest. "Most of this north part +of Borneo (he says), granted to the English East India Company by the +Sooloos, is watered by noble rivers: those that discharge themselves +into Malludu Bay are not barred." It is by one or other of these rivers +that I should hope to penetrate as far as the lake and mountain of +Kini Ballu, and into the country of the Idaan. I have not been able to +learn that any Malay towns of importance are situated in the bight of +Malludu Bay, and their absence will render a friendly communication +with the aborigines a matter of comparative ease. The advantages +likely to result from such friendly relations are so evident, that +I need not dwell upon them; though the mode of effecting such an +intercourse must be left to the thousand contingencies which govern +all, and act so capriciously on the tempers of the savage races. The +utmost forbearance, and a liberality guided by prudence, so as not +to excite too great a degree of cupidity, appear the fundamental +rules for managing men in a low state of civilization. The results +of an amicable understanding are as uncertain as its commencement; +for they depend on the enterprise of the individual, and the power +of the native tribe into whose hands he may have fallen. I will not, +therefore, enter into a visionary field of discovery; but it appears +to me certain that, without the assistance of the natives, no small +party can expect to penetrate far into a country populous by report, +and in many parts thickly covered with wood. Without entertaining +any exaggerated expectation, I trust that something may be added +to our geographical knowledge of the sea-coast of this bay, its +leading features, productions, rivers, anchorages, and inhabitants, +the prospect of trade, and the means of navigation; and although my +wishes lead me strongly to penetrate as far as the lake of Kini Ballu, +yet the obstacles which may be found to exist to the fulfillment of +this desire will induce me to rest satisfied with the more moderate +and reasonable results. + +It may not be superfluous to notice here, that a foregone conclusion +appears to be spread abroad regarding the aboriginal (so called) +inhabitants of Borneo, and that they are usually considered and +mentioned under the somewhat vague appellation of Dyaks. They are +likewise commonly pronounced as originating from the same stock as the +Arafuras of Celebes and New Guinea, and radically identical with the +Polynesian race. The conclusion is not in itself highly improbable, +but certainly premature, as the facts upon which it is built are so +scanty and doubtful as to authorize no such structure. On an island +of the vast size of Borneo, races radically distinct might exist; +and at any rate, the opposite conclusion is hardly justifiable, from +the specimens of language or the physical appearance of the tribes +of the southern portion of the country. We have Malay authority for +believing that there are many large tribes in the interior, differing +greatly in their degree of civilization, though all alike removed from +the vicinity of a superior people. We have the Dyaks of the south; the +Idaan of the north; the Kagins; and a race little better than monkeys, +who live in trees, eat without cooking, are hunted by the other tribes, +and would seem to exist in the lowest conceivable grade of humanity. If +we may trust these accounts, these latter people resemble in many +particulars the Orang Benua, or aborigines of the peninsula; but the +Dyaks and Idaans are far superior, living in villages, cultivating +the ground, and possessing cattle. Beside these, likewise, we have +the names of several other tribes or people; and, in all probability, +many exist in the interior with whom we are unacquainted. + +There are strong reasons for believing that the Hindoo religion, +which obtained so extensively in Java and Sumatra, and yet survives at +Bali and Lombock, was likewise extended to Borneo; and some authors +have conceived grounds for supposing a religion anterior even to +this. If only a portion of these floating opinions should be true, +and the truth can only be tested by inquiry, we may fairly look for the +descendants of the Hindoo dynasty as well as an aboriginal people. It +never seems to have occurred to any one to compare the Dyaks with the +people of Bali and Lombock. We know indeed but little of the former; +but both races are fair, good-looking, and gentle. Again, respecting +the concluded identity of the Dyaks and the Arafuras, it is clear we +have a very limited knowledge indeed of the former; and, I may ask, +what do we know of the Arafuras? + +In short, I feel as reluctant to embrace any preconceived theory as +I am to adopt the prevailing notion on this subject; for it requires +a mass of facts, of which we are wholly deficient, to arrive at +anything approaching a reasonable conclusion. To return, however, +to the proceedings of the Royalist, I would remark, that it depends +greatly on the time passed in Malludu Bay whether our next endeavor +be prosecuted at Abai on the western, or Tusan Abai on the eastern +coast. The object in visiting Abai would he chiefly to penetrate to +the lake, which, on the authority of Dalrymple and Burton, is not +far distant thence, by a water communication; but should any success +have attended similar efforts from Malludu Bay, this project will be +needless, as in that case the enterprise will have been prosecuted to +the westward, and reach to the vicinity of Abai. As Kaminis is the +limit of the British territory to the westward, so Point Kaniungan, +situated to the southward of the bay of Sandakan, forms the eastern +boundary; and a line drawn from coast to coast between these points +is represented as including our possessions. A reference to the chart +will show the extent to be considerable; and the eastern coast from +Malludu Bay to Point Kaniungan is so very little known, that it is +highly desirable to become acquainted with its general features and +conformation, and to seek thence the means of gaining an inlet into +the interior, should it be denied at Malludu Bay. + +The reported proximity of Kini Ballu to Malludu Bay, and likewise to +Abai would (supposing it is anything like the size it is affirmed to +be) lead us to expect that it cannot be far distant from the eastern +coast; and it is but reasonable to conclude that some rivers or streams +discharge themselves into the sea in the numerous indentations that +abound on this shore. However this may be, the coast, with its bays +and islands and bold headlands, is one of great interest, and almost +unknown; and the careful inspection of it as far as Point Kaniungan +will, I trust, add something to our knowledge. The longitude of +Point Kaniungan and Point Unsang will likewise determine the eastern +extremity of Borneo. + +Much more might be added on this topic, especially of the reported +communication by a line of lakes from Malludu Bay to Banjarmassim, +which, if true, would in all probability place some of these lakes +near particular points of the east coast, as the whole line, from the +relative position of the two extremes, must be on the eastern side +of the island. These reports, and the various surmises which arise +from them, are rather matters for verification than discussion; and I +will therefore only add that, tempted by success, I shall not devote +less than a year and a half to this object; but, in case of finding +a sickly climate, or meeting with a decidedly hostile population, +I shall more easily abandon the field, and turn to others of not less +interest, and perhaps of less risk. + +Equal to Borneo in riches, and superior in picturesque beauty to any +part of the Archipelago, is the large and eccentric country of the +Bugis, called Celebes. So deep are the indentations of its coasts, +that the island may be pronounced as being composed of a succession +of peninsulas, nearly uniting in a common center in the district of +Palos; and thus, by the proximity of every part to the sea, offering +great facilities for brief and decisive interior excursions. The +Dutch are in possession of Makassar, and had formerly settlements +on the northwest coast and in the bay of Sawa. Their power appears, +however, never to have been very extensively acknowledged; and +at present I have not been able to meet with any account of the +condition of their factories. This information will probably be gained +at Singapore. Avoiding the Dutch settlements, I propose limiting my +inquiries to the northern and northeastern portion of the island, more +especially the great bay of Gunong Tella. It is impossible to state +here the direction of these inquiries, or any definite object to which +they should be turned, as I am acquainted with no author who speaks +of the country, save in a general and vague manner. It is reported +as rich, fertile, mountainous, strikingly beautiful, and possessed of +rivers; abounding in birds, and inhabited, like Borneo, by wild tribes +in the interior, and by the Bugis on the sea-shores and entrance of +rivers. The character of the Bugis, though so variously represented, +gives me strong hopes of rendering them, by care and kindness, useful +instruments in the prosecution of these researches; for all writers +agree that they are active, hardy, enterprising, and commercial; and +it is seldom that a people possessing such characteristics are deaf +to the suggestions of self-interest or kindly feeling. The arrogance, +and especially the indolence, of the Malays, counteracts the influence +of these strong incentives; and the impulse which governs such rude +tribes as the Dyaks and Arafuras is a dangerous weapon, which cuts all +ways, and often when least anticipated. The Badjows, or sea-gipsys, +are another race on whom some dependence may be placed. Mr. Earl, +who had a personal acquaintance with this tribe, and could speak their +language, always expressed to me a degree of confidence in their good +faith, which must have had some grounds. + +I may here conclude the first stage of the expedition, during the +progress of which the head-quarters will be fixed at Singapore. During +some of the intervals I hope to see Manilla, and to acquire a cursory +knowledge of the unexplored tract at the southern extremity of Celebes, +called in Norie's general chart the Tiger Islands. + +The time devoted to the objects above mentioned must, as I have before +said, be regulated by the degree of fortune which attends them; for, +cheered by success, I should not readily abandon the field; yet, if +persecuted by climate, or other serious detriments, I shall frequently +shift the ground, to remove myself beyond such evil influence. It +is scarcely needful to continue a detail of projects so distant, +having already carved out for myself a work which I should be proud to +perform, and which is already as extended as the chances of human life +and human resolves will warrant. The continuation of the voyage would +lead me to take the Royalist to Timor or Port Essington, thence making +excursions to the Arru Isles, Timor Laut, and the southern shores +of New Guinea. That part of the coast contiguous to Torres Straits I +am particularly desirous of visiting; as it has been suggested to me +by Mr. Earl, and I think with reason, that a better channel than the +one we are at present acquainted with may be found there. That such +a channel exists, and will be discovered when the coast is surveyed, +I entertain but little doubt; but the navigation is hazardous, and +must, from the westward, be attempted with great caution. + +My own proceedings must, of course, be regulated by the discoveries +previously made by Captain Wickham or others; and as this gentleman +has orders to survey Torres Straits, the field may be well trodden +before I reach it. The rest of the voyage I shall consider as one +merely of pleasure, combining such utility as circumstances will +permit. It is probable that I shall visit our Australian settlements; +glance at the islands of the Pacific; and return to Europe round +Cape Horn. Before concluding, I may observe, that there are points +of inquiry which may be useful to the studies of the learned, which +(provided the process be moderately simple) I shall be willing to make, +and I shall always be happy to receive any directions or suggestions +regarding them. I allude to observations on the tides, to geology, +to the branches of natural history, &c. &c., for the general inquirer +often neglects or overlooks highly intersting facts, from his attention +not having been called to them. The specimens of natural history will +be forwarded home on every visit to Singapore; and the information +will be sent ot the Geographical Society, and may always, if it be of +any value, be used as freely as it is communicated. In like manner, +the objects of natural history will be open to any person who is at +all interested in such pursuits. I cannot but express my regret, +that from pecuniary considerations as well as the small size of +the vessel, and the limited quantity of provision she carries, I +am unable to take a naturalist and draughtsman; but I should always +hail with pleasure any scientific person who joined me abroad, or who +happened to be in the countries at the time; and I may venture to +promise him every encouragement and facility in the prosecution of +his pursuits. I embark upon the expedition with great cheerfulness, +with a stout vessel, a good crew, and the ingredients of success as +far as the limited scale of the undertaking will permit; and I cast +myself upon the waters--like Mr. Southey's little book--but whether +the world will know me after many days, is a question which, hoping +the best, I cannot answer with any positive degree of assurance. + + + + + +No. IV. + + +_Sketch of Borneo, or Pulo Kalamantan, by J. Hunt_, Esq. + +(Communicated, in 1812, to the Honourable Sir Thomas Stamford Raffles, +late Lieutenant-Governor of Java.) + + +The island of Borneo extends from 7 deg. 7' north to 4 deg. 12' south latitude, +and from 108 deg. 45' to 119 deg. 25' east longitude; measuring at its extreme +length nine hundred miles, at its greatest breadth seven hundred, +and in circumference three thousand. It is bounded on the north by the +Solo seas, on the east by the Straits of Macassar, on the south by the +Java, and on the west by the China seas. Situated in the track of the +most extensive and valuable commerce, intersected on all sides with +deep and navigable rivers, indented with safe and capacious harbors, +possessing one of the richest soils on the globe, abounding in all +the necessaries of human life, and boasting commercial products that +have in all ages excited the avarice and stimulated the desires of +mankind,--with the exception of New Holland, it is the largest island +known. Of the existence of this extensive territory, so highly favored +by Providence, and enriched by the choicest productions of nature, +there remains scarce a vestige in the geographical descriptions of +the day; and its rich products and fertile shores, by one tacit and +universal consent, appear abandoned by all the European nations of +the present age, and handed over to the ravages of extensive hordes +of piratical banditti, solely intent on plunder and desolation. + +The natives and the Malays, formerly, and even at this day, call +this large island by the exclusive name of Pulo Kalamantan, from +a sour and indigenous fruit so called. Borneo was the name only +of a city, the capital of one of the three distinct kingdoms on the +island. When Magalhaens visited it in the year 1520, he saw a rich and +populous city, a luxuriant and fertile country, a powerful prince, +and a magnificent court: hence the Spaniards hastily concluded that +the whole island not only belonged to this prince, but that it was +likewise named Borneo. In this error they have been followed by +all other European nations. The charts, however, mark this capital +"Borneo Proper," or in other words, the only place properly Borneo: +this is the only confession of this misnomer that I have met with +among Europeans. The natives pronounce Borneo, Bruni, and say it +is derived from the word Brani, courageous; the aboriginal natives +within this district having ever remained unconquered. + +The aborigines of Borneo, or Pulo Kalamantan, still exist in the +interior in considerable numbers; there are various tribes of them, +speaking different dialects. Some of them acknowledge Malay chiefs, +as at Landa, Songo, Mantan, &c. Several communities of them still +remain under independent chiefs of their own nation; and everywhere +their origin, their language, their religion, their manners and +customs, are totally distinct and apparent from those of the Islams, +or Malays, who have settled on the island. About Pontiana and Sambas +they are called Dayers; at Benjarmasing, Biajus; at Borneo Proper, +Moruts; farther northward, Orang Idan. Their original history is as +much enveloped in obscurity as that of the Monocaboes of Malaya, the +Rejangs and Battas of Sumatra, or the Togals of the Philippines. On +a nearer acquaintance with their language, customs, traditions, &c., +perhaps an affinity in origin may be discovered among all the original +possessors of the Eastern isles. The Moruts and Orang Idan are much +fairer and better featured than the Malays, of a more strong and robust +frame, and have the credit of being a brave race of people. The Dayer +is much darker, and approaches nearer in resemblance to the Malay. The +Biajus I never saw. The few particulars which I have been able to +collect of these people I shall briefly state: They live in miserable +small huts; their sole dress consists of a slight wrapper round their +waists, sometimes made of bark, at others from skins of animals, or +perhaps of blue or white cloth; they eat rice or roots, and indeed +any description of food, whether beast, reptile, or vermin: they are +extremely filthy; this and bad food give them a cutaneous disorder, +with which they are very generally afflicted. Several tribes of them +smear themselves with oil and pigments, which gives them the appearance +of being tattooed. Whether this is intended to defend them against the +bites of insects, to operate as a cure or prevention of this epidemic, +or to adorn their persons, I cannot take upon me to decide. They +believe, it is said, in a Supreme Being, and offer sacrifices of +gratitude to a beneficent Deity. Polygamy is not allowed among them; +no man has more than one wife; they burn their dead. They are said +to shoot poisoned balls or arrows through hollow tubes; and whenever +they kill a man, they preserve the skull to exhibit as a trophy to +commemorate the achievement of their arms. They are said to have +no mode of communicating their ideas by characters or writing, like +the Battas. Driven from the sea-coast of Borneo into the mountains +and fastnesses in the interior, they are more occupied in the chase +and the pursuits of husbandry than in commerce. They, however, barter +their inland produce of camphor, gold, diamonds, birds'-nests, wax, and +cattle, for salt (which they hold in the highest degree of estimation, +eating it with as much _gout_ as we do sugar), china, porcelain, +brass and iron cooking utensils, brass bracelets, coarse blue and +white cloth, Java tobacco, arrack (which they also like), parangs, +hardware, beads, &c. Some tribes of them are said to pull out their +front teeth and substitute others of gold, and others adorn themselves +with tigers' teeth. The greatest numbers and most considerable bodies +of these men are found near Kiney Balu and about Borneo Proper. + +The Malays represent them as the most savage and ferocious of men; +but to be more savage or ferocious than a Malay is a thing utterly +impossible. Their representations may be accounted for. These +aborigines have always evinced a strong disposition and predilection +for liberty and freedom; they have either resisted the yoke of the +Malay, or have retired to their mountains to enjoy this greatest of +all human blessings. The Malay, unable to conquer them, lays plans +for kidnapping as many as he can fall in with. Every Dyak so taken is +made a slave of, his children sold, and his women violated. The Malay, +hence, is justly considered by them as the violator of every law, +human and divine; and whenever any of these people meet with one, +they satiate their vengeance, and destroy him as the enemy of their +race, and as a monster of the human kind. The Portuguese missionaries +found these people very tractable converts, and very large bodies of +them are very easily governed by a single Malay chief, as at Landa, +Songo, and Matan. I have seen very large bodies of them at Kimanis +and Maludu, but none of them possessing the ferocity of a Malay. + +The Islams, or Malayans, who now possess the sea-coasts of Borneo +(as well as the sea-coasts of all the Eastern islands), are said to be +colonies from Malacca, Johore, &c., planted in the fourteenth century; +at this period, according to Mr. Poivre, "Malacca was a country +well peopled, and was consequently well cultivated. This nation was +once one of the greatest powers in the Eastern seas, and made a very +considerable figure in the theater of Asia; they colonized Borneo, +Celebes, Macassar, Moluccas, &c." The Malays on Borneo are like the +Malays everywhere else, the most atrocious race of beings on the +earth; and from their general character, and imprudent institutions, +both political and religious, are fast moldering in self-decay, +or mutual destruction. + +From the earliest date that I have been able to trace, the island of +Borneo was always divided into three distinct kingdoms. The kingdom of +Borneo, properly so called, extended from Tanjong Dato, in latitude +3 deg. 15' north, to Kanukungan point, in the Straits of Macassar, 1 deg. +15' north, which included the whole north part of the island. The +kingdom of Sukadana (from _suka_, happiness, and _dunia_, the world, +or earthly paradise), extending from Tanjong Dato to Tanjong Sambar, +which belonged to the King of Bantam (when or how acquired I have +not learned): and the remainder of the island from Tanjong Sambar +to Kanukungan Point aforesaid, to the kingdom of Benjarmasing (from +_bendar_, a port of trade, and _masing_, usual, or the ordinary port +of trade). + +When the Portuguese first visited Borneo, in 1520, the whole island +was in a most flourishing state. The numbers of Chinese that had +settled on her shores were immense; the products of their industry, +and an extensive commerce with China in junks, gave her land and +cities a far different aspect from her dreary appearance at this day, +and their princes and courts exhibited a splendor and displayed a +magnificence which has long since vanished. + +Pigofetta says there were twenty-five thousand houses in the city of +Borneo Proper, and that it was rich and populous. Much later accounts +describe the numbers of Chinese and Japanese junks frequenting her +ports as great; but in 1809 there were not three thousand houses in +the whole city, nor six thousand Chinese throughout that kingdom, +and not a junk that had visited it for years. But the ports of Borneo +have not dwindled away more than Acheen, Johore, Malacca, Bantam, +Ternate, &c. All these places likewise cut a splendid figure in +the eyes of our first navigators, and have since equally shared a +proportionate obscurity. + +Were the causes required which have eclipsed the prosperity of Borneo +and the other great emporiums of Eastern trade that once existed, it +might be readily answered--a decay of commerce. They have suffered the +same vicissitudes as Tyre, Sidon, or Alexandria; and like Carthage--for +ages the emporium of the wealth and commerce of the world, which now +exhibits on its site a piratical race of descendants in the modern +Tunisians and their neighbors the Algerines--the commercial ports of +Borneo have become a nest of banditti, and the original inhabitants +of both, from similar causes--the decay of commerce--have degenerated +to the modern pirates of the present day. + +In exact proportion as the intercourse of the Europeans with China +has increased, in precise ratio has the decrease of their direct trade +in junks become apparent. The Portuguese first, and subsequently the +Dutch, mistress of the Eastern seas, exacted by treaties and other ways +the Malay produce at their own rates, and were consequently enabled +to undersell the junks in China. But these powers went further; +by settling at ports on Borneo, or by their guardas de costas, they +compelled the ports of Borneo to send their produce, calculated for +the China market, to Malacca and Batavia, which at length completely +cut up the direct trade by means of the Chinese junks. + +The loss of their direct intercourse with China affected their +prosperity in a variety of ways. First, by this circuitous direction +of their trade, the gruff goods, as rattans, sago, cassia, pepper, +ebony, wax, &c., became too expensive to fetch the value of this +double carriage and the attendant charges, and in course of time were +neglected; the loss of these extensive branches of industry must +have thrown numbers out of employment. But the loss of the direct +intercourse with China had more fatal effects; it prevented large +bodies of annual emigrants from China settling upon her shores; +it deprived them of an opportunity of visiting the Borneon ports, +and exercising their mechanical arts and productive industry; and +of thus keeping up the prosperity of the country in the tillage of +the ground, as well as in the commerce of her ports. The old Chinese +settlers by degrees deserted these shores; and to fill up the chasms +in their revenues by so fatal a change, the rajahs have been tempted +to turn their views to predatory habits, and have permitted their +lands to run to jungle, by dragging their wretched laborers from +agricultural employments to maritime and piratical enterprises. + +The first material alteration in the sovereignty of the territorial +possession took place in the kingdom of Borneo Proper, when her rajah +was obliged to call in the aid of the Solos to defend him against +an insurrection of the Maruts and Chinese. In consideration of this +important aid, the Rajah of Borneo Proper ceded to the Sultan of Solo +all that portion of Borneo then belonging to him, from Kimanis, in +latitude 5 deg. 30' north, to Tapean-durian, in the Straits of Macassar, +which includes the whole north of Borneo. After this period, the power +and fortunes of the Sultan of Solo rapidly declined. The Spaniards +succeeded in conquering all their islands. Solo, the capital, was +taken and fortified; the sultan and his court made prisoners. When the +English captured Manilla, they found this sultan incarcerated. They +agreed to relieve him from prison, and reinstate him on the musnud of +his forefathers under the express stipulation that the whole of the +aforesaid territory of Borneo, ceded to Solo by the rajah of that +kingdom, should be transferred to the English East India Company, +together with the south of Palawan, and the intermediate islands. These +terms were joyfully acceded to by the Sultan of Solo, and signed, +sealed, and delivered by him to the late Alexander Dalrymple, in the +year 1763. + +The kingdom of Sukadana was ceded by the Rajah of Bantam (in what year +I know not) to the Dutch East India Company. Whether the kingdom of +Benjarmasing was ever actually ceded to the Dutch or not, I have not +been able to learn. But the occupancy of her capital, the military +government of the country, by the erection of forts, and a permanent +standing force, since transferred to the English arms, give to the +East India Company, actually or virtually, the entire sovereignty +and rule over the whole of this large island, with the exception of +the piratical port of Borneo Proper, and the portion of territory +yet annexed thereto. + +The Portuguese, at a very early period, established themselves at +Benjarmasing: at Borneo Proper there still remain two bastions and a +curtain of a regular stone fort built by them: they had also one on +the island of Laboan, since destroyed. They fixed themselves at old +Sambas, from which they were driven by the Dutch in the year 1690, +and nearly about this period from all their establishments on Borneo. + +When, or from what causes, the Dutch were induced to evacuate Sambas, I +know not, nor have I learned the period when they fortified themselves +at Benjarmasing and Pasir, but believe it could not have taken place +before the middle of the last century. They, however, settled at +Pontiana in 1786, and built a fortified wall round the palace and +factory, but were compelled to withdraw from it when the war broke out +with the English in 1796. The ports at Benjarmasing, when evacuated, +were sold by the Dutch to the sultan, and are since said to have +been repurchased from him by the English. The Dutch obtaining the +cession of the kingdom of Sukadana from the Rajah of Bantam, and their +subsequent measures in different parts of this territory, will show +that they had extensive views of firmly establishing themselves on this +island; and waking from an age of lethargy, at last began to see the +great advantages and unbounded resources these rich possessions were +capable of affording them, without any cost or expense whatever. The +year they withdrew from Pontiana they had it in contemplation to take +repossession of Sambas, and to unite all the ports, as well as the +interior, under the Rajah of Pontiana, in trust for them. Some letters +to this effect were written by the Dutch government to the late rajah. + +That the English were not insensible to the value and importance +of the once valuable commerce of Borneo may be inferred not only +from the number of the Honorable Company's regular ships annually +dispatched to her ports prior to the year 1760 (vide Hardy's Shipping +Register), but from the efforts they have repeatedly made to establish +themselves on her shores. There still exist the remains of a British +factory at Borneo Proper. Before the year 1706, they had made two +successive attempts to fortify themselves at Benjarmasing; twice they +have attempted an establishment on the sickly island of Balambangan +(lying north of Borneo, near Maludu); and in 1775, the Honorable +Company's ship Bridgewater was sent to Pasir with similar views. + +The failure of these British attempts, as well as the exclusion of all +other powers from the ports of Borneo, may be principally attributed +to the sordid desire of the Dutch of monopolizing the whole produce +of the Eastern Archipelago, and their rooted jealousy in opposing +the establishment of every other power in the vicinity of Java, +or that of the Spice Islands. + +These considerations and feelings have induced them to commit the +most flagrant crimes, not only against the natives of these regions, +but against every European power. Their infamous massacres at Amboyna, +Banda, Bantam, &c., have been historically recorded to their eternal +disgrace. By their intrigues at Benjarmasing, the British attempts at +a settlement twice failed; and Forrest, in his Voyage to New Guinea, +says, that the Solos were by Dutch instigation induced to cut off the +infant establishment of Balambangan, in 1775. They frustrated the +attempts of the Bridgewater at Pasir; and even the massacre of the +garrison of Pulo Condore was effected by Javanese soldiers supplied +by the governor of Batavia. The English, from their strong desire +of having a port in the China seas, hastily pitched upon the most +unhealthy spots for that purpose, viz. Balambangan and Pulo Condore. + +The father of the present Sultan of Pontiana was the descendant of an +Arab, residing at Simpan, near Matan. By the advice and concurrence +of the Dutch he was induced, about forty-two years ago, to settle +on the unfrequented shores of the river Pontiana, or Quallo Londa, +with promises of early cooeperation and assistance, as well as of +rendering it the mart of the trade and capital of all Sukadana. As +soon as Abdul Ramman (the name of the first sultan) had succeeded in +attracting around him several Chinese, Buguese, and Malay settlers, +and in building a town, the Dutch (in 1786) came with two armed +brigs and fifty troops to establish their factory. To make good +their promises to Abdul Ramman (the treaty I have never seen), they +immediately overthrew the chief of Mompava, and gave his country in +trust to this ally: they shortly after invested the ancient city of +Sukadana, burned it to the ground, transferred the inhabitants to +Pontiana, or dispersed them and their chief into the interior. The +Dutch likewise placed the present rajas on the musnuds of Songo, Landa, +&c., and kept up a force at the former, with the express stipulation +that the whole of their produce should be sent from each of their +respective districts to the Dutch factory of Pontiana. They had it +in contemplation, in 1795, to take repossession of Sambas, and wrote +to Abdul Ramman as to the preparatory measures requisite, when the +English war, as before observed, obliged them to abandon Pontiana. + +This Abdul Ramman, the first sultan or chief of Pontiana, reigned +thirty-five years, and died in 1807, leaving his eldest son, the +present Sultan Kasim, now forty-six years of age, his successor; +who has a second brother, called Pangeran Marko, aged thirty-eight, +and Pangeran Hosman, thirty-six years, beside four sisters, one +of whom married the present Rajah of Matan, and about seventy half +brothers and sisters, the natural children of his father, with an +extensive sub-progeny. The present sultan has three sons (Abibuker, +heir-apparent, twenty-one years old, Ali, and Abdul Ramman), and +four daughters, lawfully begotten. None of the royal family make use +of either opium, betel, or tobacco, in any shape whatever; and the +present sultan has much the appearance of an Arab. The grandfather +of the present sultan was from Arabia, a Sayed Suriff; one of his +relations was fixed at Palimbang, whose name is unknown to me, and +the other, Shad Fudyel, at Acheen, who has been long dead. + +The wet season commences from September, and ends in April, +when heavy rain, hard squalls, and much thunder and lightning are +experienced. From April till September is called the dry season, but +even in this portion of the year seldom a day elapses without a smart +shower or two. The monsoons on the northerly shores of Borneo are found +to correspond with those prevalent in the China seas, viz. from the +N.E. from October to April, and from the S.W. the rest of the year. To +the southward, about Benjarmasing, the monsoons are the same as in the +Java seas, _i. e._ westerly from October to April, and easterly the +rest of the year. Those parts of Borneo near or upon the equator have +variable winds all the year, and land and sea breezes close in shore. + +This country is by no means so warm as one would be led to imagine by +its proximity everywhere to the line: this arises from the perpetual +refreshing showers and the land and sea breezes, the former being +wafted over innumerable rivers. In the month of November, the +thermometer at Pontiana ranges from 78 deg. to 82 deg.. + +During the wet season, the rivers swell and overflow the adjacent +shores, and run down with such continued rapidity, that the water may +be tasted fresh at sea at the distance of six or seven miles from the +mouths: these overflowings fertilize the banks and adjacent country, +and render the shores of Borneo, like the plains of Egypt, luxuriantly +rich. Susceptible of the highest possible culture, particularly in +wet grain, in the dry season the coast, from these overflowings, +presents to the eye the richest enameled fields of full grown grass +for miles around. It is at this season that whole herds of wild cattle +range down from the mountains in the interior to fatten on the plains, +but during the wet season they ascend to their hills. + +The whole of the north, the northwest, and the center of Borneo is +extremely mountainous. The greatest portion of the ancient kingdom +of Borneo Proper is extremely elevated. That of Kiney Baulu, or +St. Peter's Mount, in latitude 6 deg. north, is perhaps one of the +highest mountains known. The country about Sambas, Pontiana, and +Sukadana is occasionally interspersed with a few ranges of hills, +otherwise the land here might be deemed low. But to the southward, +and more particularly to the east, in the Straits of Macassar, it +is very low. The shore in these latter places is extremely moist and +swampy, but the interior is said to be dry. + +The common charts of Borneo will show the innumerable rivers that +water this vast island in every possible direction; but it is worthy of +remark, that all the principal rivers on this island have their main +source in a large lake in the vicinity of that stupendous mountain +before mentioned, Kiney Baulu. The river Benjarmasing takes its rise +from thence, and after traversing in all its windings a distance of +1500 miles, intersecting the island into two parts, falls into the +Java sea. Its rise and fall is said to be twelve feet, and it has +only nine feet at low water on the bar. It is said to have numberless +villages scattered on its banks; but I have obtained no particular +accounts of them, or their produce. + +The great river of Borneo Proper is certainly the finest on the +island. It is a deep, navigable, and majestic stream; it has three +fathoms upon the bar at low water; the rise and fall is, I believe, +fifteen feet; there are docks here for Chinese junks of five or six +hundred tons, and a first-rate ship of war might get up far above +the town. The country, too, is populous, productive, and healthy. The +southern branch of this river has been well surveyed, but the branch +leading to the Marut country is little known; it has its source in +Kiney Baulu. + +In the ancient kingdom of Sukadana, the five principal rivers are +the Sukadana, the Lava, the Pogore, the Pontiana, and the Sambas. The +former rivers communicate inland, and their main source is in Kiney +Baulu. The whole of these rivers are deep and navigable for seventy +or eighty miles; but have all of them mud flats at their mouths, +which would not admit of the entry of vessels exceeding fourteen feet +at high water springs. + +The third most considerable river on Borneo is the Kinabatangan, lying +in the north of the island, and emptying itself into the Sulo seas. It +is said to be deep and navigable much farther than the Benjarmasing +river; it has several mouths, but it has never been surveyed. The +rivers Kuran, Pasir, and a variety of others that fall into the Straits +of Macassar, are said to be noble streams, navigable for vessels +of large burthen; but I have no accurate information of them. The +harbor of Sandakan is one of the finest in the world; a correct chart +of the same is published. The harbor of Tambisan, near Cape Unsing, +is equal to Pulo Pinang, and calculated for careening and building +ships; a tolerable chart of these is also published. The harbors of +Pulo Laut, Punangan, Maludu, and several others in the Straits of +Macassar, afford good anchorage and complete shelter for shipping. + +Situated as Borneo is, immediately under the equator, everything +that can be produced in vegetation by the combined influence of +heat and moisture is here displayed in the highest luxuriance and +super-excellence. All the Oriental palms, as the cocoa-nut, the areca, +the sago, &c., abound here. The larger grasses, as the bamboo, the +canna, the nardus, assume a stately growth, and thrive in peculiar +luxuriance. Pepper is found wild everywhere, and largely cultivated +about Benjarmasing and the districts of Borneo Proper. The _laurus +cinnamomum_ and _cassia odoriferata_ are produced in abundance about +Kimanis. In no part of the world does the camphor-tree flourish in +equal perfection as in the districts of Maludu and Payton, in the north +of Borneo. The ebony, the dammar, the tree that yields the finest +dragon's blood in the world, all abound here. The cotton and coffee +trees are found in all parts of Borneo, though not much attended +to. The chocolate nut of Sulo is preferred at Manilla to that from +South America. The tree that yields the clove-bark, and the nutmeg, +and clove, thrive luxuriantly, though never tried to any extent. + +The woods about Pontiana for carpentry and joinery, are kayu bulean, +chena, mintangore, laban, ebony, iron-wood, dammar, and dammar laut, +&c. &c. The pine abounds in the bay of Maludu, teak at Sulo. The +fruit-bearing trees which enrich and adorn the Indian continent, +offer, on the Borneon shore, all their kindred varieties, nurtured +by the bountiful hand of luxuriant nature. The durian, mangustin, +rambutan, proya, chabi, kachang, timon, jambu, kniban, beside the +nanka or jack, tamarind, pomplemose, orange, lemon, and citron, +all the kindred varieties of the plantain, banana, melon, annanas, +pomegranate, &c., are found on Borneo. + +The garden-stuffs met with are onions, garlic, yams, pumpkins, +brinjals, greens, beans, cucumbers; and turnips, cabbages, and potatoes +would succeed, were there Europeans to attend to them. + +The elephant was said to be seen about Cape Unsing, where several +teeth are still found; but it is conceived this animal is extinct on +the island. There are no dromedaries nor camels; nor are horses, asses, +or mules met with on Borneo (the former are seen at Sulo). None of the +larger breed of the feline species are found here, as the lion, tiger, +leopard; nor the bear, the wolf, the fox, nor even a jackal, or dog, +that I ever saw. The ourang-outang, or the man of the woods, is the +most singular animal found in these regions. The rivers swarm with +alligators, and the woods with every variety of the monkey tribe. The +names of other animals on Borneo are the bodok or rhinoceros, pelando +or rabbit, rusa or stag, kijang or doe, minjagon, babi utan or wild +hog, tingileng, bintangan, &c. There are buffaloes, goats, bullocks, +hogs, beside the rat and mouse species; a dog I never saw on Borneo. + +There are few snakes on the sea-coast, owing to the moisture; plenty, +however, are found in the interior. The musketoe, the fly, the frog, +and the noisy beetle, with other insects and vermin found in Malay +countries, abound here. + +The coasts and rivers abound with excellent and wholesome fish in +the greatest variety, and of the most delicious flavors; but such +is the miserable state of society, that few Malays have either the +inclination or the inducement to venture beyond the mouths of their +rivers in quest of them; and even there they are more indebted to the +industry of the Chinese with their fishing-stakes than to their own +labor for the supply of their markets. The names of their fish are, +the kakab, klabaw, jilawat, lai-is, pattain, udang or prawn, shrimp, +talang, sinanging, bawan, rowan, taylaon, duri, bleda, tingairy, +alu-alu, pako, jumpul, pari or skait, boli ayam, tamban or shad, +belut or eel, iyu or shark, lida or sole, batu batu, kabab batu, klaoi, +krang or cockle, tiram or oyster, tipy and lapis pearl oysters, cupang +or muscle, all the varieties of the turtle, with several other sorts. + +The ornithology of Borneo is somewhat limited. There are the bayan, +nuri, dara, pepit or sparrow, tukukur or turtle-dove, berkey, kandang, +kiridi, gogaw or crow, seyrindit, layang or swallow, kalilawan. The +Chinese rear ducks; the tame fowl abounds; but the turkey, goose, +and peafowl are seldom met with. + +The principal gold mines on Borneo are in the vicinity of Sambas. There +is a mountain called Guning Pandan, about eighty miles inland; from +this branch out three rivers--one leads to Mompava, one to Batu Bulat +near Tanjong Mora, and one to Landa; the whole intermediate area +between the above rivers is of a firm yellow argillaceous schistus, +or ferruginous quartz, interspersed with horn and vitreous ores, of +a remarkable dark reddish color, abounding with the richest veins of +gold, and equal if not superior to any mine extant. There are only +fifty parets or mines now wrought in the whole kingdom of Sukadana, +thirty of which are in the Sambas district, each mine having at least +three hundred men, Chinese, employed in them. Their pay, one with +another, is four dollars per mensem. + +The mines are rented from the rajah at the rate of fifty bunkals of +gold per mine per annum, beside a capitation tax of three dollars +per head on every Chinaman. There are thirty thousand Chinese in the +Sambas districts, and they feel themselves strong enough to oppose or +evade this tax; it hence becomes a perpetual contest between greedy +extortion on the one side, and avaricious chicane on the other; +there are beside about twelve thousand Malays and Dayers. + +The Laurat gold mines are situated to the eastward of the town of +Sambas, and are particularly rich and productive. The mines of Siminis +are one day's journey from Sambas, up a small creek leading from +Sambas river, below the town; and the mines are abundant. Salako is +up a river fifteen miles south of the Sambas river; it lies nearly +forty miles up, but communicates with Sambas by another river: +here the metal is found more abundant than anywhere else; and twenty +thousand Chinese are found in this district. Mantrado is three days' +journey up the Mompava river; it is under an independent Malay +prince. Some accounts make the population of this district great, +near fifty thousand Dayers, Malays, and Chinese; but perhaps half +the number may be nearer the truth; these are chiefly employed on +the gold mines, and in producing food for the miners; these mines, +however, do not produce that quantity which they might under Chinese +management. Mandore is about a day's journey from Pontiana, and belongs +to the sultan; it is reckoned a very rich mine, though but recently +wrought. There are as yet only twelve parets of about two hundred +men each, but it is capable of extension. Likewise are found in this +district some very rich specimens of copper ore; it has not as yet +been wrought, gold being deemed a much more productive article. The +sultan wishes, however, he had some boring utensils and an experienced +miner, to enable him to decide whether it would be worth working under +the peculiar circumstances above mentioned. Numbers of Chinese are +settled in this district, and the population is annually increasing. + +About three days' journey up the Pongole river lies the district of +Songo, with a population of twenty-five thousand souls, Dayers, and a +few Chinese, under a Malay and an independent prince. The population +is chiefly employed on the rich mines of gold in the neighborhood, +which is particularly pure and abundant; but the mines are not wrought +with the same industry as those under Chinese management. The Dutch +thought it of so much consequence as to keep a force at Songo, and to +place the present rajah on that musnud. About two days' journey farther +up lies another gold district, called Santam, the inhabitants of which +are principally Dayers. Beyond Santam, and higher up on the same river, +lies the town of Sukadow, abounding in gold, the inhabitants of which +are also Dayers. + +Matan belongs to the rajah of that name: he had the title of Rajah +of Sukadana, until driven out of the latter place by the Dutch, +seventeen years ago. There are ten thousand Dayers in this district, +and a few Chinese and Malays. The mines of gold are abundant, and +capable of becoming highly productive, as well as the mines of iron +and unwrought tin; but the sultan is much addicted to the use of +opium, and hence neglects a valuable country, capable, under better +management, of becoming the most valuable district on all Borneo. + +About three days' journey from Pontiana lies the celebrated mountain +of Landa, which, after Golconda, is the most valuable diamond mine +in the world. There are at least thirty thousand people, principally +Dayers, employed on the mines and agriculture; it belongs to a Malay +prince, raised to that musnud twenty-five years ago by the Dutch, +through the agency of the present Sultan of Pontiana: here also much +gold is produced; and much more might be had under proper management. + +There is a very valuable gold mine in the north of Borneo, at a place +called Tampasuk, situated in the district ceded to the English by +the Sultan of Sulo; but having become the principal pirate port on +the coast, the working of the mines has been discontinued. + +The whole produce of the gold mines of Sukadana is said to be +annually about twenty piculs, or a million of dollars, at twenty-five +dollars a bunkal; but no calculation of this sort can possibly be +correct. Living, as the Chinese do, under the rapacity of despotic +and ferocious freebooters, who are actuated by no one principle of +honor, justice, or good faith, it is their interest to conceal the +riches they amass, not only to preserve themselves from the clutches of +these tyrants, but as the most compact substance to transport to their +native shores, to which they repair with the fruits of their industry, +by the annual junks that arrive at Pontiana, leaving the mines to +new settlers: from two to three hundred leave Pontiana every year. + +The standard of Slakow gold at Pontiana is affixed at twenty-three +Spanish dollars the bunkal, of two dollars weight. The Songo and +Laurat is twenty-five dollars the said bunkal. + +Not having had an opportunity to inspect any of the gold mines +personally, I know not if the ores readily melt of themselves, or +whether they require the aid of any fluxes before they yield the metal; +but I believe the principal attention of the miners is directed to the +rich veins of pure native gold, and that no operation is performed +beyond that of pulverizing, and simple washing; all the gold about +Pontiana being in dust, though some I have met with in Borneo Proper +was run into bars. About Landa, where the diamonds are found, the whole +of the stratum is observed to be a clay of a red burnt appearance, +nearly to the same degree as that of burnt bricks, which gives to the +rivers hereabouts a peculiar tinge. Whether this has been formed by +the action of subterraneous fires, or is the effect of volcanoes or +earthquakes, I cannot decide; the latter are said to be frequently +felt at Pontiana and at Sambas; and the former are said to exist in +the central mountains of Borneo. + +From the slovenly manner in which the diamonds are sought for by +the Dayers, they seldom collect them of a size exceeding three or +four carats weight each. When rough, the Landa diamond has a white +or yellow hue; but none are found of that inky and flinty tinge, +so valuable in some of the Golconda diamonds. But that Landa does +produce them of a very considerable size, the extensive and valuable +specimens in Java, as well as the quantities annually sent to Batavia, +will evince. The King of Matan is at this instant in possession of a +diamond weighing 367 carats: the value of which, according to the old +mode of calculation, would be (367 x 367 x 2 = 269,378_l._) The Sultan +of Pontiana says, however, that a much larger price was offered for it +by the Dutch government of Java. He refused, it is said, twenty-five +laks of dollars, two sloops of rice, fifty pieces of cannon, and +a hundred muskets. Several from twenty to thirty carats have been +dug up. At Mompava there are said to be very rich copper mines; +but from want of population, a vigorous government, and scientific +mineralogists, little is to be hoped from them at the present day. At +Pulo Bongorong, near Borneo Proper, there is plenty of loadstone found. + +About one degree north of Sambas there is a country called Sarawak, +belonging to the Rajah of Borneo Proper; there is a vast district +abounding in tin, in veins as rich and as plentiful as those wrought +on Banca: but they have been neglected for a series of years; they +were partially wrought before those of the latter were discovered, in +the beginning of the last century. The tyranny of that government, the +want of hands, and the contiguity of rich and valuable gold-mines, have +together caused their utter neglect; and there is little probability +of more favorable results, except under a change of government, +and a happier order of things. + +In the Matan districts there is an extensive and most valuable +iron-mine, producing pure metal without any admixture of ore: it is +fully equal in quality to the best Swedish iron. They run it into +shot, and much of it is exported; but the gold-mines in its vicinity, +and the want of a proper government, are obstacles to its further +productiveness and utility. At Maday, on the northeast coast of +Borneo, in the province of Mangidara, there is a very rich mine of +gold. Pasir and Coti, in the Straits of Macassar, produce considerable +quantities of gold; and gold and diamonds are brought down by the +river to Benjarmasing. I have, however, no accurate information on +the subject, and can simply note the general fact. + +There are several fine specimens of crystal found at Kimanis and Sulo; +they call them water diamonds. To give full effect to the mines in +the kingdom of Sukadana, says the Sultan of Pontiana, and to raise +the excess of food required for the additional hands, would together +give employment to at least a million of Chinese. Under the British +flag, he thinks thousands of new settlers will find their way in the +annual junks. + +All that extensive range, from Cape Unsing, passing by the Tawi Tawi +islands and Sulo, as far as Baselan, is one vast continued bed of +pearl-oysters, principally of the Behoren or mother-of-pearl-shell +species; these are called by the natives _tipi_. There is likewise +an extensive bed of the Ceylon oyster, called by the Malays _kapis_; +the principal banks of the latter are found in Maludu Bay. The Sulo +pearls have, from time immemorial, been the most celebrated, and +praised as the most valuable of any in the known world. Pigofetta, +the companion of Magalhaens, mentions having seen in 1520 two Sulo +pearls in the possession of the Rajah of Borneo as large as pullet +eggs. Very large ones, from one to two hundred _chaw_ weight, are at +all times to be purchased at Sulo; and there are altogether sold here +to the China junks, the Spaniards, &c. more than two laks of dollars +worth annually. The quantity of mother-of-pearl-shell, _communibus +annis_, sold there is two thousand piculs, at six dollars a picul. The +fishery is partly carried on by the Malays, and partly by the Chinese; +the large pearls they endeavor to conceal as much as possible, from +a law that all pearls above a certain size of right belong to the +sultan. "The small narrow guts," says Dalrymple in his account of the +Sulo seas, "about Tawi Tawi, are the most rich and valuable fishery in +the world." I have had an opportunity of inspecting the banks about +Manar and Tutacoryn, as well as all the banks in the Sulo seas; but +the former have not banks near as extensive, equaling in the quantity +of oysters, in productiveness, size, or richness, the Sulo pearl, nor +are they to be compared in any way to the Sulo beds. Still the Ceylon +fishery has netted the British Government from one to two laks of +pagodas for permitting it to be fished fourteen days annually. As this +portion of Borneo belongs to the English, a much greater revenue might +be drawn from these vast sources of wealth, under proper management. + +As there are no people of sufficient opulence to contract for so vast +a fishery, the Company might undertake it themselves; three or four +gun-boats would be necessary to protect the fishermen; and a small +fort should be erected at Tambisan or Tawi Tawi. But it is necessary +to observe, the Sulo people do not practice diving at all, as is +the case at Beharen and Ceylon, but only comprehend the slow method +of dredging for the tipy with a thing like the fluke of a wooden +anchor. It would be a desirable thing, in the event of prosecuting +this valuable fishery as a national concern, to obtain forty or fifty +Arab divers from Beharen, and perhaps an equal number of Chulias +from Nagore and Negapatam, from the number employed annually on the +Ceylon fishery. These men would teach the Malay the superiority of +diving, which can, in fourteen days' fishing, bring into government +a revenue of two laks of pagodas, pay the expenses of the fishery, +and enrich all parties concerned; while the Malayan operose plan of +dredging perhaps affords but a precarious subsistence. But had they +divers, from the extent of the banks, instead of fourteen days in the +year, they might, one after another, be fished the whole year round, +and never be exhausted. The Chinese fishermen, though laborious, +possess no enterprise, and can never be prevailed on to dive, from +apprehension of the sharks. The Caffris from New Guinea and the Arroes +would be superior to them. + +The Sultan of Sulo, in 1810, proposed to me to bring over one hundred +Chulia divers from Negapatam on our joint expense and profit: and +the divers agreed to go over on receiving each twenty-five rupees +advance, their victuals being found, and one-fourth of the produce of +oysters allowed them, as at Ceylon. Circumstances, however, occurred +to prevent an undertaking which I think must have turned out highly +lucrative. They dredge the banks all the year round. The water on the +Tahow, Maludu, and Tawi Tawi banks, is from seven to ten fathoms deep; +in other places they fish in fifteen fathoms water. + +The Malays of Borneo understand the art of cutting, polishing, and +setting their diamonds. Gold and silver filagree works they excel in; +gunpowder is manufactured at Pontiana; brass cannon is cast at Borneo +Proper; iron-shot is run from their mine. They can manufacture and +repair krises, and clean their arms. Their carpentry extends to the +building and repairing of prows, and the erecting of a hut. Their +industry is further exerted in collecting birds'-nests and wax; in +cutting rattan and felling timber; in the pearl and tripan fisheries; +or as mariners in commercial or piratical pursuits. The tillage +of the ground and the edible fisheries are often left to the more +indefatigable industry of the Chinese. For the exercise of every +other useful occupation also, the mechanical and scientific arts, +and the labor of the mines, these indolent savages are indebted solely +to the superior industry and civilization of the Chinamen. + +The amusements of the Malays in other parts are unpractised on the +shores of Borneo: the only ones I ever saw were flying the kite, +swimming, and the songs of their women; this latter is confined to +the rajahs. + +Wherever a water-communication on Borneo presents, the indolence of the +Malay will not permit him to think of the construction of a road. In +the interior, however, there are pathways in all directions; about +Mompava, where the river is narrow and shallow, they have constructed +several roads. Being a people much occupied in maritime pursuits, +they prefer, like the amphibious Dutch, traveling by rivers, or the +innumerable cuts, canals, and creeks, which everywhere intersect the +country: beside, their prows afford more protection from surprise, +and they conceive their town as safer by being surrounded by a +jungle and situated in a swamp; nor have they any conception beyond +water-carriage. + +Their laws neither depend upon the Koran nor any written code, +human or divine, beyond the whim and caprice of the chief (assassin) +and his gang of desperadoes. The Sultan of Pontiana has, however, +established the following regulations: + +Punishments for murder:--Life for life, except when the parties can +commute the same by fine. + + + +A proclamation is publicly affixed announcing the law, that if any +person be found adulterating gold-dust, or uttering it, so depreciated, +with a view to defraud, the perpetrator shall lose his right arm, +and the adulterated gold shall be confiscated. + +For theft:--Five dollars per head is given by the sultan to any one +bringing in the head of a thief: if brought in alive, he is suspended +by the heels and flogged as far as nature can bear short of death, +and the punishment repeated _ad libitum_. + +Prisoners taken from an enemy, whether found in arms or not, are made +slaves of, or suffer death, at the option of the captor. + +The Malay government is said to exhibit the feudal system in its most +perfect form. The chief, or rajah, issues his orders to the Pangerans, +or princes of the blood; to the Datus, or nobles of royal descent; +or to the Orang Kayas, or wealthy vassals. All these obey and follow +him to war, free of expense, when the king is sufficiently powerful +to enforce it; but whenever the vassal feels himself strong enough +to throw off the yoke, and to assert his independence, he sets up for +himself. These vassals exact the same obedience from their slaves or +villains, who pay the like deference only so long as they are compelled +to observe and obey them. The property acquired by a slave he is often +allowed to enjoy unmolested during his lifetime; but at his death, his +master administers to the estate as heir, executor, and sole legatee. + +In fact, it is a government that inspires on all sides one universal +distrust--that rules by precedents of oppression without a view +to protection. The chiefs dread the power of their vassals, who, +in return, apprehend everything from the rapacity of the governing +power; while the bulk of the people, having no property to lose, are +still compelled to appear abroad armed to defend their very persons +from the outrage and violence of the next assassin they meet. + +Where governments not only tolerate murder, rapine, thefts, piracies, +conflagrations, with every outrage violating the happiness and safety +of society, but are the first to set the example and to consecrate the +atrocity--where the people are taught no one principle of morality +or religion--where the arts and sciences are wholly unknown or +despised--where the amusements and sociabilities of human life are +totally disregarded--where the bounties and comforts of nature are +rather dispensed with than enjoyed, and where the absolute necessaries +to existence and the decorations of life are more scanty and wretched +than yet discovered among the rudest set of barbarians extant; if, +from the experience of the past, expectations of the future are to be +formed, we may safely infer that every vestige of Malay government +and dominion will be ingulfed in the vortex of self and mutual +destruction. Such a system of society has in itself the seeds of +dissolution, and is rapidly verging to an inherent decay and general +oblivion, which it will doubtless meet, unless some beneficent power +arrest its baneful impetus, and direct its feverish energies through +channels calculated to promote the happiness and to consolidate the +welfare of the inhabitants of these scattered regions. + +Should so fortunate an occurrence ever fall to the lot of +Borneo--should a strong and a wise government ever be established on +her shores--a government that will religiously respect property and +secure to industry the fruits of her labor--that will, by a wise system +of laws, protect the peaceable and punish the violator of the laws of +a well-organized society--that will direct their industry to useful +purposes, and check their propensities to violence and plunder--such +a government, in a short series of years, would behold, as if by +magic, a paradise burst from her wilds, see cultivation smile upon +her jungles, and hail a vast and increasing population, blessing the +hand that awoke them to life, to happiness, and to prosperity. That so +felicitous a change is not the mere reverie of a glowing imagination, +or the sheer effusion of benevolence alone, is easily demonstrable. + +Whoever has seen the Egyptian fertility of the soil, from the +moistness of the climate, the numberless rivers meandering around and +intersecting the country in all directions, with the mild temperature +of the climate, from similar causes--whoever considers the vast extent +and inexhaustible wealth of her innumerable mines of pure native gold, +her block-tin, her copper, her iron, her diamonds, &c., her various +valuable fisheries of pearl and tripan--whoever views her ports, +her harbors, and her productive shores, at the threshold of the +over-teeming population of China, and at the same moment recollects +that the country abounds in various valuable products in the highest +possible estimation, and of increasing demand in the empire of China, +must easily conceive what a tempting field and rich harvest this +land of promise holds out to their industry and cupidity under such +a system of laws and government as we have deemed a _sine qua non_. + +If, under the present codes of tyranny, oppression, and general +ferocity, where nothing is permanent but violence and desolation--if, +under such a system of barbarism, a hundred thousand Chinese (which +is the fact) have found inducements sufficiently strong to settle on +her shores, what might we not hope and expect from the overburdened +population of that vast empire under a happier order of things? The +astonishing number of Chinese settled within a few years at Pulo +Pinang, on a contracted soil, possessing no peculiar advantages +but from a free trade and equitable laws impartially administered, +is both a fact and an illustration; and what might not Borneo hope +for from a happier soil, greater inducements, and other physical +advantages? Java, under the despotism of the Dutch, with the character +of a sickly climate, and the remembrance of the cruel massacre of sixty +thousand innocent Chinese, could still boast a hundred thousand of +these people at the period it fell to the British arms; and withal, +let it be remembered that these shores were once blessed with the +industry of these people to a far greater extent under a happier +period of her history. + +Whatever, indeed, might prove the work of ages in various other parts +of the globe would, under the present circumstances of the Chinese +empire, be instantaneous on these shores; and their habits of industry +and civilization, when once rooted to the soil, would soon spread +their genial influence to the extensive population of the interior, +unite them in the bonds of social life, cement them in the general +prosperity, and render these extensive shores a valuable appendage +and an increasing resource to the wealth and power that brought about +so happy a revolution in their affairs. + +For a considerable series of years past, the piratical ports of +Borneo, &c., have been in the habit of committing depredations upon +the commerce of British India, in the capture of her ships, the +insulting of her flag, the offering of outrageous violence to the +persons and lives of her mariners, merchants, &c., and this, too, +with the most perfect impunity; no retribution having been exacted, +no reprisals made, no remonstrance presented, and, in fact, no notice +taken of their atrocious depredations. Hence these desperadoes, from +inference and experience of the past, have been led to conclude, that +whatever was practicable would be tolerated; that wherever they had +the means or opportunity of overpowering, it was their duty, as it was +to their advantage, to seize it to their own use, without any other +apprehensions of the consequences than what might arise in the attempt. + +Under this discouraging aspect of affairs, there was but little more +left to the commercial community of India than either to abandon the +valuable commerce of Borneo wholly; or, if allured to it by a prospect +of gain, to proceed in armed vessels at an increased expense and high +insurance, so as to cover the extraordinary risks. These enhanced +prices either operated as a prohibition to the trade, or circumscribed +it so much, that an occasional capture excited no surprise, and was +frigidly dismissed as a matter of course. + +But, from the prodigious accession of territorial possession, including +the whole of the vast Dutch empire in the East, the communications +between these and British India have necessarily increased a thousand +fold; consequently, the recent alarming depredations upon our commerce, +the serious obstacles to a safe communication, almost tantamount to a +blockade of our Eastern ports by these pirates, imperiously call upon +the British Government to adopt the most energetic means and decisive +measures to crush their power and annihilate their resources, either by +extirpating them wholly, or placing them and their possessions under +such future control and checks, as shall prevent the possibility of +a revival of a power capable of recurring to enormities that have so +long outraged and disgraced the British flag in the Eastern seas. + +The idea of extirpating whole hordes of piratical states, were it +possible, must, from its cruelty, be incompatible with the liberal +principles and humane policy of a British government. The simple +burning down of a Malay town can prove no serious impediment to +future piratical enterprises: constructed, as they are, of bamboos, +mats, and atap leaves, a town is almost rebuilt in the same period +of time as it takes to destroy it. The Dutch, who had centuries of +dear-bought experience, knew there was no other mode of prevention +and radical cure than building small redoubts at the principal towns, +and keeping up an adequate force to check piratical enterprises, and +to turn their restless minds to exertions of industry; satisfied if, +with the attainment of these objects, they covered the expenses of +the establishment. This is the true history of the innumerable little +forts on Celebes, Borneo, Timor, and all the Eastern isles. + +The principal piratical ports that still exist, beside those of +Lingin, Rhio, and Billiton, are--1st, Pangeran Annam, at Sambas; 2d, +Port Borneo Proper, and four hundred prows at Tampasuk, both under the +Rajah of Borneo Proper; 3d, the Pasir pirates; 4th, the Sulo pirates; +5th, the Illano, or pirates on the Isle of Magindano. + +I shall, from memory, cite such few of their depredations as I +recollect. + +In 1774, says Forrest, the British were expelled from their infant +settlement of Balambangan by an insurrection of the Sulos, who, +finding the garrison weak and sickly, unprepared and off their guard, +murdered and plundered them, and set fire to their settlement:--this +was in return for having released their sultan from prison, and +reestablished him on the musnud of his ancestors. In 1800, Captain +Pavin and a boat's crew were cruelly murdered in the palace of the +Sultan of Sulo while the commander was drinking a cup of chocolate: +they fired upon the ship Ruby, but did not succeed in capturing her. In +1810, they plundered the wreck of the ship Harrier of a valuable cargo: +several of her crew are still in slavery at Bagayan Sulo. In 1788, +the ship May of Calcutta, 450 tons burden, Captain Dixon, was cut off +at Borneo Proper: they were invited up to the town with the ship, +and while at dinner, the sultan and his people fell upon them, and +murdered Captain Dixon, three officers, and ten Europeans; the lascars +were retained in slavery, the valuable cargo plundered, and the ship +burnt. In 1803 the ship Susanna of Calcutta, Captain Drysdale, was +cut off near Pontiana by the Sambas and Borneo pirates; the Europeans +were all massacred, and the vessel taken. In 1769, Captain Sadler, +with his boat's crew, was murdered by the Sambas pirates off Mompava, +having a prodigious quantity of gold-dust: they did not succeed in +cutting off the ship. In 1806, Mr. Hopkins and crew, of the Commerce, +were murdered by the pirates of Borneo Proper; the ship was plundered +by them and the Sambas pirates. In 1810, Captain Ross was cut off. In +1811, Captain Graves was cut off by the Pasir pirates with a rich +cargo. In 1812, the enormities of Pangeran Annam have out-heroded +Herod: these are too recent to require recapitulation. Independent +of his depredations on the Coromandel, a Portuguese ship, &c., nine +Europeans of the Hecate have been seized and made slaves; two have +been since murdered; two have escaped; and five are hamstrung and +otherwise maimed. Mrs. Ross and her son are still in slavery there. + +The Tampasuk pirates, belonging to the Rajah of Borneo Proper, aiding +and abetting Pangeran Annam against the English, are Datu Akop, +Datu Aragut, and Datu Jumbarang, with ten large men-of-war prows: +there is also there the Rajah Endut, a Siak chief. + +Matan is under an independent rajah, who was formerly styled Sultan +of Sukadana; but about seventeen years ago the Dutch burnt down his +city. At length, by some pecuniary aid received from the late Sultan of +Pontiana, he was enabled to reestablish his affairs as Rajah of Matan; +and, in consideration of this aid, entered into a treaty of alliance, +which stipulated, that on his daughter's marriage with the grandson +of the late, and son of the present. Sultan of Pontiana, he would +cede his kingdom and large diamond as a marriage-portion: the parties +yet remain single. Under the head mineralogy we have pointed out how +valuable a country this might become under better management. Iron, +gold, tin, and diamonds abound here; also much wax, pepper, rattans, +garu, and about two piculs of the finest birds'-nests, which sell at +twenty-eight dollars the catty at Pontiana. Most of the trade finds +its way to Pontiana, Benjar, or Java, in prows. The population is +about ten thousand Dayers, &c. + +Sukadana, once the most celebrated city on Borneo, as the name implies, +a terrestrial paradise, the capital of a kingdom and a great mart of +trade, since burnt down and destroyed by the Dutch, exhibits nothing +but ruins. There still remain numberless delicious fruit-trees, and +a country still susceptible of general cultivation, being yet clear +of jungle and morass. It is utterly abandoned: that it has not been +rebuilt is owing to the Rajah of Pontiana, at whose suggestion it was +destroyed, and whose interest it was to keep it down, having himself +risen upon its ashes. + +There are no towns of any importance between Matan and Pontiana. The +rise of this dynasty of sultans has been noted in another place; it +is, however, almost the only power that has been expressly raised, +supported, and that still exists, by commerce. It is situated in +latitude 4 deg. north of the equator. The river has two mouths to it; the +northern mouth is the deepest, the most direct, and of the greatest +breadth; there are in this branch only two reaches up to the town. The +city is no more than fifteen miles from the mouth of the rivers; its +site is on the junction of the Matan and Landa rivers. About two-thirds +of the way up it is fortified; first, with a battery on piles in the +center of the stream, mounting five guns; on the left bank is another +with wooden pales, mounting likewise five guns; on the opposite bank +is a third, similar to the foregoing, with a like number of cannon; +and, lastly, on the same bank is their grand battery, constructed of +stone, mounting five eighteen-pounders, at the batu, or rock. Here the +mausoleum of the royal family is erected, containing the tomb of the +late sultan. The whole of this side of the river exhibits the marks +of infant cultivation. The jungle has been, in part, cleared away, +and here and there a solitary hut greets the eye. The sultan's palace +has a battery of eleven guns of all sizes; none of these are calculated +to make any serious resistance. So sensible is the sultan of this that +he has commenced staking round with piles a low, swampy island, just +detached from the palace. On this stands the grand mosk. He proposes +throwing mud and stones within the ranges of piles, and planting +upon them the heaviest-calibered cannon: it is a commanding site, +and capable of being rendered formidable. There are no roads about +Pontiana; the town is situated in the midst of a swamp, so low that +the tide at high water overflows the lower parts of the houses, and +this, with the addition of a country overrun with impenetrable jungle, +renders it extremely unhealthy, and a most disagreeable residence. + +The campo China contains about two thousand souls, and lies on the left +bank of the Matan river, abreast of the palace; the campo Buguese, +on the right bank of the Landa; and the campo Malayu adjoins the +palace. The whole population is about seven thousand souls: no Dayers +are found hereabout. The whole of the districts under Pontiana produce +about three hundred coyans of rice, the average selling price of which +is from fifty-five to seventy Spanish dollars the coyan. The king's +revenue is forty thousand dollars per annum. The Chinese plead poverty, +but some of the Buguese are pointed out as wealthy. The quantity of +gold that finds its way to Pontiana is annually from three to four +piculs. The imports there consist of opium, iron, steel, salt, rice, +hardware, cutlery, blue and white gurras, salampories, Java cloths, +gunpowder, beside China produce of all possible descriptions. They +make their returns in gold, diamonds, birds'-nests, wax, rattans, +garu, ebony, agar-agar; beside pepper, sago, camphor, cassia, tripan, +&c. brought here by the prows: five Chinese junks annually visit +Pontiana, bringing down produce amounting to about fifty thousand +dollars. The depredations of the Pangeran Annam prevent an extension +of this most useful of all trades to this country. One or two Siamese +junks arrive annually. The Tringanu, Timbilan, Karimata, and Borneo +Proper prows trade here; and before Java fell to the British arms, +the Buguese from the eastward traded here to a considerable amount. + +The stone walls built by the Dutch still encompass the palace. The +piles on which their factory stood are yet discernible, but the +buildings have been pulled down. Should the English hoist their flag +here, a new factory must be erected; the most eligible situation for +which would be where the mosk now stands, or the mosk itself might +be converted into one, and another rebuilt elsewhere; but to this +the sultan has insuperable objections. In an English fort, to think +to have a mosk open to the ingress of a large body of Malays at all +times is wholly incompatible with a certain reserve and security +required from it. Beside, as the island is small, and soldiers at +times inconsiderate, they might profane or defile its holy precincts, +and thus lay the foundation of perpetual disputes, or even a serious +rupture. The fort and factory, if built at all at Pontiana, must hence +be fixed in some detached place. The sultan is building a new palace +and covering it with tiles; a novelty in this quarter. There is but +a scanty supply of fowls and buffaloes, and the necessaries of life +are scarce and dear. It is altogether the most uncouth and dreary +spot under the sun, though the sultan prefers it to Sambas and Mompava. + +Their naval force consists of two small ships, two brigs, fifty prows +large and small, and about one thousand men. There is water on the bar +to admit vessels drawing nine feet water. The roadstead, with seven +fathoms water on it, lies seven miles from the river's mouth. Care +must be taken not to mistake the Pongole river seen from the offing, +and which lies ten miles farther southward. The only stock procurable +here were hogs at ten dollars the picul, and water shipped off in +China tank-boats at four and a half dollars the ton. + +The next port is Mompava, about sixteen miles to the northward of +Pontiana, and the second port belonging to the sultan. The river is +shallow, narrow, extremely serpentine, and constantly running down +with great rapidity. The country around is a paradise in comparison +with Pontiana. It is upon an elevated site, and, wherever the eye +reaches, it is clear of jungle, and of fine rich mold, susceptible +of the highest culture. There is a walk up to the town about eight +miles from the mouth of the river; here the fishing-stakes nearly +extend across the river, beside two miserable forts, mounting each +five or six pounders, to defend the river. The population is seven +thousand men, Malays, Buguese, and Dayers, and about two thousand +Chinese. Formerly the territory of Mompava extended as far as 1 deg. north +latitude. This territory belonged to a chief or rajah, reduced by the +Dutch twenty-five years ago, shortly after they settled at Pontiana; +the territory thus conquered was delegated in trust to the Rajah of +Pontiana. The Sambas rajah has forcibly taken possession of a part +of it. Sultan Kassim, of Pontiana, governed this district during his +father's lifetime. On his accession to the musnud, five years ago, he +placed a half-brother there, a stupid fellow, about twenty-five years +of age. This man, about eight months ago, was trying to establish his +independence, which he found he could not maintain. It has the same +trade as Pontiana, but the regulations of the sultan do not admit of +any vessel's touching here for that purpose. The palace is extensive, +paled round with a sort of a fortification. The campo China, in +October last, was in part burnt down by the people of Sambas, to the +number of four hundred houses. There is a variety of roads hereabout; +one leading to Sambas, one to Landa, one to Mintrada, &c. Groves of +cocoanut-trees mark the site of ancient villages, since demolished; and +indicate that it once enjoyed a superiority and preeminence, of which +it has been despoiled. In point of susceptibility of cultivation, it +is a full half century beforehand with Pontiana; it is capable of great +improvement, and much grain might be raised with very little trouble. + +There is a considerable mud-flat at the mouth of the Sambas river, +extending four or five miles out, but no regular bar. Vessels +drawing thirteen feet may get in at high water springs; nine feet is +the least water, and there is thirteen at the flood. In the offing +there is a rise and fall of seven feet. At the entrance of the river +neither shore must be too closely hugged, having ledges of rocks near +them. Twelve miles above the bar the river branches into two parts; +the broad or northern branch is called the Borneo river, having its +source in Kiney Baulu; the other, leading to the town of Sambas, +is named the Landa river, having its source in the diamond mines; +where these two unite below there was formerly a fort. The Landa +river is extremely serpentine, deep to the very bushes on both sides, +and quite clear of danger up to the town, except near Siminis creek, +about ten miles below the fort; here a reef of rocks runs across +the stream, and as the fair way over them is somewhat intricate, +the channel ought to be buoyed before attempted to be passed. The +Barracouta, drawing thirteen feet, just scraped them at high water. + +About five or six leagues up the Landa branch, and about thirteen from +the sea, stands the town and palace of Sambas, on the confluence of the +Landa and Salako rivers. The fort on the right bank of the Landa is +about a league below the town, built of two rows of large piles, the +interstices being filled up with mud and stones, apparently mounting +five guns, eighteens and twelves in the lower tier, and an equal number +of smaller caliber on the ascend or more elevated range. A boom or +dam of fishing-stakes was constructed across the river one-eighth of a +mile below the fort, a large armed prow was moored in the center of the +river, mounting two long twelves, and a masked battery opposite to the +right, the number of guns unknown. The reach which these forts command +is a mile and a half. The land makes an elbow where these forts are, +which obliged the Barracouta to haul athwart the river, to get her +broadside to bear. The whole of this Landa river is very narrow, +but near the forts not one-third additional to her length. Both +sides of this river toward the fort appear tolerably clear from +the mast-head, interspersed with pleasant hills inhabited by the +Chinese. The tides are pretty regular, six hours and six hours, +running a knot and a half per hour. This river is too serpentine +and narrow to admit sailing up; sweeps, towing, or tiding it up are +the only modes that can be resorted to. The great branch of Borneo +river, before mentioned, when up it twenty miles, divides into two; +the branch running north being called Tampasan river, the other still +retaining the name of Borneo. The Tampasan branch leads to old Sambas; +it is from hence they get their supplies of rice and provisions, +by the two cuts above the town of Sambas, which reunites the Landa +and Borneo streams. There are roads from the great branch leading +to the town, fort, and palace. Since the Dutch abandoned Sambas, +three sultans have reigned on this musnud (within fifty years, or +thereabout). There are four Pangerans, Annam being the most daring of +the whole. His naval force consists of the Portuguese ship of 400 tons, +one brig, and eight or ten large fighting prows, beside his allies +from Borneo Proper, with ten large prows. The population amounts to +twelve thousand Dayers and Malays, and thirty thousand Chinese. + +Under the head mineralogy we have given a detailed account of the +principal sources of its industry. Sambas produces, beside gold, ten +piculs of birds'-nests annually (of an inferior quality), much ebony, +rattans, wax, &c. The trade here is much the same as at Pontiana, +and susceptible of a tenfold increase: it is every way superior to the +latter for the capital of a large mart. The country is better cleared, +and hence susceptible of more easy cultivation; the land more elevated +and less swampy, consequently healthier; the river deeper and farther +navigable; the population more dense, and, the land being clear of +jungle, more capable of being increased. Beside, it is the vicinage of +the most considerable gold-mines on all Borneo. The Sultan of Pontiana +would make it his capital if desired; his apprehensions of the power +of the Sambas princes lead him to give the preference to Pontiana. + +The town of Calaca, belonging to the Rajah of Borneo Proper, lies +north of Tanjong Datu; it is the principal port of trade south of +the capital, and the mart of the Sedang country. Here much grain +is produced, one hundred piculs of black birds'-nests, two hundred +piculs of wax, some gold, pepper, camphor, &c., but the tin-mines, +before mentioned, are utterly neglected. There are several other towns +upon each of the rivers along this coast; the principal ones are Salat, +Bacalo, Pasir, and Baram. They produce nearly the same articles as the +above, which are, however, sent on to the capital as fast as collected. + +It is here necessary to observe, that all the rocks and shoals laid +down on this coast do not exist at all; such as Volcano Island, the +Byhors, Krenpel, the whole Slykenburgh, five Comadas, &c. Having +beat up this coast twice, and carefully surveyed the whole, I can +declare a finer and clearer coast does not anywhere exist. The old +chart, published by A. Dalrymple, is much more correct than the recent +ones. The numbers of immense drifts and floating isles hereabout must +have given birth to all these imaginary dangers. + +The town of Borneo Proper, the capital of the kingdom of the same +name, lies in latitude 5 deg. 7' north; it is situated fifteen miles up +one of the finest rivers in the world, with three fathoms low water on +the bar, and a rise and fall of fifteen feet. A correct plan of the +river and town is published by Mr. Dalrymple. Here are mud docks for +vessels of 500 or 600 tons. The town consists of about three thousand +houses, built on stakes, in the middle of the river, with a population +altogether of fifteen thousand souls, Chinese, Malays, Moruts, &c. + +The palace is slightly fortified; but the Rajah of Pontiana says, the +Rajah of Borneo Proper is preparing the means of defence, apprehending +the resentment of the English in vindicating the rights of their flag, +so frequently insulted by them with impunity; however, as there is +sufficient water for a line-of-battle ship to the city, nothing need +be apprehended from them. The remains of a stone fort up the river +are still seen, but the one on Pulo Laboan is destroyed. Both banks +of the river are planted with pepper, which formerly produced sixty +thousand piculs annually; these are now running to decay from want +of commerce. The Chinese junks, for years past, have ceased touching +here, from the numberless piratical depredations committed upon them; +and the Portuguese from Macao have attempted to renew the trade +from time to time, but at length, in 1808, their agent withdrew to +Macao, a large ship having been cut off and the crew murdered the year +preceding. They now have no other resource but piracy; and the produce, +such as it is, finds its way in prows to Tringan, Sambas, Pontiana, +Lingin, and Malacca. Very large quantities of the finest camphor in +the world are procurable here; it comes down from the Morut country, by +the great river; a great deal of wax, some gold, much birds'-nests of +an inferior quality, any quantity of sago, cassia, clove-bark, pepper, +betel-nut, rattans, camphor-oil, &c., tripan, tortoise-shell, &c. + +The hills hereabout are clear of jungle, and wear a beautiful +appearance, and, without the aid of history, bear evident marks of +a more extensive population and culture. There are plenty of black +cattle, buffaloes, goats, fruits and vegetables of all kinds, abundance +and variety of fish, turtle, &c. The articles best suited for this +market are coarse China, white cangyans, brass plates, China crockery, +brass wire, tea, sugar-candy, coarse China silks and satins, blue and +white coarse guras and salampories, coarse ventipallam handkerchiefs, +arcot chintzes, iron and steel, quallies, cooking utensils, and other +articles suited to a Malay market--all coarse; no opium. The Borneo +catty is two and a half lbs. + +The English have been very desirous of a port in the China seas for +ages past, but have generally appeared to stumble on the most unhealthy +and ill-adapted places possible, such as Balambangan, Pulo Condore, +&c.; and even the principal object of Lord Macartney's embassy was +the obtaining of a cession of this nature. But if a capital harbor, +a navigable and majestic river, a productive country, a healthy site, +population ready formed, and a commerce all sufficient to pay the +expenses of an establishment (within one hundred miles of Balambangan) +is required, the East India Company ought to have pitched upon Borneo +Proper. It was once a most flourishing country, and a very short +period under British auspices would render it the first mart in the +East for China-Malayan commerce. There are large, populous towns of +Moruts, and Orang Idan, who abhor the Malays, but who would be soon +reconciled to a milder and less traitorous government. + +Kimanis lies in latitude 5 deg. 8' north; this is the first port on this +coast ceded to the English by the Sultan of Sulo. The town lies ten +miles up the river, at the foot of some of the most beautiful hills +I ever saw, and is inhabited by thirty-five thousand Orang Idan. The +river is small, and almost choked up at the mouth. This province +has the following sea-ports in it, viz., Kimanis, Benome, Papal, +and Pangalat, each governed by Orang Kayas, which still continue +to send their produce to Borneo Proper, consisting of ten piculs +of birds'-nests annually, two hundred piculs of wax, two piculs of +camphor, and cassia, sago, betel-nut, and pepper, as much as required; +tripan, camphor-oil, and rice; with fruit, fish, and provisions, +of sorts which are cheap and plentiful. The articles mentioned as +fit for Borneo answer here, only their produce is had about fifty +per cent cheaper. + +The province of Kiney Baulu has the following seaports:--Putatan, +Mangatal, Innanam, Labatuan, Mangabong, Tawaran, Sulaman, Ambung, Abai, +Tampasuk, and Padasan. The whole of this province is tremendously +high. The stupendous mountain of Kiney is about fifteen miles from +Tampasuk, which at present is the most considerable pirate-port in the +Malay seas, and belongs to the Rajah of Borneo Proper. The pirates +frequenting this place have committed such depredations hereabout +as to have induced the English to call the north of Borneo Pirates' +Point. These desperate banditti originally resided at Tawaran, but +were compelled to leave it from the resentment of whole tribes of +Orang Idan. The whole of this province is very fertile; it is the +source of all the great rivers on the island, and is more populous +with the aborigines of the country than perhaps the rest of the island +put together. The gold mines of Tampasuk have been mentioned; there +are also mines of rock-crystal. Tawaran and several other places +abound in goats and cattle. Abai has a small harbor, and the whole +of this coast is accurately laid down by Lieutenant James Burton, +in the sloop Endeavor. There are produced in this province much +wax, tortoise-shell, very fine camphor, sago, rattans, and a red +birds'-nest (which comes from Mantanane isle to Pandasan). They send +their produce to Borneo Proper. The pirates are commanded by Datus +from Borneo Proper. The lake in the vicinity of Kiney Baulu is said +to be delightful; it is many miles in circumference, well cultivated, +populous, and productive. It is said to be very cold, from the extreme +elevation, and the inhabitants are almost as fair as Europeans. There +is a valuable coral-tree somewhere hereabout. + +The Bay of Maludu, on the north of Borneo, is thirty miles in length, +and from four to six in breadth, with numberless rivers flowing into +it. There is no danger on the right-hand shore going up, but what +is seen; on the larboard shore considerable coral-reefs are met +with. Laurie and Whittle's chart of it is tolerably correct. The +principal towns are, Sungy Bassar, nearly at the head of the bay, +and Bankaka, on the left; the former, under Sheriff Mahomed, sends +its produce to Sulo; the latter, under Orang Kayas, trades with Borneo +Proper. The British, when last at Balambangan, threw up a small redoubt +on the Bankaka side, with a view to supplies of rice and provisions; +and this part is tranquil and a good roadstead, being sheltered from +the swell brought in by the sea-breeze. + +The rich and valuable fishery of copis or Ceylon oyster in this bay +has been mentioned; it might be rendered of considerable value. The +whole of the rivers for miles up abound in rattans; Mr. A. Dalrymple +thinks four thousand tons might be easily cut down every year without +exhausting it, and sent by junks to China. There are forests of +beautiful pines of stately growth, well calculated for the largest +masts, and in high esteem at China. There is no quarter of the world +which abounds more in that species of the sea-turtle (called by the +Malays pakayan) which yields the shell; any quantity may be had on +all the shores and isles of this bay. + +The interior abounds in camphor, which can be had in any quantities; +so vastly abundant is it, and so little does the Orang Idan know of +the extreme value of this commodity, that a bamboo of camphor may +be procured in exchange for a bamboo of salt. The petty towns are +Sandeck, Bowengun, Patasan, Pone, and Milawi. It produces in one +year two hundred piculs of wax, fifty piculs of tortoise-shell, +ten piculs of best camphor, and as much inferior; ten piculs of +birds'-nests, at ten dollars the catty; 1st camphor, twenty-five; +rattans, one dollar per picul; tortoise-shell, one dollar the catty; +wax, twenty the picul. Articles required are the same as at Borneo +Proper. Rice, provisions, fish, and fruits are abundant and cheap; +the sugar-cane also. + +The province of Paytan is the principal district for camphor of any +in the world. Whole forests for miles everywhere meet the eye, and +the produce from them is the finest that can be conceived, large and +transparent as Chin-chew sugar-candy. The principal towns are Pitan, +Kinarubatan, Kulepan, and the famous town of Sugut. The coast is so +full of coral-reefs, and has been so very indifferently surveyed, +that it is only frequented by prows; there is a road from Sugut to +Bankaka in Maludu Bay. Much wax, tripan, sago, &c., is produced here. + +Labuk has the towns of Camburcan, Labuk, and Songsohi; its produce is +somewhat similar to that of Paytan, with the addition of clove-bark +and birds'-nests. + +Sandakan. This celebrated harbor has been already mentioned as one +of the finest in the world. The towns within it are Towsam, Duyom, +Lu, Bokean, Dom or Doung, Seagally-hood and Tong luly luku; all +these are governed by Datus from Sulo, who have expressly settled +here to collect the prodigious quantities of birds'-nests abounding +in this district. They are procured here at ten dollars the catty; +and sent to Sulo, with tripan, wax, &c. The Sulos are very jealous of +any ships going in here, and will leave no attempt untried in cutting +off a vessel going in, although an English port. + +In the province of Mangidora lies the great river Kinnabatingan, +which is navigable a vast way up, with several towns of Orang Idan +on its shores. The other towns are Salasany, Supabuscul, Tambesan, +which forms also an elegant harbor, Laboan or Saboan, Tuncu, Salurong, +Giong, and Maday, which has a gold-mine, before mentioned. The whole +of this province, it is said, will produce above one hundred piculs +of the finest birds'-nests, much black ditto, some camphor, tripan, +honey, wax, dammer, Buru mats, fine spars; sago and pepper were +formerly largely cultivated here. The pearl-banks of Tawi Tawi have +been mentioned. + +Tirun. The sea-ports of this last mentioned and valuable province, +ceded to the English by the Sulos, are chiefly inhabited by Buguese +people. The towns are Sibuku, Sambakung, Leo or Ledong, Sikatak, +Sabellar, Kuran or Barrow, Talysion Dumaung, Tapeandurian. The +principal ports are Kuran and Sibuku; they produce a large quantity +of very fine white birds'-nests, a quantity of black ditto, much +dammer, sago, tripan, wax, rattans, camphor, honey, Buru mats, gold, +&c. The people of Tapeandurian are represented as very ferocious, +and the sea-coast hereabout requires surveying. + +The ports of Pasir and Coti originally belonged to the King of +Benjarmasing; very fine birds'-nests are procured here at twenty +dollars the catty; much gold, tripan, wax, &c. + +Were Borneo to be settled, I think the principal factory ought to be +at Borneo Proper; the second at Sambas; the third at Benjarmasing; +the fourth at Pasir; the fifth at Tabesan or Sandakan. + +In looking over the map of the world, it is a melancholy reflection to +view so large a portion of the habitable globe as all Borneo abandoned +to barbarism and desolation; that, with all her productive wealth +and advantages of physical situation, her valuable and interesting +shores should have been overlooked by all Europeans; that neither +the Dutch nor the Portuguese, with centuries of uncontrolled power in +these seas, should have shed a ray of civilization on shores bordering +upon their principal settlements; that her ports and rivers, instead +of affording a shelter to the extensive commerce of China, should +at this enlightened period of the world hold out only terror and +dismay to the mariner; and that all that she should have acquired +from the deadly vicinage and withering grasp of Dutch power and +dominion has been the art of more speedily destroying each other, +and rendering themselves obnoxious to the rest of mankind. Now that +her destinies are transferred to the enlightened heads and liberal +hearts of Englishmen,--now that her fortunes are embarked under the +administration of a wise and liberal government,--we may confidently +hope that a happier order of things will, under the blessing of an +all-ruling Providence, speedily restore these extensive shores to +peace, to plenty, and to commerce; and we ardently trust that another +age may not be suffered to pass away without exhibiting something +consolatory to the statesman, the philosopher, and the philanthropist. + + + + + +No. V. + +_Extracts from the late Mr. Williamson's Journal._ + + +In October, 1845, Mr. Brooke commissioned some of the European +gentlemen of his party to make a tour of inspection through the +outlying Dyak tribes dependent on Sarawak, for the purpose of +ascertaining their condition and prospects, and taking steps for the +redress of any grievances of which they might have to complain. A few +extracts from the rough journal kept on that occasion by Mr. Williamson +may not be uninteresting to the reader, as showing what a large +measure of success had already attended Mr. Brooke's wise and earnest +efforts to restore peace and plenty to the poor persecuted Dyaks; +what incessant vigilance on his part was still requisite to check the +inveterate propensity of the knavish Malays to plunder and oppress +them; and with what well-directed activity he pursues his labors +for the physical welfare and the moral regeneration of his subjects +and neighbors. + +"_Wednesday, Oct. 8th._--At 11 A.M. arrived at Pankalum Bunting, +where we found about thirty Dyaks in a small hut ready to welcome us, +and carry our luggage up to the village. At one o'clock started for +the Bakar village, about five miles from the landing place, at the +foot of the Sadong hills. This tribe consists of one hundred families, +occupying four villages. There are about twenty-five houses in Mungu +Babi (_i. e._ Hog Hill), the village where we are at present, and +five padi stores. It is very recently that the Dyaks have ventured +to store their padi in houses. At 8 P.M. attended the feast given in +our honor, where we saw the women dancing; they appeared very happy, +and pleased to see us. + +"_9th._--This morning we had all the Orang Kayas of the four villages, +who informed me they were very comfortable and happy. I told them the +object of my mission, at which they all seemed pleased, and said that +that if they were oppressed they would come to Sarawak and complain +to the Tuan Besar, When I asked them about the Sadong Dyaks, they said +I should hear all when I met them, as they will hide nothing from me. + +"The only thing these Dyaks complain of is, that Nakodah Mahomed told +them he had the Tuan Besar's chop, and gave them to understand that the +powder, muskets, &c., in his possession, belonged to the Tuan Besar; +in consequence of which they carried these goods for Nakodah Mahomed +without receiving any payment for their labor. I told them that in +future they need not carry goods for any man coming from Sarawak, or +elsewhere, without due payment in ready money; and that should traders +at any time leave their goods in the Dyak houses, they need not be +alarmed, but bring the goods to the Tuan Besar and tell him how they +were left behind. They further told me that the Siringi wish to claim +their siri cave, where they get their birds'-nests which is close +to Kumpung, and has belonged to them as long as they can remember; +that this cave is a whole day's journey from Siring--how, then, can +it belong to the Siringi? I answered, that on my return the Tuan Besar +would set the matter right, and give the cave to its proper owners. + +"_Same day._--Proceeded to Jinan, about eight miles distant. There +are here fifteen houses, and the Dyaks are very comfortable, having +plenty of grain, and being well off for sugar-cane, sweet potatoes, +plantains, betel-nut, beside various other fruit-trees. The houses +here, as at Mungu Babi, are very shabby. + +"_10th._--This morning met Orang Kaya Kusunan, who told me the +Toup Dyaks were waiting half way to receive us. At 4 P.M. I had the +Orang Kaya Tumangong of Toup, and the Orang Kaya of Kurran, Si Labi, +Si Mabong, Daah, Bugu (Sadong tribes), and the Orang Kaya Pasunan, +beside other Dyaks, the Bandar Cassim, with his Sadong Malays, and our +own people, at the house where I was staying. I explained my mission +to them, and made them understand that, at the Bandar's express wish, +the Tuan Besar had sent me to them to ascertain their condition. The +Bandar then told them it was his wish to institute the same laws and +customs as at Sarawak; after which, I informed the Dyaks that there +will be no more forcing of goods on them at exorbitant prices, and +that for the future, should any one 'serra' them, they must complain +to the Bandar, and subsequently lay their case before Mr. Brooke. The +conference, I am glad to say, ended to every one's satisfaction. + +"At 8 P.M. the Orang Kaya Rih and two others of the same tribe +complained to me of their grievances, and told me that Si Tore, +a Sadong man, had forced 10 pieces of iron, weighing 15 catties, +on them about two years and a half ago, and that he now demanded 100 +pasus of padi for it. (This is serra with a vengeance: 100 pasus are +equal to 2 1/2 tons weight!) They had paid 10 pasus; should they, +they asked me, pay the rest? I told them I would settle the business +at Bandar Cassim's village. + +"_11th._--The Dyaks gave us a feast last night; the women danced and +the merriment was kept up till morning. At 11 started in boats with +Bandar Cassim, and at 2 P.M. arrived at his village [34] called * * *, +where every thing had been got ready for our reception; a house was +well fitted with gay curtains and mats, and after a salute of three +guns as we approached, we took up our residence and made ourselves +very comfortable. At 7 in the evening we met all the respectable +part of the community of this little Malay village. I told them what +I was sent for, the Bandar as usual giving way to our wishes, and +repeating that Sarawak and Sadong, and Sadong and Sarawak, were as +one country. I told Si Tore, Sebi Gani, and Sirdeen, that they must +make no further demands on the Rih Dyaks, and that neither they nor +anybody else could serra the Dyaks any longer--not even the Bandar +himself; for they must recollect that the Sadong Dyaks would take +refuge in Sarawak if oppressed. + +"After the Bandar had left, the brother-in-law of the Orang Kaya +of Sinkaru, together with the Orang Kaya of Si Nankau Kujang, and +Orang Kaya Kurang, came to me. The former of these complained that +Abang Tahar (the old Patingi's son-in-law), about two years ago, +forced a small tatawak [35] and one brass dish on them, for which +he demanded three Dyaks as slaves, whom he seized at the time and +took away, and that now he demanded another Dyak boy. I replied they +were on no account to comply, that they must complain to the Bandar; +and if he took no notice of it, to go to Sarawak to the Tuan Besar. + +"The Orang Kaya likewise told me that formerly there were twenty-five +families in his tribe, but now they were reduced to fifteen, the +rest having been seized and sold into slavery! (Here follow other +complaints. The day's journal concludes thus:)--The Sinkaru Dyaks have +not yet returned to their former Tumbawong, [36] but are scattered +about in the jungle and very poorly off. I told them to return to +their former place of residence, and to collect the tribes there. + +"_Sunday, 12th._--Orang Kaya Si Rubin and Orang Kaya Signa Mantay, +of Rubin, likewise came to me to say that they were scattered, some +at * * * some at Bedope, and some at Rubin, and all badly off for +grain. When collected, they have about thirty families; formerly +they had about fifty. Those missing had mostly been seized and made +slaves. At 11h 30m we started for * * * (part of Rubin tribe), where +we arrived about half-past two. We found one house with five families +in it, and a Pangah [37] attached. Pa Rigan, the * * * of this tribe, +told me that Abang Tahar, Abang Ally, Abang Bakar, &c. &c. (all of +Gadong, under Patingi Mueel), demand from the Dyaks old serras, which +have been paid long ago. Dangon, a Sirkaru Dyak, told me that Abang +Tahar, a short time since, demanded from his tribe a Dyak boy, and +four Dyak boys from the En Singi Dyaks. Bandar Cassim put a stop to +these demands at the time; but he has revived them since. The Malays +of Sadong, whenever they go among the Dyaks, seize their fowls, eggs, +rice, cocoa-nuts, and all sorts of property. The Bandar tells me he +never permits these people to go among the Dyaks, but that they do +it by stealth over land, and that the Tuan Besar must do something +to prevent them from oppressing and frightening the Dyaks. (Here +follow other complaints against the Gadong people, after which the +journal continues.) + +"_13th._--Girang, a Bedope Dyak of the Rubin tribe, told me how +very much he is bullied and troubled by the Gadong people, who are +constantly threatening to attack him. I advised him to collect the +tribe at Rubin, their old Tumbawong. At 7 started back for the Bandar's +village, where we arrived at 10 o'clock. After a bath and breakfast, +the Bandar's mother came to me with a present of two sarongs, one +for the Tuan Besar and one for myself, and begged that I would urge +the Tuan Besar to take care of the Bandar as if he were his own son, +and not to cast him off. I told her that Mr. Brooke would support +the Bandar as long as he conducted himself properly. The Orang Kaya +Baga, Orang Kaya Sinching of Milikin, * * * of En Tayen, Orang Kaya +Laja of Rahmone, Orang Kaya Rinjou of Sirkaru, Orang Kaya Mior +Muntah, Pangara Lilli of Bunan, Orang Kaya Nijou of Mapuh, Orang +Kaya Ganggong of En Kelas, and Pangara Achong of En Singi, all met +me. I told them the object of my mission in presence of the Bandar +and several other Malays, and they were highly delighted. They asked +me to allow the Bandar to govern them, as they are much troubled +by the Gadong people. Abang Tahar lately demanded four Dyak boys +of Pangara Achong, and two from the Orang Kaya of Sirkaru; beside +which, the Sadong people seize their property whenever they go among +them. They are very poorly off for grain. They asked me for a letter +which should prevent people from annoying them. I told them I should +represent the matter to the Tuan Besar, and that no doubt he will +give his chop to each tribe. They all speak well of Bandar Cassim; +but his people are bad, and those at Gadong [38] are worse. + +"_14th._--At 6h 30m started up the river Kayan toward Tumma, +having left Talip with nineteen men to return to Sarawak by way of +Samarahan. At 8 we stopped at Mang-garut, where the Dyaks presented +us with a deer they had caught. These Dyaks are badly off for grain, +and it is the same tribe Bandar Cassim attacked in the Goa Siri (siri +cave) some few years ago. Orang Kaya Pa Jampat told me, that on that +occasion the Bandar seized eight Dyaks and took them with him. [39] +The river here begins to be narrow and shallow, with pebbly banks, +and clear water. At noon we stopped at Muara Rubin, where we intended +to stay a day to inquire for coal, which was stated to have been +found in this neighborhood; but as nobody knew the whereabout, and +as the Hindoo remains (said to consist of one stone in the shape of +a Malay hat) were five hours out of our way, we continued our route +till evening, having parted company with the Bandar at Muara Rubin, +as I well knew the Tumma Dyaks would be afraid of his approach. + +"_15th._--At daylight started toward Tumma, and at 9 stopped below +Muora Sangan, where we breakfasted, after which we pushed up again, +and at 1 arrived at Si Sijack, where the Tumma are. Orang Kaya Pa +Muany, the chief, told me they were very much bullied, as a Sarawak +man, named Pakar, and Marrat, the father-in-law of Bandar Mulana of +Sarawak, forced upon them a quantity of goods in the name of the +Tuan Besar and the Bandar Mulana. (Here follows a list of things, +such as gongs, tatawaks, jackets, handkerchiefs, and the like, with +the most exorbitant prices affixed to them. The rice and padi had not, +however, been paid for.) There are three villages of this tribe; two +about 250 yards apart; one of which, containing about ten families, +is ruled by the Orang Kaya Pa Muany, and the other, with about thirty +families, by the Orang Kaya Mayo and the Orang Kaya Pa Balet. In the +other village, about three reaches above, is the Orang Kaya Pa Magong, +with ten families. They said they were very comfortable under the +Patingi Ali (father of the present Bandar Mulana), but that since +Bandar Mulana has succeeded, they have been oppressed. They told +me they had run away from Sadong because they heard the Tuan Besar +was a just and good rajah, and that all his Dyaks were comfortable, +but now they are oppressed. Pakar told them that if they did not take +his tatawaks they must not remain here, but run away! + +"There are forty families of the Si Nangkan Soyar tribe, and thirteen +families of the Tibader tribe. The Orang Kayas told me that, had I not +arrived, the rice in payment of the goods forced on them would have +been taken down, as Pakar was here hurrying them to carry it to Sanar; +but that when he heard of my coming he could not be persuaded to wait +and meet me. The following goods have just been returned by the Gregan +Dyaks (here follows a long list of goods and prices). Pangara Achong +of the En Singi tribe told me that he has one family of his tribe at +Gregan, and he wanted them to return with him. I asked the Pangara of +Gregan whether this family wished to return, but he did not know. I +then told them no one could force them, but that they might do just as +they pleased. The Orang Kaya Pa Jampat goes down with me to Kuching to +lay before the Tuan Besar a claim made upon him by the Malay Pangeran +of Samarahan. Beside which, I take down the Orang Kaya and Pangara +of Tumma, Si Markan Singan and Tebadu, together with all the goods +forced on them, that the case may be judged by the Tuan Besar. + +"Bandar Cassim demands a debt of the Orang Kaya Pa Muany of Tumma; +he originally sold them (_i. e._ forced on them, of course) a gong +for 150 pasus of padi, 100 of which was paid; and the question is, +whether they were to pay the rest. This was four years ago. I left it +for the Tuan Besar's decision." (Here follows a list of goods forced +on the Tebadu Dyaks.) [40] + + + +THE END. + + + + + + + + + + + + +HARPER'S NEW MISCELLANY +OF +POPULAR STERLING LITERATURE. + + +"Books that have an _aim_ and _meaning_ in them." + +Now in course of publication, a new and attractive library of sterling +books, elegantly printed in duodecimo, on fine paper, and _bound in +extra muslin gilt, fitted for permanent preservation_. + + +PRICE FIFTY CENTS A VOLUME. + +_The cheapest Popular Series of Works yet Published._ + + + +I., II. + +Elements of Morality and Polity. + +BY WILLIAM WHEWELL, D.D., + +AUTHOR OF "HISTORY AND PHILOSOPHY OF THE INDUCTIVE SCIENCES," &c. + +2 vols. 12mo, Muslin, extra gilt, $1 00. + +Dr. Whewell's work ought to be read, because it can not be read +without advantage: the age requires such books.--_London Athenaeum._ + +A text-book of simple truths, from which, by induction, a complete +system of morality is constructed, applicable to all the relations +and circumstances of life, and embracing every department of human +action. The reader who shall carefully study these volumes--and a +more inviting page, clear and legible, the eye does not often rest +upon--will find his labor more than rewarded.--_New York Commercial +Advertiser._ + +Professor Whewell's "Elements of Morality" have been universally +received in England as a contribution of rare value to the department +of moral and political science.--_Baltimore American._ + +A splendid production by one of the most distinguished of the +scientific men of the age. This is a book, not to be read merely, but +to be re-perused and patiently studied, we have heard it pronounced by +no mean critic the most complete and lucid work on ethical philosophy +ever produced. We commend this work to the especial notice of thinkers +and readers, to scholars and schools generally, as a most admirable +text-book--_Sun._ + +The style of the work, though simple, is extremely clear, strong, and +eloquent. It is a book to be _studied_ rather than superficially read, +and can not fail to be of the very highest importance in instructing +and disciplining the public mind.--_American Patriot._ + +This is beyond all comparison the most complete, comprehensive, and +luminous treatise on the important subjects it discusses, that is to +be found in the language, and its careful study is indispensable to +every one who would obtain true and definite notions in regard to the +principles of public and private morals. It is profoundly learned +and philosophical, but the writer thinks logically and clearly, +and is therefore at all times lucid and comprehensible.--_Buffalo +Commercial Advertiser._ + + + + + + + + + + +III. + +The Philosophy of Mystery. + +BY WALTER COOPER DENDY. + +12mo, Muslin, extra gilt, 50 cents. + +This is a learned and elaborate work, in which the writer goes +into the investigation of all the phenomena of mind in the erratic +operations and phantasies of ghost seeing and spectral hallucinations, +and aims to give the true philosophy of all such delusions. He is a +medical man of considerable eminence, and has spared no pains in his +researches, giving a great number of facts and cases to illustrate +his philosophy. The volume will be much sought for, as it is really +a desideratum in the world of literature. We know of no work on this +subject which lays the same just claim to public attention, or the +study of the philosopher.--_Christian Advocate and Journal._ + +The volume before us is both instructive and amusing, and at this +particular time, when the extremes of superstition and philosophy have +shaken hands, it will be likely to effect an inconceivable amount of +good, if properly studied. It is one of the most remarkable productions +of the day, and must create an extraordinary degree of interest in +the public mind.--_Merchant's Magazine._ + +It belongs to that class of writings which you can take up and put down +at pleasure, and which may be subjected to repeated readings. The work +is pleasant, however, in spite of this--pleasant because of its facts, +its numerous details of mystery, its vast collection of anecdote, its +developments of _diablerie_, its tidings from the spiritual world, +and the many cases which it brings together of the curious and the +wonderful in nature and art, which former ages, and ignorance and +superstition, have concluded to consider supernatural. Where science +and modern speculation furnish the solution to the mystery, Mr. Dendy +couples it with the statements, and the book is thus equally valuable +and amusing.--_Charleston Transcript._ + +Here lies a remarkable work; beautiful in its style, and wondrous +in its matter. The work is strictly philosophical in its tendency, +yet more amusing than a novel.--_True American._ + +This is a book for the lovers of marvels and of mysteries. It +contains an immense collection of anecdotes of spectral apparitions, +of illusions of vision or of hearing, of striking phenomena exhibited +in dreams, in insanity, in trance, or in magnetism, and furnishes +many very valuable hints to aid in the solution of these mysteries, +by which so many have been bewildered or affrighted. It is written +in a style of great ease and elegance, and can not fail to find a +very wide circle of welcoming readers.--_Albion._ + +This unique and remarkable book has just been placed on our table; +we know its reputation of old; it is an admirable discourse on the +subject of supernaturalisms, such as mental illusions, dreams, ghosts, +mesmeric phenomena, &c. If any one will but read the first half dozen +pages, we will vouch for it he will not neglect the rest of the volume: +it is one of the best written books on one of the most curious range +of topics that could engage the pen of a writer, or the attention of a +reader. It is, in fact, one of the most curious volumes ever perused, +upon a series of the most singular subjects, and, in this new and +neat form, it will command a vast number of readers.--_Sunday Times._ + +"The Philosophy of Mystery" is an exceedingly able work; far better, +we think, than the "Natural Magic" of Brewster, a book of identical +purpose, carried out in a totally different way. The "Natural Magic" +is the more ratiocinative, Mr. Dendy's essay the more poetical, the +more imaginative, and to us the more interesting.--_National Press._ + + + + + + + +IV. + +The Life of Mozart: + +INCLUDING HIS CORRESPONDENCE. + +BY EDWARD HOLMES, + +AUTHOR OF "A RAMBLE AMONG THE MUSICIANS Of GERMANY," &c. + +12mo, Muslin, extra gilt, 50 cents. + +It is written in a beautiful, narrative style, and can not but be +every where acceptable. To all who appreciate the extraordinary +genius of Mozart, the delicate structure of his mind, the incidents +of his life, and his romantic death, this volume will indeed be a +treasure.--_Boston Gazette_. + +It contains, in addition to much of his interesting correspondence, +and other papers, a detailed account of his life, adventures, and +rise as an artist, and a discriminating sketch of his character, the +peculiarities of which are happily illustrated by anecdotes. Many +things of him, unknown even to his admirers, are here given to the +world, and his biographer, fully appreciating the artist, has yet, +not like a flatterer, but with true independence, spoken candidly of +the faults of the man.--_Merchant's Magazine_. + +Of this far-famed life of Mozart it is scarcely necessary for us +to say a word; the foreign reviews have been so unanimous in their +encomiums, that we suppose few will be found insensible to the strong +inducement of its perusal, especially as the work may be obtained at +the trifling cost of half a dollar, and in so beautiful a guise. We +have looked into the biography but slightly, yet find it redolent with +interest, and fully sustaining the high estimate placed upon the work +by the _London Athenaeum_ and _Blackwood_. If the Harpers continue +to fill their new library with sterling works like the present, +it will present the most truly valuable series, yet the cheapest, +ever attempted in any age or country.--_Evening Gazette_. + +The only authentic biography of the great composer that is extant +in the English language, and the events of his career are replete +with useful admonitions and warning to the sons of genius, and they +whisper to those whose present claims are not allowed that there +is a future full of promise. In his life Mozart was neglected and +impoverished, and he went to his grave with more than the bitterness +of death crowding on his thoughts, but fame has taken possession of +his memory, and among those who move as gods in musical art, few are +equal to him, none are superior. This biography possesses an interest +for all who feel interested in the great men of the earth. It is not +only remarkably well written, but has a completeness about it we have +never found before in any life of Mozart.--_Louisville Journal_. + +There is such a charm in this narrative, that the lovers of good +biography can not hear of it too soon. We can not conceive a more +fascinating story of genius. To a style which would alone have sufficed +to the production of an interesting and striking narrative, Mr. Holmes +unites a depth of knowledge and musical appreciation very rare and +remarkable. We thank him cordially for a most pleasing addition to +our standard biographical literature.--_Examiner_. + +The book is one of extraordinary interest, not merely to the lovers +of music and appreciators of the great composer, but to the general +reader, as a vivid picture of the life of a man of genius, who +encountered all the difficulties, trials, and sufferings usually the +lot of genius when it comes before a world incapable of appreciating +it, and indifferent to its welfare. The domestic portions of the book +are invaluable; his relations to his father and his wife are very +beautiful. The work is admirably executed, as well in the scientific +as anecdotical passages, and is worthy of the widest sale.--_News_. + + + + + + + + +III. + +_The Philosophy of Mystery._ + +BY WALTER COOPER DENDY. + +12mo, Muslin, extra gilt, 50 cents. + + +This is a learned and elaborate work, in which the writer goes +into the investigation of all the phenomena of mind in the erratic +operations and phantasies of ghost seeing and spectral hallucinations, +and aims to give the true philosophy of all such delusions. He is a +medical man of considerable eminence, and has spared no pains in his +researches, giving a great number of facts and cases to illustrate +his philosophy. The volume will be much sought for, as it is really +a desideratum in the world of literature. We know of no work on this +subject which lays the same just claim to public attention, or the +study of the philosopher.--_Christian Advocate and Journal._ + +The volume before us is both instructive and amusing, and at this +particular time, when the extremes of superstition and philosophy have +shaken hands, it will be likely to effect an inconceivable amount of +good, if properly studied. It is one of the most remarkable productions +of the day, and must create an extraordinary degree of interest in +the public mind.--_Merchant's Magazine._ + +It belongs to that class of writings which you can take up and put down +at pleasure, and which may be subjected to repeated readings. The work +is pleasant, however, in spite of this--pleasant because of its facts, +its numerous details of mystery, its vast collection of anecdote, its +developments of _diablerie_, its tidings from the spiritual world, +and the many cases which it brings together of the curious and the +wonderful in nature and art, which former ages, and ignorance and +superstition, have concluded to consider supernatural. Where science +and modern speculation furnish the solution to the mystery, Mr. Dendy +couples it with the statements, and the book is thus equally valuable +and amusing.--_Charleston Transcript_. + +Here lies a remarkable work; beautiful in its style, and wondrous +in its matter. The work is strictly philosophical in its tendency, +yet more amusing than a novel.--_True American_. + +This is a book for the lovers of marvels and of mysteries. It +contains an immense collection of anecdotes of spectral apparitions, +of illusions of vision or of hearing, of striking phenomena exhibited +in dreams, in insanity, in trance, or in magnetism, and furnishes +many very valuable hints to aid in the solution of these mysteries, +by which so many have been bewildered or affrighted. It is written +in a style of great ease and elegance, and can not fail to find a +very wide circle of welcoming readers.--_Albion_. + +This unique and remarkable book has just been placed on our table; +we know its reputation of old; it is an admirable discourse on the +subject of supernaturalisms, such as mental illusions, dreams, ghosts, +mesmeric phenomena, &c. If any one will but read the first half dozen +pages, we will vouch for it he will not neglect the rest of the volume: +it is one of the best written books on one of the most curious range +of topics that could engage the pen of a writer, or the attention of a +reader. It is, in fact, one of the most curious volumes ever perused, +upon a series of the most singular subjects, and, in this new and +neat form, it will command a vast number of readers.--_Sunday Times._ + +"The Philosophy of Mystery" is an exceedingly able work; far better, +we think, than the "Natural Magic" of Brewster, a book of identical +purpose, carried out in a totally different way. The "Natural Magic" +is the more ratiocinative, Mr. Dendy's essay the more poetical, the +more imaginative, and to us the more interesting.--_National Press._ + + + + + + + + + + +IV. + +_The Life of Mozart:_ + +INCLUDING HIS CORRESPONDENCE. + +BY EDWARD HOLMES, + +AUTHOR OF "A RAMBLE AMONG THE MUSICIANS OF GERMANY," &c. + +12mo, Muslin, extra gilt, 50 cents. + + +It is written in a beautiful, narrative style, and can not but be +every where acceptable. To all who appreciate the extraordinary +genius of Mozart, the delicate structure of his mind, the incidents +of his life, and his romantic death, this volume will indeed be a +treasure.--_Boston Gazette._ + +It contains, in addition to much of his interesting correspondence, +and other papers, a detailed account of his life, adventures, and +rise as an artist, and a discriminating sketch of his character, the +peculiarities of which are happily illustrated by anecdotes. Many +things of him, unknown even to his admirers, are here given to the +world, and his biographer, fully appreciating the artist, has yet, +not like a flatterer, but with true independence, spoken candidly of +the faults of the man.--_Merchant's Magazine._ + +Of this far-famed life of Mozart it is scarcely necessary for us +to say a word; the foreign reviews have been so unanimous in their +encomiums, that we suppose few will be found insensible to the strong +inducement of its perusal, especially as the work may be obtained at +the trifling cost of half a dollar, and in so beautiful a guise. We +have looked into the biography but slightly, yet find it redolent with +interest, and fully sustaining the high estimate placed upon the work +by the _London Athenaeum_ and _Blackwood_. If the Harpers continue +to fill their new library with sterling works like the present, +it will present the most truly valuable series, yet the cheapest, +ever attempted in any age or country.--_Evening Gazette._ + +The only authentic biography of the great composer that is extant +in the English language, and the events of his career are replete +with useful admonitions and warning to the sons of genius, and they +whisper to those whose present claims are not allowed that there +is a future full of promise. In his life Mozart was neglected and +impoverished, and he went to his grave with more than the bitterness +of death crowding on his thoughts, but fame has taken possession of +his memory, and among those who move as gods in musical art, few are +equal to him, none are superior. This biography possesses an interest +for all who feel interested in the great men of the earth. It is not +only remarkably well written, but has a completeness about it we have +never found before in any life of Mozart.--_Louisville Journal._ + +There is such a charm in this narrative, that the lovers of good +biography can not hear of it too soon. We can not conceive a more +fascinating story of genius. To a style which would alone have sufficed +to the production of an interesting and striking narrative, Mr. Holmes +unites a depth of knowledge and musical appreciation very rare and +remarkable. We thank him cordially for a most pleasing addition to +our standard biographical literature.--_Examiner._ + +The book is one of extraordinary interest, not merely to the lovers +of music and appreciation of the great composer, but to the general +reader, as a vivid picture of the life of a man of genius, who +encountered all the difficulties, trials, and sufferings usually the +lot of genius when it comes before a world incapable of appreciating +it, and indifferent to its welfare. The domestic portions of the book +are invaluable; his relations to his father and his wife are very +beautiful. The work is admirably executed, as well in the scientific +as anecdotical passages, and is worthy of the widest sale.--_News_ + + + + + + + + + + +V. + +_The Practical Astronomer:_ + +COMPRISING ILLUSTRATIONS OF LIGHT AND COLORS; PRACTICAL DESCRIPTIONS +OF ALL KINDS OF TELESCOPES, &C., WITH DESCRIPTIVE ACCOUNTS OF THE EARL +OF ROSSE'S LARGE TELESCOPES, AND OTHER TOPICS CONNECTED WITH ASTRONOMY. + +BY THOMAS DICK, LL.D., + +AUTHOR OF THE "CHRISTIAN PHILOSOPHER," "CELESTIAL SCENERY," "THE +SIDEREAL HEAVENS," &c. + +100 Engravings. 12mo, Muslin, extra gilt, 50 cents. + + +The _name_ of the distinguished author of this work is a sufficient +passport to public favor and a sure guarantee to its sterling +value, and those who have read Dr. Dick's former works will need +no recommendation of this book by us. He is not only an original +and profound observer of nature, but truly a most excellent +_Christian_ philosopher, whose powers of intellect and expanded +views of the character of the great Architect of the universe are so +eminently calculated to direct the mind not alone to the grandeur, +the magnificence, and sublimity of the laws and principles of the +material world, but to look through nature up to "Nature's God." It +is truly a valuable work.--_Farmer and Mechanic._ + +The merits of this work are of the highest order; Dick is one of the +profoundest and purest of modern philosophers.--_Western Continent._ + +Here is the ninth volume presented by this gifted author to the public; +the aim of all of which has been to simplify sciences which before +have been too often considered as every way _above_, and therefore +unworthy of the attention of ordinary readers. It is specially +addressed to private students and the higher schools, and comprises +a large amount of new and valuable matter connected with astronomy, +and pointing out ways in which the more humble student can in the +best way improve the advantages placed in his way.--_Auburn Journal._ + +Let not the inquisitive fear that the intricacies of science or +the technicalities of language will obstruct the pleasure they +will derive from the study of this book; for the clearness of the +author's style, and the elucidation of the one hundred engravings, +render it within the scope and comprehension of every intelligent +student.--_Industrial Record._ + +The copious use of engravings and of pictorial illustrations, +together with the plain, popular explanations, render this book a +truly _practical_ work. Dr. Dick is not only thoroughly scientific, +but he knows well how to render his acquisitions available to the +great body of common readers, by his accurate method and clear +descriptions.--_Watchman._ + +We have always been an admirer of the writings of this gentleman, and +popularity keeps on his side wherever he is known. He is a profound +thinker and a devout Christian. His works all tend to illustrate +the simple as well as the sublimest principles of philosophy, and +while they instruct, can not fail to enlighten. The present volume +comprises illustrations of light and colors, practical descriptions of +all kinds of telescopes, the use of the equatorial-transit, circular, +and other astronomical instruments, and other topics connected with +astronomy. It is illustrated by 100 engravings, and will be found +a most valuable book for all classes, but particularly as a work of +instruction for youth.--_Illustrated Magazine._ + + + + + + + + + + +VI., VII. + +_The Life of Paul Jones._ + +BY ALEXANDER SLIDELL MACKENZIE, U. S. N. + +2 vols. 12mo, Portrait, Muslin, extra gilt, $1 00. + + +The history of the naval adventures and victories of Paul Jones forms +one of the most romantic chapters in the record of great deeds, and +can not fail to attract general and ardent attention, since it relates +to the very beginning of the American navy.--_Commercial Advertiser._ + +The various biographies of Paul Jones now extant have been carefully +searched by Mr. Mackenzie; as also the log books of Jones's various +cruizes and papers in possession of his heirs, with a view to procure +a full and authentic collection of facts and incidents for the present +work. Thus industriously compiled and stored, and that by an able +hand, this edition must necessarily, as it does, possess considerable +merit.--_Philadelphia Chronicle._ + +Paul Jones will always be regarded as one of the most daring +and gallant heroes who ever made the ocean the theater of their +exploits. Such a name can never be forgotten by Americans, nor can +the services which he rendered to the cause of American liberty, +in its infant struggles, ever pass into oblivion. No better +biographer for such a character could have been found than Captain +Mackenzie. Familiar with all the details of seamanship, possessing the +same bold patriotism which made the career of his hero so illustrious, +and being an accomplished and vigorous writer, he has given us a most +admirable biography.--_Courier and Enquirer._ + +This is a capital American biography, of an American naval hero, +scarcely less renowned and no less gallant and gifted with an heroic +spirit than Nelson, the great British admiral. There is scarcely a more +stirring life in the whole compass of literature than that of Jones; +and the important part he played in giving force and almost life itself +to the American navy, then in its earliest infancy, renders his history +peculiarly interesting and attractive. No man certainly ever performed +more gallant exploits, and few have rendered more important service to +the cause of freedom than he. Many of his actions for bravery, skill, +and the performance of almost incredible deeds, by apparently the most +inadequate means, are scarcely rivalled by any thing in the records +of naval history. His life should be familiar to American readers; +and in the elegant, forcible, and graphic style of Commander Mackenzie +it can not fail to be universally read.--_True Sun._ + +We are glad to see the life of this celebrated man by one competent to +write it. His adventures border so much on the marvelous that one is +glad to be sure of reading only what is authentic, and that written in +a style and language becoming the subject. There is a good moral lesson +conveyed in this life of Paul Jones.--_Christian Advocate and Journal._ + +The name and achievements of Paul Jones are indissolubly connected with +American history; and his renowned deeds, which made him the terror +of the coast of Britain, are among the most romantic in the annals of +naval warfare, and impart to this work the highest interest. This is +the most complete and authentic biography of Commodore Jones ever +published, as all accessible materials have been collected, and +are used by Commander Mackenzie with the ability and tact which he +possesses as an accomplished scholar and an officer, accomplishments +which peculiarly qualify him to write naval biography. A fine portrait +of this true naval hero will be found in the first volume.--_Baltimore +American._ + +We have read it with some care, and compared it with other biographies, +and think it greatly superior to any yet published. It contains a +full narrative of all the important events in Jones's eventful career, +and yet is less voluminous than previous works.--_Highland Courier._ + + + + + + + + + + + + +VIII. + +The Ascent of Mount Ararat, + +(ACHIEVED FOR THE FIRST TIME). + +BY DR. FRIEDRICH PARROT. + +TRANSLATED BY W. D. COOLEY. + +12mo, Map and Wood-cuts, Muslin, extra gilt, 50 cents. + + +This is a most interesting book, both in its description of the +country and inhabitants of Central Asia, and in its connection with +the remarkable event of our world--_the Flood_. Mount Ararat, which +was ascended by M. Parrot, must ever possess to the Biblical reader +most intense interest, as the resting place of the ark after the +universal deluge.--_Pittsburgh Chronicle._ + +A work destined, from the intrinsic interest of the subject, and +the fullness of detail which is spread before the reader, to a +very wide circulation. The idea of ascending Mount Ararat seems to +have risen with the traveler to a passion; previous travelers had +never accomplished it; the natives of the region looked upon it as +impossible; their superstition regarded the inaccessible summit as +the mysterious resting place of the ark to this day. How Dr. Parrot +approached the region, what adventures he met with by the way, what +manners and customs he witnessed, how he twice essayed to reach the +sacred peak and turned back, and how on a third attempt he accomplished +the feat through difficulties the recital of which has led scientific +men still to doubt if the ascent were really performed--may all be +read in this compact volume, illustrated by maps and engravings, +with every aid to the reader's comprehension.--_News._ + +Hardly a subject could have been selected more stirring in its +character than "A Journey to Ararat." Held in equal veneration by Jew, +Christian, and Mohammedan, and regarded with superstitious feelings +even by the pagan, that mountain has always enjoyed a degree of +celebrity denied to any other. Sinai, and Horeb, and Tabor may have +excited holier musings; but Ararat "the mysterious"--Ararat, which +human foot had not trod after the restorer of our race, and which, +in the popular opinion, no human foot would be permitted to tread till +the consummation of all things--Ararat the holy, which winged cherubim +protected against the sacrilegious approach of mortals, and which +patriarchs only were permitted to revisit, appeared in many respects an +object of curiosity as unique as it was exciting.--_London Athenaeum._ + +It is a highly entertaining work, embodying much historical, +geographical, and scientific information, and conveying a knowledge of +the character, habits, and manners of the people among whom the author +traveled. The ascent of Mount Ararat is so very difficult that many +persons have doubted whether the feat was accomplished by Dr. Parrot, +but his acknowledged integrity ought to place his claims in this +respect above suspicion. The lovers of bold adventure will find in +this volume much to gratify their peculiar taste, and the general +reader can hardly fail to be pleased with it.--_New York Tribune._ + +This volume has claims upon the public, as a scientific and truly +valuable work, which have been possessed by few others. It is, in fact, +the condensed narrative of an exploring expedition sent out by the +Russian government into the region about Mount Ararat, a region which +possesses more interest for scientific men, perhaps, than any other +in the world which has been so little explored.--_New York Courier._ + +It reads more like the travels of Von Humboldt than any book we have +lately read. The writer is a man of science and observation, and the +book we recommend to the public.--_Lowell Courier._ + + + + + + + + + + + +IX. + +Remarkable Criminal Trials. + +TRANSLATED FROM THE GERMAN OF FEUERBACH, + +BY LADY DUFF GORDON. + +12mo, Muslin, extra gilt, 50 cents. + + +A book of thrilling interest; one that can not fail to be read with +avidity.--_New York Courier._ + +This work abounds with singular cases of criminal jurisprudence in +Bavaria, of the most astounding and thrilling interest, the details of +which are of remarkable character, and differ essentially from those +hitherto familiar to the public in England or this country. They +are fully equal, in their absorbing interest, to any thing in the +famous "Causes Celebres" of France; and, perhaps, for their unique +and striking features, are unexcelled by any delineations of crime +elsewhere on record.--_True Sun._ + +Public attention was first drawn to this work by an able and +interesting article in the Edinburgh Review. They are all narratives +of marvelous interest--more strange and wonderful, many of them, +than any work of fiction, and giving to the reader a clear view +of the nature and peculiarities of the criminal jurisprudence of +Germany.--_N. Y. Commercial Advertiser._ + +Its illustration of the many curious customs of German criminal +jurisprudence will be sufficiently startling to the English reader; +but, apart from this, the extraordinary subtle discrimination thrown +into the narrative of each particular crime gives to the volume, as a +mere story book, the intellectual interest, the passion, and all the +rich and various coloring of a philosophical romance. The translation +is excellent, and a judicious compression of the original has added +much to the effect.--_London Examiner._ + +The narratives abound with thrilling interest, setting forth the +constant recurrence of crime, detection, and punishment, in which +the attention of the reader is roused by the novelty of the scene, +and rewarded by the light thrown upon the darkest portion of human +nature.--_New Bedford Mercury._ + +This work has been so highly extolled by the Edinburgh Foreign +Quarterly and other reviews, that not much need be said of its +character and claims to public notice. It presents some of the +most remarkable stories of horrible crimes and their exposure +we have ever met, and gives a very clear and vivid conception of +the peculiarities of German criminal jurisprudence. It is a book +which will be universally read, as one of the most thrilling and +absorbing interest. The translator has given in the preface a very +good account of the criminal law of Germany, and has selected only +those portions of the original work which will have the greatest +value and interest.--_Mirror._ + +This book is of an entirely different character from works of a similar +title that have hitherto appeared. It contains an account of fourteen +trials for murder in Germany, and the object of it is to show the +peculiar mode of trial instituted by the Bavarian code.--_Evening +Gazette._ + +The records of crime are not usually a profitable kind of reading. The +contagion of the example is generally greater than the warning of +the fate of the criminal; and many a villain has been made by the +very means taken to keep him from crime. But as much depends on the +manner of the narrative, and as it is possible to extract some of the +gravest lessons of virtue and wisdom from the misdeeds of others, it +gives us pleasure to state that the present work is unexceptionable in +this respect, while the cases possess extraordinary interest, and are +replete with instruction. They afford much insight of human motives, +and teach impressive lessons of the retributive justice of Providence, +and the misery and evil of sin.--_Biblical Repository_. + + + + + + + + + + + + +X., XI. + +Journal of Researches + +INTO THE NATURAL HISTORY AND GEOLOGY OF THE COUNTRIES VISITED DURING +THE VOYAGE OF H. M. S. BEAGLE ROUND THE WORLD. + +BY CHARLES DARWIN, M.A., F.R.S. + +2 vols. 12mo, Muslin, extra gilt, $1 00. + + +This is another most valuable contribution to the cause of _popular +education_, issued in Harper's New Miscellany; a series that bids fair +to surpass even their Family Library in the sterling excellence and +popularity of the works which it renders accessible to all classes +of the community. The work contains, in a condensed and popularized +form, the results of the British Exploring Expedition, which Mr. Darwin +accompanied at the special instance of the lords of the Admiralty. The +voyage consumed several years, and was performed at a very heavy +expense on the part of the British government. Yet here we have its +most important results, divested of all scientific technicalities, +and presented in a form at once attractive and accurate. The work is +entitled to secure a very wide circulation. It contains an immense +amount of information concerning the natural history of the whole +world, and is superior, in point of interest and value, to any similar +work ever published.--_New York True Sun._ + +A work very neatly issued, and has the interest of a leading +subject well developed, the unfailing secret of producing a book of +character. In the present state of the world, when new countries are +opening every day to the great conqueror, Commerce, such publications +are of unusual importance. Perhaps no information, just now, can be +of more consequence to us than that which puts us in possession of +the movements of English discovery.--_News._ + +This is a most valuable and a most interesting work; one which combines +true scientific worth with the graces of style suited to render it +popular, better than almost any similar work which has recently come +under our notice. The voyage of the Beagle was, in truth, a scientific +exploring expedition; and Mr. Darwin accompanied it at the special +request of the lords of the Admiralty. Its results have been published +in several very elaborate, extensive, and costly volumes in England; +but as these were entirely beyond the reach of the great mass of the +reading public, Mr. Darwin prepared these volumes, in which all the +important results of the expedition are fully, clearly, and distinctly +presented, interwoven with a most entertaining narrative of personal +incident and adventure.--_N. Y. Courier._ + +This is a work of remarkable interest and value. The author, +in circumnavigating the world, under commission of the British +government, for scientific and exploring purposes, visited nearly +every country on the globe, and preserved in this brief, simple, but +beautiful narrative all the singular facts of a scientific, social, +or geographical nature which are of general interest. The amount of +information condensed in these volumes is incredible; and the skill +with which the useful and interesting is selected from that which +is unimportant or well known is admirable. We admire the style, +the straightforward sincerity of the writer, the apparent candor, +and the erudite research which he uniformly exhibits. Without one +quarter of the bulk or pretension of our famous exploring expedition, +the present work is hardly inferior to it in value and interest. This +series is gaining a fine character, of which we hope the publishers +will be jealous.--_New York Evangelist._ + + + + + + + + + + + +HARPER'S FAMILY LIBRARY. + +_Books that you may hold readily in your hand are the most useful, +after all._--Dr. Johnson. + + +The above-named series, extending to 173 volumes, comprises a rich and +varied collection of works in the several departments of literature, +forming a most valuable circle of useful, instructive, and entertaining +knowledge, adapted for popular use. The utmost care has been taken, +not only to exclude whatever can have an injurious influence on the +mind, but to embrace every thing calculated to strengthen the best +and most salutary impressions. + +No family ought to be without this library, as it furnishes the +readiest resources for that education which ought to accompany +or succeed that of the boarding-school or the academy, and is +infinitely more conducive than either to the cultivation of the +intellect.--_Monthly Review._ + + +CONTENTS OF THE SERIES. + + +1, 2, 3.--MILMAN'S HISTORY OF THE JEWS. $1 20. + +4, 5.--HISTORY OF NAPOLEON BONAPARTE. 90 cents. + +6.--SOUTHEY'S LIFE OF LORD NELSON. 45 cents. + +7.--LIFE OF ALEXANDER THE GREAT. 45 cents. + +8, 74.--NATURAL HISTORY OF INSECTS. 90 cents. + +9.--GALT'S LIFE OF LORD BYRON. Portrait, 40 cents. + +10.--BUSH'S LIFE OF MOHAMMED. Engravings, 45 cents. + +11.--SCOTT'S LETTERS ON DEMONOLOGY. 40 cents. + +12, 13.--GLEIG'S HISTORY OF THE BIBLE. 80 cents. + +14.--DISCOVERY IN THE POLAR REGIONS. 45 cents. + +15.--CROLY'S LIFE OF GEORGE IV. 45 cents. + +16.--DISCOVERY AND ADVENTURE IN AFRICA. 45 cts. + +17, 18, 19, 66, 67.--CUNNINGHAM'S LIVES OF EMINENT PAINTERS AND +SCULPTORS. Portraits, $2 10. + +20.--JAMES'S CHIVALRY AND THE CRUSADES. 45 cts. + +21, 22.--LIFE OF MARY QUEEN OF SCOTS. 85 cents. + +23.--ANCIENT AND MODERN EGYPT. 45 cents. + +24.--FLETCHER'S HISTORY OF POLAND. 45 cents. + +25.--SMITH'S FESTIVALS, GAMES, AND AMUSEMENTS, ANCIENT AND +MODERN. 45 cents. + +26.--BREWSTER'S LIFE OF SIR ISAAC NEWTON. 45 cts. + +27.--RUSSELL'S PALESTINE. 45 cents. + +28.--MEMES'S MEMOIRS OF JOSEPHINE. 45 cents. + +29.--COURT AND CAMP OF BONAPARTE. 45 cents. + +30.--LIVES AND VOYAGES OF DRAKE, CAVENDISH, AND DAMPIER, Account of +the Bucaniers, &c. 45 cents. + +31.--BARROW'S DESCRIPTION OF PITCAIRN'S ISLAND, &c. 45 cents. + +32, 72, 84.--SACRED HISTORY OF THE WORLD. $1 35. + +33, 34.--JAMESON'S FEMALE SOVEREIGNS. 80 cents. + +35, 36.--LANDERS' TRAVELS IN AFRICA. 90 cents. + +37.--ESSAY ON THE INTELLECTUAL POWERS. 45 cts. + +38, 39, 40.--LIVES OF CELEBRATED TRAVELLERS. $1 25. + +41, 42.--LIFE OF FREDERIC THE GREAT. 90 cents. + +43, 44.--SKETCHES FROM VENETIAN HISTORY. 90 cts. + +45, 46.--THATCHER'S INDIAN BIOGRAPHY. 90 cents. + +47, 48, 49.--MURRAY'S BRITISH INDIA. $1 35. + +50.--BREWSTER'S NATURAL MAGIC. 45 cents. + +51, 52.--TAYLOR'S HISTORY OF IRELAND. 90 cents. + +53.--DISCOVERY IN NORTH AMERICA. 45 cents. + +54.--HUMBOLDT'S TRAVELS. 45 cents. + +55, 56.--EULER'S NATURAL PHILOSOPHY. 90 cents. + +57.--POPULAR GUIDE TO THE OBSERVATION OF NATURE. 45 cents. + +58.--ABERCROMBIE'S MORAL FEELINGS. 40 cents. + +59.--DICK ON IMPROVEMENT OF SOCIETY. 45 cents. + +60.--JAMES'S HISTORY OF CHARLEMAGNE. 45 cents. + +61.--RUSSELL'S NUBIA AND ABYSSINIA. 45 cents. + +62, 63.--RUSSELL'S OLIVER CROMWELL. 90 cents. + +64.--MONTGOMERY'S LECTURES ON POETRY. 45 cts. + +65.--BARROW'S LIFE OF PETER THE GREAT. 45 cents. + + + + + + + + + + + +FOR FAMILY READING. + + +X. RECOLLECTIONS OF A HOUSEKEEPER. + +BY MRS. C. GILMAN.--18mo, muslin gilt, 45 cents. + + +XI. THE MAYFLOWER; OR, SKETCHES OF SCENES AND INCIDENTS AMONG THE +DESCENDANTS OF THE PILGRIMS. + +BY MRS. HARRIET B. STOWE.--18mo, muslin gilt, 45 cents. + +A series of beautiful and deeply interesting tales, remarkable for +a rigorous yet disciplined imagination, a lively and pure style, +and their high moral tone. They are books which will interest mature +readers as well as children and youth. As an author she will take +her place among that fine and elevated class to which Miss Sedgwick +and Mrs. Child belong; authors whose writings unite with the graces +of composition a deep sympathy with all that is human, and a noble +philanthropy.--_Biblical Repository._ + + +XII. CONQUEST AND SELF-CONQUEST; OR, WHICH MAKES THE HERO? + +18mo, muslin gilt, 37 1/2 cents. + +An admirable volume; admirable in style, in sentiment, and in +tendency.--_Courier and Enquirer._ + + +XIII. + +THE COUSINS. A TALE OF EARLY LIFE. + +By the Author of "Conquest and Self-Conquest."--18mo, 37 1/2 cents. + +We have read this volume with unmingled satisfaction. It is replete +with instruction, not only for the young, but for all who are concerned +to know and judge their motives of life. We thank the author for +her nice and interesting discriminations between the motives of +conduct. Indeed, we do not know of any works of this description from +the American press which are entitled to a more just popularity than +those which have proceeded from the pen of this writer. They place +her beside the Edgeworths, and the Barbaulds, and the Opies, who +have so long delighted and instructed our children and us.--_New-York +Observer._ + + +XIV. PRAISE AND PRINCIPLE; OR, FOR WHAT SHALL I LIVE? + +By the Author of "Conquest and Self-Conquest."--18mo, 37 1/2 cents. + +A book most worthy to be put into the hands of youth engaged in their +educational course, and can not but inspire the love of truth and +goodness for their own sakes.--_Biblical Repository._ + +This little work is designed to inculcate upon the minds of youth the +importance of a steadfast adherence to _principle_ in the concerns of +life; and among "children of a larger growth" its perusal may afford +both pleasure and improvement.--_Bedford Mercury._ + + + + + + + + +107, 108.--PARRY'S THREE VOYAGES. 90 cents. + +109, 110.--LIFE OF DR. JOHNSON. 90 cents. + +111.--BRYANT'S AMERICAN POETS. 45 cents. + +112, 113.--HALLECK'S BRITISH POETS. 90 cents. + +114, 115, 116, 117, 118.--KEIGHTLEY'S HISTORY OF ENGLAND. $2 25. + +119, 120.--HALE'S UNITED STATES. 90 cents. + +121, 122.--IRVING'S LIFE OF GOLDSMITH. 90 cents. + +123, 124.--DISTINGUISHED MEN OF MODERN TIMES. Portraits, 90 cents. + +125.--LIFE OF DE WITT CLINTON. 45 cents. + +126, 127.--LIFE OF COMMODORE OLIVER H. PERRY. Portrait, 90 cents. + +128.--LIFE AND TRAVELS OF BRUCE. 45 cents. + +129.--LIVES OF JAY AND HAMILTON. 45 cents. + +130.--BREWSTER'S LIVES OF GALILEO, TYCHO BRAHE, AND KEPLER. 45 cents. + +131.--HISTORY OF ICELAND, GREENLAND, AND THE FAROE ISLANDS. 45 cents. + +132.--MANNERS AND CUSTOMS OF THE JAPANESE IN THE NINETEENTH CENTURY. +45 cents. + +133.--DWIGHT'S HISTORY OF CONNECTICUT. 45 cents. + +134, 135.--RUINS OF ANCIENT CITIES. 90 cents. + +136, 137.--HISTORY OF DENMARK. 90 cents. + +138.--CAMP ON DEMOCRACY. 45 cents. + +139.--LANMAN'S MICHIGAN. 45 cents. + +140.--FENELON'S ANCIENT PHILOSOPHERS. 45 cents. + +141, 142.--COUNT SEGUR'S EXPEDITION TO RUSSIA. Map, 90 cents. + +143, 144.--HISTORY OF PHILOSOPHY. 90 cents. + +145.--BUCKE'S BEAUTIES OF NATURE. 45 cents. + +146.--LIEBER'S ESSAYS ON PROPERTY. 45 cents. + +147.--WHITE'S HISTORY OF SELBORNE. 45 cents. + +148.--WRANGELL'S EXPEDITION TO SIBERIA. 45 cts. + + + + + + + + + + +NOTES + +[1] Gunong, a mountain, part of a chain. + +[2] Pronounced short, for (properly) Bandhara; a treasurer, chief +steward. + +[3] The old name for the town of Sarawak. + +[4] Aloes wood, _Lignum aloes_. + +[5] The Malay name for the betel, the aromatic leaves of which are +chewed along with the pinang or areca nut, a little pure lime, and +various spices. + +[6] The banks of the Boyur and Quop are Nepa palm. + +[7] fines--J.H. + +[8] Western as regards Polynesia. + +[9] Also, vol. iv. of the _Bengal Asiatic Researches_. + +[10] Canto xv., stanza 55, 56. + +[11] The following is an extract from an equally sapient proposition, +published in the Chinese state-papers on the 14th January, 1840; it is +headed, Memorial of Toang Wangyen to the emperor, recommending plans +for the extermination of barbarians: "Your minister's opinion is this: +that we, being upon shore and they in their ships, it is not at all +requisite to order our naval forces to proceed out a great distance +to contend with them in battle. When the commercial intercourse +of the said barbarians shall have been entirely put an end to, and +their supplies grow scanty, it will be impossible for them to remain +a long time anchored in the outer seas, and they will necessarily, +as formerly, enter the inner waters in order to ramble and spy about +them. We can then, by means of our naval vessels, tempt them and +cause them to enter far in; and a previous arrangement having been +made, we can summon the people who live along the coasts, such as are +expert and able swimmers, and those who possess bravery and strength, +to the amount of several hundreds of men: we can then cause them, +during the night, to divide themselves into companies, and silently +proceeding through the water, straightway board the foreign ships; +and overcoming the crews in their unprepared state, make an entire +massacre of the whole of them." + +[12] I need hardly remark on the singular courage and disregard +of personal safety and life itself evinced by my friend on this +occasion. At issue with the rajah on points of great temptation to him, +beset by intrigues, and surrounded by a fierce and lawless people, +Mr. Brooke did not hesitate to dispatch his vessels and protectors, +the one on a mission of pure humanity, and the other in calm pursuance +of the objects he had proposed to himself to accomplish; and with +"three companions," place himself at the mercy of such circumstances, +regardless of the danger, and relying on the overruling Providence +in which he trusted, to bring him safely through all his difficulties +and perils.--H. K. + +[13] Now called Samarang. + +[14] This I found on inquiry, to be strictly true--a most amiable +trait!--B. + +[15] I am happy to say that the Lords of the Admiralty have since been +pleased to promote Lieut. Wilmot Horton and Mr. W. L. Partridge, mate, +who commanded the pinnace, for their gallantry on this occasion.--H. K. + +[16] Piratical habits are so interwoven with the character of these +Sarebus people, that the capture at sea of a few prahus would have but +small effect in curing the evil; while a harassing duty is encountered, +the result is only to drive the pirates from one cruising-ground to +another; but, on the contrary, a system which joins conciliation with +severity, aiming at the correction of the native character as well +as the suppression of piracy, and carrying punishment to the doors +of the offenders, is the only one which can effectually eradicate an +evil almost as disgraceful to those who permit it as to the native +states engaged in it. + +[17] It had never been known so quiet as during the days we were up +their river. + +[18] I have lately heard, with much regret, of the death of this +valuable officer. + +[19] Leonard Gibbard made his first trip to sea under my charge in +1834, when I commanded the Childers in the Mediterranean, and at that +early age gave promise of what he afterward proved himself to be--a +gallant officer and thorough seaman. Poor fellow! he was always a +general favorite wherever he went--H. K. + +[20] _Anglice_, run-a-muck. + +[21] See Prichard's Researches, 1826, which, meager as they must have +been from the want of data, tell us in two or three pages nearly all +we know on the subject. That able investigator states that the Dyaks +of Borneo resemble the Taraj of Celebes. + +[22] With regard to the Arafuras, or Haraforas, it is stated that +they are termed in some districts Idaan, in others Murut, and in +others Dayaks. See Raffles' Java. And Leyden assures us that all +these varieties were originally called Idaan. + +[23] A singular contrast to preceding accounts, which represent the +north and northeastern population not only as pirates, called Tiran +or Zedong, but even as cannibals. Near them there appear to be the +piratical nests of Magindano, Sooloo, &c. + +[24] There are several rivers, Meri, Bentulu, &c., the inhabitants +of which, says Mr. Brooke, I class under the general term Millanow, +as their dialects show a very close connection, and their habits are +the same. Evidently from language they are civilized tribes of Kayans. + +[25] Leyden concluded that the language was allied to the Batta and +Tagala, and the whole derived from and varieties of the primitive +tongue of the Philippine Islands. + +[26] Probably a Dyak phrase for levying exactions on the oppressed +people. It is not Malay. + +[27] The utter destruction of a village or town is nothing to the +infliction of cutting down the fruit-trees. The former can be rebuilt, +with its rude and ready materials, in a few weeks; but the latter, +from which the principal subsistence of the natives is gathered, +cannot be suddenly restored, and thus they are reduced to starvation. + +[28] The grounds for this opinion are an estimate personally made +among the tribes, compared with the estimate kept by the local +officers before the disturbance arose; and the result is, that only +two out of twenty tribes have not suffered, while some tribes have +been reduced, from 330 families to 50; about ten tribes have lost +more than half their number; one tribe of 100 families has lost all +its women and children made slaves; and one tribe, more wretched, +has been reduced from 120 families to 2, that is, 16 persons; +while two tribes have entirely disappeared. The list of the tribes +and their numbers formerly and now are as follows:--Suntah, 330--50; +Sanpro, 100--69; Sigo, 80--28; Sabungo, 60--33; Brang, 50--22; Sinnar, +80--34; Stang, 80--30; Samban, 60--34; Tubbia, 80--30; Goon, 40--25; +Bang, 40--12; Kuj-juss, 35--0; Lundu, 80--2; Sow, 200--100; Sarambo, +100--60; Bombak, 35--35; Paninjow, 80--40; Singe, 220--220; Pons, +20--0; Sibaduh, 25--25. Total, formerly, 1795--now, 849 families; +and reckoning eight persons to each family, the amount of population +will be, formerly, 14,360--now, 6792: giving a decrease of population +in ten years of 846 families, or 7568 persons! + +[29] Sir Edward Belcher has since surveyed Labuan in her majesty's +ship Samarang, and finding an excellent harbor, named it Victoria +Bay.--H. K. + +[30] Vide Mr. Wise's Plan (p. 362,3) for accelerating the communication +between Great Britain and China, viz. the conveyance of the mails from +Hong Kong to Suez (_via_ Ceylon) direct. Submitted to her majesty's +Government, 14th September, 1843; adopted 20th June, 1845. + +[31] The Borneo coal-mines would also serve to keep the Hong Kong, +Singapore, and Pinang stations supplied with fuel for Steam Vessels +carrying the Mails between Hong Hong and Suez direct. + +[32] Receiving at Ceylon the Outward Overland Mail from England, +and returning therewith to China. + +[33] Date of submitting the above proposed route and estimate to her +majesty's Government for consideration. + +[34] The MS. having been under water in the wreck of the Great +Liverpool steamer, this name and some others are illegible. + +[35] A sort of gong. + +[36] Tumbawong is a place they have deserted, or been forced to quit. + +[37] A head-house. + +[38] Gadong is a small Malay village on the Sadong, considerably +nearer the sea than the Bandar's village. + +[39] This occurred during Seriff Sahib's time; the Dyaks were +frightfully oppressed. + +[40] The goods brought down by Mr. Williamson were on a public trial +confiscated, and the parties concerned fined. These Dyaks from their +distance and timidity, were afraid to complain, but will in future +not be imposed upon. It would be a hopeless task trying to prevent +the Malays playing their tricks on the Dyaks; and the only chance +of freeing the Dyaks from these exactions is by inspiring them with +confidence. In Sarawak this has been done, and may easily be extended; +for the Dyak, though greatly depressed by a course of persecution, +I have always found ready to state his complaints whenever he has a +hope of redress. The Orong Kaya Pa Jampat of Mang-garut was freed of +the debt claimed by the Samarahan Pangara; and the other complaints +referred to my decision have been either rectified, or steps taken +to do justice, and to render the Dyak tribes of Sadong happy and +easy.--_Note by Mr. Brooke._ + + + + + + +End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of The Expedition to Borneo of H.M.S. Dido, by +Henry Keppel and James Brooke + +*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK EXPEDITION TO BORNEO *** + +***** This file should be named 22903.txt or 22903.zip ***** +This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: + http://www.gutenberg.org/2/2/9/0/22903/ + +Produced by Jeroen Hellingman and the Online Distributed +Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net (This book was +produced from scanned images of public domain material +from the Google Print project.) + + +Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions +will be renamed. + +Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no +one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation +(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without +permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, +set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to +copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to +protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project +Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you +charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you +do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the +rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose +such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and +research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do +practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is +subject to the trademark license, especially commercial +redistribution. + + + +*** START: FULL LICENSE *** + +THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE +PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK + +To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free +distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work +(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project +Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project +Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at +http://gutenberg.org/license). + + +Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic works + +1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to +and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property +(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all +the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy +all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession. +If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the +terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or +entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. + +1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be +used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who +agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few +things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works +even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See +paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement +and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. See paragraph 1.E below. + +1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation" +or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the +collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an +individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are +located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from +copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative +works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg +are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project +Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by +freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of +this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with +the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by +keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project +Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others. + +1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern +what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in +a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check +the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement +before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or +creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project +Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning +the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United +States. + +1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: + +1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate +access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently +whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the +phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project +Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, +copied or distributed: + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + +1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived +from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is +posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied +and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees +or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work +with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the +work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 +through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the +Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or +1.E.9. + +1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted +with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution +must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional +terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked +to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the +permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work. + +1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this +work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. + +1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this +electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without +prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with +active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project +Gutenberg-tm License. + +1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, +compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any +word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or +distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than +"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version +posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org), +you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a +copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon +request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other +form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. + +1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, +performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works +unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. + +1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing +access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided +that + +- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from + the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method + you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is + owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he + has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the + Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments + must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you + prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax + returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and + sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the + address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to + the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies + you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he + does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm + License. You must require such a user to return or + destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium + and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of + Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any + money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the + electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days + of receipt of the work. + +- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free + distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set +forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from +both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael +Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the +Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. + +1.F. + +1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable +effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread +public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm +collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain +"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual +property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a +computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by +your equipment. + +1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right +of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project +Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all +liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal +fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT +LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE +PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE +TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE +LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR +INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH +DAMAGE. + +1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a +defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can +receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a +written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you +received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with +your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with +the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a +refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity +providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to +receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy +is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further +opportunities to fix the problem. + +1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth +in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO +WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. + +1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied +warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. +If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the +law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be +interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by +the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any +provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions. + +1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the +trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone +providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance +with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production, +promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works, +harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, +that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do +or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm +work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any +Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause. + + +Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm + +Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of +electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers +including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists +because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from +people in all walks of life. + +Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the +assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's +goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will +remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure +and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations. +To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 +and the Foundation web page at http://www.pglaf.org. + + +Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive +Foundation + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit +501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the +state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal +Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification +number is 64-6221541. Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at +http://pglaf.org/fundraising. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent +permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. + +The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S. +Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered +throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at +809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email +business@pglaf.org. Email contact links and up to date contact +information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official +page at http://pglaf.org + +For additional contact information: + Dr. Gregory B. Newby + Chief Executive and Director + gbnewby@pglaf.org + + +Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation + +Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide +spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of +increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be +freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest +array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations +($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt +status with the IRS. + +The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating +charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United +States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a +considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up +with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations +where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To +SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any +particular state visit http://pglaf.org + +While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we +have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition +against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who +approach us with offers to donate. + +International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make +any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from +outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. + +Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation +methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other +ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. +To donate, please visit: http://pglaf.org/donate + + +Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. + +Professor Michael S. Hart is the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm +concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared +with anyone. For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project +Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support. + + +Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S. +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + + +Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility: + + http://www.gutenberg.org + +This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, +including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to +subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. |